UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA

LIBRARIES

COLLEGE iiBoAHi

<<

V
O \

-O
'

The Golden Age of American

Anthropology

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in

2011 with funding from

LYRASIS

IVIembers and Sloan Foundation

http://www.archive.org/details/goldenageofameriOOmead

The

GOLDEN AGE of AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGY

Selected and edited

with introduction and notes by

MARGARET MEAD
and

RUTH

L.

BUNZEL

GEORGE BRAZILLER

NEW YORK

1960

Copyright

1960 by Margaret Mead and Ruth L. Bunzel

All rights in this book are reserved. For information address the publisher, George Braziller, Inc., 215 Park Avenue South, New York 3, N. Y.

First Printing

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 60-11668

Printed in the United States of America

Acknowledgments
The
editors and publishers have made every effort to determine and credit the holders of copyright of the selections in this book. Any errors or omissions may be rectified in future volumes. For permission to use these selections, the editors and publisher make grateful acknowledgment to the following authors and publishers who reserve all rights to the matter printed:

From

THE DISCOVERY AND CONQUEST OF MEXICO

Copyright 1956 by Farrar, Straus and Cudahy.

by Bernal Diaz del

permission of the

Castillo.

By

publishers, Farrar, Straus

and Cudahy,
(Florentine

From

GENERAL HISTORY OF THE THINGS OF NEW SPAIN

J.

Codex) by Bernardino de Sahagun, translated by Arthur Charles E. Dibble. By permission of the University of Utah

O. Anderson and

Press.

From THE

CHEYENNE INDIANS

by George

Bird Grinnell. Copyright 1923

by

Yale University Press. By Permission of Yale University Press.

From MEMOIRS OF
and

THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY, ANTHROPOLOGICAL PAPERS, AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL
permission of

HISTORY. By
From

The American Museum of Natural

History,

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF SOUTHWESTERN ARCHAEOLOGY by A. V. Kidder. By permission of the R, S. Peabody Foundation, Phillips
THE CROW INDIANS
by Robert H, Lowie. (Farrar and Rinehart, 1935; by Rinehart.) By permission of Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc.
re-

Academy, Andover, Mass.

From
From

issued 1956

THE MIND OF PRIMITIVE by Franz Boas. Copyright 1911 and 1938 by the Macmillan Company. By permission of The Macmillan Company.

MAN

From RACE,

LANGUAGE AND CULTURE

by Franz Boas. Copyright 1940 by

The Macmillan Company, By permission of The Macmillan Company.

From INTERNATIONAL ENCYCLOPEDIA OF UNIFIED SCIENCE,

Vol.

I.

Copyright 1939 by The University of Chicago. "The Structure of Language" by Leonard Bloomfield. By permission of The University of Chicago Press.

From LANGUAGE: An

Introduction to the Study of Speech, by Edward Sapir. Copyright, 1921, by Harcourt, Brace and Company, Inc.; renewed, 1949, by Jean V. Sapir. By permission of Harcourt, Brace and Company, Inc.

From

(Revised Edition) by A. L. Kroeber. Copyright, 1923, 1948, by Harcourt, Brace and Company, Inc.; renewed, 1951, by A. K. Kroeber. By permission of Harcourt, Brace and Company.

ANTHROPOLOGY

From ENCYCLOPEDIA OF

THE SOCIAL SCIENCES edited by Seligman and Johnson, Vol. IV. Copyright 1932 by The Macmillan Company. "Social Organization" by Robert H. Lowie. By permission of The Macmillan Company. THE MICHIGAN ACADEMY OF SCIENCE, ARTS AND
by Eugene

From PAPERS OF

LETTERS

S. McCartney, Vol. XVIII. Copyright, 1933, by Graduate School, University of Michigan. "The Family as a Social Unit" by Robert H. Lowie. By permission of The University of Michigan Press.

edited

From

New
From

Introduction to the Anthropology of the World, by Clark Wissler. Third edition Copyright 1938 by Oxford University Press, Inc. By permission of Mrs. Clark Wissler.

THE AMERICAN INDIAN: An

THE NATURE OF CULTURE

University of Chicago.

By permission
Vol. IV, No.

by Alfred L. Kroeber. Copyright 1952 by The of The University of Chicago Press.

3, July 1931. "The Relation between Religion by John M. Cooper. By permission of The

From PRIMITIVE MAN,

and Morality

in Primitive Culture"

Catholic Anthropological Conference.

From CRASHING THUNDER: The Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian, by Paul Radin. Copyright, 1926, D. Appleton & Company. By permission of Doris Woodward Radin.

From

THE FOUNDATIONS OF EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY edited by Carl Murchison. "The Conflict and Survival of Culture" by Clark Wissler. By permission of Clark University Press.

Editor's

Note

WE HAVE SELECTED AS THE GOLDEN AGE OF AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGY THE PERIOD THAT began in 1880, when the Bureau of American Ethnology was just getting under way, and ended in 1920, before the post- World War I reorganization of university departments of anthropology. In the 1920's, a new generation began to undertake new kinds of research, some of it far afield in the South Seas and in Africa. We have confined our choices of individual anthropologists to those who were already productive before 1920, although some of the selections we have made were published later, especially the papers in Part Six, which foreshadows new theoretical developments. The preparation of this volume has been facilitated by the many colleagues who generously responded to our request for advice and suggestions. Limitations of space, generous though they are, necessitated heartbreaking omissions, as we struggled over which Sun Dance, which prophet, which ritual sacrifice or vision quest was to be included and which left out. The choice among those whose names stand as respected ancestral figures in some branch of anthropology was equally hard, as we tried and failed to find selections which would convey the contribution of a man like Albert Gallatin, statesman and diplomat, who has also been called the

"father of

American ethnology."

to find selections written in non-technical language, which were condensed to convey to the reader whole pieces of material or a whole point of view, and which at the same time gave the full tone of a scholar's work. As the work of the classical period received its impetus from research done on North American Indians, we have omitted those anthropologists whose work was done in other parts of the world and was not yet reflected in theory. The roster of names of those who have not been included is too long to recite. But it has been heartening to make a collection in which Alfred Kroeber, A. V. Kidder, and Leslie Spier provide the living links that anthropologists best understand to the works of their great
It

was necessary

sufficiently

contemporaries.

Contents
INTRODUCTION BY MARGARET MEAD
1

PART
INTRODUCTION BY RUTH
Columbus,
Cortes and

I.

EXPLORING THE NEW WORLD

BUNZEL
the Beginnings of

L.

14

EDWARD GAYLORD BOURNE

Ramon Pane and
Montezuma
American Anthropology
18

BERNAL DIAZ DEL CASTILLO

THE APPROACH TO THE CITY OF MEXICO THE MARKETS AND TEMPLES OF TLALTELOLCO
21 21 23

SAMUEL DE CHAMPLAIN
The Character and Customs of the Huron
29
35 35 38 39

MERIWETHER LEWIS
The Lewis and Clark Expedition THE SHOSHONE: THEIR WEAPONS AND HORSE GEAR THE CHINOOK: THEIR HOUSES THE CANOES OF THE NORTHWESTERN TRIBES THE COLUMBIA RIVER TRIBES COMMENTS ON THE POSITION OF WOMEN AND OLD PEOPLE

40
42

PART

IL

TRYING TO COPE WITH THE INDIANS

L.

INTRODUCTION BY RUTH

BUNZEL

46

BERNARDINO DE SAHAGUN
Aztec Beliefs and Practices THE FEAST OF TEZCATLIPOCA

CEREMONY FOR MAKING THE NEW FIRE THE MEANING OF THE DAYS THE EDUCATION OF A PRINCE PRAYER TO TEZCATLIPOCA BEFORE GOING TO WAR

47 48 48 49 52
53 55

THE JESUIT RELATIONS PAUL LE JEUNE

Notes on the Northern Tribes RELIGION OF THE ALGONQUAIN INDIANS ON THE LANGUAGE OF THE MONTAGNAIS SAVAGES

58
61

61

64
66

JACQUES MARQUETTE
The Character and Customs of
the Illinois

MATURIN LE PETIT
Concerning the Natchez THEIR TEMPLES THEIR GREAT CHIEFS

70 70
71
the

THOMAS JEFFERSON
On
the Character

and Capacities of

North American Indians

74 75
82

MEN OF GOOD WILL JOHN BACHMAN

The Doctrine of
the Unity of the Principles of Pure Science

Human Race Examined on

the

85

JOHN

G. E.

HECKEWELDER
89
vii

Indian Preachers and Prophets

VIU

CONTENTS

MANASSEH CUTLER A Frontier Mission

CHARGE BY REV. DR. CUTLER, AT THE ORDINATION OF REV. MR. STORY, PASTOR OF THE CHURCH AT MARIETTA, OHIO A NOTE ON THE ANTIQUITY OF THE OHIO MOUNDS AS SHOWN BY THE COUNT OF TREE RINGS

95 95 97

SPECULATIONS ON THE ORIGIN OF THE AMERICAN INDIAN CALEB ATWATER

Conjectures Respecting the Origin and History of the Authors of the Ancient Works in Ohio, <c.

100

102 106 106 107 109

112

JAMES ADAIR
The Cheerake Nation THEIR OPINION OF OUR METHODS OF WAR THEIR GAMES
THEIR GOVERNMENT

DEDICATED AMATEURS GEORGE CATLIN A Mandan Village on

LEWIS

the

Upper Missouri

115

H. League of the Iroquois PREFACE THE COUNCILS OF THE IROQUOIS TREATIES THE CRIMINAL CODE THE TREATMENT OF CAPTIVES

MORGAN

129 129 130 135 135 137 139 139 146 148

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

The Cheyenne Indians CHEYENNE CHILDHOOD THE TREATMENT OF MURDERERS The Disappearance of the Buffalo

PART

III.

GAINING UNDERSTANDING OF THE INDIANS

L.

INTRODUCTION BY RUTH

BUNZEL

152 156 158 163 168

GOVERNMENT-SPONSORED RESEARCH HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT

Nursery and Cradle Songs of the Forest Indian Prophets

LEWIS

H. General Observations Upon Systems of Relationships

MORGAN

THE UNITED STATES NATIONAL MUSEUM

OTIS
T.

179 180
191

MASON

WILLIAM

The Carrying of Children H. HOLMES The Origin of Ceramic Ornament

THE BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY: AREAL RESEARCH IN THE SOUTHWEST FRANK HAMILTON GUSHING
The Preparation of
the Cornfield

203

207 212
215

MATILDA COXE STEVENSON

Zuni Origin Myth: The Origin of Corn
J.

WALTER FEWKES
Hopi Snake Washing

Contents

ix

WASHINGTON MATTHEWS The Night Chant: A Navaho Ceremony COLLABORATION WITH INDIAN ANTHROPOLOGISTS ALICE C. FLETCHER and FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
The Omaha Tribe: Ceremonies for Children INTRODUCTION OF THE OMAHA CHILD TO THE COSMOS INTRODUCTION OF THE CHILD INTO THE TRIBE

220
227

229 229
23

FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
Rite of the Chiefs: Prayer for Painting the

Body

237

ALICE

CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER
A
Pawnee Ceremony
239

The Hako:

FRANZ BOAS
The Central Eskimo: Domestic Occupations and Amusements

246 247
251

JOHN

R.

SWANTON
257 258 263 269

Types of Haida and Tlingit Myths

JAMES MOONEY
The Ghost-Dance Religion THE DOCTRINE OF THE GHOST DANCE THE CEREMONY THE SIOUX OUTBREAK OF 1890

PART

IV. PRESERVING THE REMNANTS OF INDIAN CULTURES: THE ROLE OF THE PRIVATE MUSEUMS
L.

INTRODUCTION BY RUTH

BUNZEL

276

ALFRED VINCENT KIDDER

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

279 280
296 297
305 306 318

ALFRED

M.

TOZZER

Chronological Aspects of American Archaeology

FRANZ BOAS
The Decorative Art of
the

North

Pacific

Coast

THE JESUP NORTH PACIFIC EXPEDITION WALDEMAR BOGORAS

The Chukchee SHAMANISM LOVE INCANTATIONS VOLUNTARY DEATH

320 320 327 328

331

WALDEMAR JOCHELSON
Yukaghir Picture Writing and Loveletters

SALVAGING THE ETHNOLOGY OF THE NORTHERN PLAINS CLARK WISSLER

The Social Life of the Blackfoot Indians HERALDRY AND PICTLTRE WRITING MEDICINE BUNDLES

340
344 344 349 362 362 373 377

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

The Crow Indians

CROW INDIAN WARFARE WORLD VIEW OF THE CROW

J.

R.

WALKER
The Sun Dance of the Oglala
The Sun Dance of the Plains Indians: Comparison with the Tribal Ceremonial System

LESLIE SPIER
392

CONTENTS

PART

V.

BUILDING A SCIENCE OF MAN IN AMERICA: THE CLASSICAL PERIOD IN AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGY, 1900-1920
L.

INTRODUCTION BY RUTH

BUNZEL

400
403 404
the

FRANZ BOAS
The Mental Traits of Primitive Man Report on an Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of
United States

412 432 433

439 440

ALES HRDLICKA
Origin of the American Aborigines

EDWARD

SAPIR

The Grammarian and His Language

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
The Structure of Language

450
451

FRANZ BOAS
Introduction: International Journal of

American

Linguistics

461

EDWARD
ALFRED
ROBERT

SAPIR
L.

Language and Literature

KROEBER
LOWIE

470 477
478

The Nature of Culture

H.
Social Organization The Family as a Social Unit

485 486 495

ALEXANDER GOLDENWEISER
The
Principle of Limited Possibilities in the

Development of Culture

508 509

CLARK WISSLER
New World
Origins

520
527 539

ALFRED
ELSIE

L.

KROEBER
546 547 552
in Primitive Culture

Patterns Cultural Intensity and Climax

CLEWS PARSONS
in Crisis

Ceremonialism Nativity Myth at Laguna and Zuhi

Holding Back

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

The Relations Between Religion and Morality
560

PART
INTRODUCTION BY RUTH
L.

VI.

NEW HORIZONS
574
577

BUNZEL

FRANZ BOAS
The Aims of Anthropological Research

CLARK WISSLER
The
Conflict

and Survival of Cultures

592 602

PAUL RADIN
The Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian

EDWARD
ALFRED

SAPIR
to

The Contributions of Psychiatry

in Society

an Understanding of Behavior

610
617 621
*

L. Values as a Subject of Natural Science Inquiry Is Western Civilization Disintegrating or Reconstituting

KROEBER

SUGGESTIONS FOR FURTHER READING

629

Introduction
by Margaret Mead
SCIENCE KNOWS NO NATIONAL BOUNDARIES AND, HOWEVER VIVID SUDDEN Steps forward may be, is steadily cumulative. The task of selecting for a golden age of American anthropology might therefore seem to be an impossible one, for the very phrasing is national and suggests a time in the past to which later and lesser ages should look back with nostalgia. But the attempt to place this one of the human sciences in the same category with literature, history, and philosophy can be an occasion for delineating

some
and

of the peculiarities of anthropology as, in

some

respects, a science,

in others, a humanity.

Anthropology deals with human beings living in different societies, with houses and parliamentary systems, temples and religious behefs, pottery borders and art styles, poems and languages and with the processes ^physical, mental, and social through which these
the products of these societies

products are created. While anthropologists seek for ways of describing

man
Uved

that

wiU apply

to all cultures at all times in history, anthropology

remains closely bound to the hving detail of the way special

at given times

men have

However abstract the statement that is made about the diverse versions of the Sun Dance, the abstraction is never wholly separated from the description of a real Sun Dance among the
and
places.

Oglalla Sioux as
tribution.

Walker observed it or from Spier's analysis of its disThe precious concrete reference is never lost. Real Indians hunt
life.

real buffalo, or stare at the sun until they fall unconscious, or fast in the

lonely wilderness seeking a guardian spirit for

So anthropological

theory has thrived

upon accounts

of the Uves of particular primitive peoples

studied at a given period by a given group of explorers, traders or missionaries,

and, later

still,

professional anthropologists.

American anthropology

has been built on detailed studies of the living behavior, the buried rem-

and the remembered customs of the American Indians. The huge edifices of Yucatan and Mexico, the unforeseeable combinations of bravery, savagery, and
nants of earlier periods, the vanishing complicated languages,
spirituality of the simpler tribes of the

East Coast, the fantastic unexpected-

up the image of a killer whale have all been part of the thinking of American anthropologists. Had there been no American Indians, anthropology ultimately would have been taught and perhaps elaborated in the United States on the basis of German,
ness of the
artist slices

way a Kwakiutl

2
British,

MARGARET MEAD

and French models that were developed as Europeans struggled produce order from the accounts brought back by those few travelers who sought colonial enterprise in faraway lands. But American anthroto

pology would not have been the same.

The actual presence of the Indians appealed deeply to the characteristiAmerican interest in phenomena, to the Amercan preference for the empirical and the inductive. Furthermore, American Indians also had been immigrants to the great empty continents of the New World where, like later European immigrants, they began a life without historical precedents. In the imagination of those who came from Europe, these earUer dwellers became a different kind of ancestor. Having broken away from the kinship of blood and the continuity of a long tradition which had contributed so much to the European sense of identity, Americans were able to develop a new kind of identity. And in the Americas, men of another race, who thousands of years ago had separated from the Old World cultural stream before the wheel, the alphabet, or the working of metals had reached them in Asia were able to contribute to this new identity because they had hunted in the same hills, had grown maize in the same soil as the
cally

newcomers.

It has,

indeed, been said of Americans that they have sub-

Where Europeans derive both a sense of continuity and a sense of contrast from the steady contemplation of a historical tradition that reaches back to Greece and Rome, Americans a great proportion of whose ancestors were simple and unlettered men with very little share in the Great Tradition have had to build a new identity based not on their own past on this continent but on their growing sense of what men of all races and aU creeds, whose immediate ancestors were peasants
stituted space for time.

or savages, princes or statesmen, might "bring forth

upon

this continent."

So a golden age of American anthropology falls naturally into the period when the young science could still draw on the Uving memories of Indians and often on their stiU living practices and could use these to illumine the records of the early travelers. Very possibly, also, the virtual destruction of the American Indians, which began in the 16th century, added to the sense of ethical conviction with which the young science of anthropology proclaimed the psychic unity of mankind, the essential dignity and comparability of each culture. In their thinking about culture anthropologists
included equally peoples

who

lived in houses

made
literate

of earth or stone, skin

or bricks, snow or marble, those

who were

and those who knew

nothing of writing, those whose gods were local representatives of the

power

that lay in the universe

and those who served a deity who was wor-

shiped by millions within a single canon of belief and practice.

individual

During the period when systematic anthropological field work began, American Indians became the responsible collaborators of those
attempted to understand their disappearing culture. Later individual

who

American Indians made occasional pilgrimages to our great museums

Introduction

where

their sacred pipes

through the efforts of those

time a few of their
culture, but others

and sacred medicine bundles had been preserved who found the old ways valuable. At the same young men pushed on to become proficient in the new
the majority

sank

into apathy, fenced within bits of

life and out maneuvered on the morrow. As

land which were inadequate to support their ancient ways of

of which they were only too Ukely to be

Wissler said:

As we look back upon the long and tortuous career of man in the New World, comprehend his crude equipment as he first set foot upon the land, and pass in review his later achievements, we cannot but regret that the end came
so suddenly.

the setthng of the

For Europeans, the American Indian has been the romantic symbol of American continent. For Americans, the struggle with the Indians remains the epic of conquest, the human symbol of the strangeness, the distances, the dangers, and the unpredictabihty of the New World. The struggle was shaped by the primary emphasis on land. Land, not labor, was the key to the expansion of Eiuropeans in America north of
During the early days of exploration, conquest, and colonization, when and soldiers all participated in the as noble savages, struggle, there emerged diverse images of the Indians
adventurers, trappers, missionaries,

Mexico.

or as treacherous, cruel varmints, or as children of nature specially related

untamable and heroic, or cowardly and cruel. The this early group had a two-fold image of the Indians, for they saw them both as the carriers of priceless vanishing records of human potentiaUties and as the victims of a historical process which seemed all the more wasteful because they themselves experienced so intensely the complexity and the intricacy of the Indian cultures. Humanitarians lament the spectacle of the reservation Indian, riddled with tuberculosis, eking out a miserable existence on grudging federal rations, debauched or apathetic, withdrawing further from rather than becoming
to the natural world,

anthropologists

who succeeded

more adjusted

to

white civiUzation. This spectacle was far more vivid

to anthropologists than to casual humanitarians

who were concerned

with

Indian rights and had a sentimental view of Indian ceremonial. For

anthropologists realized just
the balance between

how dependent Indian cultures had been on men and land, weapons and quarry, sun and rain and

corn, and they recognized that in the meeting of two cultural systems so

and point of view, the Indian cultures had no chance of survival. American anthropologists, when they took sides, were
contrasting in technology

on the

side of the Indians

and did not become involved

in efforts to reduce

Indians to orderly conformity.

Nor

did they specialize in teaching govern-

ment

officials

how

to achieve this

aim

as, in

varying degrees, European

anthropologists did in the case of other native peoples governed

by the

4
English, the

MARGARET MEAD
Germans, the French, and the Dutch. Nevertheless, they
first

recognized the essential hopelessness of the situation. Given the tools and
the ideas that existed in the
half of the 20th century, the Indians
live

were

doomed even though they might

the

on

as physical types, stripped of all

complex beauty of

their

aboriginal cultures. Appreciation of these

cultures has continued to grow, but despite the greater sophistication of

attempts at transformation in the second quarter of the century, the sense

of

doom

has only deepened. American anthropologists, their conscience

quickened by the sight of the irremediable plight of the Indians, have

directed their attention to questions of racial equality

and the problems of

other racial and ethnic minorities in the United States and have attempted

combat racist theories around the world by documenting the extent to which man is what his culture makes him. Study of the Indians contributed to the moral fervor and hopefulness that went into the dehneation of man as a culture-building animal, belonging to one species with common potento
tialities

waiting only for the appropriate historical situation to blossom.

But the Indians themselves have not been the beneficiaries. Only more recently have anthropologists thrown themselves into the arduous and unrewarding task of trying to rescue these peoples who have hved for
several generations in a situation of cultural disintegration while
still

cling-

ing to the last shreds of their cultural identity.

tachment the Indians

American anthropology treated with dewhom they built up a great body of ethnographic fact and basic cultural theory. In doing so they established a tradition of objectivity which later could coexist with a new style of anthropology with discipUned subjective identification and commitment to immediate human ends, as was foreshadowed in Ruth
of the golden age of

The men

whom

they studied and around

Benedict's Patterns of Culture.

There
it

is

another sense in which anthropology must, perhaps more than

other sciences, be seen as part of the particular national period to which

belongs. The most abstract developments in science are, of course, dependent on the climate of opinion of the age; discoveries can be made too

optimum contribution. Medical knowledge languishes where individual human beings are not valued. The principles of mechanics find little expression in labor-saving machinery where human slaves are cheap and plentiful. Even more deeply affected are those disciplines the subject matter of which is human behavior. In the distinctively American chmate of opinion in which anthropology in this country developed, an important part was played by an emphasis on the unique and admirable quaUties of the United States. In its beginnings, evaluation of the place of the Indians in human history and in the divine scheme was compromised by the exigencies of colonization, the problem of slavery, and the vigorous assertiveness of the polemicists who defended the emerging American culture; at the same time there was a curious indifference to
early or too late for
in a society

Introduction
the findings of African

and Oceanic explorers and to the

flurry of discus-

sion which they set off in Europe.

Most

of the early scholars were

is

Old

Americans and, despite some wider sophistication, what

about
this

most

striking

period

is its

provincialism.

When American
the classic period

anthropology began to emerge as a science,

to

dence appeared of a distinctively American chmate of opinion. The

from 1880

1920

were about evenly

new evimen of

divided between
particular

old Americans,

and
after

lineage,

who were typically self-conscious about a and new Americans, immigrants who came
of experience of a

name
the

to this country

some period
finally

European culture and

for

whom

attainment of an American identity was a self-conscious and urgent aim,

which was
scholar

focused by World

War

who had

finished his university

I. Franz Boas settled here work and had completed his

as a
first

field investigations.

Robert Lowie

left

Vienna

as a child, but the

memory

tied

was a Canadian citizen. Alexander Goldenweiser spent his school days in Russia and enlivened his seminars with tales of waiters in Russian railway stain

him closely to German Germany and reared in

scholarship

all his life.

Edward

Sapir was born

the United States; for a long period he

tions bearing trays laden with delectable foods.

Anthropology, a new science, welcomed the stranger.

As

a science

which accepted the psychic unity of mankind, anthropology was kinder to women, to those who came from distant disciplines, to members of minority groups in general (with American Indians assuming a special position as both the victims of injustice and the carriers of a precious and vanishing knowledge), to the "over-mature," the idiosyncratic, and the capriciously gifted or experienced, to refugees from political or rehgious oppression. Elsie Clews Parsons, a woman of wealth who pioneered in new investigations on the effect of culture on women, could be herself and drop the pseudonym of John Main under which, as a sociologist, she had written about ceremonial chastity. La Flesche, the Omaha Indian,
recorded not only the ceremonies of his
as well. Jochelson

own people but those of the Osage and Bogoras, in Czarist Russia, were recruited to work
among
the Siberian tribes.

during their political exile

This professional tradition of liberaUty has not been complete or unblemished. There were universities where anthropology was
still

treated as

an appropriate occupation for wealthy amateurs, where penniless graduate students were advised to marry money or get out of anthropology. There were anthropologists who objected to Boas' custom of bringing to lunch
his secretaries,

budding anthropologists who could take shorthand. The

large

names in the roster of distinguished anthropologists was sometimes inveighed against by the less successful members of the profession. Women have been made more welcome than in other professions, but not unequivocally. Racist doctrines of a refined and limited sort have occasionally cropped up, and equally unjustified romantic attempts
of Jewish

number

6
to obliterate race or to

MARGARET MEAD
deny the reality of constitutional differences have But on the whole the tradition estabUshed in the

marred the
first

later scene.

quarter of this century

beings,

that anthropologists treat

human

beings as

human

members

of one species, inheritors of cultures of different

adequacy and complexity but of equal dignity ^has stood. In troubled times when advocacy of racial equality has been tarred as evidence of communism, the professional status of the anthropologist has been almost as clear as that of the priest or doctor, in whom friendship and association with members of other races has not been politically suspect. During the post-Civil War period, the same assertive patriotism which
earlier
all

had led Jefferson to defend the Indian in the course of defending American men and animals against Buffon's accusation of ecological

found expression both in the growth of national institutions like Bureau of American Ethnology and the Smithsonian Institution and in a rising claim for the uniqueness of American culture. This assertiveness vis-a-vis Europe and the blaze of activity during the setthng of the West merged imperceptibly into the isolationism of the early 20th century. In anthropology this isolationism took the form of insistence on the independent development of the high civiUzations of the Americas. In their publications it is true that the advocates of total independence remained cautious and reasonable. Both Tozzer and Boas recognized the possibility of occasional, intermittent contacts between the Old World and the New, via Greenland or across the Pacific, in addition to the accepted theory that very primitive peoples had migrated slowly across the Bering Strait. Nevertheless the idea of a separately developing modern American culture was extended to the American Indian high civilizations and added fuel to the fires of controversy kindled by the theories of Graebner in Germany, who postulated the existence of old cultural horizons which included such isolated areas as Tasmania and Tierra del Fuego, and the alternative theories of the romantic English school of Perry and Ehot Smith, who believed that a single originating civilization in Egypt had been carried around the world by the "Children of the Sun." Young men were frowned upon for suggesting origins outside the Americas for a style of art or
inferiority

the

architecture; violent

single design represented a

isolationist

arguments raged over the question of whether a macaw or an elephant. The strength of this feeling can only be measured today. In 1949, at the Interna-

tional Congress of Americanists held in

New

York, similar suggestions

about small intermittent contacts with the high civihzations of Asia roused hardly a flicker of controversy. By this time isolationism was in echpse in
public
life

and

in anthropology.

The concentration of American anthropologists on Indians whom Europeans had never seen and knew about only through extremely romantic fiction had one important consequence. American anthropology developed in a way that had very little effect in Europe either on specifically anthro-

Introduction
pological thought or

on areas of

social science

with the understanding of

ture

human

behavior.

was fully realized, a generation of them European-born and well versed in under the leadership of Franz Boas to detailed empirical research. Their intention was to rescue the past and document the differences between one between the Blackfoot and the Crow, the Zurii and culture and another the Hopi, the Kwakiutl and the Tlingit. Seen through the words of its old men and women, each tribe was explored as a whole until the central pattern emerged, and the store of material and immaterial practices was analyzed to show what had been borrowed and what had been lent and how the pattern of creative readaptation of cultural materials had in each case been accomplished. Though Boas had been trained as a physicist, he was free of the wearying direct modeling on the physical sciences that has bedeviled so many men in their attempts to be "scientific." The work of a generation was dominated by his insistence that only by unflagging industry could the data be collected from which it might be possible to begin to draw conclusions. In their choice of problems he and his students remained in lively awareness of the grand schemes and blanket solutions that were being proposed in Europe. In his seminars before World War I, it was a commonplace for Boas to give the first reference in German, the second in some other language, and only the third in English. The American group struggled with the ideas of Ratzel, Tylor, Graebner, Crawley, Van Gennep, Durkheim, Freud, and Levy-Bruhl. But they did so in the context of the most minute ethnographic discussions in which the counters might be the shapes of Eskimo needlecases or the differences in the proportions of painted oblongs on parfleches. The materials which anthropologists collected as they sat patiently taking down word by word the broken memories of old men, foreshadowed in their meticulousness the attention that is given today to exactly who said what, when, and to whom. Steeped in field work they could use the details from the cultures of other peoples, and fragments of African, Asian, and Oceanic behavior crowd American discussions of anthropological theory. But this was a one-way process. Boas might write indefatigably about the mind of primitive man; Freud and Piaget continued to draw on the armchair fantasies of Wundt and Levy-Bruhl. In 1897, the Jesup Expedition set out from the American Museum of Natural History to examine evidence of similarities among the peoples of Siberia and the Northwest Coast and to throw Ught on the origins of the American Indian. A year later, in 1898, the Torres Strait Expedition set out from Cambridge University to examine, with the help of psychologists, relationships and contrasts in the cultures and behavior of a group of New Guinea peoples. Once the anthropologists were in the field, English and American anthropology began to develop along parallel lines. But

concerned more widely Once the significance of culAmerican anthropologists, half of European languages, settled down

MARGARET MEAD
MaUnowski came

a genuine convergence was established only in the late 1920's,

cliffe-Brown and
lingered
to this country.

when RadArmchair theorizing

on even longer

center of training for future Americanists.

mans

in their

Sweden, Nordenskiold provided a The early industry of the Gergreat colonial empire was cut short by the loss of their
in France. In

I, when a lone field anthropologist working on Guinea became the object of an Australian expeditionary force. There were ardent Americanists among later German field workers in South America, but they had little contact with North American

colonies in

World War

the Sepik River in

New

anthropology.

Thus the footnotes of America's golden age writers are studded with European works, but they themselves had less impact abroad. Only Morgan, writing at an earlier period on problems of "communism" and concerned with the development of a broad, comparative evolutionary scheme, caught the imagination of Engels. In this way Morgan's work became incorporated in the views which radical and Uberal Europeans held about man. His proposed scheme of early promiscuity, matriliny, and finally patriliny (later elaborated by Marxist theory into the propertyoriented type of marriage of contemporary European cultures) stiU haunts the pages of much psychoanalytic theorizing and, by a historical accident, became an article of faith in the Soviet Union. In the central concept of culture as it was developed by Boas and his students, human beings were viewed as dependent neither on instinct nor on genetically transmitted specific capabilities but on learned ways of life that accumulated slowly through endless borrowing, readaptation, and innovation. In their thinking, American anthropologists drew on field studies of the Indian and also on the work of such students as Tylor, in England, and Ratzel, in Germany. But the concept of culture penetrated only very gradually into the thought of European students of behavior. Even today the French find a certain difl&culty in translating the s in "patreferences to
terns of culture," for in their view there
is

only one contemporary pattern

groundwork was being American thought itself was not much affected. In 1922, when Goldenweiser pubUshed the first American textbook of American anthropology, in which he included a description of five primitive cultures, and entitled the book Early Civilization, there were cries of outraged fury because he placed the ways of savage peoples in the same context with our own. Other disciplines retained their outmoded representations of "primitive man," sometimes picturing "him" as prelogical and incapable of logical thought, sometimes describing how "he" belonged to a horde dominated by an old man, or worshiped fertility mother-goddesses, or lived in a group which held all property in common in a state of paradisical primitive communism. Only belatedly have students of human behavior become willing to see the ways of life of each people as variations on universal cultural themes, in
of high civiUzation. In fact, at the time that the
laid,

Introduction

9
dif-

which our progressive control over nature has provided the means for
complexity in art or religion, grammar or

ferent levels of energy use but has not necessarily resulted in greater

human

relations.

Yet

it is

just here, in a recognition of the

uniqueness and wholeness of

each culture, that anthropology meets the traditional preoccupations of the

humanities.

The

arts of primitive peoples, while interesting theoretically

and sometimes

aesthetically arresting,

do not produce the consciously

cre-

ated masterpieces of the great civilizations.

Among

preliterate

peoples,

composers and poets work within traditional styles and contribute anonymously to their uniqueness. It is rather primitive cultures as whole aesthetic compositions that

compare dramatically with the more individualized

work

of great artists, poets, and musicians in the Great Tradition. Ameri-

can anthropologists in the classic period treated the specific culture of each Indian tribe in its uniqueness and also showed how, in certain respects, all of

culture, or

them could be seen as versions of North American Indian American Indian culture, or, at the widest extension, as primi-

tive versions of

human

culture. In so

doing they laid the basis for a new

relationship of anthropology to the humanities.

tribe as a whole, in

There has been another consequence of the approach to each given which physical type, language, the remains of earlier
all

periods buried in the ground, and the living culture are

gether.

treated to-

from economics to biology, working within the parochial framework of our Euro-American tradition, have taken for granted many aspects of man's life. Consumption has been discussed without details of fur and lace, carrots and caviar, family income
sciences

The other human

without history, sex habits without language, color recognition as

if

it

depended only on biology, heredity as if it were a matter of gene pools alone and not also of the rules of mating. Some aspects of Uving usually many aspects of living have been regarded as so much a part of the milieu that it has seemed neither necessary nor relevant to speU them out. The position of the anthropologist has been quite different. Because the physique of a people threw light on their history, because without a written language their past culture had to be inferred from bits of pots and bones, because the language had to be learned in all its strangeness, be-

cause the reader of a monograph could not immediately identify the re-

words like pemmican or tapir, sago or sennit, the anthropologist had to present the complete human texture of historical man with a given
ferents of

physique in a given environment.

This has been the peculiar contribution of American anthropology. In
other countries the study of the measurements of the

human

skeleton

had

been separated from the study of growth; both had been divorced from the study of human institutions; and this in turn had not been related to the study of the structure of languages. For a time it seemed that something
similar might take place in the United States. In the 1920's, students of

10
Boas, Kroeber and Tozzer
the
felt that their

MARGARET MEAD
teachers

had been able

to master

new knowledge new

science.

of the relations between man's physique, heredity,

it emerged because they had grown up with But would we ourselves be able to do so? Would not anthropology, like other sciences, fragment into separate specialties whose practitioners could not communicate with one another? So far this fear has not been realized. The vast panorama which Boas sketched out in 1932 in his discussion of the aims of anthropological research is stiU the heritage of American anthropology.

speech, customs, and past as

the

In planning this volume

within a wider context. Part

is

we have placed our classical period, 1880-1920, One of the book. Exploring the New World,

devoted to the explorers and conquistadors, the wonders and horrors of

first

the

encounters, the great civilization of the Aztecs laid in ruins, and

the strangeness of the simpler Indians to the North.

In Part Two, Trying to

Cope with

the Indians, are accounts

by those

who had
soldiers,

to deal with the Indians as traders or missionaries, statesmen or

and who struggled with problems of culture difference and the meaning of race. Throughout this period problems of conscience and practicality accompany the vivid descriptions written by men who were oriented
to action.

Part Three, Gaining Understanding of the Indians: Research by the

Federal Government, takes up the task of rescuing records. The contribution of this period

was a hospitable

series of great olive-green

volumes in

which an

infinite

wealth of strange detail found publication. In the 1920's,

still

young and impecunious anthropologists

could write to the Bureau and

receive a set of these enormous, impressive volumes which provided a

substantial fund of scholarship for their scantily furnished rooms.

In Part Four, Preserving the Remnants of Indian Culture: The Role of

the Private

Museums, we show how

the organization of voluntary effort

shaped the future development of American anthropology. So, as the

relics of the

Indians were collected in the American

Museum

History, the tradition

was established by which anthropology

complete

of Natural

with

tipis,

broidery

became

stone age axes, carved ivory figures, and porcupine quill

em-

part of natural history rather than a separate part of

living creatures of the

man's history from which his kinship with other

earth

had been

carefully shorn.

We

did not group primitive art with the

art of the

Great Tradition, primitive tools with the history of technology,

musical instruments with the history
of

primitive

music.

Instead,

the

records of evolutionary changes in

human

culture, accomplished

by the

new mechanism
rest of the

of the transmission of learned

and cumulated behavior,

tipi

were displayed together with the evidences of biological evolution in the

Uving world from which

man had

emerged. The

and the

Introduction
earth lodge, the

mound and

the fort were presented not as crude forms

of the "houses" of

Greek and

Roman and

Renaissance men, but as comthe beaver

parable and incomparable with the ant

nest.

hill,

dam, the

oriole

Man was shown to be

part.

a part of nature, although a dramatically special

the development of his brain,

and unique

The models which showed

his divergence into different physical stocks, the increasing

cunning of his

opposable thumbs could be seen side by side with his

first

attempts at tool

making and picture writing and the

relationship to an expanding cosmos.

ritual objects

ing nature

with

Man
skills

his precious

new

which represented his and man transcendof teaching and learning that
in nature

made
last

were kept
laid the

it

possible for any

together.

new

generation to stand on the shoulders of the

Part Five, Building a Science of

Man

in

America, includes the writers

groundwork of anthropological theory. Because they worked inductively and empirically, always relating their analyses to their voluminous materials, the magnitude of their achievement has not always been recognized. In their work, the development of theory paralleled the systematic collection of materials captured from the memories of the Indian peoples. The museum collections and the field sketches and diagrams helped to preserve the sense of the visual quality of these cultures that had

who

by now almost disappeared. The

earlier ethnographers

collected, often without understanding a

had looked and word and without any systematic

and compared. Their theory
earlier travelers' accounts

frame of reference. Under Boas' leadership, the anthropologists of the

classical period listened, analyzed, organized,

grew from the material and with

it.

Without the
quills,

and the gleaming surface of the porcupine

in the

or the soft sole of a

worn

moccasin, or the spread-out contents of medicine bundles that were kept

museums, the great volumes of words

first

that

poured in torrents from

the pens of the

generation of scientific ethnographers

their descrip-

tions sprinkled with phonetic renderings of unintelligible Indian

words

would have been even less accessible to the next generation of students, those who, with the anthropologist's traditional delight in kinship models,
described themselves as the generation of grandchildren.

carefully

But the groundwork of American anthropology was laid down in these and lovingly recorded words the precise words used by Indian

informants and the steadily growing, abstract cross-cultural vocabulary

of the anthropologist.

New

generations have added to these words, and

because a living science looks to the future as

added, in Part Six,

weU

as to the past,

we have

New

Horizons, a brief glimpse at more recent years.

the nature of science, once

Unlike

art or music, in

which the great culminating periods hold no further

development,
it is

possibilities for straight line

the lines

are laid down, to develop continuously with ever-increasing

acceleration.

For anthropology

particularly,

we must hope

that with better

12

MARGARET MEAD

communication among tiie great nations of the world and with traditional and preliterate peoples entering the scientific tradition, we may profit by
the culturally unique, but not culturally limited, insights of the
tures of the world.

many

cul-

AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY NEW YORK, NEW YORK May 10, 1960

PART

EXPLORING THE

NEW WORLD

Introduction
by Ruth L. Bunzel
THE DISCOVERY OF AMERICA BROUGHT EUROPEANS FACE TO FACE WITH the Savage. Not the organized Negro kingdoms of West Africa versed in
the arts

and knowing

in the

ways of

trade,

who

sold slaves

and ivory

secured by means which the white traders had no need to

cruel secret societies were kept well hidden

know and whose

from prying eyes. Not even nomadic horsemen of the Asiatic steppes whose culture was familiar to the learned from ancient writings and whose way of life was not too different from that of the Old Testament. No, the natives whom the Europeans first encountered in the Indies were, indeed, naked savages who covthe

ered their bodies with paint instead of clothes,

slept in

who

lived in flimsy huts,

hammocks, ate strange foods and practiced weird and gruesome rites; who spoke no language known to civilized man and with whom communication was impossible until they had been taken captive and instructed. So strange were they that it is not surprising that Europeans wondered whether they were members of the human race or some different and lower species. This question was promptly settled by the Church, which decreed that they were indeed human and might receive the Sacraments. But the theory that, though belonging to the genus Hominidae, they were nevertheless of a different species, lingered on into the 19th century. (See Bachman on the unity of the human race, p. 85.)

As Bourne points out, Columbus, an Italian in the employ of Spain, was the first American anthropologist. Perhaps because Spain had but recently emerged from centuries of conflict with the Moors and had not yet expelled her Moorish minority and Spaniards were therefore sensitive to cultural differences and were aware of their importance, or perhaps because wherever they went they were accompanied by friars or monks fuU of the missionary zeal of a Church flushed with recent victory, who yet valued scholarship and learning; perhaps because they understood out of their Moorish experience that one had to understand people in order effectively to control them whatever the cause, wherever the Spaniards went they made systematic and faithful records of the cultures of the conquered people, often employing converted natives as informants or scribes (Sahagun's literate informants and Ixtilxochitl in Mexico, Gar-

cilaso de la 14

Vega

in Peru)

Exploring the

New World

15

Cortes' letters to Charles

describing the conquest of

Mexico day by

day contain a wealth of concrete detail on native customs and possess a

literary elegance that

contemporary anthropologists might well envy. These Spanish chronicles are the first anthropological documents to come out of the New World. Their veracity has never been questioned (the sites of
the temples described by Bernal Diaz can be identified; the gold statues

and gold plates from the walls of the Inca palaces did indeed reach Spain as part of the Crown's share of the treasure), and they have an inimitable flavor of fresh wonder and sophisticated appreciation punctuated with
revulsion at

some

of the horrors they witnessed.

More famous even than

Story of the Conquest of
the Conquest,

Cortes' letters

is

Bernal Diaz del Castillo's True

New

Spain. Bernal Diaz

was born

in that im-

poverished western frontier of Spain which gave so

many

of her sons to
ofiicial.

He was
no

a "gentleman," the son of a modest

He

is

often described as a "blunt soldier" but he

crimination, of
insignificant learning
left

was obviously a man

if

of dis-

and of considerable

not over-

whelming

piety.

He

Spain in 1514, being then about twenty-two years

of age. He went first to Cuba in the company of Pedro Arias de Avila. The Conquistadores had already fallen out among themselves; Bernal
left

Cuba, and

after three years of

doing "nothing of note" joined Cortes

in

1517, After several abortive attempts to land on the mainland of

Mexico the company finally effected a landing at Cempoala, where Cortes burned his ships to prevent any of his company from mutinying and seizing them. They then began the march inland. Bernal Diaz fought bravely and loyally through the battles and the dreadful siege of Mexico. He lived more than eighty-four years and died in Santiago de Guatemala. His History was written when he was an old man, having "gained nothing of value to leave to my children and descendants but this my true story, and they will presently find out what a wonderful story it is."
Bernal Diaz
their
it

first

sounds that note of sadness that

is

to recur so often in

later accounts, as

he stands looking across the gardens of Iztapalapa, with

water gate opening on the lake: "I say again that I stood looking at and thought that never in the world would there be discovered other lands such as these, for at that time there was no Peru, nor any thought of it. Of all these wonders that I then beheld today all is overthrown and
nothing
left

lost,

standing,"

The

first

settlers in

New

England and Virginia

records of the aborigines they encountered.

ships

left no such shining The small bands of Indians

along the Atlantic coast retreated to the forest at the approach of the

and emerged only

to raid

and kiU

or so the settlers thought.

And

was wiped out in the early days by an Indian war party, and deaths from ambush and on lonely farms were not uncommon. The English settlers brought along no
Virginia settlement

indeed they had cause to fear.

One

16

RUTH

L.

BUNZEL

learned friars to conduct research, only hard-working elders

who

toiled like

everyone else to keep the struggling settlements

18th century that there
is

alive. It is

not until the

any evidence of interest in the Indians on the

part of the British colonists.

The French did very much better along these lines. The country of was just as bleak, just as sparsely populated, the Indians no less warlike. Perhaps because they came in the first instance
their first explorations

not to possess the land but to trade, they were able to establish friendly
relations with the northern tribes.

They brought beads and

steel knives

and cloth and muskets but above

lished along the St.

all

brandy, which they exchanged for the

skins of animals. This trade suited the Indians; the trading posts estab-

Lawrence and the Great Lakes and, later, along the became centers of social life for Indians within a radius of hundreds of miles, where men from different tribes could meet peaceably and where tribal hostihties were temporarily laid aside. Not that the French settlements were without their tragedies. As late as 1659 the settlement of Lachine on the St. Lawrence was wiped out by an Iroquois war party. However, it was not their Indians who massacred the settlers; they were the victims of the unremitting warfare between the Hurons and the Iroquois. The massacre at Natchez was of a different order; it was a planned revolt, more like the Pueblo Rebellion of 1680. Jacques Cartier was the first white man (if we except possible visits from the Vikings) to sail up the St. Lawrence, but it was Champlain who built New France. Samuel de Champlain was born in 1567 in the town of Brouage, the son of a sea captain with the salt of the sea in his veins. A devout CathoUc and ardent RoyaHst, he fought for Henry IV in the religious wars, but when peace was declared the sea claimed him. After a voyage to Mexico and Peru he suggested that a canal through the Isthmus of Panama would shorten the trip to the East Indies by 1,500
great rivers of the interior,
leagues.

In 1602 Champlain joined an expedition to establish a fur monopoly

Canada and so was launched on his life work, the exploration of Canada and the search for the Northwest Passage. Champlain formed
in
friendly relationships with the Indians

lished colonies at Port

Montagnais and Huron. He estabRoyal (AnnapoUs) and Quebec; but profits of the
to the extent that they financed exploration,

fur trade interested

his first

him only

and last love, although he was not averse to fighting, either. He joined a war party of the Huron attacking the Iroquois at Ticonderoga, using firearms against them, thus calling down on the heads of the French
the wrath of the implacable Iroquois.

The

Jesuit missions along the routes

of travel across

Canada and

eventually

down

the Mississippi did

much

to strengthen the position of

France in the

New

World. The

lines of the

future struggle were already being drawn: the English colonists with their

Exploring the
Iroquois

New World

17

allies in contest against the French and the Huron for the rich and mighty rivers of the interior. This phase of the conflict was settled in Europe some 130 years later by the defeat of France in the Seven Years' War. Although Champlain was a French nobleman he got along well with the violent northern tribes. He grieved for their souls and hoped they would accept the blessings of Christianity. He was a good observer and his

plains

journals are full of vivid detail. Like

late,

all

observers of Indians, early or

who looked

at Indians as people,

he noted their indulgence of children, he was shocked, as any well-bred

but far from being charmed by

this trait

Frenchman would

be, to see children strike their parents.

France held the Lower Mississippi Valley territory until Jefferson put an end to the power of France in America with the Louisiana Purchase. The expedition which explored the new territories to report on conditions for settlement and if possible to find a passage to the Western sea, was actually planned before the Purchase was even thought about.

known to need any introduction. Lewis and Clark were and explorers, not ethnologists; they did not penetrate below the surface of Indian Ufe, although they made many shrewd observations about the character of the Indians and their style of life. Their journals contained much valuable information on houses and costumes and especially on the use of horses. They were especially impressed by the horsemanship of the Shoshone and devoted much space to descriptions of their horse gear and management of horses a fact of some interest since it is now known that the Shoshone were the tribe through whom horses were distributed to the Northern Plains.
It is

too well

soldiers

EDWARD GAYLORD BOURNE

(1860-1908)

Columbus,

Ramon Pane and

1493-1496

the

Beginnings of American Anthropology,

ABOUT THREE WEEKS HENCE ON MAY TWENTIETH WILL BE CELEBRATED

the four hundredth anniversary of the death of Columbus. Apparently
little

notice will be taken of this anniversary in the United States.

To

the

American people at large the event of supreme interest in the career of the Admiral is, of course, the discovery of the New World, and the quadricentenary of that was celebrated with an elaboration which naturally precludes any considerable expenditure of effort and enthusiasm within the same generation in commemoration of the death of the discoverer. Yet this anniversary should not pass unnoticed, least of all by a learned society devoted to the study of American antiquities, for Christopher Columbus
not only revealed the
set
field of

our studies to the world but actually in person

on foot the first systematic study of American primitive custom, rehgion and folklore ever undertaken. He is in a sense therefore the founder of American Anthropology. This phase of the varied activities of the discoverer has received in our day little or no attention. To all appearances it is not even mentioned in Justin Winsor's six-hundred page biography. Such neglect is owing in part to the discredit that has been cast upon the life of Columbus by his son Ferdinand in consequence of which its contents have not been studied with due critical appreciation.
In Ferdinand's biography of his father,
the
first

commonly

referred to under

imbedded not a few fragments of Columbus' own letters and other documents not commonly reproduced in the selections from his writings. To two such documents as
of the Italian
title

word

as the Historic, are

From Bourne, "Columbus, Ramon Pane and the beginnings of American Anthropology." Worcester: Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society, Vol. XVII, April (1906), pp. 310-313.
18

Beginnings of American Anthropology, 1493-1496

19

presenting the evidence of Columbus' interest and efforts in the field of

American Anthropology The first contains the

I invite

your attention

this

morning.
of

discoverer's

own

brief

summary

what he was

able to learn of the beliefs of the natives of Espanola during the period
of his second voyage, 1493

96, and the record of his commissioning the

Friar

Ramon Pane who had

learned the language of the islanders, "to

is

collect all their

ceremonies and antiquities." The second

is

Ramon's report
treatise ever

of his observations and inquiries and

written in the field of

not only the

first

American

Antiquities, but to this

day remains our

most authentic record of the

religion

and

folk-lore of the long since extinct

. .
.

Tainos, the aboriginal inhabitants of Hayti.

The observations

of

Columbus

first

referred to were recorded in his

narrative of his second voyage which

we

possess only in the abridgments

of Las Casas and Ferdinand Columbus.

Both of these authors

in con-

densing the original, incorporated passages in the exact words of the

miral,

Ad-

and

it

is

from such a passage

in Ferdinand's

abridgment that we

derive the Admiral's account of the religion of primitive Hayti. Ferdinand

"Our people also learned many other things which seem to me worthy to be related in this our history. Beginning then with religion I win record here the very words of the Admiral who wrote as follows:"
writes:
"I was able to discover neither idolatry nor any other sect among them, although all their kings, who are many, not only in Espanola but also in all the other islands and on the main land^ each have a house apart from the village, in which there is nothing except some wooden images carved in relief which are called cemis,^ nor is there anything done in such a house for any other object or service except for these cemis, by means of a kind of ceremony and prayer which they go to make in it as we go to churches. In this house they have a finely wrought table, round like a wooden dish in which is some powder which is placed by them on the heads of these cemis in performing a certain ceremony; then with a cane that has two branches which they place in their nostrils they snuff up this dust. The words that they say none of our people understand. With this powder they lose consciousness and become like drunken

men.

more than one such, and some more than ten, all in memory, as I have said, of some one of their ancestors. I have heard them praise one more than another, and have seen them show it more devotion and do more reverence to one than another as we do in processions where
there
is

They give a name to this figure, father or of both, since they have

and

I believe it is that

of a father, grand-

need.

Both the Caciques and the peoples boast to each other of having the best cemis. When they go to these cemis of theirs and enter the house where he is they are on their guard with respect to the Christians and do not suffer them to
Cuba, which Columbus believed to be the main land. in his Italian gives this word in various forms e. g. cemi, cimi, cimini and cimiche. The correct form is cemi with the accent on the last syllable. Las Casas says, "Estas Uamaban cemi, la ultima silaba luenga y aguda." Docs. Ineditos para la Historia de Espaiia, LXVI, 436.
1 i.e.

UUoa

20
enter
it.

EDWARD GAYLORD BOURNE On

the contrary,
if

they suspect they are coming, they take the cemi

away and hide them in the woods for fear they may be taken from them; and what is more laughable they have the custom of stealing each other's cemis. It happened once, when they suspected us, that the Christians entered the said house with them and of a sudden the cemi gave a loud cry and spoke in their language from which it was discovered that it was artfully
or the cemis
constructed because being hollow, they had fitted to the lower part a trumpet or tube which extended to a dark part of the house covered with leaves and branches where there was a person who spoke what the Cacique wanted him to say so far as it could be done with a tube. Whereupon our men having suspected what might be the case, kicked the cemi over and found the facts as I have just described. When the Cacique saw that it was discovered by our men he besought them urgently not to say anything to the Indians, his subjects, nor to others because by this deceit he kept them in obedience. This then we can say, there is some semblance of idolatry, at least among those who do not know the secret and the deception of their Caciques because they believe that the one who speaks is the cemi. In general all the people are deceived and the Cacique alone is the one who is conscious of and promotes their false belief by means of which he draws from his people all those tributes as seems good to him. Likewise most of the Caciques have three stones to which they and their peoples pay great reverence. One they say helps the corn and the vegetables that are planted; another the child-bearing of women without pain; and the third helps by means of water (i. e. rain) and the sun when they have need of it. I sent three of these stones to your Highness by Antonio de Torres^ and another set of three I have to bring with me. When these Indians die they have the funerals in different ways. The way the Caciques are buried, is as follows. They open the Cacique and dry him by the fire in order that he may be preserved whole, (or, entirely). Of others

they take only the head. Others are buried in a cave and they place above their head a gourd of water and some bread. Others they burn in the house where they die and when they see them on the point of death they do not let them finish their life but strangle them. This is done to the Caciques. Others they drive out of the house; and others they put into a hamaca, which is their bed of netting, and put water and bread at their head and leave them alone without returning to see them any more. Some again that are seriously ill they take to the Cacique and he tells them whether they ought to be strangled or not and they do what he commands. I have taken pains to learn what they believe and if they know where they go after death; especially from Caunabo, who is the chief king in Espanola, a man of years, of great knowledge and very keen mind; and he and others

which every principal Cacique believes country, aflBrming that there they find their father and all their ancestors; and that they eat and have women and give themselves to pleasures and recreation as is more fully contained in the following account in which I ordered one Friar Roman (Ramon) who knew their language to
replied that they go to a certain valley
is

situated in his

own

and their antiquities although so much of it is fable one cannot extract anything fruitful from it beyond the fact that each one of them has a certain natural regard for the future and believes in the immortality of our souls."^
collect all their ceremonies

that

3 Antonio de Torres set forth on the return voyage here referred to February 2, 1494. ^Historic. Ed. 1571, Alfonso Ulloa, Venice; folios 125-126.

BERNAL DIAZ DEL CASTILLO

(c.

1498-1560)

Cortes and

Montezuma

THE APPROACH TO THE CITY OF MEXICO

THUS,

ARRIVED NEAR IZTAPALAPA, TO BEHOLD THE SPLENDOUR OF THE who came out to meet us, who were the Lord of the town named Cuitlahuac, and the Lord of Culuacan, both of them near relations of Montezuma. And then when we entered the city of Iztapalapa, the appearance of the palaces in which they lodged us! How spacious and well built they were, of beautiful stone work and cedar wood, and the wood of other sweet scented trees, with great rooms and courts, wonderful to
Other Caciques

WE

behold, covered with awnings of cotton cloth.

When we had

looked well

at all of this,

we went

to the orchard
in,

garden, which was such a wonderful thing to see and walk

that I

and was

never tired of looking at the diversity of the trees, and noting the scent which each one had, and the paths fuU of roses and flowers, and the many fruit trees and native roses, and the pond of fresh water. There was another thing to observe, that great canoes were able to pass into the garden from the lake through an opening that had been made so that there was no need for their occupants to land. And all was cemented and very splendid with many kinds of stone [monuments] with pictures on them, which gave much to think about. Then the birds of many kinds and breeds which came into the pond. I say again that I stood looking at it and thought that never in the world would there be discovered other lands such as these, for at that time there was no Peru, nor any thought of it. Of aU these wonders

overthrown and lost, nothing left standing. Let us go on, and I wiU relate that the Caciques of that town and of Coyoacan brought us a present of gold, worth more than two thousand
pesos.

that I then beheld to-day all is

From Bemal Diaz del Castillo, The Discovery and Conquest of Mexico, translated with an introduction and notes by A. P. Maudslay (London: George Routledge & Sons, Ltd., 1928), pp. 270-273, 298-305.
21


22
Early next day

BERNAL DfAZ DEL CASTILLO

we
I

left

Iztapalapa with a large escort of those great

have already mentioned. We proceeded along the Causeway which is here eight paces in width and runs so straight to the City of Mexico that it does not seem to me to turn either much or little,
Caciques

whom

was so crowded with people that there was hardly some of them going to and others returning from Mexico, besides those who had come out to see us, so that we were hardly able to pass by the crowds of them that came; and the towers and cues were full of people as well as the canoes from all parts of the lake. It was not to be wondered at, for they had never before seen horses or men
but,

broad as
for

it is, it

room

them

all,

such as

we

are.

Gazing on such wonderful sights, we did not know what to say, or whether what appeared before us was real, for on one side, on the land, there were great cities, and in the lake ever so many more, and the lake itself was crowded with canoes, and in the Causeway were many bridges at intervals, and in front of us stood the great City of Mexico, and we we did not even number four hundred soldiers! and we well remembered the words and warnings given us by the people of Huexotzingo and Tlaxcala, and the many other warnings that had been given that we should beware of entering Mexico, where they would kiU us, as soon as they had
us inside.

ponder over in this that I am writing. What men have there been in the world who have shown such daring? But let us get on, and march along the Causeway. When we arrived where another small causeway branches off [leading to Coyoacan, which is another city] where there were some buildings like towers, which are their oratories, many more chieftains and Caciques approached clad in very rich mantles, the brilliant liveries of one chieftain differing from those of another, and the causeways were crowded with them. The Great Montezuma had sent these great Caciques in advance to receive us, and when they came before Cortes they bade us welcome in their language, and as a sign of peace, they touched their hands against the ground, and kissed the ground with the hand. There we halted for a good while, and Cacamatzin, the Lord of Texcoco, and the Lord of Iztapalapa and the Lord of Tacuba and the Lord of Coyoacan went on in advance to meet the Great Montezuma, who was approaching in a rich litter accompanied by other great Lords and Caciques, who owned vassals. When we arrived near to Mexico, where there were some other small towers, the Great Montezuma got down from his litter, and those great Caciques supported him with their arms beneath a marvellously rich canopy of green coloured feathers with much gold and silver embroidery and with pearls and chalchihuites suspended from a sort of bordering, which was wonderful to look at. The Great Montezuma was richly attired according to his usage, and he was shod with sandals.
Let the curious readers consider whether there
is

not

much

to

Cortes and

Montezuma

23

and the upper part adorned with precious stones. supported his arms were also richly clothed according to their usage, in garments which were apparently held ready for them on the road to enable them to accompany their prince, for they
the soles were of gold

The four

Chieftains

who

did not appear in such attire

when

they

came

to receive us. Besides these

four Chieftains, there were four other great Caciques

who supported

the

canopy over their heads, and many other Lords who walked before the Great Montezuma, sweeping the ground where he would tread and spreading cloths on it, so that he should not tread on the earth. Not one of these chieftains dared even to think of looking him in the face, but kept their eyes lowered with great reverence, except those four relations, his nephews,

who supported him

with their arms.

Montezuma was approaching, and he saw him coming, he dismounted from his horse, and when he was near Montezuma, they simultaneously paid great reverence to one another. Montezuma bade him welcome and our Cortes replied through Dona Marina wishing him very good health. And it seems to me that Cortes, through Doiia Marina, offered him his right hand, and Montezuma did not wish to take it, but he did give his hand to Cortes and then Cortes brought out a necklace which he had ready at hand, made of glass stones, which I have already said are called Margaritas, which have within them many patterns of diverse colours, these were strung on a cord of gold and with musk so that it should have a sweet scent, and he placed it round the neck of the Great Montezuma and when he had so placed it he was going to embrace him, and those great Princes who accompanied Montezuma held back Cortes by the arm so that he should not embrace him, for they considered it an indignity.
Cortes was told that the Great

When

THE MARKETS AND TEMPLES OF TLALTELOLCO

Our Captain and
Caciques
all

of those
all

who had

horses went to Tlaltelolco

on

horseback, and nearly

of us soldiers were fully equipped, and

many

whom Montezuma had sent for that purpose went in our company. When we arrived at the great market place, called Tlaltelolco, we were
astounded at the number of people and the quantity of merchandise that
it

contained, and at the good order and control that was maintained, for

we had never seen such a thing before. The chieftains who accompanied us acted as guides. Each kind of merchandise was kept by itself and had its fixed place marked out. Let us begin with the dealers in gold, silver, and precious stones, feathers, mantles, and embroidered goods. Then there were other wares consisting of Indian slaves both men and women; and I say that they bring as many of them to that great market for sale as the
Portuguese bring negroes from Guinea; and they brought them along tied
to long poles, with collars

round

their

necks so that they could not escape,

24

BERNAL DfAZ DEL CASTILLO

and others they left free. Next there were other traders who sold great and cotton, and articles of twisted thread, and there were cacahuateros who sold cacao. In this way one could see every sort of merchandise that is to be found in the whole of New Spain. There were those who sold cloths of hennequen and ropes and the sandals with which they are shod, which are made from the same plant, and sweet cooked roots, and other tubers which they get from this plant, aU were kept in one part of the market in the place assigned to them. In another part there were skins of tigers and Uons, of otters and jackals, deer and other animals and badgers and mountain cats, some tanned and others untanned, and other classes of merchandise. Let us go on and speak of those who sold beans and sage and other vegetables and herbs in another part, and to those who sold fowls, cocks with wattles, rabbits, hares, deer, mallards, young dogs and other things of that sort in their part of the market, and let us also mention the fruiterers, and the women who sold cooked food, dougli and tripe in their own part
pieces of cloth
of the market; then every sort of pottery

made

in a

thousand different

had a place to themselves; then those who sold honey and honey paste and other dainties like nut paste, and those who sold lumber, boards, cradles, beams, blocks and benches, each article by itself, and the vendors of ocote^ firewood, and other things of a similar nature. But why do I waste so many words in recounting what they sell in that great market? for I shall never finish if I tell it all in detail. Paper, which in this country is called amal, and reeds scented with liquidambar, and fuU of tobacco, and yellow ointments and things of that sort are sold by themselves, and much cochineal is sold under the arcades which are in that great market place, and there are many vendors of herbs and other sorts of trades. There are also buildings where three magistrates sit in judgment, and there are executive ofl&cers like
forms from great water
jars to little jugs, these also

Alguacils
salt,

who

inspect the merchandise. I

am

forgetting those

who

sell

and those who make the stone knives, and how they spUt them off the stone itself; and the fisherwomen and others who sell some small cakes made from a sort of ooze which they get out of the great lake, which
curdles,

and from

this

they

make

a bread having a flavour something like

cheese. There are for sale axes of brass

and copper and

tin,

and gourds

and

gaily painted jars

made

of wood. I could wish that I

telling of all the things

which are sold

there, but they are so

had finished numerous

and of such
able to see

different quality

ing arcades was so crowded with people, that one

and the great market place with its surroundwould not have been
it all

and inquire about

Then we went
its

great courts,

in two days. and when we were already approaching before leaving the market place itself, there were many

to the great Cue,

Pitch-pine for torches.

Cortes and

Montezuma
as I

25

more merchants, who,

was told, brought gold for sale in grains, just as it is taken from the mines. The gold is placed in thin quills of the geese of the country, white quiUs, so that the gold can be seen through, and according to the length and thickness of the quills they arrange their accounts with one another, how much so many mantles or so many gourds full of cacao were worth, or how many slaves, or whatever other thing they were exchanging.
Before reaching the great Cue there is a great enclosure of courts, it seems to me larger than the plaza of Salamanca, with two waUs of masomy surrounding it, and the court itself all paved with very smooth great white
flagstones.

And where
all

there were not these stones

it

was cemented and

burnished and

very clean, so that one could not find any dust or a

straw in the whole place.

When we
was making
Captain.

arrived near the Great

it,

single step of

the great

Cue and before we had ascended a Montezuma sent down from above, where he
and two
chieftains to

his sacrifices, six priests

accompany our

On

ascending the steps, which are one hundred and fourteen in

number, they attempted to take him by the arms so as to help him to ascend, (thinking that he would get tired), as they were accustomed to assist their lord Montezuma, but Cortes would not allow them to come near him. When we got to the top of the great Cue, on a small plaza which has been made on the top where there was a space like a platform with some large stones placed on it, on which they put the poor Indians for sacrifice, there was a bulky image like a dragon and other evil figures and much blood shed that very day.

When we

arrived there

Montezuma came out

of an oratory where his

cursed idols were, at the summit of the great Cue, and two priests with him, and after paying great reverence to Cortes and to
said:
all

came

of us he

"You must be

tired,

Senor MaUnche, from ascending

this

our great

Cue," and Cortes repHed through our interpreters who were with us that he and his companions were never tired by anything. Then Montezuma
took him by the hand and told him to look at his great
other cities that were standing in the water, and the
city

and

all

the

many

other towns

on the land round the lake, and that if he had not seen the great market place weU, that from where they were they could see it better. So we stood looking about us, for that huge and cursed temple stood so high that from it one could see over everything very well, and we saw the three causeways which led into Mexico, that is the causeway of Iztapalapa by which we had entered four days before, and that of Tacuba, and that of Tepeaquilla,^ and we saw the fresh water that comes from Chapultepec which suppHes the city, and we saw the bridges on the three causeways which were built at certain distances apart through whicTi the
2

Guadelupe.

26

BERNAL DIAZ DEL CASTILLO

water of the lake flowed in and out from one side to the other, and
supplies of food

we

beheld on that great lake a great multitude of canoes, some coming with

and others returning loaded with cargoes of merchandise; and we saw that from every house of that great city and of all the other cities that were built in the water it was impossible to pass from house to house, except by drawbridges which were made of wood or in canoes; and we saw in those cities Cues and oratories like towers and fortresses and all gleaming white, and it was a wonderful thing to behold; then the houses with flat roofs, and on the causeways other small towers and oratories which were like fortresses. After having examined and considered all that we had seen we turned to look at the great market place and the crowds of people that were in it, some buying and others selling, so that the murmur and hum of their voices and words that they used could be heard more than a league off. Some of the soldiers among us who had been in many parts of the world, in Constantinople, and all over Italy, and in Rome, said that so large a market place and so fufl of people, and so well regulated and arranged, they had never beheld before. Let us leave this, and return to our Captain, who said to Fray Bartolome de Olmedo, who happened to be near by him: "It seems to me, Seiior Padre, that it would be a good thing to throw out a feeler to Montezuma,
as to

whether he would allow us to build our church here"; and the Padre

replied that
to

it would be a good thing if it were successful, but it seemed him that it was not quite a suitable time to speak about it, for Montezuma did not appear to be inclined to do such a thing. Then our Cortes said to Montezuma: "Your Highness is indeed a very

great prince
cities,

and worthy of even greater

in

things.

We
I

are rejoiced to see your

and as we are here

your temple, what

now beg

as a favour

is

you wiU show us your gods and Teules." Montezuma replied that he must first speak with his high priests, and when he had spoken to them he said that we might enter into a small tower and apartment, a sort of hall, where there were two altars, with very richly carved boardings on the top of the roof. On each altar were two figures, like giants with very tall bodies and very fat, and the first which stood on the right hand they said was the figure of Huichilobos their god of War; it had a very broad face and monstrous and terrible eyes, and the whole of his body was covered with precious stones, and gold and pearls, and with seed pearls
that

stuck on with a paste that they

make

in this country out of a sort of root,

and
a

all

the

body and head was covered with

in the other

by great snakes made of gold and precious stones, and

bow and

some arrows. And

and the body was girdled in one hand he held another small idol that stood by
it,

him, they said was his page, and he held a short lance and a shield richly

decorated with gold and stones. Huichilobos had round his neck some

Cortes and

Montezuma
and other things
like hearts of Indians, the

Tl
former made

Indians' faces

of gold and the latter of silver, with

many

precious blue stones.

There were some braziers with incense which they call copal, and in them they were burning the hearts of the three Indians whom they had sacrificed that day, and they had made the sacrifice with smoke and copal. All the walls of the oratory were so splashed and encrusted with blood that they were black, the floor was the same and the whole place stank vilely. Then we saw on the other side on the left hand there stood the other great image the same height as Huichilobos, and it had a face like a bear and eyes that shone, made of their mirrors which they call Tezcat, and the body plastered with precious stones like that of Huichilobos, for they say that the two are brothers; and this Tezcatepuca was the god of Hell and had charge of the souls of the Mexicans, and his body was girt with figures like little devils with snakes' tails. The walls were so clotted with blood and the soil so bathed with it that in the slaughter houses of
Spain there
is

not such another stench.

from the day's sacrifices. In the highest part of the Cue there was a recess of which the woodwork was very richly worked, and in it was another image half man and half lizard, with precious stones all over it, and half the body was covered with a
offered to this Idol five hearts
that the body of this figure is full of the seeds that there and they say that it is the god of seed time and harvest, but I do not remember its name, and everything was covered with blood, both walls and altar, and the stench was such that we could hardly wait

They had

mantle.

They say

are in the world,

the

moment

to get out of

it.

They had an exceedingly large drum sound of it was so dismal and like, so to
regions, that

there,
say,

and when they beat

it

the

an instrument of the infernal

one could hear

it

it

a distance of two leagues, and they said

was covered with were those of great snakes. In that small place there were many diabohcal things to be seen, bugles and trumpets and knives, and many hearts of Indians that they had burned in fumigating their idols, and everything was so clotted with blood, and there was so much of it, that I curse the whole of it, and as it stank like a slaughter house we hastened to clear out of such a bad stench and worse
that the skins

Our Captain said to Montezuma through our interpreter, half laughing: "Seiior Montezuma, I do not understand how such a great Prince and wise man as you are has not come to the conclusion, in your mind,
sight.

that these idols of yours are not gods, but evil things that
devils,

are called
it

and so that you may know

it

and

all

your priests

may

see

clearly,

do me the favour to approve of my placing a cross here on the top of this tower, and that in one part of these oratories where your Huichilobos and Tezcatepuca stand we may divide ofE a space where we can set up an image of Our Lady (an image which Montezuma had already seen) and

28

BERNAL DIAZ DEL CASTILLO

will see

you

by the fear

in

which these Idols hold

it

that they are deceiving

you."

Montezuma

replied half angrily (and the

two

priests

him showed that you would have said such defamatory things I would not have shown you my gods, we consider them to be very good, for they give us health and rains and good seed times and seasons and as many victories as we desire, and we are obliged to worship them and make sacrifices, and I pray you not to say another word to their dishonour." When our Captain heard that and noted the angry looks he did not refer again to the subject, but said with a cheerful manner: "It is time for your Excellency and for us to return," and Montezuma replied that it was well, but that he had to pray and offer certain sacrifices on account of the great tatacul, that is to say sin, which he had committed in allowing us to ascend his great Cue, and being the cause of our being permitted to see his gods, and of our dishonouring them by speaking evil of them, so that before he left he must pray and worship. Then Cortes said: "I ask your pardon if it be so," and then we went down the steps, and as they numbered one hundred and fourteen, and as some of our soldiers were suffering from tumours and abscesses, their legs were tired by the descent.
great annoyance),

and

said: "Seiior Malinche,

who were with if I had known

SAMUEL DE CHAMPLAIN
(1567-1635)

The Character and Customs of the Huron

THE COUNTRY OF THE NATION OF THE ATTIGOUANTANS^

44
30',

IS

IN LATITUDE

and extends two hundred and

thirty leagues in length westerly,

and ten in breadth. It contains eighteen villages, six of which are enclosed and fortified by palisades of wood in triple rows, bound together, on the top of which are galleries, which they provide with stones and water; the former to hurl upon their enemies and the latter to extinguish the fire which their enemies may set to the palisades. The country is pleasant, most of it cleared up. It has the shape of Brittany, and is similarly situated, being almost surrounded by the Mer Douce. They assume that these eighteen villages are inhabited by two thousand warriors, not including the common mass, which amounts to perhaps thirty thousand souls. Their cabins are in the shape of tunnels or arbors, and are covered with the bark of trees. They are from twenty-five to thiry fathoms long, more or less, and six wide, having a passage-way through the middle from ten to twelve feet wide, which extends from one end to the other. On the two sides there is a kind of bench, four feet high, where they sleep in summer, in order to avoid the annoyance of the fleas, of which there were great numbers. In winter they sleep on the ground. AU these people have a very^ jovial disposition, although there are many of them who have a sad and gloomy look. Their bodies are well proportioned. Some of the men and women are weU formed, strong, and robust. There is a moderate number of pleasing and pretty girls, in respect to figure, color, and expression, all being in harmony. Their blood is but little deteriorated, except when they are old. There are among these tribes powerful women of extraordinary height. These have almost the entire
.
. .

1 One of the divisions of the 2Fr. assez, i.e., somewhat.

Huron

Federation.

From Champlain, Voyages of Samuel de Champlain, 1604-1618, edited by W. L. Grant (New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1907), pp. 317-323; 327-330.
29

30
care of the house and work; namely, they
till

SAMUEL DE CHAMPLAIN
the land, plant the Indian

com, lay up a store of wood for the winter, beat the hemp and spin it, making from the thread fishing-nets and other useful things. The women harvest the corn, house it, prepare it for eating, and attend to household matters. Moreover they are expected to attend their husbands from place
to place in the fields, fiUing the office of

pack-mule

in carrying the baggage,

is to hunt for deer and and go to war. Having done these things, they then go to other tribes with which they are acquainted to traffic and make exchanges. On their return, they give themselves up to festivities and dances, which they give to each other, and when these are over they go to sleep, which they like to do best of all things. They have some sort of marriage, which is as follows: when a girl has

and to do a thousand other

fish,

things. All the

men do

other animals,

make

their cabins,

reached the age of eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, or

has suitors, more or less according to her attractions,

fifteen years she

who woo

her for

some time. After this, the consent of their fathers and mothers is asked, to whose will the girls often do not submit, although the most discreet and considerate do so. The lover or suitor presents to the girl some necklaces,
chains,

and bracelets of porcelain.

If the girl finds the suitor agreeable,

she

receives the present.

comes and remains with her three or four nights, without saying anything to her during the time. They receive thus the fruit of their affections. Whence it happens very often that, after from eight to fifteen days, if they cannot agree, she quits her suitor, who forfeits his necklaces and other presents that he has made, having received in return only a meagre satisfaction. Being thus disappointed in his hopes, the man seeks another woman, and the girl another suitor, if it seems to them desirable. Thus they continue to do until a favorable union is formed. It sometimes happens that a girl thus passes her entire youth, having more than twenty mates, which twenty are not alone in the enjoyment of the creature, mated though they are; for when night comes the young women run from one cabin to another, as do also the young men on their part, going where it seems good to them, but always without any violence, referring the whole matter to the pleasure of the woman. Their mates will do likewise to their women-neighbors, no jealousy arising among them on that account, nor do they incur any reproach or insult, such being the custom of the country. Now the time when they do not leave their mates is when they have children. The preceding mate returns to her, renews the affection and and friendship which he had borne her in the past, asserting that it is greater than that of any other one, and that the child she has is his and of his begetting. The next says the same to her. In fine, the victory is with the stronger, who takes the woman for his wife. Thus it depends upon the choice of the woman to take and accept him who shall please her best, having meantime in her searching and loves gained much porcelain and,
the lover

Then

The Character and Customs of

the

Huron

31

besides, the choice of a husband.

leaving him; or

if

she do leave him, for he

The woman remains with him without is on trial, it must be for some
this

good reason other than impotence. But while with

a good appearance.

husband, she does

not cease to give herself free rein, yet remains always at home, keeping up

Thus the children which they have

their

together,

born from

such a woman, cannot be sure of their legitimacy. Accordingly, in view of

this uncertainty,
it is

custom that the children never succeed to the

the children of their sisters,

property and honors of their fathers, there being doubt, as above indicated,
as to their paternity.

They make, however,

from

known to have issued, their successors and heirs. The following is the way they nourish and bring up their children: they place them during the day on a little wooden board, wrapping them up in furs or skins. To this board they bind them, placing them in an erect
they are
position,
If it is

whom

and leaving a
girl,
its

Uttle

opening for the child to do

its

necessities.

they put a leaf of Indian corn between the thighs, which

privates.

presses against

The extremity

of the leaf

is

carried outside

in a turned position, so that the water of the child runs off

on

it

without

inconvenience.
reeds that

They put
call

we

under the children the down of certain hare's-foot, on which they rest very softly. They also
also

clean

them with the same down. As an ornament for the child, they adorn the board with beads, which they also put on its neck, however small it may be. At night they put it to bed, entirely naked, between the father and mother. It may be regarded as a great miracle that God should thus preserve it so that no harm befalls it, as might be expected, from suffocation, while the father and mother are in deep sleep, but that rarely happens. The children have great freedom among these tribes. The fathers and mothers indulge them too much, and never punish them. Accordingly they are so bad and of so vicious a nature, that they often strike their mothers and others. The most vicious, when they have acquired the strength and power, strike their fathers. They do this whenever the father
or mother does anything that does not please them. This
that
is

a sort of curse

God

inflicts

upon them.
is

In respect to laws, I have not been able to find out that they have any,
or anything that approaches them, inasmuch as there

not

among them

any correction, punishment, or censure of evil-doers, except in the way

of vengeance

when

they return evil for

conflicts

evil,

not by rule but by passion,

which produces among them

frequently.

and

differences,

which occur very

Moreover, they do not recognize any divinity, or worship any God and believe in anything whatever, but live Uke brute beasts. They have, however, some respect for the devil, or something so called, which is a matter of uncertainty, since the word which they use thus has various significations and comprises in itself various things. It is accordingly dif-

32
ficult to

SAMUEL DE CHAMPLAIN

determine whether they mean the devil or something else, but what especially leads to the belief that what they mean is the devil is this: whenever they see a man doing something extraordinary, or who is more
capable than usual, or
rage as
if

is

a valiant warrior, or furthermore

out of his reason and senses, they call him oqui, or, as

say, a great

knowing

spirit,

or a great devil.

However

this

who is in a we should may be, they

have certain persons, who are the oqui, or, as the Algonquins and Montagnais call them, manitous; and persons of this kind are the medicinemen, who heal the sick, bind up the wounded, and predict future events,

who

in fine practice

aU abuses and

illusions of the devil to deceive

and

delude them. These oquis or conjurers persuade their patients and the
sick to

make, or have made banquets and ceremonies that they may be the

sooner healed, their object being to participate in them finally themselves

and get the principal benefit therefrom. Under the pretence of a more
speedy cure, they likewise cause them to observe various other ceremonies,

which
in

I shall hereafter

speak of in the proper place. These are the people

it is

whom

they put especial confidence, but

rare that they are possessed

of the devil

and tormented

like

other savages Mving

more remote than

themselves.

This gives additional reason and ground to believe that their conversion
to the knowledge of

habited by persons

God would be more easy, if their country were inwho would take the trouble and pains to instruct them.
friars,

But

it

is

not enough to send to them

assist

unless there are those to

support and

them. For although these people have the desire to-

day to know what

solute manners,

God

is,

to-morrow

this disposition will

change when

they are obliged to lay aside and bring under their foul ways, their dis-

and

their savage indulgences.

So

that there

is

need of

way of duty, to constrain them through mildness to do better, and to move them by good example to mend their lives Father Joseph and myself have many times conferred with them in regard to our behef, laws, and customs. They hsten attenpeople and families to keep them in the
.

tively in their

assembhes, sometimes saying to us:

You say things that pass our knowledge, and which we cannot understand by words, being beyond our comprehension; but if you would do us a service come and dwell in this country, bringing your wives and children, and when they are here we shall see how you serve the God you worship, and how you live with your wives and children, how you cultivate and plant the soil, how you obey your laws, how you take care of animals, and how you manufacture all that we see proceeding from your inventive skill. When we see all this, we shall learn more in a year than in twenty by simply hearing you discourse; and if we cannot then understand, you shall take our children, who shall be as your own. And thus being convinced that our life is a miserable one in comparison with yours, it is easy to believe that we shall adopt yours, abandoning our own.

The Character and Customs

of the

Huron

33

of government: the older and leading men which they settle upon and propose all that is necessary for the affairs of the village. This is done by a plurality of voices, or in accordance with the advice of some one among them whose judgment they consider superior: such a one is requested by the company to give his opinion on the propositions that have been made, and this opinion is minutely obeyed. They have no particular chiefs with absolute command, but they show honor to the older and more courageous men, whom they name captains, as a mark of honor and respect, of which there are several in a village. But, although they confer more honor upon one than upon others, yet he is not on that account to bear sway, nor esteem himself higher than his companions, unless he does so from vanity. They make no use of punishments nor arbitrary command, but accomplish everything by the entreaties of the seniors, and by means of addresses and remonstrances. Thus and not otherwise do they bring everything to pass. They all deliberate in common, and whenever any member of the assembly offers to do anything for the welfare of the village, or to go anywhere for the service of the community, he is requested to present himself, and if he is judged capable of carrying out what he proposes, they exhort him, by fair and favorable words, to do his duty. They declare him to be an energetic man, fit for undertakings, and assure him that he will win honor in accomplishing them. In a word, they encourage him by

The

following

is

their

mode

assemble in a council, in

flatteries,

in order that this favorable disposition of his for the welfare

of his fellow-citizens

may

continue and increase. Then, according to his

pleasure, he refuses the responsibiUty,

which few do, or accepts, since

thereby he

is

held in high esteem.

When

they engage in wars or go to the country of their enemies, two

or three of the older or vahant captains

make

a beginning in the matter,

their purpose,

and proceed to the adjoining

villages to

communicate

make

presents to the people of these villages, in order to induce

and them to

accompany them to the wars in question. In so far they act as generals of armies. They designate the place where they desire to go, dispose of the prisoners who are captured, and have the direction of other matters of especial importance, of which they get the honor, if they are successful; but, if not, the disgrace of failure in the war falls upon them. These captains alone are looked upon and considered as chiefs of the tribes. They have, moreover, general assemblies, with representatives from remote regions. These representatives come every year, one from each province, and meet in a town designated as the rendezvous of the assembly. Here are celebrated great banquets and dances, for three weeks or a month, according as they may determine. Here they renew their friendship, resolve upon and decree what they think best for the preservation of their country against their enemies, and make each other handsome presents, after which
they retire each to his

own

district.

34

SAMUEL DE CHAMPLAIN
In burying the dead, they take the body of the deceased, wrap
it

in

furs,

and cover

it

very carefully with the bark of

in a cabin, of the length of the

posts. Others they place in the

Then they place it body, made of bark and erected upon four ground, propping up the earth on all sides,
trees.

that

it

may

not

fall

putting earth
it is

on

top.

on the body, which they cover with the bark of Over this trench they also make a little cabin.

trees,

Now

to

be understood that the bodies remain in these places, thus inhumed,

but for a period of eight or ten years,

when

the

men
all

of the viUage recomor, to

mend

the place

where

their

ceremonies are to take place;

speak more
festival is

precisely, they hold a general council, in

try are present, for the

which

the people of the coun-

purpose of designating the place where a

to

be held. After

this

they return each to his

all the bones of the deceased, strip These they keep very carefully, although they smell like bodies recently interred. Then all the relatives and friends of the deceased take these bones, together with their necklaces, furs, axes, kettles, and other things highly valued, and carry them, with a quantity of edibles, to the place assigned. Here, when aU have assembled, they put the edibles in a place designated

where they take them and make them quite clean.

village,

own

by the men of the

The

festival continues for the space of ten days,

tribes,

from

all

and engage in banquets and continual dancing. during which time other quarters, come to witness it and the ceremonies. The latter
village,

are attended with great outlays.

Now, by means

of these ceremonies, including dances, banquets, and

assembhes, as above stated, they renew their friendship to one another,

saying that the bones of their relatives and friends are to be
all

put together,

thus indicating by a figure that, as their bones are gathered together, and

united in one and the same place, so ought they also, during their
to

life,

be united in one friendship and harmony, like relatives and friends, without separation. Having thus mingled together the bones of their mutual
relatives

and

friends, they

pronounce many discourses on the occasion.

Then,

after various

grimaces or exhibitions, they

make a

great trench, ten

fathoms square, in which they put the bones, together with the necklaces, chains of porcelain, axes, kettles, sword-blades, knives, and various other
trifles,

which, however, are of no sHght account in their estimation. They

cover the whole with earth, putting on top several great pieces of wood, and
placing around

many

posts,

on which they put a covering. This

is

their

manner of proceeding with regard to the dead, and it is the most prominent ceremony they have. Some of them believe in the immortaUty of the soul,
while others have only a presentiment of
it,

which, however,

is

not so very

different; for they say that after their decease they will

go to a place
dif-

ferent

where they will sing like crows, a song, from that of angels.

it

must be confessed, quite

MERIWETHER LEWIS
(1774-1809)

The Lewis and Clark Expedition

THE SHOSHONE: THEIR WEAPONS AND HORSE GEAR

ALTHOUGH OPPRESSED BY THE MINNETAREES, THE SHOSHONEES ARE STILL
fatigue; their long abstinence

them to makes them support the dangers of mountain warfare, and worn down, as we saw them, by want of sustenance, have a look of fierce and adventurous courage. The Shoshonee warrior always fights on horseback; he possesses a few bad guns, which are reserved exclusively for war, but his common arms are the bow and arrow, a shield, a lance, and a weapon called by the Chippeways, by whom it was formerly used, the poggamoggon. The bow is made of cedar or pine, covered on the outer side with sinews and glue. It is about two and a half feet long, and does not differ in shape from those used by the Sioux, Mandans, and
a very military people. Their cold and rugged country inures

Minnetarees. Sometimes, however, the

bow

is

made

of a single piece of the

horn of an
glue,

wood with sinews and and occasionally ornamented by a strand wrought of porcupine quiUs and sinews, which is wrapped round the horn near its two ends. The bows made of the horns of the bighorn are still more prized, and are formed by cementing with glue flat pieces of the horn together, covering the back
elk,

covered on the back like those of

with sinews and glue, and loading the whole with an unusual quantity of

ornaments. The arrows resemble those of the other Indians, except in

being more slender than any

we have
in a

seen.

They

are contained, with the

implements for striking

narrow quiver formed of different kinds of skin, though that of the otter seems to be preferred. It is just long enough to protect the arrows from the weather, and is worn on the back by means of a strap passing over the right shoulder and under the left arm.
fire,

Lewis, History of the Expedition of Captains Lewis and Clark 1804-5-6, 2 (Chicago: A. C. McClurg & Company, 1902), Vol. I, pp. 451-455; Vol. II, pp. 130-146. Reprinted from the edition of 1814 with an Introduction and Index by James K. Hosmer.
vols.

From

35

36

MERIWETHER LEWIS
shield
is

The

a circular piece of buffaloe hide about two feet four or five

it

inches in diameter, ornamented with feathers, and a fringe round

of

dressed leather, and adorned or deformed with paintings of strange figures.

The

of the Shoshonees,

any arrow, but in the minds power to protect them is chiefly derived from the virtues which are communicated to it by the old men and jugglers. To make a shield is indeed one of their most important ceremonies. It begins by a feast, to which all the warriors, old men, and jugglers are invited. After the repast a hole is dug in the ground about eighteen inches in depth, and of the same diameter as the intended shield; into this hole red-hot stones are thrown and water poured over them, till they emit a very strong, hot steam. The buffaloe skin, which must be the entire hide of a male two years old, and never suffered to dry since it was taken from the animal, is now laid across the hole, with a fleshy side to the ground, and stretched in every direction by as many as can take hold of it. As the skin becomes heated, the hair separates and is taken off by the hand, tiU at last the skin is contracted into the compass designed for the shield. It is then taken off and placed on a hide prepared into parchment, and then pounded during the rest of the festival by the bare heels of those who are invited to it. This operation sometimes continues for several days, after which it is delivered to the proprietor, and declared by the old men and jugglers to be a security against arrows, and, provided the feast has been satisfactory, against even the buUets of their enemies. Such is the delusion that many of the Indians implicitly believe that this ceremony has given to the shield supernatural powers, and that they have no longer to fear any weapons of
buffaloe hide
is

perfectly proof against

its

their enemies.

inches long,

The paggamoggon is an instrument consisting of a handle twenty-two made of wood, covered with dressed leather about the size

of a whip-handle; at
tied to a

one end is a thong of two inches in length, which is round stone weighing two pounds and held in a cover of leather; at the other end is a loop of the same material, which is passed round the wrist so as to secure the hold of the instrument, with which they strike a

very severe blow.

Besides these, they have a kind of armour something like a coat of mail, which is formed by a great many folds of dressed antelope skins, united by means of a mixture of glue and sand. With this they cover their own bodies and those of their horses, and find it impervious to the arrow. The caparison of their horses is a halter and a saddle; the first is either
a rope of six or seven strands of buffaloe hair platted or twisted together,
finger, and of great strength; or merely a thong by pounding and rubbing, though the first kind is much preferred. The halter is very long, and is never taken from the neck of the horse when in constant use. One end of it is first tied round the neck in a knot, and then brought down to the under jaw, round which

about the size of a man's

of

raw

hide,

made

pliant

The Lewis and Clark Expedition

it

37

formed into a simple noose, passing through the mouth; it is then drawn up on the right side and held by the rider in his left hand, while the rest trails after him to some distance. At other times the knot is formed at a little distance from one of the ends, so as to let that end serve as a bridle, while the other trails on the ground. With these cords dangling alongside of them the horse is put to his full speed without fear of falling, and when he is turned to graze the noose is merely taken from his mouth. The saddle is formed, like the pack-saddles used by the French and Spaniards, of two flat thin boards which fit the sides of the horse, and are kept together by two cross pieces, one before and the other behind, which rise to a considerable height, ending sometimes in a flat point extending outwards, and always making the saddle deep and narrow. Under this a piece of buffaloe
is

skin,

with the hair on,

is

placed so as to prevent the rubbing of the boards,

and when they mount they throw a piece of skin or robe over the saddle, which has no permanent cover. When stirrups are used, they consist of wood covered with leather; but stirrups and saddles are conveniences reserved for old men and women. The young warriors rarely use anything except a small leather pad stuffed with hair, and secured by a girth made of a leathern thong. In this way they ride with great expertness, and they have a particular dexterity in catching the horse when he is running at large. If he will not immediately submit when they wish to take him, they make a noose in the rope, and although the horse may be at a distance, or even running, rarely fail to fix it on his neck; and such is the docility of
the animal that,

however umuly he may seem, he surrenders

is

as

soon as
never

he

feels the

rope on him. This cord

so useful in this

way

that

it is

dispensed with, even

when they use the Spanish bridle, which they prefer, and always procure when they have it in their power. The horse becomes
is

almost an object of attachment; a favourite

ears cut into various shapes; the

frequently painted and his

mane and

tail,

which are never drawn

nor trimmed, are decorated with feathers of birds, and sometimes a warrior
suspends at the breast of his horse the finest ornaments he possesses.

Thus armed and mounted the Shoshonee

with the feeble weapons which he
at full
is still

is

a formidable enemy, even

obliged to use.

When

they attack

speed they bend forward and cover their bodies with the shield, while

with the right hand they shoot under the horse's neck.

The only articles of metal which the Shoshonees possess are a few bad some brass kettles, some bracelets or arm-bands of iron and brass, a few buttons worn as ornaments in their hair, one or two spears about a foot in length, and some heads for arrows made of iron and brass. All these they had obtained in trading with the Crow or Rocky mountain Indians, who live on the Yellowstone. The few bridle-bits and stirrups they proknives,

cured from the Spanish colonies.

piece of

The instrument which supplies the place of a knife among them is a flint with no regular form, and the sharp part of it not more than

38

MERIWETHER LEWIS

one or two inches long; the edge of this is renewed, and the flint itself is formed into heads for arrows by means of the point of a deer or elk horn, an instrument which they use with great art and ingenuity. There are no axes or hatchets, all the wood being cut with flint or elk-horn, the latter of which is always used as a wedge in splitting wood. Their utensils consist, besides the brass kettles, of pots in the form of a jar, made either of earth, or of a stone found in the hills between Madison and Jefferson rivers, which, though soft and white in its natural state, becomes very hard and black after exposure to the fire. The horns of the buffaloe and the bighorn supply them with spoons. The fire is always kindled by means of a blunt arrow and a piece of well-seasoned wood of a soft spongy kind, such as the willow or cottonwood.

THE CHINNOOK: THEIR HOUSES

The houses
width.
in this

neighbourhood are

all

large

wooden

buildings, vary-

ing in length from twenty to sixty feet and from fourteen to twenty in

They

are constructed in the foUowing

manner:

Two

posts of split

timber or more, agreeably to the number of partitions, are sunk in the

ground, above which they rise to the height of fourteen or eighteen
feet.

round beam or pole stretching from one to the other, and forming the upper point of the roof for the whole extent of the building. On each side of this range is placed another, which forms the eaves of the house, and is about five feet high; but as the building is often sunk to the depth of four or five feet,

They

are hollowed at the top, so as to receive the ends of a

the eaves
are

come very near

extended by

the surface of the earth. Smaller pieces of timber

form of rafters, from the lower to the upper beam, where they are attached at both ends with cords of cedar bark. On these rafters two or three ranges of small poles are placed horizontally, and secured in the same way with strings of cedar bark. The sides
pairs, in the

now

are

now made

with a range of wide boards sunk a small distance into the

ground, with the upper ends projecting above the poles at the eaves, to

which they are secured by a beam passing outside, parallel with the eavepoles, and tied by cords of cedar bark passing through holes made in the boards at certain distances. The gable ends and partitions are formed in the same way, being fastened by beams on the outside parallel to the
rafters.

The roof

is

then covered with a double range of thin boards, ex-

cept an aperture of two or three feet in the centre for the

through.
large

The entrance

is

smoke to pass by a small hole cut out of the boards, and just

enough

to admit the body.

The very

largest houses only are divided

by

though three or four families reside in the same room, there is quite space enough for all of them. In the centre of each room is a space six or eight feet square sunk to the depth of twelve inches below the rest of the floor, and inclosed by four pieces of square timber. Here
partitions, for

The Lewis and Clark Expedition

39

they make the jfire, for which purpose pine bark is generally preferred. Around this fireplace mats are spread, and serve as seats during the day and very frequently as beds at night; there is, however, a more permanent bed made, by fixing, in two or sometimes three sides of the room, posts reaching from the roof down to the ground, and at the distance of four
feet

from the

wall.

From

these posts to the wall

itself

one or two ranges

either sleep or

of boards are placed so as to

form

shelves,

on which they

where they stow away

fish is

their various articles of merchandise.

hung

in the

they are fortunate

smoke of their fires, as is also enough to procure any, which

the flesh of the elk

is

The uncured when

but rarely.

THE CANOES OF THE NORTHWESTERN TRIBES

much of the intercourse between different tribes is on by water, the ingenuity of the people would naturally direct itself to the improvement of canoes, which would gradually become, from a mere safe conveyance, to an elegant ornament. We have accordingly seen, on the Columbia, canoes of many forms, beginning with the simple boats near the mountains, to those more highly decorated, because more useful, nearer the mouth of the Columbia. Below the grand cataract there are four forms of canoes: the first and smallest is about fifteen feet long, and calculated for one or two persons; it is, indeed, by no means remarkable in its structure, and is chiefly employed by the Cathlamahs and Wahkiacums among the marshy islands. The second is from twenty to thirty-five feet long, about two and a half or three feet in the beam and two feet in the hold. It is chiefly remarkable in having the bowsprit, which rises to some height above the bow, formed by tapering gradually from the sides into a sharp point. Canoes of this shape are common to all the nations below the grand rapids. But the canoes most used by the Columbia Indians, from the ChilluckitIn a country where so
carried

tequaws inclusive to the ocean, are about thirty or

thirty-five feet long.

is

The bow, which looks more

other end, and
is

like the stern of

our boats,

higher than the

ornamented with a sort of comb, an inch in thickness, cut out of the same log which forms the canoe, and extending nine or eleven inches from the bowsprit to the bottom of the boat. The stern is nearly rounded off, and gradually ascends to a point. This canoe is very light and convenient, for though it will contain ten or twelve persons, it may be carried with great ease by four. The fourth and largest species of canoe we did not meet till we reached tide-water, near the grand rapids below, in which place they are found among all the nations, especially the Killamucks and others residing on the seacoast. They are upwards of fifty feet long, and will carry from eight to ten thousand pounds weight, or from twenty to thirty persons. Like all the canoes we have mentioned, they are cut out of a single trunk of a

40
tree,

MERIWETHER LEWIS
which
is

sometimes used. The two or three inches in thickness, which are inserted through holes made just below the gunwhale, and made fast with cords. The upper edge of the gunwhale itself is about five-eighths of an inch thick and four or five in breadth, and folds outwards so as to form a kind of rim which prevents the water from beating into the boat. The bow and stern are about the same height, and each provided with a comb reaching to the bottom of the boat. At each end, also, are pedestals formed of the same solid piece, on which are placed strange grotesque figures of men or animals, rising sometimes to the height of five feet, and composed of small pieces of wood, firmly united with great ingenuity by inlaying and mortising, without a spike of any kind. The paddle is usually from four feet and a half to five feet in length, the handle being thick for one-third of its length, when it widens, and is hollowed and thinned on each side of the centre, which forms a sort of rib. When they embark, one Indian sits in the stern and steers with a paddle, the others kneel in pairs in the bottom of the canoe, and sitting on their heels paddle over the gunwhale next to them. In this way they ride with perfect safety the highest waves, and venture without the least concern in seas where other boats or seamen could not live an instant.
generally white cedar, though the
fir is

sides are secured

by cross-bars, or round

sticks,

THE COLUMBIA RIVER TRIBES

The KiUamucks,
Clatsops, Chinnooks,

bouring nations with

whom we

and Cathlamahs, the four neighhave had most intercourse, preserve a

general resemblance in person, dress, and manners.

They

are

of a diminutive stature, badly shaped, and their appearance by

prepossessing.

commonly no means

They have broad,

thick, flat feet, thick ankles,

is

and crooked

legs, the last of

which deformities

to

be ascribed, in part, to the unistrings

versal practice of squatting,

heels,

or sitting on the calves of their legs and

and also

to the tight

bandages of beads and

worn round

the

ankles by the

women, which prevent

the circulation of the blood,

and

render the

legs, of the females particularly, iU-shaped and swoUen. The complexion is the usual copper-coloured brown of the North American tribes, though the complexion is rather lighter than that of the Indians of the Missouri and the frontier of the United States; the mouth is wide and the lips thick; the nose of a moderate size, fleshy, wide at the ex-

tremities, with large nostrils,

and generally low between the

see

eyes,

though

there are rare instances of high acquehne noses; the eyes are generaUy
black, though

we occasionaUy

them of a dark yellowish brown, with a

is

black pupil. But the most distinguishing part of their physiognomy

the

and width of their forehead, a pecuHarity which they owe to one of those customs by which nature is sacrificed to fantastic ideas of beauty. The custom, indeed, of flattening the head by artificial pressure
pecuMar
flatness

The Lewis and Clark Expedition

during infancy prevails

41
the nations

among

all

we have

seen west of the

is

Rocky mountains. To the east unknown that there the western

singular usage,

of that barrier the fashion

so perfectly

Indians, with the exception of the Alliatan

or Snake nation, are designated by the

common name

of Flatheads.

The

which nature could scarcely seem to suggest to remote nations, might perhaps incline us to believe in the common and not very ancient origin of all the western nations. Such an opinion might well accommodate itself with the fact that while on the lower parts of the Columbia both sexes are universally flatheads, the custom diminishes in receding eastward from the common centre of the infection, till among the remoter tribes near the mountains nature recovers her rights, and the wasted folly is confined to a few females. Such opinions, however, are corrected or weakened by considering that the flattening of the head is not, in fact, pecuMar to that part of the continent, since it was among the first objects which struck the attention of Columbus.

But wherever it may have begun, the practice is now universal among Soon after the birth of her child, the mother, anxious to procure for her infant the recommendation of a broad forehead, places it in the compressing machine, where it is kept for ten or twelve months, though the females remain longer than the boys. The operation is so gradual that it is not attended with pain, but the impression is deep and permanent. The heads of the children, when they are released from the bandage, are not more than two inches thick about the upper edge of the forehead, and stiU thinner above; nor with all its efforts can nature ever restore its shape, the heads of grown persons being often in a straight line from the nose to the top of the forehead. The robe of the women is like that worn by the men, except that it does not reach below the waist. Those most esteemed are made of strips of sea-otter skin, which being twisted are interwoven with silk-grass or the bark of the white cedar, in such a manner that the fur appears equally on both sides so as to form a soft and warm covering. The skin of the raccoon or beaver are also employed in the same way, though on other occasions these skins are simply dressed in the hair, and worn without further preparation. The garment which covers the body from the waist as low as the knee before and the thigh behind, is the tissue already described, and
these nations.
. . .

bark of white cedar, the twisted cords of and rushes. Neither leggings nor moccasins are ever used, the mildness of the climate not requiring them as a security from the weather, and their being so much in the water rendering them an incumbrance. The only covering for the head is a hat made of bear-grass and the bark of cedar, interwoven in a conic form, with a knob of the same shape at the top. It has no brim, but is held on the head by a string passing under the chin, and tied to a small rim inside of the hat. The colours are generally black and white only, and these are made into squares,
is

made

either of the bruised

silk-grass, or of flags

42
triangles,

MERIWETHER LEWIS
and sometimes rude
is

and seamen harpooning if the weather be unusually severe, they add a vest formed of skins hke the robe, tied behind, without any shoulder-straps to keep it up. As this vest covers the body from the armpits to the waist, it conceals the breasts, but on all other occasions they are suffered to remain loose and exposed, and present, in old women especially, a most disgusting appearance. The Clatsops and other nations at the mouth of the Columbia have visited us with great freedom, and we have endeavoured to cultivate their
figures of canoes

whales. This

all

the usual dress of females; but

intimacy, as well for the purpose of acquiring information as to leave

behind us impressions favourable to our country. In their intercourse with

us they are very loquacious and inquisitive. Having acquired
language,

much

of their

we

are enabled with the assistance of gestures to hold conver-

sations with great ease.

We

find

them

inquisitive

and loquacious, with

cheerful,

understandings by no means deficient in acuteness, and with very retentive

memories; and though fond of

feasts,

and generally

they are

never gay. Everything they see excites their attention and inquiries, but

having been accustomed to see the whites, nothing appeared to give them

more astonishment than the air-gun. To great intelHgence, and the conversation
active
circle

all

our inquiries they answer with

is

rarely slackens, since there

constant discussion of the events and trade and politics in the httle but
of

Killamucks,

Clatsops,

Cathlamahs,

Wahkiacums,

and

Chinnooks.

Among

themselves, the conversation generally turns on the

subjects of trade or

smoking or eating or connexion with females, before spoken of with a famiharity which would be in the highest degree indecent if custom had not rendered it inoffensive.

whom

this last is

COMMENTS ON THE POSITION OF WOMEN AND OLD PEOPLE

The treatment
tion,

of

women

is

often considered as the standard

by which

the moral qualities of the savages are to be estimated.

Our own observais

however, induced us to think that the importance of the female in

life

savage

has no necessary relation to the virtues of the men, but

regulated wholly by their capacity to be useful.

The Indians whose

treat-

is mildest, and who pay most deference to their by no means the most distinguished for their virtues; nor is this deference attended by any increase of attachment, since they are equally willing with the most brutal husband to prostitute their wives to

ment of

the females

opinions, are

strangers.

On

the other hand, the tribes

among whom

the

women

are very

much debased
and
all

possess the loftiest sense of honour, the greatest Uberality,

qualities of

the
the

good

which

their situation

demands the
is

exercise.

Where

women can
more

aid in procuring subsistence for the tribe they are

treated with

equality,

and

their

importance

proportioned to the

share which they take in that labour; while in countries where subsistence

The Lewis and Clark Expedition

is

43

chiefly

procured by the exertions of the men, the

as burdens. Thus,

women

are considered

and treated
live

among

the Clatsops

and Chinnooks, who

upon fish and roots, which the women are equally expert with the men in procuring, the former have a rank and influence very rarely found among Indians. The females are permitted to speak freely before the men,

to whom indeed they sometimes address themselves in a tone of authority. On many subjects their judgments and opinions are respected, and in

matters of trade their advice

is

generally asked

of the family, too, are shared almost equally.

make fires, assist in cleansing wooden utensils; and whenever

feast prepared, the

the fish,

and pursued. The labours The men collect wood and make the houses, canoes, and

strangers are to be entertained, or a great

meats are cooked and served up by the men. The peculiar province of the female is to collect roots and to manufacture the various articles which are formed of rushes, flags, cedar-bark, and beargrass; but the management of the canoes, and many of the occupations which elsewhere devolves wholly on the female, are here common to both
sexes.

The observation with regard

to the importance of females applies with

equal force to the treatment of old men.

that occupation

Among

tribes

who

subsist

by

hunting, the labours of the chase, and the wandering existence to which

condemns them,

necessarily throws the burden of pro-

curing provisions on the active young men.

is

As

soon, therefore, as a

man

unable to pursue the chase he begins to withdraw something from the

Still,

precarious supplies of the tribe.

sate his

however, his counsels

may compen-

no longer

when he can from camp to camp, as the tribe roams about for subsistence, he is then found to be a heavy burden. In this situation they are abandoned among the Sioux, Assiniboins, and the hunting tribes on the Missouri. As they are setting out for some new excursion, where the old man is unable to follow, his children or nearest relations place before him a piece of meat and some water, and telling him that he has lived long
want of
travel
activity;

but in the next stage of infirmity,

enough, that

it

is

now

time for him to go

home

to his relations,

who

could take better care of him than his friends on earth, leave him, without
remorse, to perish
is

said to prevail

when his little supply is exhausted. The same custom among the Minnetarees, Ahnahawas, and Ricaras, when

they are attended by old

villages,

men on

their hunting excursions. Yet, in their

we saw no want

of kindness to old men.

On

the contrary, probably

because in villages the means of more abundant subsistence renders such

cruelty unnecessary, the old people appeared to be treated with attention,

and some of

their feasts, particularly the buffaloe dances,

were intended

chiefly as a contribution for the old

and

infirm.

PART

II

TRYING TO COPE WITH THE INDIANS

Introduction
by Ruth L. Bunzel
SETTLING INTO THE

NEW COUNTRY MEANT COMING TO TERMS

its

IN

ONE

way or another with

dinary

former inhabitants. Missionaries and traders, hunters and business men, government officials and naturalists, and just or-

men concerned about

with these people,

the fate of the Indian peoples and cultures

this

had

to

cope in one way or another with the problem of sharing

so
strange,

conIn

tinent

so

apparently unassimilable.

this great land,

so sparsely populated, surely there was

to learn

room

for everyone.

The Indian had only

resources.

how

to

make

better use of the land

and

its

In contrast to the explorers,

who

simply observed, these later comers

baptizing them or teaching them or trading with them or moving them around from one part of the

were

all

doing something to the Indians

another,
negotiating
treaties
left

or

country to
treaties.

preventing the

signing

of

Many

of the doers also

records of their experiences, formal

reports of their activities such as the Jesuit Relations, advice (unsolicited)

to

written

government officials (Adair), and the first systematic ethnographies by dedicated amateurs like Morgan and Grinnell.

46

BERNARDINO DE SAHAGUN
(14997-1590)

Fray Bernardino de Sahagun

after the

first

arrived in

Mexico

in

1529, eight years

conquest and destruction of the ancient Aztec capital. Little is known of his early life except that he left the University of Salamanca to

join the Franciscan Order.

He was sent

to

New

Spain in 1529 and remained

in Mexico City in 1590. Mexico he immediately learned Nahuatl, the language of the people among whom he was to spend his life. The work that occupied him fully until 1578 was his monumental General History of the Things of New Spain. During most of these years he taught in the Convent of Tlatelulco where he could command the assistance of young bilingual students. He had with him in the pueblo of Tepeopulco, during the period of intensive work, some ten or twelve Indians well versed in ancient lore, who had lived under the Aztec empire before the conquest. The old men dictated texts in Nahuatl which he wrote out and had interpreted by his young Spanish-speaking informants, former students of the Convent. Although he had mastered the Nahuatl language, he nevertheless used interpreters. He also had his old men write out portions of the text in Nahuatl hieroglyphs and had these interpreted. After many trials and obstructions, orders given and rescinded, the twelve books of the History were completed and a copy of the manuscript was sent to Spain. In the end Sahagun's subvention was withdrawn and

there until his death in the Franciscan

Convent

On

arriving in

his copyists taken

away, as being "inconsistent with the Franciscan ideal

old,

of poverty,"
final

and Sahagun, then over seventy years

had

to

make

the

copy, the eighth, in his

own hand.
was Book IX, "The History of the men who had lived through it and em-

The cause

of Sahagun's troubles

Conquest," told in Nahuatl by old

bodying their version of events and their feelings about them. Sahagun was ordered to "correct" this chapter which, being under Orders, he did. The
final

original

copy of this book was accordingly written in three columns: the Nahuatl version, the "corrected" version in Nahuatl, and the

Spanish translation of the "corrected" version. The original version still exists, but in Nahuatl only. Thus the pious monk fulfilled his vows of
obedience and yet maintained his integrity as a
scientist.

47

48

BERNARDINO DE SAHAGtJN

The

history of this great

its

work

after

it

was sent

to Spain is

even more

extraordinary than
years after
it

previous history.

As

of today, nearly jour hundred

of Sahagun's

was

finished,

no complete version

ever been published in any language. Only one copy of the original

work has manu-

script is known to exist, the one in the Laurentian Library in Florence (The Florentine Codex). A microfilm copy is in the School of American Research in New Mexico. The Nahuatl and English edition, a joint production by Arthur A. O. Anderson of the School of American Research and Charles E. Dibble of the Univesrity of Utah will be, when finished, the first complete translation. (The most important work of the other great anthropologist of that era, Bartolome de las Casas, "The Apostle of the Indians," who pleaded the

unity of

cause of the Indians in the court of Spain and who believed in the psychic man and the evolution of culture, shared a similar fate. His
is

Historia Apologetica de los Indies, in which he developed these ideas, has

never been translated into English, and the Spanish edition

inaccessible

almost

and is but little read.) Sahagiin was undoubtedly one oj the great anthropologists oj all times. His method oj procedure using native texts dictated or written out by Nahuatl-speaking injormants was to be rediscovered three hundred years

ajter his death.

We

would

like to

know more about what manner

and was able
to

oj

man Sahagun

was.

He had

a disciplined mind; he was able to bring order into the exuberance

oj Aztec ceremonialism

make

the complexities oj the

calendar comprehensible. Oj himselj he says nothing in his writings;

we

can only injer his patience, humility and integrity jrom the events oj his
lije

and jrom

his

work and jrom

the devotion oj his students to him. In

1590, ajter 60 years oj living and studying

among

the Aztecs, he died

was buried

in the

Franciscan Convent in Mexico City.

and

R.L.B.

Aztec Beliefs and Practices

THE FEAST OF TEZCATLIPOCA
TfflS

Easter,
as

FEAST WAS THE MOST IMPORTANT OF ALL THE FEASTS. IT WAS LIKE and fell near Easter Sunday a few days after. This youth, reared hath been said, was very comely, and chosen from many. He had long

hair

down

to the waist.

History of the Things oj New Spain (Florentine Codex), into English by Arthur J. O. Anderson and Charles E. Dibble (Santa Fe, N. M.: School of American Research and the University of Utah, 1955). Selections from Pt. Ill, bk. II; Pt. VIII, bk. VII; Pt. V, bk. IV; Pt. VIII, bk.

From Sahagun, General

from the Aztec

translated

vm.

Aztec Beliefs and Practices

49

When, on

this feast,

they slew the young

[the role], they at

once produced another,

man who had been reared for who was to die after one year.
hand,

He walked

everywhere in the town

finely arrayed with flowers in his

and with people who accompanied him. He greeted with good grace those whom he met. All knew that this one was the likeness of Tezcatlipoca, and they bowed before him and worshiped him whenever they met him. Twenty days before this feast came, they gave this young man four comely young women reared for [the part], with whom for aU the twenty days, he had carnal relations. And they changed his array when they gave him these young women: [they] clipped his hair hke a war captain and gave him more finery [even] braver [than what he had had]. Five days before he was to die, they celebrated feasts for him and banquets, in cool and pleasant places. Many of the leading men accompanied him. On the arrival of the day he was to die, they took him to a pyramid or sanctuary which they called Tlacochcalco; and, before he arrived there, at a place which they called Tlapitzauayan, the women withdrew and left him. Arrived at the place where they were to IdU him, he ascended the steps himself; on each of them he shattered one of the flutes which he had played as he walked, all during the year. When he had reached the summit [of the pyramid], they threw him upon the sacrificial stone; they tore out his heart; they brought down the body, carrying it in their hands; below, they cut the head off and ran through it [the crosspiece of the skull rack] which is called tzompantli. Many other ceremonies were
enacted in this feast, which are set forth at length in their account.

CEREMONY FOR MAKE^G THE NEW FIRE

When
ally

[came] the time of the binding of our years, always they gradu-

neared and approached [the year]

Two

Reed. This

is

to say:

they

then reached and ended [a period of] fifty-two years. For at that time
[these years]

were piled up, added one to another, and brought together;

made a circle, as hath been made known. Hence was it said that then were tied and bound our years, and that once again the years were newly laid hold of. When it was evident that the years lay ready to burst into Ufe, everyone took hold of them, so that once more would start forth once again another [period
wherefore the thirteen-year [cycles] had four times

of]

fifty-two years.

Then
It

[the

two
called

cycles]

might proceed to reach one

twice they had

hundred and four years.

was

"One Old Age" when

made

the round,

when

twice the times of binding the years had

come

together.

Behold what was done when the years were bound when was reached when they were to draw the new fire, when now its count was accomplished. First they put out fires everywhere in the country round. And the statues, hewn in either wood or stone, kept in each man's home
the time

50

BERNARDINO DE SAHAGtJN

and regarded as gods, were all cast into the water. Also [were] these [cast away] the pestles and the [three] hearth stones [upon which the cooking ^there was sweeppots rested]; and everywhere there was much sweeping ing very clean. Rubbish was thrown out; none lay in any of the houses. And when they drew the new fire, they drew it there at Uixachtlan, at

midnight,

when

the night divided in half.

a captive, and
the fire
drill.

it

They drew it upon the breast of was a well-born one on whose breast [the priest] bored
a
little [fire] fell,

And when

when

it

took flame, then speedily

open the breast of the captive, seized his heart, and quickly cast it there into the fire. Thus he revived and fed the fire. And the body of [the captive] all came to an end in the flames. And those who drew fire were exclusively the priests, the fire priests, the devout. Of the fire priest of Copulco, who was experienced, it was his ofiice to draw, to drill,
[the priest] slashed

the

in Mexico, they departed. All the fire priests were arranged in order, arrayed in and wearing the garb of the gods. Each one represented and was the likeness of perhaps Quetzalcoatl, or Tlaloc, etc., or whichever one he went representing. Very deliberatly, very stately,

new fire. At nightfall, from here

they proceeded, went spread out, and slowly moved.

It was said: "They walk hke gods." Thus, in deep night, they arrived there at Uixachtlan. And the one who was the fire priest of Copulco, who drew new fire, then began there. With his hands he proceeded to bore continuously his fire driU; he went about making trials with his drill, the firemaker.

And when

it

came

to pass that night feU, all

it

were frightened and

that
if

filled

with dread. Thus was

there

said:

it

was claimed

fire

could not be
forth.

drawn, then [the sun] would be destroyed forever; aU would be ended;

would evermore be
men.

night.

Nevermore would the sun come

Night would prevail forever, and the demons of darkness would descend,
to eat
all went upon the housetops. on the ground below. And women with child put on masks of maguey leaves and took up their maguey-leaf masks. [They] placed [the women] in granaries, for they were looked upon with fear. It was said and claimed that if, truly, the new fire were not drawn, these also would eat men; [for] they would be changed into fierce beasts. And the small children they hkewise masked with maguey leaves. In truth, none [of them] could sleep, or close, shut, or [even] half-close their eyes. From time to time their mothers and fathers were [there with them]; they kept waking them, punching and nudging them, caUing out to them. They woke, cuffed, and nudged them. Because if they were to sleep it was thought they would turn into mice; they would become mice. Hence was heed paid only one thing; there was unwavering attention and expectation as aU remained facing, with neck craned, the summit of Uixachtecatl. Everyone was apprehensive, waiting until, in time, the new

Hence everyone ascended

the terraces;

None remained

in their houses,

Aztec Beliefs and Practices

fire

51

might be drawn
it

shine out.

And when

then

flared

good time, [a flame] would burst forth and came forth, when it took fire, lit, and blazed, and burst into flames, and was visible everywhere. It was
until, in
little

seen from afar.

Then

all

the people quickly cut their ears, and spattered the blood refire.

Although [a child] still lay in the cradle, they also and spattered it [toward] the fire. Thus, it was said, everyone performed a penance. Then [the priests] slashed open [the captive's] breast. In his breast [cavity] the new fire was drawn. They opened the breast of the captive with a flint knife caUed ixquauac. Etc. And then everyone the priests and fire priests took the fire from there. [Having come] from all directions, the fire priests of Mexico had been sent there, charged with the task, as well as those who had come from distant [places] everywhere messengers and runners. For these were all only chosen ones, strong warriors, valiant men, picked as best; the fleet, the swift, who could run like the wind. Because through them they could quickly have fiire come to their cities.
peatedly toward the
cut his ears, took his blood,

First, the fire

brand was prepared and adorned.

It

was caUed
else,

tlepilli.

And
it

this the fire priests

brought. Before [doing] anything

they took

up, direct, to the top of the temple [pyramid], where

of Uitzilopochtli,

and placed

it it].

in the fire holder.

strewed white incense [over

Then they And then they came down,

was kept the image scattered and

and, also be-

and took it direct to the priests' house, the place named Mexico. Later, this was dispersed, and fires were started everywhere in each priests' house and each tribal temple; whereupon it went everywhere to each of the young men's houses. At that time all of the common folk came to the flame, hurled themselves at it, and bUstered themselves as fire was taken. When thus the fire had been quickly distributed everywhere among them, each one laid a fire, and was quieted
fore [doing] anything further, they brought
in his heart.

Then, at this time, all renewed their household goods, the men's array, and the women's array, the mats the mats of large, fat reeds, and the seats. AU was new which was spread about, as well as the hearth stones and the pestles. Also at this time [the men] were newly dressed and wrapped in capes. A woman [such as she] dressed newly in their new skirts and shifts. Thus it was said that truly the year newly started. There was much hap-

piness and rejoicing.

And

they said: "For thus

it is

ended; thus sickness

Then incense was offered; [quail] were decapitated, and incense was offered. They grasped this incense ladle, and raised it in dedication to the four directions in the courtyard. Then they cast it into the hearth. Thus was incense offered.
and famine have
left

us."

Thereupon amaranth seed cakes overspread with honey were eaten.


52

BERNARDINO DE SAHAGtJN

Then all were bidden to fast, and [it was ordered] that no one should drink from the time that it was completely light until it came to be considered midday. And when noon came, then captives and ceremonially bathed ones died. Then aU rejoiced and there was feasting. Then once again fires were newly laid and placed.

THE MEANING OF THE DAYS

Here beginneth the count of each day. Just
as each
its

week was reckoned,

place until one year

so each of the thirteen-day periods went taking

had passed. Once more at its start began the count of each day. The first day count was named One Crocodile. It was the very beginning and precise starting point of aU the day counts, whereby began, continued, and came to an end the year [of 260 days].
It

became
it:

as the leader of this group of thirteen days

which belonged

with

Two

[Wind], Three House, Four Lizard, Five Serpent, Six Death,

Seven Deer, Eight Rabbit, Nine Water, Ten Dog, Eleven Monkey, Twelve Grass, and Thirteen Reed.

These various days,^ as it was said, all were good. He who was then born a nobleman, it was stated, would be a lord, a ruler; he would prosper; he would be rich and wealthy. And if a commoner were then born, he would be a brave warrior a valiant chief, esteemed, honored, and great. He would always eat. And if a woman were then bom, she would also prosper and be rich. She would have drink and food available. She would have food for others to eat; she would invite others to feast. She would be respectful. She would be visited by others; she would await them with drink and food, with which to revive and refresh the spirits and bodies of those who lived in misery on earth, who, as they slept so they awoke the destitute old men and women, and orphans; the foresaken; and aU would be realized and come to pass that was undertaken; nothing would faU; of her fatigue and effort, nothing would be in vain. Successful would be her dealings around the market place, in the place of business; it was as if it would sprinlde, shower, and rain her wares upon her.

sign

furthermore they said that even though favorable was the day on which he had been bom, if he did not strictly perform his penances, if he took not good thought, if he did not accept the reprimands and punishment meted out to him, the punishment with which he was punished and the correction with which he was corrected, the exhortations of the old men and the old women; if he became bad and perverse and followed not the way of righteousness, succeeded in nothing, and en-

And

1 The 260-day count is still used for magic and divination by the Highland Maya of Guatemala and Chiapas. R. Bunzel: Chichicastenango. Publ. American Ethnological Society, 1951. R.L.B.

Aztec Beliefs and Practices

tirely

53

by

his

own

acts

harm
lot:

to himself, failed, lost through his

brought himself to ruin, despised himself, brought own neglect, gave up, and en-

his reward, and his dangered that which might be his good fortune, then he tarnished, polluted, and ruined with debauchery his birthright

of anyone who had gained merit and reward being then born, his and mothers said: "Upon a good day sign hath he been born and created and come forth on earth; he hath arrived upon the earth on [the day sign] One Crocodile. Let him be bathed." Whereupon they gave him a name. They called him Cipac. Or else, they gave him the name of another one of his grandparents. Etc. And, on the other hand, if it were the wish [of the parents], perchance they passed over the days; perchance they settled upon still another day for him to be bathed. For One Crocodile bore with it all favorable day
fathers
signs.

And

THE EDUCATION OF A PRINCE

And
and of
raised

here
all

is

described the rearing of the sons of those

who were

lords,

the princes,

who were

the sons of lords and noblemen.

Their mothers and fathers nourished and raised them, or nursemaids

them while they were

[the boys]

stiU small children.

upon

when they were perhaps six years old, therewent [forth] to play. Their pages perhaps two, or three accompanied them that they might amuse them. [The child's] father or mother charged these [pages] that [the boy] not behave ill, that he not taint himself with vice, as he went along the streets.
they could run,

And when

And
others

also they took great care that he should converse fittingly with

that his conversation should be proper; that he should respect

and

show reverence to others [when] perchance he somewhere might chance to meet a judge, or a leading militia officer, or a seasoned warrior, or someone of lesser rank; or a revered old man, or a respected old woman; or someone who was poor. He should greet him and bow humbly. He
said:

"Come

hither,

And
son,
it

the old one

precious

me bow before thee." who had been greeted then said: "O my beloved grandstone, O precious feather, thou has shown me favor. May
beloved grandfather;
let

my

go well with thee."

And when
for
it.

the

young boy thus saluted

it;

others, they praised

They

rejoiced greatly over

this

they were joyful because of

him highly it. They

said:

"How wiU

beloved child be,

his

a nobleman.

Mayhap

if he shall live? He wiU in sooth be reward wiU be something [great]."

And when
fire priests

he was already maybe

ten, twelve, or thirteen years old, they

placed him in the priests' house; they deUvered him into the hands of the

and [other] priests, that he might be reared there, corrected, and instructed; that he might live an upright life. They constrained him to do the penances, setting fir branches [on the city altars] at night, or there

54

BERNARDINO DE SAHAGiJn

where they went to place the fir branches on mountain tops there where sacrifices were made at midnight. Or else he entered the song house; they left him in the hands of the masters of the youths. They charged him with with all which was concerned the sweeping, or with dancing and song with the performance of penances. And when he was already fifteen years old, then he took up arms; or, reaching twenty years of age, then he went forth to war. First [his parents] summoned those who were seasoned warriors. They gave them to eat and to drink, and they gave gifts to all the seasoned warriors. They gave them large, cotton capes, or carmine colored breech clouts, or capes painted

then they besought the seasoned warriors; in just the been told above, so they entreated them. And then they took him to the wars. The seasoned warriors went taking great care of him, lest somewhere he might be lost. And they taught him well how to guard himself with a shield; how one fought; how a spear was fended off with a shield. And when a battle was joined, when already there was fighting and perhaps already captives were being taken, they taught him weU and made him see how he might take a captive. Perhaps then he took a captive with the aid of others, or he [alone] could take one. For truly it was well seen to that many men become brave warriors.
with designs.

And

same way

as hath

And when
went
to

captives were being taken, then at once couriers, of

forth, called victory messengers,

mar-

riageable age, quickly

went inform Moctezuma.

who

speedily

And when

the victory messengers

entered into the presence of

had come Moctezuma and

to arrive, then they quickly

said to him:

"O

our lord,

O my
evil,

youth, pay thy debt and thy service [to the god]; for the

omen

of

Uitzilopochtli, hath

shown favor and been

dexterous in

pierced the rampart of

men

For they have arms of the city against which

gracious.

they have gone.

was when captives were taken. When it had come went against and conquered the city, then the captives were counted, there, in wooden cages: how many had been taken by Tenochtitlan, how many had been taken by Tlatilulco, and by the people of the swamp lands and the people of the dry lands everywhere. The captives were examined [to determine] how many groups of four hundred were
there in battle
to pass that they

And

formed.

Those who counted were the generals and the commanding generals. then they sent messengers here to Mexico. Those who were sent as messengers were seasoned warriors, who informed Moctezuma of the great

And

veracity of the four-hundred count.

They brought word

of

how many

groups

of four

hundred had been made

captive.

then they declared to him how many of the noblemen had won reward for having made captives; that haply a number [of them] had had their hair shorn as seasoned warriors, or that some [had been made]
their

And


Aztec Beliefs and Practices
leaders of the youths.

55

because his

And
if

if

When Moctezuma heard this, he rejoiced exceedingly, noblemen had taken captives. war should be proclaimed against Atlixco, or Uexotzinco, and
. .
.

there once again they took captives, they great honor for
it.

won much
his

glory thereby;

Moctezuma accorded them

captives,

For

noblemen had taken

the estate of the eagle

and had gained repute, and had reached the station of nobility and the ocelot warriors. From there they came to rule, to govern cities; and at that time they seated them with [the nobihtyl, and they might eat with Moctezuma.

PRAYER TO TEZCATLIPOCA BEFORE GOING TO WAR

visible

loving and merciful Lord, our protector and defender, inand impalpable god through whose wiU and wisdom we rule and govern and beneath whose reign we hve! Lord of Battles, it is certain and assured that our enemies begin to prepare and order themselves for a great war. The God of War opens his mouth with hunger to devour the blood of the many who will die in this war, because there is need to delight the heart of the Sun and the God of the Earth who is called Tlatecutli, because they wish to give food and drink to the Gods of Heaven and Earth, to regale them with the flesh and blood of the men who are destined to die in this war. Already the Gods of Heaven and Earth have seen which will be the ones to conquer and which will be conquered; which are those who will kill and which are those who will be killed; whose blood will be drunk and whose flesh wiU be eaten. This is not revealed to the noble mothers and fathers of those who are to die; Mkewise it is not revealed to their wives and relatives, to the mothers who cared for them when they were children, who gave them the milk with which they grew, and their fathers who endured much labor in seeking the things necessary to eat and drink, to wear upon their bodies and their feet, in order to bring them to the condition in which they now are. Indeed, they do not know the fate of the sons whom they reared with so much labor whether they will be taken captives or be slain upon the field of battle.

Our most

Grant, furthermore, our Lord, that those noble ones course of war
Earth,

who

die in the

may be

received peacefully and joyously by the Sun and the

and mother of all, and the heart of love. For you do in loving whose who die in war, for indeed it is for that that you sent them into this world, in order that with their flesh and blood they may give to eat to the Sun and the
are the father

who

assuredly you do not deceive us in what

Earth.

Do

not be enraged anew. Lord, at these in the pursuance of war; for

in the place

where these

shall die

many have

already died, honorable and

noble lords and captains and valiant men. Because the nobiUty and honor
of the noble

and honorable ones in the exercise of war has already been


56
revealed and

BERNARDINO DE SAHAGtJN

made manifest. Grant, therefore, Lord, that all may underworth and value of each one, that he may be cherished and stand the valued hke a precious jewel and a rich plume. Most merciful God, Lord of Battles, Emperor of the World, whose name is Tezcatlipoca, invisible and impalpable one, we beseech you that whomsoever you may permit to be killed in this war may be received in the house of the Sun, that he may be received with love and honor in Heaven, and may be given his rightful place and rank among the valiant and famous
heroes

who have

died in battle

with
whom

Sr. Quitziquatzin, Sr.

Maciehcatzin,

Tlacavepatzin, Yxtlicenhavac, and

all

the other valiant and famous

men

who have
joy to our

died in war before these,

who even now

are giving deMght and

Lord

the Sun, with

they rejoice and are rich in eternal

joy and wealth, which will be without end.

Now

perpetually they drink the

is

sweetness of the sweetest flowers and those most delicious to taste. This
the pleasure of the valiant

and honorable heroes who die in war. And so they are drunk with joy; they have no cares, nor do they care to keep count of the days and the nights or of the years and the seasons, for their joy and happiness is without end and flowers which they sip will never wither nor will their sweetness depart. Longing for this, the men of good countenance strive to die honorably. Finally, that which we beseech your Majesty, for you are our most merciful Lord, our invincible Emperor, that you will grant that those who shall die in this war be received with hearts of mercy and love by our Father the Sun, our Mother the Earth, for you alone live and reign and are our most merciful God. And we pray not only for the leaders, the chiefs and nobles, but also for all the common soldiers whose hearts are afiiicted, and who call upon your presence asking that you do not hold at naught their lives, for they face the enemy without fear and with the desire of death. Grant them, therefore, some small portion of what they desire, which is some repose and rest in this life, or, if they are not to prosper in this world, let them be marked as the servants and oflicials of the Sun, to give meat and drink to the Gods of Heaven and Earth. And as for those who are charged with the government of the republic, or to be Tlacatecatl or tlacochicalatl, give them such virtue that they may be fathers and mothers of warriors, and those who go about in the fields and the forests, who climb the peaks and descend into the ravines, and those who hold in their hands the right of judgment over criminals and enemies, and also those who distribute your dignities, the ofiices and arms of war, the shields and other arms and insignia, who bestow the right to wear helmets and plumes in the hair, the jewels for the ears and lip, the bracelets and belts of gold, the collars and anklets, and who decree the new pattern of the robes and mantles which each may wear. They are the ones who give permission to wear precious jewels ^jades and turquoises and to wear rich plumes and embroideries, and collars and jewels of gold

Aztec Beliefs and Practices

all

57

and precious and which are given from your wealth and which you bestow as a mark of favor upon those who perform feats of valor and heroism in war. We pray also that you may grant the favor of yom- largesse to more lowly soldiers; grant them some covering for their bodies and good lodging in this world, make them valiant and intrepid, remove all cowardice from their hearts so that not only may they greet death with joyousness ^for that is what they desire and hold sweet and good but that they may fear neither swords nor arrows, but rather hold them as something sweet and gentle, as flowers and sweet confections, that they may not be frightened or startled by the cries and shouts of their enemies. Deal thus with them as with your friends. And, in accordance with your greatness, Lord of Battles, upon whose desire victory depends, who will aid whom you wish and forsake whom you wish, and need take counsel with no one, we beseech your Majesty: may you disregard and confound our enemies, so that they may rush into our arms and without injuring us fall into our hands and the hands of our warriors and fighters, who endure poverty and labor. O our Lord, regard your realm, for you are God and aU-powerful, you ordain aU things and understand and dispose all things; you ordain whether this your republic will be rich and prosperous and exalted and honored and famed among nations for the exercise of arms and valor in war; and whether or not those shall live and prosper who now bear arms in the service of the Sun. And if in the time ahead you may deem it best that they die in war, may they go to the house of the Sun among the famous and valiant youths who live there and who have died in battle.
things that are rare

{Translated here for the

first

from the Spanish

text in

time by Ruth L. Bunzel Edward King, Viscount

Kingsborough, Antiquities of Mexico, London,

Aglio. 1830-1848,

vols.)

The
PAUL LE JEUNE
(1592-1664)

Jesuit Relations

JACQUES MARQUETTE
(1637-1675)

MATURIN LE PETIT
(1693-1739)

The

first

Jesuits arrived in the

New World

with Champlain in 1632, and

the care of souls in

New

France became

their responsibility. Their missions

along the

St.

Lawrence, the Great Lakes and the Mississippi became centers

for exploration and trade.

The missions at Michillimackinac (on the strait between Lake Huron and Lake Michigan in Huron country) and Kaskaskia (on the Mississippi at the mouth of the Kaskaskia River in Illinois country) were the most famous. From these outposts explorers and voyageurs struck out into the dark wilderness; to them they returned months or years later, weary, often ill, their numbers reduced, to enjoy once more such rude
comforts as the frontier offered, the companionship of their

own

people

and the solace of religion. The labors of the Jesuits among the
best told in their

tribes to

which they were sent are

own

words. Each year the head of the Jesuit Order in

New

report of the year's activities,

France received from each of the missions under his jurisdiction a and such information concerning the native
These were

people as had been gathered by the industrious fathers.

gathered together into the Relation for that year and forwarded to the

mother house

in Paris, together with

Jesuit activities in

New

France

sundry other documents relating to

letters

special reports,

from members

of the Society visiting various missions, etc. In Paris the Relations were

promptly published by a French printer. The seventy-three volumes, covering the years 1601-1791, comprise the basic sources for the history of
that period

and

the ethnography of the area, which included such key

tribes as the Iroquois, the

Montagnais, the Huron, the Ottawa, the Ojibwa,

Illinois, the

and, in the later period, the

Arkansas, and the Natchez.

head of Jesuit missions at Quebec during the early years of exploration. His Relations are compilations from reports from
the

Le Jeune was

58

The

Jesuit Relations

59
his

outlying stations,

and include

own

researches.

They contain

the fullest

and

Le

accounts of the Northern tribes. In his own investigations Jeune, like Sahagun, used Indian converts to interpret and explain
earliest
life,

Indian

while he himself wrestled with the complexities of the Algonchar-

kian language. In his accounts the native people are not "savages" or

"Indians" but Montagnais, Huron, or Iroquois, each tribe having

acteristic

its

way

of

life.

Out

of this multipilicity the concept of culture

was

beginning to emerge.

French settlement of the interior of the American continent did not mountain trails as in New England but followed the great inland waterways. Jacques Marquette's name is linked with the exploration and settlement of the Mississippi as Champlain's is with the St. Lawrence. Marquette came to America as a missionary in 1666. In the nine years before his untimely death he left enduring marks upon the New World. He founded the Jesuit Mission at Sault Ste. Marie on Lake Superior, then the uttermost wilderness, built the chapel and mission at Michillimackinac, the center of the fur trade for two centuries, and from
strike inland over

there

embarked on

his greatest enterprise,

the

exploration with Lrouis

from the west had described. Leaving Michillimackinac in the spring of 1673, they went up Lake Michigan and Green Bay, ascended the Fox River through Winnebago
Joliet of the great river

which

visiting Indians

country to the portage that took them to the Wisconsin,

to the Mississippi.

down

the Wisconsin

They descended

the Mississippi by canoe to the

mouth

of the Arkansas, a journey of over 2,000 miles, before returning to their

base.

cultures he described with a

Wherever Marquette went he made friends with the Indians, whose sympathy rare among the Jesuit missionaries.
visiting the Illinois

While

he had a chance to see the "Calumet Dance,"

portions of which he describes. This beautiful ceremony, widely distributed

among
allude,

the Indians of the Southern Plains, to which

many

early travelers

was never

fully
its

described until the

20th century when Alice

p. 239.)

Fletcher witnessed

performance by the Pawnee. (See

At

the request of the Kaskaskia Indians Marquette returned the follow-

ing year to found a mission

service at the

among them. After conducting an Easter

ill

new

shrine,

Marquette,

with dysentery, attempted to

return to Michillimackinac, but died on the shore of

the river that bears his

Lake Michigan near

two

name. The Mission at Kaskaskia remained the great

center of Indian trade

and communication on

the Mississippi for

hundred years.

I^

Petit

was

the

head of the

Jesuit Mission at

New

Orleans at the time

of the Natchez revolt.

warlike tribe

The Natchez, before their destruction a proud and and a great power in the Lower Mississippi Valley, goaded

60

LE JEUNE, MARQUETTE, LE PETIT

by the arrogance of the French commander rose one night and massacred French missionaries, traders, and settlers. Le Petit's account to his Superior of this tragic event begins with a systematic description of the religion, political organization and social structure of the Natchez tribe which he regarded as necessary background for an understanding of the situation.

R.L.B.

PAUL LE JEUNE
(1592-1664)

Notes on the Northern Tribes

RELIGION OF THE ALGONQUAIN INDIANS

THEY BELIEVE THAT THERE ARE CERTAIN GENII OF LIGHT, OR GENII OF THE which they call Khichikouai from the word Khichikou, which means "light" or "the air." The Genii, or Khichikouai, are acquainted with future events, they see very far ahead; this is why the Savages consult them, not all [the savages] but certain jugglers, who know better than the others how to impose upon and amuse these people. I have chanced to be present when they consulted these fine Oracles, and here is what I have observed.
air,

two or three young men erected a tent in the middle ground in the form of a circle, and to hold them in place they fastened to the tops of these poles a large ring, which completely encircled them; this done, they enclosed this

Towards

nightfall,

of our Cabin; they stuck six poles deep into the

Edifice with Castelognes, leaving the top of the tent open;

it is

all

that a

taU

man can do to reach to the top of this round or 6 men standing upright. This house made,
the Genii or Khichikouai,

tower, capable of holding

the fires of the cabin are
lest the

entirely extinguished,

and the brands thrown outside,

flame frighten

away

who

are to enter this tent; a

young

juggler

slipped in from below, turning back, for this purpose, the covering which
it when he had entered, for they must be very no opening in this fine palace except from above. The juggler, having entered, began to moan softly, as if complaining; he shook the tent at first without violence; then becoming animated little by little, he commenced to whistle, in a hollow tone, and as if it came from afar; then to talk as if in a bottle; to cry like the owls of these countries, which it seems to me have stronger voices than those of France; then to howl

enveloped

it,

then replaced

careful that there be

From The Jesuit Relations and Allied Documents 1610-1791, edited by R. G. Thwaites (Cleveland: The Burrows Brothers Company, 1897), "Le Jeune's Relation of 1634," Vol. 6, pp. 163-173; 21-23.
61

62 and
it

PAUL LE JEUNE
sing, constantly

varying the tones; ending by these syllables, ho ho,

hi hi,

gui gui, nioue, and other similar sounds, disguising his voice so that

seemed to me I heard those puppets which showmen exhibit in France. Sometimes he spoke Montagnais, sometimes Algonquain, retaining always the Algonquain intonation, which, like the Provencal, is vivacious. At first, as I have said, he shook this edifice gently; but, as he continued to become more animated, he fell into so violent an ecstasy, that I thought he would break everything to pieces, shaking his house with so much force and violence, that I was astonished at a man having so much strength; for, after he had once begun to shake it, he did not stop until the consultation was over, which lasted about three hours. Whenever he would change his voice, the Savages would at first cry out, moa, moa, "listen, listen;" then, as
an invitation to these Genii, they said to them, Pitoukhecou, Fitoukhecou, "enter, enter." At other times, as if they were replying to the howls of the
juggler, they
I

drew

this aspiration

from the depths of

their chests, ho, ho.

was seated

like the others,

looking on at this wonderful mystery, forbidden

had not vowed obedience to them, I did not fail to word into the proceedings. Sometimes I begged them to have pity on this poor juggler, who was killing himself in this tent; at other times I told them they should cry louder, for the Genii had gone to sleep. Some of these Barbarians imagined that this juggler was not inside, that he had been carried away, without knowing where or how. Others said that his body was lying on the ground, and that his soul was up above the
to speak; but as I
little

intrude a

tent,

where

it

spoke
fire.

at first, calling these Genii,

and throwing from time to

time sparks of

Now

to return to our consultation.

The Savages having

heard a certain voice that the juggler counterfeited, uttered a cry of joy,
saying that one of these Genii had entered; then addressing themselves
to him, they cried out, Tepouachi, tepouachi, "call, call;" that
is,

"call thy

companions." Thereupon the juggler, pretending to be one of the Genii and changing his tone and his voice, called them. In the meantime our
juggler

who was who was in men were made to

sorcerer,

present, took his

the tent,

drum, and began to sing with the and the others answered. Some of the young
Apostate,

dance,

to hear of

it,

but the sorcerer

among others the made him obey.

who

did not wish

At

last, after

a thousand cries and howls, after a thousand songs, after

this fine edifice,

having danced and thoroughly shaken

lieving that the Genii or Kichikouai

the Savages be-

them.

He

asked them about his

also sick.

had entered, the sorcerer consulted health, (for he is sick), and about that of

his wife,

who was

feited them,

answered

that, as to his wife, she

These Genii, or rather the juggler who counterwas already dead, that it was

all over with her. I could have said as much myself, for one needed not to be a prophet or a sorcerer to guess that, inasmuch as the poor creature was already struck with death; in regard to the sorcerer, they said that he would see the Spring. Now, knowing his disease, which was a pain in the

Notes on the Northern Tribes

loins, or rather

63

an infirmity resulting from his licentiousness and excesses, I said to him, seeing that he was otherwise healthy, and that he drank and ate very heartily, that he would not only see the spring but also the Summer, if some other accident did not overtake him, and I was not mistaken. After these interrogations, these fine oracles were asked if there would
for he
is vile

to the last degree,

soon be snow, if there would be much of it, if there would be Elks or Moose, and where they could be found. They answered, or rather the juggler, always disguising his voice, that they saw a little snow and some moose far away, without indicating the place, having the prudence not
to

commit themselves. So this is what took place

in this consultation, after

it

which

wished

to get hold of the juggler; but, as

tent

was

night,

and from our Mttle cabin so swiftly, I was aware of it. He and all the other Savages, who had come from the other Cabins to these beautiful mysteries, having departed, I asked the Apostate if he was so simple as to believe that the Genii entered and spoke in this tent. He began to swear his belief, which he had lost and denied, that it was not the juggler who spoke, but these Khichikouai or Genii of the air, and my host said to me, "Enter thou thyself into the tent, and thou wilt see that thy body will remain below, and thy soul wiU mount on high." I did want to go in; but, as I was the only one of my party, I foresaw that they might commit some outrage upon me, and, as there were no witnesses there, they would boast that I had recognized and admired
before
the truth of their mysteries.

he made his exit from the that he was outside almost

Now

had a great

desire to

know

the nature of these Genii; the

I

Apostate knew nothing about them. The sorcerer, seeing that

covering his mines,

was

dis-

and that

disapproved

of his nonsense, did

to

not wish

to explain anything to me, so that I

wits. I

was compelled

make
this

use of

my

allowed a few weeks to pass; then, springing

subject
it

him,

spoke as

if I

admired
all

his doctrine, saying to

him

that

upon was wrong

to refuse me, since to

which he asked me in regard to our beUef, I answered him frankly and without showing any reluctance. At last he allowed himself to be won over by this flattery, and revealed to me the secrets of the school. Here is the fable which he recounted to me touching the nature and the character of these Genii. Two Savages having consulted these Genii at the same time, but in two different tents, one of them, a very wicked man who had treacherously killed three men with his hatchet, was put to death by the Genii, who, crossing over into the tent of the other Savage to take his life, as well as that of his companion, were themselves surprised; for this juggler defended himself so well that he killed one of these Khichikouai or Genii; and thus it was found out how they were made, for this One remained in the place where he was killed. Then I asked him what was his form.
the questions

64

PAUL LE JEUNE
as large as the fist,"

"He was

rather long." I judged that he

he replied; "his body was of stone, and was cone-shaped, large at one end, and

gradually becoming smaller towards the other. stone body there

is flesh

They

believe that in this

and blood, for the hatchet with which this Spirit was killed was bloody. I inquired if they had feet and wings, and was told they had not. "Then how," said I, "can they enter or fly into these tents, if they have neither feet nor wings?" The sorcerer began to laugh, saying in explanation, "In truth, this black robe has no sense." This is the way they pay me back when I offer some objections to something which
they cannot answer.

As

they

made

a great deal of the

fire

which

this juggler

threw out

Frenchmen could throw it better than he could; for he only made a few sparks fly from some rotten wood which he carried with him, as I am inchned to think, and if I had had some resin I could have made the flames rise for them. They insisted that he entered this house without fire; but I had happened to see some one give him a red-hot coal which he asked to light his pipe. So that is their behef touching the foundations of things good. What
of his tent, I told

them

that our

astonishes

me

is

their ingratitude;

for,

although they beUeve that the

Messou has

restored the world, that Nipinoukhe and Pipounoukhe bring

the seasons, that their Khichikouai teach them where to find Elks or Moose, and render them a thousand other good offices, yet up to the present I have not been able to learn that they render them the slightest honor. I have only observed that, in their feasts, they occasionaUy throw a few spoonfuls of grease into the fire, pronouncing these words: Papeouekou, Papeouekou; "Make us find something to eat, make us find something to

eat."

believe this prayer

is

addressed to these Genii, to

whom

they

present this grease as the best thing they have in the world.

ON THE LANGUAGE OF THE MONTAGNAIS SAVAGES

wrote last year that their language was very rich and very poor, fuU abundance and full of scarcity, the latter appearing in a thousand difof ferent ways. AU words for piety, devotion, virtue; all terms which are
I

used to express the things of the other

life;

the language of Theologians,

all

Philosophers, Mathematicians, and Physicians, in a word, of

learned

words which refer to the regulation and government of a city, Province, or Empire; all that concerns justice, reward and punishment; the names of an infinite number of arts which are in our Europe; of an infinite number of flowers, trees, and fruits; of an infinite number of animals, of thousands and thousands of contrivances, of a thousand beauties and riches, all these things are never found either in the thoughts or upon the lips of the Savages. As they have no true religion nor knowledge of the virtues, neither public authority nor government, neither Kingdom nor

men;

all

Notes on the Northern Tribes

65

Republic, nor sciences, nor any of those things of which I have just

spoken, consequently

refer to that world of wealth

from their and show that

First, I find

and names which and grandeur must necessarily be absent vocabulary; hence the great scarcity. Let us now turn the tables
all

the expressions, terms, words,

this

language
infinite

is

fairly

gorged with richness.

an

number

of proper

nouns among them, which

cannot explain in our french, except by circumlocutions.

Second, they have some Verbs which
the Greeks, nor Latins, nor
I call absolute, to

we

ourselves, nor any language of

which neither Europe

with which

am

famihar, have anything similar. For example, the verb

for, if you you have to use another Verb. Third, they have different Verbs to signify an action toward an animate or toward an inanimate object; and yet they join with animate things a number of things that have no souls, as tobacco, apples, etc. Let us give some examples: "I see a man," Niouapaman iriniou; "I see a stone," niouabate; but in Greek, in Latin, and in French the same Verb is used to express, "I see a man, a stone, or anything else." "I strike a dog," ni noutinau attimou; "I strike wood," ninoutinen misticou. This is not all; for, if the action terminates on several animate objects, another Verb has to be used, "I see some men," niouapamaoueth irinioueth, ninoutinaoueth attimoueth, and so on with all the others. In the fourth place, they have Verbs suitable to express an action which terminates on the person reciprocal, and others still which terminate on the things that belong to him; and we cannot use these Verbs, referring

Nimitison means absolutely, "I eat," without saying what; determine the thing you
eat,

to other persons not reciprocal, without speaking improperly. I will explain

myself.

The Verb nitaouin means,

agouniscouehon, "I

am
is,

using a hat;" but

the hat of

using his hat," that

make use of something;" nitaouin when I come to say, "I am the man of whom I speak, we must
"I

change the verb.

JACQUES MARQUETTE
(1637-1675)

The Character and Customs of the

Illinois

WHEN ONE

SPEAKS THE
It

upon by them must also be admitted that they have an air of humanity which we have not observed in the other nations that we have seen upon our route. The shortness Of my stay among Them did not allow me to secure all the Information that I would have desired; among aU Their customs, the following is what I have observed. They are divided into many villages, some of which are quite distant from that of which we speak, which is called peouarea.^ This causes some difference in their language, which, on the whole, resembles allegonquin, so that we easily understood each other. They are of a gentle and tractable disposition; we Experienced this in the reception which they gave us. They have several wives, of whom they are Extremely jealous; they watch them very closely, and Cut off Their noses or ears when they misbehave. I saw several women who bore the marks of their misconduct. Their Bodies are shapely; they are active and very skillful with bows and arrows. They also use guns, which they buy from our savage allies who Trade with our french. They use them especially to inspire, through their noise and smoke, terror in their Enemies; the latter do not use guns, and have never seen any, since they live too Far toward the West. They are warlike, and make themselves dreaded by the Distant tribes to the south and west, whither they go to procure Slaves; these they barter, selling them at a high price to other Nations, in exchange for other Wares. Those very Distant Savages against whom they war have no Knowledge of Europeans; neither do they know anything of iron, or of Copper, and they have only stone
if

language, "the men,"

As

WORD

"iLINOIS," IT IS AS IF

ONE

SAID IN THEIR

the other Savages were looked

merely as animals.

Peoria.R.L.B.

From The Jesuit Relations and Allied Documents 1610-1791, edited by R. G. Thwaites (Cleveland: The Burrows Brothers Company, 1897), "F. Marquette's First Voyage," Vol. 59, pp. 125-135.
66

The Character and Customs

Knives.

of the Illinois

67

When the Ilinois depart to go to war, the whole village must be by a loud Shout, which is uttered at the doors of their Cabins, the night and The Morning before their departure. The Captains are distinguished from the warriors by wearing red Scarfs. These are made, with considerable Skill, from the Hair of bears and wild cattle. They paint their faces with red ocher, great quantities of which are found at a distance of some days' journey from the village. They live by hunting, game being plentiful in that country, and on Indian corn, of which they always have a good crop; consequently, they have never suffered from famine. They also sow beans and melons, which are Excellent, especially those that have red seeds. Their Squashes are not of the best; they dry them in the sun, to eat them during The winter and the spring. Their Cabins are very large, and are Roofed and floored with mats made of Rushes. They make aU Their utensils of wood, and Their Ladles out of the heads of cattle, whose Skulls they know so well how to prepare that they use these ladles
notified

with ease for eating their sagamite.

They

are liberal in cases of illness,

is

and Think that the

effect of the

medicines administered to them

in proportion to the presents given to the

physician. Their garments consist only of skins; the

clad very modestly and very becomingly, while the

trouble to Cover themselves. I
Ilinois, as well as

women are always men do not take the

superstition

know not through what

still

some

some Nadouess^ while

young, assume the garb of

retain it throughout their Mves. There is some mystery in this. For they never marry and glory in demeaning themselves to do everything that the women do. They go to war, however, but can use only clubs, and not bows and arrows, which are the weapons proper to men. They are present at all the juggleries, and at the solemn dances in honor of the Calumet; at these they sing, but must not dance. They are summoned to the Councils, and nothing can be decided without their advice. Finally, through their profession of leading an Extraordinary life, they pass for Manitous, That is to say, for Spirits, or persons of Consequence. There remains no more, except to speak of the Calumet. There is nothing more mysterious or more respected among them. Less honor is paid to the Crowns and scepters of Kings than the Savages bestow upon

women, and

this. It

seems to be the
It

God

of peace and of war, the Arbiter of

life

and of

death.

has but to be carried upon one's person, and displayed, to enable

one to walk safely through the midst of Enemies

the Fight, lay
Ilinois

who,
all

in the hottest of

down

Their arms

when

it

is

shown. For That reason, the

gave
I

me

one, to serve as a safeguard

among
is

the Nations through

whom

had

to pass during

my

voyage. There
solely

a Calumet for peace, and

one for war, which are distinguished

with which they are adorned;
2

by the Color of the feathers

it

Red

is

a sign of war. They also use

to

The Sioux.R.L.B.

68

JACQUES MARQUETTE

put an end to Their disputes, to strengthen Their alliances, and to speak

to Strangers. It
is fashioned from a red stone, polished like marble, and bored in such a manner that one end serves as a receptacle for the

fits into the stem; this is a stick two feet long, an ordinary cane, and bored through the middle. It is ornamented with the heads and necks of various birds, whose plumage is very beautiful. To these they also add large feathers, red, green, and other colors, wherewith the whole is adorned. They have a great regard for it, because they look upon it as the calumet of the Sun; and, in fact,

tobacco, while the other

as thick as

they offer

it

to the latter to

smoke when they wish

to obtain a calm, or

rain, or fine weather.

They

scruple to bathe themselves at the beginning

of Summer, or to eat fresh fruit, until after they have performed the dance, which they do as follows: The Calumet dance,^ which is very famous among these peoples, is performed solely for important reasons; sometimes to strengthen peace,

or to unite themselves for

rejoicing.

some

great war; at other times, for public

Sometimes they thus do honor to a Nation who are invited to be present; sometimes it is danced at the reception of some important personage, as if they wished to give him the diversion of a Ball or a Comedy. In Winter, the ceremony takes place in a Cabin; in Summer, in the open fields. When the spot is selected, it is completely surrounded by trees, so that all may sit in the shade afforded by their leaves, in order to be
protected from the heat of the Sun.
various colors,
is

large

mat

of rushes, painted in

spread in the middle of the place, and serves as a carpet

upon which to place with honor the God of the person who gives the Dance; for each has his own god, which they call their Manitou. This is a serpent, a bird, or other similar thing, of which they have dreamed while sleeping, and in which they place aU their confidence for the success of their war, their fishing, and their hunting. Near this Manitou, and at its right, is placed the Calumet in honor of which the feast is given; and all around it a sort of trophy is made, and the weapons used by the warriors of those Nations are spread, namely: clubs, war-hatchets, bows, quivers, and arrows.
Everything being thus arranged, and the hour of the Dance drawing
near, those

who have been appointed

to sing take the

most honorable
are gifted

place under the branches; these are the

men and women who

with the best voices, and

all

who

sing together in perfect harmony. Afterward,

in a circle

by inhaling the from his mouth upon the Manitou, as if he were offering to it incense. Every one, at the outset, takes the Calumet in a respectful manner, and, supporting it with both hands, causes it to dance
one,
the Manitou. This he does

come to take their seats on arriving, must salute

it

under the branches; but each

smoke, and blowing

Fletcher:

The Pipe Ceremonial of the Southern Plains The Hako: A Pawnee Ceremony. See page

described at length in 239. R.L.B.

A. C.

The Character and Customs

in cadence, keeping

of the Illinois
air of the songs.
it

69

good time with the

from one

He makes
he who
is

it

execute

many

differing figures;

sometimes he shows

to the

whole assemto

bly, turning himself

side to the other. After that,

begin the Dance appears in the middle of the assembly, and at once

Sometimes he offers it to the sun, as if he wished the it; sometimes he inclines it toward the earth; again, he makes it spread its wings, as if about to fly; at other times, he puts it near the mouths of those present, that they may smoke. The whole is done in cadence; and this is, as it were, the first Scene of the Ballet.
continues
this.

latter to

smoke

MATURIN LE
(1693-1739)

PETIT

Concerning the Natchez

THEIR TEMPLES
THIS NATION OF SAVAGES INHABITS
fertile

ONE OF THE MOST BEAUTIFUL AND

the only one

countries in the World, and

is

on

this continent

which
is

appears to have any regular worship. Their Religion in certain points

very similar to that of the ancient Romans. They have a Temple
Idols,
filled

with

which are different figures of men and of animals, and for which they have the most profound veneration. Their Temple in shape resembles an earthen oven, a hundred feet in circumference. They enter it by a little door about four feet high, and not more than three in breadth. No

window

is

to

three rows of mats, placed one

injuring the

The arched roof of the edifice is covered with upon the other, to prevent the rain from masonry. Above on the outside are three figures of eagles made
be seen
there.
is is

of wood, and painted red, yellow, and white. Before the door of shed with folding-doors, where the Guardian of the
all

a kind
lodged;

Temple

around

it

runs a circle of palisades, on which are seen exposed the

skulls of all the

battles in

heads which their Warriors had brought back from the which they had been engaged with the enemies of their Nation.

distance from each other,

In the interior of the Temple are some shelves arranged at a certain on which are placed cane baskets of an oval

shape, and in these are enclosed the bones of their ancient Chiefs, while by
their side are those of their victims

who had caused

themselves to be

strangled, to follow their masters into the other world.

shelf supports

Another separate
of stone

many

flat

baskets very gorgeously painted, in which they

preserve their Idols. These are figures of

men and women made

or baked clay, the heads and the

tails

of extraordinary serpents,

some

From The Jesuit Relations and Allied Documents 1610-1791, edited by R. G. Thwaites (Cleveland: The Burrows Brothers Company, 1897), "Le Petit's Letter to Davaugour," Vol. 68, pp. 123-135.
70

Concerning the Natchez

stuffed owls,

71

some

pieces of crystal,

and some jaw-bones of large

fish.

In the year 1699, they had there a bottle and the foot of a glass, which they guarded as very precious.

In this Temple they take care to keep up a perpetual very particular to prevent
it

fire,

and they are

it

ever blazing; they do not use anything for

but dry

wood

of the walnut or oak.

The old men

Temple

are

obUged

to carry,

each one in his turn, a large log of wood into the enclosure of the palisade.

The number
the quarter.

of the Guardians of the

is fixed,

and they serve by

He who

is

on duty

is

placed like a sentinel under the shed,

from whence he examines whether the fire is not in danger of going out. He feeds it with two or three large logs, which do not burn except at the extremity, and which they never place one on the other, for fear of
their getting into a blaze.

Of
the

the

women,

the sisters of the great Chief alone have liberty to enter

within the Temple.

common

people, even

memory

of their

the dishes to the

The entrance is forbidden to all the others, as well as to when they carry something there to feast to the relatives, whose bones repose in the Temple. They give Guardian, who carries them to the side of the basket in

which are the bones of the dead; this ceremony lasts only during one moon. The dishes are afterward placed on the pahsades which surround the Temple, and are abandoned to the fallow-deer.

THEIR GREAT CHIEFS

The Sun
is

the principal object of veneration to these people, as they

this

cannot conceive of anything which can be above

heavenly body,
It is for

nothing else appears to them more worthy of their homage.

the

same reason that the great Chief of this Nation, who knows nothing on the earth more dignified than himself, takes the title of brother of the Sun, and the credulity of the people maintains him in the despotic authority which he claims. To enable them better to converse together, they raise a mound of artificial soil, on which they build his cabin, which is of the same construction as the Temple. The door fronts the East, and every morning the great Chief honors by his presence the rising of his elder brother, and salutes him with many bowlings as soon as he appears above

Then he gives orders that they shall light his calumet; he makes him an offering of the first three puffs which he draws; afterward raising his hand above his head, and turning from the East to the West, he shows him the direction which he must take in his course. When the great Chief dies, they demohsh his cabin, and then raise a new mound, on which they build the cabin of him who is to replace him in this dignity, for he never lodges in that of his predecessor. The old men prescribe the Laws for the rest of the people, and one of their principles
the horizon.
. .

is

to

have a sovereign respect for the great Chief, as being the brother

72
of the

MATURIN LE PETIT

Sun and the master of the Temple. They beheve in the immortality and when they leave this world they go, they say, to live in another, there to be recompensed or punished. The rewards to which they look forward, consist principally in feasting, and their chastisement in the privation of every pleasure. Thus they think that those who have been
of the soul,
the faithful observers of their laws will be conducted into a region of

where aU kinds of exquisite viands will be furnished them in abundance that their deUghtful and tranquil days will flow on in the midst of festivals, dances, and women; in short, they will revel in all imaginable pleasures. On the contrary, the violators of their laws will be cast upon lands unfruitful and entirely covered with water, where they wiU not have any kind of corn, but will be exposed entirely naked to the sharp bites of the mosquitoes, that aU Nations will make war upon them, that they will never eat meat, and have no nourishment but the flesh of crocodiles, spoiled fish, and shell-fish.
pleasures,

These people blindly obey the

their lives,

least

wish of their great Chief. They

look upon him as absolute master, not only of their property but also of

and not one of them would dare to refuse him his head, if he it; for whatever labors he commands them to execute, they are forbidden to exact any wages. The French, who are often in need of hunters or of rowers for their long voyages, never apply to any one but the great Chief. He furnishes all the men they wish, and receives payment, without giving any part to those unfortunate individuals, who
should

demand

are not permitted even to complain.

Religion,

One

of the principal articles of their

and particularly for the servants of the great Chief, is that of honoring his funeral rites by dying with him, that they may go to serve him in the other world. In their blindness they willingly submit to this law,
in the foolish belief that in the train of their Chief they will go to enjoy

the greatest happiness.

To
as

give an idea of this bloody ceremony,

as

it is

necessary to

know

that

soon

an

heir presumptive has

been
is

bom

to the great Chief, each

family that has an infant at the breast

all

obliged to pay

him homage. From

number whom they destine for the young Prince, and as soon as they are of a competent age, they furnish them with employments suited to their talents. Some pass their
these infants they choose a certain
service of the
lives in hunting, or in fishing, to furnish supplies for the table; others are

employed in agriculture, while others serve to fiU up his retinue. If he happen to die, aU these servants sacrifice themselves with joy to follow their dear master. They first put on all their finery, and repair to the place opposite to the Temple, where all the people are assembled. After having danced and sung a suflQciently long time, they pass around their neck a cord of buffalo hair with a running knot, and immediately the Ministers
appointed for executions of
this

kind,

come forward

to strangle them, to

recommending them

to

go to rejoin

their master,

and render

him

in the

Concerning the Natchez

other world services even

73

more honorable than those which had occupied them in this. The principal servants of the great Chief having been strangled in this
way, they
bones, particularly those of their arms and leave them to dry for two months, in a kind of tomb, after which they take them out to be shut up in the baskets which are placed in the Temple by the side of the bones of their master. As for the other servants, their relatives carry them home with them, and bury them with their arms and clothes. The same ceremony is observed in like manner on the death of the brothers and sisters of the great Chief. The women are always strangled to foUow the latter, except when they have infants at the breast, in which
strip the flesh off their

and

thighs,

case they continue to

often see

live,

for the purpose of nourishing them.

to find nurses, or

And we

many who endeavor

who

themselves strangle

their infants, so that they shall not lose the right of sacrificing themselves

in the public place, according to the ordinary ceremonies,

and

as the

law

prescribes.

This Government
ing Chief

is

hereditary;

it is

not, however, the son of the reignsister,

who

succeeds his father, but the son of his

is

or the

first

Princess of the blood. This policy

of the hcentiousness of their

founded on the knowledge they have

are not sure, they say, that the

women. They

children of the chief's wife

may be

of the blood Royal, whereas the

son of the
mother.

sister

of the great Chief must be, as least

on the

side of the

The
family,

Princesses of the blood never espouse any but

men

of obscure

ing

and they have but one husband, but they have the right of dismissit pleases them, and of choosing another among those of the Nation, provided he has not made any other alliance among them. If the husband has been guilty of infidelity, the Princess may have his head cut off in an instant; but she is not herself subject to the same law, for she may have as many Lovers as she pleases, without the husband having any power to complain. In the presence of his wife he acts with the most profound respect, never eats with her, and salutes her with howls, as is done by her servants. The only satisfaction he has is, that he is freed from the necessity of laboring, and has entire authority over those who

him whenever

serve the Princess.

THOMAS JEFFERSON
(1743-1826)

Jefferson, child of the Enlightenment,

was naturally concerned with man,

he recognized the unity of
in

and with
the

all varieties

of

man. As a

scientist,

human

race; as a philosopher

and a humanist, he believed

the

psychic unity of man; as a historian, he took a long view of the history of

human
ralist,

culture. In his writings, especially in his controversy with the natu-

Buffon, appears for the first time the idea that the savages of today are not to be compared to the men of contemporary France and England
but to their ancestors, the roving tribes of Gaul, the barbarians at the gates of Rome. He also understood at that early date that each culture was to be

understood and explained in terms of itself. Jefferson occupied himself also with the practical side of Indian affairs. Monticello was still frontier country; there were Indians practically at his
doorstep.

He

carried

on voluminous correspondence with Indian

leaders,

advised them on tribal constitutions, legal codes; he was concerned with

their education for
letter

a new way of life. His farsightedness is apparent in his of instruction to Captain Lewis before the latter set out on his famous

expedition:

The commerce which may be carried on with the people inhabiting the you will pursue renders a knowledge of those people important. You will, therefore, endeavour to make yourself acquainted as far as a diligent pursuit of your journey shall admit, with the names of the nations and their numbers; The extent and limits of their possessions;
.

line

Their relations with other tribes or nations; Their language, traditions, monuments; Their ordinary occupations in agriculture, fishing, hunting, war,

arts,

and the

implements for these;

Their food, clothing, and domestic accommodations; The diseases prevalent among them, and the remedies they use; Moral and physical circumstances which distinguish them from the tribes

we know;
Peculiarities in their laws, customs,

And

articles of

and dispositions; commerce they may need or furnish, and

interest

to
in

what

extent.

extending and strengthening the authority of reason and justice among the people around them, it will be useful to acquire what knowledge you can of the state of moral-

And, considering the

which every nation has

74

Character and Capacities of the North American Indians

ity, religion,

75

and information among them; as it may better enable those who to civilize and instruct them to adapt their measures to the existing notions and practices of those on whom they are to operate. In all your intercourse with the natives, treat them in the most friendly and conciliatory manner which their own conduct will admit; allay all jealousies as to the object of your journey; satisfy them of its innocence; make them acquainted with the position, extent, character, peaceable and commercial dispositions of the United States; of our wish to be neighbourly, friendly, and useful to them, and of our dispositions to a commercial intercourse with them; confer with them on the points most convenient as mutual emporiums, and the articles of most desirable interchange for them and us. If a few of their

may endeavour
. . .

wish to visit us, arrange such a with them, and furnish them with authority to call on our officers on their entering the United States, to have them conveyed to this place at the public expense. If any of them should wish to have some of their young people brought up with us, and taught such arts as may be useful to them, we will receive,
visit

influential chiefs, within practicable distance,

and take care of them. Such a mission, whether of influential chiefs, or of young people, would give some security to your own party. Carry with you some matter of the kine-pox; inform those of them with whom you may be of its efficacy as a preservative from the small-pox, and instruct and encourage them in the use of it. This may be especially done where you winter.
instruct,
.

R.L.B.

On

the Character the

and Capacities of

North American Indians

its

HITHERTO

HAVE CONSIDERED THIS HYPOTHESIS^ AS APPLIED TO BRUTE

extension to the
the opinion of
it:

animals only, and not in

aboriginal or transplanted.

man

of America, whether

It is

former furnishes no exception to

world
for
is

Mons. de Buff on that the "Although the savage of the new

this

about the same height as

to constitute

him

in our world, an exception to the general

man

does not suffice

all

fact that
is

living

nature has

become smaller on

that continent.

The savage
than

feeble,

and

has small organs of generation; he has neither hair nor beard, and no
ardor whatever for his
female;

although

swifter

because he
less

is

better accustomed to running, he

is

strong in body; he

also less

sensitive,

the European on the other hand, and yet more timid and
is,

cowardly; he has no vivacity, no activity of mind; the activity of his

body

is

less

an exercise, a voluntary motion, than a necessary action

1 Buffon's hypothesis "that domestic animals are subject to degeneration climate of America." R.L.B.

from the

From Jefferson, Notes on the State of Virginia (London: J. Stockdale, 1787). Edited by Wm. Peden with an introduction and notes. Published for the Institute of Early American History and Culture (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1955), Vol. 2, pp. 58-65.

76
caused by want; relieve him of hunger and
of the active principle of
all his

THOMAS JEFFERSON

thirst, and you deprive him movements; he will rest stupidly upon his legs or lying down entire days. There is no need for seeking further the cause of the isolated mode of Hfe of these savages and their repugnance for society: the most precious spark of the fire of nature has been refused to them; they lack ardor for their females, and consequently have no love for their fellow men: not knowing this strongest and most tender of all affections, their other feeUngs are also cold and languid; they love their parents and children but little; the most intimate of all ties, the family connection, binds them therefore but loosely together; between family and family there is no tie at all; hence they have no communion, no commonwealth, no state of society. Physical love constitues their only morality; their heart is icy, their society cold, and their rule harsh. They look upon their wives only as servants for all work, or as beasts of burden, which they load without consideration with the burden of their hunting, and which they compel without mercy, without gratitude, to perform tasks which are often beyond their strength. They have only few children, and they take little care of them. Everywhere the original defect appears: they are indifferent because they have little sexual capacity, and this indifference to the other sex is the fundamental defect which weakens their nature, prevents its development, and destroying the very germs of life uproots society at the same time. Man is here no exception to the general rule. Nature, by refusing him the power of love, has treated him worse and lowered him deeper than any animal." An afflicting picture indeed, which, for the honor of human nature, I am glad to believe has no original. Of the Indian of South America I know nothing; for I would not honor with the appelation of knowledge, what I derive from the fables pubUshed of them. These I beUeve to be just as true as the fables of ^sop. This belief is founded on what I have seen of man, white, red, and black, and what has been written of him by authors, enlightened themselves, and writing amidst an enlightened people. The Indian of North America being more within our reach, I can speak of him somewhat from my own knowledge, but more from the information of others better acquainted with him, and on whose truth and judgment I can rely.

From

these sources I
that

am

able to say, in contradiction to this repre-

sentation,

he

is

neither

more

defective

in

ardor,

nor more im-

potent with his female, than the white reduced to the same diet and
exercise:

that

he

is

brave,

when an

enterprize

depends on bravery;

education with him making the point of honor consist in the destruction

an enemy by stratagem, and in the preservation of his own person from injury; or perhaps this is nature; while it is education which teaches us to honor force more than finesse; that he wiU defend himself against an host of enemies, always chusing to be killed, rather than
of
free

Character and Capacities of the North American Indians

to surrender,
well:
tion,

77

though

it

that in other situations also

be to the whites, who he knows will treat him he meets death with more deUberato religious
is

and endures tortures with a firmness unknown almost

affectionate to his

enthusiasm with us: that he

children,

careful of

them, and indulgent in the extreme: that his affections comprehend his
other connections, weakening, as with us, from circle to circle, as they

recede from the center: that his friendships are strong and faithful to
that his sensibility is keen, even the warweeping most bitterly on the loss of their children, though in genriors eral they endeavour to appear superior to human events: that his vivacity and activity of mind is equal to ours in the same situation; hence his eagerness for hunting, and for games of chance. The women

the

uttermost extremity:

are submitted to unjust drudgery. This I believe

is

the case with every

barbarous people. With such,

fore

force

is

law.

The

stronger

sex

there-

imposes on the weaker. It is civihzation alone which replaces women in the enjoyment of their natural equality. That first teaches
us to subdue the selfish passions, and to respect those rights in others

which we value in ourselves. Were we in equal barbarism, our females would be equal drudges. The man with them is less strong than with us, but their woman stronger than ours; and both for the same obvious reason; because our man and their woman is habituated to labour, and formed by it. With both races the sex which is indulged with ease is least athletic. An Indian man is small in the hand and wrist for the same reason for which a sailor is large and strong in the arms and shoulders, and a porter in the legs and thighs. They raise fewer chil-

dren than
the

we

do.

The

causes of this are to be found, not in a difference

of nature, but of circumstance.

men

in their parties of

The women very frequently attending war and of hunting, child-bearing becomes
It
is

extremely inconvenient to them.

said,

therefore,

that

they have

learnt the practice of procuring abortion by the use of some vegetable;

and that it even extends to prevent conception for a considerable time after. During these parties they are exposed to numerous hazards, to excessive exertions, to the greatest extremities of hunger. Even at their

homes on the
at
all,

the nation depends for food, through a certain part of every year,

gleanings of the forest: that

all

is,

they experience a famine once in

or not fed

every year. With

animals,

if

the female be badly fed,

her young perish: and

generation

if

both male and female be reduced to

Hke want,

obstacles then of
multiplication

becomes less active, less productive. To the want and hazard, which nature has opposed to the
animals,
for

of

wild

the

purpose

of

restraining

their

numbers within certain bounds, those of labour and of voluntary abortion are added with the Indian. No wonder then if they multiply less than we do. Where food is regularly supplied, a single farm will shew more of cattle, than a whole country of forests can of buffaloes. The

78

THOMAS JEFFERSON

same Indian women, when married to white traders, who feed them and their children plentifully and regularly, who exempt them from excessive drudgery, who keep them stationary and unexposed to accident, produce and raise as many children as the white women. Instances are known, under these circumstances, of their rearing a dozen children. An inhuman practice once prevailed in this country of making slaves
iards

of the

Indians.

(This practice

commenced with
It
is

the Span-

with the

first

discovery of America).

a fact well

known
as

with us, that the Indian

women
the

so enslaved produced and raised

numerous
lived.

families

as

either

whites

or blacks
less

among whom

they

It

has been said, that Indians have

is

hair than the whites,

except on the head. But this

a fact of which fair proof can scarcely

be had. With them

it

it is disgraceful to be hairy on the body. They say Hkens them to hogs. They therefore pluck the hair as fast as it appears. But the traders who marry their women, and prevail on them

to discontinue this practice, say, that nature

is

the

same with them

as

with the whites. Nor,

if

the fact be true,

it.

is

the consequence necessary

which has been drawn from

the whites; yet they are

more

ardent.

Negroes have notoriously less hair than But if cold and moisture be the

agents of nature for diminishing the races of animals,

all at

once to suspend

their operation as to the physical

how comes she man of the new

size

world,
the

whom

the

man

of our hemisphere,"

Count acknowledges and to

has
this

to
let

be "about the same

as

loose their influence on his

moral

faculties?

How

"combination of the elements and other

physical causes, so contrary to the enlargement of animal nature in this

new

world, these obstacles to the development and formation of great

germs," been arrested and suspended, so as to permit the

to acquire
their action
this,
its

just dimensions,

human body what inconceivable process has and by

been directed on his mind alone? To judge of the truth of form a just estimate of their genius and mental powers, more to facts are wanting, and great allowance to be made for those circumstances of their situation which call for a display of particular talents only. This done, we shall probably find that they are formed in mind as weU as in body, on the same module with the "Homo sapiens Europaeus." The principles of their society forbidding aU compulsion, they are to be led to duty and to enterprize by personal influence and persuasion. Hence eloquence in councU, bravery and address in war, become the foundations of all consequence with them. To these acquirements all their faculties are directed. Of their bravery and address in war we have multiplied proofs, because we have been the subjects on which they were exercised. Of their eminence in oratory we have fewer examples, because it is displayed chiefly in their own councils. Some, however, we have of very superior lustre. I may challenge the whole orations of Demosthenes and Cicero, and of any more eminent orator.

Character and Capacities of the North American Indians

if

79

Europe has furnished more eminent, to produce a single passage, a Mingo chief, to Lord Dunmore, when governor of this state. And, as a testimony of their talents in
superior to the speech of Logan,
this line, I

beg leave to introduce

it.

it,

first

stating the incidents necessary

for understanding

In the spring of the year 1774, a robbery was

com-

mitted by some Indians on certain land-adventurers on the river Ohio.

The

whites in that quarter,

this

according to their custom, undertook to

punish

outrage in a

summary way. Captain Michael Cresap, and

at

a certain Daniel Great-house, leading on these parties, surprized,

different
their

times,

travelling

and hunting
with them,

parties

of

the

Indians,

having

women and

children

and murdered many.

Among

these were

unfortunately the family of Logan,

a chief celebrated in

and long distinguished as the friend of the whites. This unworthy return provoked his vengeance. He accordingly signalized himself in the war which ensued. In the autumn of the same year a decisive battle was fought at the mouth of the Great Kanhaway, between the collected forces of the Shawanese, Mingoes, and Delawares, and a detachment of the Virginia militia. The Indians were defeated, and sued for peace. Logan however disdained to be seen among the suppliants. But, lest the sincerity of a treaty should be distrusted, from which so distinguished a chief absented himself, he sent by a messenger the following speech to be deMvered to Lord Dunmore. "I appeal to any white man to say, if ever he entered Logan's cabin hungry, and he gave him not meat; if ever he came cold and naked, and he clothed him not. During the course of the last long and bloody war, Logan remained idle in his cabin, an advocate for peace. Such was my love for the whites, that my countrymen pointed as they passed, and said, 'Logan is the friend of white men.' I had even thought to have lived with you, but for the injuries of one man. Col. Cresap, the last spring, in cold blood, and unprovoked, murdered all the relations of Logan, not sparing even my women and children. There runs not a drop of my blood in the veins of any living creature. This called on me for revenge. I have sought it: I have killed many: I have fuUy glutted my vengeance. For my country, I rejoice at the beams of peace. But do not harbour a thought that mine is the joy of fear. Logan never felt fear. He will not turn on his heel to save his life. Who is there to mourn for Logan? Not one."
peace and war,

Before

we condemn

the Indians of this continent as wanting genius,

we

must consider that letters have not yet been introduced among them. Were we to compare them in their present state with the Europeans North of the Alps, when the Roman arms and arts first crossed those mountains, the comparison would be unequal, because, at that time, those parts of Europe were swarming with numbers; because numbers produce emulation, and multiply the chances of improvement, and one improvement begets another. Yet I may safely ask, How many good poets, how many able

80

THOMAS JEFFERSON

mathematicians, how many great inventors in arts or sciences, had Europe North of the Alps then produced? And it was sixteen centuries after this before a Newton could be formed. I do not mean to deny, that there are varieties in the race of man, distinguished by their powers both of body and mind. I believe there are, as I see to be the case in the races of other animals. I only mean to suggest a doubt, whether the bulk and faculties of animals depend on the side of the Atlantic on which their food happens to grow, or which furnishes the elements of which they are compounded? Whether nature has enUsted herself as a Cis or Trans-Atlantic partisan? I am induced to suspect, there has been more eloquence than sound reasoning displayed in support of this theory; that it is one of those cases where the judgment has been seduced by a glowing pen: and whilst I render every tribute of honor and esteem to the celebrated Zoologist, who has added, and is still adding, so many precious things to the treasures of science, I must doubt whether in this instance he has not cherished error also, by lending her for a moment his vivid imagination and bewitching
language.

So far the Count de Buffon has carried this new theory of the tendency on this side of the Atlantic. Its application to the race of whites, transplanted from Europe, remained for the Abbe Raynal. "One must be astonished (he says) that America has not yet produced one good poet, one able mathematician, one man of genius in a single art or a single science." "America has not yet produced one good poet." When we shall have existed as a people as long as the Greeks did before they produced a Homer, the Romans a Virgil, the French a Racine and Voltaire, the English a Shakespeare and Milton, should this reproach be still true, we wiU enquire from what unfriendly causes it has proceeded, that the other countries of Europe and quarters of the earth
of nature to behttle her productions
shall not have inscribed any name in the roll of poets. But neither has America produced "one able mathematician, one man of genius in a single art or a single science." In war we have produced a Washington, whose memory wiU be adored while liberty shall have votaries, whose name wiU triumph over time, and wiU in future ages assume its just station among the most celebrated worthies of the world, when that wretched philosophy shall be forgotten which would have arranged him among the degeneracies of nature. In physics we have produced a Franklin, than whom no one of the present age has made more important discoveries, nor has enriched philosophy with more, or more ingenious solutions of the phaenomena of nature. We have supposed Mr. Rittenhouse second to no astronomer Uving: that in genius he must be the first, because he is self-taught. As an

he has exhibited as great a proof of mechanical genius as the world He has not indeed made a world; but he has by imitation approached nearer its Maker than any man who has lived from the creation to this day. As in philosophy and war, so in government, in
artist

has ever produced.

Character and Capacities of the North American Indians

oratory, in painting, in the plastic art,

81

we might shew

that America, though

but a child of yesterday, has already given hopeful proofs of genius, as

well of the nobler kinds, which arouse the best feelings of
call

man, which which substantiate his freedom, and conduct him to happiness, as of the subordinate, which serve to amuse him only. We therefore suppose, that this reproach is as unjust as it is unkind; and that, of the geniuses which adorn the present age, America contributes its full share. For comparing it with those countries, where genius is most cultivated, where are the most excellent models for art, and scaffoldings for the attainment of science, as France and England for instance, we calculate thus. The United States contain three milUons of inhabitants; France twenty millions; and the British islands ten. We produce a Washington, a Franklin, a Rittenhouse. France then should have half a dozen in each of these lines, and Great-Britain half that number, equally eminent. It may be true, that France has: we are but just becoming acquainted with her, and our acquaintance so far gives us high ideas of the genius of her inhabitants. It would be injuring too many of them to name particularly a Voltaire, a Buffon, the constellation of Encyclopedists, the Abbe Raynal himself, &c. &c. We therefore have reason to believe she can produce her full quota of genius. The present war having so long cut off aU communi-

him

into action,

cation with Great-Britain,

we

are not able to

make

a fair estimate of the

state of science in that country.

which she wages war is the only sample before our eyes, and that does not seem the legitimate offspring either of science or of civilization. The sun of her glory is fast
spirit in

The

descending to the horizon. Her philosophy has crossed the Channel, her

freedom the Atlantic, and herself seems passing to that awful dissolution, whose issue is not given human foresight to scan.

Men
JOHN BACHMAN
(1790-1879)

of

Good

Will

JOHN

G. E.

HECKEWELDER

(1783-1823)

MANASSEH CUTLER
(1742-1823)

Some

of the major contributions to

American anthropology

in the early

19th century came from the pens of ministers of God for whom "the increase and diffusion of knowledge" about their fellowmen was a moral
issue.

The

three

men

of

good
all

will represented here

were pastors of three

different faiths

and were

concerned in different ways with the science

of

man. John Bachman was a

naturalist, Professor of

Natural History at the

College of Charleston, South Carolina, and a pastor of the Lutheran

Church.

He was no

dilettante in natural history, but

one of the leading

naturalists of his day.

Audubon, he collaborated with him on his great work in ornithology. The controversy over the unity of the human race was at its height with Morton, Nott, and Gliddon, the most
friend of

prominent physical anthropologists of the day, declaring for plurality. A naturally modest man, averse to controversy, and living in a slave-holding state, Bachman nevertheless felt that here was a moral issue which he
could not evade. His
self in the third
little

book on

the unity of the

human

race grew out

of a paper read before the Literary Club of Charleston. Speaking of him-

person,

Bachman

states his

purpose as follows:

Asked to speak on a subject of natural history, he felt himself constrained by a sense of duty to investigate those branches of science that appeared to militate against the truth of Christianity and selected the Unity of the Human Race as a subject to be discussed at the meeting which in turn took place at his
house.

Several of the advocates of a plurality in the races expressed a desire that

the public should have an opportunity of becoming acquainted with the observations and reasons of an opponent for whom they honestly differed.

In discussing a subject the most difficult in the whole range of sciences, he has often felt himself obliged to differ from the views of other naturalists. He need not add that he has been studious that no difference of views should be expressed in personal or offensive language.
. .

82

Men
.

of
.

Good

Will

83

In his attempt at defending the long-established doctrine of the unity race he has neither sought fame or controversy; to the former he believes he is now indifferent and the latter is adverse to his behavior, his profession and the admonition of declining life. If in this publication he shall give offense, he will regret it; if errors have escaped him he is ready to correct them; and if he has been enabled to add any to the store of human knowledge or any argument in defense of truth, he will feel that his labors have been amply rewarded.
.

of the

human

John Gottlieb Ernestus Heckewelder was one of those missionaries with

warm and enduring devotion to his flock. He was born in England; but his parents, who probably came to England as refugees, emigrated when John
a
his beloved

was a child and joined the Moravian colony in Quebec. Heckewelder first met Delaware Indians when he went with Christian Post, another missionary, to search out a suitable place in Ohio to settle a band of Christian Indians. The project was interrupted by the outbreak of Pontiac's War in 1763 which threw the whole of the western frontier into turmoil.

He

returned

some years

later as

a missionary to the Delawares.

He

re-

mained with them through the troubled years that followed, accompanying them in their various moves that split the tribe into widely-separated fragments. He went with the group that sought refuge in Canada after the American Revolution, helping them to get settled in their new home. He formed many warm personal friendships with individual Indians; when he writes of them he is talking about known and identified individuals

some generalized "Indian" or even "Delaware." The victory of the British in the French and Indian War, with their more aggressive policy toward the Indians and their intention of fully occupying the newly-acquired areas, was disastrous for the Indians. The
rather than

crushing of Pontiac's rebellion demonstrated once again the

military resistance. Pope,

futility

of

who

organized the Pueblo Rebellion of 1680,

and Pontiac employed active methods supported by belief in divine sanction for their movements. The new revivalism that swept the Indian tribes on the western frontier promised that victory was to be achieved through
spiritual regeneration

name has been lost of a whole series of Indian Messiahs who preached would disappear from the continent when the ancient
The "Delaware Prophet"
his

to us

that the
virtues

extra ones such as peaceableness, borrowed from Christian

restored.

was white man a few dogmawere

the

first

plus

Heckewelder has

left

us an account of this early prophet, and

his curious revelation.

Manasseh Cutler was a servant

the 18th century produced.
interests.

of the

Lord

of the kind,

it

seems, that only

at

and depth of his was pastor of the Congregational Church Hamilton, Massachusetts. He studied and practiced law. Finding himthe scope

He rivaled Jefferson in

He

studied theology and

84
self in

BACHMAN, HECKEWELDER, CUTLER

a community without a doctor, he studied medicine so that he could minister to his flock. He lobbied in Congress for a land grant to

found a colony in Ohio, then the wild frontier, helped draft the laws under which the old Northwest Territory was governed, and served two terms in the House of Representatives. Natural science was his avocation; he published the first systematic classification and description of the flora of New England. In 1788 he drove a sulky to Ohio where he remained for nearly a year to establish the settlement at Marietta. During this time he explored the mounds in the vicinity of Marietta. In one of those flashes of brilliance that approach genius, he hit upon a method of using tree rings to establish the dates. He also surmised that it was Mexico rather than Palestine or India that might contain the key to their mystery. "Of his scientific and political pursuits, though in themselves highly interesting and beneficial to the community, congenial to his taste, and introductory to intercourse and correspondence with men of celebrity on both sides of the Atlantic, he observed during his last sickness that he reviewed them with but little comparative satisfaction, as interfering in some measure with the more imperious claims of that holy office, to which all other claims should be subordinated by those who are invested with it. He regarded the employment of an ambassador of Christ as the most important and honorable on earth."^ R.L.B.

1 From an obituary notice of Dr. Cutler, published in the Salem Observer and reprinted in William P. and Julia R. Cutler: Life Journals and Correspondence of Rev. Mannaseh Cutler LL.D.

JOHN BACHMAN
(1790-1897)

The Doctrine of the Unity of the

Human Race Examined on

Principles

the

of Pure Science

THE OPPONENTS OF THE UNITY OF THE HUMAN RACE CANNOT, THEREFORE,

fail to

perceive that the position they have assumed

is

surrounded with

infinite difiiculty; that in

all

order to establish their views they must overturn

the principles which science has adopted for the designation of species;
in departing

and that

from our ancient landmarks which have hitherto

enabled us to decide with accuracy on the character of species, they would

not only demolish the simple and beautiful temple reared by the labour
of Linnaeus, Cuvier
terials to the

and

their coadjutors, but

would

scatter the very

ma-

winds, and leave us with no other guides than those of un-

The new and obscure path in which they have invited opposed to our views of science. A vast majority of naturalists disclaim them as leaders, and will leave them to pursue their journey alone, whilst we are content to follow the safe and long-trodden paths. The important fact must not be overlooked that our opponents are the assailants in this controversy. When Voltaire first promulgated his crude and most unscientific notions on this subject, and attempted to show that not only the African, but the Albino also, were distinct species of men,
certain conjecture.

us to tread,

is

his object confessedly

to invalidate
It is

was not so much to establish a truth in science as the testimony and throw contempt on the christian Scriptures.

but recently that the advocates of the theory of a plurality have de-

nied the long received doctrine of the unity of the

sistent

human

race, as incon-

with those principles which are received as the established laws

From Bachman, The Doctrine of the Unity of the Human Race Examined on the Principles of Pure Science (Charleston: C. G. Canning, 1850), pp. 146-151.
85

86
of science.

JOHN BACHMAN

The onus proband! therefore rests with them. They have not been able to prove the truth of their position. We have no hesitation in saying that they are incapable of proving it. Until they shall have succeeded in this, the faith of men will remain unchanged. We will now, in the conclusion of this chapter, sum up the evidence which we have produced in various parts of this Essay, or which are selfevident, and require no further proof in favour of the unity of the species.
1.

There

is

but one true species in the genus homo.

In this he does not form an exception to the general law of nature.

genus.

There are many of our genera which contain but a single species in the Among American quadrupeds the musk ox, (Ovibos moschutos,) the beaver, {Castor fiber,) and the glutton or wolverine, (Gulo luscus,)

and among
amples.

birds, the wild turkey, (Meleagris gallipavo,)

are familiar ex-

which was formerly regarded as a second species, has recently been discovered not to be a true turkey; in addition to its different conformation, it makes its nest on trees, and lays only two eggs, possessing in this and other particulars the habits of the pigeon. 2. We have shown that all the varieties evidence a complete and minute correspondence in the number of the teeth and in the 208 additional
oscillated turkey,

The

bones contained in the body. 3. That in the pecuharity in the shedding of the
all

teeth, so different

from

other animals, they

all

correspond.

That they are perfectly

4. 5.
6.

alike in the following particulars:

In

all

possessing the same erect stature.

In the articulation of the head with the spinal column. In the possession of two hands.

7.
8.

In the absence of the intermaxillary bone. In the teeth of equal length.

In a smooth skin of the body, and the head covered with hair.

9.

10.

In the number and arrangement of the muscles in every part of

the body, the digestive

11.
12.

and

all

the other organs.

In the organs of speech and the power of singing.

They

all

possess mental faculties, conscience, and entertain the

It is

hope of immortality.
characteristics

scarcely necessary to

add that in these two

last

man

is

placed at such an immeasurable distance above the

brute creation as to destroy every vestige of affinity to the other genus or species.
13.

monkey
on
all

or any

They

are

all

omnivorus and are capable of

living

kinds of

food.
14.
15.

They are capable of inhabiting all chmates. They aU possess a slower growth than any other animal, and

arc

later in arriving at puberty.

16.

A
all

peculiarity in the physical constitution of the female, differing

from

the other mammalians.

Doctrine of the Unity of the

Human Race

87

17. All the races have the same period of gestation, on an average produce the same number of young, and are subject to similar diseases. If an objection is advanced against the rules by which we have been governed, and we are told that we have been blending specific and generic

characters,

we answer

that in

all

the genera a species

is

selected

and

described as a type of the genus: hence there being but one species in the

genus

we

have, in accordance with the rules by which naturalists are gov-

erned, selected the species as a type.

18. We have shown that man, same changes which are effected as a domestic animal,
is

subject to the

in all domesticated animals; hence as

species are taken in a different acceptation, in wild

and domestic animals,

subjected to the same

our examinations of the varieties in

rules of examination.

are constantly taking That these place, is evident, from the fact that great variations have occurred in several of the branches which we admit to be Caucasians, whilst wild animals with few exceptions have not undergone the slightest change. We have shown that from the many intermediate grades of form and color, in a being more subject to varieties than in any known species of animals, we can find no specific character so permanent as to warrant us in separating the varieties into distinct species. We insist on the right of applying
the rules of classification to

men must be changes in men

man

as a domestic species. If

our opponents
first

urge the right of comparing him with wild animals, then they must

prove that men, Hke wild species are not subject to produce
is

varieties.

This

will not venture. The human compared with wild animals that with few exceptions present a perfect uniformity. Place before you a hundred specimens of any wild species of quadruped or bird, with the few exceptions above alluded to, and there is scarcely a variation among any of the specimens. The descriptions of Aristotle are as appHcable now as they

an experiment on which we think they

species cannot, therefore, be

were in

his day.

On

the other hand, look at the countenances even of our

neighbours and the members of our

the social circle, and

own

famihes, gathered together around

you see the most striking differences in the color of the eyes, the hair, and the complexion, in size, in form, in length of nose, shape of the head, volume of the brain, etc. These peculiarities are so striking that we can every where recognize those whom we have previously seen.

On

the other hand, the countenances of the individuals even

can seldom be distinguished from each other. The Hogg, or as he was proud to call himself the Ettric Shepherd, was able, as he stated, and no doubt correctly, to distinguish the individuals of the flock which he daily carried to the hills; but this talent even in distinguishing the countenances of domesticated animals, is possessed by few others; on the contrary the very child learns to distinguish individuals of the human race by their countenances; no two individuals even in the same family, can be found possessing the same set of features.
in domestic animals

eccentric poet,

88

JOHN BACHMAN

Man

must, therefore, be compared and examined by the same rules that govern us in an examination of domesticated animals. Let us compare him
with any of these species. Take those about whose origin no difficulty
exists; the
ists

horse for instance, the only true species in the genus, for natural-

have

now

classed
origin

all
is

the others under the asses

the hog,

whose

admitted by

characteristics of Sus scrofus,

it;

apply the same rule first to and by these fair and legitimate rules of science, we are wilhng to enter into a comparison, and abide by the decision. The most eminent naturalists of all past ages, have with a unanimity almost unsurpassed, already decided the question, and those who are now entering into the field, about whose quahfications, as judges, the world as yet knows nothing, and is therefore, unprepared to pronounce an opinion, are bound to give some
satisfactory reasons for their dissent.

and zebras; or take first examine the then all the races which have sprung from the species and then to the varieties of men,
all

naturalists;

19.

That the

varieties in

men

are not greater than are

known

to exist

among domestic
20.

animals.

That all the varieties of men produce with each other a fertile offspring which is perpetuated, by which new races have been formed; and that this is not the case with any two species of animals. 21. That the insects which are found on the surface, and the vermes within the body, as far as they have been examined, are the same in all the varieties of men, and that where peculiar parasites infest men in particular countries they are equally found in all the races. Until our opponents have proved that these propositions are not in
accordance with the laws of science, or in violation of truth,
their

we must

regard

new

theory as founded in error.

JOHN

G. E.

HECKEWELDER

(1783-1823)

Indian Preachers and Prophets

THERE WAS A TIME WHEN THE PREACHERS AND PROPHETS OF THE INDIANS, by properly exerting the unbounded influence which the popular superstitions

gave them, might have excited

at least, to

among

those nations such a spirit

of general resistance against the encroachments of the Europeans, as would

have enabled them,

make a noble

stand against their invaders,

and perhaps

to recover the undisturbed possession of their country. Instead

of following the obvious course which reason and nature pointed out; in-

stead of uniting as one nation in defence of their natural rights, they gave

ear to the artful insinuations of their enemies,

the art of sowing unnatural divisions
after repeated struggles,

who too well understood among them. It was not until Canada,
conquered from the French by the

was

finally

united arms of Great Britain and her colonies, that they began to be
sensible of their desperate situation

now

this whole northern continent being one great and powerful nation, against whom it was vain to attempt resistance. Yet it was at this moment that their prophets, impelled by ambitious motives, began to endeavour by their eloquence to bring them back to independent feelings, and create among them a genuine national spirit; but it was too late. The only rational resource that remained for them to prevent their total annihilation was to adopt the

in the possession of

religion

and manners of

their conquerors,
this

and abandon savage

life

for the

comforts of civilised society; but of

in vain Missionaries were sent

but a few of them were sensible;

the greatest

among them, who, through

hardships and dangers exerted themselves to soften their misfortunes by

the consolations of the Christian faith, and to point out to
salvation in this world

them the way of and the next; the banner of Christ was compara-

From Heckewelder, "An Account of the History, Manners and Customs of the Indian Nations Who Once Inhabited Pennsylvania and the Neighboring States," Transactions of the Historical and Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society (Philadelphia: Abraham Small, 1819), pp. 290-297.
89

90
lively

JOHN

G. E.

HECKE WELDER

followed but by small numbers, and these were persecuted by their

to have been such, as well as by their which the Missionaries encountered, the strong opposition which was made to them by the prophets of the Indian nations was by no means the least. I have known several of these preachers and prophets during my residence in the Indian country, and have had sufficient opportunities to observe the means which they took to operate on the minds of their hearers. I shall content myself with taking notice here of a few of the most remarkfriends, or, at least, those

who ought

enemies.

Among

the obstacles

able

among them.
at

In the year 1762, there was a famous preacher of the Delaware nation,

who resided among the

agreeable to

Indians,

Cayahaga, near Lake Erie, and travelled about the country, endeavouring to persuade them that he had been
to point out to

appointed by the great Spirit to instruct them in those things that were

drawn

them the offences by which they had on themselves, and the means by which they might recover his favour for the future. He had drawn, as he pretended, by the direction of the great Spirit, a kind of map on a piece of deer skin, somewhat dressed like parchment, which he called "the great Book or Writing." This, he said, he had been ordered to shew to the Indians, that they might
his displeasure

him and

see the situation in

which the Mannitto had

originally placed them, the

misery which they had brought upon themselves by neglecting their duty,

and the only way

This

that

was now

left

them

to regain

what they had

lost.

map he

held before him while preaching, frequently pointing to par-

ticular

marks and spots upon it, and giving explanations as he went along. The size of this map was about fifteen inches square, or, perhaps, something more. An inside square was formed by lines drawn within it, of about eight inches each way, two of those lines, however, were not closed
by about half an inch
at the corners.

Across these inside

lines, others of
all

about an inch in length were drawn with sundry other lines and marks,

which was intended to represent a strong inaccessible

appointed for that purpose.

barrier, to prevent

those without from entering the space within, otherwise than at the place

When

the

map was
left

held as he directed, the

corners which were not closed lay at the

to each other, the

the north-east

on

this

one being at the by north. In explaining or describing the particular points map, with his fingers always pointing to the place he was describ-

hand side, directly opposite south-east by south, and the nearest at

ing,

he called the space within the inside lines "the heavenly regions," or
the space left

the place destined by the great Spirit for the habitation of the Indians in

future

life;

open

at the south-east corner,

he called the
this

"avenue," which had been intended for the Indians to enter into
heaven, but which was
fore the great Spirit

now

in the possession of the white people,

wherethe

had

since caused another "avenue" to be

made on

Indian Preachers and Prophets

opposite side, at which, however,
it

91

was both

difficult

and dangerous for

them
spirit

to enter, there being

many impediments

in their

way, besides a large

to leap; but the evil

ditch leading to a gulf below, over which they

had

kept at

this

very spot a continual watch for Indians, and whoever

never could get away from him again, but was carried to where there was nothing but extreme poverty; where the ground was parched up by the heat for want of rain, no fruit came to perfection, the game was almost starved for want of pasture, and where the evil spirit, at his pleasure, transformed men into horses and dogs, to be ridden by him and follow him in his hunts and wherever he went. The space on the outside of this interior square, was intended to represent the country given to the Indians to hunt, fish, and dwell in while in this world; the east side of it was called the ocean or "great salt water Lake." Then the preacher drawing the attention of his hearers particularly to the south-east avenue, would say to them: "Look here! See what we have lost by neglect and disobedience; by being remiss in the expression of our gratitude to the great Spirit, for what he has bestowed upon us; by neglecting to make to him sufficient sacrifices; by looking upon a people of a different colour from our own, who had come across a great lake,

he laid hold
his regions,

of,

as

if

they were a part of ourselves; by suffering them to

sit

down by our
this,

side,

them with ing our country from us, but

and looking
at

indifference, while they

this

were not only takour

(pointing to the spot),

own
be

avenue, leading into those beautiful regions which were destined for us.

Such

is

the sad condition to which

is

we

are reduced.
I will tell

What

is

now
make

to

done, and what remedy

to

be applied?

you,

my

friends!

Hear
sacri-

what the great

fices, in

Spirit

has ordered

me

to tell you!

You

are to

manner that I shall direct; to put off entirely from yourselves you have adopted since the white people came among us; you are to return to that former happy state, in which we lived in peace and plenty, before these strangers came to disturb us, and above all, you must abstain from drinking their deadly beson, which they have forced upon us, for the sake of increasing their gains and diminishing our numbers. Then will the great Spirit give success to our arms; then he will give us strength to conquer our enemies, to drive them from hence, and
the the customs which

recover the passage to the heavenly regions which they have taken from
us."

Such was

in general the substance of his discourses. After having dilated

more or

on the various topics which I have mentioned, he commonly this manner: "And now, my friends, in order that what 1 have told you may remain firmly impressed on your minds, and to refresh your memories from time to time, I advise you to preserve, in every family,
less

concluded in

at least,

such a book or writing as

this,

which
is

I will finish off for

you, pro-

vided you bring

me

the price, which

only one buck-skin or two doe-

92
skins a piece. "^

JOHN
The
price

G. E.

HECKEWELDER

was of course bought,^ and the book purchased.

and
also in the dreary region of the evil spirit;

In some of those maps, the figure of a deer or turkey, or both, was placed
in the heavenly regions,

the former, however, appeared fat

and plump, while the

latter

seemed

to

have nothing but skin and bones.

I was also well acquainted with another noted preacher, named Wangomend, who was of the Monsey tribe. He began to preach in the year 1766, much in the same manner as the one I have just mentioned. When Mr. Zeisberger first came to Goschgoschink town on the Allegheny river, this Indian prophet became one of his hearers, but finding that the Missionary's doctrine did not agree with his own, he became his enemy. This man also pretended that his call as a preacher was not of his own choice, but that he had been moved to it by the great and good Spirit, in order to teach his countrymen, who were on the way to perdition, how they could become reconciled to their God. He would make his followers believe that he had once been taken so near to heaven, that he could distinctly hear the crowing of the cocks, and that at another time he had been borne by unseen hands to where he had been permitted to take a peep into the heavens, of which there were three, one for the Indians, one for the negroes, and another for the white people. That of the Indians he observed to be the happiest of the three, and that of the whites the unhappiest; for they were under chastisement for their ill treatment of the Indians, and for possessing themselves of the land which God had given to them. They were also punished for making beasts of the negroes, by seUing them as the Indians do their horses and dogs, and beating them unmercifully, although God had created them as well as the rest of mankind. The novelty of these visions procured him hearers for a time; he found,

however, at
ticularly as

last, that

the Indians

became
which

indifferent to his doctrines, par-

he frequently warned them not to drink the poison brought

of
his congregation

to

them by the white people,

Then he bethought

himself of a

more popular and

interesting subject,

were very fond. and

began to preach against witchcraft and those who dealt in the black art. Here he had all the passions and prejudices of the poor Indians on his side, and he did not fail to meet with the general approbation, when he declared to them that wizards were getting the upper hand, and would destroy the nation, if they were not checked in their career. He travelled in 1775, to Goschachking, at the forks of the Muskingum, to lay this business before the great council of the Delawares, and take their opinion upon it. The first report which the Missionaries on the Muskingum heard on this subject, was that the chiefs had at first united in having every conjurer and witch in the nation brought to an account and punished with death, that, however, on a more mature consideration, they had thought
1

Of

the value of one dollar.

For "bought" read "brought."

Indian Preachers and Prophets

93

proper in the
those
in

first

place to ascertain the

number and names not only

of

who were known, but even of those who were suspected of dealing sorcery, and Wangomend was appointed to cause the enumeration to be

made.

He

accordingly hastily set off for his home; and on his arrival

immediately entered on the duties of his mission; when behold!

discovered that the
at first imagined,

number
list.

of offenders

it was was much greater than had been

and he found himself

His
zeal, in

in danger of having his

own name

inserted in the black

consequence, became considerably

cooled,

and by the time when he returned the chiefs were no longer disposed to meddle with this dangerous subject, justly fearing that it could

not but terminate in the ruin of their nation. Wangomend, therefore, returned to his former

mode

of preaching,

recommending

to his hearers to

purge themselves from sin by taking certain prescribed medicines, and

making frequent sacrifices to the great Spirit. The last whom I shall take notice of is the Prophet-warrior Tecumseh, lately so celebrated among us, and who lost his life in the last war at the battle of the Thames, on the 30th of September, 1813, at the age, it is said, of 43 years. The details of his military life have been made sufficiently known through the medium of journals and newspapers, and his famous
speech to the British general Proctor delivered
time before the battle which decided his
at

Amhertsburg, a short
every body's hands.

fate, is in

But his character as a prophet and the means that he took to raise himself to power and fame are not so well nor so particularly understood, although it is, in general, admitted that he was admirably skilled in the art
of governing Indians through the

medium

of their passions.

The sketch
is

which

am

going to draw wiU sufficiently prove

how

well this opinion

founded.

From the best information that I was able to obtain of this man, he was by nation a Shawanese, and began his career as a preacher much in the manner that others had done before him. He endeavoured to impress upon the minds of his Indian hearers, that they were a distinct people from the whites, that they had been created and placed on this soil for pecuhar purposes, and that it had been ordered by the supreme being that they should live unconnected with people of a different colour from their own. He painted in vivid colours, the misery that they had brought upon themselves by permitting the whites to reside among them, and urged them to unite and expel those lawless intruders from their country. But he soon discovered that these once popular topics no longer produced any effect on the minds of the dispirited Indians, and that it was impossible to persuade them to resort to strong measures, to oppose the progress of the whites, much less to endeavour to drive them beyond the great lake. He had long observed that whenever he touched on the subject of witchcraft, his discourses were always acceptable to his hearers, whose belief in those supernatural powers, instead of diminishing, seemed constantly to gain

94
ground.

JOHN

G. E,

HECKEWELDER

He knew

that his predecessor,

Wangomend, had

failed in his en-

deavour to gain influence and power by availing himself of these popular opinions. But his ill success did not deter him from making the same attempts. He did not, however, like him, seek the assistance of the national
councils, but boldly determined to try

what

his talents

and courage could

the Indians, "That

do without any other

aid.

There
he

is

a saying

among
worn

God
and

ordained

man

to live until all his teeth are

out, his eyesight

dim

his hair grey."

Of

this

artfully availed himself to

persuade those

ignorant people, that the early deaths which constantly took place could

not be attributed to any natural cause, since

every

it

was the

will of

God

that

man

should

live to

had thus obtained a fast fears of the powers of witchcraft to the highest pitch, he thought it was time to work on their hopes, and after gradually feeUng the pulses of those he had to deal with, after successively throwing out a great number of hints and insinuations, the effects of which he had carefuUy observed, he at last did what no preacher before him had ventured to do, by declaring that the great Mannitto had endowed him with supernatural powers, to foretel future events, and to discover present secrets, and that he could point out with certainty, not only those, whether men or women, who were in the full possession of the art of witchcraft, but those who had even a tincture of it, however small. His bold assertions met with implicit belief, and he obtained by that means such an unUmited command over a credulous multitude, that at last, he had only to speak the word, or even to nod, and the pile was quickly prepared by willing executioners to put to death whomsoever he thought proper to devote. Here was a wide field opened for the gratification of the worst passions. Whoever thought himself injured, denounced his enemy as a wizard; the least real or pretended cause of resentment, nay, even a paltry bribe, would bring the most innocent man to the pile or tomahawk, and no one availed himself more of this frantic delusion of the populace, than the great prophet himself. Having his spies out in every direction, he well knew who were his friends and who his enemies, and wo (sic) to all who were reported to him or even suspected by him to be of the latter class! The tyrant had only to will their deaths, and his commands no one durst contradict, but all were ready to execute. Among the number of his victims was the venerable Wyandot Chief Sha-te-ya-ron-yah, called by the whites Leather-lips. He was one of those who in August, 1795, signed the treaty of Greenville on behalf of the Huron tribe. His only crime was honesty, and the honourable character which he had acquired. In a fit of jealousy Tecumseh ordered him to be put to death, and his commands were but too readily obeyed.

an advanced old age. When he found that he hold on the minds of his hearers, by raising their

MANASSEH CUTLER
(1742-1823)

A
CHARGE BY REV.

Frontier Mission

DR. CUTLER, AT THE ORDINATION OF REV. MR. STORY, PASTOR OF THE CHURCH AT MARIETTA, OHIO, GIVEN AT HAMILTON, MASS.,

AUGUST
YOU ARE NOW,
to

15, 1798.

SIR, BY THE LAYING ON OF HANDS, AND SOLEMN PRAYER God, set apart to the work of the Gospel Ministry. To your special care and charge are committed the Church and Christian Society at Marietta, by whose express desire you are ordained their pastor. In the name of

the great

Head

of the church,
.

we most solemnly charge you

first

to

be a

faithful

minister of the gospel.

You have

the honor, Sir, to be the

regularly ordained

and

settled

minister of the Congregational denomination in that extensive country

westward of the Alleghany Mountains. We who are convinced that this denomination is most conformable to the Sacred Scriptures, and, from long experience, think it most consistent with the rights of conscience and religious liberty, most congenial with our National Government, and most friendly to those numerous municipal advantages which well-formed
Christian societies endeavor to promote, feel
it

much

satisfaction in seeing

transplanted into that growing country. You,

Sir, are

going to a country

favorable to a high degree of population, capable of supporting, and probably will one day contain inhabitants as numerous as those of the Atlantic
States.

and the noblest motives to To behold a country which was lately, very lately, a howling wilderness, the gloomy abode of numerous savage tribes, the haunts and lurking-places of the
are entering

You

on an

active scene,

exertion will continually present themselves to your view.

by

Cutler, Life, Journals and Correspondence of Rev. Manasseh Cutler, LL.D., grandchildren, William Parker Cutler and Julia Perkins Cutler, 2 vols. (Cincinnati: Robert Clarke & Co., 1888), Vol. 2, pp. 10-17.
his

From

95

96

MANASSEH CUTLER
and
sex, sport-

cruel invaders of our defenseless frontiers, regardless of age

ing with the agonies of captives while expiring under their infernal tortures

a people ignorant of the true

God and

devoted to their heathen

societies,

rites

and barbarous
cultured
fields,

superstitions; to see this country so rapidly changing into

inhabited by

civil

and well-regulated

peaceably
to see

enjoying the fruits of their enterprise, industry, culture, and commerce; to

hear the voice of plenty, urbanity, and social enjoyment; above

it

all,

illumined by the pure and benevolent religion of the gospel, enjoyed in

regular ministrations and divine ordinances.

all its

To behold

scenes and

events like these.

My

Brother, are not merely pleasing contemplations, they

are animating motives to zeal and activity in your ministerial labors. It would have afforded great additional happiness to have seen the savage tribes converted to the Christian faith, but it gives much satisfaction, and

may

prepare the

way

for the introduction of the gospel

its

among them,

that

and which promises a permanent duration, has been concluded with them. Government having fairly and honorably purchased of them their right to the soil, they are quietly retreating to distant parts of the wilderness. I can not forbear reminding you, my dear sir, that on the very ground where you are statedly to dispense the gospel you behold those ancient ruins, those extended walls and elevated mounds, which were erected many years ago. These works must have
a peace, wise and just in
principles,

required for years the labors of thousands, and are certain indications that
vast

numbers of the natives once inhabited

this

place.

When

these an-

tiquities are

minutely examined, they induce a belief that part of them, at

and their idols were probably placed on the elevated square mounds, where the ceremonies of their gloomy, heathenish devotions were performed. On these mounds, in all probability, numerous human sacrifices have been offered. May we adore that Providence which is now planting on this memorable spot the evangelical religion of Jesus. Here may it be permanently established, and may its benign influence be extended throughout every part of the American world. Here may you, sir, be long continued a faithful and successful minister. In contemplating the magnitude and importance of the work to which you are this day solemnly consecrated, weU may you ask: Who is sufficient for these things? Trust not in your own strength, but in Him whose grace is sufficient for you. Feel the influence, not merely of those local considerations which your particular situation so naturally suggests, but of those great truths and momentous concerns which the gospel will continually present to your view. You are now about
least, are the

monuments

of ancient superstition. Their temples

to take

your leave, probably a

final leave of

your nearest connections.

May

them be cheered by the reflection that you are going on a great and useful, an honorable and glorious errand, a work which holy angels would with pleasure perform. Those benevolent spirits who sang praises to God in the highest, because there was on earth, peace
the painful hour of parting with

Frontier Mission

97

and good will toward men, would cheerfully be employed in turning men from the error of their ways, and saving souls from death. Go, then, my Friend, and the God of peace be with you.

A NOTE ON THE ANTIQUITY OF THE OHIO MOUNDS AS SHOWN BY THE COUNT OF TREE RINGS^
Vestiges of ancient works, of which the present natives retain no tradition,

are found in various parts of the western territory.

Of those

that

have yet been discovered, the works

tude. Their situation
is

at Marietta are of the greatest

mounds
largest

on an elevated plain. and in square and in circular forms. The square contains 40 acres. On each side are three openings, at
of earth, in direct hnes,
acres, with a

magniThey consist of waUs and

equal distances, resembling twelve gateways. The smallest square contains

20

gateway in the center of each

side.

of the squares are openings similar to those at the sides.

At the angles The walls, which

by bring-

were made of earth, were not thrown up from

ing the earth from

ditches, but raised

some distant place, or taking it up uniformly from the surface of the plain. They were probably made of equal height and breadth, but the waste of time had rendered them lower and broader in some parts than in others. By an accurate measurement they were found to be from 4 to 8 feet in height, and from 25 to 26 feet, at the base, in breadth. Two parallel walls, running from an angle of the largest square toward the Muskingum River, which seemed to have been designed for a covered way, were 175 feet distant from each other, and measured on the inner side, in the most elevated part, 24 feet in height, and 42 feet broad at the
base. Within

and contiguous

to the squares, are

many

elevated mounds,
of the

of a conic form and of different magnitudes.

The most remarkable

mounds
and 9
sides.

within the walls are three, of an oblong square form, in the

great square.

The

largest of these is

188 feet in length, 100 feet in width,

at the
is

feet in height, level

on the summit, and nearly perpendicular

At

the center of each of the sides the earth

projected, forming

gradual ascents to the summit, extremely regular, and about 6 feet in

width.

Near the

smallest square

is

mound

raised in the

form of a sugar-

loaf, of a

magnitude that strikes the beholder with astonishment. Its base is a regular circle, 115 feet in diameter, and is 30 feet in altitude. It is surrounded by a ditch, at the distance of 33 feet from its base, 15 feet wide, and 4 feet deep, forming a bank 4 feet in height, leaving an opening or gateway, toward the square, about 20 feet wide. Besides these, there are
other works, but the Umits of this note will not admit of a description.

At

the

commencement

of the settlement (at Marietta) the whole of these

trees.

works were covered by a prodigious growth of

1 The following note Daniel Story.R.L.B.
is

When

I arrived, the

appended to Dr. Cutler's charge

at the ordination of

Rev.

98

MANASSEH CUTLER

ground was in part cleared, but many large trees remained on the walls and mounds. The only possible data for forming any probable conjecture respecting the antiquity of the works, I conceived, must be derived from the growth upon them. By the concentric circles, each of which contains the annual growth, the ages of the trees might be ascertained. For this purpose a number of the trees were felled, and in the presence of Governor St. Clair and many other gentlemen, the number of circles were carefully counted. The trees of the greatest size were hollow. In the largest of those which were sound, there were from three to four hundred circles. One tree, somewhat decayed at the center, was found to contain at least four hundred and sixty-three circles. Its age was undoubtedly more than 463 years. Other trees, in a growing state, were from their appearance much older. There were, likewise, the strongest marks of a previous growth as large as the present. Decaying stumps could be traced at the surface of the ground, on different parts of the works, which measured from 6 to 8 feet in diameter. In one of the angles of a square, a decayed stump measured 8 feet in diameter at the surface of the ground; and though the body of the tree was so moldered as scarcely to be perceived above the surface of the earth, we were able to trace the decayed wood, under the leaves and rubbish, nearly an hundred feet. A thrifty beach, containing 136 circles, appeared to have first vegetated within the space occupied by an ancient predecessor of a different kind of wood. Admitting the age of the present growth to be 450 years, and that it had been preceded by one of equal size and age, which as probably as otherwise was not the first, the works have been deserted more than 900 years. If they were occupied one hundred years, they were erected more than a thousand years ago.
It is

highly probable the exterior walls were erected for defense.

at the

An

opening being made

summit of the great conic mound, there were

found the bones of an adult in an horizontal position covered with a flat stone. Beneath this skeleton were thin stones placed vertically at small and different distances, but no bones were discovered. That this venerable

monument might not be defaced, search. The cells formed by the

the opening

thin stones might

was closed without further have contained, like

the charnel houses in Mexico, the skulls of the sacrifices; or the

mound

may be
The

a general depository for the dead, collected in the manner de-

scribed by Lafitau and other travelers

large

among
it

the Indian tribes.

mounds

in the great square,

can hardly be doubted, were

they erected their temples,
it is

appropriated to religious purposes.

On them

placed their idols, and offered their sacrifices; for

difficult to

conceive

of any other purpose for which they could have been designed.
their

form and

situation with the places of worship in

Comparing Mexico and other

Their

parts of the country,

when

first

there

was

in the places of

we find worship among those

discovered,

as great a similarity as
different tribes.

Frontier Mission

99
artifi-

temples were generally erected and their idols placed on natural or

cial elevations,

with gradual ascents.

their historic paintings

and

traditions,

Mexican tribes, agreeably to came from the northward, and some

If

the

of

them

in their migrations

went

far to the eastward,

it is

not improbable

some of those tribes, or others similar to them in their customs and manners, and who practiced the same religious rites, were the constructors of those works. The present natives bear a general resemblance, in their complexion, form, and size to the ancient Mexicans. Though their rites and ceremonies differ, they profess the general principles of the Mexican religion; believing in the Great Spirit, good and evil genii, and a state of existence after death. They have no temples, nor images, but some faint
that either

notions of reUgious oblations are to be found

among them. When

it

is

considered

how

long

it

must have been since these works were erected,

how generally among all the

the practice of offering

tribes

human

sacrifices anciently prevailed

from Louisiana to the western ocean; that men, women, and children were sacrificed in their smaller as well as most populous towns; that in the dominions of Montezuma, only, as historians say, twenty thousand were yearly sacrificed, and in some years fifty thousand, will it not strengthen the probability that human sacrifices were among the religious rites of the ancient possessors of this ground?

speculation on the Origin of

the American Indian

CALEB ATWATER
(1778-1867)

JAMES ADAIR
(d.

1783)

The question

of whether the Indians were an autochthonous race or

had

migrated from elsewhere arose early and persisted long in American an-

For Jefferson the problem was one of scientific of the 18th century it became a problem of faith. Where did the Indians fit in God's scheme of Creation? What explanation for their presence could be found in the Bible? The two most frequent
thropological literature.
interest,

but for

many men

explanations were that they were the descendants of Japheth, the third

son of Noah, separated from the Semites after the Deluge, or that they were descendants of the ten lost tribes of Israel. The latter view received

new support
an

in the

19th century from

Mormons among whom

it

became

article of faith.

different points of view

Atwater and Adair approached the problem of Indian origins from two archaeology and comparative ethnology respectively and reached the same conclusion, namely, that the Indians had

come from

Asia, specifically the

Near East, thus demonstrating

world history.

to their

satisfaction the reliability of the Bible as a source of

Caleb Atwater was born

College.

in

Massachusetts and graduated from Williams

that state

He moved on
and

to

Ohio while

was

still

the frontier.

He

served as postmaster,
Archaeologist,
son.

member

of the State Legislature

of Ohio, State

finally as

As

State Archaeologist, he
visiting

Commissioner of Indian Affairs under Jackmade the first scientific survey of Amerithe

can archaeology,

and mapping

mounds

of

Ohio and neighborvolume of

ing states. His survey, illustrated with beautiful engraved plans of the

mounds, was published by the Antiquarian Society

its

in the first

Transactions.

The

early settlers in

Ohio could not

believe that the rude

Indians

who

then inhabited the area could have been the builders of any-

thing so elaborate as the

Ohio mounds.
on a on
literary

The search

for origins took Atwater

world tour of mounds.

He
100

based his

final historical conclusions

superficial formal similarities

Speculation on the Origin of the American Indian

101

without regard to time relationships.

century later Elliot Smith used the

same kind

of thinking in his reconstruction of global history.

James Adair characterized himself simply as "a trader with the Indians and resident in their country for forty years." His History was a compendium of diverse matters. The first part deals with his argument, on the basis of a comparison of details such as the use of horns on masks, for
is followed by a detailed history Cherokee nation since earliest white contact; a Cherokee and Chickasaw ethnography with comparisons of Indian values with those of whites (to the disparagement of the latter); and suggestions for the management

the Hebraic origin of the Indians. This

of the

of Indian affairs. Included also

is

a description of the southern

territories,

with suggestions for their development. Adair's ethnographic writings had

an unexpectedly wide circulation when they were plagiarized by Jonathan Carver in his enormously popular book of travels. Adair characterized his

own book

in this

manner:
of one

The production

who
. . .

hath been chiefly engaged in an Indian

life

The work was carried on with great disadvantages, separated by his situation from libraries, compelled to conceal his papers from the natural jealousy of the natives, and the secrecy of Indians concerning their own affairs and prying disposition into those
ever since the year 1735
of others I sat
. . .

on the spot and had many years' standthem as a friend and brother. My intentions were pure when I wrote truth hath been my standard. With inexpressible concern I read the several imperfect and fabulous accounts of the Indians. Fiction and conjecture have no place in the following pages. The public may depend on the fidelity of the author and that his descriptions are genuine although not so polished and romantic as other Indian histories and accounts they may have seen. My grand objects were to give the literati proper and good materials for tracing the origin of the American Indians, and to incite the higher powers zealously to promote the best interests of the British Colonies and R.L.B. the mother country.

down

to

draw

the Indians

ing before

me and

lived with

CALEB ATWATER
(1778-1867)

Conjectures, respecting the Origin

and

History of the Authors of the

Ancient Works

in

Ohio, &c.

THE READER, AFTER HAVING BECOME ACQUAINTED WITH MANY OF OUR ancient works, naturally inquires, Who were their authors? Whence did they emigrate? At what time did they arrive? How long did they continue to inhabit this country? To what place did they emigrate? and. Where shall we look for their descendants?
These questions have often been asked, within the last thirty years, and as often answered, but not satisfactorily, especially to those who, on all occasions, require proofs amounting to mathematical certainty.

most authentick, the most ancient history mankind, soon after the deluge, undertook to raise a tower high as heaven, which should serve to keep them together, as a place of worship, and stand to future ages as a monument of their industry, their religious zeal, their enterprize, their knowledge of
If

we look

into the Bible, the

of

man, we

shall there learn, that

the arts. Unacquainted, as they undoubtedly were, with the use of letters,
in

what

better

way could

their

names have been handed down

to their

posterity with

renown? But

in this attempt they

were disappointed, and

themselves dispersed through the wide world. Did they forget to raise
afterwards, similar
to use the

monuments and places of worship? They did not; and, words of an inspired penman, "high places," of various altitudes and dimensions, were raised "on every high hill, and under every green tree," throughout the land of Palestine, and all the east.

Some
From

of these "high places" belonged to single families,

some

to

and Other Western States," Worcester: Archeologica Americana the American Antiquarian Society, Vol. I, 1820, pp. 220-232.
102

Atwater, "Description of the Antiquities Discovered in the State of Ohio Transactions of

Authors of the Ancient Works

mighty

in

Ohio

103

chieftain, a petty tribe, a city, or a

whole nation. Some were places

of worship for the individual, the tribe, the village, the town, the city, or

the nation, to which they respectively belonged.

At those "high

places," belonging to great nations, great national affairs

were transacted. Here they crowned and deposed their kings; here they concluded peace and declared war. Here the nation assembled at stated seasons, to perform the solemn worship of their deities. Here they celebrated anniversaries of great national events, and buried the illustrious
dead.

The name was a pile of stones, which were of the place, signifies "a heap." Here brought from the bed of the river Jordan, and piled up on the spot where they encamped for the first night after they crossed that river, on their entrance into "the promised land." Let the reader examine similar piles of stones on the waters of the Licking, near Newark, in the counties of Perry, Pickaway and Ross, and then ask himself, Whether those who raised our monuments, were not originally from Asia? Shiloh, where the Jews frequently assembled to transact great national affairs, and perform acts of devotion, was situated upon a high hill. When this place was deserted, the loftier hill of Zion was selected in its stead. Upon Sinai's awful summit the law of God was promulgated. Moses was commanded to ascend a mountain to die. Solomon's temple was situated upon a high hiU by Divine appointment. Samaria, a place celebrated for the worship of idols, was built upon the high hill of Shemer, by Omri, king of Israel, who was there buried. How many hundreds of mounds in this country are situated on the highest hills, surrounded by the most fertile soils? Traverse the counties of Licking, Franklin, Pickaway and Ross; examine the loftiest mounds, and compare them with those described as being in Palestine. Through the wide world, such places seem to have been preferred by the men of ancient times who erected them.
The Jews, on many
great occasions, assembled at Gilgal.
.

It is interesting to

the philosopher, to observe the progressive improvein the several useful arts.
is

ments made by

man
is

Without

letters, in

the

first
is

rude stages of society, the tree

already done, or

marked with a view to indicate what

intended to be done.

Though

our Indians had lived

along our Atlantick border for ages, yet they had advanced no farther in
indicating projected designs, or in recording past events. of wild game,

The abundance and the paucity of their numbers, will satisfactorily account for their ignorance in this, and almost every other respect. Coming here at an early age of the world, necessity had not civilized them. At that
period, in almost
all

parts of the globe then inhabited, a small

mound

of

earth served as a sepulchre and an altar, whereon the officiating priest

could be seen by the surrounding worshippers.

For many ages we have reason

altars.

to believe there

were none but such

From

Wales, they

may be

traced to Russia, quite across that

em-

104
pire, to

CALEB ATWATER
our continent; across
it

from the mouth of the Columbia on the Pacifick ocean, to Black River, on the east end of lake Ontario. Thence turning in a southwestern direction, we find them extending quite to the southern parts of Mexico and Peru. In the Russian empire, mounds are numerous, and were every where seen by the learned Adam Clarke, LL. D. in his tour from St. Petersburg
to the Crimea, in the year 1800. [After describing the

mounds

of Russia

Mr. Clarke says:]

"If there exists any thing of former times, which may afford monuments of antediluvian manners, it is this mode of burial. They seem to

mark
rising

the progress of population in the

first

ages,

after the dispersion,

Noah came. Whether under the form of and Russia, a barrow in England, a cairn in Ireland, Scotland, and Wales, or those heaps, which the modern Greeks and Turks call Tepe; lastly, in the more artificial shape of a pyramid in Egypt; they had universally the same origin. They present the simplest and sublimest monuments, which any generation could raise over the bodies of their progenitors; calculated for almost endless duration, and speaking a language more impressive than the most studied epitaph upon Parian marble. When beheld in a distant evening's horizon, skirted by the rays of the setting sun, and touching, as it were, the clouds which hang over them, imagination pictures the spirits of heroes of remoter periods descending to
wherever the posterity of
in Scandinavia

mound

irradiate the warriour's grave.

Some

of

them rose

in such regular forms,

with so simple and yet so

fectly level

artificial

a shape, in a plain, otherwise so per-

no doubt whatever could be entertained respectmore ancient, have at last sunk into the earth, and left a hollow place, which still marks their pristine situation. Again, others, by the passage of the plough upon their surfaces, have been considerably
flat,

and

that

ing them. Others,

still

diminished."^

How

exactly does this description of Clarke's apply to our

the west?

Who
who

ever described with more accuracy, that species of

of us in Ohio,
fidelity,
is,

of earth in Ohio,

contrary,

which were used as cemeteries? would ever suspect, that Dr. Clarke was not
our western mounds? In one conjecture, however,
in

mounds in mounds Unless we knew to the

describing with

he

is

mistaken; that
just

supposing those to be the most ancient, which

stages,

were but

begun.

have seen them in aU

its

from the time that a

circular fosse, with a hole in

centre,

was made,

until these

mounds were

brought to a perfect point at the summit.

In Scioto county, a few miles from Portsmouth,
a hole in the centre of the area which
of this
it

is

a circular fosse, with

encloses.

The owner makes use

walls, belonging to the

work
is

as a

barn yard.
of a similar
I,

There

work

form between two

1 Clarke's Travels,

Vol.

p. 138.

Authors of the Ancient Works

in

Ohio

105

works at Newark; and I have seen several on the Kenhawa river, not far from Point Pleasant, and others, left in the same unfinished state, in a great number of places. It would seem that where a ditch was to enclose a tumulus, this ditch was first dug, then a hole made in the centre, which was covered over with wood, earth, stones, or brick, then a large funeral pile constructed, and the corpse of some distinguished personage placed on it and burnt. An examination of the works already described, will amply justify these conjectures.
have a brick, now before me, over which lay, when found, wood ashes, charcoal, and human bones, burnt in a large and hot fire. And from what was found at Circleville, in the mound already described, it would seem that females were sometimes burnt with the males. I need not say, that this custom was derived from Asia, as it is well known to all my readers, that this is the only country to look to for the origin of such a
I

The Greeks and Romans practised burning their illustrious dead. was practised by several other nations, but they aU derived it from Asia. In the same volume of travels,^ Dr. Clarke says, "The Cossacks at Ekaterinedara, dug into some of these mounds for the purpose of making cellars, and found several ancient vases." Such vases are discovered in ours. Several have been found in our mounds, which resemble one found in Scotland, and described by Pennant. Another, somewhat resembling a smaU keg in its construction, and a tea kettle in the use to which it was put, appears to be made of a composition of clay and shells.
custom.
It

Dr. Clarke informs us, that the bones of horses, as well as human bones, were found in some mounds in Russia. The teeth of bears, otters and beavers, are found in ours, lying beside the bones of human beings; but no bones of horses have been found to my knowledge.

Thus we learn from the most authentick sources, that these ancient works existing in Europe, Asia, and America, are as similar in their construction, in the materials with which they were raised, and in the articles found in them, as it is possible for them to be. Let those who are constantly seeking for some argument, with which to overthrow the history of man by Moses, consider this fact. Such persons have more than once asserted, that there were different stocks or races of men; but this similarity of works almost aU over the world, indicates that all men sprung from one common origin. I have always considered this fact, as strengthening the Mosaic account of man, and that the scriptures throw a strong and steady light on the path of the Antiquarian.

2 Clarke's Travels, Vol.

I,

p. 236.

JAMES ADAIR
(d.

1783)

The Cheerake Nation

THEIR OPINION OF OUR METHODS OF

conferring of
the
titles.

WAR

THEY ARE EXCEEDINGLY POINTED AGAINST OUR METHODS OF WAR, AND

By

the surprising conduct of a Georgia governor, both

in the

war before have the meanest opinion of the Carolina martial disposition, till by some notable brave actions, it wears off. The Indians concluded that there was
the
last,

Muskohge and Cheerake, who attended our army

against St. Augustine, have entertained,

and

will continue to

treachery in our letting prisoners of distinction return to the fort to put

the rest
five

on

their guard,

and

in our shutting

up the

batteries for four or

days successively, not having our cannon dismounted, nor annoying

They was plain to their eyes, we only managed a sham fight with the Spaniards and they became very uneasy, and held many conferences about our friendly intercourse with the garrison; concluding that we had decoyed them down to be slaughtered, or delivered to the Spaniard to purchase a firm peace for ourselves and they no sooner reached their own countries than they reported the whole affair in black colours, that we allured them to a far-distant place, where we gave them only a small quantity of bad food; and that they were obliged to drink saltish water, which, instead of allaying, inflamed their thirst, while we were carousing with various Uquors, and shaking hands with the Spaniard, and sending the white beloved speech to one another, by beat of drum, although we had the assurance to affirm that we held fast the bloody tomohawk. The minutest circumstance was so strongly represented, that both nations were on the very point of commencing war against us. But the "Raven" of
the enemy, but having flags of truce frequently passing and repassing.
said, that
it

From Adair, History of the American Indians, Particularly Those Nations Adjoining to the Mississippi, East and West Florida, Georgia, South and North Carolina and Virginia (London: printed for Edward and Charles Dilly in the Poultry, 1775),
pp. 399-402, 421, 427-431.

106

The Cheerake Nation

107

Euvvase, a leading head warrior of the Cheerake, was confined in Augusta

garrison,
till

messages had nearly fomented

he sent up runners to stop a war, that his speeches and his life was threatened on failure, and he

had

large promises given,

if

he complied and succeeded.

THEIR GAMES
The Indians
is

are

much

addicted to gaming, and will often stake every

is

thing they possess. Ball-playing

their chief
it

such severe exercise, as to shew

was

originally calculated for a

and most favourite game: and hardy

and expert race of people,

ball is

like themselves,

made

of a piece of scraped deer-skin, moistened,

and the ancient Spartans. The and stuffed hard

with deer's hair, and strongly sewed with deer's sinews.

are about

The
is

ball-sticks

two feet long, the lower end somewhat resembling the palm of a hand, and which are worked with deer-skin thongs. Between these, they catch the ball, and throw it a great distance, when not prevented by some
of the opposite party,

who

fly to

intercept them.
it,

The goal
fix

about

five

hundred yards
able

in length:

at

each end of

they

two long bending

poles into the ground, three yards apart below, but slanting a consider-

way outwards. The

if
it

party that happens to throw the ball over these,

it

counts one; but,

for as usual.

be thrown underneath,
are equal in

is

cast back,

and played

The gamesters

the beginning of every course of the

number on each side; and, at ball, they throw it up high in the

center of the ground, and in a direct line between the two goals.

When

the

crowd of players prevents

off

the one

with a long direction,

who catched the ball, from throwing it he commonly sends it the right course, by an
manly
exercise,
is

artful
that,

sharp

twirl.

They

are so exceedingly expert in this

between the

goals, the ball

mostly flying the different ways,

surprising to see

by the
swiftly

force of the playing sticks, without falling to the ground, for they are not

allowed to catch
they
fly,

it

with their hands.

It is

how

when

closely chased

by a nimble footed pursuer; when they are

intercepted by one of the opposite party, his fear of being cut by the ball
sticks,

commonly gives them an opportunity of throwing it perhaps a hundred yards; but the antagonist sometimes runs up behind, and by a sudden stroke dashes down the ball. It is a very unusual thing to see them act spitefully in any sort of game, not even in this severe and tempting

exercise.

By education, precept, and custom, as well as strong example, they have learned to shew an external acquiescence in every thing that befalls them, either as to life or death. By this means, they reckon it a scandal to the character of a steady warrior to let his temper be ruflEled by any accidents, their virtue they say, should prevent it. Their conduct is equal

to their belief of the

power of those

principles:

previous to this sharp

exercise of ball playing, notwithstanding the irreUgion of the

Choktah

108
in other respects, they will supplicate

JAMES ADAIR

Yo He Wah,
to

to bless

them with

success.

To move

the deity to enable

them

conquer the party they are

to play against, they mortify themselves in a surprising

manner; and, exall

cept a small intermission, their female relations dance out of doors

the preceeding night, chanting religious notes with their shrill voices, to

move Yo He Wah to be favourable to The men fast and wake from sunset,
day, which
is

their kindred party

till

on the morrow.
over the next

the

baU play

is

about one or two o'clock in the afternoon. During the

whole night, they are to forbear sleeping under the penalty of reproaches and shame; which would sit very sharp upon them, if their party chanced to lose the game, as it would be ascribed to that unmanly and vicious

They turn out to the ball ground, in a long row, painted white, whooping as if Pluto's prisoners were all broke loose: when that enthusiconduct.

emotion is over, the leader of the company begins a rehgious invoby saying yah, short, then yo, long, which the rest of the train repeat with a short accent, and on a low key Mke the leader: and thus they proceed with such acclamations and invocations, as have been already noticed, on other occasions. Each party are desirous to gain the twentieth
astic

cation,

ball,

which they esteem a favourite divine gift. As it is in the time of laying by the corn, in the very heat of summer, they use this severe exercise, a stranger would wonder to see them hold it so long at full speed, and under the scorching sun, hungry also, and faint with the excessive use of such sharp physic as the button snake root, the want of natural rest, and of every kind of nourishment. But their constancy, which they gain by custom, and their love of virtue, as the sure means of success, enable them to perform all their exercises, without failing in the least, be they
ever so severe in the pursuit.

propriety of language,

Chungke; which, with "Running hard labour." They have near their state house, a square piece of ground well cleaned, and fine sand is carefully strewed over it, when requisite, to promote a swifter motion to what they throw along the surface. Only one, or two on a side, play at this ancient game. They have a stone about two fingers broad at the edge, and two spans round: each party has a pole of about eight feet long, smooth, and tapering at each end, the points flat. They set off a-breast of each other at six yards from the end of the play ground; then one of them hurls the stone on its edge, in as direct a line as he can, a considerable distance toward the middle of the other end of the square: when they have ran a few yards, each darts his pole anointed with bear's oil, with a proper force, as near as he can guess in proportion to the motion of the stone that the end may lie close to the stone when this is the case the person counts two of the game, and, in proportion to the nearest of the poles to the mark, one is counted unless by measuring, both are found to be at an equal distance from the stone. In this manner, the players will
favourite game, called
called

The warriors have another

may be

The Cheerake Nation

keep running most part of the day,
their breast,
at half speed,

109
under the violent heat
their

of the sun, staking their silver ornaments, their nose, finger, and ear rings;

arm, and wrist plates, and even

all

wearing apparel,

except that which barely covers their middle. All the American Indians
are

much

addicted to this game, which to us appears to be a task of stupid

it seems however to be of early origin, when their fore-fathers used diversions as simple as their manners. The hurling stones they use at present, were time immemorial rubbed smooth on the rocks, and with

drudgery:

prodigious labour; they are kept with the strictest reUgious care, from one generation to another, and are exempted from being buried with the dead.

They belong

to the

town where they are used, and are

carefully preserved.

THEIR GOVERNMENT
Every town has a large
only difference between
sions,
edifice

which with propriety may be called

the mountain house, in comparison of those already described. But the

it, and the winter house or stove, is in its dimenand application. It is usually built on the top of a hill; and, in that separate and imperial state house, the old beloved men and head warriors meet on material business, or to divert themselves, and feast and dance with the rest of the people. They furnish the inside with genteel couches, either to sit or lie on, about seven feet wide, and a little more in length, with a descent towards the waU, to secure them from falhng off when asleep. Every one takes his seat, according to his reputed merit; a worthless coxcomb dare not be guilty of the least intrusion should he attempt it, he is ordered to his proper place, before the multitude, with the vilest disgrace, and bears their stinging laughter. This may not be an unprofitable lesson to some of our young red coated men, who never traversed the rough bloody fields of Flanders; they would be more respected if they were more modest, and displayed superior virtues to those

whom

they affect to despise.

This leads

me

to speak of the Indian

method of government.

In gen-

eral, it consists in

a foederal union of the whole society for mutual safety.

As

no frail mortal to be a king, or ruler, over and humanity forbids the taking away of pleasure, the Ufe or property of any who obey the good laws of their country, they consider that the transgressor ought to have his evil deeds retaliated upon himself in an equal manner. The Indians, therefore, have no such titles or persons, as emperors, or kings; nor an appellative for such, in any of their dialects.
the law of nature appoints
his brethren;

Their highest

title,

either in military or civil

life, signifies

only a Chieftain:

they have no words to express despotic power, arbitrary kings, oppressed,

or obedient subjects; neither can they form any other ideas of the former,

than of "bad war chieftains of a numerous family,

who

inslaved the rest."

The power

of their chiefs,

is

an empty sound. They can only persuade or

110

JAMES ADAIR

dissuade the people, either by the force of good-nature and clear reasoning, or colouring things, so as to suit their prevailing passions. It is re-

puted merit alone, that gives them any titles of distinction above the meanest of the people. If we connect with this their opinion of a theocracy, it does not promise well to the reputed establishment of extensive and puissant Indian American empires. When any national affair is in debate,

you may hear every father of a family speaking in his house on the subject, with rapid, bold language, and the utmost freedom that a people can use. Their voices, to a man, have due weight in every public affair, as it concerns their welfare alike. Every town is independent of another. Their own friendly compact continues the union. An obstinate war leader will sometimes commit acts of hostility, or make peace for his own town, contrary to the good liking of the rest of the nation. But a few individuals are very cautious of commencing war on small occasions, without the general consent of the head men: for should it prove unsuccessful, the greater part would be apt to punish them as enemies, because they abused their power, which they had only to do good to the society. They are very deliberate in their councils, and never give an immediate answer to any message sent them by strangers, but suffer some nights first to elapse. They reason in a very orderly manner, with much coolness and goodnatured language, though they may differ widely in their opinions. Through respect to the silent audience, the speaker always addresses them in a standing posture. In this manner they proceed, till each of the head men hath given his opinion on the point in debate. Then they sit down together,
and determine upon the
affair.

Not

the least passionate expression

civility to

is

to

be heard among them, and they behave with the greatest

other. In all their stated orations they

each

have a beautiful modest way of

say, "it is not good, goodly,

expressing their dislike of

or commendable."

ill

things.

They only

whole behaviour, on pubUc occasions, is highly worthy of imitation by some of our British senators and lawyers.
their

And

Most

of their regulations are derived

Nature's school contemns aU quibbles of

easy rule, "do to others, as

from the plain law of nature. and teaches them the plain you would be done by," when they are able,
art,

without greater damage to themselves, than benefit to their creditor, they

discharge their honest debts. But, though no disputes pass between them

on such occasions, yet

as

soon

as they are

some heart-burnings on particular affairs, pubUcly known, their red Archimagus, and his old
if

there be

beloved men, convene and decide, in a very amicable manner,

parties

when both

become

quite easy.

They have no compulsive power

to force the

debtor to pay; yet the creditor can distrain his goods or chattels, and justly

without the least interruption and, by one of his relations, he sends back in a very civil manner, the overplus to the owner. These instances indeed seldom happen, for as they know each other's temper, they are very cautious of irritating, as the consequences might one day
satisfy himself


The Cheerake Nation
prove fatal

111

they never scold each other

when sober

they conceal

their

enmity be

it

ever so violent, and will converse together with smooth kind

is preying on their what they owe among discharging what they

language, and an obliging easy behaviour, while envy

heart. In general, they are very punctual in paying

themselves, but they are

grown

quite careless in

owe

to the traders, since the

commencement
is

of our destructive plan of

general licences.

"An

old debt,"

a proverbial expression with them, of

"nothing."

There are many petty crimes which their young people are guilty of, to which our laws annex severe punishment, but their's only an ironical

way

of jesting.

They commend

the criminal before a large audience, for

is

practising the virtue, opposite to the crime, that he

to be guilty and they commend of. If it is a warrior for having behaved valiantly against the enemy, when he acted

known

for theft, they praise his honest principles;

cowardly; they introduce the minutest circumstances of the

severe sarcasms which

affair,

with

wound

deeply.

Formerly, the Indian law obliged every town to work together in one
body, in sowing or planting their crops; though their
fields are

divided by

proper marks, and their harvest

is

gathered separately. The Cheerake and

is

Muskohge

still

observe that old custom, which

very necessary for such

assessed

idle people,

in their element.

The deUnquent

is

more or

less,

according to his neglect, by proper ofl&cers appointed to collect those

assessments, which they strictly fulfil, without the least interruption, or exemption of any able person. They are likewise bound to assist in raising public edifices. They have not the least trace of any other old compulsive law among them; and they did not stand in need of any other in their state. As they were neither able nor desirous to obtain any thing

more than a bare support of life, they could not credit their neighbours beyond a morsel of food, and that they liberally gave, whenever they called. Most of them observe that hospitable custom to this day. Their throwing away all their old provisions, as impure food, whenever the new harvest was sanctified, helped greatly to promote a spirit of hospitaUty. Their wants, and daily exercise in search of needful things, kept them
honest. Their ignorance of the gay part of
to preserve their virtue. In their
life,

helped in a great measure

former

state of simplicity, the plain

law

of nature was enough; but, as they are degenerating very fast from their ancient simplicity, they, without doubt, must have new laws to terrify them from committing new crimes, according to the usage of other nations,

who

multiply their laws, in proportion to the exigencies of time.

Dedicated Amateurs

GEORGE CATLIN
(1796-1872)

LEWIS HENRY

MORGAN

(1818-1881)

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

(1849-1948)

In the present age of professionalism

the

it is

only in the field of sports that

word amateur has someone who engages

advantage.

retained
in

its

original

meaning and

its

good repute

an

activity out of interest rather than for profit or

Although Catlin, Morgan and Grinnell are amateurs in this old-fashis nothing the least bit amateurish about their work. They were the most serious and dedicated anthropologists of their time; each one made a unique contribution to the science. But they did not hold academic positions. Grinnell was connected briefly with the Peabody Museum of Yale University as a zoologist; Morgan was offered a professorship at Rochester but declined it. But for all of them ethnological research was the first order of business and their studies carried on with dedicated zeal over the years were labors of love love of truth and justice and love
ioned sense, there

of the land

and

its

native people.

In the popular imagination the image of "the Indian" was taking shape, complete with war bonnet, lance and tipi, and mounted on a swift horse.

"good" Indian, possessing to the highest degree all the martial virtues, and the "bad" Indian, cruel and treacherous. By their side was the frontiersman: the white nomad, the
image
full of

An

contradictions

the

trader, trapper, hunter, soldier, explorer, the

folk,

man

without a

home

or kin-

wandering from camp to camp among the tribes. George Catlin was a frontiersman of a special kind a part-time frontiersman, but like many men of the frontier, a man with a mission. His mission was to record in paint and so "rescue from oblivion the looks and customs of the

vanishing races of native

man

in

America."

it was not to his taste and he soon gave up for art. He was a successful portrait painter. DeWitt Clinton and Dolly Madison were among his subjects. His summers he spent among the Indians; in the winter he returned to Washington or other cities to

Catlin practiced law briefly but

it

112

Dedicated Amateurs
earn enough by portrait painting to finance another

113

summer

in the field.

Although his paintings were his chief concern, he kept a journal with voluminous notes explaining his pictures and describing the events they depicted. His journals contain large amounts of ethnographic material
the upper Missouri. His description of a

from the Mandan of Initiation Ceremony," unfortunately too long for inclusion here, contains one of the few eyewitness accounts of the Sun Dance ritual in all its gory detail. His collection of 600 Indian portraits and scenes eventually found a home in the
dealing with
all

aspects of Indian

life,

especially

"Mandan

National

Museum.

Lewis H. Morgan grew up in the vicinity of Aurora, New York, surrounded by Seneca Indians. Back in his native town from college, and reading for the law, he joined a secret society of young men called "The Gordian Knot." The society was patterned after the Iroquois Confederacy, with chiefs and sachems; its members wore Indian garb and held their secret "councils" around campfires in the forest. Morgan, with the help of the famous Seneca chief, Ely S. Parker, made a thorough study of the social organization of the Iroquois Confederacy; the club was rechristened "The Grand Order of the Iroquois", and took as its purpose the study and preservation of Indian lore, the education of Indians and assistance to them in accepting the conditions of civilized life.
Sent by the "Grand Order" to Washington,
in defeating the ratification of a treaty

Morgan was

instrumental

which would have deprived the Seneca of their land. In recognition of his services to them, he was adopted into the Seneca tribe and given the name of Tayadawahkugh, "One Lying Across," that is, one who served as a bond between Indians and whites. Throughout his life, Morgan maintained his interest in Indian welfare. A devout Christian himself, he had many friends among the missionaries working in the western territories for whose efforts in educating and Christianizing the Indians he had the highest respect.

The League

Morgan's early researches, in collaboration with Parker, culminated in of the Ho-de-no-sau-nee or Iroquois which John Wesley Powell characterized as "the first scientific account of an Indian tribe."

Grinnell was by profession a naturalist, but by predilection an explorer and pioneer. It was to collect vertebrate fossils for the Peabody Museum
into the Black Hills,
first went West. He joined Custer's expedition and the Ludlow expedition to the Yellowstone. For thirty-five years he edited Forest and Stream, a journal devoted to wild life and the problems of conservation. He knew and loved the prairie when the buffalo ran, before it had been torn up by plows and railroads. He loved the people of the prairie, too. And of all the tribes he knew, it was the Cheyenne he loved best.

of Yale University that he

114

CATLIN, MORGAN, GRINNELL

first

years no

writes, in 1890, and for the next forty he did not visit them. After forty years of living with them as friend and brother, he was ready to write of the things he had learned sitting around their campfires. Of all the books written

He

met the Cheyenne, he

that

summer passed

about Indians, none comes closer to their everyday

classic

life

than Grinnell's

grass

monograph on the Cheyenne. Reading it, one can smell the buffalo and the wood fires, feel the heavy morning dew on the prairie.

R.L.B.

GEORGE CATLIN
(1796-1872)

A Mandan

Village on the

Upper Missouri

SAID

THAT

WAS HERE
and
I find

IN

THE MIDST OF A STRANGE PEOPLE, WHICH

IS

literally true;

myself surrounded by subjects and scenes worthy

the pens of Irving or

in legends

Cooper of the pencils of Raphael or Hogarth; rich and romances, which would require no aid of the imagination
of the pheastribes
is

for a

book or a picture. The Mandans (or See-pohs-kah-nu-mah-kah-kee, "people

all

ants," as they call themselves), are perhaps

one of the most ancient

of Indians in our country. Their origin, like that of

the other tribes

traditions

from

necessity, involved in mystery

and obscurity. Their

and

peculiarities I shall casually recite in this or future epistles;

which when

understood, will at once,

race.

I think,

denominate them
first

a peculiar and distinct

They take

great pride in relating their traditions, with regard to

their origin;

contending that they were the

people created on earth.

Their existence in these regions has not been from a very ancient period;
and, from what I could learn of their traditions, they have, at a former

numerous and powerful nation; but by the continual wars which have existed between them and their neighbours, they have
period, been a very

been reduced to
This tribe
is at

their present

numbers.

bank of the Missouri, about 1800 miles above St. Louis, and 200 below the Mouth of Yellow Stone river. They have two villages only, which are about two miles distant from each other; and number in all (as near as I can learn), about 2000 souls. Their present villages are beautifully located, and judiciously also, for
present located on the west

defence against the assaults of their enemies. The

site of

the lower (or prin-

From Catlin, Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Conditions of the North American Indians (London: published for the Author by Tilt and Bogue,
1842), 2 vols., 3rd edition, vol.
I,

pp. 80-91.

115

116
cipal) town, in particular

GEORGE CATLIN
(plate 45),
is

one of the most beautiful and

pleasing that can be seen in the world, and even

more

beautiful than imagi-

nation could ever create. In the very midst of an extensive valley (em-

braced within a thousand graceful swells and parapets or mounds of interminable green, changing to blue, as they vanish in distance)
city,
is

built

an extensive plain (which the with a green turf, as well as the hills and dales, as far as the is covered eye can possibly range, without tree or bush to be seen) are to be seen rising from the ground, and towards the heavens, domes (not "of gold,"
but) of dirt

or principal town of the Mandans.

On

and

the thousand spears

(not "spires")

&c. &c., of the semi-subterraneous village of the hospitable

and scalp-poles, and gentlemanly

Mandans. These people formerly (and within the

oldest

recollection of

many

of their

men)

lived fifteen or twenty miles farther

down

the river, in ten

contiguous villages; the marks or ruins of which are yet plainly to be seen.

At

that period,

it is

evident, as well

villages contained, as

from

their traditions, that their

from the number of lodges which their numbers were much

traditions

greater than at the present day.

There are other, and very

relative to a
still

interesting,

and
these,

historical

facts

prior location and condition of these people, of which I

shall

speak more fully on a future occasion.

I

From

when

they are

promulged,

think there

may be

a pretty fair deduction drawn, that they

formerly occupied the lower part of the Missouri and even the Ohio and

Muskingum, and have gradually made

they

their

way up

the Missouri to where

now

are. this place (and, in fact, to

There are many remains on the river below

be seen nearly as low down as
construction of
St.

Louis), which shew clearly the pecuUar

Mandan

lodges,

and consequently carry a strong proof of

this will

the above position. While descending the river, however, which I shall

commence

in a
it

few weeks, in a canoe,

the

be a subject of

interest;

and

I shall give

close examination.

The ground on which

bed of the and of
protects
river.

Mandan

village is at present built,

fifty feet

was ad-

mirably selected for defence; being on a bank forty or

above the

solid rock.

The The

greater part of this

river,

bank

is

nearly perpendicular,

suddenly changing

its

course to a right-angle,

two sides of the village, which is built upon this promontory or angle; they have therefore but one side to protect, which is effectually done by a strong piquet, and a ditch inside of it, of three or four feet in depth. The piquet is composed of timbers of a foot or more in diameter, and eighteen feet high, set firmly in the ground at sufficient distances from each other to admit of guns and other missiles to be fired between them. The ditch (unlike that of civihzed modes of fortification) is inside of the piquet, in which their warriors screen their bodies from the view and

A Mandan

Village

on

the

Upper Missouri

117

weapons of their enemies, whilst they are reloading and discharging their weapons through the piquets. The Mandans are undoubtedly secure in their villages, from the attacks of any Indian nation, and have nothing to fear, except when they meet their enemy on the prairie. Their village has a most novel appearance to the eye of a stranger; their lodges are closely grouped together, leaving but just room enough for walking and riding between them; and appear from without, to be built entirely of dirt; but one is surprised when he enters them, to see the neatness, comfort, and spacious dimensions of these earth-covered dwellings. They all have a circular form, and are from forty to sixty feet in diameter. Their foundations are prepared by digging some two feet in the ground, and forming the floor of earth, by levelHng the requisite size for the lodge. These floors or foundations are all perfectly circular, and varying in size in proportion to the number of inmates, or of the quality or standing of the families which are to occupy them. The superstructure is then produced, by arranging, inside of this circular excavation, firmly fixed in the ground and resting against the bank, a barrier or wall of timbers, some eight or nine inches in diameter, of equal height (about six feet) placed on end, and resting against each other, supported by a formidable embankment of earth raised against them outside; then, resting upon the tops of these timbers or piles, are others of equal size and equal in numbers, of twenty or twenty-five feet in length, resting firmly against each other, and sending their upper or smaUer ends towards the centre and top of the lodge; rising at an angle of forty-five degrees to the apex or sky-light, which is about three or four feet in diameter, answering as a chimney and a sky-light at the same time. The roof of the lodge being thus formed, is supported by beams passing around the inner part of the lodge about the middle of these poles or timbers, and themselves upheld by four or five large posts passing down to the floor of the lodge. On the top of, and over the poles forming the roof, is placed a complete mat of willow-boughs, of half a foot or more in thickness, which protects the timbers from the dampness of the earth, with which the lodge is covered from bottom to top, to the depth of two or three feet; and then with a hard or tough clay, which is impervious to water, and which with long use becomes quite hard, and a lounging place for the whole family in pleasant weather for sage for wooing lovers ^for dogs and all; an airing place a look-out a seat for the solia place for gossip and mirth tary gaze and meditations of the stern warrior, who sits and contemplates the peaceful mirth and happiness that is breathed beneath him, fruits of his hard-fought battles, on fields of desperate combat with bristling Red Men. The floors of these dwellings are of earth, but so hardened by use, and swept so clean, and tracked by bare and mocassined feet, that they have almost a poMsh, and would scarcely soil the whitest linen. In the centre, and immediately under the sky-light (plate 46) is the fire-place a hole

G.auitih

H/stniUACsa.

Plate 45, Plate

46


A Mandan
Village

on

the

Upper Missouri

119

of four or five feet in diameter, of a circular form, sunk a foot or more below the surface, and curbed around with stone. Over the fire-place, and suspended from the apex of diverging props or poles, is generally seen the pot or kettle, filled with buffalo meat; and around it are the family, rechning in all the most picturesque attitudes and groups, resting on their buffalo-robes and beautiful mats of rushes. These cabins are so spacious, a family and all their conthat they hold from twenty to forty persons nexions. They aU sleep on bedsteads similar in form to ours, but generally not quite so high; made of round poles rudely lashed together with thongs. A buffalo skin, fresh stripped from the animal, is stretched across the bottom poles, and about two feet from the floor; which, when it dries, becomes much contracted, and forms a perfect sacking-bottom. The fur side of this skin is placed uppermost, on which they he with great comfort, with a buffalo-robe folded up for a pillow, and others drawn over them instead of blankets. These beds, as far as I have seen them (and I have visited

almost every lodge in the village), are uniformly screened with a covering
of buffalo or elk skins, oftentimes beautifully dressed

and placed over the

suffi-

upright poles or frame, like a suit of curtains; leaving a hole in front,

ciently spacious for the

occupant to pass in and out, to and from his or

her bed.

Some

of these coverings or curtains are exceedingly beautiful,

being cut tastefully into fringe, and handsomely ornamented with porcupine's quills

and picture writings or hieroglyphics.

From

the great

number

of inmates in these lodges, they are necessarily

It is

very spacious, and the number of beds considerable.

thing to see these lodges
fifty feet

no uncommon is an immense room), with a row of these curtained beds extending quite around their sides, being some ten or twelve of them, placed four or five feet apart, and the space between them occupied by a large post, fixed quite firm in the ground, and six or seven feet high, with large wooden pegs or bolts in it, on which are hung and grouped, with a wild and starthng taste, the arms and armour of the respective proprietor; consisting of his whitened shield, embossed and emblazoned with the figure of his protecting medicine (or mystery), his bow and quiver, his war-club or battle-axe, his dart or javelin his medicine bag and his eagle his tobacco pouch and pipe ermine or raven headdress; and over all, and on the top of the post (as if placed by some conjuror or Indian magician, to guard and protect the
in diameter inside (which

speU of wildness that reigns in

relief the

this strange place), stands forth and in full head and horns of a buffalo, which is, by a village regulation, owned and possessed by every man in the nation, and hung at the head of his bed, which he uses as a mask when called upon by the chiefs, to join in the buffalo-dance, of which I shall say more in a future epistle. This arrangement of beds, of arms, &c., combining the most vivid disof barbed and glistenplay and arrangement of colours, of furs, of trinkets of mysteries and hocus pocus, together with the ing points and steel

120

GEORGE CATLIN

sombre and smoked colour of the roof and sides of the lodge; and the the graceful (though uncivil) conversational, wild, and rude and red garrulous, storytelling and happy, though ignorant and untutored groups, wooing their sweethearts, and embracing that are smoking their pipes their little ones about their peaceful and endeared fire-sides; together with their pots and kettles, spoons, and other culinary articles of their own manufacture, around them; present altogether, one of the most picturesque scenes to the eye of a stranger, that can be possibly seen; and far more

wild and vivid than could ever be imagined.

Reader,
is

I said

these people were garrulous, story-telUng

and happy;
fact,

this

true,

and

literally so;

and

it

belongs to

me

to estabhsh the

and
this

correct the error which seems to have gone forth to the world
subject.

on

have before observed, there is no subject that I know of, within and reach of human wisdom, on which the civilized world in this enhghtened age are more incorrectly informed, than upon that of the true manners and customs, and moral condition, rights and abuses, of the North American Indians; and that, as I have also before remarked, chiefly on account of the difficulty of our cultivating a fair and honourable ac-

As

the scope

quaintance with them, and doing them the

of a fair

justice, and ourselves the credit, and impartial investigation of their true character. The present age of refinement and research has brought every thing else that I know of (and a vast deal more than the most enthusiastic mind ever dreamed of) within the scope and fair estimation of refined intellect and of science; while the wild and timid savage, with his interesting customs and modes has vanished, or his character has become changed, at the approach of the enlightened and intellectual world; who follow him like a phantom for awhile, and in ignorance of his true character at last turn back to the common business and social transactions of life. Owing to the above difficulties, which have stood in the way, the world have (sic) fallen into many egregious errors with regard to the true modes and meaning of the savage, which I am striving to set forth and correct in the course of these epistles. And amongst them all, there is none more common, nor more entirely erroneous, nor more easily refuted, than the current one, that "the Indian is a sour, morose, reserved and taciturn man." I have heard this opinion advanced a thousand times and I believed it; but such certainly, is not uniformly nor generally the case. I have observed in aU my travels amongst the Indian tribes, and more particularly amongst these unassuming people, that they are a far more talkative and conversational race than can easily be seen in the civilized world. This assertion, like many others I shaU occasionally make, will somewhat startle the folks at the East, yet it is true. No one can look into the wigwams of these people, or into any little momentary group of them, without being at once struck with the conviction that small-talk, gossip,

A Mandan
garrulity,
little

Village

on the Upper Missouri

121

and story-telling, are the leading passions with them, who have do in the world, but to while away their lives in the innocent and endless amusement of the exercise of those talents with which Nature has liberally endowed them, for their mirth and enjoyment. One has but to walk or ride about this Uttle town and its environs for a few hours in a pleasant day, and overlook the numerous games and gambols, where their notes and yelps of exultation are unceasingly vibrating in the atmosphere; or peep into their wigwams (and watch the glistening fun that's beaming from the noses, cheeks, and chins, of the crouching, cross-legged, and prostrate groups around the fire; where the pipe is passed, and jokes and anecdote, and laughter are excessive) to become convinced that it is natural to laugh and be merry. Indeed it would be strange if a race of people like these, who have little else to do or reMsh in life, should be curtailed in that source of pleasure and amusement; and it would be also strange, if a life-time of indulgence and practice in so innocent and productive a mode of amusement, free from the cares and anxieties of business or professions, should not advance them in their modes, and enable them to draw far greater pleasure from such sources, than we in the civilized and business world can possibly feel. If the uncultivated condition of their minds curtails the number of their enjoyments; yet they are free from, and independent of, a thousand cares and jealousies, which arise from mercenary motives in the civihzed world; and are yet far a-head of us (in my opinion) in the real and uninterrupted enjoyment of their
else to

simple natural faculties.

They

live in

a country and in communities, where

it is

not customary to
in the

look forward into the future with concern, for they Uve without incurring
the expenses of
life,

which are absolutely necessary and unavoidable

enlightened world; and of course their inclinations and faculties are solely
directed to the enjoyment of the present day, without the sober reflections

on the past or apprehensions of the future. With minds thus unexpanded and uninfluenced by the thousand passions and ambitions of civihzed life, it is easy and natural to concentrate their thoughts and their conversation upon the little and trifling occurrences of their lives. They are fond of fun and good cheer, and can laugh easily and heartily at a shght joke, of which their pecuUar modes of life furnish them an inexhaustible fund, and enable them to cheer their little circle about the wigwam fire-side with endless laughter and garruhty.
It

may be
and
as I

thought, that I
I

am

taking a great deal of pains to estabfish

this fact,

much

am

upon it than I otherwise should, inasopposing an error that seems to have become current through
longer

am dweUing

the world; and which,

if it be once corrected, removes a material difl&culty, which has always stood in the way of a fair and just estimation of the Indian character. For the purpose of placing the Indian in a proper light before the world, as I hope to do in many respects, it is of importance to


122

GEORGE CATLIN
it is

me

but justice to the savage

and
I

justice to

my

readers also, that

such points should be cleared up as

truth, or else

proceed; and for the world

who

enquire for correct and just information, they must take

my

words for the

come

to this country

and look for themselves, into these gro-

tesque circles of never-ending laughter and fun, instead of going to

ington City to gaze on the poor embarrassed Indian

his

who

is

called there

Washby

"Great Father," to contend with the sophistry of the learned and ac-

quisitive world, in bartering

away

his lands with the graves

is

and the hunt-

ing grounds of his ancestors. There

not the proper place to study the

it is the place where the sycophant and the scribbler go to gaze and frown upon him to learn his character, and write his history! and because he does not speak, and quaffs the delicious beverage which he receives from white mens' hands, "he's a speechless brute and a

Indian character; yet

drunkard."

An

Indian

is

a beggar in Washington City, and a white

man

is

almost equally so in the

is

Mandan

village.
is

An

Indian in Washington

is

mute,

dumb and

embarrassed; and so

reasons) in this place

he has nobody

a white

man (and
must needs

for the very

same

to talk to.
travel

A wild
he

Indian, to reach the civilized world,

some thou-

sands of miles in vehicles of conveyance, to which he

through latitudes
is

unused

to

unaccustomed and longitudes which are new to him living on food that stared and gazed at by the thousands and tens of thou-

is

sands

whom

he cannot talk to

his heart grieving

and
at the

his

body sickening
his

at the exhibition of white

men's wealth and luxuries, which are enjoyed on

his ancestors.

the land,

and over the bones of

(like a

And

end of

journey

he stands
pitied

and heralded

caged animal) to be scanned

to the

world as a mute

on horseback patch
quitoes

A white man, to reach this village,

and on
foot;

must

travel

swim

rivers

and a by steam-boatby canoes wade quagmires mosas a brute,

to

be

criticised

to

be

beggar.

fight

his moccasins,

on meat alone dream of his friends he has left behind; and when he gets here, half-starved, and half-naked, and more than half sick, he finds himself a beggar for a place to sleep, and for something to eat; a mute amongst thousands who flock about him, to look and to criticise, and to laugh at him for his jaded appearance, and to speak of him as they do of all white men (without distinction) as liars. These people are in the habit of seeing no white men in their country but Traders, and know of no other; deeming us aU aUke, and receiving us all under the presumption that we come to trade
breeches; hve
think and

and patch them again and again, and his sleep on the ground the whole way, and

or barter; applying to us
Traders.

all,

indiscriminately, the epithet of "liars" or

The reader
in;

will therefore see, that

we mutually
also,

suffer in

each other's

estimation from the unfortunate ignorance, which distance has chained us

and (as

can vouch, and the Indian

who

has visited the civilized

A Mandan

Village

on

the

Upper Missouri

123

world) that the historians

who would

record justly and correctly the

character and customs of a people, must go and live

among them.

have

this

morning, perched myself upon the top of one of the earthI

covered lodges, which

and
me.

beneath and about

its

me (plate

have before described, and having the whole village 47), with its sachems its warriors its dogs

horses in motion

waving over
I shall

my

head

its

medicines (or mysteries) and scalp-poles

its

piquets

in full view, with the din

and bustle of the

be

able, I hope, to give

and prairies, and river panorama that is about some sketches more to the life than I
^its

green

fields

thrilling

could have done from any effort of recollection.

I said that the lodges or

earth were of and so closely grouped that there was but that they had a door just room enough to walk and ride between them, by which to enter them, and a hole in the top for the admission of light, and for the smoke to escape, that the inmates were at times grouped upon their tops in conversations and other amusements, &c.; and yet you know not exactly how they look, nor what is the precise appearance of the strange world that is about me. There is really a newness and rudeness in every thing that is to be seen. There are several hundred houses or dweUings about me, and they are purely unique they are all covered with dirt the people are all red, and yet distinct from all other red folks I have seen. The horses are wild every dog is a wolf the whole moving mass are strangers to me: the Hving, in everything, carry an air of intractable wildness about them, and the dead are not buried, but dried upon scaffolds. The groups of lodges around me present a very curious and pleasing appearance, resembling in shape (more nearly than anything else I can compare them to) so many potash-kettles inverted. On the tops of these are to be seen groups standing and rechning, whose wild and picturesque appearance it would be difficult to describe. Stern warriors, like statues, standing in dignified groups, wrapped in their painted robes, with their heads decked and plumed with quills of the war-eagle; extending their long arms to the east or the west, the scenes of their battles, which they are recounting over to each other. In another direction, the wooing lover, softenforty or sixty feet in diameter,

wigwams were covered with

ing the heart of his fair Taih-nah-tai-a with the notes of his simple lute.

On

other lodges, and beyond these, groups are engaged in games of the "moccasin," or the "platter."
dresses,

Some

are to be seen manufacturing robes

and

others,

fatigued

with

and amusements or occupations, have

stretched their

hmbs

to enjoy the luxury of sleep, whilst basking in the sun.

With aU this wild and varied medley of living beings are mixed their dogs, which seem to be so near an Indian's heart, as almost to constitute a material Unk of his existence. In the centre of the village is an open space, or public area, of 150 feet in diameter, and circular in form, which is used for all public games and

i^

.^.^aii
,J---y/!:^r

)lPl(l(fl%Hn(ini'IM.'^!Jifn'>''in'^lll!!!lIilllli"l'il!'|l(jllil'Wi^l'ii''^'''J^

,^>vf|<-<_'c__^-J>'\fC,-. -^

&.

CaMin.

losswui&a'sc.

Plate 47, Plate 48

A Mandan
festivals,

Village

on the Upper Missouri

125

shews and exhibitions; and also for their "annual religious cereI shall hereafter give
in,

monies," which are soon to take place, and of which

some account. The lodges around

religious veneration, as I

this

open space front

with their doors

towards the centre; and in the middle of

am

told,

an object of great on account of the importance it has in

this circle stands
rites.

the conduction of those annual religious

form of a large hogshead, some eight or ten feet high, made of planks and hoops, containing within it some of their choicest medicines or mysteries, and reUgiously preserved unbacked or scratched, as a symbol of the "Big Canoe," as they call it. One of the lodges fronting on this circular area, and facing this strange object of their superstition, is caUed the "Medicine Lodge," or council
This object
is

in

house.

It is

in this sacred building that these wonderful ceremonies, in

commemoration
that this

of the flood, take place. I

am

told

by the Traders

that

the cruelties of these scenes are frightful and abhorrent in the extreme;

and

huge wigwam, which is now closed, has been built exclusively for this grand celebration. I am every day reminded of the near approach of the season for this strange affair, and as I have not yet seen any thing of it, I cannot describe it; I know it only from the relations of the Traders who have witnessed parts of it; and their descriptions are of so extraordinary a character, that I would not be willing to describe until I can see for myself, which will, in all probability, be in a few days.

In ranging the eye over the village from where I

am

writing, there

is

presented to the view the strangest mixture and medley of unintelhgible

trash (independant of the living beings that are in motion), that can possibly

be imagined.

On

the roofs of the lodges, besides the groups of hving,

are buffaloes' skulls, skin canoes, pots

suspended on poles, erected some twenty

and pottery; sleds and sledges and feet above the doors of their wig-

wams,

are displayed in a pleasant day, the scalps of warriors, preserved as

trophies;

and thus proudly exposed

as evidence of their warlike deeds. In

other parts are raised on poles the warriors' pure and whitened shields and
quivers, with medicine-bags attached;
cloth, or other costly stuff, offered

and here and there a sacrifice of red to the Great Spirit, over the door of some benignant chief, in humble gratitude for the blessings which he is enjoying. Such is a part of the strange medley that is before and around me; and amidst them and the blue streams of smoke that are rising from the tops of these hundred "coal-pits," can be seen in distance, the green and boundless, treeless, bushless prairie; and on it, and contiguous to the piquet which encloses the village, a hundred scaffolds, on which their "dead Uve," as they term it.

up

just

These people never bury the dead, but place the bodies on shght scaffolds above the reach of human hands, and out of the way of wolves and dogs; and they are there left to moulder and decay. This cemetery, or place of deposite for the dead, is just back of the village, on a level prairie

126

GEORGE CATLIN

is

(plate 48); and with all its appearances, history, forms, ceremonies, &c. one of the strangest and most interesting objects to be described in the

vicinity of this peculiar race.

Whenever a person dies in the Mandan village, and the customary honours and condolence are paid to his remains, and the body dressed in its
and supplied with bow and quiver, and tobacco knife, flint and steel, and provisions enough to last him a few days on the journey which he is to perform; a fresh buffalo's skin, just taken from the animal's back, is wrapped around the body, and tightly bound and wound with thongs of raw hide from head to foot. Then other robes are soaked in water, till they are quite soft and elastic, which are also bandaged around the body in the same manner, and tied fast with thongs, which are wound with great care and exactness, so as to exclude the action of the air from all parts of the body. There is then a separate scaffold erected for it, constructed of four upright posts, a little higher than human hands can reach; and on the tops of these are small poles passing around from one post to the others; across which a number of wiUow-rods just strong enough to support the body, which is laid upon them on its back, with its feet carefully presented
best attire, painted, oiled, feasted,
shield, pipe

towards the rising sun.

There are a great number of these bodies resting exactly in a similar way; excepting in some instances where a chief, or medicine-man, may be
seen with a few yards of scarlet or blue cloth spread over his remains, as a

mark

of public respect

and esteem. Some hundreds of these bodies may be

call,

seen reposing in this manner in this curious place, which the Indians
"the village of the dead;" and the traveller,

who

visits this

country to study

and
but
this

learn, will not only

if

be struck with the novel appearance of the scene;

he

will give attention to the respect

and devotions that are paid to

sacred place, he will draw

life:

many

a moral deduction that will last

filial,

him

through

he

will learn, at least, that

conjugal, and paternal affec-

tion are not necessarily the results of civiUzation; but that the Great Spirit

and that the spices and improvements of the enhghtened world have never refined upon them. There is not a day in the year in which one may not see in this place evidences of this fact, that will wring tears from his eyes, and kindle in his bosom a spark of respect and sympathy for the poor Indian, if he never felt it before. Fathers, mothers, wives, and children, may be seen lying under these scaffolds, prostrated upon the ground, with their faces in the dirt, howUng forth incessantly the most piteous and heart-broken cries and
has given them to
in his native state;

man

lamentations for the misfortunes of their kindred; tearing their hair

ting their flesh with their knives,

cut-

and doing other penance to appease the spirits of the dead, whose misfortunes they attribute to some sin or omission of their own, for which they sometimes inflict the most excruciating
self-torture.

A Mandan
When
skulls,

Village

on

the

Upper Missouri
rest,

127
decay and
fall

the scaffolds

on which the bodies

to the

ground, the nearest relations having buried the rest of the bones, take the

which are perfectly bleached and

purified,

and place them in

circles

of an hundred or

more on the

prairie

placed at equal distances apart

(some eight or nine inches from each other), with the faces all looking to the centre; where they are reUgiously protected and preserved in their precise positions from year to year, as objects of religious and affectionate veneration (plate 48). There are several of these "Golgothas" or circles of twenty or thirty feet in diameter, and in the centre of each ring or circle is a little mound of three feet high, on which uniformly rest two buffalo skulls (a male and female); and in the centre of the little mound is erected a "medicine pole," about twenty feet high, supporting many curious articles of mystery and superstition, which they suppose have the power of guarding and protecting this sacred arrangement. Here then, to this strange place do these people again resort, to evince their further affections for the dead ^not in groans and lamentations however, for several years have cured the anguish; but fond affections and endearments are here renewed, and conversations are here held and cherished with the dead. Each one of these skulls is placed upon a bunch of wild sage, which has been puUed and placed under it. The wife knows (by some mark or resemblance) the skull of her husband or her child, which lies in this group; and there seldom passes a day that she does not visit it, with a dish of the best cooked food that her wigwam affords, which she sets before the skuU at night, and returns for the dish in the morning. As soon as it is discovered that the sage on which the skull rests is beginning to decay, the woman cuts a fresh bunch, and places the skull carefully upon it, removing that which was under it. Independent of the above-named duties, which draw the women to this spot, they visit it from inclination, and hnger upon it to hold converse and company with the dead. There is scarcely an hour in a pleasant day, but more or less of these women may be seen sitting or laying {sic) by the talking to it in the most pleasant and enskull of their child or husband dearing language that they can use (as they were wont to do in former days) and seemingly getting an answer back. It is not unfrequently the

case, that the

woman brings

her needle-work with her, spending the greater

part of the day, sitting by the side of the skull of her child, chatting incessantly with
casins;
it, while she is embroidering or garnishing a pair of mocand perhaps, overcome with fatigue, falls asleep, with her arms encircled around it, forgetting herself for hours; after which she gathers up her things and returns to the village. There is something exceedingly interesting and impressive in these scenes, which are so strikingly dissimilar, and yet within a few rods of each other; the one is the place where they pour forth the frantic anguish

128
of their souls

GEORGE CATLIN

and

afterwards pay their

visits

to the other, to jest

and

gossip with the dead.

The
crania,

great variety of shapes

and characters exhibited

interesting
it

in these

groups of

render them a very

study for the craniologist and

phrenologist; but I apprehend that

(if

not of impossibility) to

would be a matter of great difficulty procure them at this time, for the use and

benefit of the scientific world.

LEWIS

HENRY MORGAN
(1818-1881)

League of the Iroquois

PREFACE
TO ENCOURAGE A KINDER FEELING TOWARDS THE INDIAN, FOUNDED UPON
a truer knowledge of his civil and domestic institutions, and of his capabilities for

future elevation,

is

the motive in which this

work

originated.

The present

Iroquois, the descendants of that gifted race

which formerly

held under their jurisdiction the fairest portions of our Repubhc,

supervision of the people

now

dwell within our limits as dependent nations, subject to the tutelage and

who

displaced their fathers. Their numbers, the

circumstances of their past history and present condition, and more especially the relation in

which they stand to the people of the

State, suggest

many important
Born
to

questions concerning their future destiny.

fate, the inheritors of many wrongs, they have been unable, of themselves, to escape from the complicated difl&culties which accelerate their decline. To aggravate these adverse influences, the

an unpropitious

public estimation of the Indian, resting, as

it

does,
it

upon an imperfect

knowledge of

his character,
is

and

tinctured, as

ever has been, with the

coloring of prejudice,

universally unjust.

The time has come

social
life,

in

which

it is

befitting to cast

away

all

ancient antheir

tipathies, all inherited opinions;

and having taken a nearer view of

condition and wants, to study

anew our duty concerning them.

Notwithstanding the embarrassments which have obstructed their progress,

the obscurity in which they have lived, and the prevailing indifference to
their welfare, they

in their social system,

have gradually overcome many of the evils inherent and raised themselves to a considerable degree of

prosperity. Their present condition,

when considered

in connection with

the ordeal through which they have passed, testifies to the presence of an

element in their character which must eventually lead to important results. It

brings before us the question of their ultimate reclamation, cer-

From Morgan, League of the Ho-de-no-sau-nee or Iroquois, edited by H. M. Lloyd (New York: Dodd Mead and Company, 1902), Vol. I, pp. ix-xi, 99-107, 114115, 327, 321-322, 324-325, 331-335.

129

130
tainly a

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

more

interesting subject, in

itself,

than any other connected with

the Indian,

Can

the residue of the Iroquois be reclaimed,

and

finally

raised to the position of citizens of the State?

To

secure this end, at once

so just and so beneficent, our

own

people have an important part to

perform.

As this work does not may arise in the mind of

what reliance
witness
reason,
life, is
it

profess to be based

upon

authorities, a question

the reader,

whence

its

materials were derived, or

be placed upon its statements. The credibility of a known to depend chiefly upon his means of knowledge. For this may not be inappropriate to state, that circumstances in early
is

to

not necessary to be related, brought the author in frequent intercourse

with the descendants of the Iroquois, and led to his adoption as a Seneca.
This gave him favorable opportunities for studying minutely into their
social organization, and the structure and principles of the ancient League. Copious notes were made from time to time, when leisure enabled him to prosecute his researches among them, until these had accumulated beyond the bounds of the present volume. As the materials increased in quantity and variety, the interest awakened in the subject finally induced the idea of its arrangement for publication.

THE COUNCILS OF THE IROQUOIS

In an oligarchy, where the administrative power
bers of the
is

vested in the

mem-

RuHng Body

jointly,

a Council of the OUgarchs becomes the

is

instrumentahty through which the will of this body

jects of investigation.

ascertained and

enforced. For this reason the Councils of the Iroquois are important sub-

By them were

exercised

all

the legislative
its

and execu-

tive authority incident to the

League, and necessary for

security against

outward attack and internal dissensions. When the sachems were not assembled around the general council-fire, the government itself had no visible existence. Upon no point, therefore, can an examination be better directed, to ascertain the degree of power vested in the Ruhng Body, and the manner in which their domestic administration and poHtical relations were conducted. When the sachems were scattered, like the people, over a large territory, they exercised a local and individual authority in the
matters of every-day
life,

or in national council jointly adjusted the affairs

of their respective nations.

Those higher and more important concern-

ments, which involved the interests of the League, were reserved to the

sachems in general council. In this council resided the animating principle, by which their poUtical machinery was moved. It was, in effect, the government.

The oligarchical form of government is not without its advantages, although indicative of a low state of civihzation. A comparison of views, by the agency of a council, would at any time be favorable to the development
of talent. It

was

especially the case

among

the Iroquois, in conse-

League of the Iroquois

quence of the greater diversity of
interests,

131

and the more extended reach

of affairs incident to several nations in close alliance. Events of greater

magnitude would spring up in the midst of a flourishing confederacy, than and it is demonstrated by the political history of all governments, that men develop intellect in exact proportion to the magnitude of the events with which they become identiin a nation of inconsiderable importance;

For these reasons, the League was favorable to the production of among nations whose institutions and systems of government were inferior. The extremely liberal character of their oligarchy is manifested by the modus procedendi of these councils. It is obvious that the sachems were not set over the people as arbitrary rulers, to legislate as their own wiU might dictate, irrespective of the popular voice; on the contrary, there is reason to believe that a public sentiment sprang up on questions of general interest, which no council felt at liberty to disregard. By deferring all action upon such questions until a council brought together the sachems of the League, attended by a concourse of inferior chiefs and warriors, an opportunity was given to the people to judge for themselves, and to take such measures as were necessary to give expression and force to their opinions. If the band of warriors became interested in the passing question, they held a council apart, and having given it a full consideration, appointed an orator to communicate their views to the sachems, their Patres Conscripti. In like manner would the chiefs, and even the women proceed, if they entertained opinions which they wished to urge upon the consideration of the council. From the pubUcity with which the affairs of the League were conducted, and the indirect participation in their
fied.

men

higher in capacity than would arise

adjustment thus allowed the people, a favorable indication

the democratic spirit of the government.

is

afforded of

Oratory,

from the constitutional organization of the

council,

was

necessarily brought into high repute. Questions involving the safety of the
race,

those warlike periods,

and the preservation of the League, were frequently before it. In when the Confederacy was moving onward amid

incessant conflicts with contiguous nations, or, perchance, resisting sud-

was no dearth of those exciting causes, of those emergencies of peril, which rouse the spirit of the people, and summon into activity their highest energies. Whenever events converged to such a crisis, the council was the first resort; and there, under the pressure of dangers, and in the glow of patriotism, the eloquence of the Iroquois flowed as pure and spontaneous as the fountains of their
den
tides of migratory population, there

thousand streamlets.

The Indian has a quick and enthusiastic appreciation of eloquence. Highly impulsive in his nature, and with passions untaught of restraint,
he
is

strongly susceptible of

its

influence.

By

the cultivation

of this capacity,

was opened the pathway

to distinction;

and exercise and the chief or

132
warrior gifted with
its

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

magical power could elevate himself as rapidly, as
establish

he
the

who

gained renown upon the war-path. With the Iroquois, as with

the

Romans,

two professions, oratory and arms, could

in the highest degree of personal consideration. in the majestic days of the

To

the ambitious

men Roman

house, the two pursuits equally

Repubhc, and to the proud Indian in his sylvan commended themselves; and in one or

the other alone, could either expect success.

It is

a singular

fact, resulting

from the structure of Indian

political,

institutions,

that nearly every transaction,

whether social or
all

originated or
of doing busi-

terminated in a council. This universal and favorite

ness

mode

became interwoven with

council, public transactions of

pubUc and private hfe. In every name and character were planned,
the affairs of

and adopted. The succession of their rulers, their athletic games, dances, and religious festivals, and their social intercourse, were aU alike identified with councils. It may be said that the life of the Iroquois was either spent in the chase, on the war-path, or at the council-fire. They formed the three leading objects of his existence; and it would be difficult to determine for which he possessed the strongest predilection. Regarding them in this light, and it is believed they are not over-estimated, a narrative of these councils would furnish an accurate and copious history of the Iroquois, both pohtical and social. The absence of these records, now irreparable, has greatly abridged the fulness, and diminished the accuracy of our aboriginal history.
scrutinized

The councils of the League were of three distinct kinds; and they may be distinguished under the heads of civil, mourning and rehgious. Their civil councils, Ho-de-os'-seh, were such as convened to transact business
with foreign nations, and to regulate the internal administration of the

Confederacy. The mourning councils, Hen-nun-do-nuh'-seh, were those

summoned

to "raise

up" sachems to

fiU

such vacancies as had been oc-

casioned by death or deposition, and also to ratify the investiture of such

chiefs as the nations

had raised up

in

reward of pubHc

services. Their

rehgious councils, Gd-e-we-ya-do Ho-de-os-hen-dd-ko, were, as the

imports, devoted to religious observances.

name

No
seem

event of any importance ever transpired without passing under the

affairs

cognizance of one or another of these species of councils; for aU

to have converged towards

An
and

exposition of the
jurisdictions,

mode

of

and of the

them by a natural and inevitable tendency. summoning each, of their respective powers manner of transacting business, may serve to

unfold the workings of their political system, their social relations, and the

range of their intellectual capacities.

The name Ho-de-os'-seh, by which

cil,

the Iroquois designated a civil coun-

was bestowed upon any council of sachems, which convened to take charge of the pubUc relations of the League, or to provide for its internal administration. Each nation had
signifies

"advising together."

It

League of the Iroquois

133

power, under established regulations, to convene such a council, and prescribe the time
If

and place of convocation.

the envoy of a foreign people desired to submit a proposition to the

sachems of the League, and applied to the Senecas for that purpose, the sachems of that nation would first determine whether the question was of sufl&cient importance to authorize a council. If they arrived at an affirmative conclusion, they immediately sent out runners to the Cayugas, the nation nearest in position, with a belt of wampum. This belt announced that, on a certain day thereafter, at such a place, and for such and such purposes, mentioning them, a council of the League would assemble. The Cayugas then notified the Onondagas, they the Oneidas, and these the Mohawks. Each nation, within its own confines, spread the information far and wide; and thus, in a space of time astonishingly brief, intelligence of the council was heralded from one extremity of their country to the other. It produced a stir among the people in proporiton to the magnitude and importance
of the business to be transacted. If the subject

was calculated

to arouse

a deep feeling of interest, one

Niagara, and from the
St.

common

impulse from the Hudson to the

Lawrence to the Susquehanna, drew them towards and warriors, women, and even children, deserted their hunting grounds and woodland seclusions, and taking the trail, literally flocked to the place of council. When the day arrived, a multitude had gathered together, from the most remote and toilsome distances, but yet animated by an unyielding spirit of hardihood and
the council-fire. Sachems, chiefs

endurance.
of opening a council, and proceeding with the business was extremely simple, yet dilatory, when contrasted with the modes of civiUzed life. Questions were usually reduced to single propositions, calling for an affirmative or negative response, and were thus either adopted or rejected. When the sachems were assembled in the midst of their people, and all were in readiness to proceed, the envoy was introduced before them. One of the sachems, by previous appointment, then arose, and

Their

mode

before

it,

having thanked the Great Spirit for his continued beneficence in permitting

meet together, he informed the envoy that the council was prepared him upon the business for which it had convened. The council being thus opened, the representative proceeded to unfold the objects of his mission. He submitted his propositions in regular form, and sustained them by such arguments as the case required. The sachems listened with earnest and respectful attention to the end of his address, that they might clearly understand the questions to be decided and answered. After the envoy had concluded his speech, he withdrew from the council, as was

them

to

to hear

customary, to await at a distance the result of

its

deliberations. It then

became the duty of the sachems to agree upon an answer; in doing which, as would be expected, they passed through the ordinary routine of speeches, consultations, and animated discussions. Such was the usual course of

134

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

proceeding in the Iroquois council. Variations might be introduced by

circumstances.

At

this

place another peculiar institution of the Ho-de-na-sau-nee

is

presented.

AU

the sachems of the League, in

whom

originally

was vested

the entire civil power, were required to be of "one mind," to give efficacy

Unanimity was a fundamental law. The idea of majorand minorities was entirely unknown to our Indian predecessors. To hasten their deliberations to a conclusion, and ascertain the result, they adopted an expedient which dispensed entirely with the necessity of
to their legislation.
ities

casting votes.

The founders

of the Confederacy, seeking to obviate as far as

possible altercation in council,

and to

facilitate their

progress to unanimity,

divided the sachems of each nation into classes, usually of two and three

was permitted to express an opinion in council, until he had agreed with the other sachem or sachems of his class, upon the opinion to be expressed, and had received an appointment to act as speaker for the class. Thus the eight Seneca sachems, being in four classes, could have but four opinions; the ten Cayuga sachems but four. In this manner each class was brought to unanimity within itself. A cross-consultation was then held between the four sachems who represented the four classes; and when they had agreed, they appointed one of their number to express their resulting opinion, which was the answer of their nation. The several nations having, by this ingenious method, become of "one mind" separately, it only remained to compare their several opinions, to arrive at the final sentiment of all the sachems of the League. This was effected by a conference between the individual representatives of the several nations; and when they had arrived at unanimity, the answer of the League was determined. The sovereignty of the nations, by this mode of giving assent, was not
each.
. . .

No sachem

only preserved, but

If

made

subservient to the effort

itself to

secure unanimity.

any sachem was obdurate or unreasonable, influences were brought to

resist;

bear upon him which he could not well

and

it

was seldom

that

inconvenience resulted from their inflexible adherence to the rule. When,

however,

all

efforts

to

produce unanimity failed of success, the whole

matter was laid aside. Farther action became at once impossible.

either favorable or adverse, having, in this way,

result,

been reached,

it

was com-

municated to the envoy by a speaker selected for the purpose. This orator was always chosen from the nation with whom the council originated, and it was usual with him to review the whole subject presented to the council in a formal speech, and at the same time to announce the conclusions to which the sachems of the Confederacy had arrived. This concluding speech terminated the business of the council, and the Indian diplomatist took his
departure.

The laws explained

from
strings of

at different stages of the ceremonial,

wampum,

into

were repeated which they "had been talked" at the time

of their enactment. In the Indian

method of expressing the

idea, the string,

League of the Iroquois

or the belt can
it

135

tell, by means of an interpreter, the exact law or transaction was made, at the time, the sole evidence. It operates upon the principle of association, and thus seeks to give fidelity to the memory. These strings and belts were the only visible records of the Iroquois; and were of no use except by the aid of those special personages who could draw forth the secret records locked up in their remembrance. It is worthy of note, that but little importance was attached to a

of which

promise or assurance of a foreign power, unless belts or

to preserve
it

by wampum, laws and usages of the Confederacy were intrusted to the guardianship of such strings, one of the Onondaga sachems, Ho-no-we-nd'-to, was constituted "Keeper of the Wampum," and was required to be versed in its
interpretation.

strings were given Verbal propositions, or those not confirmed were not considered worthy of special preservation.^ As the

in recollection.

TREATIES
To the faith of treaties the Iroquois adhered with unwavering fidehty. Having endured the severest trials of pohtical disaster, this faith furnishes one of the proudest monuments of their national integrity. They held fast to the "covenant chain" with the British until they were themselves deserted, and their entire country became the forfeit of their fidelity. In their numerous transactions with the several provinces formed out of their ancient territories, no serious cause of complaint was found against them for the nonfuMment of treaty stipulations, although they were shorn of their possessions by treaty after treaty, and oftentimes made the victims of deception and fraud. In their intercourse with Indian nations, they frequently entered into treaties, sometimes of amity and alliance, sometimes of protection only, and in some instances for special purposes. All of these national compacts were "talked into" strings of wampum, to use the Indian expression, after which these were delivered into the custody of Ho-no-wend'-to, the

Onondaga sachem, who was made

at the institution of the

hereditary keeper of the

Wampum,
was
to

League; and from him and his successors,

be sought

the expression
at the close of

"This

their interpretation

from generation

to generation.

Hence

belt preserves

my

words," so frequently met with

belt.

Indian speeches, on the presentation of a

Indian nations,
ratification,

after treating, always

exchanged belts, which were not only the but the memorandum of the compact.

THE CRIMINAL CODE

the Iroquois can scarcely be said to have

Crimes and offences were so unfrequent under their social system, that had a criminal code. Yet there

1 "It is obvious to all who are the least acquainted with Indian affairs, that they regard no message or invitation, be it of what consequence it will, unless attended or confirmed by strings or belts of wampum, which they look upon as we our letters, or rather bonds." Letter of Sir W. Johnson, 1753. Doc. Hist. N. Y., vol. ii, p. 624.

136

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

were certain misdemeanors which fell under the judicial cognizance of the sachems, and were punished by them in proportion to their magnitude. Witchcraft was punishable with death. Any person could take the life

when discovered in the act. If this was not done, a council was and the witch arraigned before it, in the presence of the accuser. A full confession, with a promise of amendment, secured a discharge. But if the accusation was denied, witnesses were called and examined concerning the circumstances of the case; and if they established the charge to the satisfaction of the council, which they rarely failed to do, condemnation followed, with a sentence of death. The witch was then delivered over to such executioners as volunteered for the purpose, and by them was led
of a witch
called,

away

to

punishment. After the decision of the council, the relatives of the

witch gave him up to his

doom

without a murmur.

Adultery was punished by whipping; but the punishment was inflicted upon the woman alone, who was supposed to be the only offender. A council passed upon the question, and if the charge was sustained, they ordered her to be publicly whipped by persons appointed for the purpose. This was the ancient custom, when such transgressions were exceedingly
rare.

The

greatest of

all

human

crimes, murder,

was punished with death;

but the act was open to condonation. Unless the family were appeased, the

murderer, as with the ancient Greeks, was given up to their private

vengeance. They could take his
life

whenever they found him, even

after

the lapse of years, without being held accountable.

present of white
his victim,

wampum,
when
action.

sent

on the part

of the

murderer to the family of

accepted, forever obliterated and wiped out the

memory

of the trans-

Immediately on the commission of a murder, the

tribes to

affair

up by the

which the parties belonged, and strenuous

efforts

was taken were

made

to effect

a reconciliation, lest private retaliation should lead to

disastrous consequences.

... As

all

quarrels were generally reconciled by

the relatives of the parties, long-cherished animosities,

and consequently

homicides, were unirequent in ancient times. The present of white

wampum

was not

in the nature of a

compensation for the

life

of the deceased, but

of a regretful confession of the crime, with a petition for forgiveness. It

was a peace-offering, the acceptance of which was pressed by mutual friends, and under such influences that a reconciliation was usually effected,
except, perhaps, in aggravated cases of premeditated murder.
Theft, the

most despicable of human crimes, was scarcely known among

them. In the days of their primitive simplicity, a mercenary thought had

not entered the Indian mind. After the commencement of their intercourse
with the whites, the distribution of presents and of ardent
spirits

among

them, and the creation of new kinds of property by the pursuits of trade, so far corrupted the habits of the Indian, that in some instances the vagrant

and intemperate were led to the commission of

this offence.

But

in justice

League of the Iroquois

to

137

them

it

must be acknowledged, that no people ever possessed a higher

sense of honor and self-respect in this particular, or looked

greater disdain

upon

this

shameful practice, than did the Iroquois,

is

down with To this

day,

among

their descendants, this offence

almost unknown.

No

locks,

or bolts, or private repositories were ever necessary for the protection of

property

among

themselves.

The

lash of public indignation, the severest

this

punishment known to the red man, was the only penalty attached to dereliction from the path of integrity.

THE TREATMENT OF CAPTIVES

The Iroquois never exchanged
sought to reclaim their
chief

prisoners with Indian nations, nor ever

captivity

own people from

among them. Adoption

or

the torture were the alternative chances of the captive.

distinguished warhis military

would sometimes be released by them from admiration of

achievements, and be restored to his people, vidth presents and other marks
of favor.

No

pledges were exacted in these occasional instances of mag-

nanimity, but the person thus discharged esteemed himself

bound
If

in

honor

never again to take the war-path against his generous enemy.

allegiance

adopted, the
his

and the

affections of the captive

were transferred to

adopted
life

nation.

When

the Indian went forth to war, he emphatically took his

knowing that if he should be taken it was forfeited by the laws of war; and if saved by adoption, his country, at least, was lost forever. From the foundation of the Confederacy, the custom of adoption
in his hand,

has prevailed

among

the Iroquois,
It

who

carried this principle farther than

was not confined to captives alone, but was extended to fragments of dismembered tribes, and even to the admission of independent nations into the League. It was a leading feature of their policy to subdue adjacent nations by conquest, and having absorbed them by naturalization, to mould them into one common family with themselves. Some fragments of tribes were adopted and distributed among the nations at large; some were received into the League as independent members, as the Tuscaroras, while others were taken under its shelter, like the Mohekunnucks, and assigned a territory within their own. The fruit of this system of policy was their gradual elevation to a universal supremacy; a supremacy which was spreading so rapidly at the epoch of their discovery, as to
other Indian nations.
threaten the subjugation of
all

the nations east of the Mississippi.

to complete

A regular ceremony of adoption was performed in each case,

the naturalization.

With captives, this ceremony was the gantlet, after which new names were assigned to them; and at the next religious festival, their names, together with the tribe and family into which they were respectively adopted, were publicly announced.

party with captives,

tion, the

if

they had lost any of their

Upon the return of a warown number in the expedifirst

famiUes to which these belonged were

allowed an opportunity

138
to supply

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

from the captives the places made vacant in
their households.

Any

family could then adopt out of the residue any

who chanced
At

to attract

their favorable notice, or

whom

they wished to save.

the time appointed,

which was usually three or four days

after the return of the

band, the

women and
just

children of the village arranged themselves in two parallel rows

without the place, each one having a whip with which to lash the cap-

tives as they

passed between the

lines.

The male

captives,

who

alone were

required to undergo this test of their powers of endurance, were brought

and each one was shown in turn the house in which he was to take and which was to be his future home, if he passed successfully through the ordeal. They were then taken to the head of this long avenue of whips, and were compelled, one after another, to run through it for their lives, and for the entertainment of the surrounding throng, exposed at every step, undefended, and with naked backs, to the merciless inflictions of the whip. Those who fell from exhaustion were immediately despatched as unworthy to be saved; but those who emerged in safety from this test of their physical energies, were from that moment treated with the utmost affection and kindness. The effects of this contrast in behavior upon the mind of the captive must have been singular enough. ... To the red man compassion has seldom been ascribed, but yet these scenes in the forest oftentimes revealed the most generous traits of character. Admiration for
out,

refuge,

the chivahic bearing of a captive, the recollection of a past favor, or a

sudden impulse of compassion, were

adoption.

sufficient to decide the question of

When

the perils of the gantlet, which

was an enviable

lot

com-

pared with the fate of the rejected, were over, he ceased to be an enemy, and became an Iroquois. Not only so, but he was received into the family by

which he was adopted with all the cordiality of affection, and into all the relations of the one whose place he was henceforth to fiU. By these means all recollections of his distant kindred were gradually effaced, bound as he was by gratitude to those who had restored a Mfe which was forfeited by the usages of war. If a captive, after adoption, became discontented, which is said to have been seldom the case, he was sometimes restored, with presents, to his nation, that they might know he had lost nothing by his
captivity

among them.
away
to the torture,

The
It is

rejected captives were then led

and to death.

not necessary to describe

this horrible practice of

our primitive inhab-

itants. It is sufficient to say that it was a test of courage. When the Indian went out upon the warpath, he prepared his mind for this very contingency, resolving to show the enemy, if captured, that his courage was equal to any trial, and above the power of death itself. The exhibitions of heroism and fortitude by the red man under the sufferings of martyrdom, almost surpass

belief.

They considered

the character of their nation in their keeping, and

the glory of the race as involved and illustrated in the

death.

manner

of their

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

(1849-1948)

The Cheyenne Indians

CHEYENNE CHILDHOOD
THE infant's education BEGAN AT AN EARLY AGE,
it first

ITS

MOTHER TEACHING

to keep quiet, in order that

it

should not disturb the older people

Crying babies were hushed, or, if they did not cease their were taken out of the lodge and off into the brush, where their screams would not disturb anyone. If older people were talking, and a
in the lodge.

noise,

tiny child entered the lodge finger

and began

to talk to

its

mother, she held up her

its

wamingly, and
first

it

ceased to

talk,

or else whispered

wants to her.

Thus the
Ufe.

lesson that the child learned was one of self-control

its

self-

effacement in the presence of

elders. It

remembered

this

all

through

This lesson learned,

a boy, to have given

have a doll, made of deerskin, which she took about with her everywhere. Perhaps her mother or aunt made for her a tiny board or cradle for the doU, and on
girl,

it was not taught much more him a bow and arrows, or if a

until old

enough,

if

to

this

she

commonly

carried

it

about on her back, after the precise fashion

all chil-

in

which the

women

carried their babies. She treated her doll as

and undressing it, singing lullabies to it, lacing it on its board, and, as time passed, making for it various required articles of feminine clothing. Often as a doll she had one of the tiny puppies so common in Indian camps, taking it when its eyes were scarcely open, and keeping it until the dog had grown too active and too much disposed to wander to be longer companionable. As soon as she was old enough to walk for considerable distances, the
dren do
theirs, dressing
little girl

followed her mother everywhere, trotting along behind her, or at

her side,

when

she went for water or for wood. In aU things she imitated

From
2

vols., pp.

Grinnell, The Cheyenne Indians 108-123, 129-131, 353-356.

(New Haven: Yale

University Press, 1923),

139


140
her parent. Even

GEORGE BIRD GRINNEL

when only

three or four years of age, she might be seen

marching proudly along, bowed forward under the apparent weight of a back-load of slender twigs, which she carried in exact imitation of her mother, who staggered under a heavy burden of stout sticks.

Boys learned to ride almost as soon as they learned to walk. From babyhood infants were familiar with horses and their motions, and children two or three years of age often rode in front of or behind their mothers, clinging to them or to the horses' manes. They thus gained confidence, learned balance, and became riders, just as they learned to walk by practice. They did not fear a horse, nor dread a fall, for they began to ride old gentle pack-ponies, which never made unexpected motions; and by the time they were five or six years of age, the boys were riding young colts bareback. Soon after this they began to go into the hills to herd the ponies. They early became expert in the use of the rope for catching horses. Little girls, too, learned to ride at an early age, and while they did not have the practice that boys had, they became good horsewomen, and in case of need could ride hard and far.
earliest

Mttle girls as well as Httle boys spent much time in the water, were good swimmers. The courage of such children in the water is shown by an incident in the fives of three old women who in 1912 were still afive on the Tongue River Indian Reservation. When ten or twelve years of age, these children had been sent down to the stream to get some water. Their mothers were at work fleshing buffalo-hides and had so many to work on that the hides were beginning to get dry. The fittle girls were sent to get water to keep the hides damp until their mothers could flesh them. They went to the stream, and one of them proposed that before carrying up the water they should take a swim. They took off their clothes and ran out onto a fallen tree that projected over the water; and, when about to dive in, one of them noticed a hole in the bank deep under the water, and proposed that they should see where it led to. They swam under the water into the hole. It was dark and nothing could be seen; but the

In

summer

and

all

something large and soft pass by them, going out of the hole were going in. They went on a few feet and saw a fittle fight and, raising their heads, found themselves in a beaver's house. A fittle frightened by the creature that they had met in the water, which was of course a beaver, they did not fike to go back and, seeing the opening at the top of the house through which fight filtered, they readily broke a hole through the roof and crept out onto the bottom. Here they found themselves in the midst of a thick growth of wild roses and had a very difficult time, and were much scratched up in getting out of the bushes. This must have taken place perhaps between 1850 and 1860, and the women were Buffalo Wallow Woman, Omaha Woman, and the wife of Big Head, who was sister to White Bufi. Little companies of smaU boys and girls often went off camping. The
fittle girls felt

as they


The Cheyenne Indians
little

141

packed the dogs, and moved a little way from the camp and up their little lodges made and sewed for them by their mothers arranging them in a circle just as did the old people in the big camp. In all that they did they imitated their elders. The little boys who accompanied them were the men of the mimic camp. often In the children's play camps the little girls used tiny lodge-poles and the taU weed-stalks that are used for windbreaks about the lodge the boys sometimes acted as horses and dragged the lodge-poles, or hauled travois with the little babies on them. To the sticks they rode as horses, as well as on the dogs, they sometimes fixed travois. When the lodges were put up the boys used to stand in line, and the older girls asked them to choose their mothers. Each boy selected the girl who should be his mother, and they played together. The girls played
girls

there put

were pretty well grown, fourteen or fifteen years of it up when they were younger, for they strove to be men early, and usually soon after they had reached their twelfth year they began to try to hunt buffalo, killing calves as soon as they could ride well and were strong enough to bend the bow. The children did not stay out all night, but during the day they pretended that it was night, and went to bed. During the day they moved the
in this
until they

way

age; but the boys gave

camp
and

often; even every

hour or two.
life,

These children imitated the regular family

wife,

and the tiny babies who were their brothers and sisters served them for children. Little boys courted little girls; a boy sent to the girl's lodge sticks to represent horses, and if his offer was accepted received with her other sticks and gifts in return. Babies able to sit up were taken out into these camps, but not those that were too young. Sometimes a baby might get hungry and cry, and its little sister who was caring for it was
it home to her mother, so that the baby might nurse. Soon after the little boy was able to run about easily, a small bow and some arrows were made for him by his father, uncle, or elder brother, and he was encouraged to use them. When he went out of the lodge to play, his mother said to him, "Now, be careful; do nothing bad; do not strike anyone; do not shoot anyone with your arrow." He was Mkely to remember these oft-repeated injunctions. After that, much of his time was spent in practice with the bow. He strove constantly to shoot more accurately at a mark, to send the shaft farther and farther, and to drop his arrow nearer and nearer to a given spot. As he grew more accustomed to the use of the bow, he hunted sparrows and other small birds among the sagebrush and in the thickets along the streams, with other little fellows of his own age; and as his strength and skill increased, began to make excursions on the prairie for rabbits, grouse, and even turkeys. Little boys eight or ten years of age

pretending to be

man

obliged to carry

142
killed

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

numbers of small birds with their arrows, and sometimes even killed them on the wing. Though he keenly enjoyed the pursuit, the Cheyenne boy did not hunt merely for pleasure. To him it was serious work. He was encouraged to hunt by his parents and relatives, and was told that he must try hard to be a good hunter, so that hereafter he might be able to furnish food for the lodge, and might help to support his mother and sisters. When successful, he was praised; and if he brought in a little bird, it was cooked and eaten as a matter of course, quite as seriously as any other food was treated. The first large bird, or the first rabbit, killed by the boy, he exhibited to the family with no little pride, in which all shared. A boy had usually reached his twelfth, thirteenth, or fourteenth year when he first went out to hunt buffalo. Before this he had been instructed in the theory of buffalo running, and had been told how and where to ride, and where to hit the buffalo if he was to be successful. K on his first chase a boy killed a calf, his father was greatly pleased, and, if a well-to-do man, he might present a good horse to some poor man, and in addition might give a feast and invite poor people to come and eat with him. Perhaps he might be still more generous, and at the end of the feast give to his guests presents of robes or blankets. As soon as the boy reached home and his success was known, the father called out from his lodge something hke this: "My son has killed a little calf, and I give the best horse that I have to Blue Hawk." If he gave a feast, he explained again, saying: "My little boy has killed a caff. He is going to be a good man and a good hunter. We have had good luck." The man to whom the horse had been presented rode about the camp to show it to the people, and as he rode he sang a song, mentioning the name of the donor, and telling why the horse had been given to him. Bird Bear, whose boy name was Crow Bed, told me that as a child his father talked to him but little, while his grandfather gave him much advice. This was natural enough, since at that age the father was still engaged in war and hunting, which occupied most of his time, while the older man had passed the period of active life. Crow Bed was quite young when he went on his first buffalo chase, but he had a good horse, and was soon among the buffalo and close up alongside of a little caff. He was excited and shot a good many arrows into it, but he kept shooting until the animal fell. After he had killed the caff he felt glad and proud. He dismounted and butchered the calf, and with much labor put it on his horse and took the whole animal home, not cutting the meat from the bones and leaving the skeleton on the ground, as a man would have done. When he reached his lodge, his people laughed at him a Uttle for bringing it all home, but his father praised him and said that he had done well. "After a little while," he said, "you will get to kilUng larger ones, and pretty soon you will kill big buffalo."
. . .

The Cheyenne Indians

143

His father then shouted out, calling a certain man named White Thunder to come to the lodge and see what his son had done; that he had brought

camp. After White Thunder had come to the lodge, his father presented to White Thunder the horse the boy had ridden and the pack of meat that he had brought in. The incident was discussed aU through

meat

into the

the village, so that everyone

knew

of

Crow

Bed's success.
to

A year or two
out the old

later,

when

a party

was made up

go to war against the

Snakes, his grandfather advised

Crow Bed to go with it. Before they started "Now, when the party is about to make a charge on the enemy, do not be afraid. Do as the others do. When you fight, try to kill. When you meet the enemy, if you are brave and kill and count a coup, it will make a man of you, and the people will look on you

man

said to him:

as a

man. Do not fear anything. It is not a disgrace When Crow Bed started, his father gave away
first

to

be killed in a

fight."

the best horse that he

had, because his son was starting on his

war-path.

He

cried out, asking

come and see his son starting to war for the first time. He did the same thing when Crow Bed returned from the war-path, although on this first war journey the party had traveled for many days without finding enemies, and returned
any poor person in the
village

who needed

a horse to

to the village without accomplishing anything.

Older

men

gave

much

advice to their grandsons, sons, and nephews,

warn them against mistakes and to make life easier man was likely to advise his grown son that occasionally, when he kiUed a good fat buffalo, he should seek out some old man who possessed spiritual power and offer him the meat, in order to secure his friendliness and the benefit of his prayers. If the old man accepted the present the carcass was pulled around on its belly until the head faced the east. The old man sht the animal down its back, took out the right kidney, and handed it to the young man, who pointed it toward the east, south, west, and north, then up to the sky, and down to the ground, and placed it on a buffalo-chip. The old man was likely to say to the young man: "May you five to be as old as I am, and always have good luck in your hunting. May you and your family live long and always have abundance." As the old man went back to camp with the meat he called aloud the name of the young man, so that all might know he had given him a buffalo. This was an ancient custom. The training of the little girls was looked after even more carefully than that of the boys. Their mothers, aunts, and grandmothers constantly gave them good advice. They recommended them especially to stay at home, not to run about the camp, and this was so frequently impressed on them that it became a matter of course for them to remain near the lodge, or to go away from it only in company. Both mothers and fathers talked to their daughters, and quite as much to their sons, but in a different way. The mother said: "Daughter, when you grow up to be a young
and
tried constantly to

for them.

well-brought-up

144

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

if

you see anyone whom you like, you must not be foolish and run off with him. You must marry decently. If you do so, you will become a good woman, and will be a help to your brothers and to your cousins." They warned girls not to be foolish, and the advice was repeated over and

woman,

over again.

grew larger she was sent for water, and when still older she it on her back. The old women early began to teach the girls how to cut moccasins, and how to apply quills and to make beadwork. As they grew older they learned how to cook, and to dress hides, but girls were not put regularly to dressing hides until they were old enough to marry.

As

girl

took a rope and went for wood, carrying

whom

Boys and girls alike had each some special friend of their own sex to they were devotedly attached, and each pair of friends talked over the advice received from parents. Children seldom or never quarreled or fought among themselves, and though, as they grew older, continually engaging in contests of strength, such as wrestling and kicking matches, and games somewhat hke football, they rarely lost their temper. The Cheyenne boys are naturally goodnatured and pleasant, and the importance of Uving on good terms with their fellows having been drilled into them from earliest childhood, they accepted defeat and success with equal cheerfulness. Among a group of white children there would be much more bickering. Usually, but by no means always, the Cheyenne boy learned to kill as in the buffalo before he made his first journey to war. Sometimes case of Bald Faced Bull, the little fellow's ambition for glory, and ignorance of what war meant, led him to join a war-party at a very tender age. Little boys who did this received much consideration from the older members of the party, and were carefully looked after. They were taken in charge by some older man, and were kept apart from the younger members, who would be likely to tease and embarrass them, and in all ways the journey was made easy for them. Yet when the moment came to fight, they were given every opportunity to distinguish themselves, which meant to fight and to be killed. Because on the occasion referred to Bald Faced Bull was riding a very fast horse, he was chosen as one of ten to charge the camp of the enemy, the most dangerous work in the fight. While such little boys did not often accomplish any great feat, yet sometimes they did so, and returned to the village covered with glory, to the unspeakable delight and pride of their famihes, and to be objects of respect and admiration to their less ambitious and energetic playfellows. Even when they did nothing especially noteworthy, they were undergoing a training, were learning to know themselves, and to be steady under all conditions, and were hardening themselves to the toils which were to be their most important occupa.
. .

tion for the next twenty-five years.

If

on such a journey the boy performed any

especially creditable act

The Cheyenne Indians

145

his near relations, his

by some chance he killed an enemy, or counted a coup some one of mother or aunt or an uncle, gave away a horse on the return of the party, and presented him with a new name. If the mother gave the horse, she selected a name that her brother had borne; if the aunt, she chose her brother's name; if the uncle, his brother's name. The name was always a good name that of some brave man. The name before being given was discussed in the home and chosen with deliberation. If the name given was that of a Mving man, that man took another name,
if

perhaps that of his father or of an uncle.

from childhood to young womanhood was considered as hardly less important to the tribe than to her own family. She was now to become the mother of children and thus to contribute her part toward adding to the number of the tribe and so to its power and im-

The passage

of a girl

portance.

When
father.

a young

girl

reached the age of puberty and had her

first

men-

strual period, she, of course, told her mother,

who

in turn

informed the

Such an important family event was not kept secret. It was the custom among well-to-do people for the father of the girl publicly to announce from the lodge door what had happened and as an evidence of
his satisfaction to give

away a

horse.

The

girl

unbraided her hair and bathed, and afterward older

fixe,

women

painted her whole body with red. Then, with a robe about her naked

body, she sat near the

drawn from it and put before her, and white sage was sprinkled on it. The girl bent forward over the coal and held her robe about it, so that the smoke rising from the incense was confined and passed about her and over her whole body. Then she and her grandmother left the home lodge, and went into another small one near by, where she remained for four days. If there was no medicine, no sacred bundle, and no shield in her father's lodge, the girl might remain there; but if she did so, everything that possessed a sacred character even the feathers that a man wore tied in his head must be taken out. At the end of the four days, her grandmother, taking a coal from the fire, and sprinkling on it sweet grass, juniper needles, and white sage, caused the girl, wrapped in a robe or sheet, to stand over the smoke, with feet on either side of the coal, purifying herself. This was always done by young unmarried women.
a coal was

and sweet

grass, juniper needles,

For four days a

ride a horse, but

woman

in this condition
coals. If the

might not eat boiled meat.

Her meat must be roasted over

was obliged

camp moved

she might not

to ride a

mare.

Young men might not eat from the dish nor drink from the pot used by her; one who did so would expect to be wounded in his next fight. She might not touch a shield or any other war implement, nor any sacred bundle or object. A married woman during this time did not sleep at home,

146

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

but went out and slept in one of the menstrual lodges.

that
if

Men

believed

they lay beside their wives at this time they were likely to be

wounded

in their next battle.

Women

in this condition

were careful to avoid entering

a lodge where there was a medicine bundle or bag. For four days

women

did not walk about much.

lodge.

They spent almost

all their

time in the small

The owner of a shield was required to use special care to avoid menwomen. He might not go into a lodge where one was nor even into a lodge where one had been, until a ceremony of purification had been performed. If the woman thoughtlessly visited the lodge of a neighbor, no shield owner might enter it until sweet grass and juniper leaves had been burned in the lodge, the pins removed and the lodge covering thrown back, as if the lodge were about to be taken down. When this had been done, the covering might be thrown forward again, and pinned together. The lodge having been thus purified, the shield owner might enter it. The Cheyenne young women and young girls always wore the protective rope, and most of them still do so. This is a small rope or line which passes about the waist, is knotted in front, passes down and backward between the thighs, and each branch is wound around the thigh down nearly to the knee. The wearing of this rope is somewhat confining, yet those who wear it can walk freely. It is worn always at night and during the day when
struating

women
It is

go abroad.
a complete protection to the

woman
is

wearing

it

and

is

assumed

by

girls as

soon as the period of puberty

relations of the

reached. All men, young and

and anyone violating it would certainly be killed girl. I have heard of one case where a middleaged man attempted to disregard this protection. The girl and her mother were the only two of the family left, aU their male relatives having died. Not long after the attempt was made, the mother and daughter, arming themselves with heavy stones, waylaid the man, took him by surprise, gave him a frightful pounding, and left him for dead. He recovered after a long siege, during which he received sympathy from no one.
old, respect this rope,

by the male

THE TREATMENT OF MURDERERS

While certain customs and rules prevailed, there was no form of law as we understand it. There was no such thing as a legal death penalty. If a man killed a tribe fellow, he was often obUged to flee, at least for a time, for he was likely to be killed by some near relative of the dead man. If he saved himself by flight, the council considered the case, and the chief caUed in the relatives of the dead man and from them learned how much it would take to satisfy them for their loss. The relatives of the slayer were then called together and the penalty stated to them. When they had paid over this fine to the dead man's relatives, the slayer might return

The Cheyenne Indians

to the

147

camp. Whether the matter was thus settled or not, the man who had done the kiUing was ostracized by his fellows, temporarily expelled from camp, and lost all standing in the tribe, which he never recovered. He was obliged for a time to camp away from the main tribe, and often he went away from their camp and spent a year or more with some other tribe. A common refuge for Cheyennes was the Arapaho camp, where no guilt attached to them and they were regarded as being as good as anyone else. Lapse of time might cause partial forgetfulness of the event by the people at large, but this forgetfulness never extended to the relatives of the man who had been killed. Their anger flamed hot long after all others in the camp had measurably forgotten the deed and in a sense had condoned it. Nevertheless, the slayer of a tribesman, or indeed of anyone belonging in the camp, even though he might be a member of another tribe, remained all his life a marked man.

The

slayer of his fellow might not eat in the

same lodge with other

people, nor from their dishes, nor might he drink out of their cups.

He

had a special dish, a cup of his own, and if by any chance he drank from a cup not his own, the cup was often thrown away; if not, it was purified. No one would smoke with him. He might not receive the pipe as it was passed from hand to hand, but carried his own pipe and tobacco. If unmarried, he probably never took a wife, for no woman would consent
to live with him.
It
.

was
fit

said that his pipe did not taste or

smeU

as

it

should, that he

was

not a

person to smoke with. The word ok kliwus, meaning "one

who has

killed another," carried the idea of decay, putrefaction, rotting.

If

people were talking and the murderer came up to join in the con-

versation,
It

someone might

tell

him

to

be

silent, that

he should not speak.

ultimately die

was supposed that such a man suffered an inward decay, and would and blow away. He was supposed to smell bad, either from this decay or from the bad dreams and thoughts that he must suffer. It was believed by some that from time to time he would vomit portions of his own dead and decaying flesh. A part of this old belief was that a man who had done this could never get close to the buffalo, because the buffalo would smell this dead or decaying flesh and would run away. An outlaw appears actually to have lost his membership in the tribe, and the fact that he was not allowed to camp with it seems to have been a real expulsion. The man was "thrown away." True, after the gravity of the offense had been partly forgotten with the lapse of time, he might come back to the tribe, but could never recover his old standing. Not only was the man himself hopelessly disgraced, but his whole family lost caste. A young man or woman wishing to marry a daughter or a son of an outlaw was felt to have more or less disgraced his own family. It made no difference how prominent the man might have been nor how good his family, the com-

148

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

mission of the act of bloodshed cast a stigma over his family and his
relations shared in the disgrace.
It
. . .

was not solely the killing of a blood member of the Cheyenne tribe that was regarded as so heinous an offense; the same feeUng existed if the man killed had been adopted into the tribe. There were many men in the camp, by birth Sioux, Arapaho, Ponca, or others, who had married Cheyenne women and had Cheyenne children, and who were regarded as Cheyennes. If one of these was kiUed, the murderer became an outlaw. The fact that they were outlaws justified the chiefs of the Cheyennes in not allowing Porcupine Bear and his party to count the first coup in the fight with the Kiowas and Comanches in 1838. At the time they were regarded as not being members of the tribe, and the coup was no more to be allowed to them as Cheyennes, than it would have been allowed to the member of any foreign tribe as a Cheyenne.

The Disappearance of
IT

the Buffalo

WAS, INDEED, A GLORIOUS COUNTRY WHICH THE BLACKFEET HAD WRESTED from their southern enemies. Here nature has reared great mountains and spread out broad prairies. Along the western border of this region, the Rocky Mountains lift their snow-clad peaks above the clouds. Here and there, from north to south, and from east to west, lie minor ranges, black with pine forests if seen near at hand, or in the distance mere gray silhouettes against a sky of blue. Between these mountain ranges lies everywhere the great prairie; a monotonous waste to the stranger's eye, but not without its charm. It is brown and bare; for, except during a few short weeks in spring, the sparse bunch-grass is sear and yellow, and the silver gray of the wormwood lends an added dreariness to the landscape. Yet this seemingly desert waste has a beauty of its own. At intervals it is marked with green winding river valleys, and everywhere it is gashed with deep ravines, their sides painted in strange colors of red and gray and brown, and their perpendicular walls crowned with fantastic columns and figures of stone or clay, carved out by the winds and the rains of ages. Here and there, rising out of the plain, are curious sharp ridges, or squaretopped buttes with vertical sides, sometimes bare, and sometimes dotted short, sturdy trees, whose gnarled trunks and thick, knotted with pines, branches have been twisted and wrung into curious forms by the winds which blow unceasingly, hour after hour, day after day, and month after month, over mountain range and prairie, through gorge and coulee.

From Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, The Story of a Prairie People Charles Scribner's Sons, 1903), pp. 178-180.

(New York:

The Disappearance of
These
prairies

the Buffalo

149
life,

now seem

bare of

but

it

was not always

so.

Not

very long ago, they were trodden by multitudinous herds of buffalo and

and on the pine-clad slopes of the mountains, elk, deer, and wild sheep fed in great numbers. They are all gone now. The winter's wind stiU whistles over Montana prairies, but nature's shaggy-headed wild cattle no longer feel its biting blasts. Where once the scorching breath of summer stirred only the short stems of the buffalo-grass, it now billows the fields of the white man's grain. Halfhidden by the scanty herbage, a few bleached skeletons alone remain to teU us of the buffalo; and the broad, deep trails, over which the dark herds passed by thousands, are now grass-grown and fast disappearing under the effacing hand of time. The buffalo have disappeared, and the
antelope; then, along the
river valleys
fate of the buffalo has almost overtaken the Blackfeet.

wooded

As known

to the whites, the Blackfeet

were true prairie Indians, seldom

they crossed them to war with

venturing into the mountains, except

when

the Kutenais, the Flatheads, or the Snakes.

They subsisted almost wholly They were hardy, untiring, brave, ferocious. Swift to move, whether on foot or horseback, they made long journeys to war, and with telling force struck their enemies. They had conquered and
on the
flesh of the buffalo.

who once and maintained a desultory and successful warfare against all invaders, fighting with the Crees on the north, the Assinaboines on the east, the Crows on the south, and the Snakes, Kalispels, and Kutenais on the southwest and west. In those days the Blackfeet were rich and powerful. The buffalo fed and clothed them, and they needed nothing beyond what nature supplied. This was their time of success and happiness. Crowded into a httle corner of the great territory which they once dominated, and holding this corner by an uncertain tenure, a few Blackfeet stiU exist, the pitiful remnant of a once mighty people. Huddled together about their agencies, they are facing the problem before them, striving,
driven out from the territory which they occupied the tribes
it,

inhabited

helplessly but bravely, to

accommodate themselves

to the

new

order of

wrench themselves loose from their accustomed ways of life; to give up inherited habits and form new ones; to break away from all that is natural to them, from aU that they have been taught to reverse their whole mode of existence. They are striving to earn their living, as the white man earns his, by toil. The struggle is hard and slow, and in carrying it on they are wasting away and growing fewer in numbers. But though unused to labor, ignorant of agriculture, unacquainted with tools or seeds or soils, knowing nothing of the ways of life in permanent houses or of the laws of health, scantily fed, often utterly discouraged by failure, they are still making a noble fight for
things; trying in the face of adverse surroundings to

existence.

Only within a few years since the buffalo disappeared has this change been going on; so recently has it come that the old order and the new

150

GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL

meet face to face. In the trees along the river valleys, still quietly resting on their aerial sepulchres, sleep the forms of the ancient hunter-warrior who conquered and held this broad land; while, not far away, Blackfoot farmers now rudely cultivate their little crops, and gather scanty harvests from narrow fields. It is the meeting of the past and the present, of savagery and civilization. The issue cannot be doubtful. Old methods must pass away. The Blackfeet will become civilized, but at a terrible cost. To me there is an interest, profound and pathetic, in watching the progress of the struggle.

PART

III

GAINING

UNDERSTANDING OF THE INDIANS

Introduction
by Ruth L. Bunzel
GEORGE WASHINGTON IN HIS FAREWELL ADDRESS OF 1796 RECOMMENDED
the establishment in the City of Washington of a national research institute
of learning.

A plan for

such an

institute

the project languished during the early struggles of the

was drawn up by Joel Barlow but young republic.

However,

in 1835 it received aid from an unexpected source. James Smithson illegitimate son of Sir Hugh Smithson and Elizabeth Macie, graduate of Oxford and FeUow of the Royal Society with a brilliant record in chemistry and mineralogy died and willed his fortune to the United States Government for the estabUshment in Washington of an institution to bear his name, for the "increase and diffusion of knowledge

among men." After

through the

several years of debate in Congress over the legality

it was finally accepted, largely John Quincy Adams, and in 1838 Richard Rush was sent to England to claim the estate. In September of that year the clipper Mediator delivered to the Mint in Philadelphia for conversion into U.S.

of accepting a bequest from a private source

efforts of

currency -104,960 in gold sovereigns.

residuary legacy brought the

Smithsonian endowment up to $650,000.

After further debates in Congress and

ment

of funds

and

jurisdiction over the

much bickering over the new institution, a plan was

investfinally

Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, consisting of three members of the Senate, three members of the House of Representatives, four "inhabitants of four different States" and two representatives from the National Institute, met and elected Joseph Henry,
adopted and the
first

Professor of Natural Philosophy in the College of

University) as the
first

New

Jersey (Princeton

Secretary and Director. His program of organization

described the proposed activities as follows:

to

To increase knowledge it is proposed ( 1 ) to stimulate men of talent make original researches by offering suitable rewards for memoirs containing new truths; (2) to appropriate annually a portion of the income for particular researches under the direction of suitable persons. To diffuse knowledge it is proposed ( 1 ) to publish a series of periodon the progress of
different branches of

ical reports

knowledge; and (2)

to publish occasionally separate treatises

on

subjects of general interest.

152

Gaining Understanding of the Indians

153

The second half of the 19th century was the period of the opening of the West and the epic struggle for the control of the great Plains. The solitary trapper gliding down the great rivers in a canoe, who accommodated himself so well to the life of the wilderness that he frequently abandoned his native culture entirely, had already given way to packs of greedy hunters
driving

down
on the

the buffalo at

all

seasons of the year, stampeding the herds

with firearms, slaughtering without restraint and leaving stinking carcasses

rotting
prairie;

and the hunter

in turn

was having

to give

way

to the

homesteader.

As

the Indian tribes

were pushed back against the mountains the

conscience of the nation was alternately troubled by their plight and

revolted

by the savage

ferocity of their bursts of resistance,

settle

and always
their

puzzled by the apparent inabiUty of the Indians to

nice reservations and

down on

become

civiHzed.

An

understanding of the ways of

Indian hfe was sorely needed, and it was this research that the newly formed Smithsonian Institution took on as one of its major commitments. It must be said to the everlasting credit of those who labored in this field that they pursued their tasks with humanity and dedication to the cause of
justice.

Among

the "suitable persons"

sored was Lewis Henry Morgan,

study of kinship systems.

whose researches the Smithsonian sponwho was embarking on his world-wide

Institution

The

undertook to distribute his

Circular in Reference to the Degrees of Relationship

among

Different

Nations,

a questionnaire on kinship terminologies,

to

consular offices
seventy

throughout the world. The repHes to

or

this questionnaire, plus the

more systems recorded by Morgan himself on

three trips to the Indian

tribes

west of the Mississippi, provided the material for Morgan's monu-

mental study, Systems of Consanguinity and Affinity in the

the
first

Human

Family,

systematic application of the comparative

method

in ethnology,

which was published in 1871 as Volume XVII of the Smithsonian Contributions to

Knowledge.

enlisted to direct particular researches was Major John Wesley Powell, explorer and geologist, veteran of the Civil War (in which he lost his right arm), educator who inaugurated the summer field-work school by taking a group of students into the Rocky Mountains, and a man of exceptional energy and imagination. In 1867 PoweU led a party down the Colorado River from its source through the Grand Canyon to the sea, one of the most remarkable trips of exploration in North America. Three members of the expedition who deserted, frightened by the canyons and rapids, were ambushed and killed by Shewits Indians. PoweU continued but lost most of his scientific notes. To rectify this he organized a more extended and better-provisioned expedition which yielded large amounts of ethnographic as well as geographic data, and

Another "suitable person"

154

RUTH

L.

BUNZEL

which eventually grew into the Geographical and Geological Survey of the

Rocky Mountain Region.

ological, died in 1878.

Joseph Henry, whose interests were largely geographic and meteorHis successor, Spencer Baird, had held the post of

Museum and had done much to build up the and ethnological collections. The various geographical surveys were combined under the United States Geological Survey, and the ethnological work was transferred to the Smithsonian Institution under the newly organized Bureau of American Ethnology with Powell as its
Director of the National
archaeological
first

director.

first systematic research in American linguistics and ethnology. The first area of concentration was the Southwest, recently brought under United States control through the Gadsden Purchase, and the field of Powell's own explorations. For these researches he gathered together distinguished scholars and talented young students from different fields and from many places. During these early years of the Bureau, James and Matilda Stevenson worked in Zuiii, Hopi and other pueblos and built up the collections of pueblo pottery and other artifacts in the National Museum; Frank Hamilton Gushing lived in Zuni, penetrating more deeply than any ethnologist before him into the inner Ufe of an Indian tribe; J. Walter Fewkes, working alternately in archaeology and ethnology, attempted to reconstruct Hopi history; Cosmo Mindelieff, an architect, spent a summer studying and sketching pueblo architecture. They were joined a Httle later by Hough and Holmes. Their concerted efforts con-

Powell organized the

stituted the first

experiment in area research.

Although the Southwest had first claim on the attention of the Bureau, other areas were not neglected, notably the Plains. Cyrus Thomas who first gained recognition as an entomologist with the Geographical and Geological Survey, joined the Bureau in 1882, and devoted the rest of his life to anthropology. His definitive study of the Ohio Mounds, which had so excited the imagination of early 19th-century archaeologists and theologians, laid speculation to rest and conclusively demonstrated the mounds to be the work of Indians, in all probability ancestors of the
Southern Creek.

Thomas then turned

his attention to

another intriguing

mystery, the deciphering of

notable contributions.

Maya
first

hieroglyphs, and here, too, he

made

On
sis,

the Plains, using for the

time dictated texts for linguistic analy-

Riggs and James

labored

Owen Dorsey worked on

Sioux Hnguistics and eth-

nology, Garrick Mallery collected pictographs and picture writing. James

Mooney

among

the Cherokee of North Carolina, but after the

Wounded Knee, he was dispatched to the Plains to study the background of Indian unrest. His monumental work on the Ghost Dance Religion, combining field observations,
Sioux outbreak of 1890 and the disaster of

documents, and comparative material from a wide variety of Indian and

Gaining Understanding of the Indians

155

European sources, defined the recurrent patterns of Messianic cults and provided a model for their interpretation. Pursuing the aim of "diffusing knowledge among men," the Bureau early opened the pages of its Reports to the work of outside scholars. Among the great monographs published by the Bureau were Boas' Central Eskimo and Tsimshian Mythology, Matthews' Mountain Chant, Russell's Pima Indians, Fletcher and La Flesche's Omaha Tribe and their separate publications on the Pawnee and Osage, and many others too numerous to name. Powell himself was no ethnographer. His ethnological writings were cast in the framework of the crude unilinear evolutionism that dominated anthropological theory in the closing years of the

19th century

"From

Barbarism to Savagery,"
Classification of

etc. His great contribution to knowledge was his American Indian Languages published in the Eighth Annual Report of the Bureau, which brought order into the study of American languages. Although later linguists (Sapir, Radin and others) have grouped Powell's seventy-eight stocks into a small number of stocks of a higher order, this classification added to but did not supersede Powell's original discriminations. However, Powell's greatest skills lay neither in

ethnology nor in linguistics, but in administration.

research

As

the architect of the

Bureau he possessed the most valuable quality of an administrator of

the ability to recognize talent before

it

bore

fruit,

the confidence

to tolerate originality

and the

tact to achieve cooperation without

imposing

a methodological strait jacket.

Powell died in 1902 and was succeeded by William H. Holmes who had long been associated with the Bureau. Holmes, apparently, had Uttle taste for administration and retired after a few years to accept a post in the National Museum. During his administration, the great Handbook of American Indian Languages, begun under Powell, was completed and published as Bulletin 30. Its distinguished editor, Frederick Webb Hodge, followed Holmes as director of the Bureau. After 1910 the Bureau declined as a force in American anthropology. It stUl continued to sponsor and publish researches of Hmited scope, but there were no more great co-operative projects. As the giants of the early days, the men of many parts, died or retired, their places were filled, insofar as they were filled, by specialists in American Indian ethnology. The fire was gone, and above all the dedication to the cause of the Indian people. Scientists did not get involved in causes, they eschewed "value judgments." There was no widespread concern, appropriations fell off, and the focus
shifted to other centers.

Government- sponsored Research

HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT

(1793-1864)

LEWIS HENRY

MORGAN
manufacturer,

(1818-1881)

Henry

Schoolcraft's

father

was a

glass

and

it

was

in

connection with a projected book on glass that Schoolcraft went to Missouri in

1817

to investigate the lead

mines of that area. There he

first

encountered the unconquered Indians of the Plains, and after this encounter he abandoned glassmaking. Two trips as geologist of exploring
expeditions through the vast forest areas of the headwaters of the Mississippi qualified

him as an

ethnologist. (Anthropologists of the 19th century

else, geologists

always started out as something

or entomologists or soldiers

stranded in the wilderness at the close of frontier wars.) He remained in the Northwest, was appointed Indian agent and married a quarter-breed

Chippewa

girl.

Schoolcraft was an avid collector of Indian lore. His output

was enor-

mous and he was

ment

active in

promoting ethnological

studies.

His commit-

to Indian research did not,

however, prevent him from negotiating

a treaty whereby the Chippewa surrendered to the whites the greater portion of their lands bordering the Great Lakes, cutting the tribe in two.

Schoolcraft saw the value of recording songs and tales; it is perhaps his most characteristic contribution. And in his pages we meet again the recurrent theme of Indian life wherever white civilization encroaches: the Messianic prophet and preacher urging a return to goodness.

It

was business

mines again and

railroads to reach the mines

that

brought Lewis Morgan into the North

Afl&nity in the

Woods and

started

him on
falls

the re-

search on kinship which culminated in his Systems of Consanguinity and

Human

Family. Morgan's scientific

life

into three
in

periods, each occupied with a different

problem and each culminating

a major work.

The
on

first

period closed with the publication of his valuable monograph

to the collection

the Iroquois.

The second period was devoted

156

and

analysis of kinship

Government-Sponsored Research
terminologies. It closed with the publication of Ancient Society, in

157
which

the varieties of kinship terminologies were interpreted in terms of an evo-

lutionary

matriliny

scheme of and patriliny

cultural
to the

development,

from promiscuity
bilateral family,

through

North European

each system

with

its

appropriate system of kinship nomenclature. Although Morgan's

evolutionary scheme never had acceptance

in his article

among

anthropologists (Lowie

on

social organization [page 486] discusses the

arguments

against it) probably no work of American anthropology has been more widely read outside America or has had more influence. Published at the

time

when evolutionism was

the

attention of Friedrich Engels

who

dominant mode of thought, it caught the incorporated much of its argument in his
it

History of the Family, thus translating

large part of the world.

into the realm of

dogma

for a

The final years of Morgan's life, less well known than the earlier periods, were devoted to a study of aboriginal houses in relation to social structure. His last major work. Houses and House Life of the American Aborigines (1881), was the first systematic attempt at a functional analysis of cultural
data.

Morgan has fared

rather badly at the hands of later anthropologists in

the general reaction against the simple, ethnocentric evolutionary

scheme

which ranged our primitive contemporaries along a straight path leading

from our civilization taken as the highest expression of the human spirit back to the dim point in the past when man emerged from his animal ancestry.

Now
it is

that the heat of that particular controversy has all but died

down,

possible to take another look at

his very real contributions to ethnography,

in establishing

Morgan and properly evaluate method and theory, and his role

and promoting

scientific

anthropology in America.

R.L.B.

HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT

(1793-1864)

Nursery and Cradle Songs of the Forest

THE TICKENAGUN, OR INDIAN CRADLE,

IS AN OBJECT OF GREAT PRIDE WITH an Indian mother. She gets the finest kind of broad cloth she possibly can to make an outer swathing band for it, and spares no pains in ornamenting it with beads and ribbons, worked in various figures. In the lodges of those who can afford it, there is no article more showy and pretty than

the full
sists

bound

cradle.

of three pieces.

hoop or foot-board,
These are
is

The frame of the cradle itself is a curiosity. It conThe vertebral board, which supports the back, the which extends tapering up each side, and the arch
The whole
structure

or bow, which springs from each side, and protects the face and head.
tied together with deer's sinews or pegged.

very

light,

and

is

carved with a knife by the men, out of the linden or

maple
feet to

tree.

Moss

constitutes the bed of the infant, and is also put between the chUd's keep them apart and adjust the shape of them, according to custom. one-point blanket of the trade, is the general and immediate wrapper of

the infant, within the hoop, and the ornamented swathing

band

is

wound

around the whole, and gives

it

no

little

resemblance to the case of a small

mummy. As
often

the bow passes directly above the face and eyes, trinkets are hung upon this, to amuse it, and the child gets its first ideas of ornament from these. The hands are generally bound down with the body, and only let out occasionally, the head and neck being the only part which is actually free. So bound and laced, hooped and bowed, the little fabric, with its inmate, is capable of being swung on its mother's back, and carried through the thickest forest without injury. Should it even fall no
injury can happen.

The bow
rest,

protects the only exposed part of the frame.

it

And when
From

she stops to

or enters the lodge,

can be

set aside like

any

other household article, or hung up by the cradle strap on a peg. Nothing,

Schoolcraft, "Nursery and cradle songs of the forest," and "Mythology, and religion of the Algonquins," in The American Indians, Their History, Condition and Prospects from Original Notes and Manuscripts (new and revised

superstitions

edition, Buffalo:

George H. Derby & Company, 1851), pp. 390-393, 397-398, 206-211.

158

Nursery and Cradle Songs of the Forest

159

indeed, could be better adapted to the exigencies of the forest life. And in such tiny fabrics, so cramped and bound, and bedecked and trinketed, their famous Pontiacs and King Philips, and other prime warriors, were

once carried, notwithstanding the

ing the lance and

skill

they afterwards acquired in wield-

war

club.

The Indian
in the cradle.

child, in truth, takes its first lesson in the art of

endurance,

need not be unbound to nurse it. If the mother be young, she must put it to sleep herself. If she have younger sisters or daughters they share this care with her. If the lodge be roomy and high, as lodges sometimes are, the cradle is suspended to the top poles to be swung. If not, or the weather be fine, it is tied to the limb of a tree, with small cords made from the inner bark of the linden, and a vibratory motion given to it from head to foot by the mother or some attendant.
it

When

cries

it

The motion thus communicated,

is

that of the

and may be supposed to be the easiest child. It is from this motion that the leading idea of the cradle song
taken.
I

pendulum or common swing, and most agreeable possible to the

is

surely swinging a pretty

have often seen the red mother, or perhaps a sister of the child, leiornamented cradle to and fro in this way, in
of these wild-wood chaunts, or
it. The following speciwigwam luUabys, are taken from my many years of familiar intercourse with

order to put the child to sleep, or simply to amuse

mens
notes

upon

this

subject, during

the aboriginals. If they are neither

by

side with the rich nursery stores of

numerous nor more refined

attractive,

placed side

Hfe,

it is

yet a pleasant

fact to

have found such things even existing at all amongst a people supposed to possess so few of the amenities of life, and to have so little versaof character.
as these specimens seem, they yet involve

tility

Meagre

no small degree of
sister,

philological diUgence, as nothing

can be more deUcate than the inflexions

like

of these pretty chaunts,

and the Indian woman,

her white

gives

a delicacy of intonation to the roughest words of her language. The term

wawa

often introduced denotes a wave of the air, or the circle described by the motion of an object through it, as we say, swing, swing, a term never applied to a wave of water. The latter is called tegoo, or if it be crowned with foam, beta.

In introducing the subjoined specimens of these simple see saws of the

lodge and forest chaunts, the writer
felt,

that they were almost too frail of

structure to be trusted, without a gentle hand, amidst his rougher materials.

He

is

permitted to say, in regard to them, that they have been exhibited to

Mrs. Elizabeth Oakes Smith, herself a refined enthusiast of the woods, and
that the versions

from the

original given, are

from her chaste and

truthful

pen.

In the following arch

ful girl trying to

little

song, the reader has only to imagine a play-

put a restless child to sleep,

who pokes

its little

head, with


160

HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT

girl sings,

black hair and keen eyes over the side of the cradle, and the
imitating
its

own

piping tones.

Ah wa nain? Ah wa nain?

(Who (Who
(On

is is

this?)

this?)
light

Wa
Ko

yau was sa pwasod.

(Giving
is this?

meaning
my
is

the light of the eye)

the top of

lodge.)

Who
To

who

this? eye-light bringing

the roof of the lodge?

little

And

then she assumes the tone of the

screech owl, and answers

Kob kob kob Nim be e zhau Kob kob kob Nim be e zhau
Kit che

(It is I

(Coming,)
(It is I

the

little

owl) owl)

the

little

(Coming,)
hither swinging,

kit che.

It is I, it is I,

(Down! down!) (wa wa)

Dodge, dodge, baby dodge;

And

she springs towards

it

and down goes the

little

head. This

is

repeated

with the utmost merriment upon both sides.

Who is
To

this,

who

is this

eye-hght bringing

the roof of

my

lodge?

It is I, it is I,

hither swinging.

Dodge, dodge, baby dodge.

Here

is

another,

slower and monotonous, but indicating the utmost

maternal content:
Swinging,
Sleep,
'Tis

swinging,
little

lul

la

by,

daughter sleep,

your mother watching by,

daughter
lul la by.

Swinging, swinging she will keep,

Little 'Tis

your mother loves you dearest,

Sleep, sleep, daughter sleep.

Swinging, swinging, ever nearest,

Baby, baby, do not weep;

Little daughter, lul la by.

Swinging, swinging, lul la by,

Sleep, sleep,
little

one.

And

thy mother will be nigh

Swing, swing, not alone

Little daughter, lul la by.

Nursery and Cradle Songs of the Forest

This of course
is

161
it

exceedingly simple, but be

remembered

these chaunts

are always so in the

most refined
it

life.

The

ideas are the same, that of

is

tenderness and protective care only, the ideas being few, the language
in accordance.

To my mind

has been a matter of extreme interest to

all states

observe

how

almost identical are the expressions of affection in

of society, as though these primitive elements admit of

perfect in themselves.

no

progress, but are

is

The e-we-yea

of the Indian
will

woman

entirely

analogous to the
ingly pretty in

lul la

by of our language, and

this,

be seen to be exceed-

itself.

The

original

words of

with their

literal

import, are also added, to

preserve the identity:

Wa wawa wawa
Nebaun
Nedaunis-ais, e

(a.)

nebaunnebaun, we Wa wawa wa wa, (Swinging,

^wa

we

yea, (Swinging, twice, lullaby.)

(Sleep thou, thrice.)

yea, (Little daughter, lullaby.)

thrice.)

Nedaunis-ais, e

we

yea, (Little daughter lullaby.)

(b.)

Keguh, ke gun ah wain e ma, (Your mother cares for you.) Nebaun nebaun nebaun, e we yea, (Sleep, thrice, lullaby.) Kago, saigizze-kain, nedaunis-ais, (Do not fear, my little daughter.) Nebaun nebaun nebaun, (Sleep, thrice.) Kago, saigizze-kain, wa wa, e we yea, (third line repeated.)

Wa wawa wawa

(c.)

we

yea, (Swinging, twice, luUaby.)

Kaween neezheka kediausee, (Not alone art thou.) Ke kan nau wai, ne me go, suhween, (Your mother is caring for you.) Nebaun nebaun nedaunis-ais, (Sleep, sleep, my little daughter.) Wa wa wa wa wa we yea, (Swinging, &c. lullaby.) Nebaun nebaun nebaun, (Sleep! sleep! sleep.^)

still

farther view of Indian

simple chant. Opinion

creation cognizant

among

the forest race,

manners and opinions is hid under this makes the whole animated

and

intelligent of their customs.

1 These translations are entirely literal the verbs to "sleep" and to "fear," requiring the imperative mood, second person, present tense, throughout. In rendering the term "wa-wa" in the participial form some doubt may exist, but this has been terminated by the idea of the existing motion, which is clearly implied, although the word is not marked by the usual form of the participle in ing. The phrase lul-la-by, is the only one in our language, which conveys the evident meaning of the choral term e-we-yea. The substantive verb is wanting, in the first line of b. and the third of c. in the two forms of the verb, to care, or take care of a person; but it is present in the
c. These facts are stated, not that they are of the slightest interest to the common reader, but that they may be examined by philologists, or persons curious in the Indian grammar.

phrase "kediausee" in the second line of

162

HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT

herself in breaking

go out from the lodge, and busy up dry limbs, and preparing wood, as if to lay in a store for a future and approaching emergency. A raven, perched on a neighbouring tree, espies her, at her work, and

A young married woman is supposed to

begins to sing; assuming the expected infant to be a boy.

In dosh ke zhig o In dosh ke zhig o

In dosh ke zhig

mun mun o mun

boy (and future man)
left,

My
killing

eyes!

my

eyes!

my

eyes! Alluding to the

animals as well as men, whose eyes wiU be

as the singer anticifirst

pates, to

be picked out by ravenous birds. So early are the

sitting near,

notions of

war implanted.

woodpecker,

and hearing

this song, replies;

assuming the

sex of the infant to be a female.

Ne mos Ne mos Ne mos

sa
sa

sa

mug ga mug ga mug ga.

feits

My

worms!

my

worms!

my

worms! Alluding to the custom of the

it

male's breaking up dry and dozy wood, out of which,

favourite food, being the

could pick

mosa or wood-worm.
and nursery chants. They condestitute of metrical attractions,

Want

of space induces the writer to defer, to a future number, the rehis collection of these cradle

mainder of

stitute in his view,

rude as they

are,

and

a chapter in the history of the

human
It

heart, in the savage phasis,

lot,

which

deserves to be carefully recorded.

has fallen to his

life,

to observe

more

perhaps, in this department of Indian

than ordinary, and he would not

acquit himself of his duty to the race, were he to omit these small links

out of their domestic and social chain.

the child, in Indian
life, is

The

tie

which binds the mother to

it is

a very strong one, and

is

conceived to admit

of illustration in this manner. It

council, that the
ter, in its

not alone in the war-path and the

is to be studied. To appreciate his whole charache must be followed into his lodge, and viewed in his seasons of social leisure and retirement. If there be any thing warm and abiding in the heart or memory of the man, when thus at ease, surrounded by his family, it must come out here; and hence, indeed, the true value of

Red Man

true light,

his lodge lore, of every kind.

It is

out of the things mental as well as physiological, that pertain to

maternity, that philosophy must, in the end, construct the true ethnological
chain, that binds the

human

race, in

one comprehensive system of

unity.

Indian Prophets

163

Indian Prophets
INDIAN TRIBES OF THIS CONTINENT LIVE IN A STATE bondage to a class of men, who officiate as their priests and soothsayers. These men found their claims to supernatural power on early fastings, dreams, ascetic manners and habits, and often on some real or feigned fit of insanity. Most of them affect a knowledge of charms and incantations. They are provided with a sack of mystic implements, the contents of which are exhibited in the course of their ceremonies, such as the hollow bones
IT IS

KNOWN THAT THE

of mental

of

some

of the larger anseres, small carved representations of animals,

cowrie and other sea-shells, &c.

Some

of these

men

acquire a character for

much

sanctity,

and turn

their influence to political purposes, either per-

sonally or through

some popular

warrior, as

of the sachems Buchanjahela, Little Turtle

was instanced and Tecumthe.

in the success

have recently had an opportunity of conversing with one of this class of sacred person, who has within late years embraced Christianity; and have made some notes of the interview, which we will advert to for
the purpose of exhibiting his testimony, as to the true character of this
class of impostors.

We

Chusco, the person referred

ofl&ce,

to, is

an Ottawa Indian

who

has long exercised the priestly

so to say, to his brethren on

the northern frontiers.

He

is

now

man
is

turned of seventy.

He

is

of

small stature,

somewhat bent forward, and supports the

staff.

infirmities

of
ac-

age by walking with a

curate,

His sight

impaired, but his

memory

enabhng him to narrate with particularity events which transpired more than half a century ago. He was present at the great convocation of northern Indians at Greenville, which followed Gen. Wayne's victories in the west an event to which most of these tribes look back, as an

era in their history.

the upper lakes,

He

afterwards returned to his native country in

his residence at

and fixed

MichiUmackinac, where in

late years, his wife

herself to

the

became a convert to the Christian faith, and united mission church on that island. A few years after, the
despised this

old prophet,

who

mode

of faith,

and thought but

finally

little

of his wife's sagacity in uniting herself to a congregation of believers, felt

his

own mind

arrested

by the same

truths,

and

also

embraced

them, and was propounded for admission, and afterwards kept on trial before the session. It was about this time, or soon after he had been
received
lodge, as an appHcant for membership, that the writer visited his and entered into a fuU examination of his sentiments and opinions, contrasting them freely with what they had formerly been. We requested him to narrate to us the facts of his conversion to the principles of Chris-

164
tianity, indicating the

HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT

progress of truth

on

his

mind, which he did in sub-

stance, through

an

interpreter, as follows:

Met A,

my life I hved very wickedly, following the Jeesukan, and the Wabeno, the three great superstitious observances of my people. I did not know that these societies were made up of errors until my wife, whose heart had been turned by the missionaries, informed me of it. I had no pleasure in listening to her on this subject, and often turned away, declaring that I was well satisfied with the religion of my forefathers. She took every occasion of talking to me on the subject. She told me that the Indian societies were bad, and
"In the early part of
the
that

aU who adhered to them were no better than open servants of the

Evil Spirit. She had, in particular, four long talks with

ject,

me on

the sub-

and explained to me who God was, and what sin was, as it is written in God's book. I beUeved before, that there was One Great Spirit who was the Master of life, who had made men and beasts. But she
explained to
the heart,

me

the true character of this Great Spirit, the sinfulness of

and the necessity of having

Ghost of

praying through Jesus Christ.

told

me

that the

By God

'degrees I

changed from evil to good by came to understand it. She or Holy Spirit only could make the
it

heart better, and that the souls of

all

who
The

died, without having felt this

power, would be burned in the

to speak to

fires.

missionaries

had directed her

me and

put words in her mouth; and she said so

much

that,

at length, I did

not feel satisfied with

my
I

old

way

of

life.

Amongst

other

things she spoke against drinking,

which

was very fond

of.

"I did not relish these conversations, but I could not forget them.

When
I

I reflected upon them, my heart was not as fixed as it used to be. began to see that the Indian Societies were bad, for I knew from my own experience, that it was not a good Spirit that I had relied upon. I determined that I would not undertake to jeesukd or to look into futurity any longer for the Indians, nor practice the Meta's art. After a while I began to see more fuUy that the Indian ceremonies were all bad, and I

determined to quit them altogether, and give heed to what was declared in

God's book.

"The first time that I felt I was to be condemned as a sinner, and that I was in danger of being punished for sin by God, is clearly in my mind. I was then on the Island of Bois Blanc, making sugar with my wife. I was in a conflict of mind, and hardly knew what I was about. I walked around the kettles, and did not know what I walked for. I felt sometimes like a person wishing to cry, but I thought it would be unmanly to cry. For the space of two weeks, I felt in this alarmed and unhappy mood. It seemed to me sometimes as if I must die. My heart and my bones felt as if they would burst and fall asunder. My wife asked me if I was sick, and said I looked pale. I was in an agony of body and mind, especially during one week. It seemed, during this time, as if an evU spirit

Indian Prophets

165
to gather sap, I felt conscious that this spirit
It

haunted me.

went with

When I went out me and dogged me.

was
failing

appeared to animate
this conflict.

my own
night,

shadow.
after I

"My

strength

under

One

had

been busy all day, my mind was in great distress. This shadowy influence seemed to me to persuade me to go to sleep. I was tired, and I wished rest, but I could not sleep. I began to pray. I knelt down and prayed to God. I continued to pray at intervals through the night; I asked to know the truth. I then laid down and went to sleep. This sleep brought me rest and peace. In the morning my wife awoke me, telling me it was late. When I awoke I felt placid and easy in mind. My distress had left me. I asked my wife what day it was. She told me it was the Sabbath (in the Indian, prayer-day). I replied, 'how I wish I could go to the church at the mission! Formerly I used to avoid it, and shunned those who wished to speak to me of praying to God, but now my heart longs to go there.' This feeling did not leave me.
"After three days I went to the mission. The gladness of

my

heart

continued the same as

first

feeling

prayed that
to

had felt it the first morning at the camp. My when I landed, was pity for my drunken brethren, and I they might also be brought to find the true God. I spoke
I

the missionary,

who

at

subsequent interviews explained to

me

the

truth, the rite of baptism,

and other

principles.

He

wished, however, to

try

that I

life, and I wished it also. It was the following autumn, ." was received into the church. The autumn succeeding his conversion, he went over to the spot on the island where he had planted potatoes. The Indian method is, not to visit their small plantations from the time that their corn or potatoes are hilled. He was pleased to find that the crop in this instance promised to yield abundantly, and his wife immediately commenced the process of raising them. "Stop!" exclaimed the grateful old man, "dare you dig these potatoes imtil we have thanked the Lord for them?" They then both knelt in prayer, and afterwards gathered the crop. This individual appeared to form a tangible point in the intellectual chain between Paganism and Christianity, which it is felt important to examine. We felt desirous of drawing from him such particulars respecting his former practice in necromancy and the prophetic art, as might lead to correct philosophical conclusions. He had been the great juggler of his tribe. He was now accepted as a Christian. What were his own conceptions of the power and arts he had practised? How did these things appear to his mind, after a lapse of several years, during which his opinions and feelings had undergone changes, in many respects so striking? We found not the slightest avoiding of this topic on his part.
. .

me by my

He

attributed all his ability in deceptive arts to the agency of the Evil

Spirit;

and he spoke of

it

with the same settled tone that he had mani-

fested in reciting other points in his personal experience.

He

beheved that

166
he had followed a
spirit

HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT

whose object
it

was

to deceive the Indians

spirit

and

make them
that

miserable.

He

believed that this

had

left

him and

he was now following, in the affections of

his heart,

the spirit of

Truth.

Numerous symbols of the classes of the animate creation are relied on by the Indian metays and wabenos, to exhibit their afEected power of working miracles and to scrutinize the scenes of futurity. The objects which this man had appealed to as personal spirits in the arcanum of his lodge, were the tortoise, the swan, the woodpecker and the crow. He had dreamed of these at his initial fast in his youth, during the period set apart for this purpose, and he believed that a satanic influence was exerted, by presenting to his mind one or more of these solemnly appropriated objects at the

moment

of his invoking them. This

is

the theory

drawn from

his replies.

We
is

solicited

him

to detail the

modus

operandi,

after entering the juggler's lodge.

This lodge resembles an acute pyramid

poles,

with the apex open.

skins.

It

formed of

covered with tightdrawn

evincing nothing
of
the

His replies were perfectly ingenuous,

to
agitate this
it

natural taciturnity and shyness

of the Indian mind.

lodge,

The
it

great object
to

with the operator

is

and cause
is

move and

shake without uprooting

this

from

its

basis, in

such a manner as to induce

priest

the spectators to believe that the

superhuman. After is prepared to give oracular responses. The only articles within were a drum and rattle. In reply to our inquiry as to the mode of procedure, he stated that his first essay, after entering the lodge, was to strike the drum and commence his incantations. At this time his personal manitos assumed their agency, and received, it is to be inferred, a satanic energy. Not that he affects that there was any visible form assumed. But he felt
of action

power

manifestation of spiritual presence,

the

within

their

spirit-like

presence.

He

represents the

agitation

of the lodge to

be due to currents of air, having the irregular and gyratory power of a whilrwind. He does not pretend that his responses were guided by truth, but on the contrary affirms that they were given under the influence
of the evil spirit.

and mechanical means man. He referred to various medicines, some of which he thinks were antibiUous or otherwise sanatory. He used two bones in the exhibition of his physical skiU, one of which was white and the other green. His arcanum also embraced two small stone images. He affected to look into and through the flesh, and to draw from the body fluids, as bile and blood. He applied his mouth in suction. He characterized both the meta or medicine dances and the wabeno dances by a term which may be translated deviltry. Yet he discriminated between these two popular institutions by adding that the meta included the use of medicines, good and
interrogated
as to the use of physical in effecting cures, in the capacity of a meta, or a medicine

We

him

Indian Prophets
bad.
tion

167
consisted wholly in a wild exhibiIt is not,

The wabeno, on the contrary, of mere braggadocio and trick.

It originated,

according to him, an an-

cient institution. sick

he

said,
this

with a Pottawattomie,

who was
aid his

and he had ascended to heaven, and had brought thence divine countrymen.
lunatic a

month.

When

man

recovered he pretended that

arts, to

LEWIS

HENRY MORGAN
(1818-1881)

General Observations Upon

Systems of Relationships

AS FAR BACK AS THE YEAR 1846,

use,

trative of the institutions of the Iroquois, I

WHILE COLLECTING MATERIALS ILLUSfound among them, in daily

a system of relationship for the designation and classification of

kindred, both unique and extraordinary in

its character, and wholly unlike any with which we are famihar. In the year 1851 I published a brief account of this singular system, which I then supposed to be of their own invention, and regarded as remarkable chiefly for its novelty. Afterwards, in 1857, I had occasion to reexamine the subject, when the idea of its

possible prevalence

among

other Indian nations suggested

itself,

together

with

its

uses, in that event, for ethnological purposes.

In the following
I

summer, while on the south shore of Lake Superior,

ascertained the

system of the Ojibwa Indians; and, although prepared in some measure

for the result, it was with some degree of surprise that I found among them the same elaborate and complicated system which then existed among the Iroquois. Every term of relationship was radically different from the

corresponding term in the Iroquois; but the classification of kindred

was the same.

their

two systems were identical in seemed probable, also, that both were derived from a common source, since it was not supposable that two peoIt

was manifest

that the
It

fundamental characteristics.

ples,

speaking dialects of stock-languages as widely separated as the

Algonkin and Iroquois, could simultaneously have invented the same system, or derived it by borrowing one from the other.
selves.

From this fact of identity several As its prevalence among the

inferences at once suggested them-

Seneca-Iroquois rendered probable

From Morgan, "Systems of Consanguinity and Affinity of the Human Family," Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge 218, VoL XVIII (Washington: Government Printing Office, 1871), pp. 490-495, 500-507.
168

General Observations Upon Systems of Relationships

its like

169

prevalence

among
its

other nations speaking dialects of the Iroquois

stock-language, so
equally probable
its

existence

and use among the Ojibwas rendered

existence and use

among

the remaining nations speak-

ing dialects of the Algonkin speech. If investigation should establish the

affirmative
distribution.

of these propositions

it

would give
its

to

the

system a wide
nations

In the second place,

would render probable its like of the American aborigines. If, then, it should be found to be universal among them, it would follow that the system was coeval, in point of time, with the commencement of their dispersion over the American continent; and also
that, as a

among these prevalence among the residue

prevalence

system transmitted with the blood,

fact,

it

might contain the necessary

in the third place,
if

evidence to establish their unity of origin.

And

the

from Asia, it would seem that they must have brought the system with them from that continent, and have left it behind them among the people from whom they separated; further than this, that its perpetuation, upon this continent would render probable its like perpetuation upon the Asiatic, where it might still be found; and,
Indian family came, in
finally, that it

might possibly furnish some evidence upon the question of

the Asiatic origin of the Indian family.

This series of presumptions and inferences was very naturally suggested by the discovery of the same system of consanguinity and afl&nity in nations speaking dialects of two stock-languages. It was not an extravagant series of speculations upon the given basis, as will be more fully understood when the Seneca and Ojibwa systems are examined and compared. On this simple and obvious line of thought I determined to follow up the subject until it was ascertained whether the system was universal among the American aborigines; and, should it become reasonably probable that such was the fact, then to pursue the inquiry upon the Eastern Continent, and among
the islands of the Pacific.

The work was commenced by preparing a schedule

first five

of questions describ-

ing the persons in the lineal, and the principal persons embraced in the

when answered, would give their relationand thus spread out in detail the system of consanguinity and aflSnity of any nation with fullness and particularity. This schedule, with an explanatory letter, was sent in the form of a printed circular to the several Indian missions in the United States, to the commanders of the several military posts in the Indian country, and to the government Indian agents. It was expected to procure the information by correspondence
collateral lines, which,

ship to Ego,

as the principal instrumentality.

From

the complicated nature of the sub-

ject the results, as might, perhaps,

This
since

first
it

have been foreseen, were inconsiderable. disappointment was rather a fortunate occurrence than otherwise,

abandon the investigation, or to prosecute it, so were concerned, by personal inquiry. ... By this means aU the nations, with but a few exceptions, between the Atlantic and
forced
either to
far as the Indian nations

me

170

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

the Rocky Mountains, and between the Arctic Sea and the Gulf of Mexico, were reached directly, and their systems of relationship procured. Some of the schedules, however, were obtained by correspondence, from other
parties.

Having ascertained

as early as the year

1859

that the system prevailed

in the five principal Indian stock-languages east of the mountains, as well

as in several of the dialects of each, its universal diffusion

throughout the

Indian family had become extremely probable. This brought

me

to the

second stage of the investigation, namely to find whether

other parts of the world.

it

prevailed in

To determine To make

that question

would require an

extensive foreign correspondence, which a private individual could not

hope

to maintain successfully.

the intervention of the national government, or the co-operation of

literary or scientific institution. It is

would require some one of the happy features of American

the attempt effectual

society that any citizen

may

ask the assistance of his government, or of

any literary or scientific institution in the country, with entire freedom; and with the further consciousness that his wishes will be cheerfully acceded to if deserving of encouragement. This removed what might otherwise have been a serious obstacle. In this spirit I appHed to Prof. Joseph
Henry, Secretary of the Smithsonian
Institution, for the use of the

name

of the latter in foreign countries in the conduct of the correspondence;

and further desired him to procure a

letter

from the Secretary of State

of the United States to our diplomatic and consular representatives abroad,

commending
requests Prof.

the subject to their favorable attention.

Henry complied

in the

With both of these most cordial manner. From January,

1860, until the close of the investigation, the larger part of the corre-

spondence was conducted under the official name of the Institution, or under cover by the Secretary of State. By these means an unusual degree of
is

was secured to the work in foreign countries, the credit of which due to the influence of the Smithsonian Institution, and to the official circular of the late General Cass, then Secretary of State. In addition to these arrangements I had previously solicited and obtained the co-operaattention
tion of the secretaries of the several

enabled

American missionary boards, which under equally favorable conditions, a large number of American missionaries in Asia and Africa, and among the islands of

me

to reach,

the Pacific.

American missionary. Dr. Henry W. Scudder, to be in this country in 1859, 1 had obtained some evidence of the existence of the American Indian system of relationship among the Tamilian people of South-India. This discovery opened stiU wider the range of the proposed investigation. It became necessary to find the limits within which the systems of the Aryan and Semitic families
the distinguished
of Arcot, India,

From

who happened

prevailed, in order to ascertain the line of demarcation

and

that of the eastern Asiatics.

The circumscription

of

between their forms one was necessary

General Observations

Upon Systems

of Relationships
it

171

to the circumscription of the other. In addition to this

to include the entire

seemed imperative

human

family within the scope of the research, and

to

work out

this

comprehensive plan as fuUy as might be possible. The

nearer this ultimate point was approximated the

more instructive would was evident that the full significance of identity of systems in India and America would be lost unless the knowledge was made definite concerning the relations of the Indo-American system of relationship to those of the western nations of Europe and Asia, and also to those of the nations of Africa and Polynesia. This seeming necessity greatly increased the magnitude of the undertaking, and at the same time encumbered the subject with a mass of subordinate materials. In the further prosecution of the enterprise the same schedule and circular were sent to the principal missions of the several American boards,
be the
final results. It

with a request that the former might be

respectively established;

filled out,

according to

its

design,

with the system of relationship of the people

among whom

they were

and

that such explanations might

be given as

would be necessary to
this,

its

interpretation. This class of

men

possess peculiar

qualifications for linguistic

they reside

among

the nations

and ethnological researches; and, more than whose systems of consanguinity were

most importance for the purpose in hand. The tables will show how admirably they performed the task. They were also sent to the diplomatic and consular representatives of the United States in foreign countries, through whom another, and much larger, portion of the human family was reached. By their instrumentality, chiefly, the system of the Aryan family was procured. A serious difiiculty, however, was met in this direction, in a difference of language, which the official agents of the government were unable, in many cases, to surmount. In Europe and Asia the number of schedules obtained through them, in a completely executed form, was even larger than would reasonably have been expected; while in Africa, in South America, and in Mexico and Central America the failure was nearly complete. To supply these deficiencies an attempt was made to reach the EngUsh missions in the Eastern Archipelago and in Polynesia; and also Spanish America through the Roman Catholic bishops and clergy of those countries; but the efforts proved unsuccessful. The foregoing are the principal, but not the exclusive, sources from which the materials contained in the tables were derived. A large number of schedules, when returned, were found to be imperfectly filled out. Misapprehension of the nature and object of the investigation was the principal cause. The most usual form of mistake was the translation of the questions into the native language, which simply reproduced the questions and left them unanswered. A person unacquainted with the details of his own system of relationship might be misled by the form of each question which describes a person, and not at once perceive
relatively of the

172
that the true

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

answer should give the relationship sustained by this person is descriptive essentially, a correct answer to most of the questions would describe a person very much in the form of the question itself, if the system of the nation was descriptive. But, on the contrary, if it was classificatory, such answers would not only be incorrect
to Ego.

As our own system

in fact, but

would

fail

to

show

the true system.

The utmost

care was taken

to guard against this misapprehension, but, notwithstanding, the system

of several important nations, thus imperfectly procured,

was

useless

from

the difficulty, not to say impossibility, of repeating the attempt in remote parts of the earth,

where

it

required two years, and sometimes three,

for a schedule to be received

and returned. In some

it

cases,

where the

correspondent was even as accessible as India,

time,

required that length of

and the exchange of several letters, to correct and perfect the details Every system of relationship is intrinsically difficult until it has been carefuUy studied. The classificatory form is compUcated in addition to being difficult, and totally unlike our own. It is easy, therefore, to perceive that when a person was requested to work out, in detail, the system of a foreign people he would find it necessary, in the first
of a single schedule.
instance, to master his
difficulties of

own, and
a

after that to

meet and overcome the

another, and, perhaps, radically different form.

With these

considerations in

mind

it

is

much

greater cause for surprise that so

many

schedules were completely executed than that a considerable

so.

number

should have failed to be

The schedule

is

necessarily self-corrective as to a portion of the persons

described, since the position of

Ego and
was
also

his or her correlative

person

is

reversed in different questions.

It

made

self-confirmatory in other
its

ways, so that a careful examination would determine the question of

correctness or non-correctness in essential particulars. This
true with respect to the classificatory system.
efforts

was

especially
all

Notwithstanding

the

made

to insure correctness,

it is

not supposable that the tables are

free

ination
will

from errors; on the contrary, it is very probable that a critical examwiU bring to fight a large number. I befieve, however, that they be found to be substantially correct.

In considering the elements of a system of consanguinity the existence

of marriage between single pairs

basis of relationships. In the progress of the inquiry

must be assumed. Marriage forms the it may become neces-

sary to consider a system with this basis fluctuating, and, perhaps, altogether wanting.

The

alternative assumption of each

its

may be

essential to

include aU the elements of the subject in

and necessary connection of same in both cases; but with

of descent

The natural consanguinei with each other would be the

practical relations.
this difference, that in the

former the

lines

from parent to child would be known, while

in the latter they

General Observations Upon Systems of Relationships

173

would, to a greater or less extent, be incapable of ascertainment. These

considerations might affect the form of the system of consanguinity.

The family

relationships are as ancient as the family.

is

They

exist in virtue

of the law of derivation, which

expressed by the perpetuation of the

species through the marriage relation.

is

system of consanguinity, which

is

founded upon a community of blood,

but the formal expression and

there
is

recognition of these relationships.

Around every person

is is

a circle

or group of kindred of which such person

the centre, the Ego, from

whom

the degree of the relationship

reckoned, and to

whom

the relation-

ship itself returns.

ascendants,

Above him are his father and his mother and their below him are his children and their descendants; while upon
and
sisters

either side are his brothers

and

their descendants,

and the

brothers and sisters of his father and of his mother and their descendants,
as well as a

much

greater
still

common

ancestors

number of collateral relatives descended from more remote. To him they are nearer in degree
at large.

than other individuals of the nation

formal arrangement of the

more immediate blood kindred into Mnes of descent, with the adoption of some method to distinguish one relative from another, and to express the value of the relationship, would be one of the earliest acts of human
intelhgence.

Should the inquiry be made

arrangement of kindred into
be
difficult,

how

far nature suggests a uniform

method

or plan for the discrimination of the several relationships, and for the
distinct lines of descent, the

answer would
single pairs

unless

it

was

first

assumed that marriage between

had always
this

existed, thus rendering definite the lines of parentage.

its

With
char-

point established, or assumed, a natural system, numerical in

acter, will

be found underlying any form which

is

man may

contrive;

and

which, resting upon an ordinance of nature,

both universal and un-

changeable. All of the descendants of an original pair, through inter-

mediate pairs, stand to each other in fixed degrees of proximity, the

nearness or remoteness of which
is

a mere matter of computation. If

line,

we

ascend from ancestor to ancestor in the lineal

circumscribes millions of the Hving and the dead,
in virtue of their descent

and again descend

of these individuals,
to the ''Ego"

through the several collateral lines until the widening circle of kindred
all

from common ancestors, are bound

by the chain of consanguinity.

The blood relationships, to which specific terms have been assigned, under the system of the Aryan family, are few in number. They are grandfather and grandmother, father and mother, brother and sister, son and daughter, grandson and granddaughter, uncle and aunt, nephew and niece,
and cousin. Those more remote in degree are described either by an augmenby a combination of these terms. After these are the affineal or marriage relationships, which are husband and wife, father-in-law and mother-in-law, son-in-law and daughter-in-law, brother-in-law and sistertation or

174
in-law, step-father

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

and step-mother, step-son and step-daughter, and step-

brother and step-sister; together with such of the husbands and wives of

blood relatives as receive the corresponding designation by courtesy. These

terms are barely sufficient to indicate specifically the nearest relationships,
leaving
terms.

much

the largest

number

to be described

by a combination of

So familiar are these ancient household words, and the relationships which they indicate, that a classification of kindred by means of them, according to their degrees of nearness, would seem to be not only a simple
undertaking, but,
its

when completed,

to contain nothing of interest

beyond

adaptation to answer a necessary want. But, since these specific terms

are entirely inadequate to designate a person's kindred, they contain in

themselves only the minor part of the system.

terms,

An

arrangement into
fall

lines,

with descriptive phrases to designate such relatives as

specific

without the

becomes necessary to

its

completion.

In the

mode

of

arrangement and of description

diversities

may

exist.

Every system of

consanguinity must be able to ascend and descend in the lineal line

through several degrees from any given person, and to specify the relationship of each to Ego; and also from the lineal, to enter the several collateral
fines

and foUow and describe the

collateral

relatives

through several

generations.

When

spread out in detail and examined, every scheme of

consanguinity and afl&nity wiU be found to rest

upon

definite ideas,

and to

be framed, so far as it contains any plan, with reference to particular ends. In fine, a system of relationship, originating in necessity, is a domestic
institution,

As such

which serves to organize a family by the bond of consanguinity. possesses a degree of vitaUty and a power of self-perpetuation commensurate with its nearness to the primary wants of man. In a general sense, as has elsewhere been stated, there are but two radically distinct forms of consanguinity among the nations represented in the tables. One of these is descriptive and the other classificatory. The first, which is that of the Aryan, Semitic, and Urafian famifies, rejecting
it

the classification of kindred, except so far as

it is

in accordance with the

numerical system, describes collateral consanguinei, for the most part,

by an augmentation or combination of the primary terms of relationship. These terms, which are those for husband and wife, father and mother, brother and sister, and son and daughter, to which must be added, in such languages as possess them, grandfather and grandmother, and grandson and granddaughter, are thus restricted to the primary sense in which they are here employed. All other terms are secondary. Each relationship is thus made independent and distinct from every other. But the second, which is that of the Turanian, American Indian, and Malayan famifies, rejecting descriptive phrases in every instance, and reducing consanguinei to great classes by a series of apparently arbitrary generaUzations, appUes the same terms to all the members of the same class. It thus confounds

General Observations Upon Systems of Relationships

relationships, which,

175

larges the signification both of the primary

their

under the descriptive system, are distinct, and enand secondary terms beyond

seemingly appropriate sense.

Although a limited number of generalizations have been developed in the system of the first-named families, which are followed by the introduction of additional special terms to express in the concrete the relationships

thus specialized, yet the system

is

properly characterized as descriptive,

and was such

classification of

originally. It will

kindred which
carried;

it

be seen in the sequel that the partial now contains is in harmony with the prin-

and arises from it legitimately to the extent and that it is founded upon conceptions entirely dissimilar from those which govern in the classificatory form. These
ciples of the descriptive form,

to

which

it is

generalizations, in

some

cases, are imperfect

when

logically considered;

but they were designed to realize in the concrete the precise relationships

which the descriptive phrases suggest by implication. In the Erse, for example, there are no terms for uncle or aunt, nephew or niece, or cousin; but they were described as father's brother, mother's brother, brother's son, and so on. These forms of the Celtic are, therefore, purely descriptive. In most of the Aryan languages terms for these relationships exist. My father's brothers and my mother's brothers, in English, are generalized into one class, and the term uncle is employed to express the relationship. The relationships to Ego of the two classes of persons are equal in their degree
of nearness, but not the
preferable,

same in kind; wherefore, the Roman method is which employed patruus to express the former, and avunculus

to indicate the latter.

it

The phrase

"father's brother" describes a person, but

hkewise implies a bond of connection which patruus expresses in the

mother's brother's son, and

concrete. In like manner,

my

my father's brother's son, my father's sister's son, my mother's sister's son are placed upon an
me
in the

equality

by a

similar generalization,

term cousin. They stand to

are related to

and the relationship is expressed by the same degree of nearness, but they

me

in four different ways.

The use

of these terms, however,

does not invade the principles of the descriptive system, but attempts to
reahze the implied relationships in a simpler manner.
their application to particular persons is

On

the other hand,

in the system of the last-named families, while corresponding terms exist,

eralizations,

and they are used

in

founded upon very different genan apparently arbitrary manner. In

is

Seneca-Iroquois, for example,

my

father's brother

my

father.

Under

the

system he stands to

me

in that relationship

and no

other. I address

him

by the same term, Hd-nih', which I apply to my own father. My mother's brother, on the contrary, is my uncle, Hoc-no'seh, to whom, of the two, this
relationship
is restricted.

Again, with myself a male,

my

son, Ha-ah'-wuk, the

same

as

my own

son; while

my brother's son is my sister's son is my

nephew, Ha-y a' -wan-da; but with myself a female, these relationships are reversed. My brother's son is then my nephew; while my sister's son is my

176
son.

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

Advancing to the second
sister's

collateral line,

my

father's brother's

son and

my
the

mother's

son are

same

relationship as

by mother's brother's nized under the two forms, but the generalizations upon which they
are different.

me in my own brother; but my father's sister's son and son are my cousins. The same relationships are recogbrothers,

my

and they severally stand to

rest

In the system of relationship to the Aryan, Semitic, and Uralian families,

the collateral lines are maintained distinct

and perpetually divergent from

is

the lineal, which results, theoretically as well as practically, in a dispersion

of the blood.

The value

of the relationships of collateral consanguinei

depreciated and finally lost under the burdensomeness of the descriptive

method. This divergence

system.

is

one of the characteristics of the descriptive

On

the contrary, in that of the Turanian,

Malayan
brought
tically,

families, the several collateral Unes, near

into,

American Indian, and and remote, are finally

if

and merged

in the lineal line, thus theoretically,

not pracin like

preventing a dispersion of the blood.

The

relationships of collaterals
is,

by

this means is both appreciated and preserved. This mergence manner, one of the characteristics of the classificatory system.

How

these two forms of consanguinity, so diverse in their fundamental

conceptions and so dissimilar in their structure,

came

into existence

it

may

be wholly impossible to explain. The first question to be considered relates to the nature of these forms and their ethnic distribution, after the ascertainment of which their probable origin may be made a subject of investigation.

While the existence of two radically

family, so far as
it is

distinct

forms appears to separate

the

human

represented in the tables, into two great

divisions, the

Indo-European and the Indo-American, the same testimony seems to draw closer together the several families of which these divisions are composed, without forbidding the supposition that a common point of departure between the two may yet be discovered. If the evidence deposited
in these systems of relationship tends, in reality, to consolidate the families

named

two great divisions, it is a tendency in the direction of unity no inconsiderable importance. After the several forms of consanguinity and aflOnity, which now prevail in the different families of mankind, have been presented and discussed, the important question will present itself, how far these forms become changed with the progressive changes of society. The uses of systems of relationship to estabMsh the genetic connection of nations wiU depend, first, upon the structure of the system, and, secondly, upon the stability of its radical forms. In form and feature they must be found able, when once
into

of origin of

established, to perpetuate themselves through indefinite periods of time.

must turn upon that of the stability of their Development and modification, to a very considerable extent, are revealed in the tables in which the comparison of forms is made upon an extended scale; but it will be observed, on further examinaof their use
radical features.

The question

General Observations Upon Systems of Relationships

tion,

111

that these changes are further developments

lie,

of the fundamental

conceptions which
systems.

respectively, at the foundation of the

two

original

There

is

one powerful motive which might, under certain circumstances,

it

tend to the overthrow of the classificatory form and the substitution of the
descriptive, but

would

arise after the attainment of civilization. This is

the inheritance of estates. It

may be premised

that the

bond

of kindred,

among

uncivilized nations,

is

a strong influence for the mutual protection

of related persons. the individual

Among nomadic stocks, especially, the respectability of was measured, in no small degree, by the number of his

kinsmen. The wider the circle of kindred the greater the assurance of

were the natural guardians of his rights and the avengers Whether designedly or otherwise, the Turanian form of consanguinity organized the family upon the largest scale of numbers. On the other hand, a gradual change from a nomadic to a civilized condition would prove the severest test to which a system of consanguinity could be subjected. The protection of the law, or of the State, would become substituted for that of kiasmen; but with more effective power the rights of
safety, since they

of his wrongs.

property might influence the system of relationship. This last consideration,

which would not arise until after a people had emerged from barbarism, would be adequate beyond any other known cause to effect a radical change in a pre-existing system, if this recognized relationships which would
defeat natural justice in the inheritance of property. In Tamilian society,

where my brother's son and my cousin's son are both my sons, a useful purpose may have been subserved by drawing closer, in this manner, the kindred bond; but in a civilized sense it would be manifestly unjust to place either of these collateral sons upon an equality with my own son for the inheritance of my estate. Hence the growth of property and the settlement of its distribution might be expected to lead to a more precise discrimination of the several degrees of consanguinity if they were confounded by the previous system.

Where

the original system, anterior to civilization,

was

descriptive, the

tendency to modification, under the influence of refinement,

the direction of a

would be

in

more

rigorous separation of the several fines of descent,

and of a more systematic description of the persons or relationships in each. It would not necessarily lead to the abandonment of old terms nor to the
invention of new. This latter belongs, usuaUy, to the formative period of a language.

When

that

is

passed,

compound terms

are resorted to

if

the

descriptive phrases are felt to be inconvenient.

Wherever these compounds are found it wfil be known at once that they are modern in the language. The old terms are not necessarily radical, but they have become so worn down by long-continued use as to render the identification of their component parts impossible. While the growth of nomenclatures of relationship tends to show the direction in which existing systems have been modified, it

178

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN

classificatory
It is

seems to be incapable of throwing any light upon the question whether a form ever becomes changed into a descriptive, or the reverse.

more

difficult,

where the primitive system was

classificatory, to ascer-

tain the probable direction of the change.

The

uncivilized nations have

remained substantially stationary in their condition through all the centuries of their existence, a circumstance eminently favorable to the permanency of their domestic institutions. It is not supposable, however, that they have resisted all modifications of their system of consanguinity. The
opulence of the nomenclature of relationships, which
the greater portion of the nations
to
is

characteristic of

show

that, if it

whose form is classificatory, may tend changed materially, it would be in the direction of a
is

greater complexity of classification. It

extremely

difficult to arrive at

any

general conclusions
it

upon

this

question with reference to either form. But

after
it

may be

affirmed that

if

an original system changes materially,

it

has been adopted into use,

ideas
further
It

is

and conceptions which it and logical developments.

done in harmony with the embodies, of which the changes will be

certain to be
affinity are

should not be inferred that forms of consanguinity and

The tables entirely come into practical use, dispel such a supposition. When a system has once with its nomenclature adopted, and its method of description or of classieither adopted, modified, or laid aside at pleasure.
fication settled,
it

would, from the nature of the case, be very slow to change.

Each person,
brother,

as has elsewhere
is

been observed,
It
is

is

the centre around

father,

a group of consanguinei

arranged.

my

my

mother,

whom my

my

son,

my

uncle,
is

my

cousin, with each

and every human being;

and, therefore, each one

the prevailing system.
tionship
is

compelled to understand, as well as to use,

alike, since each relachange of any of these relationships, or a subversion of any of the terms invented to express them, would be extremely difficult if not impossible; and it would be scarcely less difficult to
It is

an actual necessity to aU

personal to Ego.

enlarge or contract the established use of the terms

possibility of this

themselves.

The

permanence

is

increased by the circumstance that these

systems exist by usage rather than legal enactment, and therefore the

motive to change must be as universal as the usage. Their use and preservation are intrusted to every person who speaks the common
language, and their channel of transmission
is

the blood.

Hence

it is

that,

in addition to the natural stability of domestic institutions, there are special

reasons which contribute to their permanence, by means of which

it

is

rendered not improbable that they might survive changes of social condition sufficiently radical to overthrow the primary ideas in which they originated.

The United
OTIS
T. (1838-1908)

States National

Museum
H.

MASON
Mason, whose

WILLIAM

HOLMES

(1846-1933)

When

Otis T.

early training

had been

in classical studies,

joined the Smithsonian Institution in 1872 as collaborator in ethnology, he

museum where the growing ethnological housed and displayed. The dream became an actuality in 1881. Soon after. Mason gave up all other work to become
entertained a

dream

of a national

collections could be properly

the Smithsonian's curator of ethnology.

To him
mens.

fell

the task of identifying, cataloguing

and arranging

the speci-

An

expert in classification, he set up a typology for each category of

objects, supplementing his catalogue with descriptive papers

jects as

on such subarranged the

arrangement.

throwing

sticks, cradles,

exhibits

by types

in series

women's knives, designed to show the

etc.

He

history of inventions,

thus introducing the evolutionary point of view into

museum

Although he recognized the role of a museum in making vivid the life of peoples and arranged one exhibit as an ethnic unit, his real interest was taxonomy, and his most important published contributions, such as his
great

monograph on Aboriginal American Basketry, deal with

description.

classification

and

Textiles particularly

delighted him;

their

construction
things rather

challenged him.

He did not go into the field; he learned from than from people. He was, in short, the model museum man.
Similarly William

H. Holmes was

essentially a

museum man, concerned

with things rather than with people. His only field work was as geologist
for

an archaeological expedition. Although he was Chief of the Bureau number of years, he was not happy in an administrative role (Lowie reports that he was "stiff" and "forbidding"), and he resigned after a few years to go back to museum work. Holmes' early training and great love was art. It was a fellow-student
of Ethnology for a
in his art classes

who first

Institution
tion
to

and

his first

work

introduced him to the director of the Smithsonian there was drawing illustrations for a publica-

on shells. His early training stood him in good stead; his sensitivity form and to the problems of design made him one of the very few

great writers in the field of primitive art.

He

recognized the influence of

motor

habits, material,

anticipating

and technique on the development of form, thereby Boas' more developed handling of these ideas. R.L.B.

179

OTIS

T.

MASON

(1838-1908)

The Carrying of Children

carrying persons, or passenger

portation of helpless children.

NEXT TO GETTING ABOUT AND CARRYING THINGS COMES THE ACTIVITY OF trafl&c, and this commences with the trans-

Invention has had in this art an opportunity of elaboration along the Unes of geographic conditions in obedience to the commands of ethnic pecuharities, but the most primitive method resorts to no machinery
whatever. (Fig. 186.)

The

traffic

of the world in the present

day

is

always numbered in

milHons, whether of persons, of miles, of tons of freight carried or coal

consumed, or of doUars invested. It began with naked mothers carrying naked children, without the expenditure of one dollar. To study this art from its simple to its complex forms one must commence with tropical peoples who have never been elsewhere. Here the infant is transported upon the person of the mother, both of them clinging one to the other by a semiautomatic habit or instinct. In this paper little attention will be paid to the bed and wrappings of infants. That subject has already been discussed.^
African mothers, on the testimony of the U.
S.

National

never invented a single device for their tiny passengers,

Museum, have who are usually

gathered into the folds of the sash or shawl or mantle. Doubtless this gar-

ment

is

worn

frequently to give the child a resting place, and netting tied

it is

about the neck furnishes support to the nestling; but

practically true

1 E. Pokrowski, Trans. Soc. Friends of Nat. Sci., Moscow; Mason, "Cradles of the American Aborigines," Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. S. Nat. Mus.), 1887, pp. 164-212; J. H. Porter, "Notes on the Artificial Deformation of Children among Savage and Civilized Peoples," ibid., pp. 213-235; H. Ploss, "Das Kind in Branch und Sitte der

Volker," Leipzig, 1884, 2 vols.

From Mason, "Primitive Travel and Transportation," Report of the U. S. National Museum in the Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution
for 1894 (Washington:

Government Prmting

Office,

1896), pp. 490-495, 500-507.

180

The Carrying

of Children

181

that the spirit of invention in Africa has not

been awakened by the necessity of carrying

infants.

Schurtz figures a Masakara negro woman in the interior of Africa, grinding grain

on the metate, with a muller,

shawl upon her back.^
the

at the

same

time bearing an infant in the folds of the

And

the union of
is

the manufacturer with the carrier

one of

commonest occurrences
of

there.

Ratzel gives an interesting picture, after

Falkenstein,

Loango mother, bare-

head handkerchief, hoeing in the field, and carrying a sleeping infant on her back, securely held in place by a cloth or shawl, tied around her body under the arms and above the breasts, and
footed, wearing a

reaching to her ankles.^

Holub, in his illustrated catalogue of the South African Exposition in Prague, pictures a

Fig. 186.

Bechuana woman engaged in the same double exercise, and illustrated books and journals describing the west coast of Africa show the usual position of the African babe riding astride the mother's hips and enfolded in the loose garment. (Fig. 187.) In many places the attachment to her body is reduced to a mere string. The Zulu mother carries her babe in a shawl, or wide sash, which passes around her body above her breasts, close under her arms, and reaching quite down to her hips.* The child sits in the shawl as in a swing, which passes about the loins above the center of gravity. The Hottentot women generally wear the krass a square piece of the skin of a wild beast, generally a wildcat, tied on with the hairy side outward around their shoulders, which, hke those of the men, cover their backs and sometimes reach down to their hams. Between two krasses they fasten a suckHng child, if they have one, with the head just peeping over their shoulders. The under krass prevents their bodies being hurt by the children at their back.^

WOMAN OF BRITTANY CARRYING CHILD, From sketch by W. E. Chandler

Ratzel figures Abyssinian

the folds of the dress

women

in the double function of carrying

children and carrying freight. In the former, the tiny passenger rests in

on the back. In the

latter,

the load

is

borne on the

back and sustained by ropes, knapsackwise^

2
3

4 5 6

"Katechismus der Volkerkunde," Leipzig, 1893, p. 180. "Volkerkunde," Leipzig, 1887, i, p. 155. Ratzel, "Volkerkunde," Leipzig, 1887, i, p. 150. Kolben, "Voyage to the Cape of Good Hope," iv, p. 14. "Volkerkunde," m, p. 229.

182

OTIS T.

MASON

In European countries for the most part,

the child has been consigned to a wheel carriage of

some

this is the

The simplest form of Baschkir Kume, which is merely

kind.

one form of California cradle (fig. 188), with wheels on the hindmost cross bar, and a hood of birch bark instead of reed mat.'^

forked stick

is

the frame of the cradle

axle. On this rests an oblong cylinder of birch bark, ovoid in horizontal outline, and having a lattice bottom.

and hounds of the

The hood
that of a

is

of birch bark, and not unlike

common wagon.
has
also

differentiation

taken

place

among
it

cradle frames,

the suspension strings,

one form dropping by means of which

to

became now a bed

is

be swung,
lifted

now

vehicle to be carried, assumes the rockers

or wheels and
Fig. 187.

no longer

from the

AFRICAN METHOD OF CARRYING CHILD. From a photograph in the

U. S. National

ground; the other remains in the condition

wherein

it

may be now

a swinging bed,

now

Museum

a carrying frame.

The carrying of children on the person has European countries by this differentiation. Wherever the old-time carrying frame and swing becomes a rocking cradle or a wagon,
been affected
in

the process of carrying the child reverts to the

most primitive

type, chiefly

on one arm,

after the

manner

of the African mother.

sight in the poorer settle-

The commonest sight and often a painful ments of any modern city is that of a girl, an infant on the left arm, distorting her body Likewise may be seen among the folk in
and
riage of infants. In art, as has
life are glorified. If the caryatid

often quite young, lugging

hopelessly.

sport or in serious

humor

in the pastimes of children survivals of past practices in the car-

been previously

stated, the drudgeries of

and atlas are the sestheticising and apotheosis of burden bearing on head and back, the many renditions of the Madonna exalt in art and religion the transportation of the human infant

on the
fan,

left

arm.^

Hercules was cradled in his father's shield: Dionysius in a winnowing

which has the same shape. The Greeks do not seem to have carried
p. 34,

7Cf. Pokrowski, Rev. d'Ethnog., 1889, fig. 27, (U. S. Nat. Mus.), 1887, p. 180, fig. 12. 8Cf. "Woman's Share in Primitive Culture," Woman of India carrying burden and child.

with Rep. Smithsonian

p.

Inst.

New

York, 1894,

186,

fig.

50.

The Carrying

of Children

183

children in cradles, but the

Romans had

gotten so far, although the figures re-

semble the Sioux shoe shaped device

without the wooden support,^

The Semite mother who

child about her

carries her
astride

neck puts
it

it

one

shoulder, shifting

to the other as oc-

casion

demands
is

(fig.

189).

No

device

or invention
ing

used, but a semiauto-

matic habit, a kind of instinct for clingto

each

other,

keeps

the young

passenger in position. This should be

compared with the position of the

child

among

other peoples.

In the Indo-Pacific area there

primitive

is little

change, only local modifications in the

method
as

of having as

little

mathe

chinery

possible

involved

in

transportation of the infant.

Of course

none of these peoples have ever so much

as thought of differentiating the carriage

device from the sleeping device.

The
tries

child's

bed and carriage

piece exists in Russia, in

Fig. 188. CRADLE OF RUSHES, WITH all HANDLE, USED BY KLAMATH INunder her sway, and in the lands DIANS OF CALIFORNIA. along the southern border of these. It had a wide development in America. This combination carriage and bed exists in two forms that in which the whole body of the child is bandaged, legs and all, and that in which the body is swaddled and the legs are partly

one the counin

free.

stitions;
life

These two have relation to climate and pedagogic notions and superbut they have profound relations also to the nomadic and hunting

of the people.

Pokrowski traces the rigid cradle wherein the child is laid upon its back and strapped therein so as often to produce deformation among the Georgians, Nogais, Sartes, Kirghiz, Kalmuck, Yakut, Buriat, Ostiak, and Samoyed.i^ He says that it is the most ancient and widely spread. In central Russia it is formed of four planks about a finger and a half high, in shape of a box, 1 meter long and 80 centimeters wide, on which is fixed a cloth bottom, and from the corners are ropes which unite in a ring above
for suspension. In fact,
it is

wooden hammock
that these

that has lost

its

carrying

function.
8

But Pokrowski

affirms

cradles

often preserve the

Roman Antiquities, s. v., Cunae. Soc. d. Amis. d. Sc. Nat., 1886. See also Rev. d'Anthrop., 1885, p. 364; 1887, p. 238.
Smith, Dictionary of Greek and
10

Mem.

184
ancient form that they

OTIS T.

MASON

may be
and

carried about as well as

They

are both carriage

swinging cradle in one.

borders of the cradle

hung up in the house. The cords from the two cross over the woman's
(fig.

breast as in the bandolier^^

192).
is

The American
by climate.
It

aboriginal cradle
exist in

influenced

can not
it

extremes of heat

or cold. In one case the child would be smothered, in the other

Again,

whatever

would be frozen. may be the

flat

material,

whether birch bark, rawhide, a

never placed in contact with

board, a
is

dugout, a frame of rods, the infant's head

it.

There is always between the head and this hard frame or board a pillow of fur, hair, shredded bark, down, or some other substance. It is idle, therefore, to collect cradles in order to study inten-

tional

and undesigned head

flattening unless

we

secure also the piUow.

httle

One

cradle,

from the

Yumas, has two

pads about 4 inches

apart to catch the head of the infant; another

has a regular pillow, and so on.

FinaUy,
cradles are
Fig. 189.

aU the U.

S.

National

Museum

WOMAN

OF PAL-

A
to

great

made to stand up or to hang up. many persons who are familiar with
and
it

ESTINE CARRYING CmLD. From a sketch in the Christian Herald

is

the subject have been questioned,

seems

be true that Indian cradles are very seldom

laid flat on the ground. In that case the head and after the child is a few weeks old, excepting during sleep, the head does not touch the piUow at aU. As explained elsewhere, the exigencies of cUmate prevent the Eskimo from carrying their children in open frames. But the Lamut and Tungus devices just named exist in a climate as cold as any endured by the Eskimo. It is necessary to seek the explanation of the absence of any

perfectly free,

Eskimo in the difference of the culture grade. The Asiatics are herdsmen and hang the children to the saddlebow. The Eskimo have generally no good wood for frames and no good reason to separate the infant from the mother. When the child is young it rides in
device
the

among

the mother's hood, between her fur coat and her skin.

To

prevent the

Boas intimates that a strap is worn about the mother's waist. The costume of this unique people over many hundreds of miles of coast east and west is uniform in this regard.^

young passenger from

getting lost

When
11

children are about a

month old they

p. 556.

are put into a jacket

made

12 Sixth

Rev. d'Ethnog., Paris, 1889, p. 10. Ann. Rep. Bureau of Ethnology,

The Carrying

of Children

185
their legs

from the skin of a deer fawn having a cap of the same material,
places,

remaining bare, as they are always carried in their mother's hood. In some

where large boots are

of the jacket
is

in use, they are said to

be carried in

these.^^

The hood

much

the larger in that of the

women,

for the

purpose of holding a child. The back of the jacket also bulges out in the middle to give the child a footing, and a strap or girdle below this, secured

round the waist by two large wooden buttons in from sliding down.^*

front, prevents the infant

Fig. 192.

WOMAN OF LITTLE RUSSIA CARRYING CHILD.

From
The mode

a figure in the Revue d'Ethnographie

is one of the national customs of a peomost slowly says Richardson.^^ Peary says that the woman of North Greenland, Hke the man, wore the ahtee and netcheh, made respectively of bird skin and sealskin. They differed in pattern from those of the man only in the back, where

of treating infants

ple that changes

13 Ibid., p. 556. 14 Ibid., p. 557. 15 Richardson, "Arctic

Searching Expedition,"

New

York, 1852,

p. 218.

186
an extra width
is

OTIS T.

MASON

which forms a pouch extending the entire fitting tight around the hips. In this pouch or hood the baby is carried; its Uttle body, covered only by a shirt reaching to the waist, made of the skin of a young blue fox, is placed against the bare back of the mother, and the head, covered by a tight-fitting skull-cap made of seal skin, is allowed to rest
in,

sewed

length of the back of the

wearer and

way the Eskimo child is carried awake or asleep, and without clothing except the shirt and cap, until it can walk, which is usually at the age of 2 years; then it is clothed in skin and allowed to toddle about. If it is the youngest member
against the mother's shoulder. In this
constantly, whether

of the famUy, after

it

has learned to walk,

it

it

stiU takes its place in the

mother's hood whenever

pick up their
little

is

sleepy or tired, just as

American mothers

toddlers

and rock them.^^

When the Eskimo babe is large enough to escape from the hood and walk it has stiU to be carried a great deal. Of this sort, both father and mother take the youngster by one arm and one leg, give it a toss, and in a twinkling the youthful rider is sitting pickaback astride the parent's neck. The author has seen both men and women carrying young children
after this fashion.

Women
breasts.^^

carry their young astride their backs.

its

The

child

is

held in

place by a strap passing under

thighs

and around over the mother's

the mother wraps

Ungava, on the authority of Lucien Turner, is able to procure and during its infancy it is carried in the ample hood attached to her coat. The carrying devices for infants among the American Indians, as distinguished from the Eskimos, may now be examined. Mackenzie somewhere intimates that the Chippewayan mothers make their upper garments full in the shoulders. When traveling they carry their infants upon their backs next the skin and convenient to giving them nourishment. This is a transition habit between Eskimo and Indian and not prevalent among the Athapascans,
a child
is

When

bom

in

it

in the softest skin she

"The Kutchin women,"

their

says Richardson, "do not carry their infants in

into a

hoods or boots after the Eskimo fashion, nor do they stuff them bag with moss, as the Chippewayan and Crees do, but they place them in a seat of birch bark, with back and sides like those of an armchair, and a pommel in front resembling the peak of a Spanish saddle. This hangs at the woman's back, suspended by a strap which passes over her shoulders, and the infant is seated in it, with back to hers, and its legs, well cased in warm boots, hanging down on each side

"My Arctic Journal," New York and Philadelphia, 1893, p. 43. John W. Kelly, "Ethnographical Memoranda Concerning the Arctic Eskimos of Alaska and Siberia," Bureau of Education, Circular of Information No. 2, 1890,
16 J. Peary, 17
p. 18.

The Carrying

of Children

187

of the pommel.

The

child's feet are

bandaged

to prevent their growing,

is

small feet being thought handsome; and the consequence

that short,

unshapely feet are characteristic of the people,"^^

The Lower Yukon trough-shaped

cradle of birch bark (example No.

32986, in the U. S. National Museum, fig. 199) is made of three pieces, the bottom, the top or hood, and the awning piece. The two parts constituting the

body of
the

the cradle overlap an inch and a half

and are sewed

together with a single basting of pine root, with stitches half an inch

body just under the margin, and continuously around hood and awning, lies a rod of osier. A strip of birch bark laid on the upper side of the awning serves as a stiffener and is sewed down by an ingenious basting with stitches an inch or more
apart.

Around

the border of the

long which pass

around and up again through the two thicknesses of birch bark by another opening to form the next stich. The hood is formed by puckering the birch bark after the manner of a grocer's bag. The bordering osier is neatly seized to the edge of the hood and awning by a coil of split spruce root. Rows of beads of many colors adorn the awning piece. In a country intolerable by reason of the mosthicknesses of birch bark,
the osier twig just below the margin,

down through two

quitoes

it is

not strange that provisions for sustaining some sort of netting

should be devised.
birth, without being washed, the northeastern Tinneh naked on a layer of moss in a bag made of leather and lined with hare skins. If it be in summer, the latter is dispensed with. This bag is then securely laced, restraining the limbs in natural positions, and leaving the child freedom to move the head only. In this phase of its existence it resembles strongly an Egyptian mummy. Cradles are never used, but this machine, called a "moss bag," is an excellent adjunct to the rearing of children up to a certain age, and has become almost, if not universally, .^^ adopted in the families of the Hudson Bay Company's employees. The Southern Canadian cradle is a board with two flaps of cloth which lace together up the center. The child is laid on its back on the board, packed with soft moss, and laced firmly down with its arms to its side and only its head at hberty. The cradle is strung on the back of the mother when traveling, or reared against a tree when resting in camp, the child being only occasionally released from bondage for a few moments. The little prisoners are remarkably good. No squaUing disturbs an Indian

Immediately after
is

infant

laid

camp.2"
Catlin figures a Cree

woman

carrying a child

on her

right arm,

and

holding the buffalo robe around the child with the

18

left

hand.^i

The

Richardson, "Arctic Searching Expedition," Nev/ York, 1852, Bernard R. Ross, Rep. Smithsonian Inst., 1866, p. 305. 20 Fitzwilliams, "The Northwest Passage by Land," p. 85.
1^

p. 227.

21 Catlin,

"North American Indians,"

i,

p. 33.

IJ

OTIS T.

MASON

Kickapoos, of the same stock, carry the small child on the back in the shawl
(fig.

200).

Mr. Lucien Turner reports that the Nascopi of Labrador and Ungava, who are much affected by their proximity to Eskimo, use no cradle board for
children.

The principal factor in the Chippewa infant's house, according to Kohl,

is

flat
is

board. For this purpose poplar

selected; in the first place belight,

wood
cause
it

it is

and secondly, because

does not crack or splinter.

thin,

On

this

board a smaU frame of

sapling
is

peeled
the

fastened,

much

after

shape of the child's body, and stands

-*^^K^^w
Fig. 199.

up from the board like the sides of a violin from the sounding board. It is fastened on with bast, because the Indians never use nails, screws, or glue.

ATHAPASCAN CRADLE OF BIRCH BARK. Collected by E. W. Nelson

The

cavity

is filled

with very soft sub-

stances for the reception of the child.

composed of very fine, dry moss, wool found in the seed vessels of a species of reed. This wool was recommended as a most useful ingredient in the stuffing, for it sucks up all moisture as greedily as a sponge, and hence there is no need to inspect the baby continually. In this bed the little beings nestle up to the armpits so far they are wrapped up tightly with bandages and coverings, but the head and arms are free. At a convenient
for this purpose a mixture

They prepare

rotted cedar wood, and a species of tender

wood, also fastened to the cradle and if the cradle happens to fall over it rests on this arch. In fact, they may roU an Indian tikinagan over as much as you please, but the child can not be injured. The squaws at times display extraordinary luxury in the gaily embroidered coverlid which they throw over the whole cradle.^^ The Iroquois cradle, example No. 18806, has the backboard carved in imitation of peacocks and is painted in bright colors. It is square at the top and the awning frame is mortised at the ends, which allows them to slide over the awning bar held down and guyed by stays on the opposite sides; has a movable foot rest at the bottom and thongs along the sides for lashing the baby in. Length, 2914 inches; width, top,
is

distance above the head

stiff

circle of

with bast.

It

serves as a protection to the head,

22 J.

G. Kohl, "Wanderings round Lake Superior," 1860, pp.

6-7.

The Carrying of Children

101/2 inches,

189

bottom, SVs inches; foot rest, height, 3i/4 inches; width, 6 inches. The St. Regis Iroquois, in the north of New York and near

Canada, have for many years bought their cradle boards from the whites or made them of material bought from a white man. Example No. 8894 is like the last,
with
gaudily

painted

and

carved
top
11

backboard, and awning frame carved.

Length,
inches,

31

inches;
73/4

width,

bottom

inches; height of

awning frame, 12^4 inches; width of top 914, bottom 12 inches.

Morgan
invention.

says

that

the
is

Iroquois

baby frame, "ga-ose-ha,"

It

an Indian appears to have been

designed rather as a convenience to

the Indian

mother for the transporta-

tion of her infant than, as has gener-

been supposed, to secure an erect The frame is about 2 feet in length by about 14 inches in width,
ally

figure.

with a carved footboard at the small

end and a hoop or bow

arching over
at

at the head,

right

angles.

After

being inclosed in a blanket, the infant

is

lashed upon the frame with

belts of

beadwork, which firmly

its

se-

cure and cover

exception
article for

person, with the

face.

of

the

separate
is

covering the face

then
child
Fig. 200.

drawn over the bow, and the

is

wholly protected.

When

in use, the

WOMAN

KICKAPOO (algonquian) CARRYING CmLD.

After

burden strap attached to the frame is placed around the forehead of the
carved, and
its

Hoppe
often elaborately

mother, and the "ga-ose-ha" upon her back. This frame

is

ornaments are of the choicest description. When cultivating the maize, or engaged in any outdoor occupation, the mother hangs the "ga-ose-ha" upon a limb of the nearest tree and left to swing in the breeze. The patience and quiet of the Indian child in this close confinement are
quite remarkable. It will

hang thus suspended

for hours without uttering a

complaint.^^

Among

the relics of the Cathn collection are two old cradles.

Of one
carved

the following description will sufl5ce:

23

Backboard square

at the top;

Lewis H. Morgan, "League of the Iroquois," 1851, pp. 390-391, with

illustration.

190

OTIS T.

MASON

and painted; awning frame bent and painted; covering cloth decorated
with beads and tacked around the edge of the side board, brought up and
laced in the middle like a shoe; length, 2SY4 inches; width, 13 inches.

The description of the second example (fig. 203) is as follows: Backboard carved on front above; back brace with large, rounded ends extending outward; footrest low, curved around at the bottom; cradle covered

over with quill work in red, white, and black patterns

in the middle with

lozenges, v/omen,

horses, etc.; decorated with iron bells; opening across the cradle covered

inches;

embroidered quilt; length, 31i/4 inches; width, IO34 head frame, 9Y2 inches; height, ISyi inches.^*

Fig. 203.

ALGONQUIAN CRADLE, DECORATED WITH QUILL WORK. Collected by George Catlin

24

Rep. Smithsonian

Inst.

(U.

S.

Nat. Mus.), 1887,

p.

202.

WILLIAM

H.

HOLMES

(1846-1933)

Form and Ornament

in

Ceramic Art

SUGGESTIONS OF NATURAL FEATURES OF OBJECTS

THE FIRST ARTICLES USED BY MEN IN THEIR SIMPLE ARTS HAVE IN MANY cases possessed features suggestive of decoration. Shells of moUusks are exquisitely embellished with ribs, spines, nodes, and colors. The same is true to a somewhat limited extent of the shells of the turtle and the
armadillo and of the hard cases of
fruits.

though not essential to the utensil, are nevertheless inseparable parts of it, and are cast or unconsciously copied by a very primitive people when similar articles are artificially produced in plastic material. In this way a utensil may acquire ornafeatures,

These decorative

mental characters long before the workman has learned to take pleasure
in such details or has conceived

an idea beyond that of simple

utility.

This

may be

called unconscious embellishment. In this fortuitous fashion

a ribbed variety of fruit shell would give rise to a ribbed vessel in clay;

one covered with spines would suggest a noded vessel, etc. When taste came to be exercised upon such objects these features would be retained

and copied for the pleasure they afforded.

Passing by the

many

simple elements of decoration that by this unlet

conscious process could be derived from such sources,

single

me

give a

example by which

it

will be seen that not only elementary forms

but even so highly constituted an ornament as the scroll

may have been

The
sea-shell
utilize clay

brought thus naturally into the realm of decorative

art.

has always been intimately associated with the arts that

and

abounds in suggestions of embellishment. The Busycon was almost universally

employed

as

a vessel by the tribes of the Atlantic drainage

From Holmes, "Origin and development of form and ornament," Fourth Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington: Government Printing Office, 1886), pp. 454-465.
191


192
of

WILLIAM
it

H.

HOLMES
until

North America. Usually

was trimmed down and excavated

only about three-fourths of the outer wall of the shell remained.

At

one end was the long spike-like base which served as a handle, and at the other the flat conical apex, with its very pronounced spiral line or ridge expanding from the center to the circumference, as seen in Fig. 475 a. This vessel was often copied in clay, as many good examples now in our museums testify. The notable feature is that the shell has been copied literally, the spiral appearing in its proper place. A specimen is illustrated in Fig. 475 b which, although simple and highly conventionalized,
still

retains the spiral figure.

a.

Shell vessel

b-

Copy

in clay

Fig. 475.

SCROLL DERIVED FROM THE SPIRE OF A CONCH SHELL.

In another example

we have
shown

four of the noded apexes placed about

in Fig.

the rim of the vessel, as

476

a, the

conception being that

of four conch shells united in one vessel, the bases being turned inward

and the apexes outward.

tion of the spiral lines,
result

Now

it

is

only necessary to suppose the addi-

always associated with the nodes, to have the

still

shown

in b,

and by a

higher degree of convention

c.

we have

the classic scroll ornament given in

Of

course,

no such

result as this

could

come about

adventitiously, as successful combination calls for the

exercise of judgment

and

taste;

the motive could enter art

without

but the initiatory steps could be taken

the conscious supervision of the

human

agent.

Fig. 476. POSSIBLE DERIVATION

OF THE CURRENT SCROLL.

Constructional features.
tion

are

infinitely

varied

^Features of vessels resulting from construcand often highly suggestive of decoration.

Constructional peculiarities
cially

of

the

clay

utensils

themselves

are

espe-

worthy of notice, and on account of

their actual presence in the

Form and Ornament

art itself are

in

Ceramic Art
be
utilized or
coil,

193
copied for ceramic ornament

more

likely to

than those of other materials. The

struction, has

so universally employed in con-

certain peoples,

had a decided influence upon the ceramic decoration of as I have shown in a paper on ancient Pueblo art.

it we have not only a great variety of surface ornamentation produced by simple treatment of the coil in place, but probably many forms suggested by the use of the coil in vessel building, as, for instance, the spiral formed in beginning the base of a coiled vessel. Fig. 478 a, from which the double scroll b, as a separate feature, could readily be derived, and finally the chain of scrolls so often seen in border and zone

From

a.

Coiled

filet

of clay

b.

Double

coil

Fig. 478.

SCROLL DERIVED FROM A COIL OF CLAY.

of
fillets

decoration.

This familiarity with the use

or

ropes

of

clay

would

also lead to

a great variety of applied ornament, examples of

art,

which, from Pueblo

are given in Fig. 479.

The sinuous forms

to
it,

as-

sumed by a rope

employed would readily suggest Indian the form of the serpent and the means of representing
of clay so
this

the

and

might thus lead to the introduction of

art.

much

revered creature into

Fig. 479.

ORNAMENTAL USE OF

FILLETS.

Of
art,

the various classes of utensils associated closely with the ceramic

none so characteristically marked by constructional feaand wicker baskets. The twisting, interlacing, knotting, and stitching of filaments give relieved figures that by contact in manufacture impress themselves upon the plastic clay. Such impressions come in time to be regarded as pleasing features, and when free-hand methods of reproducing are finally acquired they and their derivatives
there are
as
tures

nets

become

essentials

of decoration.

At a
the

later

stage

these characters of

basketry influence ceramic decoration in a somewhat different way.

the use of variously-colored
fillets

By

woven

surface displays figures in

194

WILLIAM

H.

HOLMES

color corresponding to those in relief and varying with every

bination.

new com-

Many

striking

patterns

are

thus

produced,

and the potter

who
tries

has learned to decorate his wares by the stylus or brush repro-

duces these patterns by free-hand methods.

We

find pottery in all coun-

ornamented with patterns, painted, incised, stamped, and relieved, certainly derived from this source. So well is this fact known that I need hardly go into details.
In the higher stages of art the constructional characters of architecture give rise to

many

notions of decoration which afterwards descend

divergent

to
in

other

arts,

taking greatly

forms.

Aboriginal

architecture

some

parts of

America had reached a development capable of wieldis

ing a strong influence. This

not true, however, of any part of the

United

States.

SUGGESTIONS OF ACCIDENTS
Besides the suggestions of surface features impressed in manufacture

or intentionally copied as indicated above,

source there are necessarily

we have

also those of acci-

dental imprints of implements or of the fingers in manufacture.

From

this

many

suggestions of ornament, at

first

of

indented figures, but

later, after

long employment, extending to the other

modes

of representation.

IDEOGRAPHIC AND PICTORIAL SUBJECTS

Non-ideographic forms of ornament
tures,

may

originate in ideographic fea-

mnemonic, demonstrative, or symbolic. Such significant figures are borrowed by decorators from other branches of art. As time goes on they lose their significance and are subsequently treated as purely decorative
elements. Subjects wholly pictorial in character,

when such come

to be

made, may also be used

as simple decoration,

and by long processes of

convention become geometric.

The exact amount

after

of significance

still

attached to significant figures

adoption into decoration cannot be determined except in cases of

actual identification

by

living peoples,

and even when the

decorator

signification is

known by

the

more learned
it.

individuals the

may be

wholly

without knowledge of

MODIFICATION OF ORNAMENT
There are comparatively few elementary ideas prominently employed in primitive decorative art. New ideas are as already shown, all along the pathway of progress. None ideas retain a uniform expression, however, as they are subject
erally

and genacquired,

of these
to

modi-

Form and Ornament

fication

in

Ceramic Art
just

195

by environment

as

are the forms of living organisms.

brief classification of the causes of modification is given in the following

synopsis

Modification of ornament

Through material. Through form. [ Through methods of

r

realization.

It is evident at a glance that material must have a upon the forms assumed by the various decorative motives, however derived. Thus stone, clay, wood, bone, and copper, although they readily borrow from nature and from each other, necessarily show different decorative results. Stone is massive and takes form slowly and by peculiar processes. Clay is more versatile and decoration may be scratched, incised, painted, or modeled in relief with equal facility, while wood and metal engender details having characters peculiar to themselves, producing different results from the same motives or elements. Much of the diversity displayed by the art products of different countries and climates

Through

material.

strong influence

is

due to

this cause.

Peoples dwelling in arctic climates are limited, by their materials, to

particular

modes

of expression.

Bone and

ivory as shaped for use in

the arts of subsistence afford facilities for the

employment

of

a very

restricted class of linear decoration, such chiefly as could

be scratched

with a hard point upon small irregular, often cyHndrical, implements.

Skins and other animal tissues are not favorable to the development of

ornament, and the

textile

arts

the greatest agents

of convention

do

not readily find suitable materials in which to work.

Decorative art carried to a high stage under arctic environment would be more Hkely to achieve unconventional and realistic forms than if devel-

oped

patterns

more highly favored countries. The accurate geometric and linear would hardly arise. Through form. ^Forms of decorated objects exercise a strong influence upon the decorative designs employed. It would be more difficult to tattoo the human face or body with straight fines or rectilinear patin

terns than with curved ones.

sel of

An

ornament applied

originally to a ves-

a given form would accommodate

as

costume becomes adjusted to the individual.

another form of vessel,

required for
necessary.

form pretty much it came to be very decided changes might be

itself to that

When

With the ancient Pueblo peoples rectiUnear forms of meander patwere very much in favor and many earthen vessels are found in which bands of beautiful angular geometric figures occupy the peripheral zone. Fig. 480 a, but when the artist takes up a mug having a row of
terns

hemispherical nodes about the body, b, he finds

it

very

difficult to

apply

196

WILLIAM

H.

HOLMES

Fig. 480. VARIATIONS IN A

MOTIVE THROUGH THE INFLUENCE OF FORM.

his favorite

forms and

is

almost compelled to run spiral curves about the

nodes in order to secure a neat adjustment.

Through methods of realization. It will readily be seen that the forms assumed by a motive depend greatly upon the character of the mechanical devices employed. In the potter's art devices for holding and turning the vessel under manipulation produce peculiar results. in applying a given idea to clay much depends upon the method of executing it. It will take widely differing forms when executed by incising, by modeling, by painting, and by stamping. Intimately associated with methods of execution are peculiarities of construction, the two agencies working together in the processes of modification and development of ornament. I have previously shown how our favorite ornament, the scroll, in its disconnected form may have originated in the copying of natural forms or through the manipulation of coils of clay. I present here an example of its possible origin through the modification of forms derived from constructional features of basketry. An ornament known as the guilloche is found in many countries. The combination of lines resembles that of twisted or platted fillets of wood, cane, or rushes, as may be seen at a glance. Fig. 481 a. An incised ornament of this character, possibly derived from basketry by copying the twisted fillets or their impressions in the clay, is very common on the pottery of the mounds of the Mississippi Valley, and its variants form a most interesting study.
In applying this to a vessel the careless
the ends of the lines
artist

does not properly connect

fiUets,

which pass beneath the intersecting

b.

and the

parts

become disconnected,
c,

In

many

cases the ends are turned in

abruptly as seen in

and only a

slight further

change

is

necessary to

lead to the result, d, the running scroll with well-developed links. All
of these steps
It

may be

observed in a single group of vessels.

may be

thought by some that the processes of development indi-

cated above are insufficient and unsatisfactory.

seeing these forms already

endowed with symbolism, begin

There are those who, at what I

Form and Ornament

symbol
with

in

Ceramic Art

197

conceive to be the wrong end of the process. They derive the form of

from the thing symbohzed. Thus the current scroU is, found to be a symbol of water, and its origin is attributed to a hteral rendition of the sweep and curl of the waves. It is more probable that the scroll became the symbol of the sea long after its development through agencies similar to those described above, and that the association resulted from the observation of incidental resemblances. This same figure, in use by the Indians of the interior of the continent, is regarded as symbolic of the whirlwind, and it is probable that any symbolusing people will find in the features and phenomena of their environment, whatever it may be, suflQcient resemblance to any of their decorative devices to lead to a symboUc association.
directly

many

races,

Fig. 481.

THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE CURRENT SCROLL.

is

One
one

secret of modification

found in the use of a radical

in

art,

owing

to

differences in constructional characters.

all

more than For exam-

ple, the

tendency of nearly

woven

fabrics

is

to encourage, even to

compel, the use of straight lines in the decorative designs applied. Thus
the attempt to

employ curved lines would lead to stepped or broken lines. The curvihnear scroll coming from some other art would be forced by

the constructional character of the fabric into square forms,

rectilinear

and the shown in Fig. 482, a being would as the plain form, painted, engraved, or in relief, and b the same idea developed in a woven fabric. Stone or brick-work would lead to like results,

meander or

fret

result,

198
but the modification could as readily

WILLIAM

H.

HOLMES

move in the other direction. If an ornament originating in the constructional character of a woven fabric, or remodeled by it, and hence rectiUnear, should be desired for a smooth structureless or featureless surface, the difficulties of drawing the angular forms would lead to the delineation of curved forms, and we would have exactly the reverse of the order shown in Fig, 482. The two forms given in

.1-1, .-1} Bs::.-::::::.-;:.-::.-.::-.::::

N:

ill
i'ii!!

g
a.

Free-hand form

b.

Form imposed by

fabric

'

Fig. 482.

FORMS OF THE SAME MOTIVE EXPRESSED

IN DIFFERENT ARTS.

Fig.

484 actually occur in one and the same design painted upon an ancient Pueblo vase. The curved form is apparently the result of careless or hurried work, the original angular form having come from a textile source.

a
Fig. 484. VARIATIONS

RESULTING FROM CHANGE OF METHOD.

Many

excellent examples illustrative of this tendency to modification

are found in Pueblo art.

Much

of the

ornament applied to pottery

I

is

derived from the sister

tive figures are

art,

basketry. In the latter art the forms of decora-

geometric and symmetrical to the highest degree, as

have

worked with from the center and take uniform directions toward the margin, as shown in Fig. 485. But when a similar idea derived from basketry (as it could have no other origin) is executed in color upon an earthen vessel, we observe a tendency to depart from symmetry as well as from consistency. I call attention here to the arrangement of the parts merely, not to the motives employed, as I happen to have no examples of identical figures from the two arts. It wiU be seen by reference to the design given in Fig. 486, taken
frequently pointed out.
rays of a radiating ornament,
the texture of a shallow basket, spring

The

Form and Ornament

in

Ceramic Art

199

Fig. 485.

GEOMETRIC FORM OF TEXTILE ORNAMENT.

spirit

from the upper surface of an ancient vase, that although the

the decoration
all
is

of

is

wonderfully well preserved the idea of the origin of

the rays in the center of the vessel

not kept in view, and that by care-

lessness in the

are

drawing two of the rays crowded out and terminate against

the side of a neighboring ray. In copy-

ing and recopying by free

hand meth-

ods

many

curious modifications take

place in these designs, as, for example,

the unconformity

which occurs

in

one

place in the example given

at a

may

occur

number

of places, and there will

be a
small

series of

independent sections, a
of the bands of
Fig. 486. LOSS

number only
characteristic
interior of

devices remaining true rays.

A
is

painted

design

OF geometric ACCURACY IN PAINTING.

from the

shown

in Fig. 487, in

preserved,

an ancient bowl which merely a suggestion of the radiation is although the figure is still decorative and tasteful. This

process of modification goes on without end, and as the true geometric

textile

original character, producing

forms recede from view innovation robs the design of all traces of its much that is incongruous and unsatisfactory.

200

WILLIAM

H,

HOLMES
devices

The growth
from
the
constituted

of

decorative
to
is

elementary

the

highly
to a

and elegant
it is

owing

tendency of the
rate because

human mind
is

to elabo-

pleasant to do so or

because pleasure
sult,

taken in the rea directing and

for.
fig-

but there

is

still

shaping agency to be accounted

I

have already shown that such

ures as the scroll and the guilloche are

not necessarily developed by processes

of selection and combination of simple
Fig. 487. DESIGN

PAINTED UPON POTTERY.

elements, as

they
early stage almost full-fledged; but there
light

many have thought, since may have come into art at a very
is

nothing in these facts to throw

particular lines of
this

upon

the processes

by which ornament followed

development throughout endless elaboration. In treating of

point,

Prof. C. F. Hartt^ maintained that the development of ornamental designs

took particular and uniform directions owing to the structure of the eye,
certain forms being chosen

and perpetuated because of the pleasure

af-

forded by movements of the eye in following them.

this hypothesis, for
it is

In connection with

nothing more, Mr. Hartt advanced the additional

idea, that in unison with the general course of nature decorative

forms began with simple elements and developed by systematic methods to complex forms. Take for example the series of designs shown in Fig. 488.

The meander a made up of simple parts would, according to Mr. Hartt, by further elaboration under the supervision of the muscles of the eye, develop into b. This, in time, into c, and so on until the elegant anthemium was achieved. The series shown in Fig. 489 would develop in a similar way, or otherwise would be produced by modification in free-hand copying of the rectilinear series. The processes here suggested, although to all
appearances reasonable enough, should not be passed over without careful
scrutiny.

Taking the

first series,

we observe

that the ornaments are projected in

straight continuous lines or zones,

which are

filled

with more or less

Still

complex
metrical.

parts, rectilinear

and geometrically accurate.

higher forms

are marvelously intricate

and

graceful, yet not less geometric

and sym-

Let us turn to the primitive

artisan,

and observe him

bark,

at

work with
Is
it

rude brush and stylus upon the rounded and irregular forms of his
utensils
1

and weapons, or upon

skins,

and rock

surfaces.

Hartt: Popular Science Monthly, Vol. VI, p. 266.

Form and Ornament

in

Ceramic Art

201

probable that with his free hand directed by the eye alone he wiU be
able to achieve these rhythmic geometric forms.
the whole tendency
that
if

It

seems to

me

that

is

in the opposite direction.

venture to surmise

there

typical rectilinear fret

had been no other resources than those named above the would never have been known, at least to the

n-TLTLrLn
a

rzizizfznn
b

lEjMisrEMr

fM^lMEM^
Fig. 488.

THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT OF FRET WORK.

primitive world; for, notwithstanding the contrary statement

Hartt, the fret
to
is

by Professor

in

its

more

highly developed forms extremely difl&cult

and to delineate with the hand. Until arts, geometric in their construction, arose to create and to combine mechanically the necessary elements and motives, and lead the way by a long series of
the eye
to

foUow with

object-lessons

ideas

of

geometric

combination,

our typical border

ornament would not be

possible.

Such

arts are the textile arts

and archi-

1
202
tecture.

WILLIAM

H.

HOLMES

These brought into existence forms and ideas not met with in

nature and not primarily thought of by man, and combined them in

defiance of

human

conceptions of grace. Geometric ornament

is

the off-

spring of technique.

/m/in/uv

Fig. 489.

THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT OF SCROLL WORK.

The Bureau of American Ethnology:

Areal Research in the Southwest

FRANK HAMILTON GUSHING

(1857-1900)

MATILDA COXE STEVENSON

(c.

1850-1915)

J.

WALTER FEWKES
(1850-1930)

WASHINGTON MATTHEWS
(1843-1905)
The

last

outposts of aboriginal

life in

the United States were the tribes

of the Southwestern desert.

The

active resistance of the village Indians

was broken

after the

Pueblo

Rebellion of 1680. This was the best organized of the efforts of Indian

and the only one that was, for a time at least, successful. The was organized by Pope, a Jemez Indian, who sent to all the pueblo villages counting strings of the kind still used by the Zuhi Indians
resistance,

rebellion

to

count the days of ceremonies.

On

the appointed night the Indians rose

and massacred more than 2,000 missionaries and settlers. Two priests, warned by friendly Indians, escaped; the other surviving colonists fled south along the Rio Grande. Pope occupied the Spanish city of Santa Fe, and from there attempted to organize the villages into a confederation. A strong punitive expedition was sent out from Mexico to reconquer the area. In the wars that followed some villages were destroyed, others abandoned. When peace was restored in 1692 the population had declined and it continued to decline for the next 200 years, but the tribal distribution was substantially as it is today. Resistance did not cease, it merely took withdrawal and secrecy and a stubborn unfriendliness, more a new form pronounced along the Rio Grande where contact with whites was closest, and slightly more relaxed among the Hopi and Zuhi in the more inaccessible areas of the western desert. In the pueblo of San Ildefonso, for instance, although the natives were ostensibly converted to Catholicism, attended church and celebrated the Church festivals, the old religious rituals centering on ceremonies for weather control were practiced in secret. The two

large circular kivas in the center of the village, ostensibly the center for

203

204

GUSHING, STEVENSON, FEWKES,

MATTHEWS

most public ceremonies. The really which held the heart of the rituals were performed in small ceremonial rooms hidden in the blocks of houses, and the masked dances were held in secret places in the mountains with sentries posted
native cults, were used only for the
secret ceremonies

along

all trails to

turn back curious travelers.

Even

in the western pueblos,

secrecy was intensified as whites

moved

in in greater

numbers.

The Navaho had a somewhat different fate. A semi-nomadic people depending but slightly on agriculture, they had an old pattern of raiding the village Indians. This was intensified after the Spanish Conquest when the villages had horses and sheep. As game became scarcer, raids became more frequent. When the Southwest passed into the hands of the United States, Kit Carson was given orders to take whatever measures were necessary to suppress the raids. A large number of Navahos were trapped in the Canyon de los Muertos and in western New Mexico and massacred. Their stock was slaughtered and their fields destroyed. After this disaster, the Navahos were persuaded to surrender and turn in their arms. Those who answered the call to surrender were disarmed and marched across the desert to Fort Sumner where they were held in prison encampments for four years. During their confinement thousands died of sicknesses of the body and of the soul. The remnant that survived was given a few sheep
with which to start a

new

life.

Bureau of American Ethnology was organized in 1879, the western pueblos were the first area chosen for study. Powell had visited Zuni on one of his trips of exploration in 1870 and the "marvelous savage and barbaric culture" which he saw there haunted his imagination. At that time. Colonel James Stevenson was collecting pueblo artifacts. On his staff was a young man, Frank Hamilton Cushing, whom Powell persuaded to take on the Zuni investigation. Cushing had spent most of his childhood in western New York State. A frail child, he had no formal schooling and was entirely self-taught. Cut off by ill health from the companionship of his age mates, he learned the secrets of the forest and delighted in the companionship of wild creatures. He collected arrowheads and other Indian artifacts, became interested in geology arui scoured the area for specimens. These activities brought him into contact with a number of well-known scholars who became fascinated by the strange and eager boy. His interest in technology led to his first
the

When

regular job, with the Philadelphia Centennial Exposition.

Cushing

visited

Zuni with Powell

in

1879 and then decided

that the only

way one could

would be
activities,

penetrate the lives of these hostile and secretive people

to live

among them,

learn their language, participate in their

and gradually gain access to their secrets. The following year he joined the Bureau and settled at Zufii, where he remained for five years, leaving only once to take a group of Zuni friends to Washington.

The Bureau of American Ethnology

During these
one of
five

205
life,

years he led a completely Indian

activities.

speaking nothing

but Zuni and participating fully in tribal

their secret

medicine

fraternities,

one of the highest of great perceptiveness and insight, and was

Society),

(War Chief

He was initiated into and later into the Bow Priesthood offices in the tribe. He was a man
in a position to learn the

most

esoteric lore of the tribe.

Cushing's sudden departure from Zuni

is

something of a mystery.

He

never went back, and he never completed the study of Zuni mythology, the first part of which was published in the Thirteenth Annual Report of

Bureau of American Ethnology. He never organized for publication body of material he collected during his residence at Zuni. The collection of masks which he made and which are now in the Brooklyn Museum was never catalogued. Occasionally bits of Cushing's manuscripts turn up, showing with what meticulous care he recorded texts of prayers and other data. But all this irreplaceable wealth of material was lost to anthropology. A series of articles which he wrote for The Millstone, a grain trade journal, is the only description of the ordinary life of the Zuni people, which he was so well equipped to know and understand. After leaving Zuni, Cushing spent two years in archaeological investithe
the vast

gations of the ruins of the Gila River for the

Hemenway

Southwestern

Archaeological Expedition, the

first

systematic excavation in the Southwest.

He was
later

looking for the key to Zuni mysteries in the region where Zuni

tradition placed their original

home, and he discovered the culture which

ill

Hohokam. Cushing left the Southwest in 1888 because of work among the Seminoles of Florida when his
to be

came

known

as

health.

career

He had begun was cut short by

an untimely death.
Cushing was followed in Zuni by Matilda Coxe Stevenson, the widow James Stevenson, who had accompanied her husband on his earlier collecting expeditions. In the beginning, as part of a husband-wife team
of

she had paid especial attention to the activities of women and children, and was, indeed, the first American ethnologist to consider children

worthy of notice. After Colonel Stevenson's death she incorporated his voluminous notes, mostly dealing with ceremonial matters, with her own further observations in a comprehensive study of the Zuni tribe. Less
life and let information was nevertheless an active and industrious field worker and collected a large body of detailed information. She lived in Zuni during the troubled period following the building of the railroad and the opening of the country to white trade and settlement. She deplored the changes that this made in native life and character, but unfortunately her observations are undated and despite her great knowledge it is difficult to organize her reports into a coherent picture of native life. After com-

perceptive than Cushing, less able to enter native

come

to her, she

206
pleting her

GUSHING, STEVENSON, FEWKES,

MATTHEWS
and

Zuhi

studies, she spent several years in the eastern pueblos

published some rather startling but inconclusive papers about their cere-

monial

Hie.

Colonel and Mrs. Stevenson had visited the Hopi pueblos in the
early days, but
it

was

J.

Walter Fewkes

who made

the history

and

eth-

nology of the Hopi a life work. He first came to the Southwest as a member of the Hemenway Expedition. He was by training a zoologist, with a

Ph.D. in Zoology from Harvard, several years of graduate study in Europe and years of museum work at Cambridge. But once he entered the field of Southwestern studies he never left it. He was an indefatigable field worker and a prolific writer. He joined the Bureau of American Ethnology in 1895, and remained there until 1930, becoming Chief in 1918. He
divided his time between ethnology and archaeology, and his aim was to

work out

the relations between the contemporary villages

ruins scattered around the

Hopi country. To

this

and the many end he collected clan

legends and origin myths, accepting them as history, trying to identify the
places mentioned in them.

This attempt at historic reconstruction was

doomed

to failure; the writing of the history of the

Hopi area had

to

await the establishment of time sequences. was interested almost exclusively in ritual.
descriptions of

As an ethnographer, Fewkes He published many detailed

to their significance.

Hopi

rituals,

but

left

no key

Like so many of the great anthropologists of his day, Washington Matthews came into anthropology through a lucky accident. He had been an army surgeon during the Civil War, and at the close of the war he reentered the army and was assigned to various frontier army posts along the upper Missouri. Here he first came in contact with Indians, and began a study of their language. His Hidatsa grammar came to the notice of Powell who, with his gift for collecting talent, suggested that Matthews

remained there from 1880

in Washington.

be transferred to Fort Wingate, in the heart of the Navaho country. He to 1884, and was reassigned for a second period
of four years after several years of service in the

Army Medical Museum

While at Fort Wingate, Matthews devoted all his spare time to the study Navaho language and culture. His early studies, published in reports of the Bureau, dealt with such externals of Navaho life as weaving and silverwork, but gradually he penetrated more deeply into Navaho life and
of

produced

his poetic translations of the great

if

Navaho

chants.

Matthews

wrote poetry himself, and

poetic tradition.

his poetry is not especially distinguished, his

concern with the beauty of language enabled him to do justice to a great He contributed admirably in many fields physical an-

thropology and anthropometry ,

it is

linguistics,

technology and folklore

that set

his beautiful translations of

Navaho poetry

him

apart.

but R.L.B.

FRANK HAMILTON GUSHING

(1857-1900)

The Preparation of the Cornfield

EARLY IN THE MONTH OF THE "LESSER SANDSTORMS" THE SAME ZUNI,

will say,

WE

who preempted,
to

a year since, a distant arroyo-field, goes forth, hoe

clearing, etc. Within the sand which the arroyo enters from

and axe in hand,

above, and cutting
able distance

resume the work of

selects that portion

embankment he now

many

forked cedar branches, drives them firmly into

its

the dry stream-bed, in a line crossing

course, and extending a consider-

boughs, clods, rocks,

of stakes he places form a strong barrier or dry-dam; open, however, at either end. Some rods below this on either side of the streamcourse, he constructs, less carefully, other and longer barriers. Still farther down, he seeks in the "tracks" of some former torrent, a ball of clay, which, having been detached from its native bank, far above, has been roUed and washed, down and down, ever growing rounder and smaller and tougher, until in these lower plains it lies embedded in and baked by the burning sands. This he carefully takes up, breathing reverently from it, and places it on one side of the stream-bed, where it is desirable to have the rain-freshets overflow. He buries it, with a brief supplication, in the soil, and then proceeds to heap over it a solid bank of earth which he extends obliquely across, and to some distance beyond the arroyo. Returning, he continues the embankment past the clay ball either in line of, or at whatever angle with the completed portion seems to his practiced eye most suited to the topography.
either bank. Against this
sticks,

beyond

row

and

earth, so as to

To

those not acquainted with savage ways of thought, this proceeding

will gain interest

from explanation. The national game of the Zuni

is

ti'-kwa-we, or, the race of the kicked stick.

Two

little

cylindrical sticks

of hard

wood

are cut, each the length of the middle finger. These, disVol. VIII, Part 1920), pp. 157-

III

From Gushing, "Zuni breadstuflF," Indian Notes and Monographs, (New York: Museum of the American Indian, Heye Foundation,
from The Millstone (Minneapolis: 1887-1888).

166. Reprinted

207

208

FRANK HAMILTON GUSHING

be run. At

tinguished one from the other by bands of red paint, are laid across the
toes of either leader

and kicked in the direction the race

gets
its

is

to

fuU speed of the runners these sticks are dexterously shoveled up on the
toes,

and kicked on and on. The party which

counted the winning
side.

stick over the goal

first is

This race

is

usually run

by no fewer than

twelve men, six opposed to an equal number.

The

distance ordinarily

accomphshed without
three hours; yet, were
stick,

rest or

even abatement,
is

is

twenty-five miles.

Now,

the time taken in running this race

marvelously short, never exceeding

one of the runners to undertake the race you he could not possibly do it. So imbued with this idea are the Zunis that frequently, when coming in from distant fields, and wishing to make haste, they cut a stick, and kick it on ahead of them, running to catch up with it, and so on. The interesting feature about all this is, that the Indian in this, as in most things else, conto ask

you

without his

he would

flatly tell

founds the cause with the

effect,

thinks the stick helps him, instead of

himself being the sole motive power of the stick.

The lump

of clay before

supposed to be the ti'-kwa of the water gods, fashioned by their invisible hands and pushed along by their resistless feet, not hindering, but adding to the force and speed of the waters. The field-maker

mentioned

is

fancies that the waters,

when

they run

down

this trail again, will

be as

anxious to catch up with their ti'-kwa as he would be. So he takes this

Yet, to

way

of tempting the otherwise tameless (/le thinks) torrents out of their course.

make doubly

sure,

he has thrown a

dam

across their proper pathlittle

way.

On

the outskirts of the field thus planned,

inclosures of

soil,
little-

like earthen bins, are

thrown up wherever the ground slopes how

(pi. ii).

soever from a central point, these inclosures being either irregularly square or in conformity to the lines of the slope

hope has been in so minutely describing these beginnings of a Zuni farm to give a most precious hint to any reader of The Millstone interested in agriculture, or who may possess a field some portions of which are
barren because too dry.

My

We may
hope

smile at the superstitious observances of

to learn

the Indian agriculturist, but

when we come

what he accomplishes,

we

shall

admire and

find occasion to imitate his hereditary in-

genuity. The country of the Zunis is so desert and dry, that times out of number within even the fickle memory of tradition, the possession of water

for drinking

and cooking purposes alone has been counted a blessing. Yet, by his system of earth banking, the Zuni Indian, and a few of his western brothers and pupils, the Moquis, have heretofore been the only human

beings

who

could, without irrigation

its

from

living streams, raise to maturity

a crop of corn within

parched

limits.

The use

of the principal barriers

the terms of the invocation with

completion of
corn-priest
is

all

and embankments may be inferred from which the field is consecrated after the the earthworks. The owner then applies to whatever

keeper of the sacred "medicine" of his clan or order. This

The Preparation
ff

of the Cornfield

209

Dig doHttrSamtT.

[////

t _,SatanatmianlBitmts.

''?^'rC \Ss

f TosUiaa.BfsBoifue.

.,j:r-^^. -vj

Plate

II.

PLAN OF A ZUNI CORNFIELD.

and decorates a little stick of red willow with plumes from the and hips of the eagle, turkey, and duck, and with the tail-feathers from the Maximilian's jay, night-hawk, yellow-finch, and ground-sparrow, fastening them on, one over the other, with cords of fine cotton. From the store of paint which native tradition claims was brought from the original birthplace of the nation (a kind of plumbago), he takes a tiny particle,
priest cuts

legs

it a quantity of black mineral powder. To a sufficient measure of rainwater he adds a drop of ocean water with which he moistens the pigment, and with a brush made by chewing the end of a yucca-leaf, applies the paint to the stick. With the same paint he also decorates a section of cane filled with wild tobacco supposed to have been planted by rain, hence sacred. These two objects, sanctified by his breath, he gives to the applicant. Taking them carefully in his left hand, the latter goes

leavening with

forth to his
all his

new

field.

Seeking a point in the middle of the arroyo below

sits

earthworks, he kneels, or

down on

his blanket, facing east.

He

210

FRANK HAMILTON GUSHING

south, east, the upper

then lights his cane cigarette and blows smoke toward the north, west, and the lower regions. Then holding the smoking

stump and the plumed

stick near his breast,

he says a prayer. From the

it

substance of his prayer which, remarkably curious though

for literal reproduction here,

be,

is

too long

we

learn the important facts relative to his

intentions

and

his faith.

We

find

he believes
'like

that:

He

has infused the

consciousness of his prayer into the plumed stick; that with his sacred
cigarette

he has prepared a way

the trails of the winds and rains'

[clouds] for the wafting of that prayer to the gods of aU regions. That,

having taken the cloud-inspiring

down

of the turkey, the strength-giving

plume
tails

of the eagle, the water-loving feather of the duck, the path-finding

of the birds

who

counsel and guide summer; having moreover severed

flesh of the water-attracting tree,

and brought hither the

tion,

which he has

dipped in the god-denizened ocean, beautified with the very cinders of crea-

he

bound with

strands from the dress of the sky-born goddess of cotton

beseeches the god-priests of earth, sky, and cavern, the beloved

gods whose dwelling places are in the great embracing waters of the world,
not to withhold their mist-laden breaths, but to canopy the earth with

cloud banners, and

shall step

let fly their shafts little

lift

forth the fiery spirits of lightning,

from mountain

to

and mighty of rain, to send up the voice of thunder whose echoes mountain, bidding the mesas shake down
is

streamlets.
soil-laden,

The

streamlets shall yield torrents; the torrents, foam-capped,

shall boil

toward the shrine he

making, drop hither and

thither the soil they are bearing, leap over his barricades

unburdened and

stronger,

and

in place of their lading, bear out

toward the ocean as pay-

ment and

faith-gift the

smoke-cane and the prayer-plume. Thus thinking,

thus beUeving, thus yearning, thus beseeching (in order that the seeds of
earth shall not want food for their growing, that from their growth he

may

not lack food for his

standing in the
trail

living,

means

for his fortune), he this

day

plants,

of the waters, the smoke-cane

The

effect of the

network of barriers

is

and prayer-plume. what the Indian prayed for

(attributes, furthermore, as

much

to his prayer as to his labors), namely,

that with every shower, although the stream go dry three hours afterward,

water has been carried to every portion of the

field,

has deposited a fine

and moistened from one end to the other, the substratum. Not only this, but also, all rainfall on the actual space is retained and absorbed within the system of minor embankments. At the stage of operations above last described, the field is again left for a year, that it may become thoroughly enriched. Meanwhile, during the same month (the first of spring) each planter repairs the banks in his old fields, and proceeds to adopt quite a different method for renewing or
it

loam over

aU,

enriching the

soil.

it

Along the western sides of his as are worn out or barren, he

field, as

well as of such spots throughout

thickly plants

rows of sagebrush, leaving

The Preparation

of the Cornfield
six inches to a foot

211
above the surface. As the prevail-

them standing from

ing winds of the Zuiii plains hail from the southwest, and, as during the

succeeding month (the "Crescent of the greater sand-storms"), these winds

are laden many tens of feet high in the air with fine dust and sand, behind each row of the sagebrush a long, level, deep deposit of soil is drifted. With the coming of the first (and as a rule the only) rainstorm of springtime, the water, carried about by the embankments and retained lower

down by
fixes it

the "earth bins," redistributes this "soil

it

sown by the winds" and

with moisture to the surface

fertilizes his lands, for the

has usurped.

Thus, with the aid of nature's hand, without plow or harrow, the Zuiii
fits

and

planting of Maytime, or the Nameless

month.

MATILDA COXE STEVENSON

(c.

1850-1930)

Zufii Origin

Myth: The Origin of Corn

DAY AFTER DAY [THE A'SHIWI] WERE FOLLOWED BY THOSE failed to come to this world with them, for many, becoming
fallen back.

WHO HAD

tired had Every time the A'shiwi heard a rumbling of the earth (earthquake) they knew that others were coming out. They would say: "My younger brother comes;" or, "Some of my people come." The exodus from

The last observed to come forth were two witches, a man and a wife, who were all-powerful for good or evil. Kow'wituma and Wats'usi, hearing a rumbling of the earth, looked to see who had arrived, and met the two witches, whose heads were covered with loose hoods of coarse fiber blowing in the breeze. Kow'wituma
the underworlds continued four years. ^

inquired of the witches: "Whither are you going?"

to

They replied: "We wish go with your people to the Middle place of the world." Kow'wituma

said:

"We do

not want you with us." The witches, holding seeds in their

closed hands under their arms, said: "If

land.

we do not go we
the Divine
it

will destroy the

We

have

all

seeds here."

When

witches they were not wanted, they declared that

Ones again told the would not be well if

said: "See,

they were not allowed to go, saying:

people."
I

"We

have
I

all

things precious for your

The man, extending

this to the

his closed

hands over the seeds,

wish to give

Kia'kwemosi; and

wish him to give us two of

his children, a

son and a daughter.

When we

have the children the corn

shall

be

his."
kill

"Why do you

wish the children?" asked Kow'wituma.

"We

wish to

the children that the rains

may come."
what they had seen and heard
well."

The Divine Ones hastened

to the Kia'kwemosi,

to repeat
is

who

replied: "It

When

the witches appeared

1 "Of old two days were as four years, and four days as eight years," reference being to time periods. Years throughout this paper will refer to indefinite time periods, unless it is otherwise explained.

From Stevenson, "The Zuni Indians," Twenty-third Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington: Government Printing Office, 1905), pp. 29-32.
212

Zuni Myth: The Origin of Corn

213

before the Kia'kwemosi and claimed two of his children, he said: "I have

no infant children; I have a youth and a maiden; what do you wish to do with them?" "We wish to destroy them that there may be much rain. We have things of great value to you, but we must first have much rain." "It is well," said the Kia'kwemosi; and when the youth and maiden slept the two witches shot their medicine into their hearts by touching the children with their hands, causing their deaths. Their remains were buried in the earth, and the rains fell four days. On the fifth morning a rumbhng noise was heard, and Kow'wituma saw the youth appearing from his grave. Again there were four days of heavy rains, and on the fifth morning after the resurrection of the youth a rumbhng was heard, and Kow'wituma saw the girl coming from the earth. The same night the two witches planted all the seeds in the wet earth, and the following morning the corn was a foot high and the other things were of good size. By evening all was matured and the A'shiwi ate of the new food, but they were not pleased; everything was hot, hke pepper. Then Kow'wituma and Wats'usi called the raven, who came and ate much of the corn and other things. Again the Divine Ones called the owl, who ate the heart of the grain, leaving the remainder on the cob, so that the corn became soft. The Divine Ones then called the coyote to come and eat the com; he ate of everything in the field. The raven, owl, and coyote, by eating of the food, softened and sweetened it so that it became palatable to the A'shiwi. Since that time the fields have had to be watched, for the raven takes the com in the day and the coyote robs the fields at night. At this time the Divine Ones instructed the A'shiwi in fire making and cooking. While the earth was not muddy, it was so soft that the A'shiwi found difliculty in proceeding. Long years were consumed, and many villages were built, and then abandoned, as they pushed on their quest for the Middle of the world. Even when they tarried at the towns which they built they were driven therefrom by the corruption of their dead, and they desired even to escape from the eflQuvium of their own bodies, which was unbearable. "It was hke burning sulphur; it was an odor that killed." Repeated divisions of the people occurred during the years consumed in their migrations, some going to the north, others to the south; thus the Zunis account for many of the ruins north and south of their line of march. Unseen and unknown, the Corn maidens came with the A'shiwi from the undermost world and remained with them until they had been four years at Shi'pololo kwi (Fog place), when they were discovered by the two witches sitting under a ham'pone (out-of-door covered place), a pavilion of pine boughs. The witches inquired: "Who are you?" The maidens replied: "We are the a'towae'washtokii (Corn maidens)." "Where
is your corn?" asked the witches. "We have none." "This is not right. If you are Corn maidens you should have com;" and, handing a yellow ear of corn to one of the maidens, the witches said: "You are the Yellow Corn

214
maiden and a'wankio'wu (great or elder
a blue ear of corn, saying:

MATILDA COXE STEVENSON

sister)."

To

another they handed

"You

are the younger sister, the Blue

Corn

maiden; you two will be the directors or leaders of the others." Handing a red ear of corn to the third one, they said: "You are a younger sister, the

Red Corn maiden." And to the fourth they handed an ear of white corn, saying: "You are a younger sister, the White Corn maiden." And to the fifth they said, as they handed her an ear of multicolored corn: "You are
the Every-colored

Corn maiden and a younger

sister."

And

to the sixth

they handed a black ear of corn, saying:

"You

are the younger sister, the

Black Corn maiden."

corn, saying:

And

to the seventh they

"You

are the younger sister, the Sweet

handed an ear of sweet Corn maiden." And

handed her squash seeds: "You are the And to the ninth they handed watermelon seeds saying: "You are the younger sister, the Watermelon maiden." And to the tenth they handed muskmelon seeds saying: "You are the
to the eighth they said, as they
sister,

younger

the Squash maiden."

younger
corn,

sister,

the

Muskmelon maiden."^
sisters,"

sister said "I will dance with my and she formed her sisters into two lines, facing the east that they might see the coming forth of the Sun Father. They danced all night under a bower walled with ho'mawe (cedar), whose roof was a'wehlwia'we (cumulus clouds) fringed with kia'latsilo (spruce of the west). The witches observed the dance through the night, and in the morning continued their migrations with the A'shiwi, but said not a word to them of the Corn maidens, who remained at Shi'pololo kwi, where

After receiving the corn the elder

and so wiU

my

"they bathed in the

dew

(or mist), but did not drink of

it."

2 The A'shiwi say that the Mexicans brought beans, but that they always had watermelons and muskmelons. Although the Zuiiis make this statement, it is declared by the representatives of the Department of Agriculture that neither the watermelon nor the muskmelon is indigenous to this country.

J.

WALTER FEWKES
(1850-1930)

Hopi Snake Washing

NEW

STUDIES OF HOPI SNAKE DANCES HAVE REVEALED THE FACT THAT

five celebrations of this

no two of the

dance are identical in

details.

Some

of these variations have already been pointed out^ in an account of the

dances at Oraibi and the pueblos of the Middle Mesa, and there are other
differences

which will be considered in an exhaustive account of the Hopi Snake Dance which I have in preparation. One of the most significant variations in the component rites of the Snake Dance ceremonials, in different Hopi pueblos, is the absence of altars in the kivas of the Snake Societies of every pueblo except Walpi.
rites,

This absence has necessarily modified secret

especially that weird

which is celebrated at noon on the ninth day. As the details of Snake washing in a kiva where there is no altar have never been described, and as the Micoiiinovi variant is probably typical of these ceremonials in four pueblos, I have thought it well to put on record a few notes on this rite as observed in 1897.
ceremony, the washing of
reptiles,

The Snake washing at Walpi was first witnessed by me in 1891. Before no one except Indian members of the Snake Society had been allowed to remain in the kiva during this event. The late A. M. Stephen had an intimation of the existence of Snake washing rites, but repeated attempts to remain in the kiva to witness them had been met with a firm
that year

Mr A. M. ways to induce the Snake Chief, Kopeli, to allow us to see the Snake washing. We found Kopeli willing to admit us, but some of the older and more conservative priests strongly objected. It was evident that only one white man could
refusal.

Some

time before the Walpi Snake dance in 1891,

Stephen, Mr. T. V.

Keam, and myself

tried in various

16th Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology.

From Fewkes, "Hopi Snake Washing," American

caster, 1898), pp. 313-319.

Anthropologist,

o.s.

XI (Lan215

216

J.

WALTER FEWKES

be admitted, and there were doubts, up to the opening of the ceremony, whether even that one would be allowed to remain throughout the whole event. The Indians at last decided that I should be permitted to witness
hatch,

and that the late J. G. Owens should serve as tyler at the kiva and see what he could from that place. In 1893, the next performance, both Mr Stephen and myself witnessed the Snake washing at Walpi, and the notes made in these presentations were published in 1894 in the form of a memoir on the Walpi Snake
the
rite,

Dance.2
In 1895, the author was the only white spectator of the Walpi Snake washing, and in 1897 he was accompanied by Professor G. Wharton

James, with
is

whom

he also witnessed the ceremony

at Micohinovi,

which

here described.^

The first event directly connected with the Snake washing at Miconinovi was the entrance of a man with a bag fuU of sand, which he had gathered in the valley. This sand he spread on the floor south of the fireplace, covering a rectangular area, one side of which was bounded by the kiva wall. Seats were arranged on the other three sides for the men who were to
participate in the
It is
rite.

Middle Mesa to keep the captured reptiles in the kiva in four large earthen amphorae or canteens, similar to those in which women carry water from the springs to the pueblos. In preparation for the Snake washing, the reptiles were removed from these receptacles before the songs began. This removal took place very quietly, and while it was taking place several of the men walked about the room, while others prepared their paraphernalia for the public dance, which took place at sundown of the same day. The men in the kiva were naked,, as they generally are in ceremonial work, and their bodies were painted red with an iron oxide. All had a little feather, stained red, in their hair. Some of the more experienced priests smiled at the diflQculty which the novices had in getting the reptiles to emerge from the mouth of the canteen. The occupants of the kiva did not hesitate to speak aloud, which is taboo at Walpi, and their
customary
at the

faces

had not the solemn look

reptiles

characteristic of East

Mesa

priests during

similar rites.

The

snake whip inserted through a hole in the

were driven out of the canteens by being prodded with a side, and as soon as a snake

protruded its head from the mouth of the vessel he was seized by the neck and transferred to a cloth bag. While the reptiles were being removed from the vessels a small boy, about ten years old, began to cry.* His father or
Snake Ceremonials at Walpi. Jour. Amer. Eth. and Arch., vol. iv, pp. 81-87. This preliminary note wUl be supplemented by an account, with illustrations, which will be later published in a report of the Bureau of American Ethnology, under the auspices of which institution these studies were made. 4 One of my informants said the lad was bitten by a snake.
2
3

Hopi Snake Washing

217

some relative comforted the frightened lad, but there were a few harsh words of disapproval from other men present. Finally, at about noon, after patient waiting on our part, the Snake priests took their seats around the sanded floor, sitting so closely together that their naked bodies touched each other, forming a human corral. The Snake chief seated himself about the middle of the line of men on the longest side of the sanded area, and one or two older men, with rattles, took places at either side. The remainder of the Snake men sat around the sand closely crowded together, holding their snake whips, with which
to beat time to the songs.

After

all

the priests were seated, except a few in charge of the

bag of

snakes and two or three lads

who

stood in the middle of the kiva back of

the line of seated men, the Snake chief

made symbols

of sacred

meal on

a hillock of sand before him.

earthen wash-bowl, such as
liquid into this

Upon

this hillock

he then deposited a large

is used in bathing the head, and then poured bowl from the north, west, south, and east sides, following a sinistral ceremonial circuit. Pinches of sacred meal were then dropped into the liquid, first on the north side, then on the west, south, and east, adding two more, one for the above and another for the below. The chief then took from his mouth a fragment of chewed root and dropped it also into the bowl. All remained silent during these acts, and soon a lighted pipe was passed from one to another of the priests, beginning with the chief, who puffed great clouds of tobacco smoke into the liquid and to the

cardinal points in the prescribed circuit.

Individual prayers followed the ceremonial smoke. These began with the

Snake

chief,

and were taken up

in turn

by the other members of the

society.

The

prayers were immediately followed by songs, accompanied by the

rhythm and while these songs were sung the reptiles were men held their snake whips erect, on a level with the shoulder, keeping time to the rhythm of the songs. Soon after the priests began to sing I noticed that the men with the bag of reptiles handed the snakes to the chief and his neighbors, and that they plunged the reptiles into the bowl before them, later depositing the snakes on the sand covering the floor. While this transpired the singers kept on with their songs, and other snakes were handed to the chief, who plunged them into the liquid and placed them on the sand. The floor enclosed by the row of sitting priests was soon covered with a mass of writhing reptiles, the rapidly moving species darting from one end to the other of the sanded area, the rattlers, which move in a more deliberate way, extending themselves at length or coiling for defense. Several of the whip snakes, crawling between the legs of the seated priests, escaped to the floor of the kiva, but were dextrously picked up and returned to the enclosure. Three or four snakes climbed up the side of the kiva waU and wound their bodies into a small niche, from which their heads protruded as if spectators
rattles to secure

washed. The Snake

218
of the curious ceremony.

J.

WALTER FEWKES

When

the snakes huddled too closely together

one of the

priests separated

them, using the end of his snake whip as a

the priests

kind of pitchfork.

The songs closed with prayer and ceremonial smoke, and

tiles

returned to the preparation of their dance paraphernalia, leaving the rep-

where they were herded by one or two of their number. into the kiva after the washing to see this mass of the sand, and Professor James obtained a good photograph of reptiles on the snakes on the floor, a printed copy of which has been widely dis-

on the

floor,

Several white

men came

tributed.

Subsequent

rites

with these snakes belong to another chapter in

descriptions of the Snake

It

Dance and do not now concern

us.
is

has been suggested that the liquid in which the reptiles are bathed

a stupefying

compound into which they are introduced in order to render them more tractable when carried on the plaza a few hours after. I find no

good evidence that such is the object of the washing, nor do I believe that any means are adopted to stupefy them. The statement that the snakes are "washed repeatedly in various kinds of medicine water and are frequently handled or stroked with a downward squeezing movement of the hand" has not been verified by me. They are

washed but once, and

tion implies.

have never seen them stroked, as the above quotais,

No

"course of treatment"

so far as I know, adopted in

the kiva

by the Snake

priests to render the rattlesnake innocuous.

Some
I

of the larger rattlesnakes have been held

up

for

my

examination, and

have been invited to take them in

not accepted, and the Indian
size,

my own

hands, which invitation was

who

held them may, in commenting on their

have stroked the body, but no systematic treatment by stroking or

simply a purification
the

squeezing has been observed.

The Snake washing

washing of the
priests

is

rite,

analogous to the head

to stupefy

on

same day, rather than treatment

or otherwise render the snakes harmless in subsequent handling.

The treatment of the reptiles, venomous or otherwise, during the Snake ceremonials and the way they are addressed at capture justifies the belief that they are regarded as kin or members of the same family or clan as the priests. The
legends of the society distinctly state that the children of the Snake

woman

became reptiles, and this same ancestress is regarded as the parent of the Snake family, out of which the Snake society has grown. In totemism,
which
this
is

the key-note of the Snake ceremony,

we

find the explanation of

fancied kinship, for both

human and

reptilian beings are

supposed to

have a
It is

common

ancestress, with characters of each.

this line of thought, that

but natural, foUowing

are brought into the pueblo to participate with their

when the reptiles human kindred in

priests,

the great family ceremony their heads,

no

less

than those of the

should be bathed as a preparation for the dance in which they participate.

Hopi Snake Washing

219

Early in the day the heads of novices are washed as a necessary preparation for the dance.

Snake tradition which refers to the snake washing is ceremony and for three succeeding evenings low clouds trailed over Tokonabi, and Snake people from the underworld came from them and went into the kivas and ate only corn pollen for food, and on leaving were not seen again. Each of four evenings brought a new group of Snake people, and on the following morning they were found in the valleys metamorphosed into reptiles of all kinds."^ On the ninth morning the TcUamana (Snake maidens) said: "We understand this. Let the younger brothers [the Snake Society] go out and bring them all in and wash their heads, and let them dance with you." Again, when the Snake maid gave birth to reptiles "their heads were washed, and they were dried in sand heaps on the floor, and their mothers sat beside
of the
as follows
:

The portion

"On

the fifth evening of the

them."

have perpetuated their ancient

one of many ceremonial acts by which the Hopi beliefs. Another way of preserving these beliefs is by means of the myth or legend, which is transmitted by word of mouth from one generation to another.

The Snake washing

is

of that at Oraibi, Cipaulovi, and Cuiiopavi,

and the same may probably be said is a tame affair as compared with that at Walpi, which has always seemed to me the most fearless episode of the Snake Dance. When the snakes are removed from the jars, at the last pueblo, the Snake men fearlessly plunge their hands into receptacles filled with reptiles, any one of which might strike them. This is done in a dimly lighted room, at a time when there is great excitement, with men yelling at the top of their voices. How the Snake men escape the poisonous fangs of the rattlesnakes is a wonder to me, and yet, although I have witnessed the Walpi Snake washing four times, I have never seen one of the

The Snake washing

at Micoiiinovi,

men

bitten.

The snakes

are carefully taken out of the receptacles at Micoiii-

novi before the

altar,

rites begin.

They

are not thrown across the

room on an

but are simply thrust into a bowl of liquid and placed on sand to dry.
simplicity of the

that at

compared with and snake tiponi at the former pueblo. The fact that the rite is simpler in this and three other pueblos may indicate that the ancient rite was less complicated

The

Snake washing

at Micoiiinovi as

Walpi

is

probably due to the absence of a snake

altar

than that

now observed

at

Walpi.

On

the other hand,

it is

possible that the

simplicity of the

Snake washing

at the three

pueblos of the Middle

Mesa

and Oraibi is due to the fact that the cult as there observed is an offshoot from a more complex form. A third possible explanation, that the simple celebrations are survivals, due to syncopation, of more complicated rites, has less to commend it, for it seems hardly probable that they once had snake altars and tiponis which in course of time were lost.
5 Jour.

Amer. Eth. and Arch.,

vol.

ii,

p.

116.

WASHINGTON MATTHEWS
(1843-1905)

The Night Chant:

Navaho Ceremony

IN

night,

ORDER TO GIVE A CLEAR UNDERSTANDING OF THE WORK OF THE LAST it will be necessary to repeat some statements already made. The medicine-lodge, as has been said, was built before the ceremony

began and we have noted that, at different times, other preparations were made; that the ground in front of the lodge was cleared and levelled for the dancers; that an enclosure of evergreen branches and saplings, which we caU the arbor or greenroom, was constructed about one hundred paces east of the lodge; that the ground between the greenroom and the dancingplace was cleared of brush, weeds, and other obstructions in order that the dancers might pass easUy back and forth in the dark, and that great piles of dried wood were placed at the edges of the dance-ground, north and south, to serve for fuel and as seats for the spectators. Four great fires are kindled on each side of the dance-ground at nightfall, and other fires may be made later in the same locality. The arrangements, when all is ready for the ceremonies of the last night, may be best understood by
referring to figure 15.

C
"a
"a

*a

Fig. 15.

a, fires; b, piles

DIAGRAM OF DANCING-GROUND. of wood; c, c, dancing ground.

of the

ican

From Matthews, "The Night Chant, a Navaho Ceremony," Memoirs Museum of Natural History, Vol. VI (Publication of the Hyde Expedition), (New York: 1902), pp. 14-0-145.
220

Amer-

Southwestern

The Night Chant:

A Navaho Ceremony

221

The

characters paint themselves in the medicine-lodge, simultaneously,

The right hand is the part first painted; then they whiten from above downward. While they paint, a song called Atsa'/ei YeJaJigle^ is sung vidthout accompaniment of drum or rattle. The following is offered as an approximate, free translation of this song:
facing the east.

Now

the holy one paints his form. the holy one, paints his form,

The Wind Boy,

All over his body, he paints his form,

With the dark cloud he paints his form, With the misty rain he paints his form. With the rainy bubbles he paints his form,

To To To

the ends of his toes he paints his form.

fingers

the

and rattle he paints his form. plume on his head he paints his form.
is

After the painting

done, they dress, with assistance, while another

is sung. The masks and rattles which were painted and decorated during the day, the wands of spruce which were prepared, and the fox-skins are carried out, after dark, and laid in a row in the north of the greenroom. When the characters are ready, in the lodge, they go out blanketed to the greenroom to assume their masks. The pubUc performance of the night begins with the ceremony of the Atsa'/ei or First Dancers, and this is usually conducted in the manner to

song, which has not been recorded,

be

now

described.
consist of four

The performers
HdiSisiydXti, the

yebaka or ordinary male

divinities

and

Talking

God

or Yebitsai. Besides these, the chanter and

the patient appear

in the

on the scene. The yebaka, Hke those who appear later dance of the naak/zai, are nearly naked, their bodies heavily coated

with a mixture of white earth and water. Each wears moccasins, long blue

Navaho make, a short kilt or loin-cloth of red baize, crimson some showy material, a silver-studded belt from which the skin of a kit-fox hangs at the back, numerous rich necklaces borrowed from friends for the occasion, and the blue, plumed mask of the yebaka with
stockings of
silk,

or

its

attached coUar of spruce twigs. Large plumes are attached to the stock-

ings

and smaU feathers to the

fibres,

wrists.

Each

carries, in his left

hand, a

wand

of spruce twigs, attached for security to his mask,

by means of a

string of

yucca

Hasti'eyahi,

hand a gourd rattle. The fifth character is mask of that god, with a coUar of spruce. In one hand he carries a fawnskin bag. Unhke his four companions, he is comfortably clothed in some form of Navaho dress. Each one of the four yebaka represents a different character. The first is a chief, genius, or god of corn; the second is a chief of the child-rain; the third is a chief of all kinds of plants, of vegetation, and the fourth is a chief of pollen. Such is the order of their precedence in the dance, and
and
in his right

who wears

the peculiar

222
in this order they are

WASHINGTON MATTHEWS
mentioned in the songs. Besides being chiefs of these

four things, they are spoken of as thunder-birds and as having the colors
of the four cardinal points.

Hastseyaki masks and dresses himself completely in the lodge. Usually

about 8 P.M. they

all

leave the lodge together. Hastseyald

whoops
their

as they

come out and then

clears the dance-ground, motioning intruders away,

while the four others precede

him

to the

greenroom to don

masks.

Before putting on their masks they chew spruce leaves, bitten

off their

and leaves into the masks in the belief that this act They often have to stretch and pull their masks, finding difficulty in making them fit at first. When they are all ready, they leave the green-room for the danceground in the following order: the chanter, Hastseyald, the four Atsa'/ei
wands, and
spit juice

helps the masks to go on.

in the order of their precedence.

When

they

start,

the chanter, uttering the

benediction, "Hozoles kofe 5its6we," scatters pollen

the west along the

file,

way

they are to follow.

rattles

on the ground, toward They move very quietly, in single

in a

softly

shaking their

and singing

stop

on the way

to readjust their masks.

They

low tone. Sometimes they enter softly and stealthily

on

to the dance-ground.

As
hata.li

they enter the ground a watcher at the door of the lodge cries, "Bike
/zaku,"

and the patient emerges from the lodge bearing meal

in a

sacred basket, and, on top of the meal, sometimes four kethawns. While
the priest says a prayer over the meal, the four yebaka keep

up a constant

motion of the feet

described.

somewhat The following diagram

similar to that of the dance to be presently

(fig.

16) shows the position of the whole

party at this time:

Fig. 16.
a,

DIAGRAM OF THE DANCE OF THE ATSA'lEI. shaman; b, patient; c, Yebitsai; d, d, dancers.

The Night Chant:

A Navaho
if

Ceremony

223

After this prayer, the patient, prompted and assisted by the chanter
(or the chanter,
Atsa'/ei in turn,

the patient

is

a child), advances to each of the

and sprinkles meal on him thus: He picks up a large pinch between the thumb and two fingers, allows the substance to fall on the right hand of the subject, up the right arm, over the top of the forehead, and down the left arm; he drops what remains into the palm of the left hand. Immediately after, he may deposit a sacrificial cigarette in the left hand. Four cigarettes thus given form a set which is sometimes made and sacrificed on the fourth day, and sometimes, according to rules and theories not ascertained, on the last night. When reserved for the last night they are thus given to the Atsa'/ei. In applying the meal the patient carries
the basket

on the

left

arm.
is

When

the

application

finished,

patient
east,

and shaman resume and the

their

former position in the west, facing the

sentence, in the usual manner.

priest prays a long

prayer to each god, which the patient repeats after him, sentence by

The four prayers

are aUke in aU respects,

I

except in the mention of certain attributes of the gods.

translated

have collected and

one of these prayers and have given

text, interlinear translation

and
bird

free translation in

"Navaho Legends." To make

is

clearer the descrip-

tion of the rite, I here repeat the free translation of the prayer to the dark

who

is

the chief of pollen. While the prayer

being said, the dancers

left

keep up a constant motion, bending and straightening the

swaying the head from side to
In In In In In In
Tse'gihi,

knee and

side.

the house
the house

the house
the house the house

In the house In the house In the house

made made made made made made made made

of the dawn, of the evening twilight, of the dark cloud,

of the he-rain, of the dark mist,

of the she-rain, of pollen, of grasshoppers.

Where the dark mist curtains the doorway, The path to which is on the rainbow. Where the zigzag lightning stands high on top. Where the he-rain stands high on top,
Oh, male divinity! With your moccasins of dark cloud, come to us. With your leggings of dark cloud, come to us. With your shirt of dark cloud, come to us. With your head-dress of dark cloud, come to us. With your mind enveloped in dark cloud, come to us. With the dark thxmder above you, come to us soaring. With the shapen cloud at your feet, come to us soaring. With the far darkness made of the dark cloud over your head, come
soaring.

to us

224

WASfflNGTON MATTHEWS

With the far darkness made of the he-rain over your head, come to us soaring.

With the

far darkness

made

of the dark mist over your head,

come come

to us

soaring.

With the

far darkness

made

of the she-rain

over your

head,

to

us

soaring.

With the zigzag lightning flung out on high over your head, come
soaring.

to us

With the rainbow hanging high over your head, come to us soaring. With the far darkness made of the dark cloud on the ends of your wings,

come
With the

to us soaring.
far darkness far darkness far darkness

made made

of the he-rain

on

the

ends

of

your

wings,

come
With the

to us soaring.

of the dark mist on the ends of your wings,

the she-rain

come
With the

to us soaring.

made of

on the ends of your wings,

come

to us soaring.

With the zigzag

lightning

flung out

on high on the ends of your wings,

to

come

to us soaring.

With the rainbow hanging high on the ends of your wings, come
soaring.

us

With the near darkness made of the dark cloud, of the he-rain, of the dark mist and of the she-rain, come to us. With the darkness on the earth, come to us. With these I wish the foam floating on the flowing water over the roots of the great com. I have made your sacrifice. I have prepared a smoke for you. My feet restore for me.

restore for me. voice restore for me. To-day, take out your spell for me. To-day, take away your spell for me.

My My My My

limbs restore for me.

body mind

restore for me.

Away from me you Far off from me it

have taken
is

it.

taken.

Far off you have done it. Happily I recover. Happily my interior becomes cool. Happily my eyes regain their power. Happily my head becomes cool. Happily my limbs regain their power. Happily I hear again. Happily for me (the spell) is taken off. Happily I walk (or, may I walk).
walk. walk. With lively feelings, I walk. Happily (or in beauty) abundant dark clouds I desire. Happily abundant dark mists I desire. Happily abundant passing showers I desire.
I

Impervious to pain,

Feeling light within,

The Night Chant:

A Navaho Ceremony

225

Happily an abundance of vegetation I desire. Happily an abundance of pollen I desire. Happily abundant dew I desire. Happily may fair white corn, to the ends of the earth, come with you. Happily may fair yellow corn, to the ends of the earth, come with you. Happily may fair blue corn, to the ends of the earth, come with you. Happily may fair com of all kinds, to the ends of the earth, come with you. Happily may fair plants of all kinds, to the ends of the earth, come with
you.

Happily
you. Happily, you.

may may

fair

goods of

all

kinds, to the ends of the earth,

come with

fair jewels of all kinds,

to the ends of the earth,

come with

With With With With With Thus

these before you, happily these these these

these behind you, happily

may they come with you. may they come with you. below you, happily may they come with you. above you, happily may they come with you. all around you, happily may they come with you. men will regard you. women will regard you. young men will regard you. young women will regard you.

happily you accomplish your tasks.

the old the
the old

the chiefs will regard you. Happily, as they scatter in different directions, they will regard you. Happily, as they approach their homes, they will regard you. Happily may their roads home be on the trail of pollen (peace). Happily may they all get back. In beauty (happily) I walk. With beauty before me, I walk. With beauty behind me, I walk. With beauty below me, I walk. With beauty above me, I walk. With beauty all around me, I walk. It is finished (again) in beauty, It is finished in beauty. It is finished in beauty, It is finished in beauty.

Happily Happily Happily Happily Happily Happily Happily Happily

the the boys will regard you. the girls will regard you. the children will regard you.

When

these prayers are ended, the patient, followed

by the chanter,

passes eastward,

down

the north side of the line and back again.

As

they

pass east, the former scatters meal

up

the right

arm

of each dancer from

hand

to shoulder,

and the

latter scatters pollen in

a similar manner.

When
it

they return to the west, the patient lays

down
sits

his basket

and

sits

beside

near the door of the lodge. The chanter

face east, looking at
attentive, waiting for the sacred song.

Both the dancers. All the spectators now become silent and
to the left of the patient.

226
Hasts6ya\ti,

WASHINGTON MATTHEWS

who
who

has been standing north of the line of dancers, facing

to the east

south, rushes

whooping
are

and holds up

his

bag as a

signal to the

four Atsa'/ei,

now

facing the west. Immediately the Atsa'/ei ad-

left foot, bend bodies to the right, whoop, shake their rattles, them with a long sweep of the arm as if dipping water and bring them up close to their mouths. They almost touch the ground in doing this. Hastseya/ti rushes to the west and repeats his acts, while the dancers face east and repeat their acts. They face west again, always turning sunwise.

vance the
dip

After a brief pause in the west, Hastseyald stamps twice, violently,

with his right foot as a signal; whereat the Atsa'/ei begin a peculiar dancing step in which the right foot, held horizontally,
is

lifted

from the

ground. This
ing foot,

while, the right forearm

Meanmoves up and down, in time with the correspondand shakes the rattle. The left arm hangs inactive. This step is
considered marking time rather than dancing.

may be

taken four times in silence before the song begins and continues through
the song.

At

certain parts of each stanza the singers face the east

and

at

other parts they face the west again; thus there are eight changes of direction during the song.

They poise themselves on

wheel around.
although
it

the toes of the left foot

before they turn and slowly shake their rattles at a distance, laterally,

from

their bodies, as they

The song sung on

less syllables,
is,

this occasion,

consists mostly of

meaning-

perhaps, the most important of the whole ceremony.

The

singers are drilled long

to sing in public. It
is

and thoroughly
if

in private before they are allowed

is

said that,

a single syllable

omitted or misplaced,
is

ceremony terminates at once; all the preceding work of nine days considered valueless and the participators and spectators may return, once, to their homes.
the

at

Collaboration with Indian

Anthropologists

ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER

(1838-1923)

FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
(1857-1932)

two scholars is one of those rare collaborations striking by the difference in age, sex and race. Alice Fletcher, a white woman from a New England family, and Francis La Flesche, an Omaha Indian, twenty years her junior, regarded each other as adopted mother and son. Their formal collaboration extended over a quarter of a century and resulted in the production of the monumental volume, The Omaha Tribe (27th Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology). Although this is the only publication that bears both names, their spiritual companionship extends far beyond the single volume. Alice Fletcher's first interest was in Indian music and she spent several years among the Omaha, recording their songs by notation. In those days there were no phonographs and no tape recorders. Because of her knowledge of the Omaha people she was sent in 1883 to supervise the distribution of reservation lands under the allotment system. She was sent later to the Winnebago and the Nez Perce on a similar mission, and on the basis of her experience formulated rules for use with other tribes. She also wrote a treatise on Indian education in response to a Senate resolution. She
relationship of these

The

of scholarship,

made more

would, therefore, qualify as America's

first

applied anthropologist.

These good works absorbed her time for many years and took her away from her primary interest. A Thaw fellowship from the Peabody Museum
of

Harvard University enabled her

to return to her

Omaha

studies. This

time she had the help of Francis

La

Flesche.

In 1901 she heard that the "Pipe Ceremony," extinct among the Omaha and now only rarely performed elsewhere, was to be performed by the Pawnee. Through the good offices of La Flesche, she was able to make arrangements to see it, and brought back to Washington with her James Murie, one of the ceremonial leaders, with whom she recorded the com-

in

228
plete ceremony, including the
in his travels,

FLETCHER, LA FLESCHE
music of the hundreds of songs. Marquette,

saw a part of the "dance performed in honor of the Calumet or tobacco pipe," and was much impressed by it. Later writers referred to the "Pipe Dance" of the tribes of the Southern Plains, but no description of it or suggestion of its significance was available. Fletcher's description of this beautiful ceremony, in which the most sacred possessions of the tribe, the feathered pipestems, are borne in procession to

another tribe in celebration of the procreative forces of the universe,

excellent descriptions, such as Matthews' Night Chant,

still

stands as the only complete description of a major Indian ceremony. Other

do not contain

the

music of the songs.

La Flesche grew up among the Omaha while the buffalo still and remembered war parties though he had not participated in them. He was educated at a Presbyterian mission college. On a visit to Washing<ton as a member of a delegation of Indians he met the Secretary of the Interior, who persuaded him to join the Bureau of Indian Affairs. Here he began his fruitful collaboration with Alice Fletcher. After the completion of the Omaha volume he was transferred to the Bureau of American Ethnology and worked on the Osage, a closely related tribe.
Francis
ran,

Fletcher and

La

Flesche have provided us with most of what

we know

complex social structure and elaborate ceremonialism, standing geographically and culturally midway between the pueblos and the tribes of the Mississippi. And so another link in North American culture history was forged. R.L.B.
of the aboriginal cultures of the Southern Plains with their

ALICE

CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER
(1838-1923)

and

FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
(1857-1932)

The Omaha Tribe: Ceremonies for Children

INTRODUCTION OF THE OMAHA CHILD TO THE COSMOS

WHEN A
universe,
it

CHILD WAS BORN

IT

WAS NOT REGARDED

AS A

MEMBER OF

ITS

gens or of the tribe but simply as a living being coming forth into the

whose advent must be ceremonially announced

in order to assure

an accepted place among the already existing forms. This ceremonial

announcement took the form of an expression of the

oneness of the universe through the bond of a

Omaha belief in the common Ufe-power that

pervaded

all

things in nature animate

and inanimate.
lost

This ceremony of introduction took place on the eighth day after birth.
Unfortunately the
the
full details of the

ceremony have been

it.

through the

death of the priests

who had

charge of

The

hereditary right to perform

ceremony belonged to the Washe'to subgens of the I"shta'5uda gens. the appointed day the priest was sent for. When he arrived he took his place at the door of the tent in which the child lay and raising his right hand to the sky, palm outward, he intoned the following in a loud, ringing

On

voice:

Ho! Ye Sun, Moon, Stars, I bid you hear me!

all

ye that

move

in the heavens,

From Fletcher and La Flesche, "The Omaha Tribe," Twenty-seventh Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington: Government Printing Office, 1911).
229


230
ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER AND FRANCIS LA FLESCHE

Into your midst has

come a new
it

life.

Consent

ye, I implore!

Make

its

path smooth, that

may

reach the brow of the

that

first hill!

Ho! Ye Winds, Clouds, Rain, Mist, aU ye I bid you hear me!

Into your midst has

move

in the air,

come a new
it

life.

Consent ye, I implore! Make its path smooth, that

may

reach the brow of the second

all

hill!

Ho! Ye
I

Hills, Valleys, Rivers,

Lakes, Trees, Grasses,

ye of the earth,

bid you hear me!

Into your midst has

come a new

life.

Consent ye, I implore! Make its path smooth, that it may reach the brow of the third hill! Ho! Ye Birds, great and small, that fly in the air. Ho! Ye Animals, great and small, that dwell in the forest. Ho! Ye insects that creep among the grasses and burrow in the ground I bid you hear me! Into your midst has come a new life. Consent ye, I implore!

Make

its

path smooth, that

it

may

reach the brow of the fourth

air, all

hill!

Ho! All ye of the heavens, all ye of the I bid you all to hear me!
Into your midst has

ye of the earth:

come a new

life.

Consent ye, consent ye all, Make its path smooth then

implore!
it

shall

travel

beyond the four

hiUs!

powers of the heavens, the from birth to old age. In it the life of the infant is pictured as about to travel a rugged road stretching over four hills, marking the stages of infancy, youth, manhood, and
a
supplication
to

This ritual was

the

air,

and the earth

for the safety of the child

old age.

The ceremony which finds oral expression in this ritual voices in no uncertain manner the Omaha belief in man's relation to the visible powers of the heavens and in the interdependence of all forms of life. The appeal bears evidence of its antiquity, breathing of a time antedating established rites and ceremonies. It expresses the emotions of the human
soul,

touched with the love of offspring, alone with the might of nature,

and companioned only by the living creatures whose friendliness must be sought if life is to be secure on its journey. Among the Omaha no further ceremony took place in reference to the child in its relation to the cosmos, to its gens, or to the tribe, until it was able to walk. When the period arrived at which the child could walk
.
.
.


The Omaha Tribe: Ceremonies
steadily

for Children
it

231 must be introduced into

by

itself,

the tribe. This

the time was at hand when was done ceremonially.

INTRODUCTION OF THE CHILD INTO THE TRIBE

CEREMONY OF TURNING THE CHILD
. . .

All children, both boys and

is

girls,

passed through

this

ceremony,

which

a survival of that class of ceremonies belonging to the lowest,

rites; it is directly related to
fire.

or oldest, stratum of tribal

the wind, the earth,

the cosmic forces

and the

Through

this

ceremony aU the children

who had reached the period when they could move about unaided, could direct their own steps, were symbolically "sent into the midst of the winds"

that element essential to

stone

emblem

life

of long hfe

and health; their upon the earth and

feet

were

of the

set upon the wisdom derived

from age; while the "flames," typical of the life-giving power, were invoked to give their aid toward insuring the capacity for a long, fruitful, and successful hfe within the tribe. Through this ceremony the child passed out of that stage in its hfe wherein it was hardly distinguished from
all other hving forms into its place as distinctively a human being, a member of its birth gens, and through this to a recognized place in the tribe. As it went forth its baby name was thrown away, its feet were clad in new moccasins made after the manner of the tribe, and its ni'kie name

was proclaimed

to all nature

and

to the

assembled people.

The significance of the new moccasins put on the child wiU appear more clearly by the Ught of the following custom, still observed in families
in

which

all

the old traditions of the tribe are conserved:

little

When

moccasins
is

are

made

for a

baby, a small hole

is

cut in the sole of one. This

spirit

done

in order that "if a

messenger from the

world should come and

say to the child,

go on a journey
in the

my moccasins
A
the relatives

T have come

for you,' the child could answer, 'I can not similar custom obtains are worn out!' "

moccasins made for one they examine the moccasins, and, seeing the hole, they say: "Why, he (or she) has worn out his moccasins; he has traveled over the earth!" This is an indirect prayer that the child may live long. The new (whole) moccasins put on the child at the close of the ceremony of introducing it into the tribe constitute an assurance that it is prepared for the journey of life and

Oto

tribe.

Uttle hole is cut in the first pair of

a child.

When

come

to see the

little

that the journey will be a long one.

The ceremony

of Turning the

Child took place in the springtime,

after the first thunders

had been heard.

When

the grass

was weU up and

the birds were singing, "particularly the

meadow

lark," the tribal herald

tent was set proclaimed that the time for these ceremonies had come. up for the purpose, made sacred, and the keeper of these rites, who

belonged to the Washe'to subgens of the I"shta'u"da gens, made himself

232

ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER AND FRANCIS LA FLESCHE

tent.

ready and entered the

httle

arrived at the proper age, that

Meanwhile the parents whose children had is, could walk steadily unassisted, took their
large fees were given to the priest

ones and proceeded to the Sacred Tent. The only requisite for the

child

was a pair of new moccasins, but

for his services.

Only parts of the ritual belonging to this ceremony have been obtained. Those whose prerogative it was to conduct the rites are all dead, and with them knowledge of much of the ceremony passed away. The preservation of the fragments here given came about thus: An old and trusted friend of Joseph La Flesche, a former principal chief of the tribe, was greatly interested when a boy, in the tribal rites. One of his near kinsmen was a priest of this rite. When the Sacred Tent was set up this boy more than once succeeded in secreting himself behind packs within and from his hiding place was able to observe what took place. Having a retentive memory and a quick ear for song, he was able to learn and remember the six songs here given. Subsequent inquiries have added somewhat to the knowledge secured from this informant, although, so far as the writers have been able to ascertain, no one seems ever to have obtained quite so close an inside view of the entire ceremony as this inquisitive boy. Of coiu-se no one who had passed through the ceremony could accurately remember it, as the child was generally only 3 or 4 years of age at the time it had a part in the rite. The tent was always a large one, set facing the east, and open at the
entrance, so that the bystanders,
see something of
tribal interest,

who

kept at a respectful distance, could

what was going on

within.

As

the ceremony

was one of

many

flocked to the Sacred Tent to watch the proceedings.

In the center was a fire. On the east of the fire was placed a stone. There was also a ball of grass, placed at the west of the fire-place near its edge. It was the mother who led the child to the tent. At the door she paused, and addressed the priest within, saying: "Venerable man! I desire my child to wear moccasins." Then she dropped the hand of the child, and the little one, carrying his new moccasins, entered the tent alone. He was met by the priest, who advanced to the door to receive the gifts brought by the mother as fees. Here she again addressed him, saying: "I desire my child to walk long upon the earth; I desire him to be content with the hght of many days. We seek your protection; we hold to you for strength." The
priest rephed, addressing the child:

"You

shall reach the fourth hiU sighing;

you

have wrinkles; your staff shall bend under your weight. I speak to you that you may be strong." Laying his hand on the shoulder of the child, he added: "What you have brought me shall not be lost to you; you shall live long and enjoy many possessions; your eyes shall be satisfied with many good things." Then, moving with the child toward the fireplace in the center of the lodge, and speaking in the capacity of the Thunder, whose priest he was, he uttered these words:
shall shall

be bowed over; you

The Omaha
"I

Tribe: Ceremonies for Children

233
over you." Then he began
.

am

a powerful being; I breathe from

my

lips

to sing the Invocation addressed to the

Winds:

Ye

four,

come

hither

and stand, near

this place

shall

ye stand

In four groups shall ye stand

Here

shall

ye stand, in

stand
rolls)
east,

(The Thunder
... At the close of
lifting it

this ritual
its

song the priest faces the child to the

left

by the shoulders;

feet are allowed to rest

then turns the child completely around, from

the child should struggle or

to

upon the stone. He right. If by any chance

left

move

so as to turn from right to

the on-

up a cry of alarm. It was considered very disastrous to turn ever so little in the wrong way, so the priest was most careful to prevent any accident. When the child had been turned, its feet rested on the stone as it faced the south. The priest then lifted it by the arms, turned it, and set its feet on the stone as it faced the west; then he again lifted the child, turned it, and set its feet on the stone as it faced the north. Lastly the child was hfted to its feet and placed on the stone as it again faced the east. During this action the following ritual song was sung:
lookers set
. .

Turned by the winds goes the one I send yonder; Yonder he goes who is whirled by the winds;
Goes, where the four hiUs of
life

and the four winds are standing;

I

There, in the midst of the winds do

send him.
rolls)

Into the midst of the winds, standing there.

(The Thunder

The winds invoked by

child,

the priest stand in four groups, and receive the

which

is

whirled by them, and by them enabled "to face in every

come and strengthen him as hereafter he shall traverse the earth and meet the vicissitudes he must encounter as he passes over the four hills and completes the circuit of a long life. It was believed that this ceremony exercised a marked influence on the child, and enabled it to grow in strength and in the ability
direction." This action symbolizes that the winds will
to practise self-control.

The
on
Ufe

priest

now

put the

following ritual song was sung.

its feet,

new moccasins on the Toward its close

feet of the child, as the

the child
its

was

hfted, set

and made

to take four steps typical of

entrance into a long

Here unto you has been spoken the truth; Because of this truth you shaU stand.
Here, declared
is

the truth.

Here

in this place has

been shown you the

its

truth.

Therefore, arise! go forth in

strength!

(The Thunder roUs)

234

ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER AND FRANCIS LA FLESCHE

ni'kie

The
and

cried aloud:

name of the child was now announced, after which the "Ye hiUs, ye grass, ye trees, ye creeping things both
you hear! This
child has

priest

great

small, I bid

thrown away

its

baby name. Ho!"

(a call to take notice).

The priest next instructed the child as to the tabu it must observe, and what would be the penalty for disobedience. If the child was a girl, she now passed out of the tent and rejoined her mother. Up to this point the ceremony of introducing the child into the tribe was the same for male and female; but in the case of boys there was a supplemental rite which pertained to them as future warriors.
CONSECRATION OF THE BOY TO THUNDER
This ceremony was called We'bashna, meaning "to cut the hair." Ac-

cording to traditions, this specialized ceremony belonged to the period in

the growth of the political development of the tribe

when

efforts

were being

made

to hold the tribe more firmly together by checking the independence

of the warriors and placing

in the placing of the rites

them under control efforts that finally resulted of war in charge of the We'zhishte gens.

In the ceremony of cutting the hair the priest in charge gathered a

tuft

away

from the crown of the boy's head, tied it, then cut it off and laid it in a parfleche case, which was kept as a sacred repository, singing as he cut the lock a ritual song explanatory of the action. The severing of the lock was an act that implied the consecration of the life of the boy to Thunder, the symbol of the power that controlled the life and death of the warrior for every man had to be a warrior in order to defend the home and the tribe. The ritual song which followed the cutting of the lock indicated the acceptance of the offering made; that is, the life of the warrior henceforth was under the control of the Thunder to prolong or to cut short

at will.

The Washe'to"
of the

subgens, which had charge of this

rite of

the consecration

boy

to the

Thunder

as the

god of war, camped

circle

at the

northern side
pertaining to

of the entrance into the

camp

when

the opening faced the east;

rites

while the We'zhi'^shte gens, which had charge of the

entrance.
the

war, including the bestowal of honors, formed the southern side of the

Thus the "door," through which all must pass who would enter was guarded on each side by gentes having charge of rites pertaining to Thunder, as the god of war, the power that could not only hold in check enemies from without, but which met each man child at his entrance into the tribe and controlled him even to the hour of his death. In a community beginning to crystallize into organized social relations the sphere of the warrior would naturally rise above that of the mere fighter; and when the belief of the people concerning nature is taken into consideration it is not surprising that the movement toward social organiza^in close relation the men of power tion should tend to place the warriors

camp

circle,

The Omaha Tribe: Ceremonies

for Children

235
in the fury of the storm

to those natural manifestations of

power seen

and

heard in the rolling of the thunder. Moreover, in the efforts Thunder unification such rites as those which were connected with the of a comwould conduce to the welding of the people by the inculcation mon dependence upon a powerful god and the sign of consecration to him

toward

political

would be put upon the head of every male member of the tribe. The priest took the boy to the space west of the fire; there, facing the head, as he sang east, he cut a lock of hair from the crown of the boy's
the following ritual song:

no"

tlii -

Ti-go"

- lia

mo"

shi

ta

ha

:|=^
-#-*-

::S?<sr

Sha-be

ti -

the

nu" - zhi

She

tha

ha.

JLi_#-

3b:
ti-the

Ti-go" -

ha mo"-

shi

ta

ha!

Sha-be

no^-zhi-a

no"- zhi

11. go" - ha

mo"

shi

i^E^^^^^0SE^
ta

:T-

ha!

Sha

be

ti -

the

no"

- zhi

ha!

Tigo"ha mo"shia ta ba Shabe tithe no"zhia ha Tigoha mo"8hia ta ha Shabe tithe no^zhia shethu aha Tigoha mCshia ta ha Shabe tithe no"zhia Tigo"ha mo"Bhia ta ha Shabe tithe no"zhia ha eheihu aha Tigo"ha mo"shia ta ha

Shabe

tithe nozhia

ha

236

ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER AND FRANCIS LA FLESCHE

Grandfather! far above on high,

The

hair

hke a shadow passes before you.

the hair sweeps before you into the midst of your realm.

Grandfather! far above on high,

Dark Hke a shadow

Grandfather! there above, on high.

Dark

like a

shadow the

hair passes before you.

Grandfather! dwelling afar on high,

Like a dark shadow the hair sweeps before you into the midst of your realm. Grandfather! far above on high.

The

hair like a

shadow passes before you.

song

From

this ritual

we

learn that the lock laid

away

in the sacred

case in care of the Thunder priest symbohcally was sent to the Thunder

god dwelling "far above on high," who was ceremonially addressed

"Grandfather"

as

the term of highest respect in the language. The hair of

vital

a person was popularly beheved to have a

connection with the

life

of the body, so that anyone becoming possessed of a lock of hair might

work

his will

on

the individual

from

whom

it

came. In ceremonial expresindicative

sions of grief the throwing of locks of hair

upon the dead was

of the vital loss sustained. In the light of customs that obtained

among

the
life.

people the hair, under certain conditions, might be said to typify

Because of the
it

belief in the continuity of life a part could stand for the

rite

and giving was given into the keeping of the god. It is to be noted that later, when the hair was suffered to grow on the boy's head, a lock on the crown of the head was parted in a circle from the rest of the hair and kept constantly distinct and neatly braided. Upon this lock the war honors of the warrior were worn, and it was this lock that was cut from the head of a slain enemy and formed the central object
whole, so in this
to the

by

cutting off a lock of the boy's hair

Thunder the

life

of the child

in the triumph ceremonies, for the reason that

it

preeminently represented

the

life

of the

man who had been

slain in battle.

In the next ritual song the Thunder god speaks and proclaims his
acceptance of the consecration of the Ufe through the lock of hair and also
declares his control over the Ufe of the warrior.
. . .

In the closing song there

is

a return to the cosmic forces which were

. . .

appealed to and represented in the ceremony of Turning the Child.

At

the conclusion of this tribal ceremony,

when

the child reached

its

home

the father cut the hair of his son after the symbolic

was thus worn until the second dentition. and the scalp lock, the sign of the warrior to which reference has already been made was parted off and kept carefully braided, no matter how frowzy and tangled the rest of the hair might be.
gens; the hair

manner of his Then the hair

was allowed

to grow,

FRANCIS LA FLESCHE
(1857-1932)

Rite of the Chiefs:

Prayer for Painting the Body

VERILY, AT THAT TIME

AND PLACE,

IT

HAS BEEN

SAID, IN THIS

HOUSE,
'

They

(the people of the gentes) said:

The

little

ones have nothing with

j

And

which to paint their faces. he (the Priest representing the Black Bear) replied:
ones paint their faces.
first

When

the

little

They shall use for their paint the god that appears The god that strikes the sky with a red glow.
It is the

in the day,
j

god the little ones shall put upon their faces. When the little ones put upon their faces this color, They shall always Hve to see old age as they travel the path of life.
color of that
Verily, at that time

'

and place,
is

it

has been

said, in this house,

|
j

The Black Bear

that

without a blemish.
1

By
It

that animal also

Mttle

The
I

ones shall cause themselves to be identified by Wa-ko^'-da.

said: My body which is black in color have made to be as my charcoal. When the little ones also make it to be as their charcoal,

was he who

They

shall always

be

identified

by Wa-ko'i'-da

as they travel the path of

life.

Behold the white spot on my throat. Behold the god of day who sitteth in the heavens. Close to this god (as its symbol) we shall place this

spot.
its

When we
The
little

place this spot close to the god of day as

symbol,

ones shall always

live to see old

age as they travel the path of

life.
I

From La Flesche, "The Osage Tribe," Thirty-Sixth Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington: Government Printing Office, 1921).
237

238
Verily, at that time

FRANCIS LA FLESCHE

and place,

it

has been said, in

this

house,

They spake

to the great white swan.

Saying: O, grandfather,

The

little

ones have nothing of which to

make

their bodies.

Verily, at that time

and place.
of

The swan spake, saying: You say the little ones have nothing make their bodies. The little ones shall make of me their bodies. When the little ones make of me their bodies, They shall always live to see old age.
Behold my feet that are dark in color. I have made them to be as my charcoal.

which to

When When
They

the

little

ones

make

of

me

their bodies. their charcoal.

they
shall

make my

feet to

be as

always be identified by Wa-ko"'-da as they travel the path of

life.

Behold the tip of my beak, which is dark in color. I have made it to be as my charcoal. When the little ones make the tip of my beak to be as their charcoal. They shall cause themselves to be identified by Wa-ko'-da as they travel
the path of
life.

Behold also

my

wings.

The

feathers of

my

wings the

little

ones shall use as plumes.

When

they use the feathers of

of cloudless skies

my

wings as plumes.
as they travel the path of

The days

Shall always be at their

command

life.

The four great divisions of the days They shall always be able to reach as they

travel the path of

life.

At

the close of the recitation the Xo'-ka puts

upon himself the sacred

symbols, following the order in which they were mentioned.

ALICE

CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER
(1838-1923)

The Hako:

A Pawnee Ceremony

THE CEREMONY OF THE HAKO

the tribe

IS A PRAYER FOR CHILDREN IN ORDER THAT and also that the people may have long life, enjoy plenty, and be happy and at peace ...

may

increase;

In this ceremony

we

are to carry the sacred articles to one not of our

tie;

kindred in order to bind him to us by a sacred and strong

ask for him
receive gifts
leads a

we

are to

many good
from him

gifts,

long
.
. .

life,

health, children,
is

and we should

in return.

Honor

conferred upon a

man who

Hako

party to a distant tribe and there makes a son, while to

objects.

Son help is given from all the powers represented by the sacred Between the Father and the Son and their immediate families a relationship such as that which exists between kindred is estabhshed through this ceremony. It is a sacred relationship, for it is made by the supernatural powers that are with the Hako. R.L.B.
the

SONGS AND CEREMONIES OF THE

The Hako party was an impressive
country.
It

WAY

sight

as

it

journeyed over the

sufficiently

could never be mistaken for an ordinary group of hunters,

warriors, or travelers.

At

the head of the long procession,

in advance to be distinguished

from the

others,

walked three

men

the

Ku'rahus [medicine man], holding before him the brown-eagle feathered

stem, on his right the chief, grasping with both hands the wildcat skin and Mother Corn, and at his left the assistant Ku'rahus, bearing the white-eagle feathered stem. These three men wore buffalo robes with the hair outside. On their heads was the white downy feather of their office and their

From Fletcher, and James Murie, "The Hako, a Pawnee Ceremony," Twentysecond Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington, 1904), pp. 301303, 345-350.

239

240

ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER

faces were anointed with the sacred ointment and red paint.

They bore

and silently, looking neither to the right nor left, beheving that they were under supernatural guidance. Behind them walked the doctors with their insignia, the eagle wings; then the singers with the drum, and behind them the men and women of the party with the ponies laden with gifts and needed supplies of food. Over the wide prairie for miles and miles this order was preserved day after day until the journey came to an end. If from some distant vantage point a war party should descry the procession, the leader would silently turn his men that they might not meet the Hako party, for the feathered stems are mightier than the warrior; before them he must lay down his weapon, forget his anger, and be at peace. No object met on the journey to the Son presented its ordinary aspect to the Hako party. Everything seen was regarded as a manifestation of the supernatural powers under whose favor this ceremony was to take place; hence the trees, the streams, the mountains, the buffalo were addressed in song. This attitude toward nature is strikingly brought out in the two songs, which are in sequence, sung at the crossing of a stream. Throughout this ceremony water is treated as one of the lesser powers. It is employed only for sacred purposes, and is never used in the ordinary way. To profane water would bring punishment upon the whole party, and consequently when a stream ran across a line of travel no person could step into it as he commonly would do. A halt was called and the Ku'rahus led in the singing of the song in which Kawas is asked to grant the party permission to ford the stream. According to Pawnee rituals, water at the creation was given to the woman, so Kawas, representing the mother, could grant permission. The request is embodied in four stanzas. In the first the water touches the feet; in the second the feet stand in the
the sacred objects forward steadily

water; in the third the feet

the feet.

move

in the water; in the fourth the

water covers

After the stream was crossed the people halted on the bank to sing
the song to the wind, led

The wind

is

called

upon
it

may

not irreverently

by the Ku'rahus, It also is in four stanzas. come and dry the water which the people touch. In the first stanza the wind touches the peoto
lightly
it

ple; in the

second

brushes their bodies; in the third

it

circles

about them; in the fourth

lesser powers,

envelops them. Thus the wind, one of the

comes between the people and the penalty incurred by

profanely touching water.

In these ceremonies the people were constantly reminded that they were in the presence of the unseen powers manifested to them in the natural objects met upon the journey. To those initiated into the inner meaning of the rite, the appeal at the crossing of the stream to Kawas (the feminine element) and to the wind (typical of the breath of life) was connected with the symbolism of running water, explained in the

The Hako:

Pawnee Ceremony
life

241 from generation to genera-

seventh ritual as representing the giving of

tion.

the buffalo are

Three more songs originally belonged to the journey, but we are told no longer seen; neither are the mountains or the mesas; so
ire

these songs

past generations

now sung in the lodge and may be remembered.

only that the objects seen by

SONG TO THE TREES AND STREAMS

Dark

against the sky yonder distant line

Lies before us. Trees

we

see,

long the line of trees,

Bending, swaying in the breeze.

n
Bright with flashing light yonder distant line

Runs before

us, swiftly runs, swift the river runs,

Winding, flowing o'er the land.

Ill

Hark!

Oh

hark!

sound, yonder distant sound

Comes

to greet us, singing comes, soft the river's song,

trees.

Ripphng gently 'neath the

SONG WHEN CROSSING THE STREAMS

Behold, upon the river's brink

we

stand!

River

we must

cross;

Oh

Into the stream to

Kawas, come! To thee we caU. Oh come, and thy permission give wade and forward go.

After the
itself is

Hako

party arrives at the village of the Son the ceremony

is

performed, which

a symboUc reenactment of the birth of a child.

is

In this ceremony the central figure

daughter of the Son

a child, usually a

little

son or

the

man who

receives the

Hako

party.

Upon this child are put the signs of the promises which Mother Corn and
the powers of the Sacred Pipes bring

the promise of children, increase,

The signs and promises are put on this little child but they are not meant for that particular child, but for its generation, that children already born may live and grow in strength and in their
long
life,

plenty.

turn increase so that the family and the tribe

may

extend.

R.L.B.

242

ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER

SEEKING THE CHILD

At
cipal

the

first

sign of

men

of the

dawn the Ku'rahus and his assistants, Hako party, started for the lodge of the
rites

with the prinSon, there to

to

seek his child and perform certain

that these rites took place at the
ritual,

symbolic of birth.

It is

be noted

same hour

as the singing of the

Dawn

which celebrated the mysterious birth of day. They sang the first song of the ritual as they started, but when they were nearing their destination they repeated the song they had sung when they were about to enter the village of the Son. The repetition of songs sung in the earlier part of the ceremony had the effect of tying back the later acts to those which were preparatory in character, and tended to consolidate the entire ceremony. When this song was sung for the first time the Father was seeking the Son, to whom he was bringing promises of good; when it was sung the second time the Father was seeking the child of the Son, that on it the promises brought might be fulfilled.

Of

this part of the

meaning, but the function of each

ceremony not only every detail, with its article used had been prefigured.

special

Where is he, the Son? Where his dwelling place that I seek? Which can be his lodge, where he sits Silent, waiting, waiting there for me?
II

Here Here

is

he, the Son,

his dwelling place that I seek;

is

This here

his lodge

where he

sits

Silent, waiting, waiting

here for me.

SYMBOLIC INCEPTION
The warriors
warMke

the male element

if

^were the first to enter the lodge, in

and hold it securely. The child was first touched by the representative of Kawas, that it might be given endurance; then it was touched by the chief, that it might be wise. After the warriors had performed their part, the Ku'rahus entered singing the song which had been sung when the messenger representing the Son was received outside the village. At that time he looked upon one who was to lead him to the Son; now he is looking upon the child which represents the continuafashion, as
to capture tion of the
life

of the Son.

The Hako:

Pawnee Ceremony

243

FIRST SONG

Now
He He
is

our eyes look on him

as the

who

is

here;

Son we have sought;

to

brings us again tidings of the Son:

"Father,

come

me, here

I sit

Waiting here for thee."

The Ku'rahus first touched the child with the ear of corn (second song), same song as when the ear of corn made its mysterious journey to the sky and received its authority to lead in the ceremony. The power granted at that time was for this ultimate purpose, to make the paths and open the way for the child to receive the gift of fruitfulness.
singing the

SECOND SONG

Tira'wa, harken! Mighty one

Above

us in blue, silent sky!

We

standing wait thy bidding here;

waits,

The Mother Corn standing

Waits to serve thee here;

The Mother Corn

stands waiting here.

II

Tira'wa, harken! Mighty one

Above us

in blue, silent sky!

We
Up

flying seek thy dwelling there; flying goes

The Mother Corn

to seek thee there;

flying up.

The Mother Corn goes

in

Tira'wa, harken! Mighty one

Above

us in blue, silent sky!

fair;

We

touch upon thy country

the border land;
is

The Mother Corn touches

there

Upon

The Mother Corn

touching there.

244
IV

ALICE CUNNINGHAM FLETCHER

Tira'wa, harken! Mighty one

Above us in blue, silent sky! The path we reach leads up to thee; The Mother Corn enters there, Upward takes her way; The Mother Com to thee ascends.

Tira'wa, harken! Mighty one

Above us
Behold!

in blue, silent sky! in thy dwelling stand;

there,

We

The Mother Corn, standing

Leader now is made; The Mother Corn is leader made.

VI

Tira'wa, harken! Mighty one

Above us in blue, silent sky! The downward path we take again; The Mother Corn, leading us, Doth thy symbol bear; The Mother Corn with power leads.
Then
gift

the Ku'rahus united the

two feathered stems, the male and the

female (third song), and with them touched the child, following with the
of procreation the paths

opened by the corn.

THIRD SONG

Here stand we while upon Tira'wa now we wait; Here Kawas stands, her mate with her is standing here; They both are standing, waiting, bringing gifts with them.

We

flying are, as on Tira'wa now we wait; Here Kawas flies, her mate with her is flying here; They both are flying, flying with the gifts they bring.

m
We touching are, as on Tira'wa now we wait; Now Kawas and her mate the child so gently touch;
Its

forehead touch they, there they gently touch the child.

The Hako:

Pawnee Ceremony

245

ACTION SYMBOLIZING LIFE

The
as the
child,
first

surrounded by the creative forces,

is

is

urged to move, to arise

song

sung.

FIRST SONG
I

am

ready;

Little one,

come to me now, fearing nothing; come now to come, come to me here; fearing nothing, come!
to take four steps,

me

here!

Then

it

was made

symbohc

of

life,

of long

life,

during the singing of the second song.

In the symbolizing, within the lodge of the Son, of the

gift

of birth

by the power of the Hako, brought thither by the Father, we get a glimpse of the means by which the tie between the two unrelated men, the Father and the Son, was supposed to be formed; namely, the life of the Son was perpetuated through the gift of fruitfulness to his child, supernaturally bestowed by the Hako; consequently the Father who brought the Hako became symbolically the father of the future progeny of the Son.

SECOND SONG
Stepping forward
is

my

child,

he forward

steps, the four steps takes

and

enters into Mfe;

Forward

stepping, four steps taking, enters into

life.

The child was taken upon the back of one of the party and way to the ceremonial lodge, followed by the Ku'rahus and all
singing the third song.

led the

the rest

THIRD SONG

Here we go singing, looking on the child Borne in his father's arms, he leading us; Follow we singing, looking on the chUd.

FRANZ BOAS
(1858-1942)

Franz Boas who was destined to dominate American anthropology for forty years and who shaped its future course was born in Minden, Westphalia, of German-Jewish parents of liberal tradition, and educated at the Universities of Kiel, Bonn, and Heidelberg. He was trained in the natural

sciences; his doctorate

was in physics, his dissertation on the color of sea But even as a student he became interested in the study of man. In 1883 he joined an Arctic expedition as geographer to map the coast of Bajfinland, but his interest then as always was in the way people organize
water.

their lives.

Boas looked back with nostalgia to his days among was his first contact with primitive people, and it was his sense of common humanity with them that changed him from a geographer to an anthropologist. His monograph on the Central Eskimo, published by the Bureau of American Ethnology in 1888, is still one of the ethnographic classics and a model of lucidity. After his return from the Arctic in 1884 Boas settled in the United States and laid the foundations for a less provincial science of anthropology. For the Bureau of American Ethnology he conceived and carried forward the Handbook of American Indian Languages, a collection of grammatical sketches of key languages of North America. He wrote a number of the sketches himself, and he supplied the Handbook with a masterly introduction outlining a conceptual scheme for the study of
Throughout his
life

the Eskimo. This

primitive languages.

An

excerpt from Boas' observations of the Central

here. His contributions to

Eskimo is presented anthropological theory and method will be dealt

with in Part

of this volume.

R.L.B.

246

The Central Eskimo: Domestic Occupations and Amusements

247

The Central Eskimo:

Domestic Occupations and Amusements
WINTER AND THE NATIVES ARE ESTABLISHED IN THEIR WARM SNOW At this time of the year it is necessary to make use of the short daylight and twiHght for hunting. Long before the day begins to dawn the Eskimo prepares for hunting. He rouses his housemate; his wife supplies the lamp with a new wick and fresh blubber and the dim light which has been kept burning during the night quickly brightens up and warms the hut. While the woman is busy preparing breakfast the man fits up his sledge for hunting. He takes the snow block which closes the entrance of the dwelling room during the night out of the doorway and passes through
IT IS

houses.

fatigues of the

by the heavy hair protects them from the severe cold of the Arctic winter, they hke to seek shelter from the piercing winds in the entrance of the hut. The sledge is iced, the harnesses are taken out of the storeroom by
the low passages. Within the passage the dogs are sleeping, tired

day before. Though

their long,

the door, and the dogs are harnessed to the sledge. Breakfast

is

now

ready and after having taken a hearty meal of seal soup and frozen and

cooked

hut upon the sledge, hangs the harpoon

meat the hunter lashes the spear that stands outside of the line, some toggles, and his knife over the antlers, and starts for the hunting ground. Here he waits patiently
seal

for the blowing seal, sometimes until late in the evening.

Meanwhile the women, who

another, taking

stay at

home, are engaged

in their domestic

occupations, mending boots and making

new

clothing, or they visit

their time with

some work with them, or pass

While

in playing with the children.

sitting at their

one games or sewing and at the same

time watching their lamps and cooking the meat, they incessantly
their favorite tunes.

hum

About noon they cook

their dinner

and usually pre-

pare at the same time the meal for the returning hunters.
first

As soon as the heard approaching, the pots, which have been pushed back during the afternoon, are placed over the fire, and when the hungry men enter the hut their dinner is ready. While hunting they usually open the
sledge
is

seals caught early in the morning, to take out a piece of the flesh or liver,

which they eat raw, for lunch. The cut is then temporarily fastened the final dressing of the animal at home.
In the western regions particularly the hunters frequently
visit

until

the depots

From Boas, "The Central Eskimo," Sixth Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington: Government Printing Office, 1888), pp. 561-566.

248
of venison
feast.

FRANZ BOAS

made

in the

fall,

and the return

is

always followed by a great

home they first unharness their dogs and unwhich are carefully arranged, coiled up, and put away in the storeroom. Then the sledge is unloaded and the spoils are dragged through the entrance into the hut. A reUgious custom commands the women to leave off working, and not until the seal is cut up are they allowed to resume their sewing and the preparing of skins. This custom is founded on the tradition that all kinds of sea animals have risen from the fingers of their supreme goddess, who must be propitiated after being offended by the murder of her offspring. The spear is stuck into the snow at the entrance of the house, the sledge is turned upside down, and the ice coating is removed from the runners. Then it is leaned against the wall of the house, and at last the hunter is ready to enter. He strips off his deerskin jacket and slips into his sealskin coat. The former is carefully cleaned of the adhering ice and snow with the snowbeater and put into the storeroom
After the hunters reach
string the traces,

outside the house.

This done, the men are ready for their dinner, of which the women do not partake. In winter the staple food of the Eskimo is boiled seal and walrus meat, though in some parts of the western districts it is musk ox and venison, a rich and nourishing soup being obtained by cooking the meat. The natives are particularly fond of seal and walrus soup, which is

made by mixing and boihng

meat.

water, blood, and blubber with large pieces of

The food

is

not always salted, but sometimes melted sea water

sufficient quantity of salt, is

ice,
is

which contains a
generally eaten

used for cooking. Liver

raw and is considered a tidbit. I have seen the intestines eaten only when there was no meat. Forks are used to take the meat out of the kettle and the soup is generally poured out into a large cup. Before the introduction of European manufactures these vessels and dishes generally consisted of whalebone. One of these has been described by Parry. It was circular in form, one piece of whalebone being bent into the proper shape for the sides and another flat piece of the same material sewed to it for a bottom, so closely
as to

make
it,

it

perfectly watertight.
is

ladle or

spoon

is

sometimes used in

drinking

but usually the cup

passed around, each taking a sip in turn.

In the same

way

large pieces of

meat are passed round, each taking as large

lips.

a mouthful as possible and then cutting off the bit close to the
all

They

smack
is

their lips in eating.

The Eskimo drink a

great deal of water,

which

generally kept in vessels standing near the lamps.

their

When

the

men

have finished

meal the women take their share, and then all attack the frozen meat which is kept in the storerooms. The women are allowed to
participate in this part of the meal.

An

enormous quantity of meat

is

The Central Eskimo: Domestic Occupations and Amusements

249

devoured every night, and sometimes they only suspend eating when they go to bed, keeping a piece of meat within reach in case they awake. After dinner the seals, which have been placed behind the lamps to
thaw, are thrown upon the floor, cut up, and the spare meat and skins
are taken into the storerooms. If a scarcity of food prevails in the village

and a hunter has caught a few seals, every inhabitant of the settlement receives a piece of meat and blubber, which he takes to his hut, and the successful hunter invites all hands to a feast. The dogs are fed every second day after dinner. For this purpose two men go to a place at a short distance from the hut, taking the frozen food with them, which they split with a hatchet or the point of the spear. While one is breaking the solid mass the other keeps the dogs off by means of the whip, but as soon as the food is ready they make a rush at it, and in less than half a minute have swallowed their meal. No dog of a strange team is allowed to steal anything, but is kept at a distance by the dogs themselves and by the whip. If the dogs are very hungry they are
harnessed to the sledge in order to prevent an attack before the
ready.

men

are

They

are unharnessed after the food

is

prepared, the weakest

first,

in order to give

him the best chance

of picking out

some good

pieces.
first

Sometimes they are fed

in the house; in such a case, the

food being

prepared, they are led into the hut singly; thus each receives his share.
All the work being finished, boots and stockings are changed, as they must be dried and mended. The men visit one another and spend the night in talking, singing, gambhng, and telling stories. The events of the day are talked over, success in hunting is compared, the hunting tools requiring mending are set in order, and the lines are dried and softened. Some busy themselves in cutting new ivory implements and seal lines or in carving. They never spend the nights quite alone, but meet for social entertainment. During these visits the host places a large lump of frozen meat and a knife on the side bench behind the lamp and every one is welcome to help himself to as much as he likes. The first comers sit down on the ledge, while those entering later stand or squat in the passage. When any one addresses the whole assembly he always turns his face to the wall and avoids facing the listeners. Most of the men take off their outer jackets in the house and they sit chatting until very late. Even the young children do not go to bed early. The women sit on the bed in front of their lamps, with their legs under them, working continually on their own clothing or on that of the men, drying the wet footgear and mittens, and softening the leather by chewing and rubbing. If a bitch has a litter of pups it is their business to look after them, to keep them warm, and to feed them regularly. Generally the pups are put into a small harness and are allowed to crawl about the side of the bed, where they are tied to the wall by a trace. Young children are always carried in their mothers' hoods, but when about a year and a

250

FRANZ BOAS

half old they are allowed to play on the bed, and are only carried by their mothers when they get too mischievous. When the mother is engaged in any hard work they are carried by the young girls. They are weaned when about two years old, but women suckle them occasionally until they are

three or four years of age. During this time they are frequently fed
their mothers'

from

mouths.

When

about twelve years old they begin to help

their parents, the girls

sewing and preparing skins, the boys accompanying

their fathers in hunting expeditions.

The parents

are very fond of their

children and treat

them

kindly.

They

are never beaten

and

in turn they are very dutiful, obeying the wishes of their parents

and rarely scolded, and

taking care of them in their old age.

JOHN

R.

SWANTON

(1873-1958)

Swanton was one of Boas'

degree in anthropology.

first

students at Columbia to receive a graduate

the
first

He was among

of the early scholars to

choose that discipline as a primary field of study, and he became established as a professional anthropologist immediately on leaving Columbia. That
year, 1900, he entered the

Bureau of American Ethnology and remained

with

it

until

he retired

in

1944.

Swanton's chief interest was the coastal tribes of British Columbia. In

connection with the Jesup North Pacific Expedition he wrote his Ethnology

Haida and Haida Texts and Myths. Later he turned his attention little known and little understood but of crucial importance for comprehending the growth of culture in North America. Southeastern cultures had long since disappeared, but Swanton gathered together in his Indian Tribes of the Lower Mississippi (Bulletin of the Bureau of American Ethnology) all available material from early travelers, arranging it topically for comparison. It was one of those labors of scholarship for which everyone interested in American
of the
to the Southeastern United States, a region

cultural history

can be

grateful.

R.L.B.

Types of Haida and Tlingit Myths

MORE THAN TWO HUNDRED AND FIFTY STORIES OF THE Haida and Tlingit of the north Pacific coast the writer has found that many of them have very similar plots, and it has seemed to him that abstracts of the more important of these might be of interest to those engaged in comparative work. The story of Raven is of course similar to the stories of other transformers and need not be included. The same
IN RECORDING
is

true of the story of the brothers

it is

who

traveled about overcoming monsters.

all

Here

evidently Tlingit, the heroes in

cases ending their career in an

From Swanton, "Types

n.s.

of Haida and Tlingit Myths," American Anthropologist, Vol. VII (Lancaster, 1905), pp. 94-103.

251

252
attempt to cross the Stikine, and from the Tlingit

JOHN

R.

SWANTON

it has been transmitted Haida without losing its Tlingit names and atmosphere. Several other tales, repeated from end to end of the Haida-Tlingit area, are also strongly localized in certain towns or camps, and hardly fall into the present scheme. Such are the story of the man who was carried off by the salmon people, the story of the woman who was turned into an owl, the story of

to the

the man who obtained who made killer-whales

strength to

kill

sea-Uons, the story of the

out of wood, and the story of the hunters

man who

changed into supernatural beings by putting themselves into the fire. A few of the plots given are so general that they can hardly be considered
peculiar to the northwest coast, but others probably do not occur outside
of that area.
1.

The

Man

Captured by the Supernatural Beings.

A man out hunt-

ing

is

taken into the house of some supernatural being, usually on account

done to displease the latter, and often it tries if it be a land otter or a killer-whale. On the other hand the hero may be given a crest or a name, and such a story is told by the Haida to explain the origin of secret society perof something he has said or
to turn

him

into an animal, especially

formances.
2.

Man who Married the Grizzly Bear. This is related to the man out hunting hears his dogs bark in front of a grizzly bear's den. When he comes to it the male bear throws him inside, but the female conceals him, marries him, and kills her previous husband. He has several children by her. By and by he returns to his own people, but his bear wife enjoins him to have nothing to do with his human wife or children. Every
The
above.

day

after his return

he spears seals and carries them up to his bear family,

kill

who

are waiting at the head of an inlet. After a while, however, he disobeys

her instructions, and they

him. Then his children wage war on

human

beings, but are finally destroyed.

3.

The

Woman who
it,

Married the Supernatural Being.

woman
let

says something about an animal or object which angers the supernatural

being connected with

or else her father refuses for a long time to

girl,

her marry anyone. The offended being appears to the

it.

and she marries

Sometimes she goes off with it and Uves among the animals for a long and sometimes her husband remains with her. In the former case she usually comes back to her father's people after a time, bringing food, and her father may recover her by killing the people she has been among. A man's wife is washing a skin in the sea, 4. The Kidnapped Wife. when she is carried off by a killer-whale. Her husband follows, descends
time,

to the sea floor,

and

assists

to get his wife back.

some being there who in turn directs him how Then he goes behind the town where she is kept,

causes the wedges of a slave coming out to chop

wood

to break, restores

them, and so obtains the slave's assistance.

into the house, he spills
it

When

the slave carries water

is filled

upon

the

fire,

and while the house

with

Types of Haida and

steam the

Tlingit

Myths

253

man

runs in and carries off his wife.

He

is

pursued, but reaches

home

safely.

The Supernatural Helper. A man who has been unsuccessful in 5. gambUng, hunting, or getting property, goes off into the forest or out on the sea, obtains assistance from some supernatural being, and is afterward
fortunate, or,
6.

A man
is

or a

woman

leaves food for

some animal or
girl

treats

it

kindly,

and
7.

afterward given plenty of food in return, thereby becoming rich.

The Supernatural
and are

Child.

girl

or a

and her mother

lose all

their relatives

left

alone in the town. After a while the

girl gives

birth to a child

the enemies

who has supernatural power, grows up rapidly, who have killed his mother's people, and usually

destroys
restores

them

to

life.

8. The Magic Feather. The popular form of type 7 is the following: While the people in a certain town are playing shinny on the beach, a feather or some similar object comes down from above, and those who

seize

it

are carried

up out

of sight. In this

way everybody

disappears

except one or two women. The younger of these swallows something and
gives birth to a supernatural child
9.

who

wise,

The Boy who was Abandoned. For some action, trifling or a boy is abandoned by all his people, who leave him alone
food for him and some

revenges and protects them.

otherin the

town. His youngest uncle's wife, however, being fond of him, conceals a
fire enclosed in mussel-shells. Then the youth some supernatural way and stores a great quantity of food, while those who have abandoned him are starving. After a while slaves are sent over to see what has become of him. He feeds them, but warns them not to carry any of the food away. One of them, however,
little

receives assistance in

conceals a piece for his (or her) infant, and the night after they return
it to the child. While eating this, the child cries out, often from being choked or from having dropped the food, and the chief or his wife makes an investigation, thereby discovering the truth. Then the people of that town return to the place where the boy was left. All of his uncles' daughters dress themselves up, hoping that he will choose one of them for his wife, but he selects the daughter of his youngest uncle, although she has not adorned herself and arrives last. He becomes a chief. 10. The Boy and His Grandmother who were Banished. A boy and his grandmother were either abandoned or forced to live outside the town. In the former case the story sometimes proceeds like type 9. In the latter case the boy is assisted by some supernatural being and obtains a great deal of food, while the other people are starving. They are obhged to purchase food of him, and he becomes wealthy. Sometimes he becomes a great shaman and obtains his property in that way. 11. The Ill-disposed Mother-in-law. A man is badly treated by his mother-in-law because he lies in bed continually instead of working. After

gives

254
a while he goes to a lake behind the town and
there
kills

JOHN
by

R.

SWANTON

a water-monster living

splitting a tree

along the middle, spreading the halves apart, and

until its head comes between the two portions. He and begins to catch all kinds of fish and sea animals. These he leaves on the beach where his mother-in-law can find them, and by letting her find them regularly, he induces her to think that she has become a great shaman. After a long time he reveals himself before all the people and kiUs his mother-in-law with shame. Sometimes a monster is killed in the way indicated merely that the hero may obtain its skin to wear
tolling the

monster up

skins this creature

when he performs 12. The Goose

great deeds, not with a view to personal revenge.

Wife.

A man

finds

two female geese,

in

human

form,

bathing in a lake while their skins hang on the limb of a tree near by.

He seizes When the

these skins and so compels one or both of

them

to

marry him.

goose tribe passes over, his wives get them to throw

they leave

down

food.

By and by
his

him and
he
is

rejoin their people.

He

follows

them and

remains with them for a while, afterward returning to his

sometimes made to encounter a whose chips turn into salmon as they fall into the water.
to find his wife

way

own place. On man chopping,

is

13.

The Land Otter

Sister.

The

sister of

a certain

man

carried

away

by the land otters and married among them. Once, when he is encamped by himself making a canoe, his sister brings him food. By and by she sends some of the land otters to launch his canoe for him, and afterward he goes to the land-otter town to finish it. While he is there his sister takes his smallest child on her lap and sings to it, making a httle tail grow out of it. When the man objects, she sings another song and it goes back. Finally he returns to his town.

The Eagle People. A man is set adrift in a box or on a plank and lands among the eagles. He is found by two girls, marries them, and is given a suit of feathers by the eagle people in which he goes fishing. After some time he flies to his uncle's town, seizes his uncle by the head, and flies up from the ground with him. A person seizes his uncle's foot and is also carried up. He in turn is seized by another, and the process is continued until all the people of that town are hanging in a string. He drowns them in the ocean.
14.

by

his uncle

15. Beaver and Porcupine. Beaver carries porcupine out to an island from which he can not get ashore. Finally he sings for a north wind, the sea freezes over, and he walks home. Afterward he takes beaver up to the top of a tall tree and beaver gets down with difliculty. The two parts of this story are sometimes told in reverse order. (This story is usually localized in the neigh16. The Rival Towns. borhood of Metlakatla or on Nass river, but it is also told of Sitka.) War breaks out between two towns, and all of the people in one of them are destroyed except a woman and her daughter who escape into the forest. Then the mother caUs out, "Who will marry my daughter?" and the

Types of Haida and

Tlingit

Myths

255

animals and birds present themselves successively. She asks each of these

what
all.

it

can do, and

is

is dissatisfied

with the replies she receives, so she rejects

Finally she

answered by the son of a sky deity (given variously as sky,

moon), whom she accepts; whereupon her son-in-law puts her into where she becomes the creaking of boughs or the echo, and carries his wife up to his father's house in the sky. There they have a number of children, whom their grandfather teaches how to fight when they are grown up. Usually there is one sister able to heal wounds. Finally their grandfather puts them inside of beautifully painted houses, or a fort, and lowers them down on their old town site. When the people of the town opposite hear the noises there, they say that they must be produced by ghosts; but seeing the houses next morning, they start across to gamble with the newcomers. During this game trouble breaks out, and the children of the sky are about to be overwhelmed. Their grandfather intervenes, however, and enables them to destroy aU their foes, 17. The Doomed Canoemen. Some men out hunting in a canoe are hailed by a supernatural being, who informs them that on their way home they will die successively, beginning with the man in the bow, and that when the man in the stern has reached home and related his story, he too
sun, or

tree,

will die.

The death

of a

shaman or

the destruction of a village

is

also

sometimes foretold through him.

18. The Protracted Winter. The people in a certain town so offend some supernatural being that snow falls and almost covers the houses. Finally a bird is seen sitting on the edge of the smoke-hole with a berry

in

its

mouth. Suspecting something

is

wrong, the people, or those

who have
it

survived, climb out

and go

to another place,

where they find that

is

already

midsummer and
and
in

the berries are ripe. Similar stories relate

how
fire.

people were punished by a flood, by stormy weather which prevents them

from
19.

getting food,

one or two

The Magic

Flight.

stories otherwise of type 17,

is

by

person

captured by some supernatural

beings, as in stories of type 3.

He

or a friend of his obtains

some

objects

from an old woman, and

as they

run away they throw these behind them

and

[they] turn into obstructions through

is

which

their pursuers find difliculty

in forcing a way. Usually this story

told of a

woman who
gifts,
is

offended the

grizzly bears. After she has exhausted her

magic

she comes out on

the shore of a lake or the shores of the sea, where she

taken into a canoe,

marries another supernatural being, and after a time returns to her father's
people, bringing food. Sometimes the adventures of her son are also related,

and again a story of type 4 may be added.

20.
at length pulls
fish

The Grand Catch. A fisherman who has been long unsuccessful up an enormous "nest" full of fishes, or else an enormous surrounded by smaller ones. All the canoes are filled, and the poor

fisherman becomes wealthy.

256
21.

JOHN
The Unfaithful Wife.

R.

SWANTON

Desiring
is

to

marry another person, the wife

is

of a certain

man

pretends that she

about to die and

placed in the

grave-box. Afterward her lover hberates her and carries her

home

or to

another part of the country.

truth, goes to the grave-box,

By and by her former husband

suspects the

and finds her body missing. Then he goes house where she and her new husband are Uving and kills them by running pointed sticks into their hearts. Next morning he dresses well and goes out to gamble.
at night to the

22.

The Rejected Lover.

A man

is

in love with a

woman who

does

not care for him. She induces him to pull aU the hair out of his body

and then leaves him. Too much ashamed to return to town, the man wanders off to another place, or climbs into the sky country on a chain of
arrows.

By and by he

meets a supernatural being

who

restores his hair

and

takes him to another town where he marries the daughter of the town
chief.

Then he

returns to his father's

rejected

town with

his

new

wife and puts the

woman who had

him

to shame.

It is interesting to

note

how

conventional expressions, or what might

differ as

be called the "mythic formulee,"

the Tlingit indicate that a

used by Haida and

Tlingit.

Thus

by saying " it was a long town," while the Haida equivalent is, "it was a town of five rows of houses." In Tlingit a girl is carried off by some supernatural being because she had said something to offend it; in Haida it is because (or after) her father

town was

large

has refused a great

many

suitors for her hand. In Tlingit a

man

kills his

unkind uncle or aunt by wishing that what he or she eats will not satisfy, but in Haida he does it by feeding the person on nothing but grease. Although the myths of both peoples speak of traveling in canoes which are alive and have to be fed, in Tlingit these are always grizzly bears. Often

made by grizzly bears who began soon as they were hungry. While four is nearly always the story or mystic number in Haida, two appears quite as often in Tlingit. After a child with supernatural powers is born, the Tinglit story-teller is content to say that it grew up rapidly and hunted continually, but the Haida must add that it cried for a bow and arrows and was not satisfied until it
it is

said that the turnings in rivers were

to turn

round

as

obtained some
being
is

made out

of copper.

Among

the Haida, too, a supernatural

by cutting its body apart and throwing a whetstone between, on which the body grinds itself "to nothing." To express plenty
usually killed
the Tlingit say that one could not see the inside of the house for the

multitude of things in

it;

a child that has eaten something against the

its

wishes of

its

elders has the inside of

mouth

scratched; a medicine
it is

animal often appears in the shape of a bear; and

periodically that "his wives

always said of a

supernatural being addicted to the habit of doing away with his wives

do not

last long."

JAMES MOONEY
(1861-1921)

James Mooney was working in the editorial room of the Richmond (Indiana) Paladium when Major Powell met him in 1885. Mooney had read everything available on the subject of the American Indian, and Powell, impressed by his knowledge, brought him into the Bureau of American Ethnology. Mooney remained with the Bureau for the rest of his life, working mainly among the Cherokee and the Kiowa. His best-known research was done in 1891, when he was sent by Powell to investigate the circumstances which had led to the trouble on the Sioux reservation and which culminated in the horrible massacre of the Sioux
at

Wounded Knee.
The year
before, a revivalistic cult
It

had
all

started

among

the Paiute

and

swept over the Western Plains.

had

the familiar features of Indian

Messianic cults: spiritual regeneration and a return to the good ways

of the ancestors were to be followed by the disappearance of the whites,
the return of the dead,

and

the restoration of the old

life.

During the

waiting period, people were to dance in the hope of producing mystical

states in

supernatural forces. The cult spread across the Plains;

which they could establish communication with the dead or with it reached the Sioux

when they were already restive because of many disappointments, and in a moment of panic a shot was fired arul the explosive situation flared up. Mooney' s investigation of the events leading up to this disaster and of the whole ghost-dance phenomenon remains one of the classic studies of the
social

and psychological

factors in the rise of revivalistic cults.

R.L.B.

The Ghost-Dance Religion

THE WISE MEN TELL US THAT THE WORLD live longer than did our fathers, have more
IS

GROWING HAPPIER

THAT
toil,

WE

of comfort and less of

fewer

wars and discords, and higher hopes and aspirations. So say the wise men; but deep in our own hearts we know they are wrong.

From Mooney, "The Ghost-Dance Religion and the Sioux Outbreak of 1890," Fourteenth Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology, Part 2 (Washington, 1896), pp. 657, 111-11%, 780-783, 920-926, 824-828.
257


258
.

JAMES MOONEY
.
.

What tribe or people has not had its golden age, before Pandora's box was loosed, when women were nymphs and dryads and men were gods and heroes? And when the race lies crushed and groaning beneath an alien yoke, how natural is the dream of a redeemer, an Arthur, who shall return from exile or awake from some long sleep to drive out the usurper and win back for his people what they have lost. The hope becomes a faith and the faith becomes the creed of priests and prophets, until the hero is a god and the dream a religion, looking to some great miracle of nature for its culmination and accomplishment. The doctrines of the Hindu avatar, the Hebrew Messiah, the Christian millennium, and the Hesunanin of the Indian Ghost dance are essentially the same, and have their origin in a hope and longing common to all humanity.

THE DOCTRINE OF THE GHOST DANCE

You must
The
united
not
fight.

Do no harm

to anyone.

Do

right always.

Woroka.
is

great underlying principle of the

Ghost dance doctrine

that the

time will

come when the whole Indian race, living and dead, upon a regenerated earth, to Mve a hfe of aboriginal

will

be

re-

happiness,

forever free from death, disease, and misery.

tribe has built a structure

On

this

foundation each

believer has filled in the

ideas of happiness, with

own mythology, and each apostle and details according to his own mental capacity or such additions as come to him from the trance.
from
its

Some

changes, also, have undoubtedly resulted from the transmission of

the doctrine through the imperfect

medium

of the sign language.

The

differences of interpretation are precisely such as

we

find in Christianity,

with

its

hundreds of

sects

The white
this

race, being

aUen and secondary and hardly

will

and innumerable shades of individual opinion. real, has no part in

be
left

scheme of aboriginal regeneration, and

behind with the other

things of earth that have served their temporary purpose, or else will cease
entirely to exist.

All this

is

to

be brought about by an overruling

spiritual

power

that

needs no assistance from

human

creatures;

and though certain medicine-

men were

disposed to anticipate the Indian millennium by preaching re-

form no part of the true doctrine, and it was only where chronic dissatisfaction was aggravated by recent grievances, as among the Sioux, that the movement assumed a hostile expression. On the contrary, all behevers were exhorted to make themselves worthy of the predicted happiness by discarding all things warhke and practicing honesty, peace, and good will,
sistance to the further encroachments of the whites, such teachings

not only

among

themselves, but also toward the whites, so long as they

were together. Some apostles have even thought that all race distinctions are to be obUterated, and that the whites are to participate with the

The Ghost-Dance Religion

Indians in the coming
felicity;

259
but
it

seems unquestionable that

this is

equally contrary to the doctrine as originally preached.

Different dates have been assigned at various times for the fulfillment

of the prophecy. Whatever the year,

it

has generally been held, for very

all

natural reasons, that the regeneration of the earth and the renewal of
life

and particularly the 4th of July, was the expected time. This, it may be noted, was about the season when the great annual ceremony of the sun dance formerly took
in the early spring. In
July,

would occur

some cases

place

among

the prairie tribes.

The messiah himself has

set several dates

from time to time, as one prediction after another failed to materialize, and in his message to the Cheyenne and Arapaho, in August, 1891, he leaves the whole matter an open question. The date universally recognized among all the tribes immediately prior to the Sioux outbreak was the spring of 1891. As springtime came and passed, and summer grew and waned, and autumn faded again into winter without the realization of their hopes and longings, the doctrine gradually assumed its present form that some time in the unknown future the Indian wiU be united with his friends who have gone before, to be forever supremely happy, and that

this

happiness

may be

anticipated in dreams,

if

not actually hastened in

by earnest and frequent attendance on the sacred dance. On returning to the Cheyenne and Arapaho in Oklahoma, after my visit to Wovoka in January, 1892, I was at once sought by my friends of both tribes, anxious to hear the report of my journey and see the sacred things that I had brought back from the messiah. The Arapaho especially, who are of more spiritual nature than any of the other tribes, showed a deep interest and followed intently every detail of the narrative. As soon as the news of my return was spread abroad, men and women, in groups and singly, would come to me, and after grasping my hand would repeat a long and earnest prayer, sometimes aloud, sometimes with the Mps silently moving, and frequently with tears rolling down the cheeks, and the whole body trembling violently from stress of emotion. Often before the prayer was ended the condition of the devotee bordered on the hysterical, very httle less than in the Ghost dance itself. The substance of the prayer was usually an appeal to the messiah to hasten the coming of the promised happiness, with a petition that, as the speaker himself was unable to make the long journey, he might, by grasping the hand of one who had seen and
reality,

talked with the messiah face to face, be enabled in his trance visions to

catch a glimpse of the coming glory. During

all

this

performance the
it

bystanders awaiting their turn kept reverent silence. In a short time

became very embarrassing, but until the story had been told over and over again there was no way of escape without wounding their feelings. The same thing afterward happened among the northern Arapaho in Wyoming, one chief even holding out his hands toward me with short exclamations of hu! hu! hu! as is sometimes done by the devotees about

260

JAMES MOONEY

a priest in the Ghost dance, in the hope, as he himself explained, that he

might thus be enabled to go into a trance then and there. The hope, however,

was not
I

realized.

After this preliminary ordeal

which pinon

my visitors would ask to see the things had brought back from the messiah the rabbit-skin robes, the nuts, the gaming sticks, the sacred magpie feathers, and, above all,

the sacred red paint.

was really desirous of few days after my visit to Left Hand, several of the delegates who had been sent out in the preceding August came down to see me, headed by Black Short Nose, a Cheyenne. After preliminary greetings, he stated that the Cheyenne and Arapaho were now convinced that I would tell the truth about their reUgion, and as they loved their reUgion and were anxious to have the whites know that it was all good and contained nothing bad or hostile they would now give me the message which the messiah himself had given to them, that I might take it back to show to Washington. He then took from a beaded pouch and gave to me a letter, which proved to be the message or statement of the doctrine delivered by Wovoka to the Cheyenne and Arapaho delegates, of whom Black Short Nose was one, on the occasion of their last visit to Nevada, in August, 1891, and written down on the spot, in broken EngUsh, by one of the Arapaho delegates, Casper Edson, a young man who had acquired some English education by several
at last

The Indians were

fuUy

satisfied that I

learning the truth concerning their

new

religion.

years' attendance at the

vania.

government Indian school at Carlisle, Pennsylwas a duplicate in somewhat better EngUsh, written out by a daughter of Black Short Nose, a school girl, as dictated by her father on his return. These letters contained the message to be deUvered to the two tribes, and as is expressly stated in the text were not intended to be seen by a white man. The daughter of Black Short Nose

On

the reverse page of the paper

had attempted

to erase this clause before her father brought the letter

lines

down

to

me, but the

were

still

plainly visible. It

is

the genuine official

statement of the Ghost-dance doctrine as given by the messiah himself

to his disciples. It
is

reproduced here in dupUcate and verbatim, just as

received, with a translation for the benefit of those not accustomed to

Carlisle English. In accordance with the request of the Indians, I brought

where it was read by the Indian Commissioner, Honorable T. J. Morgan, after which I had two copies made, giving one to the commissioner and retaining the other myself, returning the original to its owner. Black Short Nose.
the original to Washington,

The Messiah Letter {Arapaho version)

What you
wash
five for

get

dance four days and

home you make dance, and will give yo" the same, when you ^ ^^^^^ one day, dance day time, five days and then fift, will every body. He likes you ^^k you give him good many things, he

The Ghost-Dance Religion

261

heart been satting feel good. After you get home, will give good cloud, and give you chance to make you feel good, and he give you good spirit, and he give you
ai

a good paint.

want you to come in three [months] here, any tribs from there. good bit snow this year. Sometimes rain's, in fall, this year some rain, never give you any thing like that, grandfather said when he die never ^ cry. no hurt anybody, no fight, good behave always, it will give you satisfaction, this young man, he is a good Father and mother, dont tell no white man. lueses was on ground, he just like cloud. Every body is alive again, I dont know when
folks

You

There

will ^e

they will [be] here, may be this fall or in spring. Every body never get sick, be young again, (if young fellow no sick any more,) work for white men never trouble with him until you leave, when it shake the earth dont be afraid no harm any body.

You make
for every
will

dance for six weeks night, and put you foot [food?] in dance to eat body and wash in the water, that is all to tell, I am in to you. and you received a good words from him some time, Dont tell lie.

The Messiah Letter {Cheyenne version)

When you get home you have to make dance. You must dance four nights and one day time. You will take bath in the morning before you go to yours homes, for every body, and give you all the same as this. Jackson Wilson likes you all, he is glad to get good many things. His heart satting fully of gladness, after you get home, I will give you a good cloud and give you chance to make you feel good. 1 give you a good spirit, and give you all good paint, 1 want you people to come here again, want them in three months any tribs of you from there. There will be a good deal snow this year. Some time rains, in fall this year some rain, never give you any thing like that, grandfather, said, when they were die never cry, no hurt any body, do any harm for it, not to fight. Be a good behave always. It will give a satisfaction in your life. This young man is a good father and mother. Do not tell the white people about this, Juses is on the ground, he just like cloud. Every body is a live again. I don't know when he will be here, may be will be this fall or in spring. When it happen it may be this. There will be no sickness and return to young again. Do not refuse to work for white man or do not make any trouble with them until you leave them. When the earth shakes do not be afraid it will not hurt you. I want you to make dance for six weeks. Eat and wash good clean yourselves [The rest of the letter had been erased].
The Messiah Letter
{free

Rendering)

When you get home you must make a dance to continue five days. Dance four successive nights, and the last night keep up the dance until the morning of the fifth day, when all must bathe in the river and then disperse to their
homes. You must all do in the same way. I, Jack Wilson, love you all, and my heart is full of gladness for the gifts you have brought me. When you get home I shall give you a good cloud [rain?] which will make you feel good. 1 give you a good spirit and give you all good paint. I want you to come again in three months, some from each tribe there
[the Indian Territory].

will

There will be a good deal of snow this year and some rain. In the fall there be such a rain as I have never given you before. Grandfather [a universal title of reverence among Indians and here meaning


262

JAMES MOONEY

the messiah] says, when your friends die you must not cry. You must not hurt anybody or do harm to anyone. You must not fight. Do right always. It will
give

you

satisfaction in

life.

This young

[Possibly this refers to Casper Edson, the

man has a good father and mother. young Arapaho who wrote down this

message of

Wovoka

for the delegation].

not tell the white people about this. Jesus is now upon the earth. He appears like a cloud. The dead are all alive again. I do not know when they will be here; maybe this fall or in the spring. When the time comes there will be no more sickness and everyone will be young again. Do not refuse to work for the whites and do not make any trouble with them until you leave them. When the earth shakes [at the coming of the new world] do not be afraid. It will not hurt you. I want you to dance every six weeks. Make a feast at the dance and have food that everybody may eat. Then bathe in the water. That is all. You will receive good words again from me some time. Do not tell lies.

Do

The moral code

plicity as

inculcated

is

as pure

and comprehensive
to

in

its

sim-

anything found in religious systems from the days of

to the time of Jesus Christ.

Gautama

Buddha
It

"Do no harm

any one.

Do

right

always." Could anything be more simple, and yet

inculcates honesty
to

"Do

not

tell lies." It

more exact and exacting? "Do no preaches good will

you must not
cry,"

harm
which

any

one."" It forbids the

extravagant mourning customs formerly

friends die,

common among
is

the tribes

"When your

of by the prairie tribes as horses, the burning of tipis and destruction of property, the cutting off of the hair and the gashing of the body with knives, all of which were formerly the sickening rule at every death until forbidden by the new doctrine. As an Arapaho said to me when his little boy died, "I shall not shoot any ponies, and my wife will not gash her arms. We used to do this when our friends died, because we thought we would never see them again, and it made us feel bad. But now we know we shall all be united again." If the Kiowa had held to the Ghost-dance doctrine instead of abandoning it as they had done, they would have been spared the loss of thousands of dollars in horses, tipis, wagons, and other property destroyed, with much of the mental suffering and all of the physical laceration that resulted in consequence of the recent fatal epidemic in the tribe, when for weeks and
interpreted

forbidding the

killing

months the sound of wailing went up night and morning, and in every camp men and women could be seen daily, with dress disordered and hair cut close to the scalp, with blood hardened in clots upon the skin, or streaming from mutilated fingers and fresh gashes on face, and arms, and legs. It preaches peace with the whites and obedience to authority until the day of deliverance shall come. Above all, it forbids war "You must not fight." It is hardly possible for us to realize the tremendous and radical change which this doctrine works in the whole spirit of savage life. The career of every Indian has been the warpath. His proudest title has been that of warrior. His conversation by day and his dreams by night

The Ghost-Dance Religion

have been of bloody deeds upon the enemies of
boast was in the
his
tribe.

263
His highest

number of his scalp trophies, and his chief delight at home was in the war dance and the scalp dance. The thirst for blood and massacre seemed inborn in every man, woman, and child of every tribe. Now comes a prophet as a messenger from God to forbid not only war, but all that savors of war the war dance, the scalp dance, and even the

and his teaching is accepted and his words obeyed by four-fifths of all the warlike predatory tribes of the mountains and the great plains. Only those who have known the deadly hatred that once animated Ute, Cheyenne, and Pawnee, one toward another, and are able to contrast it with their present spirit of mutual brotherly love, can know what the Ghost-dance religion has accomplished in bringing the savage into civilization. It is such a revolution as comes but once in the
bloody torture of the sun dance
life

of a race.

The behefs held among

the various tribes in regard to the final catas-

trophe are as fairly probable as some held on the same subject by more

orthodox authorities. As to the dance

sciousness,

itself,

with

its

scenes of intense

excitement, spasmodic action, and physical exhaustion even to uncon-

such manifestations have always accompanied religious upprimitive peoples,

heavals

among

and are not

entirely

unknown among

which mediums, and the like, all these things may very out going far from home.
ourselves. In a country

produces magnetic healers, shakers, trance

easily

be paralleled with-

In conclusion,

we may

say of the prophet and his doctrine what has

been said of one of

his apostles

by a careful and competent

investigator:

"He has

given these people a better reUgion than they ever had before,
if

taught them precepts which,

faithfully carried out, will bring

better accord with their white neighbors,

their final Christianization."

them into and has prepared the way for

THE CEREMONY
after

the middle of the afternoon or later, sundown. When it begins in the afternoon, there is always an intermission of an hour or two for supper. The announcement is made by the criers, old men who assume this office apparently by tacit understanding, who go about the camp shouting in a loud voice to the people to prepare
for the dance.

The dance commonly begins about

The preliminary painting and dressing is usually a work two hours. When all is ready, the leaders walk out to the dance place, and facing inward, join hands so as to form a small circle. Then, without moving from their places they sing the opening song, according to previous agreement, in a soft undertone. Having sung it through once they raise their voices to their full strength and repeat it, this time slowly circling around in the dance. The step is different from that of most other
of about

264

JAMES MOONEY
left, fol-

Indian dances, but very simple, the dancers moving from right to

lowing the course of the sun, advancing the

the right, hardly lifting the feet
called

and following it with from the ground. For this reason it is

left

foot

by the Shoshoni the "dragging dance." All the songs are adapted measure of the dance step. As the song rises and swells the people come singly and in groups from the several tipis, and one after another joins the circle until any number from fifty to five hundred men, women, and children are in the dance. When the circle is small, each song
to the simple
is

repeated through a
circuit,

number

of circuits.

If

large,

it

is

repeated only

measured by the return of the leaders to the starting point. Each song is started in the same manner, first in an undertone while the singers stand still in their places, and then with full voice as they begin to circle around. At intervals between the songs, more especially after the trances have begun, the dancers unclasp hands and sit down to smoke or talk for a few minutes. At such times the leaders sometimes deliver
through one
short addresses or sermons, or relate the recent trance experience of the

dancer. In holding each other's hands the dancers usually intertwine the

hand as with us. Only an Indian could keep do under such circumstances. Old people hobbling along with sticks, and little children hardly past the toddling period sometimes form a part of the circle, the more vigorous dancers accommodating the movement to their weakness. Frequently a woman will be seen to join the circle with an infant upon her back and dance with the others, but should she show the least sign of approaching excitement watchful friends lead her away that no harm may come to the child. Dogs are driven off from the neighborhood of the circle lest they should run against any of those who have fallen into a trance and thus av/aken them. The dancers themselves are careful not to disturb the trance subfingers instead of grasping the

the blanket in place as they

jects while their souls are in the spirit world. Full

Indian dress

is

worn,
dis-

with buckskin, paint, and feathers, but

carded the belts

among the Sioux the women ornamented with disks of German silver, because

the

metal had come from the white man.

contrary, hats were sometimes

Among

the southern tribes,

worn

in the dance, although this

on the was not

considered in

strict
rattle,

accordance with the doctrine.

or other musical instrument
is

No
In

drum,

used in the dance, ex-

cepting sometimes by an individual dancer in imitation of a trance vision.

this respect particularly the

Ghost dance

differs

from every other Indian

dance. Neither are any

fires built

within the circle, so far as known, with

any
four

tribe excepting the

fires in

Walapai. The northern Cheyenne, however, built

a peculiar fashion outside of the circle, as already described.

dance was performed around a tree or pole planted and variously decorated. In the southern plains, however, only the Kiowa seem ever to have followed this method, they sometimes dancing around a cedar tree. On breaking the circle at the end of the

With most

tribes the

in the center

The Ghost-Dance Religion

dance the performers shook
idea of driving
all

265
their blankets or shawls in the air, with the

from the one place and the women in another, before going to their tipis. The idea of washing away evil things, spiritual as well as earthly, by bathing in running water is too natural and universal to need comment. The peculiar ceremonies of prayer and invocation, with the laying on of hands and the stroking of the face and body, have several times been described and need only be mentioned here. As trance visions became frequent the subjects strove to imitate what they had seen in the spirit world, especially where they had taken part with their departed friends in some of the old-time games. In this way gaming wheels, shinny sticks, hummers, and other toys or implements would be made and carried in future dances, accompanied with appropriate songs, until the dance sometimes took on the appearance of an exhibition of Indian curios on a small scale.
all

away

evil influences.

On

later instructions

messiah

then went

down

to bathe in the stream, the

men

in

trances, is hypnotism. It has

Ghost dance, and the secret of the been hastily assumed that hypnotic knowledge and ability belong only to an overripe civilization, such as that of India and ancient Egypt, or to the most modern period of scientific investigation. The fact is, however, that practical knowledge, if not understanding, of such things belongs to people who live near to nature, and many of the stories told by reliable travelers of the strange performances of savage shamans can be explained only on this theory. Numerous references in the works of the early Jesuit missionaries, of the Puritan writers of New England and of Enghsh explorers farther to the south, would indicate that hypnotic ability no less than sleight-of-hand dexterity formed part of the medicine-man's equipment from the Saint Lawrence to the Gulf. Enough has been said in the chapters on Smoholla and the Shakers to show that hypnotism exists among the tribes of the Columbia, and the author has had frequent opportunity to observe and study it in the Ghost dance on
feature of the

The most important

the plains. It can not be said that the Indian priests understand the phe-

nomenon,
to

to a supernatural cause, but they know how have witnessed hundreds of times. In treating of the subject in connection with the Ghost dance the author must be understood as speaking from the point of view of an observer and not as

for they ascribe

it

produce the

effect, as I

a psychologic expert.

Immediately on coming among the Arapaho and Cheyenne in 1890, I heard numerous stories of wonderful things that occurred in the Ghost dance how people died, went to heaven and came back again, and how

they talked with dead friends and brought back messages from the other
world. Quite a

number who had thus "died" were mentioned and

spirit

their

adventures in the

land were related with great particularity of

detail,

but as most of the testimony came from white men, none of

whom had

266
seen the dance for themselves,
I

JAMES MOONEY
preserved the scientific attitude of skepti-

cism. So far as could be ascertained,

agency had thought the subject

to learn whether the reports
I

sujQ&ciently

none of the intelligent people of the worthy of serious consideration

were true or false. On talking with the Indians found them unanimous in their statements as to the visions, until I began to think there might be something in it.

The

first

clew to the explanation came from the statement of his

own

experience in the trance, given by Paul Boynton, a particularly bright

Carhsle student,

His brother had died some time before, and as Paul was anxious to see and talk with him, which the new doctrine taught was possible, he attended the next Ghost dance, and
acted as
interpreter.

who

my

putting his hands

upon

the head of Sitting Bull, according to the regular

is

formula, asked him to help him see his dead brother. Paul

of an inquir-

ing disposition, and, besides his natural longing to meet his brother again,

was actuated,

He

by a desire to try "every Indian trick." had hypnotized him with the eagle feather and the motion of his hands, until he fell unconscious and did really see his brother, but awoke just as he was about to speak to him, probably because one of the dancers had accidentally brushed against him as he lay on the ground. He embodied his experience in a song which was afterward sung in the dance. From his account it seemed almost certain that the secret was hypnotism. The explanation might have occurred to me sooner but for the fact that my previous Indian informants, after the manner of some other witnesses, had told only about their trance visions, forgetting to state how the visions were brought about. This was in winter and the ground was covered deeply with snow, which stopped the dancing for several weeks. In the meantime I improved the opportunity by visiting the tipis every night to learn the songs and talk about the new religion. When the snow melted, the dances were renewed, and as by this time I had gained the confidence of the Indians I was invited to be present and thereafter on numerous occasions was able to watch the whole process by which the trances were produced. From the outside hardly anything can be seen of what goes on within the circle, but being a part of the circle myself I was able to see all that occurred inside, and by fixing attention on one subject at a time I was able to note all the stages of the phenomenon from the time the subject first attracted the notice of
as

he himself

said,

then told

how

Sitting Bull

the medicine-man, through the staggering, the rigidity, the unconsciousness,

and back again

to wakefulness.

On

two occasions

my

partner in the

dance, each time a

woman, came under

first

enabled to note the very

it

increased in violence until

and I was thus nervous tremor of her hand and mark it as she broke away and staggered toward the
the influence
first

medicine-man within the

circle.

Young women
and
lastly

are usually the

to

be

affected, then older

women,

men. Sometimes, however, a

man

proves as sensitive as the

The Ghost-Dance Religion

average

267
young Arapaho become

woman. In

particular I have seen one

rigid in the trance night after night.

He was

a Carlisle student, speaking

good English and employed

as clerk in a store.

He

afterward took part

and nights without food, drink, or sleep. He is of a quiet, religious disposition, and if of white parentage would perhaps have become a minister, but being an Indian, the same tendency leads him into the Ghost dance and the sun dance. The fact that he could endure the terrible ordeal of the sun dance would go to show
in the sun dance, dancing three days that his physical organization
is

not

frail,

as

is

frequently the case with

hypnotic or trance subjects. So far as personal observation goes, the hyp-

and healthy as the average of their seems to be a question more of temperament than of bodily condition or physique. After having observed the Ghost dance among the
notic subjects are usually as strong
tribe. It

southern tribes at intervals during a period of about four years,

parent that the hypnotic tendency
ligious
is

it is

ap-

growing, although the original re-

is dying out. The trances are now more numerous same number of dancers. Some begin to tremble and stagger almost at the beginning of the dance, without any effort on the part of the medicine-man, while formerly it was usually late in the night before the trances began, although the medicine-men were constantly at work to produce such result. In many if not in most cases the medicine-men themselves have been in trances produced in the same fashion, and must thus be considered sensitives as well as those hypnotized by them. Not every leader in the Ghost dance is able to bring about the hypnotic sleep, but anyone may try who feels so inspired. Excepting the seven chosen ones who start the songs there is no priesthood in the dance, the authority of such men as Sitting Bull and Black Coyote being due to the

excitement

among

the

voluntary recognition of their superior ability or interest in the matter.

Any man
spiration

or woman who has been from the other world, is

in a trance,
at

and has thus derived

is

in-

Mberty to go within the circle and

unsatis-

endeavor to bring others to the trance. Even when the result

factory there
is

no interference with the performer, it being held that he is but the passive instrument of a higher power and therefore in no way responsible. A marked instance of this is the case of Cedar Tree, an Arapaho poUceman, who took much interest in the dance, attending nearly every performance in his neighborhood, consecrating the ground and working within the circle to hypnotize the dancers. He was in an advanced stage of consumption, nervous and excitable to an extreme degree, and perhaps it was for this reason that those who came under his influence in the trance constantly complained that he led them on the "devil's road" instead of the "straight road;" that he made them see monstrous and horrible shapes,

but never the friends

to desist as

whom

they wished to see.

circle,

On

this

account they aU dreaded to see him at work within the

but no one

commanded him

it

was held

that he

was controlled by a

268
Stronger

JAMES MOONEY
power and was
to

be pitied rather than blamed for his ill success. Europe in connection with persons reputed to possess the evil eye. Cedar Tree himself deplored the result of his efforts and expressed the hope that by earnest prayer he might finally be able to overcome the evil influence. We shall now describe the hypnotic process as used by the operators, with the various stages of the trance. The hypnotist, usually a man, stands within the ring, holding in his hand an eagle feather or a scarf or handkerchief, white, black, or of any other color. Sometimes he holds the feather in one hand and the scarf in the other. As the dancers circle around sing-

similar idea exists in

ing the songs in time with the dance step the excitement increases until
the

more

sensitive ones are visibly affected. In order to hasten the result

Arapaho song beginassume that the subject is a woman. The first indication that she is becoming affected is a slight muscular tremor, distinctly felt by her two partners who hold her hands on either side. The medicine-man is on the watch, and as soon as he notices the woman's condition he comes over and stands immediately in front of her, looking intently into her face and whirUng the feather or the handkerchief, or both, rapidly in front of her eyes, moving slowly around with the dancers at the same time, but constantly facing the woman. All this time he keeps up a series of sharp exclamations, Hu! Hu! Hu! hke the rapid breathing of an exhausted runner. From time to time he changes the motion of the feather or handkerchief from a whirling to a rapid up-and-down movement in front of her eyes. For a while the woman continues to move around with the circle of dancers, singing the song with the others, but usually before the circuit is completed she loses control of herself entirely, and, breaking away from the partners who have hold of her hands on either side, she staggers into the ring, while the circle at once closes up again behind her. She is now standing before the medicine-man, who gives his whole attention to her, whirling the feather swiftly in front of her eyes, waving his hands before her face as though fanning her, and drawing his hand slowly from the level of her eyes away to one side or upward into the air, while her gaze follows it with a fixed stare. AU the time he keeps up the Hu! Hu! Hu! while the song and the dance go on around them without a pause. For a few minutes she continues to repeat the words of the song and keep time with the step, but in a staggering, drunken fashion. Then the words become unintelhgible sounds, and her movements violently spasmodic, until at last she becomes rigid, with her eyes shut or fixed and staring, and stands thus uttering low pitiful moans. If this is in the daytime, the operator tries to stand with his back to the sun, so that the fuU sunlight shines in the woman's face. The subject may retain this fixed, immovable posture for an indefinite time, but at last falls heavily to the ground, unconscious and motionless. The dance and the song never stop,
certain songs are sung to quicker time, notably the

ning Nu'nanu'naatani'na Hu'hu.

We

shall

The Ghost-Dance Religion

but as soon as the
another subject

269
falls

woman

the medicine-man gives his attention to

among

the dancers.

The

first

ten or twenty minutes or sometimes for hours, but disturb her, as her soul
is

one may lie unconscious for no one goes near to

spirit

At last body as in the beginning of the fit. A low moan comes from her lips, and she sits up and looks about her hke one awaking from sleep. Her whole form trembles violently, but at last she rises to her feet and staggers away from the dancers, who open the circle to let her pass. All the phenomena of recovery, except rigidity, occur in direct reverse of those which precede
with the
world.

now communing

consciousness gradually returns.

violent tremor seizes her

unconsciousness.

Sometimes before
circle or out

falling the

hypnotized subject runs wildly around the

over the prairie, or goes through various crazy evolutions like

^but only once I have seen the medicine-man point his finger almost in the face of the hypnotized subject, and then withdrawing his finger describe with it a large circle about the tipis. The subject followed the direction indicated, sometimes being hidden from view by the crowd, and finally returned, with his eyes still fixed and staring, to the place where the medicine-man was standing. There is frequently a good deal of humbug mixed with these performances, some evidently pretending to be hypnotized in order to attract notice or to bring about such a condition from force of imitation, but the greater portion is unquestionably genuine and beyond the control of the subjects. In many instances the hypnotized person spins around for minutes at a time like a dervish, or whirls the arms with apparently impossible speed, or assumes and retains until the final fall most uncomfortable positions which it would be impossible to keep for any length of time under normal conditions.

those of a lunatic.

On

one occasion

Frequently a number of persons are within the ring at once, in

various stages of trance.
three times that of

all

the

The proportion

of

women

thus affected

is

about

men.

THE SIOUX OUTBREAK OF

. . .

1890
it is

Before going into the history of

this short

but costly war

appropri-

documentary appendix to this chapter these causes are fully set forth by competent authorities civilian, miUtary, missionary, and Indian. They may be summarized as (1) unrest of the conservative element under the decay of the old life, (2) repeated neglect of promises made by the government, and (3)
ate to state briefly the causes of the outbreak. In the

hunger.
In that year, in pursuance of a policy inaugurated for bringing
of the white
all

the

In spite of wars, removals, and diminished food supply since the advent
there are about

man, they stiU number nearly 26,000. In addition to these 600 more residing in Canada. They formerly held the

270

JAMES MOONEY

headwaters of the Mississippi, extending eastward ahnost to Lake Superior, but were driven into the prairie about two centuries ago by their enemies,
the Ojibwa, after the latter had obtained firearms from the French. On coming out on the buffalo plains they became possessed of the horse, by means of which reinforcement to their own overpowering numbers the Sioux were soon enabled to assume the offensive, and in a short time had made themselves the undisputed masters of an immense territory extending, in a general way, from Minnesota to the Rocky mountains and from the Yellowstone to the Platte. A few small tribes were able to maintain their position within these limits, but only by keeping close to their strongly built permanent villages on the Missouri. Millions of buffalo to furnish unlimited food supply, thousands of horses, and hundreds of miles of free range made the Sioux, up to the year 1868, the richest and most prosperous, the proudest, and withal, perhaps, the wildest of all the tribes

of the plains.

The Sioux

are the largest

and strongest

tribe within the

United

States,

plains tribes under the direct control of the government,

a treaty was

negotiated with the Sioux living west of the Missouri by which they re-

and had "set apart and undisturbed use and occupation" so the treaty states a reservation which embraced all of the present state of South Dakota west of Missouri river. At the same time agents were appointed and agencies established for them; annuities and rations, cows, physicians, farmers, teachers, and other good things were promised them, and they agreed to allow railroad routes to be surveyed and built and military posts to be established in their territory and neighborhood. At one stroke they were reduced from a free nation to dependent wards of the government. It was stipulated also that they should be allowed to hunt within their old range, outside the limits of the reservation, so long as the buffalo abounded a proviso which, to the Indians, must have meant forever. The reservation thus estabUshed was an immense one, and would have been ample for all the Sioux while being gradually educated toward civilization, could the buffalo have remained and the white man kept away. But the times were changing. The building of the railroads brought into the plains swarms of hunters and emigrants, who began to exterminate the buffalo at such a rate that in a few years the Sioux, with all the other hunting tribes of the plains, realized that their food supply was rapidly going. Then gold was discovered in the Black hills, within the reservation, and at once thousands of miners and other thousands of lawless destheir claims to a great part of their territory

nounced

for their absolute

peradoes rushed into the country in defiance of the protests of the Indians

and the pledges of the government, and the Sioux saw

massacre, and a

their last

remaining

hunting ground taken from them. The result was the Custer war and

new agreement

in

one-third of their guaranteed reservation, including the Black

1876 by which the Sioux were shorn of hills, and

The Ghost-Dance Religion

this led to

271
tribe.

deep and widespread dissatisfaction throughout the

felt

The
felt

conservatives brooded over the past and planned opposition to further

changes which they

themselves unable to meet. The progressives

that the white man's promises

meant nothing.

On

this

point Commissioner

Morgan

says, in his statement of the causes

of the outbreak:

main support of the outcome of hunting, and with furs and pelts as articles of barter or exchange it was easy for the Sioux to procure whatever constituted for them the necessaries, the comforts, or even the luxuries of life. Within eight years from the agreement of 1876 the buffalo had gone and the Sioux had left to them alkali land and government rations. It is hard to overestimate the magnitude of the calamity, as they viewed it, which happened to these people by the sudden disappearance of the buffalo and the large diminution in the numbers of deer and other wild animals. Suddenly, almost without warning, they were expected at once and without previous training to settle
Prior to the agreement of 1876 buffalo and deer were the
Sioux. Food, tents, bedding were the direct

down

to the pursuits of agriculture in a land largely unfitted for such use.

The

freedom of the chase was to be exchanged for the idleness of the camp. The boundless range was to be abandoned for the circumscribed reservation, and abundance of plenty to be supplanted by limited and decreasing government subsistence and supplies. Under these circumstances it is not in human nature not to be discontented and restless, even turbulent and violent. {Comr., 28.)
It

took our

savagery into civiUzation.

own Aryan ancestors untold Was it reasonable to

centuries to

develop from

expect that the Sioux could

do the same

in fourteen years?

The white population in the Black hills had rapidly increased, and it had become desirable to open communication between eastern and western
Dakota.

To accompUsh

Sioux reservation, and in 1882, only

been

seized,

was proposed to cut out the heart of the six years after the Black hills had the Sioux were called on to surrender more territory. A comthis, it

mission was sent out to treat with them, but the price offered
8 cents per acre

was

only about

so absurdly small, and the methods used so palpably

unjust, that friends of the Indians interposed

the measure in Congress.

and succeeded in defeating Another agreement was prepared, but experience had made the Indians suspicious, and it was not until a third commission went out, under the chairmanship of General Crook, known to the Indians as a brave soldier and an honorable man, that the Sioux consented to treat. The result, after much effort on the part of the commission and determined opposition by the conservatives, was another agreement, in 1889, by which the Sioux surrendered one-half (about 11,000,000 acres) of their remaining territory, and the great reservation was cut up into five smaller ones, the northern and southern reservations being separated by a strip 60 miles wide. Then came a swift accumulation of miseries. Dakota is an arid country with thin soil and short seasons. Although well adapted to grazing it is not

272
suited to agriculture, as
is

JAMES MOONEY
sufficiently

proven by the fact that the white Nebraska have several times been obliged to call for state or federal assistance on account of failure of crops. To wild Indians hardly in from the warpath the problem was much more serious. As General Miles points out in his ofl&cial report, thousands of
settlers in that

and the adjoining

state of

white settlers after years of successive failures had given up the struggle

and

left

the country, but the Indians, confined to reservations, were unable

to emigrate,

and were

also as a rule unable to find

employment, as the

whites might, by which they could earn a subsistence.

The

buffalo

was

gone. They must depend on their cattle, their crops, and the government
rations issued in return for the lands they

had surrendered.

If these failed,

they must starve.

that
all

The

highest official authorities concur in the statement

of these did

fail,

and that the Indians were driven to outbreak by

starvation.

In 1888 their cattle had been diminished by disease. In 1889 their

crops were a failure, owing largely to the fact that the Indians had been
called into the agency in the middle of the farming season
to treat with the commission, going

and kept there

back afterward to

find their fields

trampled and torn up by stock during their absence. Then followed epi-

demics of measles, grippe, and whooping cough, in rapid succession and

with terribly fatal results.

needs not the

Anyone who understands the Indian testimony of witnesses to know the mental effect

character
thus pro-

duced. SuUenness and gloom, amounting almost to despair, settled

down

on the Sioux, children were

be killed

especially
all

among

the wilder portion.

dying from the face of the earth,

"The people said their and they might as well

at once."

Then came another

entire failure of crops in 1890,

and an unexpected reduction of rations, and the Indians were brought face to face with starvation. They had been expressly and repeatedly told by the commission that their rations would not be affected by their signing the treaty, but immediately on the consummation of the agreement Congress cut down their beef rations by 2,000,000 pounds at Rosebud, 1,000,000 at Pine Ridge, and in less proportion at other agencies. Earnest protest against this reduction was made by the commission which had negotiated the treaty, by Commissioner Morgan, and by General Miles, but still Congress failed to remedy the matter until the Sioux had actually been driven to rebellion. As Commissioner Morgan states, "It was not until January, 1891, after the troubles, that an appropriation of $100,000 was made by Congress for additional beef for the Sioux." The protest of the commission, a full year before the outbreak, as quoted by Commissioner Morgan, is strong and positive on this point. Commissioner Morgan, while claiming that the Sioux had before been receiving more rations than they were justly entitled to according to their census number, and denying that the reduction was such as to cause even extreme suffering, yet states that the reduction was especially unwise at

The Ghost-Dance Religion

this juncture, as

273

Indians, and
to

it was in direct violation of the promises made to the would be used as an argument by those opposed to the treaty show that the government cared nothing for the Indians after it had

obtained their lands.

It is

quite possible that the former

number

of rations

was greater than the actual number of persons, as it is always a difi&cult matter to count roving Indians, and the difficulties were greater when the old census was made. The census is taken at long intervals and the tendency is nearly always toward a decrease. Furthermore, it has usually been the policy with agents to hold their Indians quiet by keeping them as well fed as possible. On the other hand, it must be remembered that the issue is based on the weight of the cattle as delivered at the agency in the fall, and that months of exposure to a Dakota winter will reduce this weight by several hundred pounds to the animal. The ojS&cial investigation by Captain Hurst at Cheyenne River agency shows conclusively that the essential food items of meat, flour, and coffee were far below the amount stipulated by the treaty. In regard to the effect of this food deficiency Bishop Hare says: "The people were often hungry and, the physicians in many cases said, died, when taken sick, not so much from disease as for want of food." General Miles says: "The fact that they had not received sufficient food is admitted by the agents and the officers of the government who have had opportunities of knowing," and in another place he states that in spite of crop failures and other difficulties, after the sale of the reservation "instead of an increase, or even a reasonable supply for their support, they have been compelled to hve on half and two-thirds rations and received nothing for the surrender of their lands." The testimony from every agency is all to the same effect. There were other causes of dissatisfaction, some local and others general and chronic, which need not be detailed here. Prominent among them were the failure of Congress to make payment of the money due the Sioux for the lands recently ceded, or to have the new lines surveyed promptly so that the Indians might know what was stiU theirs and select their allotments
accordingly; failure to reimburse the friendly Indians for horses confis-

cated fourteen years before; the tardy arrival of annuities, consisting largely
of winter clothing, which according to the treaty were due

by the

1st of

August, but which seldom arrived until the middle of winter; the sweeping

and frequent changes of agency employees from the agent down, preventing anything like a systematic working out of any consistent policy, and

almost always operating against the good of the service, especially at Pine

McGillycuddy was followed by such a one as Royer and, finally, the Ghost dance. The Ghost dance itself, in the form which it assumed among the Sioux, was only a symptom and expression of the real causes of dissatisfaction, and with such a man as McGillycuddy or McLaughlin in charge at Pine

Ridge, where so brave and efficient a

man

as

274

JAMES MOONEY

Ridge there would have been no outbreak, in spite of broken promises and starvation, and the Indians could have been controlled until Congress had afforded rehef That it was not the cause of the outbreak is sufficiently proved by the fact that there was no serious trouble, excepting on the occasion of the attempt to arrest Sitting Bull, on any other of the Sioux reservations, and none at all among any of the other Ghost-dancing tribes from the Missouri to the Sierras, although the doctrine and the dance were held by nearly every tribe within that area and are still held by the more important. Among the Paiute, where the doctrine originated and the messiah has his home, there was never the slightest trouble. It is significant that Commissioner Morgan in his official statement of the causes of the out.

break places the "messiah craze" eleventh in a

list

of twelve, the twelfth

being the alarm created by the appearance of troops. The Sioux outbreak
of 1890 was due entirely to local grievances, recent or long standing. The remedy and preventive for similar trouble in the future is sufficiently indicated in the appended statements of competent authorities.

PART

IV

PRESERVING

THE REMNANTS
OF INDIAN CULTURES:
The Role of the
Private

Museums

Introduction
by Ruth L. Bunzel
THE INTELLECTUAL CLIMATE OF THE LAST HALF OF THE NINETEENTH
century was dominated by the writings of Darwin and Huxley and by the
unfolding of man's prehistoric past.

The increased
of Yale

interest in natural sci-

ence expressed
natural history.

itself in

the foundation of the great private

museums

of

and Harvard and the American Museum of Natural History in New York, were established within a short time of each other. They preceded by a few years the National

The Peabody Museums

Museum

in Washington.

In 1866 George Foster Peabody, a native of Massachusetts

who had

founded the Peabody Museum of Harvard University "to preserve the antiquities of America which were fast disappear." The archaeological and ethnological collections were to be housed ing. in a separate wing of the University Museum, a natural history museum designed by Louis Agassiz in 1859. The collections included, besides

grown

rich in England,

specimens, "a Sioux hunting shirt and other by Francis Parkman in 1846," collections made by Miss Alice Fletcher from the Omaha, Sioux and Nez Perce, including paraphernalia of the Sun Dance of the Oglala. At this time a museum was an institution which collected and housed material objects. Twenty years later Peabody came to realize that a museum may have a function as a center of research and education and he endowed the first chair of American Archaeology and Ethnology at Harvard. Frederick Ward Putnam was appointed to the new chair, and he also became curator of the Museum. Instruction was given in the Museum, a tradition still observed at Harvard. A few years later Frank Russell and Roland B. Dixon joined the staff of the department, and Harvard and Peabody were well launched on a program of teaching and research. It is fortunate
extensive

archaeological

objects collected

for anthropology that the directors

of the great

museums

realized

at

an early date that there

jects to

is

a body of knowledge as well as material obtheir responsibility for preserving

it.

be preserved, and recognized

its

Peabody Museum has emphasized archaeology. It acquired extensive archaeological collections and in the early years of this century sent out annual expeditions to Mexico and Central America. The list of those who worked for the Museum in this field includes such
Throughout
history the

276

Preserving the

Remnants

of Indian Cultures
Saville,

277
Spinden, Morley,
Tozzer,

distinguished scholars

as Maudslay,

Lothrop, and Kidder.

in 1868. It

The American Museum of Natural History followed a few years later, was first housed in the old Armory in Central Park while the South Wing of the present building was under construction. John David
Wolfe, the
first

president, outlined the aims of the

".
. . .

annual report:

recognizing the necessity of such a

Museum in his museum

first

as a

means of education and recreation ... we have, if properly supported and aided with funds by our fellow citizens, a guarantee of a prosperous future in the formation of a Museum of Natural History that will be second to none and which, while affording amusement and instruction to the public wiU be the means of teaching our youth to appreciate the wonderful works of the Creator." In accordance with these aims Albert S. Bickmore, who was superintendent when the Museum moved into its new
building in

1877, inaugurated the system of education in the natural

sciences in conjunction with the city schools

to the present day.

which has been maintained

was under the presidency of Morris K. Jesup (1881-1908) that its own. Jesup was a man of great vigor and also of much wealth which he disbursed lavishly. He was deeply committed to anthropology. In his report of 1884 appealing for funds he expressed the purpose of the Museum as follows: ". Perhaps some child of genius, whose susceptibihties and faculties once aroused and quickened will repay in the field of discovery and science, through the force of some new law in its manifold applications, all your expenditures a hundredfold. Commercial values and purely scientific values meet often on common ground; but their essential life belongs to opposite poles. To some it appears necessary to vindicate the employment of large amounts of public money from the charge of extravagance. Their ideas of value appear to be limited to that which is exchangeable in the current coin of the market. But the highest results of character and fife offer something which cannot be weighed in the balances of the merchant, be he ever so
It

anthropology came fully into

wise in his generation."

Jesup estabhshed the Department of Anthropology and brought Frederick

Ward Putnam from Cambridge

and ethnological

to

head

it.

He

extended the archaeoprivate collecof

logical
tions.

sections, acquiring

many famous

He

also gathered about

him a remarkable group

men

including

Boas, SaviUe, Bandelier, Lumholtz, Harlan Smith, the Russian anthro-

and Bogoras, and many more. The central endeavor was the organization of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, a plan for the investigation of aU aspects of aboriginal life in an area extending from Puget Sound to the Arctic coast of Alaska and
pologists Jochelson

of his administration

including the adjacent parts of Asia. Jesup described the aims of the ex-

278
pedition in his report for 1892: ".
. .

RUTH
the theory
[is

L.

BUNZEL
America
. .
.

held] that

was

originally

peopled by migratory tribes from the Asiatic continent.

gratified to learn that

The
feel

opportunities for solving this problem are rapidly disappearing.

would be deeply

some

friends of the

Museum may

disposed to contribute means for the prosecution of systematic in-

vestigations in the
falsity of the

hope of securing data

to

demonstrate the truth or

claims set forth by various prominent

men

of science."

The

expedition got under

way

in 1897,

pological project undertaken in

and was the most extensive anthroAmerica up to that time.

Today we would
tribes studied

call the

Jesup Expedition a "project," since the various

were not visited in turn by the "expedition" but were studied individually by men who had Httle contact with one another; the separate
studies followed

no

fixed plan. In addition to conventional ethnographic

descriptions there were studies of social structure, of ceremonialism, of

art; collections

of myths and tales and texts relating to everyday

life;

number

of studies of racial types

on both

sides of Bering Strait;

this

and the

beginning of the archaeological investigation of

important area.

The Jesup Expedition

an area previously but
tific

yielded a vast

amount

of ethnographic data

on
in-

little

known.

Its findings still

provide the only scien-

data on certain tribes.

all

The

reports are a great

mine of valuable

formation and not

of the precious metal has been extracted.

The

field

own

work was completed in 1903, excepting that Boas never considered his field work among the Kwakiutl finished. He returned to their territory as late as 1931 at the age of seventy-three while he was president of the American Association for the Advancement of Science. The next area to be tackled in a concerted effort was the Northern Plains of North America, where the rapid collapse of Plains culture gave
these researches a special urgency.

Although the emphasis at the Museum of Natural History has always been on ethnology, archaeology was never wholly neglected. John Alden Mason collected material from Mexico and Central America. Nels C. Nelson had a wide knowledge of the prehistoric civiHzations of both the old and the new world. His outstanding original research was in the Southwest, where he established the first chronology based on sequences of pottery types, which was later incorporated into Kidder's more extensive scheme. LesHe Spier also made a notable contribution to archaeological method when he used a statistical analysis of pottery types for
establishing chronological relationships.

ALFRED VINCENT KIDDER

(1885)

Alfred Vincent Kidder

ciation

is

with intense specialization in his

an archaeologist who combines breadth of view own work. Kidder belongs, by assoofficial

and

loyalties, to

Peabody and Harvard, although he had no

connection with Harvard after getting his degree, and spent only one

Museum as Curator of American Archaeology. His work in the Southwest was done for the Phillips Academy, Andover, and his work in Central America for the Carnegie Institution of Washington. In 1915 he began excavation at Pecos, New Mexico, a pueblo in the Rio Grande area which had a long history and which had been abandoned
year in the Peabody only in the 19th century. He continued excavation at Pecos until 1929. These excavations resulted in the establishment of a stratigraphy with a ceiling, with a known date, and with lower levels tying it to other sites. At a conference he organized at Pecos in the late 20's attended by virtually all the archaeologists and ethnologists then working in the Southwest, a definitive chronology was set up and a new nomenclature for Southwestern cultures and periods was agreed on. Kidder was convinced through his Southwest experience that archaeology and ethnology had much to
contribute to each other, which led in the 30's to his great design for
interdisciplinary areal research in

the

Guatemala Highlands.

Kidder summarized the

in his book.

results of

Southwestern archaeological research

An

Introduction to the Study of Southwestern Archaeology,

the

first is

book

such synthesis for any American area. The final chapter of this here reproduced. Although written more than twenty-five years

and although much work has been done in the Southwest since that time, it is still the standard introduction, and the new discoveries, such as the very early remains discovered in Bat Cave and other sites, merely fill in the outlines which Kidder has drawn. The one point where Kidder's interpretations have been superseded is in physical anthropology. Kidder clings to the old theory of a change in physical type in the pre-Pueblo horizon. Since Seltzer's work on Pueblo skulls, it is now generally accepted that they represent a continuous series. R.L.B.
ago, even before the Pecos Conference,

279

280

ALFRED VINCENT KIDDER

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

THE DATA, SO FAR AS
before us.
It

WE CAN SUMMARIZE THEM

AT PRESENT, ARE

NOW

remains to combine them into some sort of coherent whole.

This can best be done in the form of an historical reconstruction, but it must be remembered that such a reconstruction is merely a working hypothesis, designed to correlate our information, and to indicate more clearly the needs of future study. We must have no hesitation in abandoning our conclusions, partly or in toto,
if

contradictory evidence appears.

enough to postulate the former presence in the Southwest of a more or less nomadic people, thinly scattered over the country, ignorant of agriculture and of pottery-making. Their life must have resembled closely that of the modern Digger tribes of the Plateau; that is to say, they dwelt in more or less makeshift houses, and subsisted principally on small game: rabbits, prairie dogs, and doves; and on such wild vegetable products as grass-seeds, berries, and roots. As to their language, it is less safe to speculate; but from the fact that peoples of Uto-Aztecan speech seem to have formed the basic population of the highlands from Montana far south into Mexico, it is quite likely that they belonged to that group. Whoever they were, there could not have been many of them, for the natural food resources of the Southwest were probably, even in those ancient times, not sufficient to support more than a very small population. Remains of these aborigines have not yet been discovered, nor will they be easy to distinguish from those of such modern nomads as the Apache and Paiute, unless they are found buried below the
begin with,
it is

To

safe

relics of later cultures.

These supposedly original Southwesterners eventually acquired the knowledge of corn-growing; they took up farming in a more or less haphazard way, but its practice did not at first react very strongly upon their

way

of

life;

for the Basket Makers, as

we
are

call the earliest agriculturists,

apparently had no permanent houses, nor did they

the date of the introduction of corn
to

make

pottery.
it is

As

to

we

still

ignorant, but

possible

make

certain deductions.
in
is

Corn was originally brought under cultivation Mexico or Central America. This general locality
which grows only in that region.^

the

highlands

of

indicated by the

identification of the probable wild ancestor of corn, a heavy-seeded grass

How

long ago Mexican agriculture began

From Kidder, An introduction to the study of Southwestern archaeology with a preliminary account of the excavations at Pecos, Department of Archaeology, Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass. (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1924), pp. 118-124.
1 J.

W.

Harshberger, "Maize:

a botanical and economic study,"

I,

Contributions

from

the Botanical Laboratory of the Univ. of Pennsylvania, Vol.

No. 2 (1893).

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

is

281

unknown; the remains indeed, of the first farmers, the Mexican Basket Makers so to speak, still await discovery. Corn, however, is a very highly specialized cereal, a fact which would seem to indicate great antiquity. Be that as it may, corn-growing was without any question the factor which made possible the development of all the higher American civilizations, and so the discovery of agriculture must have long antedated their rise. Now the Maya, apparently the oldest and certainly the most brilliant of these civilizations, was at its zenith during the sixth century of the Christian era; and its complex calendar system, which we must suppose to have taken several centuries to develop, had undoubtedly been perfected by the year 1 a.d.^ It is, therefore, not rash to guess that the Maya began to differentiate themselves from the other archaic corn-growing peoples as long ago as 1000 B.C. Judging by the rate of progress made by nascent civilizations elsewhere in the world, it seems safe to allow at least two thousand years more for the period that elapsed between the time of the first cultivation of corn (say at about 3000 B.C.) and the beginnings of the Maya culture. During these two millenniums we must allow for the early, localized practice of agriculture in the highlands; and the subsequent very extensive diffusion of the primitive corn-growing, pottery-making complex known as the Archaic Mexican culture.^ All this somewhat speculative time-reckoning does not help us directly
in our attempt to arrive at an approximate date for the introduction of

farming in the Southwest, and the consequent springing up there of the

Basket Maker culture; but

it

does give us a certain sense of perspective,

that the Basket

and makes them lived

it

seem quite possible

Makers

as

we know

Christ. I believe, indeed, because of the simple

hundred or two thousand years before and undifferentiated nature of Basket Maker corn, that the practice of corn-growing may have spread into the Southwest in the pre-Archaic period of Mexico, and that the
as long ago as fifteen

influence of the developed Archaic

is

perhaps to be seen in the pottery

and crude
There

figurines of the post-Basket

Makers.
entire

is still

another set of considerations which bear on the question

of chronology, namely, the the Pueblo civilization

problem of whether the

development of

was an autochthonous one, or whether it consisted from without. If the second supposition be true, the post-Basket Maker stage might have grown up elsewhere and imposed itself directly on the antecedent Basket Maker, the pre-Pueblo on the post-Basket Maker, and the true Pueblo on the preof a series of cultural leaps stimulated

Pueblo. Such a process would not necessarily have required a great stretch
2 Since the

above was written Spinden has announced in the press the discovery

calendar was in use as early as the seventh century before Christ. For a valuable discussion of the Archaic, see H. J. Spinden, "Ancient Civilizations of Mexico and Central America," American Museum of Natural History, Handbook Series, No. 3, second edition (New York, 1922).
that the
3

Maya

282

ALFRED VINCENT KIDDER

of time, for the long developmental stages of each culture might have taken

place in other areas.

When
is

our knowledge of Southwestern archaeology was

less full

than

it

main periods were not recognizable, and a theory of development by jumps or influxes seemed necessary to account for the observed facts. Now that transitions are beginning to be found, it is becoming increasingly evident that the Southwest owes to outside sources little more than the germs of its culture, and that its development from those germs has been a local and almost wholly an independent one. This being the case, the time required must have been long, and the postulated date of Basket Maker origin of 1500 to 2000 B.C. does not seem at all improbable. At some early time, then, the Southwestern nomads took up the practice of corn-growing; but at first their agriculture sat lightly upon them; their crops were not of sufficient importance, nor had their methods of cultivation become intensive enough, to tie them very closely to their fields. Eventually, however, better care brought fuller harvests, and it became necessary to provide storage places for the garnered grain. Where caves were available they were used, holes being dug in the floors for caches. The population undoubtedly increased, and the leisure acquired from the possession of surplus food-stuffs, and the consequent partial release from the exacting requirements of the chase, allowed the people to work at, and to perfect, their arts, and to lavish time upon elaborate sandal weaves, fine basketry, and carefuUy made implements. But they were
today, transition stages between the
as yet ignorant of pottery.

southcentral and southeastern

Such were the Basket Makers. Their range is known to have covered Utah and northeastern Arizona (fig. 22); but from the fact that the knowledge of agriculture and the seeds of corn reached them from the south, it is probable that tribes of similar culture occupied parts of New Mexico and southern Arizona, and stretched southward well into Mexico. It seems hkely, however, that Basket Maker culture reached its highest and most characteristic development in the San Juan, for the cultures which appear to have developed from it, and which ultimately spread out and gave rise to the later Pueblo civilization, had their origin, as wiU be shown presently, in that country. In the course of time the Basket Makers, becoming more and more dependent upon their crops, and correspondingly more sedentary in habit, either discovered for themselves, or (more probably) learned from tribes to the south, that vessels fashioned from clay, dried in the sun, and finally fired, were easier to make, and more suitable for holding water and for cooking, than the baskets that had hitherto served these purposes. At about the same period they began to enlarge their storage cists into dwellings, to wall them higher with slabs, and to provide them with pole-andbrush roofs. These two great advances mark the opening of the post-

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

283

Fig. 22. DISTRIBUTION

OF BASKET MAKER THE PRESENT TIME.

SITES AS

KNOWN AT

Basket

the Basket

Maker period. That its culture was merely a developed phase of Maker there can be little doubt, the headform of the people

remained the same, several old Basket-Maker arts, such as twined-woven bag making, held on in degenerate form, and the territory occupied includes most of the known Basket Maker country. Post-Basket Maker remains occur throughout the whole San Juan drainage and also appear in
the northern parts of the Little Colorado watershed.

Guernsey has found indications that the pottery of certain post-Basket sites is much cruder than that of others, and Morris's Long-Hollow settlements with their well-decorated black-on-white ware would seem to represent a late phase of the culture little inferior to the pre-Pueblo.^ Thus

Maker

* E.

H. Morris, "Preliminary Account of the Antiquities of the Region between

the

of of

Mancos and La Plata Rivers in Southwestern Colorado," Twenty-third Report the Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington, 1919), pp. 155-206; and review same by Kidder and Guernsey in American Anthropologist, N. S. Vol. 22, No. 3

(1920), pp. 285-288.

284

ALFRED VINCENT KTODER

a hint that the post-Basket Maker period was a long one, during which a steady evolution in aU the arts went on. There now comes one of the apparent breaks in continuity which formerly made it seem that Southwestern growth must have advanced in leaps stimulated from without the area. To be explicit: the pre-Pueblo, the next stage of which we have knowledge, shows a population with an entirely different headform. Furthermore, the houses began to be grouped into more or less compact conmiunities. It must be remembered that pre-Pueblo remains were known long before the discovery of the post-Basket Maker stage, and the gap between pre-Pueblo and Basket Maker was accordingly so very wide that it was hard to see any relationship between the two. With the post-Basket Maker culture now becoming understood, however, the break is being narrowed; we have the post-Basket Maker slab-walled house standing between the Basket Maker cist and the pre-Pueblo dwelling, and the crude and advanced styles of post-Basket Maker pottery to indicate a local growth in

we have

that art.

The new and so

far unexplained elements in the pre-Pueblo

com-

plex are the presence of the bow-and-arrow, the use of cotton, and particularly the practice of skull deformation.

The
always
to teU

skulls of the

Basket Makers and post-Basket Makers are dolicho-

cephalic and undeformed; those of the pre-Pueblo are, as far as

artificially flattened posteriorly.

we know,
it

This flattening renders

difficult

what the natural form of the head might have been, and it is possible that the mere introduction of hard-bedded cradles (a not very radical cultural change) might have caused this effect, and that the pre-Pueblos were really as long-headed as their predecessors. My feeling is, however, that the pre-Pueblo were actually of a different physical type, naturally brachycephaUc, and that their broad-headedness was merely accentuated by deformation.^ It seems, therefore, that we must recognize the arrival in the Southwest of a new race, which eventually became the preponderating one, to the submergence of the old doMchocephalic strain. But (and this point deserves emphasis) the new people, if such they were, introduced no new cultural elements except cotton and perhaps the bow-and-arrow. The really vital traits, agriculture, pottery, and semi-permanent houses, were already in the possession of the post-Basket Makers. The broad-heads, then, merely took over the old way of life and added certain improvements; but in general carried it on in a perfectly normal course of
development.

The pre-Pueblo period saw some

tion of the Southwest
pied.

increase in the agricultural popula-

and a considerable enlargement in the territory occuPre-Pueblo sites are found throughout the entire San Juan country,

5 For a discussion of the relation between skull deformation and headform see Hooton, Peabody Museum Papers, vol. vui, no. 1, pp. 85-89.

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

as well as in parts of the

285
Little

Rio Grande, the

Colorado, and the upper

it

Gila

(fig.

24). Wherever this culture penetrated

resulted in the intro-

more or less permanent settlements and in the manufacture of black-on-white and neck-coiled pottery. It is probable that as the houses became more solidly built, more drawn together, and more commonly
duction of

Fig. 24. DISTRIBUTION

OF PRE-PUEBLO SITES AS KNOWN AT THE PRESENT TIME.

survival of the subterranean

above ground, there was evolved a rudimentary type of kiva, a ceremonial and semi-subterranean dwellings of former
days.
in northeastern

Such rooms have been found in association with pre-Pueblo ruins Arizona and southwestern Colorado,^ both sites in the San Juan drainage. The San Juan, indeed, appears to have been the breeding ground and place of dissemination of aU the traits typical of the prePueblo culture, for it is there that the remains are most abundant and most

6 A. V. Eadder and S. J. Guernsey, "Archaeological Explorations in Northeastern Arizona," Bulletin 65, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington, 1919). Morris, op. cit., p. 186.

286

ALFRED VINCENT KIDDER

highly specialized; and as one goes out from the San Juan one seems to
find the pre-Pueblo culture considerably less advanced.

At

the present time

we

possess enough data as to pre-Pueblo ruins to

enable us to characterize them fairly accurately.

We

also

have abundant

data as to the developed Pueblo culture. But the small pueblo-like ruins
that

presumably were built during the transition period between the two Morris observes/ practically unknown. I use the term "transition" advisedly, for it is evident that there was no sharp break, either in culture
are, as

or in race between pre-Pueblo and Pueblo.

that these small ruins

It is most important, then, be sought out and excavated, because in them we should find the germs of all the traits that were later developed and combined to form the classic Pueblo culture.

Lacking these data, we are forced to proceed with our reconstruction on the basis of very scanty information. All we know is that scattered over
almost the entire Southwest are
taining corrugated
little

ruins built of horizontally coursed

masonry, or of adobe, with closely grouped rectangular rooms and con-

and black-on-white

pottery. All such sites I class to-

gether as belonging to the early Pueblo period, for wherever they are even
cursorily investigated they prove to have antedated the larger pueblos.

The hmits
east

of their

and north

to Great Salt

enormous range Lake

(fig.

25) extend from southern Nevada

in Utah, east again to Colorado,

down

Rio Grande, east again around the southern end of the Rockies practically to the Texas border, thence southwest across New Mexico to the neighborhood of El Paso, along the southern border of New Mexico, south of the headwaters of the Gila and Salt, along the southern base of the Mogollons, thence across to the edge of the western Arizona desert and so northwest to southern Nevada. The only parts of the Southwest in which so far no remains of the small-house, black-on-white pottery people of the early Pueblo period have been found, are the Lower Gila and the Chihuahua basin. Thus it appears that the early Pueblo culture spread far and wide over country which had not previously been occupied by pre-Pueblos. I speak
the edge of the Rockies to the headwaters of the

of

it

with considerable confidence as a spreading, for

in several districts.
all

it is

virtually out of

the question that so uniform a culture could have sprung

up simultaneously

and independently

We

must, therefore, search for the

points toward the San Juan drainage. It may, of course, be due to the fact that the San Juan has been more thoroughly worked than other areas, but it is nevertheless very suggestive, that the most abundant and most highly developed exemplifications of the early cultures (the Basket Maker, post-Basket Maker, and pre-Pueblo) have been found in or near that country. And when we consider the early

point of origin, and

the information

we now have

'^

Academy

E. H. Morris, "Chronology of the San Juan area," Proceedings of the National of Sciences, Vol. 7 (1921), pp. 18-22.

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

287

ruins are very

Pueblo remains we seem to see the same state of affairs. Early Pueblo abundant in the San Juan, and they possess the traits most

characteristic of

ruins in any other area.

Pueblo culture in greater perfection than do the early To be explicit: corrugated ware is at this period
in the

of
as

marked excellence

we proceed outward;

the

San Juan, and becomes progressively cruder same is true, though perhaps to a less extent,
an early high speless specialized less

in the case of black-on-white; the kiva also reaches

cialization in the

San Juan, and becomes

get.
still

common and

the further

away we

As

to other architectural traits

we cannot

yet

speak, our data being

too scanty, but as will be shown in the considerastyle of building also

tion of a later period, the typical pueblo have worked outward from the San Juan.

seems to

San Juan, probably in the northern tribuhad begun to build their houses of horizontally coursed masonry and to work their rooms into rectangular form. In so doing they were faced by the necessity of keeping certain round chambers, already used for ceremonies, separate from the house-clusters. These took on more and more the aspect of places apart, became speciaUzed in construction and in function, and so finally developed into what we call kivas. At the same time the methods of pottery-making were improved; the neck coils of the pre-Pueblo water jars and cooking pots were found to be pleasing, and possibly also of practical value in increasing evaporation or the conduction of heat; they were accordingly
in the
taries,

Somewhere, then,

the pre-Puebloans

extended to cover the entire bodies of the vessels. Black-on-white decoration

became more

varied.

The above improvements

in architecture

and

ceramics were taken over by neighboring groups, and having, so to speak,

a head start over most of pre-Pueblo culture, did not encounter the re-

by other localized improvements. They accordingly spread very easily. How rapidly they spread we have at present no means of knowing, but from the fact that great territorial expansion involved very little change, it would seem that the process must have been a relatively quick one.* At all events the early Pueblo culture ultimately diffused itself well beyond the former range of the pre-Pueblo, and became planted, as has been said, in territory not hitherto occupied by sedentary peoples. I think that this was not due to actual migration, but rather to a taking over of the culture by tribes who were already semiagricultural, and therefore ready to embrace the manifest advantages of the new form of hfe. A certain increase in population, however, must have been brought about by the greater ease of existence and security of food-supply; and this increase would naturally have been most rapid at the original point of diffusion, and so would have caused more or less outward pressure therefrom.
sistance of competition
8 parallel phenomenon is seen in the wide and uniform extension of the Archaic culture in middle America, see Spinden, op. cit.. Chap. I.

288
I

ALFRED VINCENT KTODER

have tentatively located the centre of diffusion in the San Juan, and believe that because of the early advantage thus gained by the inhabi-

San Juan, they continued for a long time to be the leaders in the development of Southwestern culture. They seem to have evolved, late in this period, the "unit-type" dwelling, a compact and eminently practical home for a small farming community, and one which, as Prudden originally suggested, appears to have had a very important influence on the form of all later pueblo structures. In assigning aU smaU ruins containing true corrugated ware and more or less unspeciahzed black-on-white pottery to the early Pueblo period, I may of course be in error, it is wholly possible that some of the examples in the outlying regions may be peripheral survivals into much later times; but, as will be shown presently, the forces that tended to break up this early widespread population, and to concentrate it into more compact groups, would have been particularly unfavorable for the
tants of the

persistence of small isolated settlements along the borders.

The small

sites

show, as a general
villages are

rule,

little

provision for defense

seldom large, nor do they often occupy protective sites. Gradually, however, we begin to see the working of the forces mentioned in the last paragraph which were ultimately to bring
against enemies.

The

about the concentrations typical of the later prehistoric and the historic Pueblo periods. To what this integration may have been due cannot be
stated definitely, but I

am

inclined to see in

it

the result of hostile pressure

from without rather than the effect of climatic change. To begin with, many of the districts which were shortly to be abandoned are stiU among the most favorable as to water supply in the entire Southwest; secondly, many peripheral ruins (as in western Utah and eastern New Mexico) were seemingly deserted at an early time; lastly, the more recent villages are larger, and stronger, and occupy more easily defensible sites, than
the older ones.

From

the very beginning of agricultural

life

in the

Southwest there

must have been strife between the farmers and the hunting tribes. Even the Basket Makers probably had their difficulties with wilder neighbors. But, as has been said before, the Southwest is a land too poor in game to have supported a large non-agricultural population, and the first sedentary people presumably had few foes to trouble them. As the early Pueblos, however, increased in prosperity, and began to extend their sphere of influence outward from the point of origin, they presumably came in contact with the more powerful hunting tribes of the Great Plains, of the Rocky Mountains, and of the northern Plateau. Attacks by these hunters brought the latter rich stores of garnered corn, and they soon came to realize that by raiding the practically defenseless small towns they could supplement their food-supply and so maintain themselves in territory not hitherto open to them because of lack of game.

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

289

It is not necessary to postulate any great incursion of nomads. A few bands working in here and there and adopting a semi-parasitic existence might well have been suflBcient to bring about the observed results. But when such a process was started, even in a smaU way, it must have had

most far-reaching consequences. The parasite ultimately destroys its and is then forced to seek new prey; and the nomad once blooded, so to speak, by the sack of frontier settlements, had to push farther in to gratify his new tastes. Ruined farmers, too, their crops destroyed or stolen, might themselves have turned hunter-raiders and so increased the inward pressure. Wars between village and village, or between stock and stock, may also have occurred, but as yet we have Uttle evidence of such
the
host,

feuds.

There

is

reason to believe that the region north of the Colorado river

was

first

given up, although some settlements evidently held out for a

Canyon and in the Virgin valley. In the northern San luan the "unit type" villages began to bunch together to form somewhat larger aggregations; the same thing appears to have gone on in the Mesa Verde country and south of the San Juan. In the Kayenta region there seems at first to have been less trouble. In the Rio Grande,
and the upper Gila and Salt there was also little or no change from the easy, small-village life of earlier times. Until this stage the danger from the postulated nomads seems to have come from the north, and the outlying Pueblos were pushed in, or destroyed. Now, however, wild tribes appear to have infiltrated from aU sides. They spread out over the San Juan basin, and carried their incursions well to the south. The result was that the small towns of the San Juan had to be abandoned; but instead of giving up the struggle, their inhabitants gathered together in large communities, and these large communities became more or less isolated from each other. Thus their enemies seem to have forced the Pueblos into that very form of life which, by fostering communal effort, was to permit them to attain their
the Little Colorado,

time along the Grand

highest cultural achievements.

I stress here, as before, the influence of the

nomadic enemy; for

this

appears to

me

best to explain the observed facts of Pueblo history.

The
in
. .

same

facts,

however,

may

also be,

and indeed have been, explained

accordance with the theory of a progressive dessication of the Southwest.^

Although the question

available seems to

is still

an open one, the bulk of the evidence

now

me

to indicate that as far

Basket Makers the climate was

much

the

back as the time of the same as it is today; and that

9E. L. Hewett, J. Henderson, W. W. Robbins, "The physiography of the Rio Grande Valley, New Mexico, in relation to Pueblo culture," Bulletin 54, Bureau of American Ethnology (Washington, 1913). E. Huntington, "The climatic Factor as illustrated in arid America," Publications of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, No. 192 (1914).

290

ALFRED VINCENT KIDDER

aridity, comparable to that of the present, has from the very beginning been one of the most vital factors in shaping Southwestern culture. I find it, therefore, hard to believe in a progressive drying up of the country

during the period of

its occupancy by man. Whatever the cause may have been, whether

aridity,

the

attacks

of

savage enemies, or a combination of the two; the Pueblos gave up great

stretches of outlying territory,

and entered that stage of

In the San Juan
it

their history

began to congregate into large communities, which we may call the Great Period,
fig.

or the Period of Specialization (see

25).

was indeed a Great Period, for it saw the building of the Chaco Canyon towns, the Mesa Verde cliS-houses and canyon-head fortresses, as well as the imposing cliff-dwellings of the Kayenta country. In the south, compact pueblos sprang up on the Rio Grande, on the Little Colorado, and even on the Upper Gila and Salt. Still further to the

OF POPULATION DURING THE VARIOUS PERIODS OF PUEBLO HISTORY. EARLY PERIOD (UNSHADED). GREAT PERIOD (OBLIQUE SHADING). LATE PREHISTORIC PERIOD (HORIZONTAL SHADING). PERIOD OF THE CONQUEST (BLACK). PRESENT-DAY PUEBLO VILLAGES (WHITE DOTS).
Fig. 25. DISTRIBUTION

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

south in northern Chihuahua, and to the southwest on the
there were

291

Lower

Gila,

coming

into

being the great adobe "casas grandes".

is

The

archaeology of the latter regions

peculiar architecture has

too

little

understood to permit

much

speculation as to the origin and growth of their cultures; but though their

no recognized prototype

in the Southwest, their

is definitely puebloan in style. My feeling is that these two related and contemporaneous civilizations were rather rapidly achieved results of an amalgamation of Mexican Indians, forced northward, with Pueblos forced or strayed south. At all events it is probable that the ChihuahuaGila cultures were just beginning to get under way at the time that the maximum development was taking place in the Chaco and on the Mesa

pottery

Verde.

The underlying causes

into

for the Great Period are not hard to discern.

Pressure of one sort or another had forced the Pueblos to draw together

munity of

where community of interest stimulated comconfronting them were sufficient to spur them to their best endeavors, but not great enough to stunt their progress. Life was not too easy, nor yet too hard. They had reached that vital moment in their history when opportunity and necessity were evenly balanced. And, as before, the San Juan was the seat of the highest
large

aggregations,

effort.

The

difficulties

development; the achievements of

its

people in architecture, in the

arts,

and probably also in social and rehgious organization, were obviously of great importance in determining the development of the peoples to the south of them. This is most clearly seen in the spread of the massedterraced style of building which during the Great Period began to come into vogue in the Rio Grande and the Little Colorado. It was fortunate for the persistence of Pueblo culture that these tendencies did work southward, for the time of the San Juan was at hand. In spite of aU they could do, the people of this region were finally forced to give up the struggle; but that they made a hard fight of it is witnessed by the strongly fortified nature of the latest dwellings, and the protective sites chosen for them, particularly in the frontier districts of the north.^" But eventually Chaco Canyon was abandoned; then the Mesa Verde; lastly the Kayenta plateau; and from that time on the San Juan ceased to play any significant part in Pueblo history.^^ As to the date of the desertion of the San Juan we have no information; but from the fact that pottery of Toltecan type has been found at Pueblo
'^^ For example, the system of watchtowers evolved in the McElmo-Yellowjacket country. See S. G. Morley and A. V. Kidder, "The archaeology of McElmo Canyon, Colorado," El Palacio, Vol. IV, No. 4 (Santa Fe, 1917), p. 43.

The occupation of the Gobernador-Largo district after the revolt of 1680, and the possible use of Canyon de Chelly by the Hopi were merely temporary, see J. W. Fewkes, "Hopi ceremonial frames from Cafion de Chelly, Arizona," American Anthropologist, N. S., Vol. 8, No. 4 (1906), pp. 66411

(see Kidder, op. cit.);

670.

292
Bonito,
it

ALFRED VINCENT KTODER

would seem
that these ruins

must have been inhabited

at

some

time between 800 and 1100 a.d. Their abandonment can hardly have been much later than 1100, for, as wiU be shown below, a considerable
length of time must have elapsed between that event and the
of
arrival

Europeans in 1540. At the same time as the giving up of the San Juan, or shortly after, their inhabitants left the villages of the Upper Gila. At a somewhat later date the Lower Gila and Chihuahua basin settlements were abandoned. What caused this wholesale exodus of the Pueblos from their former

homes we do not know. Many diverse factors doubtless operated; but from the fact that the process was merely a continuation of the concentoward the geographical centre of the Southwest which began at the close of the early Pueblo period, it seems likely that the same cause, pressure by nomads, was again responsible. The result in deserted territory is obvious, but what the effect upon the actual size of Pueblo
tration

population

may have

been,

is

harder to gauge. There must have been a not likely that the entire population of
out.

considerable shrinkage, but

the

it is

abandoned regions was wiped

Although

am

disincUned to allow
Zuiii clan migra-

any great degree of

tion stories, they

historical accuracy to the

Hopi and

do seem to indicate that both communities received increments of population from the north and the south. The best argument for a movement of people from the peripherae toward the centre is provided by the marked increase in the number and size of pueblo ruins of relatively late date in and near that centre. During the early Pueblo period and even in the Great Period that had just closed, the Rio Grande and the Little Colorado were not very densely populated. The towns of those times (i.e., the black-on-white sites) were small when numerous, and few when they became larger; now, however, just as the northern and southern districts were being abandoned, villages became much more abundant and much greater in size. As examples of this we may name the great pueblos of the Rio Grande from Socorro to the headwaters of the Chama, and the many new towns that sprang up in the Zuni country, along the Little Colorado, and about the Hopi mesas. I think the connection between the two sets of phenomena, abandonment of the outlying districts and sudden increase in population in the central areas, cannot be mistaken. The puzzhng thing about it is that the incoming people brought with them so little of their local cultures. No adobe "casas grandes" were built in the Little Colorado, no towns of the Mesa Verde or Chaco types were erected in the Rio Grande. The old styles of pottery became extinct, or were altered so rapidly and completely that the transitional stages have escaped identification. It would seem as if the transference of people must have been by small groups, rather than by whole communities, an infiltration rather than a migration. Each successive increment became amalgamated with the resident group that

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

it
it,

293
and strengthened
if

joined, adopted the local culture, probably stimulated

possibly influenced
it

it

to a certain extent, but seldom,

its

ever, succeeded

in changing

radically, or in turning
it

course of development sharply

away from

the channels in which

was already running.

As to the date of this era of redistribution we are as yet ignorant, but we must consider that it took place some centuries before 1540, because we have to allow time for the rise, development, and partial decUne of the
glazed pottery technique between the end of the Great Period and the

coming of the Spaniards. It is reasonably certain that Glaze 1 of the Rio Grande series did not originate until after the abandonment of the Chaco ruins, for no Glaze 1 pottery, or its accompanying Biscuit wares, have ever been found at a Chaco site; nor has any Chaco black-on-white turned up in Glaze 1 Rio Grande settlements. As, however, the actual dating of many prehistoric ruins may be expected during the next few
years,
it is

not necessary or even advisable at the present time to indulge

in dating

by guesswork.
the redistribution

had become well advanced, the entire Pueblo population was concentrated in the limits indicated on the map (see fig. 25). The shrinkage in territory held, and probably also to some extent in actual numerical strength, was not yet over, for many districts were abandoned between this time and the conquest. For example, a great number of large towns on the Chama and its tributaries, on the Pajarito plateau, and further south along the Rio Grande were certainly deserted before 1540. The same is true of many settlements in the Zuhi country, along the Little Colorado, and in the Hopi region. In this we seem to see merely a continuation of the pressure that had been felt ever since the early days of the true Pueblo period, rather than the working of new factors. The upshot of it was that in 1540 the entire population was gathered together in sixty or seventy towns, strung out along the Rio Grande from Socorro to Taos, and running westward in a narrow, interrupted line through Acoma and Zuni to the Hopi villages. The still further shrinkage in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, the giving up of the Piro and Tano areas, and the concentration of many groups of other stocks into a smaller number of communities, are matters of documentary record. It should be noted that the extermination of the Piro was largely due to the persecution of the Apache. To recapitulate, the Pueblo civilization owed its origin to stimuli from without, but once well on its feet it developed in its own peculiar way. It passed through an early phase of wide territorial expansion marked by great uniformity of culture. It then drew in upon itself and enjoyed a period of eflQorescence characterized by strong speciaUzation in its different branches. Finally it underwent great hardship, suffered a further diminution of territory, and in 1540 was waging a hard fight for mere
existence.

When

294

ALFRED VINCENT KIDDER

races have gone as far toward civilization as did the Pueblos
retaining the essential

Few
while

still

peoples, as they advanced

democracy of primitive life. Most other from savagery, have first set up for themselves,
of,

and

later fallen

under the domination

rulers temporal or religious;

aristocracies

or theocracies have sprung up, and the gap between the

masses and the classes has become wider and wider. But among the
Pueblos no such tendency ever
ate the

made headway;

there were neither very

sort of quarters,

rich nor very poor, every family lived in the

same

and

same
life

sort of food, as every other family.

Preeminence
ability

in social or

rehgious

was

to

be gained solely by individual

and was the

reward of services rendered to the community. In the 16th century the Pueblos had fallen upon hard times; they had been forced from many of their old ranges, were reduced in numbers,

and had lost something of their former skill in material accomplishments. But their customs had not changed, and they still held out undismayed among their savage enemies. There can be little doubt that had they been allowed to work out their own salvation, they could eventually have overcome their difficulties, and might well have built up a civilization of a sort not yet attempted by any group of men. It is the tragedy of native American history that so much human effort has come to naught, and that so many hopeful experiments in life and in hving were cut short by the devastating bhght of the white man's arrival. The sketch of Pueblo history which has just been presented is the merest outline. Great bodies of data have been lumped together, and no account has been taken of various complexities which are known to be present in some of the regions discussed. Many of the correlations made between one area and another are also unsatisfactorily vague, and some of them rest on the unreliable evidence of surface finds. Many corrections will have to be made, some of them, perhaps, fundamental. But whether or not our working hypothesis can stand the severe tests which we hope to apply to it in the future, it has shown how much still remains to be done. Nevertheless, we are far enough along in our studies to realize that the problems of any given district can be solved, and that accurate correlations between the different districts can eventually be made, so that in the end we shall surely be able to reconstruct with surprising fullness the history not only of the Pueblo culture in its perfected form, but also that of the early cultures from which it originated. The material is remarkably abundant, and, thanks to the dry climate of the Southwest, extraordinarily well preserved. I

know

possible exception of Peru,

of no other area in the Americas, with the where all the steps in the development of a
civiliza-

people from nomadic savagery to a comparatively high degree of

tion,

can be traced so accurately and with such a wealth of

the long task
is

detail.

When

finished,

we

shall
is,

story, but the

aim of our researches

be able to tell a most interesting or should be, a much broader

Southwestern Archaeology: Conclusions

295

one than that. We must use our results for the solution of those general problems of anthropological science without a true understanding of which we can never hope to arrive at valid conclusions as to the history
of

mankind

as a whole.

Anthropologists,

particularly

those

with the various manifestations of

loosely,

who have concerned themselves human culture, have reasoned very

evolve theories which

is

have been prone to draw inferences from fragmentary data, to fit well with preconceived ideas. In no science

the need for empirical study

more keenly

felt.

We

have had much

writing

upon

culture growth, trait transmission, divergent

and convergent
closely,

evolution, the tendencies of primitive art, the influence of environment

on

culture,

and the

like.

But when one examines these writings

one finds all too often that they are based on data or even historically incorrect.

insufficient in quantity

The Southwest alone cannot,

relatively short time

of course, give us final answers to any

of these broader problems, for the Southwest

was only occupied

for a

by a

single small

branch of the

human

race.

as to that time,

and
this

as to that people,
least, full

we can

learn a great deal;

But and we

shaU have, for

rect.

area at
is

data which are also historically cor-

As chronology

the basis of history, information bearing

is diligently to

of Southwestern remains

be sought

for,

on the age and we must be

constantly

on the lookout

for

new methods

of obtaining

it.

ALFRED

M.

TOZZER

(1877-1954)

Like the

sacrificial

pool of Chicken
venture into
it.

Itza, the field of

Mayan

scholarship

swallows those
rarely returns,
plexities.

Once a man enters its depths he but becomes more and more deeply involved in its com-

who

Alfred

M. Tozzer was an

exceptional

Mayan

scholar for, in spite of deto

voting the greater part of a long and active

life

an intensive study of

Mayan
was

problems, he nevertheless was able to communicate with his fellow

anthropologists.

He was

Mayan

scholar with a difference, because he

first

also an ethnologist. In fact he

of linguistics.

when

its

entered the Mayan field by way Yucatan he visited Chichen Itza cenote was being dredged; he was to return many years later to

On

his first field trip to

studies related to this event.

He

followed his linguistic research with three

seasons of field work among the Lacandones, a contemporary Mayan people of the Chiapas jungles. He headed one archaeological expedition
to Tikal

and

Nakum

in

1910, and spent one year, cut short by political

events, as Director of the International School of

It is

Archaeology

in

Mexico.
corir-

not as a field archaeologist that Tozzer

made

his greatest

tribution, but as

a teacher and a synthesizer.

When

the objects dredged

Museum
lication

out of the cenote of Chichen Itza came into the possession of the Peabody of Harvard University, Tozzer planned a comprehensive pub-

on them
Itza,

that

would cover

the

history,

art,

and

industries

of

Chichen

an endeavor that continued to occupy him until his death. As a by-product of this research he translated and edited the account of Mayan life by Diego de Landa, first Bishop of Yucatan, a document that ranks with those of Sahagun and Las Casas. Tozzer died before his

monumental work on Chichen Itza was published. Tozzer was one of the great teachers of anthropology. For a long time the emphasis at Harvard was on archaeology, and most of Tozzer's students became archaeologists. But some of his breadth of view, his interest in the relationship of archaeology to ethnology and linguistics and to R.L.B. early documentary sources, left its mark on his students.

296

Chronological Aspects of American Archaeology

297

Chronological Aspects of American

Archaeology
very nebulous state characterized, in

FOR MANY DECADES THE STUDY OF AMERICAN ARCILEOLOGY WAS IN A many cases, by inaccurate observation, bold assumptions, and a general ignorance of the more scientific
approach to the subject. These defects have, in great part, been remedied by a wider vision, a more careful training of investigators, more accurate
observation, and a gradual tendency to place archaeology

among

the

more

exact sciences.

American Archasology has

to

also suffered a certain stigma for

its

failure

hand-maiden with an accompanying chronology to give a certain vigor to its findings. It must be admitted that archsological data have an inert quality, a certain spinelessness when unaccompanied by a more or less definite chronological background. The psychologists may be able to teU us why we must have dates accompanying objects of antiquity to make them seem interesting and of value, whether these objects consist of furniture, a piece of pewter, or specimens coming from the graves of our early inhabitants. This paper is an attempt to give American Archaeology an internal skeleton and thus to raise it
produce a hterature as
its

to the status of a vertebrate.

It

should be pointed out at once that the classification and nomenapplied to European archseology cannot be used for the
is

clature

New

World. This
are

not due to the scarcity of the data but to the fact that there
in America. Iron

no metal ages

was unknown

as a metal before the

advent of the white man^ and the smelting of copper was not practised
except in certain regions on the western coast of South America, Central

America and
tempt
at

parts of Mexico. Bronze, the resultant of a dehberate mixing copper and tin, was even less widely distributed.

at-

There are two aspects of chronology the first of which is a relative one, and dissociated with any larger aspect of time-relation. In northern New England and the maritime provinces of Canada as well as in other parts of the eastern United States, there are weU-defined evidences of an earHer and a later pre-Columbian occupation, but there are
self-contained,

no means of bringing these background of history.

at present

different cultures into the general

From
1

the Mass. Hist.

Tozzer, "Chronological Aspects of American Archaeology," Proceedings of Soc, Vol. LIX (Boston, 1926), pp. 283-292.
iron.

The Eskimo made some use of meteoric

298

ALFRED M. TOZZER
variety of chronology

The second

and the one

that has far

more mter-

est for us here

has to do with definite epochs correlated with our

own

time-system, pre-historic passing over to the historic.

In the study of archaeology as a whole there are four elements of

control;

geology,

palaeontology,

stratigraphy,

and the development of

types from cruder to

more developed forms. Geology and palaeontology

may be

disregarded here as the question of primitive

man

in

America,

in the real sense of "first," does not

concern

us.

No

attempt will be

made

to prove or disprove the much-discussed question of the presence of

in the

man

New World

in geologically ancient times.

Stratification is of the

utmost importance as showing successive occueach stratum indicating a more or

less distinct

pation of the same

site,

culture aUied with a time-element. In the Southwest, Dr. Kidder

and Mr.

Guernsey of the Peabody

culture. 2

Museum have found

who were

four different levels of

On

the original floor of caves has been found the evidence of a

people called "The Basket Makers"

expert in the making of

without pottery but were

baskets,

woven

objects,

textiles,

and sandals.

They were at the very horizon corn. Above this there are data

of agriculture with only one variety of

indicating two cultures differing sUghtly from each other with a first knowledge of pottery-making, this art developing rapidly. There are also included several varieties of com indicating a more varied agricultural life. Finally there comes the top-most stratum, commonly called "Pueblo," with pottery and several of the other arts finely developed together with an abundant agriculture, developed under very adverse conditions. Until a few years ago, the CHff-dwellers and other Pueblo peoples belonging to the last epoch, were the only early

inhabitants recognized in this region.

More

intensive research has thus

added three new elements in the archaeology of the Southwest.

Stratification has also
five

come

to our assistance in Mexico.^

Four and

meters below the present floor of the VaUey of Mexico and in some

cases under

many

feet of volcanic deposits there

has come to light the

so-called Archaic culture, characterized by crude clay figurines and several types of pottery.

Most botanists interested in the question of the beginning of agriculture in America are now agreed that a grass, called Teocentli, found wild on the highlands of Mexico, is probably the progenitor of cultivated maize which the first American colonists found, on
their advent, over the greater part of the

New

World.

It is

probable that

2 Guernsey, S. J. and Kidder, A. V., Basket-maker caves in northeastern Arizona: Papers of the Peabody Museum, Cambridge, viii. No. 2, 1921, and Kidder and Guernsey, Archaeological explorations in northeastern Arizona: Bulletin 65, Bureau of American Ethnology, Washington, 1919. 3 Tozzer, A. M., The domain of the Aztecs and their relation to the prehistoric cultures of Mexico: Holmes Anniversary Volume, Washington, 1916. Spinden, H. J., Ancient civilizations of Mexico and Central America: American Museum of Natural History, (2d. ed.), Nevi^ York, 1922.

Chronological Aspects of American Archaeology

299

the Archaic peoples were responsible for the artificial cultivation of this
grass, the invention of agriculture,

and

also for the dissemination of this

new

industry over the arid portions of

Mexico and Central America.^

Figurines characteristic of the Archaic culture are found in

as far south as

many

places

Nicaragua and Costa Rica with modified types stretching

is found and over this

into South

America.
all

Returning to the Valley of Mexico, above the Archaic horizon

the Toltec culture, the greatest of

Mexican

civilizations,

and only for a few inches on the surface appear the evidences of the As will be shown later, the Aztec and Toltec periods can be definitely dated. Stratification also gives definite results on the succession of cultures in Peru, showing that of the Inca as a very late product. The second chronological approach to the study of archaeology is the investigation of the development of styhstic methods of decoration, mainly on pottery, of architecture, and of other products of man's activities. By an intensive study of the different ceramic wares of the Pueblo culture and
Aztecs.
after taking into

account the various data available a definite sequence of

pottery types and of decoration has been established from pre-Columbian

down

to

modern

times.^

When

successive forms of the artistic impulse are found in connection

is

with definite strata there

of this development.

abundant proof of a time sequence as the basis

as in the

When,

Maya

area,

various changes in

architecture

and

in design

go hand in hand with datable monuments,

chronological

there

is

a sofid foundation for history.

to
this

Another approach
objects far

study

is

the

migration

of

from

their original place of

manufacture, trade pieces, foreign

to their present habitat

but easily recognized as coming from afar.

is

Red

coral, for

example, from the Mediterranean

found

in graves

of the

early Iron

Age

in

England. Dated Egyptian scarabs, found in Crete, were

a great factor in establishing the entire chronology of the

Aegean

culture.

The

close association of objects in the

same deposit prove

that they are,

in a sense,

contemporaneous. This does not necessarily mean that they

at the

were made
time.

same time but

that they

were deposited

at the

same
have
later

Heirloom pieces of carved

jade, dating

back several

centuries,

been dredged from a great natural well in Yucatan. These are not
they are very

than the objects with which they are associated but, as a matter of fact,

much

earlier

than most of the associated remains.

If

sherds

of a jar with a very special type of plaster cloisonne decoration are found
in

Pueblo Bonito in northern

New Mexico

and the home of

this type of

4 Spinden, H. J., The origin and spread of agriculture in America: Proceedings of the 19th. International Congress of Americanists, Washington, 1917.

5 Kidder, A. V., An introduction to the study of Southwestern Archaeology with a preliminary account of the excavations at Pecos; New Haven, 1924.

300
technique
is

ALFRED M. TOZZER
in the Toltec culture in the Valley of Mexico, and, further-

more,

if

this

same pottery
is

is

found in a

late period of

site in

northern

Yucatan, there

every reason to suppose that a contemporaneous feature

can be assumed here. Movements in the other direction from the Maya region to the northward is shown by one of the finest of Maya jade ornaments found at San Juan Teotihuacan. This probably originated in the
southern part of the
style,

Maya

area as

it

is

carved in the best Old Empire

traveUing from

Guatemala

to

northern Yucatan and thence to

Mexico during

the Toltec period of Yucatan.

made

in Colombia, Nicaragua,

Gold figurines, definitely and Costa Rica and found in late Maya

deposits, again help in the elucidation of a relative chronology.

No

metal

objects of any kind have ever been found in the early

it

Maya

sites

so that

seems quite clear that the knowledge of metallurgy came from the

south at a comparatively late period.

in early times, stretching in this

These stray pieces also show the great importance of trade relations case from Colombia in the south to

northern

New Mexico

in the north, a distance of about thirty degrees of

latitude or about three

thousand miles.

The
relative

factors of stratification, stylistic development,

and the association

only by means

of objects from widely separated areas are aU useful in establishing a

chronology of a

site

or a series of

sites

but

it is

of dated

monuments

correlated with Christian chronology that

we

arrive

on

satisfactory historical ground.

The Maya

area in southern Mexico and

northern Central America presents evidence of an elaborate calendar as

shown
ture
is

in the hieroglyphic inscriptions, the

most remarkable achievement

these inscriptions that a litera-

of the intellect in the

New

World.

It is in

provided American Archaeology.

material for the study of the hieroglyphic writing includes stone

The

on stelae and altars set up in front of the various on the door-Hntels of buildings, a few painted inscriptions, three codices dating back to pre-Columbian times, and the so-called Books of Chilam Balam, manuscripts written in the Maya language but with
inscriptions carved

temples,

Spanish characters. These are in

many

cases copies of original docu-

ments reduced to writing

as

after the

advent of the Spaniards.^

There were two steps necessary in the elucidation of the

Maya

calendar

shown

in

the

hieroglyphic inscriptions,

the

first

of which

was the

determination of the calendar giving a relative chronology, the position of

the different

monuments

in

an inclusive

series within the

Maya

area. This

succession

is

definitely correlated with the stylistic

development of stone

^Tozzer, A. M., The Chilam Balam Books and the possibility of their translation: Proceedings of the 19th Interntional Congress of Americanists, Washington, 1915. Also, Tozzer, Maya Grammar: Papers of the Peabody Museum, Cambridge, ex. 182-192, 1921.

Chronological Aspects of American Archaeology

carving and of architecture.

301

We

are thus certain of the historical devel-

opment of the Maya civihzationJ The second step was a correlation between the Maya and Christian
chronology. In both these fields the late Charles P. Bowditch, long a

member

of this Society, played a very large part.

so admirable and so necessary, advances have been

several others,
Institution,

From his pioneer work, made in this study by

latter

among them being Mr.

J.

S.

G. Morley of the Carnegie

and Dr. H.

Spinden of the Peabody Museum. The

has shown conclusively that the

Maya

calendar began to function in

613 B.c.^ The earliest dated inscription is on a small jade statuette of 96 B.C. The oldest Maya remains are found in the district of Peten in northern Guatemala. The great cities of this area flourished from about the beginning of the Christian Era until about 650 a.d. In the first half of the seventh century the southern cities seems to have been abandoned as no late dates appear there and a movement was made to the northward. Northern Yucatan was first populated about 450 a.d. and remained a center about two hundred years. The ancient chronicles in the Chilam Balam Books state that there was a period of abandonment of the northern part of this country from 630 to 960 a.d. when the sites in southern Yucatan were built. A great period of expansion in the north took place from 960 to about 1200 during which time a league of cities was formed. The most interesting period began about 1200 when foreigners entered the country. These were the Toltecs from Mexico under the leadership of
Quetzalcoatl.

This figure was for

in all culture-heroes, a

a long time

considered to

have been purely

is

mythological, dimly related to certain historical events, but, as

common

vague and nebulous individual. Dr. Spinden has lately shown that Quetzalcoatl, far from being a myth, was a very real person one of the great characters of history, "a warrior, a priest, an

administrator,

and a

scientist."

He

served as leader of a force of Mexicans

who put down

a rebellion of the

Mayas

in 1191,

subduing Chichen-Itza

and making it a Toltec city. It was he who created much of the pomp and ceremony later used by the Aztec rulers and described with such vividness

by the Spaniards. The Toltecs brought with them a new religion and new art forms and the period from 1191 to 1450, when Mayapan fell and the Maya civiliza7^

Spinden, H. J., A Study of Maya Art: Memoirs of the Peabody Museum, vi. Cambridge, 1913. 8 Bowditch, C. P., The numeration. Calendar systems and astronomical knowledge of the Mayas, Cambridge, 1910. Also by same author. On the age of the Maya ruins: American Anthropologist, (n. s.), m. 697-700. Morley, S. G., The inscriptions at Copan: Carnegie Institution of Washington, Washington, 1920, especially Appendix II. See also Morley's Bibliography in this volume. Spinden, H. J., The reduction of Mayan dates: Papers of the Peabody Museum, vi. No. 4, Cambridge, 1924, and other
writings.

302
tion practically ceased to exist,

ALFRED M. TOZZER

was marked, especially at Chichen-Itza, by a very strong Mexican influence. This city has the longest recorded history of any in the New World, ancient or modern, of over eight hundred years.

The

arrival of the Toltecs in

side enables us to supply

Yucatan with them with a definite

definite dates

on the Maya

historical

background, thus

supplanting their mythological dates of origins and of migrations.

The

great empire of the Toltecs centering at San Juan Teotihuacan, thirty miles

north of the present Mexico City, dates from about 1000 a.d. to 1200 a.d.
Lesser
sites in

the Valley of

Mexico continued

to

be occupied by these

people until the coming of the Spaniards. The Toltecs had in their early days been strongly influenced by the early Maya culture in Guatemala which reached them from the south and west as shown by Maya details
occurring at
of

Monte Alban and Xochicalco. There was

The calendar

also a migration

Maya

features northward along the coast of the Gulf of Mexico, reach-

ing through the Totonacan area.

of the Toltecs

and

later of the

Aztecs undoubtedly was derived from that of the Mayas. The great expansion of the Toltec empire included practically aU of the

non-Maya peoples

of central and southern Mexico, Guatemala, and as far south as Nicaragua and Costa Rica. Thus the Toltecs, receiving the seeds of culture and the calendar from the early and southern Mayas, later played a large part
in shaping the destinies of the northern
history.

Mayas

in the last period of their

The Aztecs who

scene.

receive

most of the

credit in the popular

mind

for the

achievements in cultural lines in Mexico were very late arrivals on the

They did not reach

the shores of the lake

they were later to build their capital until 1325.

on an island of which They came as a wild

1351 when

hunting tribe from the north, remaining undisturbed until

they suffered defeat and enslavement at the hands of the Toltecs. Their

period of expansion and preeminence did not begin until 1376 and even
in

1519 under Montezuma they held only a fraction of the territory that was included in the Toltec empire in 1200. Every feature of their life was borrowed from the Toltecs and several of the Toltec cities in the Valley of Mexico never were completely subjugated by the Aztecs.
There are several dark spots in the picture I have tried to draw. We do not know what led the Mayas to abandon their great cities in the south and move northward. The exhaustion of cultivatable land may have been one of the reasons. We are also ignorant as to the events which led up to the fall of this civilization about 1450. Civil war, the injurious
effects of the

presence of foreigners, and, in

all

all

probability, epidemics of

yellow fever were

possibly contributory.

our ignorance of the beginnings of the Maya peoples. It is certain that those responsible for this civilization were American natives and that their development is not due to any influence
spot,

The darkest

however,

is

Chronological Aspects of American Archaeology

outside the

303

New
it

up
see

in situ, as

were,

World. The impossibiUty that such a culture could grow is always brought forward by those who think they

superficial

peoples.

outside

similarities between the Mayas and certain Mongolian The calendar alone which no one has tried to prove originated of America shows the mental equipment of the Mayas, the pres-

ence of genius in their midst. A few naturally gifted individuals, a knowledge of agriculture, and a good environment are probably alone responsible for the beginnings of the
It will

Maya

civihzation.
at the

be remembered that the Archaic peoples were probably

horizon of agriculture and our next step must be to find a connection

between them and the Mayas. There have never been found undisturbed contacts between these two peoples. This may be due to the comparatively small amount of actual excavation which has been undertaken in the older Maya sites. Archaic figurines appear in the UUoa Valley in Honduras but they have been washed down from river-bank deposits and have seldom been found in their original positions. This is within the Maya area and there ought to be some possibihty here of finding the two cultures, the Maya superimposed on the Archaic. Dr. S. K. Lothrop of the Heye Museum and Dr. Manuel Gamio have lately reported the presence of Archaic remains in Salvador and on the highlands of Guatemala and
these discoveries
for an answer.

may

settle

this

question of contact which

is

pressing

There must, necessarily, have been long centuries of slow

beginnings and small achievements by the early

Maya

before they burst

upon

the world about the beginning of the Christian

civilization, characterized

Era with a highly

art

developed

by great

cities,

an elaborate

and

architecture,

a highly organized theocracy,

a remarkable

astronomical

knowledge, and a calendar system which was in actual operation for over

was destroyed by the Spaniards. Marginal corrections Maya year and of the true solar year, a means more accurate than our method of interpolating days. It should be pointed out that it was not until 1582 that the Julian day was invented, which corresponded to the Maya day count, 2000 years after the same principle had been adopted by the Mayas. With the definite chronology thus established and its day-for-day correlation with the Mexican cultures, there is every reason to hope that with the study of the migrations of objects and stylistic contacts there will come a time when the sequences of cultures in our own Southwest and also those of the great civilizations of South America will be attached to
1900 years
until
it

were applied to take care of the variation of the

the historical fabric.

Finally, as the result of

values

comes out

clearly:

modern

research, a certain readjustment of

the small contribution

made by

the Aztecs

by the Toltecs with their far-reaching empire, and the far greater primary impetus and development of a great civilization with astronomical knowledge and a
to the ancient cultures of Mexico, the large part played

304
calendar by the

ALFRED M. TOZZER

Mayas who handed

all this

on

to the other peoples of

Middle America.
If there are included in our history the present inhabitants of Yucatan and the Lacandones of Guatemala, also a Maya people, who still carry out many of the pre-Columbian rehgious practices, a definite historical background has been supplied to American Archaeology, starting in the sixth century before Christ and extending in an unbroken series for over 2500 years.

FRANZ BOAS
(1858-1942)

which he was most successful both in the development of his theories and in the influence which he exerted on museum technique in America. Boas first became involved in this aspect of museum work when he supervised the arrangement of ethnological collections for the Chicago Columbian Exposition in 1893 the collections which became the nucleus of the Field Museum. After this he came to the American Museum of Natural History, where his first task was the installation, in the nowfamous Northwest Coast Hall, of the Bishop collection of materials gathered in British Columbia by J. W. Powell in 1882. He went on to arrange other North American Indian collections. These halls marked a departure in museum technique by grouping together stressing ethnic rather than typological connections all the materials from one tribe or one area to illustrate a way of life. The older principle of arrangement, followed by Mason at the National Museum, grouped together all objects of a given
fields in

One of the less well-known aspects museum curator, yet it is one of the

of Boas' career

was

his

work as a

type, regardless of origin

all baskets, textiles, pottery, etc.

Boas' arrange-

ments provided a model for all subsequent collections at the Museum of Natural History and other ethnological museums throughout the country, and even influenced European museums (e.g. the new importance given to ethnic groupings in the recent rearrangement of the Musee de I'homme in Paris). Many refinements in techniques of display have been introduced since Boas' day habitat groups, dramatic lighting and sound effects, the

almost total elimination of cases so that the spectator goes into the collection instead of looking at it but they have simply served to emphasize

Boas' principles.

Boas' approach to

held convictions: his concern with

museum problems reflects some of his most strongly man and man's way of living in the

world, and, as a corollary of this preoccupation, his concern with culture

wholes and the interrelationship of their parts

in this case all the objects

used by any group of people. He grouped together baskets and canoes and ceremonial paraphernalia as material expressions of a unique style of life. The second theme he stressed in his grouping of halls was the
305

306

FRANZ BOAS

importance of geographical relationships and the point he frequently spelled out in his writing and teaching, that more can be learned about
cultural processes by a study of variants within a continuous geographical

area than by juxtaposing elements showing formal similarity but having

no known genetic connection. Out

the

of this heuristic device of grouping

together geographically related cultures for purposes of comparison

came

germs of the culture-area concept. The fantastic style of Northwest Coast art, so different from the simplicity of Eskimo carving, was one of the things that first attracted Boas to the Northwest Coast cultures. What thought lay behind these grotesque distortions, these superimpositions of animal forms, this elaboration and proliferation of ornament over the whole decorative field? Boas wrote his first study of the art of the North Pacific Coast, in 1897. He rewrote it several times. The last and fullest treatment is contained in his book. Primitive Art
(1927).

He

did not change his ideas or his interpretations, but continued

to incorporate

new

material out of his delight in the limitless ingenuity of

the artists in decorating their

or house fronts.

R.L.B.

spoon handles or bracelets or dance hats

The Decorative Art of the North Pacific Coast

IT

HAS BEEN SHOWN THAT THE MOTIVES OF THE DECORATIVE ART OF

MANY

peoples developed largely from representations of animals. In course of

time, forms that were originally realistic

became more and more

sketchy,

and more and more

distorted.

Details,

even large proportions, of the

subject so represented were omitted, until finally the design attained a

purely geometric character.

The decorative

art of the Indians of the

North
its

Pacific

Coast agrees

with this oft-observed phenomenon in that

clusively animals. It differs

subjects

are almost ex-

from other arts in that the process of conventionalizing has not led to the development of geometric designs, but that the parts of the animal body may still be recognized as such. The body of the animal, however, undergoes very fundamental changes in the arrangement and size of its parts. In the following paper I shall describe the characteristics of these changes, and discuss the mental attitude of the artist which led to their development.

From Franz Boas, "The Decorative Art of the Indians of the North Pacific Coast," Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History, Volume 9, pages 123-176, 1897. The tribes are the Tlingit, Haida, Tsimshian, Bella Coola, Kwakiutl, etc.

Decorative Art of the North Pacific Coast

307
in

In treating

this

subject,

we must bear

mind

that
is

almost

all

the
art.

plastic art of the Indians of the

While some primitive people for instance, the Eskimo produce carvings which serve no practical ends, but are purely works of art, all the works of the Indian artists of the region which we are considering

North

Pacific Coast

decorative

same time a useful end; that is to say, the form of the and the subject to be represented is more or less subordinate to the object on which it is shown. Only in the cases of single totemic figures is the artist free to mold his subject without regard to such considerations; but, owing to the large size of such figures, he is hmited by the cylindrical form of the trunk of the tree from which he
serve at the
object
is

given,

carves his figures.

We may

therefore

say that the native

artist

is

in

almost

all

his

works limited by the shape of the object on which he

arts

represents his subject.

The
latter

plastic

of the Indians

are carving

we may

include tattooing and weaving. Carving

in stone

and painting, in which is done mostly

in

in

wood, but also

and horn.

It
.

is

either
is

the

round, bas. .

rehef, or, although

more

rarely, in high rehef

There

no

art of pottery.

Generally the object to be decorated has a certain given form to which

the decoration

must be subordinated, and the artist is confronted with the problem of how to adjust his subject to the form of the object to be
Before attempting an explanation of the method adopted by the
in the solution of this problem,
subject.
artist

decorated.

we must

treat

another aspect of our

We

must premise

that in consequence of the adaptation of the

form

to the decorative

field,

the native artist cannot attempt a reaUstic

is

representation of his subject, but

often compelled to indicate only

its

main
to

characteristics. In
its

consequence of the distortion of the animal body,

it

due to

adaptation to various surfaces,

would be
artist

all

but impossible
not emphasize

recognize what

animal
that

is

meant,

if

the

did

what he considers the

essential to his

characteristic features of animals.

These are so

he considers no representation adequate in which they are missing. In many cases they become the symbols of
the

mind

animal.

We

find,

therefore,

that
is

each animal

is

characterized by
all

certain

symbols, and great latitude

this feature

allowed in the treatment of

features other than symbols.

I

will illustrate

of the art of the Indians of the

North

Pacific

Coast by means of a number of characteristic examples.

is a figure from a totem pole, which represents the beaver. wiU be noticed that the face is treated somewhat hke a human face, particularly the region around eyes and nose. The position of the ears, however, indicates that the artist intended to represent an animal head, not a human head. While the human ear is represented, in its characteristic form, on a level with the eye, animal ears are indicated over the

Figure 6

It

308
forehead; that
is

FRANZ BOAS
to say,

approximately in the position in which they

appear in a front view of the animal. Their characteristic shape

seen in figure 6, and in

many

others.

may be While the ears characterize the

head as that of an animal, the two large incisors serve to identify the rodent par excellence ^the beaver. The tail of the animal is turned up in front of its body. It is ornamented by cross-hatching, which is in-

tended to represent the scales on the beaver's

holds a
stick.

tail.

In

its

fore

The

large incisors, the tail with cross-hatching,

is

paws it and the

stick, are
teristic of

symbols of the beaver, and each of these

the animal.
. . .

a sufficient charac-

Fig.

Fig.

CARVINGS REPRESENTING THE BEAVER.

In figure
8,

which

is

the handle of a spoon,

we
its

find only the first

of the symbols of the beaver represented, namely,

incisors. Only the head and the forepaws of the animal are shown; and in its mouth are indicated an upper and a lower pair of incisors, all the other teeth being omitted. There is nothing except the teeth to indicate that the
artist

intended to represent the beaver.

is

Figure 9
sea-lion.

the front of a dancing head-dress, which

is

attached to
of the

a framework

made

of whalebone,
is

and

set

on top with
shells.

bristles

To

the

back

attached a long train of ermine skins.

is

The outer
fig-

side of the carved front

set

with abalone

The

squatting

ure which occupies the center of the front represents the beaver. The

same symbols which were mentioned before will be recognized here. The face is human; but the ears, which rise over the eyebrows, indicate
that

an animal

is

meant.

Two

large pairs of incisors

occupy the center

Decorative Art of the North Pacific Coast

309

open mouth. The tail is turned up in front of the body, and appears between the two hind legs, indicated by cross-hatching. The fore paws are raised to the height of the mouth, but they do not hold a stick. It wiU be noticed that on the chest of the beaver another head is represented, over which a number of small rings
of the
stretch towards the chin of the beaver.

Two

feet,

which belong to
corners of
beaver.
its

this

animal, extend from the

the haunches of the

mouth towards

This

animal represents the dragon-fly,

which is symbolized by a large head and a slender segmented body. In many representations of the dragonfly there are two pairs of wings attached to the head. The face of
this

animal re-

sembles also a

human

face; but the

two

ears,
Fig. 9. HEADDRESS REPRESENTING A BEAVER.

which
animal

rise
is

over the eyebrows, indicate that an

meant. Combinations of two animals

of this sort are found very frequently, a smaller

figure of

one animal being represented on the

.
. .

THE DRAGON-FLY IS SHOWN ON THE CHEST

OF THE BEAVER. TRIBE,
HAIDA.

chest of a large carving.

Figures 18 and 19 are representations of the

kiUer-whale. In the rattle (Fig. 18) the form of the whale will be easily
recognized.
Its tail is

bent downward. The large head, one of the char-

acteristic features of the whale, is

much more pronounced

in this than in the

next figure. The eye appears on the front part of the

rattle.

Under

the eye

we

see the large mouth, which

is set

with a number of curved spines. They

Fig. Figs. 18, 19.

18

Fig.

19

RATTLE AND MASK REPRESENTING THE KILLER-WHALE.

310
are

FRANZ BOAS
intended to
represent
the
teeth.

Immediately behind the mouth,

on the lower part of the carving, we find the flippers. The painted ornament, which has the form of a small face, in front of the huge dorsal fin,
is

intended to represent the blow-hole.

Animals are characterized by their symbols, and the following symbols have been described in the preceding remarks:
1.

series of

Of Of Of Of

the beaver: large incisors, scaly

tail,

and a

stick held in the

forepaws.
2.

the sculpin:
fin.

two spines

rising

over the mouth,

and a conis

tinuous dorsal
3.

the

hawk: large curved beak, the point of which

that
it

turned turned

backward so
4.

touches the face.

large

the

eagle:

curved beak, the point of which

is

downward. 5. Of the killer-whale: large head, large mouth set with teeth, blowhole, and large dorsal fin. 6. Of the shark: an elongated rounded cone rising over the forehead, mouth with depressed corners, a series of curved lines on the cheeks, two circles and curved lines on the ornament rising over the forehead, round eyes, numerous sharp teeth, and heterocerc tail. 7. Of the bear: large paws, and large mouth set with teeth, with
protruding tongue.
8.

Of Of

the sea-monster: bear's head, bear's

paws with

flippers attached,

and giUs and body of the

9.

killer-whale, with several dorsal fins.

the dragon-fly: large head, segmented, slender body,

I

and wings.

So far
in

have considered the symbols only in connection with their

It

use in representing various animals.

now becomes

necessary to inquire

what manner they are used

to identify the

animals.

We

have seen

that in a

number

of the preceding cases entire animals were represented,

identified

and

that they

were

by means of these symbols.

When we
is

investigate this subject

more

closely,

we

find that the artist

allowed

wide latitude in the selection of the form of the animal. Whatever the form may be, as long as the recognized symbols are present, the identity of the animal is established. We have mentioned before that the symbols
are often applied to

human

faces, while the

. . .

body

of the figure has the

characteristics of the animal.

It

appears, therefore, that as,

first

of

all,

the artist tried to charac-

terize the

animals he intended to represent by emphasizing their most

prominent characteristics, these gradually became symbols which were recognized even when not attached to the animal form, and which took the place of representations of the entire animal.

we

Having thus become acquainted with a few of the symbols of animals, will next investigate in what manner the native artist adapted the

Decorative Art of the North Pacific Coast

311
all,

animal form to the object he intended to decorate. First of

direct our attention to a series of specimens

we

will

which show that the native artist endeavors, whenever possible, to represent the whole animal on the object that he desires to decorate. Figure 31 is a club used for killing seals and halibut before they are
landed in the canoe. The carving represents the
its

killer- whale.

If

the

were placed in an principal symbol of the killer-whale, assume an exceedupright position on the club, the implement would
dorsal
fin,

ingly

awkward
fin,

shape.
it

On

the other hand, the artist could not omit the

dorsal

since

is
it

the most important symbol of the animal. There-

fore he has bent

covers the flippers.

downward along the side of the body, so that it The tail of the whale would have interfered with
this

and for back of the whale, so

the handle,

reason

it

has been turned forward over the

.

as to

be in close contact with the body.

fPrrprpj
Fig. 31. TLINGIT

CLUB REPRESENTING THE KILLER-WHALE.

We have now to treat a series of peculiar phenomena which result from the endeavor on the part of the artist to adjust the animal that he desires to represent to the decorative field in such a manner as to preserve as far as possible the whole animal, and bring out its symbols most clearly. Figure 39 is the top view of a wooden hat on which is carved the figure of a sculpin. The animal is shown in top view, as though it were lying with its lower side on the hat. The dancing hats of these Indians have the forms of truncated cones. To the top are attached a series of rings, mostly made of basketry, which indicate the social rank of the owner, each ring symbohzing a step in the social ladder. The top of the hat, therefore, does not belong to the decorative field, which is confined to the surface of the cone. The artist found it necessary, therefore, to open the back of the sculpin far enough to make room for the gap in the decorative field. He has done so by representing the animal as seen from the top, but split and distended in the middle, so that the
top of the hat
is

located in the opening thus secured.

seal.

Figure 40 represents a dish in the shape of a

to the belly,

The whole

dish

is

carved in the form of the animal; but the bottom, which corresponds
is flattened, and the back is hollowed out so as to form the bowl of the dish. In order to gain a wider rim the whole back has been distended so that the animal becomes inordinately wide as com-

pared to

its

length.

The

flippers

are carved in their proper positions

312

FRANZ BOAS

Fig. 40. grease-dish: seal.

join the

The hind flippers are turned back, and closely method of representation is used in decorating small boxes. The whole box is considered as representing an animal. The front of its body is painted or carved on the box front; its sides, on the sides of the box; the hind side of its body, on the back of the box. The bottom of the box is the animal's stomach; the top, or the open upper side, its back. These boxes, therefore, are decorated only on
at the sides of the dish.
tail.

similar

the sides, which are bent of a single piece of

wood

(Fig. 41).

When
The

we unbend the which we may

center
is

sides

we

find the decoration extended

on a long band,

consider as consisting of two symmetrical halves.

occupied by the front view of the animal, the sides by a side

actual unbending of the sides of the
since

view, and the ends by one-half of the hind view at each end of the

board.

An

box would not give a

symmetrical form; but,

the

ends are necessarily sewed at the

corner, the hind view of the

body

will

occupy one end.

is

In the decoration of silver bracelets a similar principle

followed,

but the problem

division

differs

somewhat from

that offered in the decoration

of square boxes. While in the latter case the four edges

between the four views of the animal back and left profile ^there is no such sharp

make a

natural

front

and

right profile,

line

of division in the

Decorative Art of the North Pacific Coast

313

and there would be great difficulty in joining the four wMle two profiles offer no such difficulty. When the tail end of each profile is placed where the ends of the bracelet join, then there is only one point of junction; namely, in the median line of the head. This is the method of representation that the native artists have adopted (Fig. 42). The animal is cut in two from head to tail, so that the two halves cohere only at the tip of the nose and at the tip of the tail. The hand is put through this hole, and the animal now surrounds the wrist. In this position it is represented on the bracelet. The method adopted is therefore identical with the one applied in the hat (Fig. 39), except that the central opening is much larger, and that the animal has been represented on a cylindrical surface, not a conical
round
bracelet,

aspects

artistically,

one.

An

examination of the head of the bear shown on the bracelet (Fig.

it

42), makes

clear that this idea has

is

been carried out

itself

rigidly. It will

be

noticed that there

a deep depression between the eyes, extending

must not be conwhich adjoin at mouth and nose, while they are not in contact with each other on a level with the eyes and forehead. The peculiar ornament rising over the
to the nose.

down

This shows that the head

sidered a front view, but as consisting of

two

profiles

nose of the bear decorated with three rings, represents a hat with three
rings,

which designate the rank of the bearer. The transition from the bracelet to the painting or carving of animals
. . .

on a flat surface is not a difl&cult one. The same principle is adhered to; and either the animals are represented as split in two so that the profiles
Shoulder.

Ear.

Ear.

Shoulder.

TaiL

Leg.

Foot.

Mouth.

Foot.

Leg-.

Tail.

Fig. 41.

CARVING ON THE SffiES OF A DISH, REPRESENTING A BEAVER. THE SIDES OF THE DISH ARE BENT OF A SINGLE PIECE OF WOOD, AND ARE SHOWN HERE FLATTENED OUT.

Fig. 42. DESIGN

ON A BRACELET REPRESENTING A BEAR.

314

FRANZ BOAS

are joined in the middle, or a front view of the head is shown with two adjoining profiles of the body. In the cases considered heretofore the animal was cut through and through from the mouth to the tip of the tail. These points were allowed to cohere, and the animal was

stretched over a ring, a cone, or the sides of a prism. If

bracelet opened,

we imagine

the

and flattened in the manner in which it is shown in figure 42, we have a section of the animal from mouth to tail, cohering only at the mouth, and the two halves spread over a flat surface. This is the natural development of the method here described when apphed
to the decoration of flat surfaces.
It is clear that

on
fish

flat

surfaces this

changing the method of cutting. such as that of a

When

method allows of modifications by the body of a long animal,

is

or of a standing quadruped,
strip.

cut in this manner, a

design results which forms a long narrow

is

This

mode
this

of cutting

therefore mostly applied in the decoration of long bands.

that
is

When

the

form is not favorable. In such cases a square design is obtained by cutting quadrupeds sitting on their haunches in the same manner as before, and unfolding the animal so that the two halves remain in contact at the nose and mouth, while the median line at the back is to the extreme right and to
field

to be decorated

is

more nearly

square,

the extreme

left.

Figure 43 (a Haida painting) shows

a design which has been obtained in this

manner.

It

represents a bear. of

mous breadth
these cases
is

The enormouth observed in brought about by the juncprofiles

tion of the

two

of

which the
brought out

head

consists.
is

This cutting of the head

most which also represents the bear. It is the painting on the front of a Tsimshian horse, the circular hole in the middle of the design being the door of the house. The animal is cut from back to front, Fig. 43. PAINTING REPRESENTING so that only the front part of the head A BEAR. TRIBE, HAmA. coheres. The two halves of the lower jaw do not touch each other. The back is represented by the black outline on which the hair is indicated by fine lines.
clearly in the painting (Fig. 44),
. . .

In the following figures

we

find a

new

cut applied. Figure 53 repre-

sents the shark. I explained,

when

discussing the symbols of the shark,

that in the front view of the

animal the symbols are shown to best

are the

advantage. For this reason side views of the face of the shark
avoided, and in representing the whole animal a cut
is

made from

Decorative Art of the North Pacific Coast

315

back to the lower

in front view.

side,

sides are unfolded, leaving the

and the two head

The painting (Fig. 53) has been made in this manner, the two halves
of the body being entirely separated from each other, and folded to the right and to the left. The heterocerc tail is cut in halves, and is shown at each end turned downward. The pectoral fins are shown unduly enlarged, in order to
fill
. .

the vacant
.

space under the head.

In figure 62, which represents the

design on a circular slate dish,
see a

we
The
Fig. 44. PAINTING

good case of the adaptation of

field.

a profile to the decorative

design represents a killer-whale with

two dorsal fins. The animal is bent around the rim of a dish so that the head touches the tail. The two dorsal
I

FROM A HOUSEFRONT, REPRESENTING A BEAR.

along the back, while

fins are laid flat

. .

the large flipper occupies the center of the dish.

animals. Heretofore
rather simple. In

have described a number of sections applied in representing various we have had cases only in which the sections were

many

cases in which the adaptation of the animal form

is

to the decorative field

more

difiicult,

the sections and distortions are

before.
. . .

much more numerous and far-reaching than those described We can now sum up the results of our considerations.
part of this paper I described the symbols of a

In the

first

number

of animals, and

pointed out that in

many

cases there

is

a tendency to substitute the

Fig. 53. PAINTING

REPRESENTING A SHARK. TRIBE, HAIDA.

316

FRANZ BOAS

symbol for the whole animal. The works of art which I describe in my paper may be said to illustrate a principle which is apparently diametrically opposed to the former. While the symboUsm
the second part of
efforts of the artist to
field

developed a tendency to suppress parts of the animal, we find in the adapt the form of the animal to the decorative
a far-reaching desire to preserve, so far
as
feasible,

the

whole
find

animal; and, with the exception of a few profiles,

we do not

Fig. 62. SLATE DISH

WITH KILLER-WHALE

DESIGN. TRIBE, HAIDA.

which can be interpreted as an endeavor to give a perand therefore realistic view of an animal. We have found a variety of methods applied which tend to bring the greatest possible part of the animal form into the decorative field. I conclude from this that it is the ideal of the native artist to show the whole animal, and
single instance

spective

that the

idea of perspective representation

is

entirely

foreign

to

his

mind. His representations are combinations of symbols of the various

parts of the

body

of the animal, arranged in such a

is

way

that

if

possible
is

the whole animal

brought into view. The arrangement, however,

is

so that the natural relation of the parts

preserved,

being changed

only by means of sections and distortions, but so that the natural contiguity of the parts is preserved.

The
to

success of the artist depends

upon

his

cleverness in designing

fines of dissection

and methods of distortion. When he finds it impossible represent the whole animal, he confines himself to rearranging its
characteristic parts, always of course including
its

most

symbols. There

Decorative Art of the North Pacific Coast

is

317

i
']

a tendency to exaggerate the size of the symbols at the expense of

is

'

other parts of the subject. I presume this

principles

the line in

of the decorative

art

of the

Indians

of the

which the two North Pacij&c

in

Coast of America merge into each other. The gradual emphasizing of

the symbol at the expense of other parts of the

body leads

many
is

cases to their entire suppression,

and

to designs in

which the animal

indicated only

by

its

symbols.

The Jesup North

Pacific Expedition

WALDEMAR BOGORAS
(Vladimir Germanovich Bogoraz) (1865-1936)

WALDEMAR JOCHELSON
(1852-1937)
The aim

was to explore the cultural connections between the Northwest Coast of North America and Northeastern Siberia. For the Siberian material the Museum enlisted the services of two involof the Jesup Expedition

untary residents of that area. Banished in their youth to Northeastern Siberia

because of revolutionary

activities,

Waldemar Bogoras and Waldemar

Jochelson had put in their years of exile studying the native people around them. Exile in Siberia did not in those days mean confinement; both men

difficulty in

had traveled widely throughout Yakutsk province and apparently had no arranging their employment by the Museum or in transmitting
their manuscripts.

After the Revolution of 1917 Bogoras returned to Russia to the Institute of

Ethnography
(it

in Leningrad.

There he set up a

museum

of

com-

parative religion
to

was

called the

Museum

of Atheism). Jochelson came

New York
Exile,

to finish

work on

his

Yukaghir ethnology, publication of

individual concerned

which had been interrupted by the War.

however

distressing to

the

deplorable from the ethical point of view, sometimes has

tions for anthropologists.
It
is

its

and however compensa-

not likely that under other conditions

Bogoras' great monograph on the Chukchee would have been written with
quite
its

fullness of detail

and we would have been without knowledge

of

one of the world's most distinctive cultures. (Just as later Malinowski's studies of the Trobriand Islands would not have been written as they were

had he not been interned there for four years during World War I.) The somberness of the Chukchee contrasts with the prevailing cheerfulness of the Eskimo. For the Chukchee the Arctic is not friendly; their world is peopled with several categories of hostile spirits who must constantly be appeased.

The Chukchee

of Siberia are the antithesis of the

318

The Jesup North

Pacific Expedition

319

happy carefree savage. Anxiety is their normal state. Violence, mental breakdown and suicide are frequent among them. Out of the Siberian researches a new concept of global cultural relationships emerged: that of a circum-polar culture which spanned two hemispheres and which, in spite of temperamental differences, had many conR.L.B. sistent traits, both material and psychological.

WALDEMAR BOGORAS
(1865-1936)

The Chukchee

SHAMANISM
SHAMANISM
is

IS

NOT RESTRICTED TO EITHER

SEX.

THE GIFT OF INSPIRATION

it is

thought to be bestowed more frequently upon women, but

this is, that the

reputed

to be of a rather inferior kind,

and the higher grades belong rather to

bearing of children
is

men. The reason given for

able shamanistic

generally

adverse to shamanistic inspiration, so that a young

woman
it

with consider^with the

all

power may

lose the greater part of

it

after the birth of

her

first child.

She

will recover

only after several years,

It is also

end-

ing of the period of her maternity.

objects in any

considered that

material

way connected with

the birth either of animals or of

may be detrimental to the shamanistic force, not only in men who happen to come in contact with them. Thus, the grass which served for bedding to a woman in labor may be used to destroy the shamanistic power of any young man slowly "gathering inspiration." It
kind

manwomen, but

even in

need only be rubbed against the forehead of the young shaman during his sleep, and he wiU "come back" (to the usual Hfe). A female shaman, by name Te'lpina, complained to me, in her description of "things seen by

would be a great female shaman, gave her to drink of the amniotic fluid of a bitch. This injured her vitals, and the soul of the dog entered her own soul.
her," that her mother-in-law, seeing that she

Since female shamanism

is

thought to be of an inferior order,

it is

con-

sidered to require a shorter period for "gathering inspiration," and to be

attended with less pain, than male shamanism. Female shamans, however,

may

acquire a high degree of

skill in

almost any branch of shamanistic

action, with the single exception of the ventriloquistic art,

which

is

con-

sidered entirely

beyond

their reach.

From Bogoras, The Chukchee, The Jesup North Pacific Expedition, edited by Franz Boas, Memoirs of the American Museum of Natural History, Vol. VII (New York: 1904-1909), pp. 415-419, 424-425, 429-430, 507-508, 560-562.
320

The Chukchee The shamanistic

call begins to

321
manifest
itself at

an early age, in many period of transition from childhood to youth. It cases during is also the period of rapid and intense growth; and it is well known that many persons of both sexes manifest during this time increased sensitivethe critical

and that the mind often becomes unbalanced. It is easy to underhuman life, which is always fuU of unexpected changes and developments, is peculiarly adapted to the first
ness,

stand that this critical period of

implanting of shamanistic inspiration.

Nervous and highly excitable temperaments are most susceptible to the The shamans among the Chukchee with whom I conversed were as a rule extremely excitable, almost hysterical, and not a few of them were half crazy. Their cunning in the use of deceit in their art closely resembled the cunning of a lunatic. The Chukchee say that young persons destined to receive shamanistic inspiration may be recognized at a very early age, even in their teens, by
shamanistic caU.
the gaze, which, during a conversation,
fixed
is

not turned to the Ustener, but

is

on something beyond him. In connection with this, they say that the eyes of a shaman have a look different from that of other people, and they explain it by the assertion that the eyes of the shaman are very bright, which, by the way, gives them the ability to see "spirits" even in the dark.
It is certainly

a fact that the expression of a shaman

it is

is

peculiar,

com-

bination of cunning and shyness; and by this

often possible to pick

him out from among many others. The Chukchee are well aware of the extreme nervousness of their shamans, and express it by the word nini'rkilqin ("he is bashful"). By this word they mean to convey the idea that the shaman is highly sensitive even to the slightest change of the psychic atmosphere surrounding him during his exercises. For instance, the Chukchee shaman is difl&dent in acting before strangers, especially shortly after his initiation. A shaman of great power wiU refuse to show his skill when among strangers, and
will yield only after

much

soHcitation: even then, as a rule, he will not

is

show
he
is

all

of his power.

He

shy of strange people, of a house to which

unaccustomed, of "alien" drums and charms which are hidden in

their bags,

and of "spirits" that hover around. The least doubt or sneer makes him break off the performance and retire. The shamanistic "spirits" are Hkewise described as "fleeting" meaning that they want to flee before every unusual face or voice. When too many
strange visitors

come to the shaman, the "spirits" are shy of appearing, when they do come, they are aU the time anxious to slip away. Once when I induced a shaman to practise at my house, his "spirits" (of
and, even

a ventriloquistic kind) for a long time refused to come.

When

at last

they did come, they were heard walking around the house outside and

knocking on

its

waUs, as

if still

undecided whether to enter.

When

they

322
entered,

WALDEMAR BOGORAS
they kept near to the

comers,

carefully

avoiding too close

proximity to those present.

(spirits) belong to the wilderness," say the shamans, "just as any wild animal. This is the reason that they are so fleeting." Kelet of the animal kind have this shyness to an extreme degree. When coming at the call of the shaman, they sniff and snort, and finally, after some short exercise on the drum, flee back to the freedom of the wilderness. All this, of course, is brought about by ventriloquism, as will be described later. Even the ke'let of diseases, especially those who cannot harm man much, as, for instance, rheum or cold, are described as very "fleeting." Thus, in one tale, the rheum, before mustering sufiicient courage to enter a human habitation, makes several attempts, and each time goes back overcome by its shyness. When caught on the spot, it manifests the utmost fear, and in abject terms begs for freedom. The Chukchee generally are highly susceptible to any physical or psychical impressions of a kind to which they are unused; as, for instance, to unfamihar odors. This is especially the case in regard to diseases; and the saying, "The Chukchee people are 'soft to die,' " is frequently heard among them. Thus, though they are able to endure excessive hardships, they succumb quickly to any contagious disease brought from civilized countries. This sensitiveness is shared by other native tribes of northeastern Siberia, and even by the Russian Creoles, who are just as susceptible to psychic influences of an unusual character; for instance, to warning received in dreams or from strange people, to threats on the part of shamans or high ofiicials, etc. During the last epidemic of measles, a Creole in Gishiga lived but one night after having been told by an ofi&cial, who meant no harm, that in a dream he had seen him die. There have been several instances of suicide among the cossacks and Russianized natives as the result of reproof on the part of ofl&cials. In other cases, native guides of Lamut or Yukaghir origin, travelling with parties of Russian oflBcials on exploring expeditions, have, on losing their way in the uninhabited country, run away from fear and despair, and every trace of them thereafter has been lost. Suicides are also frequent among the Chukchee. It seems to me that Mr. Jochelson has in mind the same high degree of susceptibihty when he calls attention to the fact that the young men of the Yukaghir were said in ancient times to be exceedingly bashful, so much so that they would die when a sudden affront was given them, even by their own relatives. The shamans possess this nervous sensitiveness in a

"Kelet
as

much

still

higher degree than other people. This finds expression in the proverb

shamans are even more "soft to die" than ordinary people. While speaking of this subject, let me add, that the slightest lack of harmony between the acts of the shamans and the mysterious call of their "spirits" brings their Ufe to an end. This is expressed by the Chukchee when they say that "spirits" are very bad-tempered, and punish with
that

The Chukchee
immediate death the
is

323
slightest disobedience of the

shaman, and that

this

particularly so

when

the

shaman

is

slow to carry out those orders which

are intended to single

him out from other people.

from the displeasure of his kelet, a shaman be "resistant to death" and especially "difl&cult to kill," even when vanquished by enemies.
the other hand, apart
is

On

said to

The shamanistic

call

manifests

itself in

various ways. Sometimes

it

is

an inner voice, which bids the person enter into intercourse with the "spirits." If the person is dilatory in obeying, the calling "spirit" soon appears in some outward, visible shape, and communicates the call in a

whom I have mentioned beone time, after a severe illness, when his soul was ripe for inspiration, he saw several "spirits," but did not give much heed to the fulfilment of their orders. Then a "spirit" came to him. He was gaunt, and black of color, and said that he was the "spirit" of reindeer-scab. Ainanwa't
more
explicit

way. For instance, Ainanwa't,

fore, says that at

felt

himself very

much drawn toward

said,

that "spirit,"

and wanted him

if

to stay

and become

his constant

companion. The
however, "I

"spirit" hesitated at

first,

and

your desire for He my company is strong enough, if you wish me enough to take the drum, to handle it for three days and three nights, and to become a shaman."
then refused to stay.

may

consent,

Ainanwa't, in his turn, refused, and the "spirit" immediately vanished.

The shamanistic
of these

call is also

manifested by various omens, such as meet-

ing a certain animal, finding a stone or a shell of pecuUar form, etc.

Each
whose

omens has
its

in itself nothing extraordinary, but derives its signifi-

cance from
notice
it is

mystical recognizance in the

mind

of the person to

brought. This process resembles the finding of amulets; and,

indeed, the stone found, or the animal met, becomes the protector and the
assistant "spirit" of the person in question.

Young
especially

people, as a rule, are exceedingly reluctant to obey the

if it

call,

involves the adoption of

some

characteristic device in cloth-

ing or in the

mode
of

of

life.

They

refuse to take the

field,

drum and
fear,^ etc.

to

caU the

"spirits," leave the

amulets in the

from very

young persons "doomed to inspiration" act differently, according to temperament and family conditions. Sometimes they protest against the call coming to their child, and try to induce it to reject the "spirits" and to keep to the ordinary life. This happens mostly in the case
of only children, because of the danger pertaining to the shamanistic call,
especially in the beginning.
avail,

The parents

The

protest of the parents

is

is,

however, of no

because the rejection of the "spirits"

much more dangerous even

1 Compare also the story in Krasheninnikoff in which it is told that a Koryak found an important amulet on the bank of the river, but left it there from sheer fright. He became very ill, and his illness was ascribed to the anger of the amulet. After a considerable lapse of time he came back to look for the amulet, and at last carried it away with him.

324
than the acceptance of their
induce him to renounce his
call.

WALDEMAR BOGORAS

inspiration will either sicken

A young man thwarted in his call to and shortly die, or else the "spirits" wiU home and go far away, where he may follow
entirely permissible to

his vocation without hindrance.

On

the other hand,

at a

it

is

performances

more mature
is

age, after several years of practice;

abandon shamanistic and

the anger of the "spirits"

not incurred by

asserted that formerly they

it. I met several persons who had been great shamans, but that now they

had given up most

of time manifested

of their exercises.

As reason

for this, they gave illness,

age, or simply a decrease of their shamanistic power,

itself.

which

in the course
if

One

said that because of illness he felt as

his

arms and legs were frozen, and that thereafter they did not thaw, so that he was unable to "shake himself" well upon the drum. Another said that he and his "spirits" became tired of each other. Most of the cases, probably, were simply the result of recovery from the nervous condition which had

made

the persons in question

is

fit

subjects for the inspiration. While the

shaman

in possession of the inspiration,

he must
itself in

practise,

hide his power. Otherwise

sweat or in a

fit

wiU manifest of violent madness similar

it

the

and cannot form of bloody

to epilepsy.

There are parents who wish

tents of their

their child to

answer the caU. This happens

especially in families rich in children, with large herds,

and with several

own. Such a family

its

is

not inclined to feel anxious about a

possible loss of one of

members.

having a shaman of their own,

made

On

the contrary, they are desirous of

to order, so to speak,
all

special

sohcitor before the "spirits," and a caretaker in

extraordinary casualties

of

life.

shaman by

the

River, told

me

that,

name when
him

of Tei'net, in the country near the Wolverene

the call

obey, his father gave

the

him and he did not want to drum and induced him to begin the exercise.

came

to

After that, he continued to feel "bashful" for several years.

On

days of

ceremonials he even fled from the

camp and

hid himself,

lest his relatives

should find him out and bring him back to camp, to show to the as-

sembled people his newly acquired and growing

skill.

For men, the preparatory stage of shamanistic inspiration is in most cases very painful, and extends over a long time. The caU comes in an abrupt and obscure manner, leaving the young novice in much uncertainty regarding it. He feels "bashful" and frightened; he doubts his own disposition and strength, as has been the case with all seers, from Moses down. Half unconsciously and half against his own will, his whole soul undergoes a strange and painful transformation. This period may last months, and sometimes even years. The young novice, the "newly inspired" loses aU interest in the ordinary affairs of life. He ceases to work, eats but little and without relishing the food, ceases to talk to people, and

The Chukchee

325

does not even answer their questions. The greater part of his time he
spends in sleep.
.
. .

The
singing.
stick of

single

means used by the Chukchee shamans, novice or

is

experi-

enced, for communication with "spirits,"

the beating of the

is

drum and

As

said before, the usual family

drum

employed with a drumis

whalebone, while a wooden drum-stick

used chiefly in cere-

monials.

Some drums have two whalebone

drum-sticks, of which the extra

one is supposed to be intended for the use of "spirits," when they approach and want to "shake themselves;" that is, to beat the drum. The beating of the drum, notwithstanding its seeming simplicity, requires

some

skUl,

and the novice must spend considerable time before he

can acquire the desired degree of perfection. This has reference especially
singing.

power of endurance of the performer. The same may be said of the The manifestations continue for several hours, during aU which time the shaman exercises the most violent activity without scarcely a pause. After the performance he must not show any signs of fatigue, because he is supposed to be sustained by the "spirits;" and, moreover, the greater part of the exercise is asserted to be the work of the "spirits" themselves, either while entering his body, or while outside his body. The degree of endurance required for aU this, and the ability to pass quickly from the highest excitement to a state of normal quietude, can, of course, be acquired only by long practice. Indeed, all the shamans I conversed with said that they had to spend a year, or even two years, before sufi&cient strength of hand, and freedom of voice, were given to them by the "spirits."
to the

Some

asserted that during aU this preparatory time they kept closely to the

inner room, taking

up the drum

several times a day,

and beating

it

as

long as their strength would allow.

The only other means

is

of training for inspiration, of which I

am

aware,

abstention from

all fat

and rich foods,

as well as great moderation in

eating.

The same

strictness is

observed ever afterwards in the preparation

for each individual performance, in

which the shaman

tries

to abstain

wholly from food.

Various tricks performed by the Chukchee shamans, including ventriloquism, have to be learned in the preparatory stage. However,
tain
I

could ob-

no

detailed information

asserted that the tricks

on this point, since the shamans, of course, were done by "spirits," and denied having any hand

whatever in proceedings of such a character.

In some cases, evidently, the old
tion,
final,

men have

taught the younger generatransfer is

who

are said to have received their

power from them. The

gives a part of his

and cannot be revoked. The

man who

power

to

man loses correspondingly, and can hardly recover the loss afterwards. To transfer his power, the older shaman must blow on the eyes or into the mouth of the recipient, or he may stab himself with a knife, with
another
the blade of which,
still

reeking with his "source of

life,"

he

will

immedi-

326
ately pierce the

WALDEMAR BOGORAS
body of the
I

recipient.

These methods are also supposed

to

to be used by shamans

in the treatment of their patients.

Most

of the

shamans
their art

knew claimed
their

have acquired
of

by

own

individual efforts. I

have had no teachers, but to am not aware of

a single instance of the transfer of shamanistic power in the whole domain

Chukchee

folk-lore.

Among

the Eskimo, I

met women who had learned

their shamanistic performances from their husbands, and children

who

had been taught by

the shamanistic

their parents. In

one family on

St.

Lawrence
.

Island,

power has been retained for a succession of generations, evidently having been transferred from father to son. There can be no doubt, of course, that shamans, during their performances, employ deceit in various forms, and that they themselves are
. ,

fully cognizant of the fact.

"There are many

will
lift

liars in

our caUing," Scratch-

ing-Woman

up the skins of the sleeping-room with his right toe, and then assure you that it was done by 'spirits'; another will talk into the bosom of his shirt or through his sleeve, making the voice issue from a quite unusual place." Of course, he was ready to swear that he never made use of any of these wrong practices. "Look at my face," he continued; "he who tells lies, his tongue stutters. He whose speech, however, flows offhand from his lips, certainly must speak the truth." This was a rather doubtful argument, but I refrained from making any such suggestion.
said to me.

"One

Some of the people even are aware of the deceit of the shamans. Several men, when talking of shamanistic feats, said that, though the tricks performed were very wonderful, they were by no means real, but were produced only through illusion on the part of the observers. Others went even further. Thus, the trader Kuva'r at Indian Point, of whom I have spoken several times, assured me that even the most renowned shamans are only clever deceivers. "When I witness their best trick," he asserted, "even then with proper attention, I can discover the fraud. He [the shaman] will pretend to cut with a knife the abdomen of the patient; but I can follow the direction of the knife, and see that it glances off without hurting the skin and that the blood comes from the mouth of the operator."
This scepticism, perhaps,
people.
is

the result of intercourse

with civilized

With some of the shamans, fraud is not restricted to jugglery. We caught Scratching-Woman in the very act of stealing our washing from the line. The woman who, during our stay at Indian Point, was caught thieving, was also a shaman. However, in giving directions and answers to persons seeking advice, Chukchee shamans often display much wisdom and circumspection, especially when they have to deal with matters out of the reach of their knowledge and understanding. This is the case when the inquirer is of a different stage of culture; for instance, with Russian officials or merchants, who sometimes do not despise the help of the native "spirits." Thus the

The Chukchee
assistant of the chief ofl&cial of

327

Anadyr asked

Scratcliing-Woman, during

a shamanistic seance, whether his Second Interior Loan bond, with prizes,

would draw a lucky number in the yearly lottery. It was no little trouble shaman what was meant by "an Interior Loan bond;" but, when he understood it, he immediately answered that he saw that the foundations of the wealth of the questioner, which were in his own country, were going to increase. To a cossack who wanted to know whether the yearly mail steamer would bring him a furlough, the shaman answered, "The big boat brings change and joy to all people in this country." I could cite other answers not less worthy of the oracle of Delphi. To my own questions of this kind, the shamans usually answered that my country was too far away, and the feet of their ke'let too small, to go there. Furthermore, the ke'let are too shy of the manners of the unknown dwellers in those distant locahties. I saw similar circumspection displayed also in regard to the native questions. A shaman of the interior
to explain to the

refused to give advice about the maritime pursuits of the people of the
coast, explaining that his "spirits"

land,

were good only for walking upon the and that they were afraid of the sea.

LOVE INCANTATIONS
I

to have this woman, I take out her heart and Uver, then go towards the Evening "direction," and hang her organs on both sides
I.

If I

want

of the Evening.

Then

I say,

"Here

is

the heart and the liver of that

woman.
let

Make them
is

entangled in a seal-net! Let her be without her intestines!

her pine away with desire for me!

This man

is

not your husband. This

a seal's carcass drifted to the seashore, rotting upon the pebbles. Every wind blows upon it, and its bones are bared. And you are not a woman; you are a young reindeer-doe. The smell of the carrion comes to you, and you flee away, and come into my possession."
Told by Ke'eulin (man)
II.

in the village of Ce'cin, 1900.

"Then you

are this
all

woman! You have

liking for

so

much

of

my

husband's love

me. But you are not a human being! old carrion inflated I make you into carrion lying on the pebbly shore, with rottenness. I make my husband into a big bear. The bear comes from
that he begins to lose

a distant land.

He

is

very hungry; he has been starving for a long time.

it,

He
I

sees the carrion; seeing

make you
it!'

into the stuff vomited.

he eats of it. After a while he vomits it out. My husband sees you, and says, T do

My husband takes to despising you." same time I make this body of mine into a young beaver that has just shed his hair. I make smooth every hair of mine. My husband wiU leave his former hking, and turn again to me, because she is repugnant to look upon. (She spits, and with the saliva smears her whole body from head to foot. Indeed, the husband begins to be drawn towards her.)
not want

At

the

328
"I,

WALDEMAR BOGORAS
who was
till

now

neglected, I turn myself

back towards him;

make

myself into a deadly pain for him. Let him be attracted by the smell from
here,
insistent!"

and have a desire for me. If I reject him, let him be still more And really the husband leaves off his former passion.
Told by Aqa'nna (woman)
in the village of Ce'cin, 1901.

VOLUNTARY DEATH
Voluntary death
It is
is
still

of frequent occurrence
relative,

among

the Chukchee.

upon the expressed wish of the person who desires to die. Though I had no occasion to witness a case of voluntary death, I know of about twenty cases which happened among the Chukchee during the time of my travels. One summer, while I was at Mariinsky Post, a large skin boat from the Telqa'p tundra arrived for
inflicted

by a friend or

trading-purposes.

One

of the new-comers,

after

visit

to the Russian

barracks, felt a sudden pain in his stomach. During the night the pain

became

acute, the sufferer asked to

be

killed,

and

his fellow-travellers

complied with his request.

From what has been related, it will be seen that the voluntary death of men is not prompted by any lack of good feeling towards the old men, but rather by the hard conditions of their hfe, which make existence almost
old

unendurable for any one unable to take

not only old people, but also those
of old people

full

care of himself. Accordingly,

afflicted

by some
is

illness,

often prefer

death to continued suffering; and their number

even greater than that

who

die a voluntary death.

The position of an infirm man among the Chukchee is very hard indeed, be he young or old. On the western Kolyma tundra I met a man less than thirty years of age, A'niqai by name, who three years before was stricken with palsy, and, though partly recovered, had become feeble-minded. I saw him in February. It was cold and windy. The Chukchee of the western Kolyma tundra have no winter houses, and wander about throughout the year with their usual travelling-tent and sleeping-room. Thus did also the family of A'mqai. We visited them at a newly chosen camping-place. The women had just begun to unload the pack-sledges. The tent could be pitched only late in the evening. A'mqai lay on the snow, looking very

much Hke

a heap of old clothes. His wife put a clothing-bag under his

fell

head; but, the bag being short and round, his head almost immediately
to the ground again. His cap also

had fallen off, and the wind began to fill his hair with fine dry snow. The cold was so severe that even the Chukchee could keep warm only by continual exercise. A'mqai lay there quite motionless. I caught his look. Though dull and feeble, it was fuU of helpless pain, and had something of that of a dying animal. Another tragic figure of my acquaintance was a woman of forty, who suffered from lung trouble, and whom 1 saw on the Dry Anui River when

The Chukchee
I

329
in her

had to spend a couple of days

camp. She had been very active in

her youth, a good "shaker of the tent," as the Chukchee say. Even at that
still good for something. She continued Chukchee housewife, which knows almost no interruption; but her work was not so successful as before. Her tent was full of filth, the sleeping-room was damp and cold, and she herself was black with grease and soot. She would move about in the smoke from the fire, which was fed with the damp fuel of the tundra, rattling the kettles and pans. Then a fit of violent coughing would seize her; and her figure would emerge from the smoke, and she would stand on the snow, stamping her feet, and clutching her chest with her hands. When the fit was over, she would curse her fate and sufferings, and even her own life; and her face, black with soot, became still blacker with anger. The most pecuHar cause for voluntary death is the wrath, the lack of patience, of the Chukchee, which was mentioned by Lotteri as early as 1765. Unable to fight against suffering of any kind, physical or mental, the Chukchee prefers to see it destroyed, together with his own fife. Thus Ainanwa't told me how some years ago his neighbor in camp, LittleSpoon by name, requested that he be killed. "He and his wife often quarrelled because they had very bad sons. From quarreUing with his wife came his desire to be kiUed. One day his elder son and his mother picked a quarrel with him. Then he asked to be killed." Other Chukchee of my acquaintance added the following explanation: "Among our people, when a father is very angry with his lazy and bad son, he says, T do not want to see him any more. Let me go away.' Then he asks to be killed, and charges the very son who offended him with the execution of his request. 'Let him give me the mortal blow, let him suffer " from the memory of it.' Deep sorrow on account of the loss of some near friend must also be

time she tried to prove that she was

the hard toil of the

mentioned as a reason for voluntary death. I have spoken before of a husband who wanted to follow his dead wife. Last among the motives of voluntary death, tcedium vitoe should be mentioned. I have related the case of a man named Ka'tik, who, when speaking with me, declared that he did not desire to live any longer. He gave as his reason that fortune did not like him, though his herd and family were prospering. I did not pay much attention to his words, but a few months afterwards I heard that he had really had himself strangled. Another case of the same character refers to a widow of forty, who lived with her son and two nephews, being an owner of a considerable herd. She felt that life held no pleasures for her. She was in fear that her herd might decrease, and that she would feel ashamed to Uve. She died by strangulation. The case was related to me by Aiiianwa't. It must be borne in mind that all these psychical motives lead as often to suicide as to voluntary death. The difference is, that the younger people,

330
especially those not yet fully grown,
life

WALDEMAR BOGORAS
when
desiring to die, destroy their

own hands, while those who are older more frequently ask to be killed. I know some cases of boys and girls who were not yet twenty, and who killed themselves from spite, shame, or sorrow. Not one
with their
his

of them could have induced For the older people, such death by their own hands.

house-mates to be his "assistant" in dying.

is

assistance

considered more becoming than

the idea

An

additional source for this inclination for voluntary death

is

by violence is preferable to death by disease or old age. Even the term which is used for "voluntary death" has some connection with
that death
this idea. It is called vere'tirgm ("single fight").

A man

who

feels

a desire
fight,"

to die a voluntary death

sometimes even

says,

"Let us have a single

is

or "Since like a wild reindeer I became for thee" and this

as a request to

understood

be

killed.

Another expression

is

used chiefly in folk-tales:

"Since I became for thee like thy quarry," or, more directly, "Like thy

quarry treat me." These formulas are used by warriors when they are vanquished by an adversary and do not want to outlive their defeat. The meaning is, "Give me a mortal stroke, since I have become for you as a

game-animal." The same formula

desiring voluntary death.
ing,

is

sometimes used in real

life

The Chukchee explained the motive

to

by those me, say-

"We do

not want to die through kelet.

if

We

want

to die a violent death,

to die fighting, as

we were

fighting with the Russians."

benefit.

The Russians were

been

singled out probably for

my own
more or

Death by

disease, as has

explained before,

is

ascribed to the wiles of the kelet.

is

desire voluntary death

lies,

less hereditary in

The tendency to some Chukchee fami-

not so

much

as a duty, as rather a fate

son. In a detailed description of a case of voluntary death,

down from

the words of natives,

it is

said,

which passes from father to which I noted "Since his father died this way,

he wanted to imitate him." The father was stabbed with a knife; but, when
death did not come immediately, he requested that he be strangled with a
rope, which

stroke
also

was done accordingly. The son also was stabbed, but the was not mortal. So he went still further in imitating his father, and requested that he might die by strangulation, which was immediately

executed.

whose name has been mentioned several times, told me that and elder brother died this way, and that he himself felt an inclination to end his life in the same manner, though it is by no means obligatory for a son to follow the example of his father. One of his brothers died a natural death, and so did not continue the tradition. That voluntary death is considered praiseworthy, may be seen also from the fact, that, in the descriptions of the other world, those who have died this way are given one of the best dwelhng-places. They dwell on the red blaze of the aurora borealis, and pass their time playing ball with a
Aiiianwa't,
his father

walrus-skuU.

WALDEMAR JOCHELSON
(1852-1937)

Yukaghir Picture Writing and Loveletters

PICTOGRAPHIC WRITING IS STILL IN USE AMONG THE YUKAGHIR OF THE Yassachnaya and Korkodon Rivers. Like the American Ojibway, they trace with the point of a knife figures and lines on the inner surface of birchbark. Drawings are also made by puncturing. Formerly this was done with a bone
awl.

We
ized.

find

two kinds of pictographic writing

realistic

and conventional-

The realistic form of graphic art is used in birchbark letters in which one person or a group of people communicate to other persons his or their exploits or experiences. This form of writing, of course, can be called
reaUstic only so long as the writer
is

able to trace figures of men, animals

and

objects.

When

a hunter

is

leaving his temporary

camp

or seasonal

on a tree a birchbark letter to inform passing tribesmen where he has gone and what has happened. Fig. 138 shows the Korkodon River (1) and its tributary, the Rassokha (5). The rivers are indicated each by a pair of equidistant wavy lines. The line in the middle of the river shows the route of the writer. The lines across the Korkodon River just above the mouth of the Rassokha indicate the place where the river was dammed for fishing. Farther to the right is a representation of a grave (2) with a double cross showing that there a man died and was buried. Still farther to the right, three conical tents (3) are shown. At this place the whole Yukaghir group lived for some time. From there two tents moved farther up the Korkodon River. They had two boats, preceded by four canoes (4). One tent moved back and ascended the Rassokha (6). There they stopped for a time on the left shore and moved up the Rassokha with two boats and two canoes. This means that the people of the tent consisted of two families, although they
habitation he leaves

From

Jochelson,

Pacific Expedition, edited

The Yukaghir and the Yukaghirized Tungus, The Jesup North by Franz Boas, Memoirs of the American Museum of

Natural History, Vol.

IX (New

Yorli:

1926), pp. 434-436; 444-450.

331

332

WALDEMAR JOCHELSON

Fig. 138.

YUKAGHIR PICTURE WRITING CONCERNING A

FISHING EXPEDITION.

had only one

by

tent.

boat

is

distinguished

by

its

steering oar

and paddles

while the canoe has only a double paddle. This letter was found on a tree

my

Yukaghir travelling companions when we ascended the Korkodon

autumn of 1895, so that my companions learned where their clansmen had been during the summer and what they had done. They guessed who had died and told me why two families had one tent on the Rassokha River. The cover of the other tent was in our boat; one of my oarsmen belonged to the family that lived in a neighbor's tent. On the Korkodon River are shown three small tributaries. The information such a letter gives is not quite accurate, as the exact time of the beginning and end of the fishing is not given in the picture writing.
River in the

Yukaghir Picture Writing and Loveletters

Fig.

333

four Yukaghir log huts in the form Korkodon River (1). In the spring the inhabitants of the village moved on to hunt and put up four temporary conical tents (2) some distance from the winter dwellings. Near
of squares,

139 shows, from right to

left,

winter village on the

the

camp

are a larch tree,

two

sledges,

staff.

Two

loaded sledges leave the

staffs

camp

and a pair of snowshoes with a for hunting. The hunters on

snowshoes carrying
are sitting
letter

are driving the dogs.

On

the sledges

some boys
to

who

help the hunters while camping at night and hunting. This

the

was found by my travelMng companions on a tree when we came Korkodon from the Yassachnaya River in the spring of 1896.

Fig. 139.

YUKAoraR picture writing telling of spring hunt.

at the

Fig.

140 shows Yukaghir hunting scenes. Beginning

bottom, there
line

are three hunters (1) pursuing three wild reindeer.

represents two hunters

The next

(2)

on snowshoes with flintlock guns and staffs. The first hunter, resting his gun on a support, has shot at two reindeer and hit one of them. At the top, in the right hand corner is a hunter (4) on hands and feet stealthily approaching a tree on which two birds are sitting. It is
interesting to note that the birds are turned over with their backs resting

on the

tree.

In the

left

corner (3) are three conical tents, men, a dog and

sledges.

The small

size of the tents

might be explained as evidence of a

sense of perspective, but two aprons

drawn

at the

top at the

left

corner

argue against this idea.

334

WALDEMAR JOCHELSON

Fig. 149 represents a sample of a love letter. Each of the figures resembUng folded umbrellas represents in a conventional way a human being. The inner pair of lines indicates the legs, the outer two Unes the arms, and the dots show the joints of the legs and parts of the body. The dotted line extending from the side of the second figure, from right to left, indicates a braid, i. e., the figure is a girl or woman. The contents

of the letter are as follows:

Above

the central figure (a)

is

an object

like

Fig. 140.

PICTURE WRITING OF HUNTING SCENES.

a hat which represents a deserted dwelling,

leaving.

i.

e.,

one which

figure a

is

The minds or

the desires of the two female figures were directed

towards the central

the Yukaghir girls

figure, a,

but the

latter is

too important a person for

who composed

this letter.

Their minds stop on the

way, not daring to go to their original destination, turn around for a great

and go back. The mind of d goes to figure b and the mind of e goes to figure c. The figures c and e and b and d are united by bands of love, but the bands of b and d are of a more durable nature than those of e and c. This is shown by the diagonals uniting the heads of both pairs. In the first case we have two diagonals, and in the other only one.
while,

Yukaghir Picture Writing and Loveletters

335

Fig. 149.

YUKAGHIR LOVE LETTER ON BIRCHBARK.

my

have not been able to find further examples of such letters, neither in Museum collection. They were probably lost. Copies of the originals may be found in the Museum for Anthropology and
I

possession nor in the

Ethnology of the Academy of Sciences in Leningrad.^

In order to give here a fuller account on the character of Yukaghir love letters, of those collected on the Yassachnaya River by my friend S. Shargorodsky who lived for some time as a political exile among the Yassachnaya Yukaghir before I arrived there. He published his Yukaghir love letters in the Journal Zemleviedeniye (The Study of the Earth) of the Geographical Division of the Society for the Study of Nature, Anthropology and Ethnography of the University of Moscow, parts 2-3, 1895. Major-General von Krahmer translated Shargorodsky's article into German and published it together with illustrations in "Globus," Vol. LXIX, 1896, pp. 208-211.
1

I reprint the description

336

WALDEMAR JOCHELSON

In describing his Yukaghir love letters Shargorodsky says: "Only girls occupy themselves with such writings. Married women and men do not. These writings of girls concern exclusively their declarations of love, the expression of sorrow when being abandoned or other utterings of intimate
feelings.

"As material
substitute for
girls
is

for producing such letters, the girl uses birchbark as a

paper and the point of a knife instead of a pen. Of course, can indulge themselves in letter writing only in time of leisure, which
even during holidays they have is needed which
the hardest
little rest.

very limited. During the work-day they are busy from early morning tiU

late in the evening;

winter an immense quantity of fuel

girls

During the have to bring in

from

distant places

on sledges harnessed with a couple of small badly fed

dogs; during the

summer they do

work

of the fishing season.

A real
in

holiday does not arrive until the necessary

fishing season is at

wood has been brought

and the

an end.

"On such
that a dance

a day the neighboring settlements of the

wiU take place

at a certain place

Yakut are informed and time. While the young

use their leisure hours in

people are slowly assembling the Yukaghir

preparing love-letters. Usually one
girl is

girls

writing and the bystanders, boys

and
fails,

girls, try to

guess the meaning of the drawings.

When

the guessing

there

is

opportunity for jest and laughter.

represents a house.

"Following are the explanations of Figs. 150-153. In figure 150 the

line a, b, c, d, e,
figs.
f,

An

incompletely drawn house, as in

it.

151 and 152, indicates that the person shown there abandoned
t

It

""^
d

Fig.

150

Fig. 151

Yukaghir Picture Writing and Loveletiers

337
care, but this

may be added
is

that the houses are

drawn not with the same

not significant.
"In the house Fig. 150 there are two figures oj and kh which bear a

The figure oj represents a young man, and Although at a first glance looking aUke, both figures are nevertheless distinct and characterized by symbols. Of course the men have no beard and wear their hair long, so that they may look like girls; the clothing of a woman is almost the same as that of a man. Both wear leather coats with red and black trimmings, leather trousers and soft leather footwear; the cap for both sexes is also alike. The only difference consists in the long leather tassels of the woman's apron and richer ornamentation of the clothing. The outer appearance of both sexes is so much alike that one can hardly distinguish a man from a woman. "The dotted line (vt) emanating from the side of figure kh marks the tresses which girls wear. When this is not indicated then the female figure may still be distinguished from the males by their greater width, mn xz,
likeness to a folded umbrella.
girl.

kh a young

for usually
illustration

women

are

152 may be taken

more corpulent than men. The Figure a in the as a representation of a Russian woman, as

shown by the indication of a skirt. "The male and female figures are united by many Unes crossing each other. Thus the figures o and k (Fig. 150) are connected by the fines rs, tu, tr, which show that the two figures here represented love each other.
"Figure 150

may

express in words:

love thee with

all

the might of

my

soul.'
is

"Drawing on birchbark
his love in words.

the only

means

for a

young

girl to

confess her
declare

love to a man, as according to Yukaghir custom only the

man may

may be seen over the figure to the These consist of many punctured lines. These crossing stripes express the grief, sorrow, and misery of the person concerned. The figure to the left (Figure 151) stands in a house incompletely drawn, which indicates that it is or soon will be abandoned. The meaning of this illustration is: 'Thou goest hence, and I bide alone. For thy sake I still weep and moan.'
"In Figure 151 two crossing stripes
right.

"Figure 152 teUs us that the young

Ik

girl

is full

of sorrow.

The

fines

and

mn

indicate the person b as the source of her aifliction.

Such Unes
is

are necessary,

when

beside the

man on

account of

whom
fine

the girl

in

sorrow, there are other

man

figures represented.

The

lines rs, tu, ru, st,

which usually express

ceeds from the point

love, are here intersected

v,

by the

xyz which prothat

the head of the Russian

c.

woman. This shows

there exists an obstacle between b and

By

the side of the female figure a

two small

drawn which represent children. The curved fine dc c is thinking of the young man b. The young man d is thinking of the young girl c which is also indicated by a curved fine; but these find no response.
figures are

says that the

young

girl

338

WALDEMAR JOCHELSON

Fig.

152

'Thou goest forth, lovest a Russian woman, me; there will be children, and in a new home joy wilt thou find, while I must ever grieve, as thee I bear in mind, though another yet there be who loveth me.' "The Yukaghir, particularly young men, often and for various purposes go to Sredne-Kolymsk. These journeys always arouse the jealousy of the young ghls because they think that the Russian women whom the young Yukaghir men meet are much more handsome and attractive than they

"The

illustration expresses:

who

bars the

way

to

themselves.
affections.

They

are afraid that the Russian

women

will alienate their

When

a young Yukaghir once gets to town, he tries to stay there

more news he can tell more welcome he is. In every dweUing he is gladly met and treated. With this in view, he will rather suffer starvation than leave town prematurely. The Russians in town are not very liberal to
as long as possible, in order to obtain news, for the
his

on

way back home

the

their

Yukaghir

visitors,

although the Yukaghir themselves are very hos-

pitable to Russian guests in their homes.

more

jealous his girl becomes; then she cuts a letter

is.

The longer a boy is absent, the on birchbark saying

how

sad she

In this

way

originate compositions like our figure 152.

Yukaghir Picture Writing and Loveletters

339

Fig.

153
figures.
a,

"The
single,

letter fig.

153 shows

many
/,

Some
c;

of

with lines of love, as d and

are represented k,
of the

and

b and

them are comiected some of them still are

not having declared their love, but about to do so. In such a position
I, j and i. Only one girl stands aside and thinks (line yz) young man whose thoughts are also occupied with her, as indicated

by the
find;

line uv,
letter

but he

is

already connected with the

girl g.

"This

may be

expressed as follows: 'Each youth his mate doth

of
if

my

fate alone

it is

him

to

dream who

to another
not.'

wedded

is,

and

must

fain contented be,

only he forget

me

"

Salvaging the Ethnology of the Northern Plains

CLARK WISSLER
(1870-1947)
J.

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE
&

(1883-1957)

R.

WALKER
unknown)
the

LESLIE SPIER
(1893)

(dates

The next great endeavor of

Museum

of Natural History after the Jesup

Expedition was an immense salvage operation on the Northern Plains.

After the disappearance of the buffalo and the end of intertribal warfare

and

the settlement of the roving, war-like tribes

on reservations, Plains

Indian culture collapsed and a general cloud of apathy and anomie settled over the prairie. The old men who remembered the days of following the
buffalo

and

the warpath were

becoming fewer; they had

were not to be

little

will to live.

If the details of Plains culture

lost forever they

would have

to be recorded quickly.

The young anthropologists whom Boas and Livingston Farrand had trained at Columbia in the methods of anthropology and who came to the Museum to work on this problem were not doctors or lawyers or artists who came to study Indian cultures because of some sense of moral responsibility to Indians or some romantic attraction to a more primitive mode of life. They were professional anthropologists, trained in methods of collecting and evaluating data. They were not interested in Indians qua Indians; their interests were much broader. They were concerned with the varieties of man on earth, and Indians were one type of man. They sometimes spoke of the world of primitive men as their "laboratory." However, they were not quite so detached as they pretended to be; each one of them would defend the special excellence of "his" tribe. Empathy is an essential condition of successful field work; it bridges the abyss between two cultures and makes communication possible and it enables one to grasp inner meanings and comprehend the spirit that informs behavior. The young anthropologists did not need to apologize, as they sometimes did, for their emO" tional bond with their subjects. It was fortunate for them, however, that they were relatively disengaged; the Northern Plains in the 20th century

340

Salvaging the Ethnology of the Northern Plains

341

was a depressing place

a coherent style of
life.

for

anyone who wished

to absorb

and communicate

As
were went

part of this salvage project the key tribes of the Northern Plains
visited;

r.

Kroeber went to the Arapaho and the Gros Ventre; Wissler to the Blackfoot and the Dakota; Lowie went to the Northern Shoshone, the Assiniboine, the Hidatsa and the Crow; Radin went to the Winnebago. It was no longer possible to sink oneself in a culture, as Gushing did, and emerge after five years; or to return year after year to one's chosen tribe to sit around their campfires and swap yarns, as Grinnell did; or like Fletcher spend twenty-five years learning those things about tribal life that were either too secret or too commonplace to be spoken of. One spent frustrating weeks out of the short summer's field trip trying to find someone who was willing to talk; the informant that one found after weeks of search disappeared after the second interview; one went to his cabin miles away across the prairie to find it deserted; he had gone to visit his daughter. When one found someone who could talk, one listened and wrote; asked questions and wrote down the answers, and checked the answers that one got according to certain rules of evidence. Lowie in his posthumously published autobiography describes what field work was like on
the Plains in the early years of this century.^

The

field

researches of this group yielded a large body of comparable

ethnographic material which provided the basis for a number of theoretical

constructs.

Boas resigned from

Wissler,

the

who

carried forward

Museum in 1905 and was succeeded by Glark many of Boas' ideas. Wissler first studied

psychology; his degree was in psychology and his thesis dealt with individual mental differences.

He became
Museum

interested in

anthropology as a

graduate student, and shortly after completing his graduate studies accepted

Boas' invitation to join the

ogy; in later years

staff.

He

never went back to psychol-

when he

lectured at the Institute of

Human

Relations at

Yale University he encouraged interdisciplinary interchange between anthropology and psychology and was hospitable to culture-personality research although he himself was not active in this
It
field.

was

in the analysis of the Plains material that Wissler

developed the

ideas that are generally associated with his

name and which were important

guideposts for the ordering and interpretation of data during this period.

The

culture-area concept grew out of the observation that cultures that were

geographically close shared

many

features,

that each of these areas of

had a center where the characteristic culture of the existed in its most highly developed form. The age-area concept asarea sumed that the cultural center is also the place of origin and that traits
shared culture
traits

'^Robert H. Lowie, Ethnologist. Berkeley University of California Press, 1959.

342
diffuse

WISSLER, LOWIE, WALKER, SPIER

so that the most widely diffused

outward from the center as ripples from a stone dropped in water, traits may be assumed to be the oldest.

Wissler's concept of pattern (not to be confused with the later uses of the

word

as a synonym for configuration or basic theme) isolated certain basic forms of wide distribution the form of woman's dress, the medicinebundle complex, the Sun Dance complex, etc. of which the individual

tribal manifestations are

variations.

application of these ideas to a body of concrete data.

Sun Dance complex on the Plains is an The Sun Dance ritual was common to all tribes of the Northern Plains, but in no two tribes is it performed in exactly the same way nor does it always have the same significance. At the time these studies were made the Sun Dance was no longer
Leslie Spier's analysis of the

being performed, having been forbidden by government edict because

of the
tortures which formed an essential part of it. Lowie, Kroeber and Wissler recorded descriptions of the Sun Dance from old men who had participated in them. J. R. Walker, a physician who lived for years on the Teton reservation, witnessed the last Sun Dance; he was initiated into Teton medicine cults, and his description of the Oglala form of the Sun Dance, recorded from various participants, is the fullest and the most

philosophical account. Spier analyzed

breaking

it

down

into

its

recorded accounts of the ritual, component parts; he plotted the geographical disall

and from this concluded which elements were the most constant, and hence presumably the oldest, and suggested on
tribution of the various elements,

the basis of these distributions the probable center

was

diffused.

He

then went on to

show how

the

from which the ritual Sun Dance was integrated

This study provided

with the different ceremonial patterns of each

tribe.

a model for similar studies of other religious and mythological complexes. Of Wissler's formulations, the age-area concept is the least acceptable,

and

his

own

researches on the history of the horse on the Plains and the

spread of the use of tobacco around the world contravene any such simple formula. The culture-area concept has been of very great use not only in
arranging
data which

museum collections but in ordering now exist and in setting the stage

the vast

mass of ethnographic

for future field work. Wissler

developed and extended his culture-area ideas, relating them to natural

conditions of climate and vegetation, and Kroeber (whose
in Parts

work is dealt with and VI) integrated the more complex ideas from the field of

ecology.

Kroeber

left

the

Museum

in

1901

to organize the

department of anthro-

pology at the University of California. Lowie remained until 1921. Each summer he went into the field, to the Shoshone, the Paiute, the Assiniboine,
the
to

Crow

above

all to the

Crow who

"delighted"

him

at his first visit

and

whom

he returned again and again. The proud, lecherous, quarrelsome

"his" tribe. In

Crow became

1921 Lowie

left

to join Kroeber's

department

Salvaging the Ethnology of the Northern Plains

in California,

343

Radin went to England. 1942. There were more such concentrated programs as the Jesup Expedition or the work no on the Plains, but a far more diversified program. For a while the Southwest was a center of interest: Nelson and Spier worked with archaeological problems; Lowie worked briefly with the Hopi in kinship structure while Kroeber worked on kinship and social structure in Zufii. Pliny Earle Goddard came from California and joined the Museum staff and worked in linguistics Navaho and Apache and published a series of Apache texts. But the Museum never had a systematic integrated program in the Southwest comparable to its Northwest Coast and Plains programs. ^R.L.B.
after.

and Spier followed soon

Wissler remained at the

Museum

until his retirement in

CLARK WISSLER
(1870-1947)

The Social Life of the Blackfoot Indians

HERALDRY AND PICTURE WRITING

THE TERM DEED AS USED BY US HAS THE SAME SOCIAL SIGNIFICANCE AS
coup, a
full

discussion of which has been given by Grinnell. Without going

it

into details,

seems that among the Blackfoot, the capture of a weapon was

the coup, or deed, rather than the formal striking of the enemy, though such

was

Our impression is, from what we have heard was no such formal development of the coup practice as among many other tribes. An old man relating his deeds seldom mentions scalps but dwells upon the number of guns, horses, etc. captured; whereas, according to our observation, a Dakota boasts of his wounds, enemies slain and coups. However, heraldry was a prominent feature in Blackfoot life. By this term, we mean those conventions by which deeds are recorded and accredited, with their social privileges and responsibiUties. Anyone with such recognized deeds is likely to be called upon to name a
also taken into account.
in the field, that there
child, to

perform special services in social functions as well as

specific parts

comes forward and in a loud voice states what deed or deeds he has performed and immediately renders the required service. For this, he may receive presents unless the occasion is one of special honor. In theory, at least, the formal announcement is a kind of challenge for contradiction by any of the assembly in so far that it implies the eligibility of him who makes it. Women do not
of rituahstic ceremonies. In aU cases of this kind the warrior

ordinarily perform such deeds but often recount the embroidering of robes,
their resistance of temptation, etc.,

when about

to

perform some ceremonial

function, a truly analogous practice.

As

elsewhere, the graphic recording of deeds

was

chiefly

by picture

From
Papers,

Wissler, "The social life of the Blackfoot Indians," Anthropological American Museum of Natural History, Vol. 7 (New York, 1911-1912),

pp. 36-41, 43, 107, 100-104, 136-140, 147, 152-155.

344

The

Social Life of the Blackjoot Indians

345

indicated

upon robes, back-walls and the outsides of tipis. A few might be upon leggings, but in general, garments were not considered the place for such records. The outside and inside of the tipi were the convenwriting,

tional places.

Good examples

of this are stiU to be seen.

An

unusual

tipi

was collected by the writer

hundred figures, representing sixty-six distinct deeds most of which were performed by seven Piegan then living. The tipi was in reality one of the "painted lodges" to be discussed under another head, but may be considered here merely as a good example of picture writing and heraldry.
in 1903, bearing several

In the sketches. Fig.

is

a small vertical section of the

is

tipi

cover. Its

one continuous array of sketches. From this series a number of typical groups were reassembled in Fig. 2. Beginning at the top in Fig. 1, we have Bear Chief (a) on foot
entire circumference to about half the height

k*Mt3'f^1B.l.^
A'" ^'-r-e

.S^

ti&.^'&Wf
Fig. 1. SECTION

w
TIPI.

OF A DECORATED

346

CLARK WISSLER

Fig. 2.

SELECTED FIGURES FROM A DECORATED

TIPI.

surprised by Assiniboine Indians but he escaped; (b) Double

loose four horses; (c)

Runner cut Double Runner captures a Gros Ventre boy; (d) Double Runner and a companion encounter and kill two Gros Ventre, he taking a lance from one; (e) even while a boy Double Runner picked up a war-bonnet dropped by a fleeing Gros Ventre which in the system counts as a deed; (f ) as a man he has two adventures with Crow Indians, taking a gun from one; (g) he, as leader, met five Flathead in a pit and killed them; (h) a Cree took shelter in some cherry brush in a hole, but Big Nose went in for him; (i) not completely shown, but representing a Cree Indian killed while running off Piegan horses; (j) Double Runner, carrying a medicine pipe, took a bow from a Gros Ventre and then kiUed him; (k) Double Runner took a shield and a horse from a Crow tipi, a dog barked and he was hotly pursued; (m) he killed two Gros Ventre and took two guns;

The

Social Life of the Blackfoot Indians

347
a boy; (o) he took four mules.
is left

(n) he captured a Gros Ventre

woman and

From

this sample,
little

it

will

be noted that a great deal

for the

memory,

though a

practice will enable one to determine the character of the

exploit suggesting each drawing. Fig. 2 needs less

comment

as the technical
is

aspect of the

work speaks

for

itself.

The

large

man

with a pipe

symbolic

of the vision in which this type of

in

in

had its inception and, hence, belongs a different category. The drawing was done by a number of individuals; some cases, by the hero of the exploits, but often by a young man under
tipi

his

immediate direction. This

is

obvious in the varying degree in execution

is

and conventionality, the range of which

adequately shown in the sketches.

it

When
left

considered as a system of recording deeds,

appears that

much

is

to the

whim

of the

artist,

but that certain general modes of suggesting

common

types of adventure are recognized

and allowed

to control the

com-

position to such an extent that even a stranger

may

interpret the sketches

is

with confidence.

Of

course, the function of such writing

to objectify

the formal recounting of deeds, only such performances as are so recognized

and carry with them

social

and ceremonial values being considered worthy

collected,

of a place in the series.

From
less

the

many examples

we

selected the following

more or

conventionalized symbols:
received or given are indicated by a black spot with a dash of

Wounds

red for bleeding. Enemies killed,

when not

fully pictured, are represented

by a row of skeleton
horse decorations.
three

figures as in Fig. 3 a, a

form always used

death
is

in heraldic

wounds in the head, heart and thigh. Fig. 3b. A scalp taken is symbolized by human hair and white weasel skin, except in painting when
the symbol
is

In the pictured form,

often indicated

by

as in Fig. 3c.

The capture

of the enemies' property, or a deed,

is

indicated by pictures
is

of the objects recognized as worth considering. While naturally, there

difference of opinion, the following

may be

of captures conferring ceremonial rights:

taken as the approximate

list

horses, guns, shields, lances.

b
Fig. 3.

SYMBOLS USED IN WAR RECORDS.

348

CLARK WISSLER

bows and quivers, shot-pouches and powder horns, daggers, war-bonnets, and all medicine objects. The following order or rank, was given by an gun, informant recognized by the Piegan as an authority in heraldry: lance, bow, the enemy's life, cutting a horse loose from a tipi, leading a war party, acting as a scout, shields, war-bonnets, a medicine pipe, and driving off loose horses. The most significant point is that while the Ufe of an enemy is fourth, the capture of his gun is first. When a man was seen to fall with a gun, it was not unusual for one or more young men to rush boldly out to snatch the prize. To ride up, jerk a gun from an enemy's hand and get away without injury to either party was the greatest deed possible. While in picturing such deeds realistic forms are used, as the symbol for a shield

(Fig. 3d), they are often greatly conventionalized. Blankets,

if

counted,

one or two cross lines for the stripes on most trade blankets. Horses taken in open fight, when not pictured, are represented by track symbols [as] under the sketch of a mule in Fig. 1. The rectangular variant as found among many other tribes is not used as an
are
as rectangles with

shown

equivalent.
Stealing a horse tied

up

in the enemies'

camp

is

a deed of special imporis

tance and naturally has a definite symbolism. This case

of

some

interest

here because

we

find

among our

collection practically

all

the steps between

the full pictured form and the bare symbol. Thus,

we

find drawings
tipis,

show-

ing the adventurer cutting loose horses picketed near the

again, the cutting represented

Fig. 4;

by a knife and a hand, the pickets alone representing the horses so taken, and finally, a series of crossed lines. The last is the simplest form but may be said to be an alternate with the preceding one, some persons representing the picket stake one way, some the other. The Hidatsa are reported to use the crossed lines for a coup and the Teton use it as a rescue symbol (a coup saved from the enemy) hence, its substitution in Blackfoot records for the more reaUstic form of picket stake may have been due to suggestion. In this connection, it may be well to note that by a system of signs, a
;
.

ftrf
Fig. 4.

XXX

METHODS OF RECORDING THE CAPTURE OF HORSES.

The Social Life of

the Black foot Indians

349

>>>
Fig. 6.

A SAND

MAP SHOWING THE COURSE OF

WAR

PARTY.

war party

left definite

information for the guidance of stragglers or other

similar errands.

parties of their tribe

on

On

leaving a

camp

site,

a willow
if

bent V-like was stuck in the ground, the apex in the direction taken;
the distance to the next

camping place was small, the angle was quite acute, etc. Another sign, used chiefly on the trail, was the mark of a travois, or two converging lines, the apex toward the direction taken. Indeed, the twig is spoken of as a travois sign. Exploit directions were often left for a second party by a kind of map marked in the sand or in bare earth. A sketch by the writer from such a map made at his request is shown in Fig. 6. Two branches of a river are represented easily recognized by one having a knowledge of the country. The travois marks indicate the direction of movement. Pebbles painted black or pieces of charcoal mark the proposed camping places, the number in each case indicating the length of stop. Thus, the sketch would imply that the next camp would be one day's journey from the nearest river; whence, after a stay of two nights, they camped one night on the nearest fork and two nights on the second. To indicate that they were joined by a second party, the travois signs are used to denote two paths converging on a camp site.

MEDICINE BUNDLES
By medicine bundle we mean any object or objects, kept in wrappings when not in use, guarded by the owner according to definite rules and associated with a ritual containing one or more songs. To the Blackfoot
this is

a definite term denoting an array of such associations, ranging from

the simplest

war charm
is

individual ownership

an

interest in

huge complex beaver bundle. Single or and though the tribe may in a sense have any large bundle, and relatives may have a property, or
to the

the rule

investment, relation to
in this

it, the fact remains that all the associations treated paper are considered by the Blackfoot as examples of rituals of
.

individual ownership.

350
ORIGINS OF RITUALS

CLARK WISSLER

By
all

this

time the reader has become aware that a dream

is

is

the origin of

these medicines and that the object

it

after all at

but an objective part

of a ritual. Hence,

seems best to discuss

of this phase of culture together with certain beliefs

taining thereto, because the
this

some length certain aspects and conceptions persucceeding sections of

stiU

complex

rituals in the

paper

will thereby

be better understood. The great importance

attached to dreams seems to be but a surviving remnant of what once

absorbed almost the entire attention of the leading men, for we read in the
journal of

Henry
to sing,

that,

"If

a Piegan dreams something particular, on

awakening, he instantly rouses his wife, makes a speech about his dream,

accompanied by this woman, and sometimes all his If he dreams of having drunk liquor, he gets up, relates the circumstances, sings for a long time with his women, and then, if not too far from the fort, comes in to have his dream accomplished. During my short stay here I have frequently been awakened by such speeches and songs in the dead of the night."

and begins

wives join in chorus.

We

limited to real

have not been able to determine whether these experiences are dreams or include vivid day-dreams and sudden emotional

bursts of thought

and imagination. We are inclined to believe that anydream or vision (normal workings of the mind of a person awake) would be rejected by a body of intelligent Blackfoot as of no medicine value. The dehrium and hysterical accompaniment of some kinds of sickness are generally regarded as supernatural, but more as gUmpses into
thing short of a
the future
life

than as the occasions in which powers are conferred.

We

do,

however, recall a few cases in which sick

men

claim to have received such

powers; but none of the more important rituals are assigned to such origins.

The
to

attitude toward alcoholic intoxication is uncertain because there seems have been a gradual moral awakening to its evil effects, which may account for the present tendency to consider experiences so induced as of

no
for

particular consequence. Thus, while

it

is

not at

all

clear just

what
shall,

psychological

phenomena may convenience, speak of them

rituals is the

enter into the origin of a ritual,

as dreams.

we
the
is

A
there

point of special interest in our further

discussion

of
it

more
appar-

complex
ent that
are

manner of
the

interpreting dreams, for

where there are at least as many rituals as actual dream experiences could scarcely present such uniformity as we observed and certainly not contain so many well composed songs without a system of some kind. It seems to

among

a people

adult

males,

us obvious
tional

that in

the objective aspects

at

least,

there

is

a conven-

mode

of formulating

consisting of a narrative, in

what we choose to call the ritual; this ritual one or more songs, an object and accessories, and

many

cases, certain requirements of the person concerned.

Owing

to

The Social Life of

difficulties

the Blackfoot Indians

351

we have little more than inferential knowledge were usually told with every mark of sincerity that the ritual and narrative were precisely as experienced in the origin. On the other hand, it was stated that unless the dreamer was a man of medicine experience or one possessing great confidence in himself, he would call upon one possessing these quahfications for advice. From what we have
already stated,

on

this point.

We

learned,

we

feel

reasonably certain that the advice

is

in

most cases an

inter-

pretation, a deliberate composition of a ritual.

For

illustration,
full

we

offer

an incident in which unfortunately the writer did not take

of the situation.

advantage

storm caused us to
his

Once when crossing the reservation a threatened thundermake camp quickly. While hurriedly pitching our tent,

a bird was observed hopping about within a few feet of the writer, following

movements. During the constant peals of thunder no more than passing was given to it, but when the tent was finally pitched, the bird had disappeared and the threatened storm was passing just to our left, leaving us unharmed and dry. On mentioning this to a man of reputed medicine experience we were informed that this was an incident of unusual
attention

importance, for the bird had not only protected us from the thunder but

had sought to convey some kind of power. He asked if singing had not been heard and a voice speaking, finally suggesting that an experienced man be called upon to "fix it up." All further discussion of the incident he
declined as unsafe. Doubtless,
if

the writer had accepted the veiled offer,

is no doubt composed from suggestions received in dreams; the only information we sought was as to the methods and conditions under which this was done. There are reasons for believing that the fundamental conventionahty is the tendency to assign a dream origin to everything of importance on the theory that everything is to be truly explained by such phenomena. For example, the writer once remarked that the inventor of the phonograph was a remarkable man. The immediate reply was that he was in no wise different from others but that in a dream he was told to take certain materials and place them in certain relations, with the promise of certain results. The carrying away of the voice was regarded as a great medicine power and the inventor in question as merely a lucky individual, who must have experienced great prosperity and happiness in consequence. While this statement was unusually abstract, it was

a typical ritual would have been produced. Of course, there

that rituals are deliberately

on our part but

not otherwise at variance with

many

others observed in the course of our

work.

To

return to the

main

point,

we

believe that the evidence at

hand

warrants the assumption that the sincerity of

contention that rituals however personal, are

many

Blackfoot

men

in their

due to an unwavering
feeling that
if

faith in the theory of

the thing

comes

into

mind

at

literal dream experiences, is dream origin and, hence, the all, it must in consequence be a

dream.

Another important Blackfoot idea

is

the conception of the transfer

352
of

CLARK WISSLER
that takes

power

place in such a dream experience. Allowing for

is

variations, the Blackfoot theory

that there functions in the universe

a force (natoji
entire world,
itself

sun power) most manifest in the sun but pervading the

a power that

may communicate

with individuals making

manifest in and through any object, usually animate. Such mani-

festation is
it, it is

by speech rather than deed and

in every narrative

based upon

becomes found no clear distinction as to whether the power masked as the object or whether the object itself masked as a person. Such logical analysis seems not to have been necessary to the Blackfoot belief and practice. To them it seems sufficient also that power
stated or implied that at the

moment

of speaking the object

for the time being "as a person."

We

is

given, without further speculation as to

its

ultimate source, simply natoji.

The being appearing in the dream ojffers or consents upon request to give power for some specific purpose. This is done with more or less ceremony;
usually the face and hands of the recipient are painted, songs sung, directions given for invoking the

power and

certain obligations, or taboos, laid

is

upon
that

the recipient.
shall be,

The being conferring power

it

not content with saying

it

but formally transfers

is

to the recipient with appropriate

ceremonies. This

regarded as a compact between the recipient and the

is

being then manifest, and each

tions.

expected to

fulfill

faithfully his

The compact

is

a continuous relation and no matter

own obligahow complex

still

the ritual

may be

or

how

important to the

tribe,

it is

in every case
it.

matter solely between one individual and the being

to the Blackfoot,
is

who gave

The

ritual,

in reality
is

an assumed

faithful reproduction of the

original transfer. ... It

right to transfer the

important to

know

that the initial recipient has the

compact to another but in doing so relinquishes aU any benefits to be derived from it. It will then be useless for him to appeal to it in the hour of need for it has, in theory, completely passed out of his life. When such a transfer takes place, the original
right to

transfer

is

reproduced as
is

faithfully as possible. Theoretically, the recipient

of a ritual

in the precise relation

it is

dream
tive

himself; hence,

impossible to

he would be if experiencing the tell from the form of the narra-

whether the narrator himself had the initial experience or not. He feels speaking in the first person. Thus, many of the accounts, even some for the men of medicine experience, are probably many times removed
justified in

from the
It will

initial recipient.

most respects the vital part of the power usually reaches its climax in the presentation of the song. Thus, we found men often wilhng to sell the charm or medicine objects but very reluctant even to sing the songs for fear they might thus be transferred to the writer. The objects they said could be readily replaced without a grave breach with the power concerned, but, if the songs went, that was the end of it. We are convinced that the deHberate composing of new songs is going on at the present time. One
be observed that the song
initial transfer
is

in

ritual

and that the

of the

The

Social Life of the Blackfoot Indians

353

him hear songs from distant tribes. Havhand such a phonographic record, his request was complied with. After several repetitions he was able to foUow accurately and went away humming it over and over. Some time afterward he reluctantly admitted that he had now arranged words for this song and "expected to dream
individual asked the writer to let

ing at

something."
Blackfoot man, and for that matter,
a far less active part in such

There are many reasons why dream experiences are desirable to every women also, though the women take
activities.

Consequently, such dreams are

sought. Several individuals have told us in apparent

good

faith that they

never had a dream that could be considered as in any

this class;

way belonging

to

one or two of them had sought the experience without success. The usual procedure where such experiences are sought is to go out to some lonely place and fast night and day until the dream comes. A youth is likely to be directed by a man of medicine experience and to be made the object of preliminary ceremonies to propitiate the dream, but he makes the journey alone. While at the chosen place the seeker of dreams or visions is expected to beseech all the things of the sky, earth, and water, to take pity on him. This caU is a mournful wail almost hke a song, the words being composed at will. The only object used is a fiUed pipe offered to aU the beings addressed and kept in readiness for the manifestation of the dream person previously discussed. It is said that the majority of young

men

them the

down upon them to abandon their post. Even old experienced men often find the trial more than they can bear. Men of medicine experience seldom resort to these tortures, as dreams of a satisfactory character are said to come to them in normal sleep. At present, the majority of men seem content to secure their charms and other medicines from those who do have dreams or from the large stock of such available for
fail in this
first

ordeal as an unreasonable fear usually comes

night, causing

transfer. On the other hand, every man of consequence is supposed to have one experience in which he acquired a supernatural helper and received a song. Of this, he never speaks definitely, except to an intimate friend to whom he will say, "When I am about to die, you are to paint me and sing this song. Then I may recover." This song is thus secret and never used except in the face of death. We were told by one man that in such an experience as gave a man one of these songs or rituals, the being manifest in the vision announces that he wiU give his body to the recipient and cause a small object to pass into the body of the recipient, which

passes out again at death.

Having now given some general aspects of the beliefs associated with and their accessories we may take up the discussion of more elaborate rituals with their bundles While each is the exclusive property of its owner until transferred to another, there are what may be considered duphcates in the hands of other individuals; hence, we have given a definite section
rituals

354
to each of the

CLARK WISSLER

known

types of bundles.

We

sought detailed information

concerning at least one definite bundle of each type, but owing to the great difficulty in securing the songs and the great amount of time required for
the satisfactory mastery of even one ritual, our data are far

from complete.

We believe,
each type.

however, that

it is

sufficient to give

a fair idea of the nature of

THE MEDICINE-PIPE

pipe bundles. Something

more important medicines of the Blackfoot are the sacred more than seventeen of these are distributed among the several reservations and while there are some differences, as will be noted later, the greater number are of one type and may be assumed to have had a common origin. We refer to what may be considered the thunder's pipe, or the ritual handed down by the thunder, a Blood version
the
first

Among

So far as we know, the by Kane as observed June, 1846. He has given us a sketch of the dance with the pipes, one of the bundles showing in proper position over the door of a tipi.
of which
in our collection of myths.

may be found

clear account of the Blackfoot pipe

ceremony

is

Fig. 20. A MEDICINE-PIPE

BUNDLE.

Length, 132 cm.

A pipe bundle is shown in Fig.

are

20.

The outer wrapping

this

for these bundles

should be the hairy skin of a black bear and next to

a scraped elk hide.

Around the middle of the bundle is a broad strip of elkskin. The contents made up into two bundles which we shall designate as primary and secondary. The former is a long slender poke made of red flannel, both
ends open.
It

contains the decorated stem, or the pipe proper, and a head

band

of white buffalo skin, with the hair,

and an eagle feather to

tie

on the

owner's head. The bundle should always hang so that the mouthpiece of the stem points to the north (in the ceremony, toward the east) and as a guide to this the ends of the poke are tied with different colored cords.


The
Social Life of the Blackfoot Indians

355

The secondary bundle contains a smaller pipestem/ an owl, two loons, two white swans, two cranes, a muskrat skin, an otterskin, a rattle, a skin of a fawn, a whistle, and sometimes the skin of a prairie dog. These are wrapped in pieces of gaily colored calico. Tobacco is put into the bird skins. The rattle is kept in a poke of prairie dog skin. Naturally, the contents of this secondary bundle differ somewhat for the various pipes.
In a square fringed bag are kept paints and smudge materials; also beads for the owner and his wife, a necklace and other accessories. There
also a wooden bowl for the owner, a whip, and a rope. No one must use any of these objects handled by a pipe owner. He must also have a horse for his own use. Should he loan it, something iU would befaU the horse or the rider. Special forked sticks are required for the smudge. All these objects are kept coated with red earth paint.^ The owner's robe was often painted though since the extinction of the buffalo this has almost passed
is

out of mind.
stoker,

special fan,

an

eagle's wing, is in the outfit; also a pipe-

and a tobacco board.

The primary bundle is a true bundle and was sometimes carried to war. Around its middle is often a binding, similar to the elkskin wrapping, and a cord for suspension. Though we have no direct evidence, the inference
is

that the secondary bundle has

ing the pipestem only.

is about thirty with red flannel. The intervening spaces are fringed with strips of white

been added to an original bundle containin our collection is shown in Fig. 22. It inches long. In two places it is wrapped with wire, in another

The stem

weasel skins.

From

the lower end hangs a fan of eagle tail-feathers.

few

bells are also attached.

The headdress is a simple band of white buffalo calfskin (often sheep or goat skin) about two inches wide. The longest feather from an eagle's
wing
is

tied across the

head above
bundle
in

this

band.

The medicine-pipe
following:

the

Museum

collection

contains

the

50-5448

a.

The wrappings

for the bundle: a tanned elk hide, a bear-

skin (in this case an imitation of

dog

skin), a

number

of

thongs and pieces of gaily colored calico.

b.

The carrying

strap: a

woman's
It is

belt because

it falls

to her

to carry the bundle.

c.

woman's shawl.

customary to cover

all

pipe

bundles with such a shawl.

iThe pipe bowls are not kept in the bundle and the medicine stem is rarely smoked. About the only time it is so used is when the bundle is open at the Sun Dance and brought into the enclosure. There it must be lighted with flint and steel by a person who has captured a medicine-pipe from the enemy. 2 It is said that formerly every pipe owner kept his garment fully coated with red paint so that he could be known at sight.

356

CLARK WISSLER
a.

50-5449

The decorated pipestem,

bujffalo calf.

the chief object in the bundle.

b.

A headdress of mountain goat wool in imitation of white

Eagle wing-feather, worn crosswise on the leader's head.

c.

d.
e.
f.

Small pipestem for smoking in the ceremonies.

Rattle used by the

owner in connection with

certain songs.

Bag

of muskrat skin for the rattle.

g.

flageolette.

h.
i.

Head

of a crane.

Skin of a loon in the form of a tobacco pouch.

j.

Foetus of a deer, tobacco pouch.

k.
1.

pipe rack of three sticks.

Skin of a prairie dog. Skin of a squirrel. Skin of a squirrel.

m.
n.
o.

Bowl

for pipestem d.

p.
q.
r.

Skin of a muskrat. Skin of a mink.

An
owl

owl

skin.

50-5716 50-5717 50-5450

50-5451 50-5452

An
a-c.

skin.

Skins of birds.
Stick for fastening the bundle over the door
side,

on the outwhere it is sometimes placed in the morning. Tripod on which the bundle hangs when out-of-doors. a. Rawhide bag with accessories. b. Small bag of roots used in the smudge. c-h. Bags containing red paints.
i.

A paint bag.
Muskrat skin for wiping sweat from the face of the owner.

j.

k.

Bag

of pine needles for the smudge.

1-m.
n-o.

Necklaces for the owner and his wife.

Paint sticks for penciling designs on the face.

50-5453 50-5454
50-5455 50-5456 50-5457 50-5458 50-5459
Function.

a.

Tongs used for placing Tobacco cutting board.

Pipe-stokers.

fire

on the smudge

place.

b-c.

Wooden bowl

for the owner's food.

Fan of eagle wing for the owner. Whip for owner's horse. Thong lariat for owner's horse.
Painted buffalo robe for owner.

When
first

considering the function of the pipe bundle

it

it

may be
new

noted that there are but four occasions on which

can be opened: the

transferred to a

sound of the

thunder in the spring; when

it is

The Social Life

of the Blackfoot Indians

357

Fig. 22. A MEDICINE-PIPE.

owner; when the tobacco within

is

renewed; and in accordance with a vow.

these bundles are believed to have been
in

As

indicated in the origin

myth

handed down by the thunder and are

thunder's pipe. Curiously enough,
of an ordinary pipe, or, according to

consequence often spoken of as the

a behef that the thunder
is

it is

afraid
to

some informants, has an aversion

them and smoking; hence, in the ceremonies the pipe-man is careful to open the prayers with "Thunder, this is your own pipe," etc. Some few years ago (1904) a number of Piegan were gathered in a tipi during a thunderstorm. A man called out in bravado inviting the thunder to come in and smoke. Almost at the same instant, it is said, the bolt struck the tipi, killing some and injuring others. This was cited as recent confirmation of the old belief that the thunder disliked smoking except in case of his own pipe. The opening of the pipe bundle at the return of the thunder is imperative. At the first sound reaching his ears, the owner of a bundle must make immediate preparations for the opening. He goes outside and announces the event, extending an invitation to everybody, old and young. It is said, that everyone is made glad by the sound of the first thunder because they wiU be

358

CLARK WISSLER

prayed for and receive consecrated tobacco.^ They do not wait for the invitation but at the first thunder hurry to the tipi of the nearest pipe owner. The ceremony does not differ materially from the full ritual given above,
except that
it

may be

closed at the end of the twenty-first song at the wiU

is

of the owner.

The pipe

carried out-of-doors,
is

and prayers are made to the

thunder while the mouthpiece

fare of
year.
all

held up towards the sky, the

is

home

of the

thunder. In the prayers at this time the thunder

besought for the wel-

present and especially that no one be killed by

is

Tobacco

taken out of the bundle and distributed

of this
is

him during the among aU present.

this time,

The possession and smoking

fluence of the
all

believed to bring one under the in-

pervading good will of the thunder. Also, at

is

soup made of dried berries kept in store for the occasion,

even small portions of berry food (usually service berries)
out.
It

distributed:

may be

given

has been said that

this

the summer, but

we
all

find

ceremony no evidence
life,

is

to

make

berries increase during

to support such a view as in the

prayers plenty of

things are asked, tobacco, meat, vegetables, berries,

clothing, horses, children, long

success in aU undertakings, etc.

About

the only distinctive feature

tection against death

we have

observed,

is

the specific prayer for pro-

by lightning. The Owner. The owner of a pipe bundle is spoken of as a medicine-pipe man. The name also applies after the ritual has been transferred, though in speaking, the phrase construction when possible is in the past tense, thus distinguishing between the real and the ex-owner. The ex-pipe-man may be called in to officiate at the opening of the bundle and may also receive a bundle into his tipi for temporary care during the incapacity of the owner; but no other person can lead the ceremony no matter how famihar he may be with the ritual. A pipe-man receives great social, religious, and even political
recognition, being regarded as of the
seat in a tipi:
i.e.,

first

rank and entitled to the

first

opposite the

man

of the household.

As

this is

disputed

by the owners of beaver bundles, a question to be considered later, we may safely assert that he is among the highest ranks in respect to the ownership of rituals. The wife of a pipe-man should be honored and given a seat
not lower than that of the head-wife of her host.
If possible, tipi

everyone

is

expected to pass behind a pipe-man whether in a

theory at
least, the

or on the road. In

same

rules should

be observed toward his wife. All

of a pipe-man, the best of the
entitled to the best cuts

loud and boisterous conversation should be restrained in their presence.

If in the

chase one should kiU

to him.

meat goes

game in front The pipe-men were also

is
fall.

from

the buffalo drive. While he

running buffalo no one should cross his

Naturally, pipe-men are called

tracks lest the horse stumble and

3

the sound of the first thunder in the spring everyone is expected to stop and pray. He opens with, "I am glad to hear you again," and prays for happiness, health, plenty, etc.
in his tracks

At

The

Social Life of the Blackfoot Indians

to

359

upon

perform certain important functions, as selecting the camp sites band when moving camp, sitting in councils, offering prayers, etc. Some observers have considered these men as constifor the sun dance, leading the
tuting a society but this
is

scarcely admissible for they are not so regarded

by their people and while they have certain bonds of sympathy, they neither meet in a body nor have ceremonies of any kind in common. On the other hand, some of the societies to be discussed later had medicine-pipes, in which case the owners were members, a circumstance no doubt contributing to the confusion.^

must observe certain prohibitions more or less Among these, he must never point at a person with the fingers but with the thumb: to use the finger would endanger the life of the one so designated. He must not loan any of his personal property. If a person asks such a favor, he makes no reply whatever. In such cases, it is usual for the borrower to take what he wants if he can

The owner

of a bundle

troublesome in his daily routine.

owner cannot ask for the return nor send for objects so taken, he is entirely dependent upon the good will and honesty of his neighbors. If he finds an object when walking or riding, he must not pick it up or allow it to be appropriated to his own use. He may call another and allow him to take it. If, however, he has four coups to his record, he may take the object after recounting them to the sun and singing certain songs. In smoking, he must take the pipe in the same hand and hold it in the same way as the person passing it to him. The pipe-men themselves have a special way of holding the pipe at all times when passing it. In formal smoking, the pipe is passed down the circle once and then returned to the leader, but a pipe-man may smoke it every time it passes. If he does not smoke he must hold the end of the stem to his breast at his turn instead of passing it on as others may do. No one must sit on his bed or bedding as misfortune will come to him. The horse that carries the pipe bundle when camp is moved has his face painted like the owner and a stripe over the shoulders and rump. After having borne the pipe bundle once, meat must never be placed in his load, lest he meet with an accident. On the march, the owner must permit no one to pass in front of him. No weapons can be carried on the horse or other conveyance with the pipe bundle. All pipe-men have a fear of dogs. There are other restrictions but these are
find
it.

As

the

probably

sufiicient for

our purpose.

It will
it

be observed that

many

of these

apply to others as well as the owner,

4

being the duty of aU, old and young,

McClintock speaks of the bundle owners as a society (251), but we find no an organization. In his account of the forced transfer, McClintock speaks of the party as composed of pipe-men, or members of the society. Our informants have incidentally stated that in this procession and its ceremonies, the chief parts were assigned to certain men because of requisite war deeds, regardless of their having owned a pipe bundle. The name medicine-pipe men, applies only to those who now own or have owned pipe bundles. Thus the owners, in a sense, constitute a class, but are not organized.
traces of

360

CLARK WISSLER
and to

to inform themselves of the requirements of the various rituals

respect

them accordingly.
tipi

brings

The home of the pipe bundle is its owner's no small responsibility to himself and his

and

its

constant care

wife, but especially to the

latter. During the day, the bundle is kept outside. It may be hung just above the door of the tipi, a special attachment being provided for that purpose. In most cases, however, it is hung from a tripod set up in the
tipi. Each morning the woman makes a smudge of sweet pine and carries the bundle and tripod out turning to the south and passing around to the rear of the tipi where the tripod is put into position.^ In all movements and placings, the end of the bundle containing the mouthpiece of the stem must point toward the north. The woman returns to the tipi by the south side. At sunset, she again makes the smudge in which she holds her hands as before, then passes around by the north side and retraces her steps with the bundle. Thus the bundle has made the entire circuit, the usual ceremonial sun-wise movement, and theoretically, should be outside from the moment the sun rises until it sets. During rain or continued cloudiness it is kept within doors. A few bundles are placed on the door in the forenoon and then in the rear during the afternoon. In the tipi, the tripod with the bundle is leaned against the back of the tipi between the backrests. It is always kept well above the ground at all times. We may note, also, that for some bundles the tripods are not set up outside, but leaned against the back of the tipi. Hung up with the true bundle are the other accessories previously described and over all is thrown a robe,

rear of the

formerly a buffalo robe, but

now

a costly shawl or steamer rug.

In no case must the bundle touch the ground. The

name

for bear

must never be uttered in the tipi nor in the immediate presence of the bundle. He may be spoken of as the "unmentionable one," "that big hairy one," or any other designation. Should one make a mistake, a smudge of sweet pine must be made immediately and in most cases prayers offered for pardon. Even children are expected to know and observe this prohibition. The occupants of the tipi must be very slow to answer or respond to a shout from the outside as it is proper for the caUer to enter before
speaking.

When

the tipi

is

moved

to another place, as formerly in the

making and

breaking of camp, consideration must be given the pipe bundle. The signal
for breaking

camp and

the selection of a

new

site

are theoretically functions

5 The smudge places, or altars, while varying somewhat are either rectangular or square. The surface is removed to a depth of about four inches and loose earth deposited outside at the rear along the base of the tipi. The smudge is made at the center. On the left side are placed long tongs made from a forked branch of cherry, used in lifting coals of fire to the smudge place; on the right is a pouch containing needles of the sweet pine. For some pipes the surface of the smudge place is sprinkled with colored earths, but usually it is plain, with a smaller rectangle traced

around the center.

The

Social Life of the Blackfoot Indians

361

may be; but, if he is not a owner of such a bundle to act for him, or at least to promulgate his decisions. Thus, when it has been decided that the camp is to break, the bundle is taken some distance from the tipi and the
of the leader of the

band or
it

division, as the case

pipe-man, he leaves

to the

tripod so adjusted that the forward leg extends in the direction to be taken.

Thus everyone may know what to expect. For a short period at the start, the owner and his wife sit on a robe in front of the tripod, facing the direction to be taken. Formerly, a special travois, saddle, and other trappings were kept painted red and reserved for the exclusive transportation of the bundle. The horse was painted as previously stated, and ridden by the owner's wife. The bundle was carried on the travois, the tripod tied up against the poles. Sometimes songs were sung and prayers offered at starting and while on
the journey, but these can scarcely be considered peculiar to this bundle.

On

the

march

the owner, or owners, rode in the lead, usually immediately

followed by their wives with the bundles. Likewise, the

new camp

site

was usually designated by

important ritual because
This

setting

up

the tripods with their bundles.

it is

The

native partisans of the pipe bundle argue that

it is

the oldest

closely associated with the

and most making of camp

and some observers have considered this as one of its important functions. we beUeve to be an error, for the data we have indicate that in so far as these moving ceremonies are peculiar to this ritual, they come under the head of the care of the bundle rather than otherwise.

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

(1883-1957)

The Crow Indians

CROW INDIAN WARFARE

SOCIAL STANDING AND CHIEFTAINSHIP,
ent

WE HAVE

SEEN,

WERE DEPENDValue

on
set

military prowess;

and that was the only road to

such as

distinction.

was

on other

qualities,

liberality, aptness at story-teUing, suc-

But the property a man distributed was largely the booty he had gained in raids; and any accomplishments, prized as they might be, were merely decorative frills, not substitutes for the substance of a reputacess as a doctor.

know of at least one Crow of the old school whose intelligence would have made him a shining light wherever store was set by sheer capacity of the legal type, but who enjoyed no prestige whatsoever among his people. In fact, I was repeatedly warned
tion,

a man's record as a warrior.

against his mendacity, though his accounts of tribal

life

tallied perfectly

with those of generally accredited informants. The point was simply that

he had gained no honors in war and had when pubUcly reciting his achievements.

tried to doctor this deficiency

War was not the concern of a class nor even of the male sex, but of the whole population, from cradle to grave. Girls as well as boys derived their names from a famous man's exploit. Women danced wearing scalps, derived honor from their husbands' deeds, publicly exhibited the men's shields or weapons; and a woman's lamentations over a slain son were the most effective goad to a punitive expedition. There are memories of a woman who went to war; indeed, Muskrat, one of my women informants, claimed to have struck a coup and scalped a Piegan, thus earning songs of praise. Most characteristic was the intertwining of war and religion. The Sun Dance, being a prayer for revenge, was naturally saturated with miUtary episodes; but these were almost as prominent in the Tobacco ritual, whose
From Lowie, The 215-229, 329-334.
362

Crow

Indians

(New York:

Farrar and Rinehart, 1935), pp.


The Crow Indians avowed purpose was merely
in

363
the general welfare.

More

significant

still,

every single military undertaking was theoretically inspired by

a revelation

and since success in life was so largely a matter of became the chief content of prayer. Glory, however, was rigorously defined. There were the four standard deeds of valor grouped under the head of the probably synonymous terms ackya'pe or araxtsi', a man with claims to any one of them being an araxtsi'wice, honor-owner. The touching of an enemy whether he was hurt or not counted as the "coup" proper, da'kce. Four men might count coup on the same enemy, but the honor diminished with each successive blow. Also, in any one engagement only one man ranked as the striker of a first-coup; in other words, the first striking of other foemen was not so rated. Snatching away a bow or gun in a hand-to-hand encounter was a second honor; and the theft of a horse picketed in a hostile camp so that it had to be cut loose, was still another. Being the pipe-owner or raidplanner was the fourth deed that counted toward the chieftainship; and a "chief" was simply a man who had achieved at least one of each of these

dream or

vision;

martial glory,

war

exploits

four feats.

In 1910 only two residents of Lodge Grass were regarded as such, Medicine-crow and Gray-bull; in Pry or there were several, including Bellrock and Plenty-coups. Though the latter doubtless had an enviable record and was recognized as the Crow chief by the U. S. Government, most

informants

considered Bell-rock

supreme among then

first,

living

Gray-buU's words. Bell-rock was the very

struck six undisputed coups, and led

exceUing

all

others

men. In on every

count; he had captured five guns, cut loose at least two tethered horses,

buU

himself, universally esteemed for bravery, claimed

more than eleven war parties. Grayno more than three

loose;

feats of

each category. Hillside feU short of chieftainship only because the

retrieved a horse he

enemy

had cut

and Flat-head-woman lacked

merely a coup.

Whether all four exploits were on a par remains an open question. Blue-bead gave precedence to captaincy and the coup proper, Gray-bull, speaking in general terms, considered all honors approximately on one
plane; yet he put Plenty-coups below Bell-rock notwithstanding Plenty-

coups' having seven coups (against six) and four horses (against a possible
three). Unconsciously, then, he gave special weight to Bell-rock's

two

extra

war
if

parties.

Irrespective of titular recognition, each

new

feat

added

to one's kudos.

Even

man

fell

short of being a chief, leadership of a successful raid

him next to the chiefs. was symboHcally represented on the performer's dress, but the devices varied somewhat. A coup-striker, said YeUow-brow, wore

or scalp hunt qualified him as herald and put

Each

exploit

wolf

tails at

the heels of his moccasins; a gun-snatcher decorated his shirt

with ermine skins; and the leader of a party that brought spoils fringed his

364

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE
had the

leggings with ermine or scalps. According to Gray-bull, a captain

right to put hair

on

his

moccasins as well as his

shirt,

while a gun-taker or

coup-striker might decorate only his shirt in this way.

In the thick of battle disagreement might arise as to which of two

combatants had dealt the

first

blow. This sometimes led to an ordeal or

(war-honor-mutually-disputing).

oath-taking called ackya'p-bats-a'pasii^a

Each

toward the enemy. Sun, as you looked down, you saw me strike him. Hereafter when I meet an enemy, may I again overcome him without difficulty." Another wording would be: "I struck the coup, you [Sun] saw me. May the one who hes die before winter." In one form of the procedure the people impaled some lean meat on an arrow which they placed on an old dry buffalo skuU with
contestant took a knife, put
it

into his

mouth, pointed

it

Sun, and uttered such a formula

as, "It

was

I that struck the

its tips

painted red. Each rival in turn raised the arrow, pointed his right
its

index-finger at

head, touched the meat with his

lips,

and pronounced the

oath. If both took the test, the people could not at once determine the

merits of the case.

ordeal, he

But if some misfortune befell one of them after the was considered the perjurer and his opponent then justly claimed

the contested honor.

Other deeds than the "big four" ranked as meritorious, hence were recited on public occasions and pictured on a man's robe, on the draft
screen in his lodge and, rarely, on his
tipi

cover. In

1910 Shows-a-fish had

such decorations on the canvas lining inside his log cabin.

On

a robe I

bought from Charges-strong, pipes near the top symbolize the wearer's captaincy; outhnes of heads with upturned lock represent Shoshone, simple
outlines standing for Dakota;

and horse tracks suggest the capture of

is

horses. In another section of this robe a scout

shown going

to the hostile

camp and

returning to a pile of buffalo chips.

Still

other parts of the robe

depict such details as coups counted

his overtaking

At

large

on two enemies by the mounted hero, his driving off Shoshone horses. gatherings the men always formally enumerated their deeds.
and
striking a

foeman,

In 1907 No-shinbone gave

me

the following Ust of his own, drawing a line

on the ground
I

for each item:

I
I

captured a gun. captured a bow. led a war party that killed an enemy.

I I

was

shot.

kiUed a horse.

I shot a I
I

man.

brought

home

ten horses.

went to war about fifty times. The Dakota were harrying me, I shot one of them.
After each item at a public recital of this type the musicians present would beat the drum once.

The Crow Indians

365

The taking of a scalp was evidence of a killing, but did not rank as a deed deserving special notice. "You will never hear a Crow boast of his scalps when he recites his deeds," an informant told me. Some men stretched the trophy in a hoop, scraping off the flesh with a knife and
blackening the dried scalp with charcoal.
the end of a long stick.
It

was subsequently held

aloft at

Training for war began in childhood. Apart from athletic games, boys

counted coups on game animals, made the girls dance with the hair of a wolf or coyote in lieu of a scalp; and in the Hammer Society specifically
imitated the adults' military societies.

An

ambitious lad, however, would not be content with

sham

activities,

but cast about for a chance to go with a raiding party.

of warfare the older generation, otherwise
little

On

the subject

inclined to interfere with

youth, turned didactic. "Old age

is

a thing of

evil, it is

well for a young

man to die in battle," summed up the burden of their pedagogy. The prompting of young men by precept and example to gain renown recurs again and again in native tradition. In one story a handsome youth idles at home while his contemporaries go out against the enemy. At length his father, incensed beyond endurance by his son's inactivity, flings himself into the fire, injuring himself, and thus goads the laggard into setting out on a raid. When a youngster did come back from such an experience, he
lorded
it

over his mates, twitting the stay-at-homes with being like a

are not a boy," blue."
trip a

woman. "You
"your vulva
is

Gray-buU used

to say to Bird-tail-rattles,

boy did not have an easy time of it, for he became The men were likely to send him to one of their number for shavings from a buffalo hide; on hearing the message, the man told him he had eaten them up and made him go to another member of the party, and so the novice was sent from pillar to post. Moreover, youngsters had to do menial tasks; they were sent for water without instructions where to find it and had to carry the meat. In order to lighten their load, it is said they would encourage their elders to gorge themselves. Sometimes, of course, a whole band found itself facing a large hostile force, but by far the most typical form of military enterprise was the raid organized by the leader of a small party, the so-called raid-planner or pipe-owner. His venture was a purely personal one, in no way directed by
his

On

maiden

the butt of practical jokes.

the chief or council; in fact,

when

the chief considered raids impolitic,

he ordered the poUce to prevent any parties from leaving the camp. Sanction was necessary for a party, but was strictly supernatural. The organizer had dreamt about his enterprise or seen in a vision fuU particulars about the place to go to, the tribe to be raided, even the kind of loot ^to the color
be killed, say a thumbless Cheyenne. Failing such inspiration, a would-be leader would apply to a
of a horse's skin

or

the

manner

of

man

to


366

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

man

of note owning a war-medicine and follow this mentor's directions,

likewise based

on dreams.

An

untried captain might not succeed in muster-

ing a large company, for there were always skeptics doubting the potency
of his revelation.

Even

if

his medicines

were strong,

strict rules

went with
left)

them. In some cases, for instance, no one might pass on his right (or
side the bearer of the captain's sacred bundle;

and however inadvertently

warfare. In addition there

the law

was broken,

dire

mishap would

befall the entire party.

all

Lust for fame was axiomatically an end in

were two dominant motives, the desire for booty, which in the main meant horses; and the craving for revenge. Though these drives, varying with individual temperaments and situations, could be combined, we may distinguish horse raids from expeditions for coups and slaughter, a classification suggested by Flat-back. He set off the former as typically directed against the Piegan from the latter, having the Dakota as an objective. Raiders characteristically started afoot, hence the need for plenty of footgear. "I had moccasins made for myself" is a formula that denotes preparation for a war party. Often each participant led a dog to carry his moccasins and a small bucket, and afterwards the rope used served to

secure the horses purloined. Next to the captain the scouts

(ak'tsi'te),

varying in

number with

the size of the party, were the most important

members; each carried a wolf skin as an emblem and imitated the howling of that animal, so that they were sometimes referred to as "wolves." At a
preliminary gathering they sang scout songs, such as these: "I
to bring horses,
I'll

am

going

bring

some back." After

the singing a shout

party frequently set out after sunset or even in

went up. the dark. For shelter

they put up simple windbreaks of sticks, bark, and foliage.

At

the proper

time the captain sent out his scouts to sight the enemy. While the others

were
till

still

asleep they were

they saw the camp.

report,

up climbing hill after hill, fasting all Then they returned, giving the wolf howl,

the time
to

make
they

their

a sort of homecoming.

When

close

to

their

party,

brandished their guns to signal that they had really seen something.
followed a characteristic
buffalo chips

Now

rite. Their associates had prepared a pile of and sang, forming a semicircle around it. Then the leader of the scouts approached and kicked over the heap of chips. The captain asked for the report, and the scout answered, "The enemy is yonder." Now at last they were allowed to eat meat.

objects to his

The time having come for final preparations, each brave tied sacred body and painted his face according to the rules associated with them. The captain spread something to rest his medicine on and
horses have been given to me."

many One man was chosen to lead, and they approached the camp. The captain told his men to gather, went round them, and thus prayed to the Sun: "If all my party get home safe with plenty of horses, I'll make you a sweat-lodge." Then he sent one or two
whistled or sang towards the enemy's camp, possibly saying, "So

The Crow Indians

367

men

to

camp

to drive off all the horses possible. If satisfied with the spoils,

he decided to start homeward. The length of their journey naturally varied.

Typically, they

would run

at

top-speed

all night,

the next day, and the

second night.
feasted

on

it.

On the following day they relaxed, tried to kill a buffalo, and When near their own camp they shot off their guns and rode
all

the captured horses round camp.

In

strict

theory the captain could claim

it

the booty; in practice he

liberally

shared

with his

men

to avoid the charge of avarice.

During

the parade the scouts carried wolf hides

on

their

backs and sang tsu'ra

songs. At night aU the party assembled in the captain's lodge, where the young women came to sit behind them. They sang scout songs, and after that the women got some of the pudding prepared for the occasion and took it home. No-shinbone thus described one of his raids, atypical only in that it started on horseback. "Where the fortifications were, there we camped. There I ordered moccasins to be made for me. The morning after they were ready I brought my good sorrel horse and saddled him. I went out and took my medicine, that over there [pointing] is it. I rode away and reached my comrade, the two of us went. Young men kept catching up with us till there were twelve of us. We went and lay down in a little wooded river bed and slept in the night. The next morning we ate; the young men brought the horses, we tied on the saddles and went. It must have been this season of the year. We chmbed a hill, there were a great many buffalo. The young men chased them and killed three fat ones. We got there, dismounted, took out our knives, and butchered. When done butchering, we packed the horses and rode away. In a coulee we stopped, young men went as scouts, they reported a sighting. They came, they

reached

us.

'How

is

it?'

I asked.

'Yonder
start

is

the Head-cutters' [Dakota]

I

camp,' they said. 'All

right,

we'll

against them,'

said.

Then

and looked. The camp had kiUed buffalo, they were carrying huge loads home on their backs. I saw, I came, I reached my party. I Hghted buffalo chips and took out my medicine. Then I sang toward the camp. At night we rode, we galloped all the way and approached the camp. At the edge of the camp we sat down. I sent two young men to camp;
climbed a
hill

they brought

brought

many horses. Afterwards I again sent two, again they many horses. I took a good buckskin, then I said, 'Let us flee.' With many horses we took to flight. At night we continued running, until daylight. We got to a river, mightily we swam it. We were so cold we almost died. We crossed, then it was daylight. That day we ran tiU night, at night we kept on. Many horses we had brought when we swam the river,
plenty of them turned back, but with thirty head
I reached camp. The was plenty of meat. Thus I returned." However, usually when tribesmen had been slain, parties were speciaUy organized for the gaining of honors and the killing of enemies.

camp was by a

creek. There

368

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

Gray-bull's report of one of these expeditions is characteristic. He got his war medicine from a medicine-man who had also instructed Hillside and Flat-head-woman. However, unlike these others, who obtained arrows from their adviser, Gray-bull received a tooth extracted from the corpse of a famous Crow warrior killed by the enemy; all three men got similar accessories. Because the original purchaser of the tooth had been notably successful, Gray-buU bought it for ten horses. He, too, enjoyed good luck and got together a herd of from 70 to 90 horses. One day Gray-bull was seated by his mentor, when a woman mourning her son put a pipe in front of him. The medicine-man told him to light and smoke it. "I obeyed and then handed the pipe to him. There was a crowd of people in the lodge and the pipe was passed round the circle. I did not yet know that the woman had a horse loaded with gifts outside. She unloaded the presents; my 'father' gave me a striped blanket and had
his wife distribute the

the horse.
pipe; I

My

'father'

remainder of the property. She gave me the reins of thus spoke to her: 'Well, you have given my son the

am

angry' [at the enemy].

He

then spoke to

me

for a while,

and

word for word, what he had told me: 'Grandmother, tomorrow I shall make a sweat-lodge, the next night I shall start.' The following day I made a sweat-lodge. Before starting I called on the old woman and again told her I would be on my journey the next morning, that eight days hence she was to pulverize charcoal, mix it with fat, and be on
called out to her,

the lookout for me.

"Six days later a body of Piegan saw us and stole our unpicketed horses.

We

followed in pursuit, found four Piegan, killed them and recovered

all

but two horses.

night

We

then turned homeward. Starting out

very slowly, but coming

home we went as fast was drawing near and I left my party so as old woman was waiting for me on the outskirts of the camp. She began to cry and asked whether I was coming back with spoils. I told her I had killed four of the enemy, that she should stop crying and prepare charcoal because the rest of the party were coming. She continued to cry and wished to get further details, but I loped away to report to my 'father,' who was with the expedition. "In the center of the camp they formed a circle and the Long Dance was begun by the men on the expedition. Then each warrior individually invited the people to his lodge to tell them the story of the war party. On this occasion it was a coup-striker's a'sa'ke, i.e. a clansman of his father's, who sang his praises and as compensation received presents, largely contributed by the brave's own clan. "They waited for a favorable day, then a herald proclaimed a big tsu'ra celebration. The best singers were reassembled for this occasion. Each coup-striker put his medicine on his wife's head and had her carry his weapons. The captain would tie his medicine to his wife's back or to a

we had traveled as possible. The eighth to be home in time. The

The Crow Indians

long stick which she was to
raise.

369
All the

camp turned out

to watch. If a

man had

duplicate medicines, he and his wife took one apiece.

The wives
till till

of the captain and the coup-strikers stood in the center and danced

evening, then stopped; but the mourners, with blackened faces, kept
the next morning.

on

Old men again led the coup-strikers around.

sunrise, people

"The next morning, before

with their wives. Then the

sneaked into the lodges of

the warriors and threw off their blankets, even though they might be lying

men

dressed up and danced with the mourners.

The captain
performance.

called to the coup-strikers to prepare food for these

men

jostled out of bed.

There was bustle in camp and people went to watch the

coup-strikers

The

were again praised in song; and the

mourners danced

until

noon."

Warriors always blackened their faces to symboUze the kiUing of an enemy, so that "with black face" is a stereotyped phrase for a victorious return. This is the meaning of the charcoal paint on Gray-buU's companions when he got back to them. They had evidently also conformed to another usage, that is, had killed a buffalo and put its blood into a paunch as the material for decorating their garments. The blood was mixed and
stirred in

warm

water with two kinds of charcoal. First the

men rubbed

their robes with wetted clay, then several

eminent men, having enumerated

first coup honor deThough four men counted coup on one enemy, the creased in ordinal succession and the painting of the robes varied accordingly. The first man to capture a gun and the first coup-striker had their robe or shirt blackened all over, the second and third men had only half of their garment so decorated, and the fourth men had only the arms of

their

own

deeds, painted each robe with the symbol of the

struck.

their shirts painted.

The

distinguished

men

also instructed the

members

would be horse-tracks, parallel stripes, and, irrespective of the number of enemies struck, from four to six roughly sketched human figures. Thus attired, the party approached the camp, spending the last night very close to it. The following morning, as soon as within shooting distance, they fired off their guns and made a characteristic noise. When at the edge of the camp, they sent the coup-strikers to fetch one drum for every warrior. In the meantime the women, who carried the scalp sticks, got ready and danced into camp ahead of the
as to other decorations; thus, there

warriors.

A
the

victorious

homecoming was

called ara'tsiwe,

apparently

whether

Crow had

struck coups or stolen horses; however, a successful raid

was probably not considered sufficient to "make the women dance." Supposing the warriors had killed an enemy, they painted their faces one or two nights after their return and marched through camp, with the captain in the rear and a herald behind him. The herald cried out, "You women, all of you put on your finery and go to the Pipe-owner's lodge, we shall feast there tonight." So all the people went there after the

370
parade, the

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

women

streaming in and

sitting

down behind

the warriors of

They sang scout and scalp songs; each took her favorite's robe and tomahawk, stood up in a conspicuous place by the door, and began to dance. The herald, seated by the door, named the first coupstriker, and after his response told him to fill a pail with cherry dessert brought by the women and give it to his wife. The first scout to sight the enemy was allowed to choose whatever food he preferred, turned it over to his wife, and then waited on the other women present. Both scouts helped themselves first, then waited on the other men. After every one had feasted on stewed berries and other food, the older men ordered the women to take the residue home and return for the performance of
their choice.

"lodge-striking."

For

this act the

then lined up to wait for the women's return.

boys cut willow poles and leaned them against the tipi, A herald shouted, "Untie

your horses and take them further away, these young men are going to strike the lodge!" Those of the party who were singers beat drums, the rest took willow sticks, as did the young women, for each man had a girl with him. Amidst victory songs and beating of drums, all rushed towards
the captain's
tipi

and struck

it,

some men shooting

off their guns.

The

noise was such that horses got frightened and ran away. Hitherto the

songs had been without words, but after the striking of the
this sentence,

tipi

they sang

went away, I have returned, kiss me." Then they proceeded to the center of the camp, where they danced, the men with blankets wrapped about their women partners, and all circling about with a step of the Owl dance type, moving both right and left. Usually five or six tents were struck. The celebration after a killing would last a day and a night. Praise songs in honor of the returning braves were a distinctive feature of the celebration. It was above all a man's a'sa'kua and isbaxi'u, i.e., his father's clansmen and clanswomen, who led him about camp as his public panegyrists, calling out his name and singing these chants, which originated in dreams. The words bear no obvious relation to any meritorious deed, Gray-buU and Medicine-crow independently furnishing the following sample: "I'U adopt you as my grandmother." In return the singer received presents. Such songs were sometimes sung on the expedition itself by the leader or old members of the party. In 1910 aged Crow men still sang praise songs in honor of younger people who had presented them with other valuable gifts. Gray-buU sold his praise songs for a horse. But not all war parties had an auspicious ending. There is a tradition in which the best sorts of captains are mentioned, and "those who never
"Recently
I

signaled a loss" take precedence of "those

who

regularly bring horses"

and "those who regularly

fired off

associates did not at once enter

was killed, his camp, but dispatched a messenger, who a gun from some high eminence. When people looked thither, he
kill." If

member

of the party

The Crow Indians

371

waved his blanket to show from what direction he had come. Every one then knew what had happened and who was the unlucky captain. For
it to one approach the camp but sat down, and men were sent to interview him about the details of the disaster. The camp went into mourning while the party stayed in the hiUs, mourning for ten days; during this period they did not drink from a cup, being served with drink by others. They then set off again without having entered the camp. If they lifted horses on this second trip, their grieving was over; but the bereaved family kept up their mourning until the death of an enemy.

each
side.

man killed, He did not

the messenger lowered the blanket or threw

The notion was deep-rooted among Plains Indians that no tribesman's should be lost if by any possibihty it could be avoided, hence the sacrifice of men on behalf of strategic gains was utterly foreign to Crow conceptions. Of course, there were daredevils who risked their necks for
life

sheer bravado, and others

theoretically contemptible

who

ignored danger from a sublime faith in

But though long life was and a glorious death in battle was held up as ideal in practice more prosaic counsels prevailed with the average man. Hence the amazing phenomenon that recurs in Plains Indian traditions of a single desperado holding back and even routing a dozen foemen; hence the oft-repeated Crow prayer that the suppUcant may kill his enemy easily,
their supernaturally guaranteed invulnerability.
safely,

without injury to himself.

did the

fight? Certainly not from an uncontrollable instinct was disgraceful to fall to fisticuffs within the tribe, and I have heard unfavorable comments on the brawls of white men. Enemies, of course, were fair game, but in spite of high-flown phrases about "wiping them out," I know of no concerted effort to oust the Dakota or Cheyenne from their territory, and tradition teUs of relatively few ancient enterprises on a reaUy large scale. Minor operations, sufficing to gratify both the sportive urge and even the craving for revenge, could be more readily harmonized with the repugnance to any loss of tribesmen. Doubtless the stimuli for miUtary enterprise were not uniform, varying with different men and different situations. Utilitarian urges appear but were certainly not dominant. The desire for horses was the most "eco-

Why

Crow

of pugnacity. It

nomical" motive of Plains Indian warfare, yet a

about.

Crow

rated higher for

cutting loose one picketed horse than for lifting a dozen freely

roaming

And what was

the use of horses after one got them? Gray-bull

fleet

acquired 70 to 90 head, but a few

several mounts,

animals for the buffalo chase,

and a few pack-horses would have been more than ample for his needs. The Crow, unlike the Central Asiatic Turks, never dreamt of milking mares or eating horse flesh. A large herd had sheer ostentation value; the owner could offer twenty horses for a wife instead of five; and
he could give frequent presents to his father's clansfolk
himself eulogized.
if

he liked to hear

372
Again,
it

ROBERT
was meritorious
to kill an

H.

LOWIE
with a

enemy, but the

lightest tap

coup-stick was reckoned higher. Obviously the idea was not primarily to

reduce a hostile force but to execute a "stunt," to play a game according

to whimsical rules. Intrepidity was,
it is

true, cordially

admired,

as

when

Crow

turned back to save a disabled tribesman. But, like chastity, such

daring was praised rather than emulated. Here, too, concessions were

made

to original sin: in the clubs

even the

officers

"doomed
is

to die"

were
their

held to their pledge only for a single season.

What

more, the very Crazy

Dogs who volunteered deliberately to court death were scot-free of obligation if they happened to escape by the close of the season.
assuredly to reward boldness; yet Hillside

Counting the capture of a picketed horse toward the chieftaincy was who achieved the deed failed to score because the enemy recovered his prize. On the other hand, when the
first

man

to touch a foe

ranked above the one who had

laid

him low,

it

was

fleetness,

not

skill

or valor, that carried the day. Similarly, the

in

Crow who

an engagement need not have been a whit braver fifth or tenth; yet it was the former who gained preeminence. In a possibly historical tale, Plays-with-his-face, a picked champion, together with an inexperienced boy, surprises a Cheyenne easing himself at the edge of the hostile camp. They pursue him, the ingenuous youth boldly dashing into the midst of the camp, where he thinks he is counting coup. But his wily companion has already struck a
struck the
first

enemy

than another

who

struck the

conveniently close
highest honor.

enemy and

tauntingly establishes

his

claim to the

The coup was indeed

sent to a
her,

interpreted in so conventional a

way

that often

it

bore no relation to true bravery whatsoever.

Dakota camp as scout, he was sufficient. On another occasion a Crow party were patiently but vainly lying in ambush for some one to leave the Dakota camp. At length one of them possessed of power sang his chant, made a motion with his pipe, drew the picture of a man on the ground, and put his pipe on it. Soon an unarmed Dakota sallied forth, riding toward the mountains. "We chased the man toward camp and killed him" the first one to touch the body naturally claiming first honors. It was enough to warrant a big celebration: "We danced mightily," Grandmother's-knife told me. Again, Flat-back piqued himself not a little on having killed four squaws near a hostile camp. "Medicine-crow is a chief," he said, "yet he does not equal me." This was mere pleasantry, for Medicine-crow was a "brother-in-law," hence fair butt for raillery about war though never

which

When Bull-tongue was once found a woman urinating and killed

about sexual matters; but the jocularity did not disguise the speaker's
conviction that he had achieved a real exploit.

The Crow Indians

373

WORLD VIEW OF THE CROW

Battered by natural forces and surrounded by enemies, the Crow managed to wrest from existence his portion of happiness. Ask an Indian of the old school whether he prefers modern security to the days of his youth: he will brush aside
all

recent advantages for a whiff of the buffalothen, there were buffalo tongues,

hunting days.
too,

supreme among

If there

was starvation
earthly dishes;
if

you were

likely to

be

killed,

you

had a chance
aspire to

to gain glory.

What

is

Crow

to look

forward to nowadays?

Shall he enter unequal competition with white farmers?

And

his

sister

wash the laundry

of frontier towns?

Under

the old regime,

harassed as he might be, the

Crow was owner

all

of his soul.

He had

some-

how hammered

out for himself standards that lifted

him above

the sordid

animal-like fray for survival. So with

the grossness of his sex hfe there

evolved awe-inspired reverence for immaculate virtue; the callous egotism

of the daily struggle for existence could be transmuted into purest selfsacrifice; above the formalized and sometimes tricky competition for honor emerged the loftiest defiance of relentless destiny. We have found the Indians a mass of contradictions; and nowhere more so than in the matter of bravery. On the one side, old age is decried and youthful death alone looms as a man's proper lot in hfe. Yet more often than not discretion seems the better part of valor. More than one character in the tales lives to be "so old that his flesh cracked whenever he moved." The visions that mirror so faithfully the hidden longings of the soul again and again bring out the same urge for longevity. Hillside's

protector appears with gray hair in earnest of the visionary's old age; a
that he need not So the commonest form of prayer asks for life to be continued until such and such a season. Again, a warrior could scry before setting out on a raid: if he saw his image with wrinkled face in a mixture of buffalo and badger blood, all was well; if he saw himself scalped or bloodstained, evil awaited him. But, Gray-bull admitted, people in his heyday were afraid to use this kind of divination; and his grandfather had become very brave after seeing his reflection with white hair and wrinkled face. But as in every generation there were women who would not yield to the temptations of the flesh and fulfiUed the quaUfications of a Treenotcher in the Sun Dance, so there were men to whom the traditional ideals were more than empty words to be sung at a dance to impress the young women. "I do not want to be old ... I don't want to be afraid of anything ... I'll do something to die," said one Rides-a-white-horse-downa-bank. He went on four parties and dug himself a hole. When the enemy surrounded it, he leapt out and drove them back. Once there was a Lumpwood dance, and he allowed himself to be led about camp by a man who

buffalo opens his toothless

mouth

to

show Humped-wolf
and so
forth.

fear death until he has lost his teeth;

374
declared: "If any
it

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

young women want this man for a sweetheart, let them want to live long." The young man painted himself white, mounted his white horse, covered its eyes, and made it jump down a steep and rocky bank, so that both of them were crushed. Such aversion from life was sufficiently common to be pressed into a fixed pattern. A man no longer interested in living became a "Crazy-Dogwishing-to-die" (micgye-wara'axeakcewi'a); he wore sashes and other trappings for regalia, carried a rattle, danced and sang distinctive songs as he rode about camp. He "talked crosswise" (iri'-watbakara^), i.e., he said the opposite of what he meant and expected to be addressed correspondingly. Above all, he was pledged to fooUiardiness. In this as in other features he conformed to the pattern of the mifitary clubs. But while the officers in these societies were in the main obliged merely to hold their ground, a Crazy Dog deliberately courted death, recklessly dashing up to the enemy so as to be killed within the space of one season. Whenever one of them rode through camp, the old women cheered him lustily and younger ones came to comfort him at night. But his own kin naturally tried to dissuade him and grieved over his resolve to die. "Why have you done that?" Spotted-rabbit's mother asked: "you are one of the best-situated young men you are one of the most fortunate men who ever lived and were always happy." But Spotted-rabbit was bored with life because
do
forthwith, he does not
.

he could not get over his father's death. Similarly, Cottontail's

to dissuade him: "This
is

sister tried

you want to die without good cause, there are plenty of enemies and if you are not afraid you can get killed without special effort. If men become Crazy Dogs and are not killed, they become a laughingstock, they are said
if
. . .

a bad thing for you to do. Even

be worthless." The account continues: "He did not say 'Yes,' he said nothing at all, but one night some time after this when the people had gone to bed he came out, shouting, and sang the Crazy Dog songs. His
to
sisters feU a-crying, but there was nothing they could do." Cottontail, too, had a motive: he had never wholly recovered from the injury to his knee. "Whenever young men went afoot on a raid or hunting, whenever they undertook anything, he was handicapped and felt envious." Such men grew restive if the days passed and their longing remained

unfulfilled.

When

Spotted-rabbit received a

gift

of plums, he
I

said,

"I

began

to

be a Crazy

so long; yet here

Dog early in the am I today eating

Once
the

spring and did not think

should live

plums."

And

Cottontail

would com-

plain, "Methinks, we'll never

meet the enemy." But he,

like Spotted-rabbit
fortify himself

before him, had his wish.

Crow made
I

the

enemy

was thinking I was not to see the enemy yonder I see some. This is what I am looking for." He advanced, shot down at the Dakota, and was instantly killed. That night it rained violently, and the corpse lay in the water until daybreak. Then the Crow hung it over Cottontail's horse. "Then they brought him home,
in a trench. Cottontail said,
.
.

"Already

The Crow Indians

grieving they took

375

him to the camp, all the Crow, the entire camp cried. him on a scaffold, they stuck a tipi pole into the ground and tied his sashes to it, his drum and rattle they tied to it. Above they were blowing in the breeze. Then without him they moved." The respect paid to a Crazy Dog was probably not altogether due to admiration for egotistical recklessness. It was a foregone conclusion that a man who had renounced Ufe would do the utmost damage possible to the enemy. More than a mere paragon of valor, he was thus at least potentially a source of power to the tribe. But the altruistic value of intrepidity appears in more explicit fashion. There were men willing to make a stand to rescue a fleeing fellow-Crow and honored accordingly. A bereaved mother would go about wailing and implore brave men to avenge her child, who is going to kill one wrongs: "The Dakota have killed my of them for me?" And the warrior's mentor would encourage him with such words as "A child has been killed, a woman has asked you for help, that is why I want you to help." In the herald's speeches already quoted the appeal is constantly to human sympathy with the pitiable captives subjected to humiliation by a cruel chief and casting wistful glances

They

laid

toward

their possible liberators.

human document exposand grandeur in the same individual and culminating in a magnificent blending of patriotic fervor on behalf of the oppressed tribesfolk and the spirit of the Crazy Dog who has faced reaUty and turns his back upon this vale of tears. Double-face has been one of the young braves publicly presented to the tribe by the herald as their champions in the impending battle. But when the crowd has dispersed, Double-face is racked with doubts. To quote Yellow-brow: "Then this day Double-face was lying around; he stripped, he was nervous, he was uncomfortable. Whatever he undertook turned out ill. The reason he was upset was that there was to be a battle and he was nervous whether because of eagerness or fear, whatever the cause, that is why he was upset. He would smoke, he would sit up, he lay down, he got up and bathed, he would return and stroll about, then he sat down. Now he had an elder brother. Deer-necklace, and him he sent for. He came and entered, 'Sit there.' This man who had just entered said, 'Well, why are you calling me?' 'Well, I am upset now, that is why I am caUing you. There are three things I am now eager to do I want to sing a sacred song; I want to sing a Big Dog song; I want to cry. Why is it thus?' Double-faced asked. This man answered: 'You are about to go to battle, your medicines are anxious, that is why. Wait!' He boiled wild-carrot root and mixed it with a little white clay. He [Double-face] took it and swallowed it. 'That is all, I'll go now.' This man went out and away. "Double-face got very hot, he began to perspire. His horse had been standing. 'I have been upset, but I shall accomplish my purpose,' he said
The same
narrative contains an extraordinary
frailty

ing at once

human

376
and went
"
'I

ROBERT
out.

H.

LOWIE

He

took his horse, marked

it,

fitted

on

his

medicines,

painted himself, and went out mounted to wail within the camp-circle:

used to think that since

that today
at

my

birth I

had had many sorrows.

I

It

turns

out that there was something in store for me. I was grieving, but

did not

know

aU manner of sorrow would be coming to a head. The

are miserable, I daresay.

women

my home

'How

are the captive

Crow

faring?' they are ever thinking to themselves.

poor dear housemates, kin, the enemy makes them sit under the dripping water, he my distressed is ever abusing them, he thinks his men are the only ones to be brave. What can I do to distress him, I wonder? " 'You Above, if there be one who knows what is going on, repay me today for the distress I have suffered. Inside the Earth, if there be any one there who knows what is going on, repay me for the distress I have suffered. The One Who causes things, Whoever he be, I have now had my fill of life. Grant me death, my sorrows are overabundant. Though
it

My

children are timid, they die harsh deaths,

timid.
to

is

said.

Though women

are

do not want to live long; were I live long, my sorrows would be overabundant, I do not want it!' "He went crying," the tale continues, "and those who heard him all
die harsh deaths. /

You make them

cried."
spirit. With a splendid away from the earthly goods that figure so largely in Crow prayer; he has no thought even of glory, he thinks only of his suffering kin in a hostile camp. Bruised by the problem of evil that in retrospect seems to have dogged him from infancy, he asks only for release from his torture. Why linger? Earth and sky are everlasting, but men must die; old age is a scourge and death in battle a blessing.

We

have here reached the peak of the Crow

gesture the hero turns

J.

R.

WALKER
unknown)

(dates

The Sun Dance of the Oglala

ONE DESIRING TO DANCE THE SUN DANCE ACCORDING TO THE CUSTOMS OF

the Oglala as they were practised before contact with white people should

choose an instructor to prepare him for the ceremony,

him, in substance, as follows:

who

should teach under-

The Sun Dance

of the Oglala

is

a sacred ceremony which

may be

taken by any one of mankind, provided he or she:

1.

2.
3.

4.

Undertakes it for a proper purpose. Complies with the essentials for the ceremony. Conforms to the customs of the Oglala. Accepts the mythology of the Lakota.
for undertaking the

The proper purposes

1.

Sun Dance

are:

2.
3.

4.

To To To To
is:

a vow, secure supernatural aid for another. secure supernatural aid for self. secure supernatural powers for self.
fulfill

The time
1.

2.
3.

4.

When the buffalo are fat. When new sprouts of sage are a span long. When chokecherries are ripening. When the Moon is rising as the Sun is going down.

Before beginning to dance the Sun Dance during the ceremony the

Candidate must make an acceptable offering to the Sun and have a wound that wiU cause his blood to flow while he dances. If he dances the Sun

Dance to its completion, he may expect a vision in which he may receive a communication from the Sun. All the requirements and rites pertaining to this ceremony are based upon the Mythology of the Lakota and they must be supervised by a
From Walker, "The Sun Dance and other ceremonies of the Oglala Division of the Teton Dakota," Anthropological Papers, American Museum of Natural History, Vol. 16, Pt. 2 (New York, 1917), pp. 60-63, 102, 105-119.
377


378 Shaman.
J. R.

WALKER
all

A Shaman must control the ceremonial camp

and conduct

the

ceremonies pertaining to the Sun Dance that take place there, except the
dance, which should be conducted by the leader of the dance. This dance

may

take either of the four forms, which are:

1.

2.
3.

4.

Gaze-at-Sun. Gaze-at-Sun Buffalo. Gaze-at-Sun Staked. Gaze-at-Sun Suspended.

first is

The
first

the simplest form and

may be undertaken

for either of the

and performed with a scant compHance with the essentials, though the Candidate must comply with them to the best of his ability. It should be danced only when one or more of the other forms are danced. It must begin with the first song of the Sun Dance and continue during four songs, though it may continue during as many more songs as the dancer pleases. For this form, any offering may be made to the Sun, but it should be of as much value as the Candidate can afford. The wound to cause the blood to flow must not be smaller than that made by cutting away a bit of skin as large as a louse and it may be as large and deep as the Candidate wills to have it made. Women and children may dance the first form, because there are no tortures inflicted during the dance. Those who have danced the Sun Dance on a former occasion may again dance this form, provided they first make an offering to the Sun and cause the blood to flow from wounds on their persons. Such dancers may begin the dance at any time during the dance by others and may dance for as many songs as they choose. The second, third, and fourth forms each differ from the others only in the manner of the wounds to cause the flow of blood and the torture inflicted during the dance; but the wounds and tortures for each form should be made alike for each dancer of that form. One may undertake either of these three forms for either of the first three purposes; but one who undertakes to dance for the fourth purpose must dance the fourth
three purposes enumerated above

form. The torture inflicted in the fourth form,

may

be, either figuratively

If

or actually, suspending the dancer while he dances.

the dancer

is

dancing for the purpose of securing the supernatural powers that Shamans
should have, he must dance the fourth form actually suspended.
thus performed
of the
is

the

Sun Dance

in

its fullest

A dance form which includes most

Mythology and much of the customs of the Oglala. One who dances Sun Dance in its fullest form establishes before the Sun, and in the presence of the people, his possession of the four great virtues, which are:
the
1.

2.
3.

Bravery. Generosity.
Fortitude.
Integrity.

4.

The Sun Dance

of the Oglala

379

One who
all

possesses these four virtues should be respected and honored by

the people. Thus, the scars

made by
the

the

wounds and

tortures inflicted

during the Sun Dance are honorable insignia.

One who contemplates dancing

and
ance of the ceremony, for
it is

Sun Dance should know these

things

carefully consider the compliance with the essentials for the perform-

done for the benefit of both the dancer and know whether the people deem his virtues sufficient to enable him to dance the Sun Dance to its completion or not; for, if they think he lacks in one or all of the great virtues, they probably will not become constituents, and he cannot have the ceremony
the people.

He

should endeavor to

performed.

The Sun Dance

feasts that are rites

is

a festal ceremony and provision must be

to

made

for

be given by the Candidate, his kindred, and his band, for all these are honored by the performance of the ceremony. Therefore, while it is expected that a Candidate will give all his possessions

and are

and his friends should also band should contribute for both feasts and presents. A Candidate must give presents to his Mentor and attendant and should give to all the assistants and those who take an active part in the rites of the ceremony. He must provide the equipment necessary for the occasion, and make acceptable offerings to the Sun. If he cannot comply with these conditions in an abundant manner, he should undertake only the first form of the dance, and then little will be expected of him or
in

making provision

for the feasts, his kindred

give liberally; indeed, the entire

his people. If

he thinks he can make suitable provision, he

may

proceed.

CHOOSING THE MENTOR

He
he
should choose some one to be his Mentor to prepare him for the

ceremony.
will

He

should

make

this choice

according to the purpose for which

undertake the dance, for his Mentor should be one

who can
is

fit

him

for that purpose.

He may

choose anyone, except that

if

he

to dance to

become a Shaman he must choose a Shaman as his Mentor. This too, should be borne in mind, that to become the leader of the dance the Candidate's Mentor must be a Shaman. When he has made his choice he should take a present, a pipe, and
smoking material, and go
the
tipi,

to the tipi of the

one chosen, enter

is

it,

and lay the

present at the right side of the catku, which

the place at the rear inside

and opposite the door, the place of honor. By thus placing a present, one indicates that he has a request of importance to make. When he has placed the present, he should fill the pipe, light it, and offer it to the one chosen. In ordinary visits, the one who dwells in the tipi is first to fill the pipe and fight it and then offers it to the visitor as a courtesy indicating friendship. If a visitor fills the pipe first and offers it to the host, this indicates that he esteems his host very highly and is wilUng to be subordinate

380
to him.

J. R.

WALKER

the host refuses the pipe this indicates that he does not desire
it.

intimate relations with the one offering

If the

pipe thus offered by one

who
but

has

made

a choice for his

Mentor

is

refused, he

may choose

another,

would be better for him to proceed no farther in the matter because such a refusal would indicate that all his people are not willing to become constituents in a ceremony performed for him. But if the pipe is accepted, the one offering and the one accepting it, should smoke it in communion until its contents are consumed. Why they two alone should smoke this pipeful and why they should smoke until the contents of the pipe are consumed, will appear in the course of this paper. Having smoked in communion, which is done by passing the pipe from one to the other and alternately smoking four whiffs from it, the host should ask the visitor regarding his request and the visitor should tell his desires and make his request. In case the request is for the host to become a Mentor, he should take the present and place it with his possessions and appoint a day when he will come to the tipi of the one who has chosen him, and then and there, give his answer to the request. The one who is to receive this answer should make a feast on the appointed day and invite two of his friends to the feast. On that day, the one chosen and the invited friends should go to the tipi where the feast is made and feast with the one
it

who

gives

it.

SACRED LODGE ERECTED

When
the location
is

estabhshed the Sacred Lodge should be erected

tipi and poles provided with chop the Sacred Tree should erect these poles and then the Superior should paint a dab of red on the inner side of each pole and paint red on the ears and door flap of the covering. When this is done the women should place and pin the covering. When this lodge is thus erected the Mentors should prepare it for occupation by the Candidates by each making a bed of sage in it for his Candidate and the Superior should prepare in it an altar between the fireplace and the place of honor. Then he should place beside the altar the ornamented buffalo head, so that it will face toward the place of honor. When the Sacred Lodge is thus prepared the Candidates should enter it. They should be conducted through the door and to their beds by their Mentors. The first to enter the lodge should be the one who first announced his candidacy, but if he has declined this honor the Candidates should choose another to take it. The first who enters should be conducted to the place of honor and seated there. He is thereby made the leader of the Sun Dance. When aU the Candidates have entered the Sacred Lodge, the Superior should fill and light a pipe, and pass it so that aU in the lodge may smoke in communion. When aU have been thus harmonized, the

in the following manner. It should

be the new

the equipment.

The women who

are to

The Sun Dance

of the Oglala

381

Mentors should give such instructions as they deem necessary, and then depart. After this, the attendants may come and go into the Sacred Lodge as the wants of the Candidates may demand; but only the Mentors and
the attendants should
its

come near

the Sacred

Lodge or attempt
.
.

to talk with

occupants. Soon after the Candidates occupy the lodge the attendants
.

should bring them the robes that have been provided.

CAPTURE OF THE TREE

On
the second holy day, after the escort has driven evil beings

from the

camp and

the Superior has formally greeted the Sun, the red herald should

proclaim that the people form for the procession of the Bear God. Then a
procession should form and march as on the previous day, but
it

should be

done without

levity.

When

the procession disperses, the Superior should

command
enemy
is

the red herald to proclaim that the hunter has reported that an

near the camp.

He
if

then should

command

the escort to go in

found take him captive. The escort, and those all about in the vicinity of the camp, as if looking for signs of an enemy. Soon they should return and report to the Superior that no signs of an enemy have been found. The Superior should command them to go and search again, and they should do as
search of the

enemy and

who wish

to join them, should search

before. This

is

repeated until the fourth time,

it,

when

the escort finds the

Sacred Tree. They should surround

rush upon
it,

it, and then and bind a thong about it. When they have done this they should return to the camp singing a victory song and shouting like victorious returning warriors. The people should greet their return with songs and shouts of joy and the women

jeering

and taunting

strike

it,

should ululate

shrilly. The escort should report to the Superior that the enemy has been found and made captive and the herald should proclaim this to the people who should rejoice and shout and sing warrior songs. The

Superior should then

the procession that

command

the red herald to proclaim the formation of

camp. The procession should be formed with the Superior and Mentors leading, followed by the escort, the mothers bearing babes whose ears are to be pierced, the children whose parents wish thus to honor them, the women who are to chop the Sacred Tree, and finally, the people. The procession should go, if practicable, so as to cross running water at its second pause. At about one fourth the distance to the Sacred Tree, the Superior should halt and light a pipe and all should wait until he has smoked a few whiffs. Then the procession should move on until one half the distance is covered; there again the Superior should halt as before, and if there is running water there he should strike it four times with his Fetish, to drive from it the Mini Watu, or evil water creatures that can infect the people. Again, at
is

to bring the

enemy

into the

three fourths the distance

all

should halt as before. Then the procession

382
should go to the tree and surround
it.

J. R.

WALKER
the

Now

the Superior

may harangue

name of some reputable man, preferably one who is renowned for war deeds. The one so named should come forward and take the chopper and may recite the deeds that make him eligible to strike the Sacred Tree. When he has done so, he
people and should proclaim aloud four times the should strike the Sacred Tree on the west side four times with the chopper,

and

if

he can do

so, leave the

chopper sticking in the

tree.

This should be

repeated until four

the tree

men have

struck the tree, each four times,

west, then the north, then the east,

is

first on the and then on the south. The nagila of

thus subdued and

When

this is

done, the children

at

made subservient to the people. who are to be honored are placed

in line,

one end of the hne should call the names of the children successively as they stand, and when a name is so called those wishing to honor the child should come forward and give it presents. When this is done, the Superior should command that the Sacred Tree be felled. Then the women appointed to chop the Sacred Tree should do so, relieving each other so that all may have a chance. When the tree is about to fall the woman chosen to fell it should strike the last blows that cut it down. As the tree falls, the people should sing and shout and ululate for joy because it is now their servant. To ululate one should utter a prolonged sound in high or falsetto key, patting the lips with the fingers while doing so. This is an expression of intensity of emotion.

and the herald, beginning

When
it

the tree

is

to

its

smaller end.
is

end. This

the

down it should be trimmed and the bark peeled from The bark should be left on the fork at the smaller Sacred Pole. Pregnant women, and women who have
trimmed from the
it

young babes

will eagerly gather the twigs that are

tree,

for they are powerfully effective against

Anog

Ite.

After the Superior pronounces the pole Sacred,

should not be touched

by hands

that are not painted red.

in the following

placed under

manner: A and the carriers should lift it on these without touching it with their hands and carry it, butt forward, toward the camp. When about one fourth the distance to be carried, the carriers should halt and lay the Sacred Pole on the ground. Then they should howl like wolves, for this
it

Then it should be carried to the camp sufficient number of carrying sticks should be

is

the cry of returning warriors

lift

who come

bringing a captive.

Then another

and carry the pole in the same manner to half the distance, where they should lay it down and howl as did the first relay. Then another relay should carry it in the same manner as before, to three fourths the distance, where they should lay it down and howl. Then the messenger race should be run in this manner: The young men who desire to run this race should stand side by side in a line at the Sacred Pole, and starting at a signal should race for the Sacred Spot. The first to place his hand on the Sacred Spot; or in the hole for the erection of the Sacred Pole is thereby entitled to carry a red coup stick, or a banner of
relay of carriers should

The Sun Dance of

feathers.

the Oglala
this

383

runner in

race should obstruct his competitors in any

in this race

manner he can. Thus a runner blow or a fall.

may be

seriously injured

by a
lift

After the race of the messengers the fourth relay of carriers should

and carry the pole as before, taking it through the entrance to the camp circle and into the Dance Lodge, where they should lay it down with the forked end toward the east and the butt at the hole prepared for its erection.
It

should be so placed that when

it is

erected

it

will follow the

course of the

Dance Lodge the people may disperse, but the Superior and Mentors should then mix the paints and fats supplied with the equipment, and they, or others, whose hands are painted
Sun.
the Sacred Pole
is

When

laid in the

red, should paint the Sacred Pole, so that

its

west side will be red,

its

north

blue,

its

east green,

and

its

south side yellow.

and the paint should be so wiU be toward the west and east. While others are painting the Sacred Pole one of the Mentors should cut from the dried buffalo skins without hair, provided with the equipment, the figures of a bull buffalo and of a man, each with exaggerated genitals, and painted black. When the Sacred Pole is painted, aU but the Superior, Mentors, and Shamans should be excluded from the Dance Lodge. Those remaining should sit in a circle around the black images, and by incantation, impart to the image of a man the potency of lya, the patron God of libertinism, and to the image of the buffalo the potency of Gnaski, the Crazy Buffalo, the patron God of licentiousness. When thus prepared, these images should be carefully wrapped and bound so as to restrain them until they are elevated. When the people disperse from the Dance Lodge the societies may give feasts, one or more at the same time, but aU should unite in feasting. During this feast, each society should be grouped, and each served by its women folks before the people are served. After feasting, each society may dance its dances and such others as the regulations of the society will permit, may dance with them. These festivities may continue far into the night, but they should cease while the Superior greets the Sun as He disappears from sight. When it is dark that night the Superior and Mentors should again go in procession about the camp for the same purposes as on the previous night, and then visit the Candidates in the Sacred Lodge. This completes the
of the pole should not be painted

The fork

applied to the body of the pole that

when

erect the opening of the fork

formalities of the second holy day.

THE PROCESSION OF SEX

From dawn on
same
rites

the third holy day until the

Sun shows His

face, the

should be performed as on the preceding day. Then the herald

should

call the

people to form the procession of sex in which children take

384 no
part. It should

J. R.

WALKER
and the

form near the council lodge, the

women

in front

men

behind, with an interval between the sexes. This procession should

inside the

march around

camp

circle four times, the

speech lauding the Earth and the Feminine, while the

women with men in

song and
the

same

manner laud the Sky and the Wind. When

starting place the fourth time,

this

procession returns to the

it should disperse, and then the Superior and Mentors should go to the Sacred Lodge, and remind the Candidates that they may drink, but take no food on that day.

RAISING THE SUN POLE

They should then go in procession on the Sun Trail to the Dance Lodge and enter it. There the Superior should prepare the Fetish of the Sun Dance, making it of four times four wands of chokecherry wood and enclosing in it a wisp of sage, one of sweetgrass, and a tuft of shed buffalo hair. He may also enclose in it such trinkets or ornaments as the people give for that purpose. When this bundle is securely bound, the Superior, assisted by such Shamans as he may select, should, with the aid of his Fetish and by proper ceremony, impart to it the potency of the Buffalo God so that when it is elevated the Buffalo God will prevail in the camp. Then he should securely bind this Fetish to one fork of the Sacred Pole. When he has done this, he should prepare the banner of the Shamans, making
it

of

some red material

that will wave. It should be four arms' length

long and four hands' breadth wide, with a

wand

at

one end to keep

it

spread. This end of the banner should be securely fastened to the fork of
is bound. The Fetish and banner should be so securely fastened that they will not be loosened by blows or shooting with arrows. While the Superior is preparing the Fetish and banner, men whose hands are painted red should prepare the Sacred Pole for erection by tying to it thongs with which to puU it erect. Then a heyoka to whom the Winged God has granted a communication should loosely tie to each fork of the Sacred Pole the black images of a man and a buffalo, so that when the pole is erect they will be above the Fetish and the banner, and so that they can be brought down by blows or shooting with arrows.

the Sacred Pole other than that to which the Fetish

Then
lift

at the

command
it

of the Superior the

men

with red hands should

the Sacred Pole to about one fourth the distance to the perpendicular
there while the herald proclaims that the Sacred Pole

and pause, holding

is

women grouped

men and command of the Superior the men with red hands should lift the pole half way to the perpendicular and pause. During this pause those who wish to do so should make offerings to the Earth by
going up. The people should assemble about the Dance Lodge,
apart.

At

the

placing the articles offered in the hole at the Sacred Spot.

offerings are

When

these

made

the Superior should again

command

the red-handed

men

The Sun Dance

to
lift

of the Oglala

385

and they should raise it to about three-fourths of perpenand there pause. Then the herald should proclaim that the Gods elevated on the Sacred Pole must prevail in the camp. Then the Superior should command the men to raise the Sacred Pole erect and they should lift and pull it so with its butt in the hole at the Sacred Spot. When the pole is erect the digger should replace the dirt taken from the hole and tamp it
the pole
dicular

about the pole so that

struggling

it

will stand firmly

when bearing

the weight of a

man.

Then

the people

may

shout the names of lya and Gnaski and protest

that these

Gods

prevail in the camp. Immediately,

men and women comother

mingle and then follows a period of hcense

when they banter each

or a

and

jest of

sexual things.

At

that time a

man

woman may be

familiar

with one of the opposite sex in a manner that would be an indignity at

other times, and the ribald merriment

When

the Superior sees

fit,

may become boisterous. he should command the herald

to proclaim

and the warriors come and dance the war dance and drive the obscene Gods from the camp. Those thus called should equip themselves as if for battle and come into the Dance Lodge. There they should dance the war dance on the uncovered space, hooting the obscene Gods hung on the Sacred Pole and shooting and throwing and striking at them until they fall. When these obscene Gods fall, the warriors should strike and trample them as they dance the victory dance and the women should shout their approval and ululate for joy. The Superior should quickly make an incense of buffalo chips on the altar, to appease the elevated Fetish and when the chips have burned to coals he should scorch the fallen images on these coals and thereby destroy their potency for evil. Then he should lean
that the escort

the dried buffalo penis against the Sacred Pole with a pipe beside

it,

thus

making

effective the

potency of the Fetish to maintain decency in the camp.

altar,

He

should then sprinkle a covering of cedar leaves and twigs over the

ward against the anti-natural conduct of the Winged God and of the heyoka. The warriors should continue to dance the victory dance, stamping and striking uneven places on the uncovered space until it is made sufficiently level to dance upon easily. In the meantime, the Mentors and attendants should prepare the Dance Lodge for the forms of the Sun Dance that their Candidates are to dance. For those who are to dance the second form, the buffalo heads should be
for these are potent to

placed beside the Sacred Pole; for those to dance the third form, the stakes should be fixed upright firmly in the ground of the uncovered space; for
those to dance the fourth form, the thongs should be fixed to the Sacred
Pole,

and for those to dance the fourth form actually suspended, the
the warriors stop dancing they should leave the

thongs should be passed through the fork of the Sacred Pole.

When
Then

the musicians should bring a dance

drum and

not far from the entrance on the covered space at

Dance Lodge. on its supports the left of the Dance

fix it

386

J. R.

WALKER

Lodge, and they should place four or eight rattles beside the drum. The attendants should bring the dried buffalo hide with the hair on and the
buffalo
tails

attached to handles, and place them next to the

drum toward
to

the honor place in the lodge.

The mothers who intend

have

their

babes' ears pierced should

at the inner

make a bed
. .

of sage for each babe, placing

articles already

them

edge of the covered space, between the

.

placed

and the uncovered space.

GREETING THE SUN ON THE FOURTH, OR MID-YEAR DAY

the mid-year day.
their part
it is

The Oglala regard the fourth holy day above all other days, for it is They anticipate a joyful time on that day, whether on
devoted to ceremonies or spent as a mere holiday. There-

fore, they are apt to

be

astir

before dawn. Just before dawn, the herald

should

make

a proclamation that the people prepare themselves to appear

before the face of the Sun and

best attire and ornaments

all should bedeck themselves with their and wear or carry such insignia as they are entitled to have. As the Sun appears, the Shamans, Superior, and Mentors should be at the top of a nearby hiU and greet Him as on previous mornings. Then a Shaman should invoke the Sky to give strength and endurance to the Candidates so that they all may dance the Sun Dance to its completion. Another Shaman should invoke the Bear God to give wisdom to the Superior and the Mentors, so that the ceremony held that day may be

acceptable to the Gods.

They should then return

ings

to the

camp and

the Superior

and Mentors

should assemble in the council lodge to deliberate relative to the proceed-

on

that day.

braves should be

made

While they are dehberating, the vows of the young in the following manner: Young men who take

part in this charge thereby obligate themselves in the presence of the Sun,

each to do his duty as a warrior against an enemy of the people. The

camp and at a signal and four times around, the Dance Lodge. They should repeat this from the north, east, and south sides of the areas. Then the people should assemble on both sides of the Sun Trail and the Superior and Mentors should go in procession from the council lodge to the Sacred Lodge, each intoning prayers to his Fetish as he marches.
braves should form in line near the chief place of the

run

to,

THE BUFFALO DANCE

The remaining
there
rites are the

may be

others.

dances, of which there must be two, though These two are the Buffalo Dance and the Sun-Ga2dng

four periods and the Sun-Gazing

indefinite

Dance. These dances are divided into periods. The Buffalo Dance has Dance must have four and may have an

number

of periods.

period consists of the dance proper and


The Sun Dance of
the intermission. the Oglala

387
the music
is

The dancing must take place while

is

sounded;

an intermission

the interval between the dancing.

The

leader should

give the signal for the musicians to begin sounding the music for each

period and the musicians should repeat the song for each period four times.

The Buffalo Dance should be danced only by those who are to dance Sun Dance and by those who have danced this dance on some former occasion. It is danced as follows: The leader should go to the altar and feign three times to lift the ornamented
the second, third, or the fourth form of the
buffalo head; the fourth time he should
lift it
it.

and place

it

on the uncovered

space so that the dancers can surround

circle

The dancers should form in a

head when the leader should signal for the music to begin and when it does, the dancers should dance the step of the Buffalo Dance. This step should be synchronous with the beat of the drum, each second
about
this

beat being emphatic; at the emphatic beat the feet are alternately brought to
the ground with a scraping motion. This
is

done

to imitate the

pawing of

a buffalo bull in rage or defiance and to manifest a defiant bravery of the

dancers equal to that of the buffalo bull. During this dance those
to dance the

who

are

Sun Dance must keep the whistles in their mouths, but should not sound them. While dancing they must gaze continually at the ornamented buffalo head. The red marshals should watch them, and if one of them ceases to gaze at this head they should admonish him; and if he persists in looking away from it they should conduct him to his robe. One thus removed from this dance loses the privilege of becoming a buffalo man. Those who dance the four periods of this dance become buffalo men. The red herald should proclaim that they are buffalo men and the people should shout and sing, lauding them with such praises as these: "You now belong to the people of the Sun; you now will not have to pay the price when you take a woman for your wife; you now vvdll have many children who will honor you; you now may receive a communication from

the Sun."

The
tails

attendants should then each give to his dancer one of the buffalo

attached to a handle and the buffalo

men

should
it

sit

about the dried

tails.

buffalo skin

and when they sing should drum on

with the

PIERCING CHILDREN'S EARS

During the next rite the musicians should remain silent and the buffalo should sing and drum as often and when the leader deems fit. When the Buffalo men are seated about the buffalo skin the mothers should place the babes whose ears are to be pierced on the beds of sage they have prepared, and standing, should announce the names of those they have chosen to pierce the ears. Those thus named should come and stand beside the women who have chosen them. They should each have a piercing implement and a suitable block of wood. First each should harangue, reciting

men

388
the deeds he has done that

J. R.

WALKER
During

make him

eligible to

perform

this rite.

this harangue the father of the babe should come and stand beside its mother and when the speech is finished the piercer should exhort the parents, teUing them that this rite obHgates the parents to rear the babe so that it will conform to the laws and customs of the Oglala and that the ears thus pierced signify a loyalty to these laws and customs. He should then kneel at the head of the babe and place the block under the lobe of one ear and quickly pierce it with his sharp-pointed implement. Then he should pierce the other ear in a Uke manner. The parents should not heed the cries of the babe until its ears have been pierced and then the mother should take it and comfort it. The mothers should announce the names of the piercers in rapid succession and they should come forward and begin their duties at once. Thus, this rite may be performed by a number simultaneously and the harangues, cries of the babes, and songs of the buffalo men, may make an exciting hubbub to which the people may add in their

enthusiasm.

THE SUN-GAZE DANCE

When
this rite is over, the

fourth intermission of the Buffalo

Dance

is

completed and the buffalo

men

should return to their robes. The Sunfollow.

Gaze Dance should immediately

There are four

acts in this dance:

the capture, the torture, the captivity,

and the escape, which should be

performed in the order named. The leader should give the signal for the beginning of the first act, when the buffalo men should stand, and in rapid

name of those chosen to be captors. When one so chosen should be a buffalo man and be notified in advance so that he may be prepared to do his part. When his name is announced he should stand beside the one who chose him and relate the deeds that make him eligible. Thus, at one time there may be several captors haranguing, creating or augmenting the enthusiasm of the people. When the harangues are over the captors should come together a short distance from the dancers and feign discovery of the dancers as enemies. They should shout the war cry and rush upon the dancers, each grasp his dancer about the waist, wrestle with him, throw him prone, and loudly announce that he has captured an enemy. When all the dancers are thus
succession announce the
practicable, the

made

captive,

their captors

should feign to consult together, and defirst act.

termine to torture the captives. This ends the

In the second
act,

the captors should each pierce the flesh of his captive

accomplish the form of the Sun-Gaze Dance dance the second form, the captor should turn his captive's body face down and then grasp the skin and flesh of his back at one side of the spine, draw them out as far as possible, and pierce crosswise through the flesh with a sharp-pointed implement, so as to make a
sufficient to
is

and make wounds

he
is

to dance. If he

to

wound

that the sharp-pointed stick provided

may

pass through; then the

The Sun Dance

captor should
captive
is

of the Oglala
like

389
the other side of the spine. If the

make a

wound on

to

dance the third form,

his captor

should grasp the skin and

flesh of the captive's breast,

draw them out

as far as possible,

and pierce
the flesh of

through the

flesh,

making a wound
then he should

that will permit the sharp-pointed stick

to pass through

it;

make

a like

wound through

the captive's other breast; then he should turn the captive so that he will be

face

down and make

like

wounds on

the back over each shoulder blade. If

he

is

to dance the fourth form, the

Captor should in hke manner make

When the wounds have been made, the captors should thrust through each wound one of the pointed sticks provided with the equipment and this concludes the second act. During this act, the maidens should stand beside the captives and encourage them to bear the torture without flinching and to smile and sing a song of defiance. The maidens may wipe the blood that flows from the wounds with wisps of sweetgrass, for the incense made of sweetgrass with such blood on it is potent to insure constancy and reciprocity in love. While the tortures are inflicted, the musicians drum, rattle, and sing a war song. The female
wounds through each
of the captive's breasts.
relatives of the captives should wail as in

bereavement. The captors should

sing victory songs and the people

may

shout or sing or ululate, so that the

emotions

may be wrought

to a high pitch

when

the third act begins.

The
for the

act of captivity opens the

binding of the captives,

first

Sun-Gaze Dance which begins with the each according to the form he is to dance. If
of the buffalo heads provided as the captives

form, the captor should bind to the sticks through the wounds

with strong thongs as

chooses;
if

many

for the third form, the captor should bind to the sticks thrust

through the wounds four strong thongs securely fastened to four posts,
so that the dancer will be in the midst of the posts;
the captor should bind the sticks through the
if

for the fourth form,

wounds with strong thongs

if

that are securely fastened to the Sacred Pole; or

actually suspended, the thongs

the dancer

is

to dance

bound

to the sticks should pass through the

fork of the Sacred Pole so that the dancer can be drawn from the ground

or lowered to

it. The thongs should be those provided with the equipment and should be so securely fastened that the most violent movement of the dancers wiU not loosen them, for if they become loosened while the dancers

are dancing

it

is

a sign that Iktomi has played his tricks to

make

the

ceremony
except the

ridiculous.

There are twenty-four songs for the Sun-Gazing Dance, each of which, first and last, may be repeated as often as necessary to supply music for the periods. The first is the song of the captive and should be sung in slow measure, and low plaintive tones, the drum and ratdes sounding gently. The last is a song of victory that should be sung only when the
rattles

dance is completed and then in loud and joyous tones, the drum and sounding vigorously.

390

J. R.

WALKER

When

the captives are

all

bound, the leader should give the signal for

and then the dancers who are to dance the first form should come upon the uncovered space and those who are to dance the fourth form actually suspended should be hoisted by the thongs until they cannot touch the ground with their feet. Then the leader should signal the musicians and they should sing the first song. The dancers should dance during the first period with a slow and gentle step, the captives, except
the dance to begin

those suspended, feigning to try their bonds.

wail and ululate and the people

The female

relatives

may

may

shout and encourage them to attempt

or

an escape.

Each

period,

when

the intermission begins, the dancers should

sit

suspended ones being lowered to the ground for this purpose. Then the attendants, the maidens, and the female attendants
recline to rest, the

should give the dancers such refreshment as the

wisps of sage.

rite will

permit. If the

dancers perspire, the attendants should wipe the perspiration away with

may chew
in

one dances far into the night, a woman who loves him bark of the cottonwood, and mingle it with water, and a surreptitious manner give him of this to drink and this will be conIf

little

nived at by the Superior.

At

the signal of the leader to begin the second period, the attendants
tails in

should place the buffalo

befriend.
friends

the hands of the captives,

and the captors

they should
that they are
this

should feign to discover that the captives are buffalo

men whom

Then they should rush to the captives and protest who will help them to escape from captivity. After

they are

called the friends

and each should remain by his dancer while he dances and should give him such aid to free him from his bonds as the rite will permit. At the signal of the leader the musicians should begin the second song and the dancers should dance as they did during the first period, but more vigorously. But they should not attempt to free themselves from their bonds until during, or after, the fourth period. The music and dancing should increase in vigor with each period and the enthusiasm of the people will probably increase in proportion until it becomes tumultuous. The third period should be similar to the second, and the fourth similar
to the third, except that while dancing during the fourth period the dancers

should pull and jerk violently against their bonds and try to tear them-

During each of the following periods, the dancing should be During each intermission, the attendants, the maidens, and the female attendants should minister to the comfort of the dancers. A dancer should dance during each period until he escapes captivity which is accomplished by being freed from his bonds. If he escapes by tearing the sticks from the wounds, he has danced the Sun Dance to its completion in the most effective manner. But a dancer may swoon before he escapes, and if he does so his friend should unfasten his bonds and take the sticks from his wounds, and then it is considered
selves free.

similar to that during the fourth period.

The Sun Dance

of the Oglala

391

that he has danced the Sun Dance to its completion in the least effective manner. Or, a dancer may become so exhausted that he cannot make a strong effort to free himself; if so, his female relatives may throw weighty things on the thongs that bind him to tear them loose. If this does not do
so,

they

may

offer the friend a valuable present

if

he wiU aid the dancer to

escape.

Then
it is

the friend

may

grasp the dancer about the waist and add his

strength to the effort to tear the sticks

from the wounds.

If

they succeed,
its

considered that the dancer has danced the Sun Dance to

completion

manner than if the sticks had been torn from the wounds by the dancer unaided. It is most meritorious to dance until the sticks are torn from the wounds or until the leader announces that the Sun Dance is
in a less effective
finished.

captivity when he is freed from his bonds and freedom should be celebrated by the people of his band accompanying him from the Dance Lodge to his tipi, his attendant, and a maiden supporting him as he goes there.

Each dancer escapes from

his

LESLIE SPIER
(1893)

The Sun Dance of the Plains Indians:

Comparison with the Tribal Ceremonial

System

THE [various] sun DANCES ARE NOT MERELY AGGREGATES OF DIFFUSED

elements: the ideas locally injected to integrate the whole and the rituals

them into something unique. How each tribe ceremony peculiarly its own cannot be determined for want of precise historical data. But an approach is possible by recasting the question: in how far does the sun dance conform to pre-existing ceremonial
originated have transformed

has

made

the

patterns?

The fundamental Blackfoot concept

etc.),

is

based on the medicine bundle;

(otter,

in this the rituals for personal medicines, the organized bundles

and even the societies, whose regalia correspond to the more orthodox form of bundles, conform to type. None of these ceremonies involve the whole tribe. Bundles are individual property and, except for doctor's medicines, can be transferred or sold with their rituals. Such a transfer is directed by a former owner, with the principals' wives offering ancillary aid. Sometimes the ceremonies are held within a roughly constructed dance enclosure, but they are never elaborate. Invariably the ritual is sung and the participants dance with the articles comprising the bundle. In the group ceremonies, the transfer within a tipi is often immediately followed by a public dance. By way of contrast the sun dance is a tribal ceremony, that is, the entire group acts in concert on this occasion, with functionaries drawn from the pubUc at large. Objectively it is quite at variance with other

From

Spier,

"The Sun Dance of the Plains Indians,

its

development and diffusion,"

Anthropological Papers, American York, 1921), pp. 505-511.

Museum

of Natural History, Vol. 16, Pt. 7

(New

392

The Sun Dance

ceremonies:

of the Plains Indians

393

the dance structure, the elaborate altar, and the torture dance have no parallels. On the other hand it is emphatically a bundle ceremony, and Wissler has clearly shown that both the natoas bundle and the weather dancer's functions conform closely to type. The only im-

portant difference is that the natoas is a woman's bundle. Together with the woman's society, it forms the sole exception to an otherwise solid array of man-owned rites. Like other group ceremonies, the rites of the preliminary tipi precede the dance. But here is an important difference: in the sun dance the same set of individuals does not take part in the two performances, the bundle transfer and the dance of the weather shamans. The general aspect of the relation of the sun dance to their [Blackfoot's] other rites is quite clear. Objectively it is quite unUke any other ceremony: structure, dance, and dual organization have no equivalents. Where it
. .

is

a question of

who

shall participate,

however, the condition

is

other-

wise: only the

owner of the natoas bundle and the owner of the

dance (the weather dancer) can perform the ritual in other words, it is orthodox Blackfoot in being an individually owned ceremony. Its mythological background is far from coherent, since several distinct myths have been drawn on to provide an etiological setting, but as
Wissler points out such growth of native theory by accretion of folkloristic

right to

elements is a characteristic Blackfoot trait. As a combination they have concocted is unique.

result,

the particular

The Crow sun dance

differs

from

all

others in having a specific motive,

namely, the desire of a mourner to obtain a vision which guarantees

revenge on the enemy for the death of a
the motive and the
acteristic
relative.

He

obtains this vision

its

through the agency of a sacred doll under the tutelage of

owner. While

mode

of acquiring this vision conform to the char-

position in

Crow practice, as Lowie has pointed out, it occupies an anomalous Crow life by reason of a ritual far more elaborate than that connected with any other war medicine. This appears more forcibly when we consider the general tenor of their other ceremonies.^ The personal medicines, among which the war medicines are to be
characteristically devoid of ceremonial:

numbered, are
transfer

in particular,

by

contrast to the Blackfoot, they lack the systematic uniformity

of the

and manipulation dances. As a personal medicine, then, the

is

sun dance
Its

noteworthy for

its

exuberance of objective
ceremonies
is

detail.

position
first

among

other elaborate

equally

clear.

It

occupies

rank with the sacred Tobacco performance as a

it

tribal

ceremony. In passing
is

may be noted
it is

that while the

Tobacco planting

conducted by a small group,

for the tribal good, but the sun dance,

is

in

which the

tribe as a

whole functions,

for distinctly individual ends.

is

It

has been noted that the religious factor in the miUtary societies
1 1

have drawn

at length

on Dr. Lowie's unpublished data on Crow

religion.

394
weak,2 and
tribes,
it

LESLIE SPIER

may be
is
little

said that, in contrast to equivalent societies of other

there

ceremonialism.

On

the whole, the lengthy

pubhc

performance of the sun dance is not only unusual in association with a personal medicine but is also somewhat more elaborate than the usual Crow ceremony.
Specifically,

the

vow
it

is

not the normal

mode

of inaugurating cere-

monies, although

is

sometimes the cause for the performance of the

Cooked Meat

Singing, adoption into the

Tobacco

Society,

and acquisi-

tion of the Medicine Pipe. Preparation in a preliminary tipi with a formal

procession to the dance ground also occurs in the Tobacco adoption and
the Bear

Song dance. Special dance

tipi,

structures, other than a temporarily

enlarged

are

uncommon:

the

Hot dance and Tobacco adoption lodges

is

being the only other examples noted. The sun dance lodge
except in
terned.
size,

identical,

with the Tobacco lodge on which

it

must have been pat-

Tongues are also distributed to qualified warriors in a peculiar in the Tobacco ceremony. Self-torture is practised by would-be visionaries acting individually, but not in any other ceremony. For the rest, while many generalized details re-occur commonly on ceremonious occasions, there is no single ceremony that parallels the particular combination of them which the sim dance embodies.

manner

The situation essentially duplicates that of the Blackfoot, but it is somewhat more clear cut. The motivation of the dance is characteristically Crow, but the organization does not conform so strictly to current
practice, as
it

is

the applicant for assistance

who

seeks the vision, not

the medicine owner.

The
it

ritual,

however,

is

again the divergent phase,

not only because

lation,

it is

far in excess of

any other personal medicine manipu-

but because
less

has no specific parallel

among

their other cere-

monies.

There

is

information on the Arapaho. Nevertheless, the place of

is

the sun dance

fairly clear.

From

a behavioristic viewpoint

it

stands

more sacred performance, i. e., those connected with the tribal flat-pipe, the sacred wheels, the woman's bags, and the seven sacred bundles, for with these there is no singing and, except for the last, no dancing. Yet it occupies an equally high position in tribal esteem since the pipe and wheels are incorporated in it. The Arapaho equate the sun dance to their age-societies, although participation in it bears no relation to progressive membership in that series. The native estimate is correct, for the parallelism between the two is far more systematic than that in any other tribe. The typical age-society ceremony is divided into a three-day preliminary period, followed by one of four days. The secret preliminaries are for preparation: on the first two evenings a practice dance without regaUa is held
apart from their 2Lowie, Crow Military
Societies, 149-151.

The Sun Dance of

in the dance lodge.
is

the Plains Indians

395
is

The

third evening a public dance

given there:

it

repeated on the three following nights. They dance each day before

sunrise, concluding with a race to a pole outside the lodge.

The

first

night there

is

a begging procession. The dance lodge

is

a low circular

enclosure, with a screen blocking its wide entrance. The dance is performed or new grades are acquired in fulfilment of one man's vow. Instruction and regalia are bought from ceremonial grandfathers, selected from among those who once held the grade. These in turn are under the
direction of the seven sacred bundle owners.
in their purchase

The

initiates

are assisted

by members of the second higher age-grade (elder

of the
society.

brothers),
fathers
if

who

in turn select the leaders

The grandsubstitutes

dance with the members. The

latter

may

provide

they are unable to participate.

The

initiate

surrenders his wife to the

grandfather in two of the dances, Crazy-lodge and Dog-lodge.^

Now

all

these essential characteristics are repeated in the sun dance:

in fact the close coordination

which

exists

can only be due to a conall

tinued interchange of features from one to the other. For example, the

vow

to acquire a

new grade

is

pecuHar to the Arapaho alone among

the tribes with military societies, but the

tion in the sun dance. ried this idea

vow

has an identical func-

Hence

it

is

probable that the Arapaho have carsocieties.

from
is

their

sun dance over to their

As Lowie has

one indication of the Arapaho societies have acquired.* On the three day preliminary period and the four dance has been patterned on their society tribes have a somewhat similar division of
pointed out, this

unusual sacred character the

other hand,
it seems that the day dance period of the sun procedure. To be sure, other

preparation and performance,

this division

but

this is

not characteristic of their society dances. Since

recurs systematically in the

transfer has proceeded
direction.
If

Arapaho

age-grades,

from
I

societies to

would seem that the sun dance and not in the reverse
it

then the corresponding division

really

comparable

which
is

of

am

not sure

is

the case

we must

other

sun dances

is

regard this

feature as one of the original

components of the complex diffused from

the Arapaho. There

also a begging procession in the sun dance: this

seems to be copied from the society ceremonies. Whereas the societies beg for presents for a service already performed, i. e., the dance proper and special performances for the donors, the pledger of the sun dance simply begs for aid in meeting the expense of the ceremony. The fact that he makes his unusual request just before the evening dance is
not contrary evidence to
after this dance, that
is,

my

mind, for he

is

unable to leave the lodge

at the

time corresponding to the society petitions.

in the sun dance, but the sunrise

The

practice dances

do not occur

3 Lowie, loc. cit., 982. ^Kroeber, The Arapaho, 151-168, 182, 193, 200, 211; Lowie, Plains Indian AgeSocieties, 931-932.

396

LESLIE SPIER

dance does. Inasmuch as it does not take place systematically in other sun dances where it occurs at all, we may assume that the Arapaho transferred this rite from societies to sun dance, and that other tribes then copied it. The race to a pole, closing each morning dance, has no sun

dance analogues. Both sun dance and society dances are held in circular
is no specific resemblance. Lowie has pointed out the Arapaho anomaly of buying a new grade in a rigidly ordered series from a heterogeneous group of grandfathers, instead of from members of the next higher grade as is customary in other tribes.^ The sun dance grandfathers are similarly those who once bought the right to dance. Like them too, they dance with the initiates. The "elder brother" group does not occur in the sun dance. As the evidence stands it might be assumed that a relation which was rational in the sun dance was duplicated in the age grades. StiU the relation is so

enclosures, but there

essential in the latter that

it

is

difiicult

to believe that

it

displaced an
in

equally fundamental idea.

that the

Perhaps we are only

justified

assuming

Arapaho norm

is

always the purchase of ceremonial prerogatives

ceremonies,
is under the direction of and the seven men's bundles, but

from anyone who has ever held them.

The sun dance,

like the society

the custodians of the tribal flat-pipe

with more reason, since the flat-pipe

is

directly involved in the dance. If

Arapaho sun dance have suggested, then we may assume that the society pattern, direction by a bundle owner, has been appHed to the sun dance. There is also a minor similarity in the substitute dancers who are permitted in the sun dance as well as the society series.
the flat-pipe rites were not an original part of the

complex, as

Wife surrender, occurring in the sun dance and in two of the age-

Arapaho ceremonials, Both tribes share a specific trait, the transfer of a medicine root through the wife. The trait has undoubtedly been derived from the Village tribes, where it is a customary adjunct of purchase; but it does not follow, as Lowie intimates, that it has partly disappeared among the Arapaho. At any rate, there is no evidence that these people transferred the custom from
societies,

has

only

scanty

representation

in

whereas

it is

more common among

the Gros Ventre.^

'^

societies to

sun dance or vice versa.

(buffalo imitators) has points of resemblance

The one woman's dance

to the sun dance: a lodge with a center pole crossed

by a

digging-stick,

painted ridge poles, and the pledger's dance station.

the Blackfoot and in the
5

The Gros Ventre

and Wind River Shoshoni women's dances lack these traits: in that of Kiowa sun dance the association is palpably

Lowie, Plains Indian Age-Societies, 932. Kroeber, Ethnology of the Gros Ventre, 228, 244-245. ^ In fact his conception of the Blackfoot- Village tribe relations might be adjusted in this way too {loc. cit., 934, 948-949).
6

The Sun Dance of

secondary. But
these features
it

the Plains Indians

397

does not follow that the Arapaho

their

women

adopted

from

own sun

dance.

Such a close coordination of sun dance and age-societies implies a common growth: a view that lends justification to the position taken on the basis of distribution, that the Arapaho were largely responsible for the development of the sun dance. The question was asked how the sun dance agrees with other ceremonies. It seems that in aU three cases the agreement is greatest in organization and motivation, less in behavior, and least in material objects, regalia, etc. That is, the peculiar element injected into the mass of borrowed traits appears to have been largely determined by the ceremonial pattern. In the complexes under discussion the pattern takes its familiar form, that is, standards of organization and mythologic sanctions have most effectively operated. But there is not a priori reason for expecting individuality in regalia and behavior, for it will be recalled that Boas found that the Kwakiutl pattern applied to these as weU.^ The operation of patterns is certainly not a mechanical process; borrowed traits are not forced in a mould. The new is explained in terms of the
long period of
familiar, and, as I believe the

Arapaho data

in particular show, the cur-

rently approved

mode changes

as the chances of history dictate.

Boas, Social Organization and Secret Societies of the Kwakiutl Indians, 43, et seq.

PART V

BUILDING A SCIENCE OF MAN IN AMERICA:

The
Classical Period in

American Anthropology,
1900-1920

Introduction
by Ruth L. Bunzel
THE FIRST TWO DECADES OF THE 20TH CENTURY IN AMERICAN ANTHROpology might be called the Age of Boas, so completely did that giant dominate the field. Boas came to New York in 1895 from the Field Museum in Chicago as Curator of Ethnology at the American Museum of Natural History and Lecturer in Physical Anthropology at Columbia University. The connection between these two great institutions proved most advantageous. Columbia had no research funds at that time, but the Museum had. Through the Museum, Boas was able to send his students into the field establishing the American model for anthropological education. Several students later found employment at the Museum at a time when anthropology was just emerging as a profession and still was not
recognized in most of the country's colleges and universities.

Boas soon attracted able scholars. The roster of his students reads like a Who's Who of American anthropology. For a generation, almost every young anthropologist who went out into teaching or research in the fields of linguistics, ethnology and physical anthropology was trained at Columbia. Harvard and Yale Universities, which also gave graduate degrees in anthropology at this time, concentrated on archaeology and European prehistory, fields in which Boas was only peripherally interested. Among Boas' first students were Alfred L. Kroeber and Clark Wissler. Neither one started out to become an anthropologist; Kroeber's first interest was English literature, Wissler's, as we have seen, was psychology. A little later Robert Lowie, Edward Sapir, Alexander Goldenweiser, Paul Radin and Leslie Spier all studied with Boas at around the same time. Having been educated in Europe, Boas brought into anthropology the atmosphere of international scholarship. Although his methods were empirical, his knowledge was not limited to the American scene, but ranged the whole field of anthropology. Many of the students whom he attracted were foreign-born and all read at least two languages, and the influence of European thought began to be felt in American anthropology. New York was now the center of anthropological study, as Washington had been earlier. The old Ethnological Society was revived and met at the Museum of Natural History. Boas was winding up the Jesup Expedition, directing the mammoth work of pubUcation of the results; he continued his own research on the Kwakiutl and other tribes of the North Pacific
400


Building a Science of

Man

in

America

401

Coast; for the U. S. Immigration Department he had begun the anthro-

pometric investigation of the children of immigrants which was to rock

physical anthropology with
its

evidence of the instability of

human
its

types.

This was

the period

salvage operation

when the among the Plains

Museum was engaged

Indians,

in

gigantic

and

it

was there

that Boas'
all

fledglings first tried their wings. Kroeber,

Lowie, Wissler, Radin, Spier

tipis

served their term of apprenticeship in the tattered

with the old

men

who remembered.

Sapir specialized in linguistics, and Goldenweiser was

field trip

excused after his one

produced nothing but trouble.

All of Boas' students read

German and

did not consider

it

unreason-

able to expect that a scholar should have read the major theoretical contributions in his subject,

no matter what the language.

No

student of Boas'

seminars would have dared to justify his ignorance of the distribution of

art, by the plea was concentrated in this they shared a "common culture," and communication was easy; they could talk about parfleches and medicine bundles, joking relations and age societies with no problems of semantics but their "field" was Man. In the dusty corridors between the storerooms of the Museum, in the flyspecked coffee shops around Columbia, but above all in Boas' seminars to which graduates returned year after year, were thrashed out the main ideas that dominated anthropology for years to come. These were the idea of the culture area as a reality and as a heuristic

spirals or safety pins, or the characteristics of

it

Melanesian

that

was "not

his field." Their area of research

device; the age-area concept in the interpretation of distribution of cultural

phenomena and

historical reconstruction; the techniques for deal-

ing with discontinuous distributions; the particularism of cultural devel-

opment

"Now
this

in that time at that place," to quote the

Osage

ritualist.

Related to

approach were the ideas that anthropology, except for physical anthropology, was an historical and not a natural science, that the data with which it dealt were events unique and unrepeatable and that,
therefore, the concepts

and methods developed

in the natural sciences

inappropriate; that historical formulations should begin with things

relationships

were known

were whose

the tribes within a geographical area, the dif-

ferent dialects of a single linguistic stock

problematical comparisons.

and proceed from there to more These were the ideas especiaUy associated

with the so-caUed Boas school.

But Boas himself had always been concerned also with another theoretiwith the nature of culture and the nature of man. He recognized that the units of observation were people, that cultures served human needs, and however diverse in origin the constituent elements of a culture might be they fitted together into a system of interrelated parts. These concepts were first worked out in a series of papers on folklore their golden nuggets of theory buried and almost unrecognizable in the plethora of examples. Studies of ritual (e.g.: the "Sun Dance") and
cal orientation

402

RUTH

L.

BUNZEL

"totemism" followed. These studies did not appear to deal with culture
wholes, but actually they did.
a medicine bundle ceremony

When
among

Spier said that the

the Blackfoot

"Sun Dance" was and the sanction for a

was making a statement about BlackBut one who had not gone through the mill of Boas' seminars would not have recognized it as such. When Radcliflfe-Brown and Malinowski arrived in America in the 20's, bearing the gospel of functionalism, American anthropologists caught in their own provinciaUsm could look at them in surprise and say, "But, of
revenge party
foot and

among

the Crow, he

Crow

culture wholes.

course.

We knew

it all

the time. Don't these people read?"

FRANZ BOAS
(1858-1942)

Franz Boas belonged to the same tradition of liberal romanticism that produced Carl Schurz and the philosophical anarchists of the 19th century.

He was the essential protestant; he valued autonomy more than comfort, perhaps more even than affection; he believed that man was a rational animal and could, with persistent effort, emancipate himself from superstition

society

although he admitted
its

and

irrationality

perhaps, was the

analysis with

and lead a sane and rational life in a good that humanity had a long way to go. This, basis of his unalterable opposition to Freud and psychofundamentally tragic view of life and its acceptance of
essential part of the

irrationality as

an

human
II)

condition. In the last years

of his

life

(he died during World

War

a deep depression overwhelmed

him as he saw how man had retrogressed from the goals he envisioned. But his depression sprang from his own age and helplessness. "If I were young, I would do something about it," he said to a colleague who had remarked how difficult life must be for their students growing up in the depression and under the threat of war. An activist to the end! Boas' passionate temperament was held in bounds by the rigorous discipline of his mind. He was trained in physics and only switched to anthropology when his trip to the Arctic brought him into contact with the Eskimo and confronted him with the intriguing problem of cultural differences and common humanity. What he carried over to his anthropological studies from his training in the physical sciences was not a specific method, for he realized early in his career that the methods of one discipline could not be applied to another and that the formulations of a social science must be of
a different order from those of a laboratory science. He brought to anthropology rigorous standards of proof, a critical scepticism toward all generalization,

and

the physicist's unwillingness to accept

any generalization or

more than a useful hypothesis until it has been clearly demonstrated that no other explanation is possible. This aspect of Boas' theoretic framework especially irked those of his students who would have liked more facile generalization and who regarded Boas' standards of
explanation as anything

proof as a "methodological

strait jacket."

Boas made voluminous and important contributions

in three of the four

403

404
fields of

FRANZ BOAS
anthropology

physical anthropology, linguistics,

field,

and ethnology

and

his

one contribution in the fourth

archaeology, served to define

new procedures and

lithic quality.

goals in the study of

Despite the great diversity of his

Mexican prehistory. activities his work had a certain monoit is

So consistent was

his theoretical position that

frequently

whether a paper was written in 1888 or 1932. His mind was not closed to new ideas. He created no closed system; he saw research as a progression through constantly emerging problems to ever widening

hard to

tell

horizons.

Boas was not an easy man to work with. Prickly, unbending, often inhe was scornful of disagreement or stupidity. He valued autonomy but was often highhanded. He was deeply concerned about his students' lives and careers, but in terms of what he thought was best for them. He arranged field trips for them without consulting them; he schemed and maneuvered to get them positions and was deeply hurt when they refused to accept his arrangements. But he never wavered in his loyalty
tolerant,

to them, even

when he disapproved of them. Boas wrote one popular book, The Mind of Primitive Man, which
title. It

is

rather curious
ities

does not deal, as might be supposed, with the peculiara conception which Boas did not harbor of primitive mentality

but with the psychic unity of man, the evidence for the equality of races and the proper approach to the study of the differences between groups. These

were the ideas for which he fought as an anthropologist and as a

throughout his long career.
In the
field of physical

citizen

anthropology he was interested only in the study

of living people. In this area he

was an extraordinary innovator. His

demonstration of the instability of physical types dealt a body blow to generally held racial theories. His discussion of the relationship of family
lines in

a population, disposed of theories of "racial" heredity. His studies

of growth established the concept of physiological as opposed to chronological age with far-reaching effects in the fields of pediatrics
cation. In this field alone
lifetime.

he achieved more than most

specialists

and edudo in a

^R.L.B.

The Mental Traits of Primitive

Man

APPARENTLY THE THOUGHTS AND ACTIONS OF CIVILIZED MAN, AND THOSE found in more primitive forms of society, prove, that, in various groups of mankind, the miad responds quite differently when exposed to the same
From Boas, The Mind of Primitive 1911), pp. 98-114, 287.

Man (New

York: The Macmillan Company,

The Mental
conditions.

Traits of Primitive

Man
its

405
conclusions, lack of control

Lack

of logical connection in

of will, are apparently

society.

two of

its

fundamental characteristics in primitive

In the formation of opinions, belief takes the place of logical

demonstration.

they quickly lead to action.

The emotional value of opinions is great, and consequently The will appears unbalanced, there being a

readiness to yield to strong emotions and a stubborn resistance in trifling

matters.

Unfortunately the descriptions of the state of mind of primitive people,

such as are given by most

the people they
visit;

travellers,

are too superficial to be used for

psychological investigation. Very few travellers understand the language of

possible to judge a tribe solely by the by observations of disconnected actions the incentive of which remains unknown? But even when the language of
is it

and how

descriptions of interpreters, or

the people

is

to their tales.

known to the visitor, he The missionary has his

arts.

is

generally an unappreciative listener

strong bias against the religious ideas

interest in their

and customs of primitive people, and the trader has no

beUefs and in their barbarous
enter into the inner
life

The observers who

seriously tried to

of a people, the Cushings, Callaways,

and Greys,

are few in number, and

may be counted on

one's fingers. Nevertheless the

bulk of the argument

ficial

is

always based on the statements of hasty and superto describe the peculiar psycho-

observers.

Numerous attempts have been made

logical characteristics of primitive

man.

Among

these I

would mention

those of Klemm,^ Carus,^

De

Gobineau,^ Nott and Gliddon,^ Waitz,^

Spencer, and

Tylor.''^

Their investigations are of merit as descriptions of

the characteristics of primitive people, but

we cannot

claim for any of

them

that they describe the psychological characters of races independent

of their social surroundings.

Klemm and Wuttke

among

designate the civilized

races as active,

all

others as passive, and assume that aU elements and

primitive people
to

beginnings of civilization found

on the
dawn."

islands of the Pacific

civilization.

Cams divides De Gobineau calls

Ocean mankind

were due

in

America or
and

an early contact with

into "peoples of the day, night

the yellow race the male element, the black

et seq.

iGustav Klemm, Allgemeine Kultur-Geschichte (Leipzig, 1843), vol. i, pp. 196 His opinions are accepted by A. Wuttke, Geschichte des Heidentums (Breslau,

1852-53), vol. i, p. 36. 2 Carl Gustav Cams, "Ueber die ungleiche Befahigung der verschiedenen Menschheitsstamme fUr hohere geistige Entwicklung" {Denkschrift zum hundertjdhrigen Geburtsfeste Goethe's, Leipzig, 1840). 3 J. A. de Gobineau, Essai sur I'inegalite des races humaines (Paris, 1853-55). 4 Nott and Gliddon, Types of Mankind (Philadelphia, 1854), i, Indigenous Races of the Earth (Philadelphia, 1857). BTheodor Waitz, Anthropologic der Naturvolker, (2d ed., Leipzig, 1877). ^ Herbert Spencer, Principles of Sociology. 7 Edward B. Tylor, Researches into the Early History of Mankind; Primitive
Culture.

406

FRANZ BOAS

race the female element, and calls only the whites the noble and gifted race.

Nott and Gliddon ascribe animal instincts only to the lower races, while
they declare that the white race has a higher instinct which incites and
directs
its

development.
hereditary powers of the white race has gained
doctrine of the prerogatives of the master-mind,

The behef in the higher a new life with the modern

which have found

their boldest expression in Nietzsche's writings.

All such views are generalizations which either do not sufficiently take
into account the social conditions of races,
effect,

and thus confound cause and

freedom to the most

or were dictated by scientific or humanitarian bias, by the desire to

justify the institution of slavery, or to give the greatest

highly gifted.

who give an ingenious analysis of the mental life of man, do not assume that these are racial characteristics, although the evolutionary standpoint of Spencer's work often seems to convey this
Tylor and Spencer,
primitive

impression.

Quite distinct from these

is

Waltz's point of view.^

He

says,

"According

to the current opinion the stage of culture of a people or of

is

an individual

largely or exclusively a product of his faculty.

is at least

We

maintain that the

reverse

just as true.

The

faculty of

man

does not designate any-

how much and what he is able to achieve in the immediate future and depends upon the stages of culture through which he has passed and the one he has reached." The views of these investigators show that in the domain of psychology
thing but

a confusion prevails
of primitive races,

still

greater than in anatomy, as to the characteristics

clear distinction is drawn between the racial and the social problem. In other words, the evidence is based partly on the supposed mental characteristics of races, no matter what their stage of culture; partly on those of tribes and peoples on different levels of civiHzation, no matter whether they belong to the same race or to distinct races. Still these two problems are entirely distinct. The former is a problem of heredity; the latter, a problem of environment. Thus we recognize that there are two possible explanations of the different manifestations of the mind of man. It may be that the minds of different races show differences of organization; that is to say, the laws of mental activity may not be the same for all minds. But it may also be that the

and that no

organization of

mind

is

practically identical

among

all

races of
its

man;

that

mental

activity follows the

same laws everywhere, but

that

manifestations

depend upon the character of individual experience that

action of these laws.
It is quite

is

subjected to the

evident that the activities of the

these two elements.

The

organization of the

human mind depend upon mind may be defined as the

ed.) vol.
i,

STheodor Waitz, Anthropologie der Naturvolker (2d

p. 387.

The Mental

Traits of Primitive

Man

407

group of laws which determine the modes of thought and of action, irrespective of the subject-matter of mental activity. Subject to such laws are the manner of discrimination between perceptions, the manner in which
perceptions associate themselves with previous perceptions, the
in

manner

which a stimulus leads to action, and the emotions produced by stimuli. These laws determine to a great extent the manifestations of the mind.
In these

we

recognize hereditary causes.

But, on the other hand, the influence of individual experience can

easily

be shown to be very

great.

The bulk
It is

of the experience of

man

is

gained from oft-repeated impressions.

one of the fundamental laws of

facility

psychology that the repetition of mental processes increases the

with which these processes are performed, and decreases the degree of
consciousness that accompanies them. This law expresses the well-known

phenomena
other.

of habit.

When

a certain perception

is

frequently associated

with another previous perception, the one will habitually call forth the

When

a certain stimulus frequently results in a certain action,

If

it

will

tend to call forth habitually the same action.

a stimulus has often pro-

duced a certain emotion, it will tend to reproduce it every time. These belong to the group of environmental causes. The explanation of the activity of the mind of man, therefore, requires the discussion of two distinct problems. The first bears upon the question of unity or diversity of organization of the mind, while the second bears upon the diversity produced by the variety of contents of the mind as found in the various social and geographical environments. The task of the investigator consists largely in separating these two causes, and in attributing to each its proper share in the development of the pecuHarities
of the mind.

We

wiU

first

devote our attention to the question,

Do

differences exist

human mind? Since Waltz's thorough discussion of the question of the unity of the human species, there can be no doubt that in the main the mental characteristics of man are the same all over
in the organization of the

the world; but the question remains open, whether there

difference in grade to allow us to

is

a sufficient

may be
series,

considered as

assume that the present races of man standing on different stages of the evolutionary

whether we are

justified in ascribing to civilized

man

a higher place

in organization than to primitive

man.
problem has been

The

chief difficulty encountered in the solution of this

It is

pointed out before.

primitive

the uncertainty as to which of the characteristics of

man

are causes of the

low stage of

culture,

and which are caused

by

it;

or which of the psychological characteristics are hereditary, and would

not be wiped out by the effects of civilization. The fundamental difficulty

of collecting satisfactory observations of primitive
lies

in the fact that

no

large groups

man

are brought

nowadays

into conditions of real equaUty

with whites. The gap between our society and theirs always remains open,

408
and for manner
this

FRANZ BOAS

reason their minds cannot be expected to work in the same as ours. The same phenomenon which led us to the conclusion that primitive races of our times are not given an opportunity to develop their
prevents us from judging their innate faculty. seems advantageous to direct our attention first of all to this difficulty. can be shown that certain mental traits are common to all members of
that are

abilities,
It

If it

mankind

on a primitive stage of

civilization,

no matter what
characteristics

their

racial affinities

may

be, the conclusion will gain

much

in strength, that

these traits are primarily social, or based

to social environment.

on physical

due

I wiU select a few only among the mental characteristics of primitive man which will illustrate our point, inhibition of impulses, power of attention, power of original thought.

We
It is

will first discuss the question, in

how

far primitive

man

is

capable

of inhibiting impulses (Spencer).^

an impression obtained by many

less

travellers,

and also based upon

experiences gained in our

and the

educated of

own country, that primitive man of all races, our own race, have in common a lack of control
way more
readily to an impulse than civilized
is

of emotions, that they give

man and
upon the
impulses

the highly educated. I believe that this conception

neglect to consider the occasions
is

based largely

on which a strong control of

demanded

in various forms of society.

on the fickleness and uncertainty of the disposition of primitive man, and on the strength of his passions aroused by seemingly trifling causes. I wiU say right here that the traveller or student measures the fickleness of the people by the importance which he attributes to the actions or purposes in which they do not persevere, and he weighs the impulse for outbursts of passion by his standard. Let me give an example. A traveller desirous of reaching his goal as soon as possible engages men to start on a journey at a certain time. To him time is exceedingly valuable. But what is time to primitive man, who does not feel the compulsion of completing a definite work at a definite time? While the traveller is fuming and raging over the delay, his men keep up their merry chatter and laughter, and cannot be induced to exert themselves except to please their master. Would not they be right in stigmatizing many a traveller for his impulsiveness and lack of control when irritated by a trifling cause like loss of time? Instead of this, the
of the proofs for this alleged peculiarity are based
traveller

Most

complains of the fickleness of the natives,

who

quickly lose inter-

which the traveller has at heart. The proper way to compare the fickleness of the savage and that of the white is to compare their behavior in undertakings which are equally important to each. More generally speaking, when we want to give a true
est in the objects
9

Herbert Spencer, The Principles of Sociology

(New York,

1893), vol.

I,

pp. 55,

et seq., 59-61.

The Mental

Traits of Primitive

Man

409

estimate of the power of primitive man to control impulses, we must not compare the control required on certain occasions among ourselves with the control exerted by primitive man on the same occasions. If, for instance, our social etiquette forbids the expression of feelings of personal

discomfort and of anxiety,

we must remember

that personal

etiquette

among

primitive

men may

not require any

inhibition of the

same kind.

We

must rather look for those occasions on which inhibition is required by the customs of primitive man. Such are, for instance, the numerous cases
of taboo,

that

is,

of prohibitions of the use of certain foods, or of the

performance of certain kinds of work,

siderable

which sometimes

require a con-

amount of self-control. When an Eskimo community is on the point of starvation, and their religious proscriptions forbid them to make use of the seals that are basking on the ice, the amount of self-control of the whole community which restrains them from killing these seals is
certainly very great.

severance of primitive
his

Other examples that suggest themselves are the perman in the manufacture of his utensils and weapons; readiness to undergo privations and hardships which promise to fulfil

his desires,

as the Indian youth's willingness to fast in the mountains,

spirit;

awaiting the appearance of his guardian

or his bravery and endur-

ance exhibited in order to gain admittance to the ranks of the

tribe; or,

men

of his

again, the often-described

power of endurance exhibited by

is

Indian captives
It

who undergo

torture at the hands of their enemies.

has also been claimed that lack of control

in his outbursts of passion occasioned

exhibited by primitive

man

by

slight provocations. I think

that in this case also the difference in attitude of civilized

man and

of

primitive
in

man

disappears

if

we

give due weight to the social conditions

which the individual

lives.

What would

a primitive

man

say to the noble passion which preceded

and accompanied the war of the Rebellion? Would not the rights of slaves seem to him a most irrelevant question? On the other hand, we have
ample proof that
his passions are just as

much

controlled as ours, only in

different directions.

The numerous customs and restrictions regulating the relations of the sexes may serve as an example. The difference in impulsiveness may be fully explained by the different weight of motives in both cases. In short, perseverance and control of impulses are demanded of primitive man as weU as of civilized man, but on different occasions. If they are not demanded as often, the cause must be looked for, not in the
inherent inability to produce them, but in the social status which does not

demand them

to the

same

extent.

Spencer^^ mentions as a particular case of this lack of control the im-

providence of primitive man. I believe

instead of improvidence, optimism.
10 Spencer, loc. cit.

it

would be more proper

should
I

to say,

"Why

not be as successful

410
to-morrow as
This feeling
I

FRANZ BOAS
was to-day?" is the underlying feeling of primitive man. think, no less powerful in civilized man. What builds up

is, I

business activity but the belief in the stabiUty of existing conditions?

Why

do the poor not

store beforehand?

hesitate to

We

found families without being able to lay in must not forget that starvation among most primitive

an exceptional case, the same as financial crises among civihzed people; and that for times of need, such as occur regularly, provision is always made. Our social status is more stable, so far as the acquiring of
people
is

the barest necessities of

life is

concerned, so that exceptional conditions

nobody would maintain that the majority of civilized men are always prepared to meet emergencies. We may recognize a difference in the degree of improvidence caused by the difference of social status, but not a specific difference between lower and higher types of man. Related to the lack of power of inhibition is another trait which has
do not prevail
often; but

been ascribed to primitive

man

of

all races,

his inability of concentration faculties of the intellect.

when any demand

I will

is

made upon

the

more complex

mention an example which seems to make clear the error committed

in this assumption. In his description of the natives of the west coast of

Vancouver

Island, Sproat says, "The native mind, to an educated man, On his attention being fully aroused, he seems generally to be asleep. often shows much quickness in reply and ingenuity in argument. But a short conversation wearies him, particularly if questions are asked that
. .

require efforts of thought or

memory on

his part.

The mind

of the savage

then appears to rock to and fro out of mere weakness." Spencer,

quotes
I this passage,

who

adds a number of others corroborating

this

point.

happen to know through personal contact the tribes mentioned by Sproat.^^ The questions put by the traveller seem mostly trifling to the Indian, and he naturally soon tires of a conversation carried on in a foreign language, and
one
in

which he

finds nothing to interest him.

As

a matter of

fact, the

can easily be raised to a high pitch, and I have often been the one who was wearied out first. Neither does the management of their intricate system of exchange prove mental inertness in matters which concern the natives. Without mnemonic aids, they plan the systematic
interest of those natives

distribution of their property in such a

manner

as to increase their wealth

and

social position.

These plans require great foresight and constant

life

application.

Finally I wish to refer to a trait of the mental

all

of primitive

man

of

races which has often been adduced as the primary reason

why

cer-

tain races cannot rise to higher levels of culture; namely, their lack of
originality. It is said that the

conservatism of primitive

man

is

so strong,

that the individual never deviates

from the

traditional

customs and beUefs

(Spencer) .^2 while there

11 12

is

certainly truth in this statement in so far as

p. 120.

G. M. Sproat, Scenes and Studies of Savage Life (1886), Herbert Spencer, loc. cit., p. 70.

The Mental

Traits of Primitive

Man
is

411
its most by no means lacking

more customs
in the
life

are binding than in civilized society, at least in

highly developed types, originality

a trait which

is

of primitive people. I will call to

mind

the great frequency of the

appearance of prophets among newly converted tribes as well as among

pagan tribes. Among the latter we learn quite frequently of new dogmas which have been introduced by such individuals. It is true that these may
often be traced to the influence of the ideas of neighboring tribes, but they
are modified

by the

individuality of the person,

beliefs of the people. It is a

well-known fact that myths and

and grafted upon the current beliefs have

been disseminated, and undergo changes in the process of dissemination (Boas). ^3 Undoubtedly this has often been accomplished by the independent thought of individuals, as may be observed in the increasing
complexity of esoteric doctrines intrusted to the care of the priesthood. I
believe one of the best examples of such independent thought
is

furnished

North America (Mooney).^* on the ideas of their own people, their neighbors, and the teachings of missionaries. The notion of future life of an Indian tribe of Vancouver Island has undergone a change in this manner, in so far as the idea of the return of the dead in children of their own family has arisen. The same independent attitude may be observed in the replies of the Nicaraguan Indians to the questions regarding their religion as were put to them by Bobadilla, and which were reported by Oviedo.^^ It seems to my mind that the mental attitude of individuals who thus

by the history of the ghost-dance ceremonies

in

The

doctrines of the ghost-dance prophets were new, but based

develop the beliefs of a tribe

is

exactly that of the civihzed philosopher.

The student of the history of philosophy is well aware how strongly the mind of even the greatest genius is influenced by the current thought of his time. This has been well expressed by a German writer (Lehmann),^^ who says, "The character of a system of philosophy is, just like that of any other
literary

work, determined

first

of

all

by the personality of
it

its

originator.

Every true philosophy

true

reflects the fife of the philosopher, as well as

every

poem

that of the poet. Secondly,

it

bears the general marks of the

period to which
claims, the

belongs; and the

it

more

strongly
life

which fluctuate in the

If

more powerful the ideas which it probe permeated by the currents of thought of the period. Thirdly, it is influenced by the
will

particular bent of philosophical thought of the period."

such

is

the case

among

the greatest minds of

all

times,

why

should

13 Franz Boas, "The Growth of Indian Mythologies" {Journal of American Folklore, vol. ix [1896], pp. 1-11. 14 J. Mooney, "The Ghost-Dance Religion" {Fourteenth Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology, pp. 641, et seq.). 15 Oviedo y Valdes, Historia General y Natural de las Indias [1535-57] (Madrid, 1851-55), Bk. xlii, Chaps. 2, 3 (quoted from Spencer, Descriptive Sociology, No. II, pp. 42-43). 16

Rudolf Lehmann, Schopenhauer.

412

FRANZ BOAS
that the thinker in primitive society
is

we wonder

strongly influenced

by

the current thought of his time? Unconscious and conscious imitation are
factors influencing civilized society, not less than primitive society, as has

been shown by G. Tarde,^'^ who has proved that primitive man, and civilized man as weU, imitates not such actions only as are useful, and for the imitation of which logical causes may be given, but also others for the
adoption or preservation of which no logical reason can be assigned.
I

think these considerations illustrate that the differences between

civil-

ized

man and

primitive

man

are in

many

cases

more apparent than

real;

that the social conditions,

on account of their peculiar characteristics, easily convey the impression that the mind of primitive man acts in a way quite different from ours, while in reality the fundamental traits of the mind are
the same.

Report on an Anthropometric Investigation

of the Population of the United States

{1922)
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE POPULATION OF THE UNITED STATES

The White population

not so

of the United States differs

from

that of
its

much

in character as in the

mode

of assemblage of

Europe component
arise in a

elements.

The important

theoretical

and practical problems that

study of the biological characteristics of our population relate largely to

the effects of the recent rapid migrations of the diverse type of Europeans.

lation, of

The problem is further complicated by the presence of a large Negro popusmaU remnants of Indian aborigines, and by a slight influx of

Asiatics.
It would be an error to assume that the intermingling of different European types is a unique historical phenomenon which has never occurred before. On the contrary, aU European nationalities are highly complex in origin. Even those most secluded and receiving the least amount of foreign blood at the present time have in past times been under entirely different

conditions.

Intermixture in Europe was largely confined to antiquity, although in

'^'^

G. Tarde, Les Lois de

I'lmitation.

From Boas, "Report on an Anthropometric Investigation of the United States," first published in The Journal of the American Statistical Association, Vol. 18 (1922), pp. 181-209. Reprinted in Race, Language and Culture (New York: The Macmillan
Company, 1940),
pp. 28-59.

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

S.

413

some

parts

it

continued into the Middle Ages, whereas the intermingling

is

of different local types in the United States

recent.

Owing

to the social

may have been rather slow. Notwithstanding the relatively small numbers of migrating individuals, it may have taken several generations for the intrusive and native populations to become merged. In the United States, owing to the absence of hereditary social classes, the amalgamation is on the whole more rapid and involves larger numbers of individuals than the
conditions in ancient

Europe amalgamation of

distinct elements

intermixture which took place in earUer periods in the Old World.

European countries is comparafounded on its stability. In northern and central Europe this condition developed after individual hereditary landholding was substituted for the earlier forms of agricultural life, and with the attachment of the serf to the soil which he inhabited. These conditions prevailed in the Mediterranean area even in antiquity, but in the northern parts of Europe they did not develop untU the Middle Ages,
that the population of
is

The impression

tively

speaking "pure" in descent

when
states.

the

more or

less tribal organization of the

people gave
tribes

During the period when the Keltic and Teutonic

to place a vast

way to feudal moved readily

from place
lations
soil,

amount of mixture occurred

in all parts of

Europe. Later on, when families became

popuwhich were proprietors of the soil, or otherwise attached to the became stationary, and consequently intermixture between distant
settled, those parts of the

parts of the continent

became much

less

frequent than in previous times.

On

the other hand, the mutual permeation of neighboring communities

probably became

much more

thorough.
until

These conditions of stabiUty continued

cities

diverse elements were brought together in the

by the development of same community.

This process became important with the growth of modern industrialism

and with the concomitant growth of urban populations that were drawn together from large areas. Investigations made in different parts of Europe, particularly in Italy^ and in Baden,^ show differences in type between city populations and those of the open country. These may in part be explained by the strong intermixture of types drawn from a wide area which assemble and intermarry in the city. Observations of the population of Paris^ indicate the same kind of intermixture of north European and central European
types.

The
city

settlement of the unoccupied districts of the United States has

brought about an intermixture of types similar to that occurring in modern

populations, because settlers from different parts of Europe

dwell in close proximity in newly opened countries. Although in

Ridolfo Livi, Antrapometria Militare (Rome, 1896), p. 87 et seq. Otto Ammon, Zur Anthropologic der Badener (Jena, 1899), p. 641. 3 Franz Boas, "The Cephalic Index," American Anthropologist, N. (1899), p. 453.
1

may many

S.,

vol.

414
cases

FRANZ BOAS

we

find a strong cohesion of farmers

is

who come from

the

same

European country, there

It

also a great deal of scattering.

should, therefore, be understood that the problems presented

the population of the United States

do not

differ

materially

by from the

analogous European problems. The differences are due to the larger numbers of individuals involved in the whole process, in its rapidity, in its extension over rural communities, and in the forms of cohesion between members of the same group which are dependent upon the mode of settlement of the country. The process resembles earlier European mixtures in so far as many diverse European types are involved. In modem Europe only European types enter into the mixture, but a number of races morphologically removed from the White race enter into certain phases of the problem in America. Even this aspect of the problem was probably present in antiquity when slaves of foreign races formed a considerable part of the population.

The long continued

stability of

the beginning of the Middle

until very recent times,

European populations which set in with Ages and continued, at least in rural districts, has brought about a large amount of inbreeding

in every limited district. In default of detailed statistical information in

relation to the

data, but a cursory investigation

development of populations it is impossible to give exact shows that inbreeding of this type must

have occurred for a very long time. The theoretical number of ancestors
of every living individual proceeds
tion to generation back, so that ten generations (or approximately

by multiplication by two from genera300 or 350 years) ago every single individual would have had 1,024 ancestors. Therefore, about 600 or 700 years ago there would be more than 1,000,000 ancestors for each individual. Considering the stability of population, and the fact that brothers and sisters have the same ancestors, such an increase in the number is, of course, entirely impossible, and it necessarily follows that a very large number of individuals in the ancestral series must be identical, which means that there must have been a large amount of
inbreeding.

The

"loss of ancestors"

becomes the greater the further back we go

stable the population. It
is

in

the ancestry

and the more

obvious that par-

ticularly in the landholding

group of families which remains from generaplace, there must have been much inbreeding. Statistical information is available only for a few village communities and for the high nobility of Europe, The genealogies of aU these families demonstrate that the decrease in the number of ancestors is very considerable. The calculations for the high nobility of Europe^ show that in the sixth ancestral generation there are only 41 ancestors instead of 64; in the twelfth generation, only 533 instead of 4,096. These numbers seem
tion to generation in the

same

lin

Ottokar Lorenz, Lehrbuch der gesammten wissenschaftlichen Genealogie (Ber(1898), p. 289 et seq., pp. 308, 310, 311.

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

S.

415

to be quite similar to those found in the stable village communities of Europe. Owing to this intermixture and to the similarity of descent of

the families constituting the population, each family represents fairly ade-

quately the whole population, or as

lation
is

we might

express

homogeneous,

in so far as all the families

it, the whole popuhave the same kind of

On the other hand, in a population that results from recent migraand in which individuals from the most diverse parts of the world come together, a single family wiU not be representative of the whole population, because entirely different ancestral hues will be present in the various families. Therefore the population will be heterogeneous in so far
descent.
tion
as the different families belong to different lines of descent.
this point

To

illustrate

a community consisting of Whites and Negroes which the Whites always intermarry among themselves, and the Negroes among themselves. Obviously in such a population, a single family would not be representative of the whole community, but only of its own fraction. On the other hand, if we had a community in which Whites and Negroes had intermarried for a long time, as is the case among the socalled Bastards of South Africa a people very largely descended from Dutch and Hottentots and in which this interminghng has continued for a long time we have a homogeneous population in so far as every family represents practically the same line of descent.^ It will therefore be seen that homogeneity is not by any means identical with purity of race. In the case of a homogeneous population of mixed descent we may expect,
in

we might assume

on the whole, a high degree of variability in the family, while all the families will be more or less alike. On the other hand, in a heterogeneous
population in which each part
is,

comparatively speaking, "pure,"

we may

expect a low variability of each family with a high variability of the famihes constituting the whole population.
the

On

account of

its

migratory habits

American

city

population must be heterogeneous. Heterogeneous are

also the immigrants

and

their

immediate descendants, whereas in the

villages

sta-

tionary populations of
tains

New

England

and of the Kentucky moun-

we have presumably homogeneous

groups.

HEREDITY
For determining the
laws of heredity
is

characteristics of a population

knowledge of the

indispensable. Ordinarily the term heredity in relation

is

to raciaP characteristics

used in a somewhat loose manner, and

stability of

we

should distinguish clearly between the hereditary

a population

and the hereditary

characteristics

which determine the bodily form and

5 Eugen Fischer, Die Rehobother Bastards (Jena, 1913); Franz Boas, "On the Variety of Lines of Descent Represented in a Population," American Anthropologist N. S., vol. 18 (1916), p. 1 et seq. ^ The terms "race" and "racial" are here used in the sense that they mean the assembly of genetic lines represented in a population.

416
functions of an individual.
lation

FRANZ BOAS

The concept of hereditary stability in a popucan mean only that the distribution of forms which occur in one

generation will be repeated in exactly the same

tion.

way

in the following generaas defined

This

is

clearest in the case of a

homogeneous population

before. In every population varying bodily forms of individuals will occur

with characteristic frequencies. In an undisturbed homogeneous population

we must

necessarily assume that each generation will

it

show

the

same

characteristic distribution of individual forms. If

did not do so there

would be a disturbance of the hereditary

of the United States.
stituent types there

stability.

Conditions are quite different in a heterogeneous population like that

Owing to intermarriages between the various conmust be a tendency toward greater homogeneity, setting aside, of course, the influx of new immigrants. Experience shows that no matter how rigid may be the social objection to intermarriages between different groups, or how strong the pressure to bring about marriages between members of the same group, they will not prevent the
gradual assimilation of the population.

An

instance of this kind

is

presented

by the castes of India in Bengal. Notwithstanding the rigid endogamy of castes it has been observed that the highest castes are similar in type to the peoples of Western Asia, while the lower down in the scale of castes we go the more this type becomes mixed with the older substratum of the native population.'^ This can be explained only by intermarriage between the different castes which must have occurred notwithstanding the rigid laws forbidding it. The less the tendency toward segregation of different groups, the more rapid will be the approach toward homogeneity. Therefore notwithstanding the laws of hereditary stability in individual strains,

there cannot be a hereditary stability of a heterogeneous population until

homogeneity has been attained. It may even be considered doubtful whether a disturbance of the distribution of bodUy forms may not occur
as

an

effect of the intermingling of

two populations similar or even

identi-

cal in type, but of different ancestry, in which, therefore, a heterogeneity

of ancestry exists.^
will be seen that the physiological laws of heredity are quite from the statistical expression of the effects of heredity upon a large population. The latter depends upon both the biological laws of heredity and the pecuUar social structure of the population which is being considered. These two aspects of heredity must be kept clearly apart. Unfortunately, the laws of heredity in man are not clearly known, and it is not yet possible without overstepping the bounds of sound, critical, scientific method to apply them to the study of the characteristics of a
it

Thus

different

7H. H. Risley and

pp.

E. A. Gait, Census of India, 1901

(Calcutta, 1903), vol.

1,

489

et seq.

8 M. D. and Raymond Pearl, "On the Relation of Race Crossing to the Sex Ratio," Biological Bulletin, vol. 15 (1908), pp. 194 et seq.

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

population.

S.

417

A considerable amount of preliminary fundamental work must be done before we can proceed to the explanation of special complex phenomena. One fundamental point of view may be considered as established, namely, that when a definite couple of parents is given, the probability of occurrence of a given form among the descendants of this couple is fixed. In man it is not easy to demonstrate this fact because the number of children for each couple is small. If we assume, however, an organism
which each parental couple has an infinitely large number of offspring, may be so expressed that each form that occurs among the offspring has a definite probability. In man these laws can be investigated only by combining many families in which both parents, or at least one of the parents, has the same characteristic form, although in this case the phenomenon is obscured by the fact that the same form in the parent
in

the laws of heredity

mean the same ancestry. Observation of various body of man shows that the simple forms of Mendelian heredity are not often applicable. It is true that in a number of cases of pathological modifications, the vaHdity of the simple Mendelian formulas has been established. Even in these cases the number of observations is not sufficient to determine whether we are dealing with exact Mendelian ratios or with approximations. Practically all other cases are still open to doubt. Even in the case of eye color, which has been claimed to be subject to a simple Mendelian ratio with dominance of brown over blue, the available figures are not quite convincing.^ For the more complex variable measurements of the body simple Mendelian ratios are certainly not applicable. Up to the present time the complex laws governing the frequencies of
does not necessarily
features of the

occurrence of bodily forms

among descendants

of an ancestral line are not

known.

The

investigation of any population must, therefore, take into considera-

tion the detailed study of the laws of heredity.

THE INFLUENCE OF ENVIRONMENT

In settling in the United States the immigrants have been brought into

new environment, geographically as well as socially, and the question arises whether the new environment exerts an influence upon bodily form
and functions. It has been customary to consider certain features of bodily development as absolutely stable, and anthropologists have characterized

modem human
variation

types as "permanent forms" which have lasted without from the beginning of our modern geological period up to the present time. It is fairly easy to show that in this view exaggerated imis

portance
extent
8

ascribed to the

We know

that the bulk of the

less

phenomena of observed hereditary stability. body of an adult depends to a certain

favorable conditions under which the child

upon the more or

Helene M. Boas, "Inheritance of Eye Color in Man," American Journal of Physical Anthropology, vol. 2 (1919), pp. 15 et seq.

418
grows up.
It

FRANZ BOAS
has been shown that malnutrition or pathological conditions

of various kinds

may
it

retard growth, and that the retardation

considerable that

cannot be

made up by

long continued growth.

is

may be so As a

matter of

fact, the

bulk of the body at the time of birth

so small as

compared
that
its

body of the adult that it is easy to understand environmental conditions must exert a considerable influence upon
to the bulk of the
this is the

development. Proof of
fifty

gradual increase of stature during

which has been demonstrated by investigations in a number of countries in Europe, and the difference in stature which is found in the same nationality for people living under different economic conditions.^*^ Since many proportions of the body are related to stature and bulk, these will also undergo modifications due to environmental conditions. The influence of environment is not so obvious in those cases in which the bodily form is practically determined at the time of birth, or in those in which the total growth from the time of birth until the adult stage is very slight. It might be assumed that in all cases of this type heredity alone determines the characteristic form of the body. From a wider point of view the assumption that environment has no influence upon the form of the body does not seem justified. It must be understood that the question of stability or instability of the body in relation to environmental influences has no relation to the question of the inheritance of acquired characteristics. Even if we should adhere most
the past
years, until 1914,
rigidly to the

characteristics,

dogma of the impossibihty of the transmission of acquired we must admit that a modification of the bodily form of
is

the individual

easily conceivable without the necessity of

assuming any
is

modification of the germ plasm owing to individually acquired variation.

We
is

should rather have to say that adaptability of a definite type

one

of the hereditary characteristics of the

readily understood in

germ plasm. The problem involved the case of plants which appear in strongly modi-

form according to the environment in which they grow. In many cases of hairiness, the form of the leaves, etc., are subject to the degree of moisture of the soil, and an accurate description of the species would therefore involve a statement that the plant has a certain degree of hairiness, dependent as a definite function upon the moisture of the soil, or that the leaves have a certain form dependent upon outer circumstances. In other words, the plant has a definite form only under a definite environment, and with changing environment, the form changes. We may include under the group of environmental effects also all those variants of form and function that are dependent upon social habits which influence the organism. An influence upon bodily form is exerted by the habitual uses to which groups of muscles are put. Thus the rest position
fied

the

amount

10

Rudolf Martin, Lehrbuch der Anthropologic

1,

(Jena,

1914), p.

225.

Second

edition (Jena, 1928), vol.

p.

297.

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

of the lower jaw
the lower jaw a
is

S.

419

different in different areas.

little

farther forward than the Americans.

The English seem to hold The people of

of the

the western states relax the soft palate

lantic area.

more than those

North At-

The

facial expression is

determined by the development of

the groups of facial muscles; the variations of certain aspects of the form
of the hand and the foot are of this kind. The functioning of organs is even more markedly dependent upon habits, particularly upon habits firmly established during childhood. This is illustrated by the characteristic gait of individuals and of whole groups of people; by the involuntary movements in response to certain stimuli; by many of the expressive movements of the body; by habits of articulation; and by the dexterity and accuracy of movements obtained by early training. Since we recognize the influence of environment upon the form of body

including such features as bulk of body, or muscular forms and the funcit seems justifiable to define racial characteristics as we do those of a variable plant, namely, by stating that under definite environmental conditions the bodily form of a race and its functioning are such

tioning of organs,

as

we

observe, without prejudging the question in

how

far modifications in

form and function may result from changing environment. The actual problem, then, would be to determine whether and how far the traits of the body may be so influenced. We should also bear in mind that it is perfectly conceivable that there may be congenital modifications in forms which are nevertheless not hereditary. Constitutional changes in the body of the mother may bring about modifications in prenatal growth which to
the superficial observer might give the impression of hereditary changes.

These considerations demonstrate that it is necessary to consider this problem in any thorough investigation of the characteristics of the American
population.

SELECTION

The question must be asked in how far selective agencies may determine the movements of the population, including immigration and emigration, the settlement of the western parts of the United States by the inhabitants of the eastern states, and the migration from country to city. Besides migration, the selective influences of mating, of mortality, and of fertility have to be taken into account. Of late years much stress has been laid upon the effect of selection upon the constitution of a population. The effect of selection as determined by bodily form can be investigated to advantage only in a homogeneous population. When every family may be considered as representative of the whole population, and when all strata of society present the same physical characteristics, selective forces that are based on social stratification wiU not influence the selective results, because aU social strata wiU be alike. If it should be found that groups representing different bodily forms have different tendencies to

420
migrate, or different rates of mortality or
fertility,

FRANZ BOAS

we might have an

expression of the direct

upon bodily form. dependence homogeneous populations do not exist As a matter of fact, however, anywhere in the world. A greater or less amount of heterogeneity has
of selection

always been observed, and heterogeneity in our

least,
is

modem

civilization,

at

always connected with social

stratification.

In a heterogeneous
in the

population like that of the United States the

are

difl&culties

way

of

determining a direct relation between selective influences and bodily form

almost insurmountable.

If,

for instance,

descendants of a certain

nationality are attracted to a particular area, as the Scandinavians to the

northwest, the Hungarians to the mines of Pennsylvania, the Mexicans to

French Canadians to York, we must remember that each one of these social groups represents a certain physical type and that there will be, therefore, an apparent relation between selection and physithe southern borderland of the United States, or the the

New

England

states

and northern

New

cal type

which

in reality

is

based on social factors.

with regard to selective mating. Since

Similar observations

may be made

mating depends upon social contact, marriages wiU occur among the groups that associate together. Wherever nationalities cluster together, where denominational or racial considerations act as endogamic restrictions, there will

geneity. Besides this there

tall

be selective mating of similar types due to social heteromay be a certain amount of selection that unites

with

tall

or expresses the sexual attractiveness of other bodily features.

Social heterogeneity exerts an influence also

fertility

upon the mortality and the

of different groups.

The more

recent immigrants are on the whole

less

well-to-do than the earher immigrants and their descendants.

We

know that there is a relation between fertiUty and economic weU-being and we find, therefore, that the number of children of the more recent
immigrants
is

greater than that of the descendants of earlier immigrants,

so that, setting aside the question of mortality, there would be a shifting

in the distribution of the population in favor of later immigrants. Since

the earlier immigrants represent the northwestern

later

European type and the

immigrants the south and east European types, there will appear in
a selection according to bodily form, which

direct relation

is due not to the between physical characteristics and fertility, but rather to the fact that the one economic group is composed of one type, and the other economic group of another type. In many cases the relation between descent and social stratification is so complex that it easily escapes our notice, and for this reason we may observe phenomena of selection apparently related to bodily form but actually due to obscure social causes

this case also

that are discovered with great difl&culty only.

On the other hand it cannot be denied that in some cases at least there must be a direct relation between bodily form and physiological function on the one side and selective processes on the other. It is, for instance,

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

quite obvious that in the settlement of the

S.

421

new western
it

countries a certain

bodily and mental vigor was necessary to enable a person to undertake the
venture. It has often been pointed out, although
empirically, that in this

has never been proven

selection

way

there

must have been a

from the

inhabitants of the

New

England

villages

who
it

migrated westward and that

the emigrants represented a physically superior type.

conclusion

is

not based on observation

of

Even though this seems highly probable. To the

the supposed greater suscepti-

same group

phenomena would belong

forms of disease of shghtly pigmented individuals, as compared with the greater power of resistance of brunet individuals. I am not
bility to certain

by any means convinced that incontrovertible proof of this assumption has been given; but if it were true that the constitution of the blond is weakened by exposure to intense sunlight, there might be a selective influence of this kind when a people move from the cloudy temperate zones to the brilliant sunlight of more southern and more arid climes. In considering the selective influences of environment it should be borne in mind that the human body is so constituted that aU its organs can operate adequately under widely varying circumstances. Our lungs are able to supply the needs of our body under the air pressure that prevails at the level of the sea, and they operate adequately at an elevation of 20,000 feet where the air is highly rarefied. The heart can adjust itself to the variation in demands made upon it, either in sedentary life at the level
of the sea, or in active
life

in high altitudes.

Our

digestive organs

may
diet.

adapt themselves to a purely vegetable diet or again to a purely meat

Our

central nervous system

life.

is

also capable of adjusting itself to the

most

varied conditions of

As

long, therefore, as the conditions of environ-

influences

ment do not exceed very elastic Umits, it is not probable that selective would become operative to any very great extent, at least not in so far as they are determined solely by the form and functioning of the

organs of the body.

RACIAL AND INDIVmUAL DIFFERENCES

An
race,

investigation of the bodily forms of the individuals constituting a

homogeneous or heterogeneous, shows

that they differ considerably

form of and proportions of the body, physiological reactions. These differences are measurable and express the degree of variabihty of the race. A complete presentation of the characteristics of a race would contain a statement of the relative frequency of each particular bodily form which occurs among the individuals constituting the race. When comparing, from
in every single feature, such as pigmentation,
hair, size

among themselves

the point of view of anatomical or physiological characteristics, the racial

types of

Europe which

constitute the bulk of the

American population,
is

it

appears that the range of variation for the different types

character that a great

of such a

many

individuals belonging to one type correspond

422

FRANZ BOAS

to Other individuals belonging to another type. In other words, there are

certain forms

common

to all populations of Europe.

To

give an example:
Italy

We

find strongly contrasting

head forms in northern

and in Sar-

an investigation of the distribution of head forms in each one of these districts shows that 27 per cent of the population may
dinia. Nevertheless

belong either to Sardinia or to northern

boring types, and
different that

Italy.

In other words, there

is

very considerable amount of overlapping of bodily form between neighit is

only

when we

consider races that are fundamentally

do not overlap. Comparblond north European White and the dark Sudanese Negro, there is no overlapping with regard to pigmentation, form of hair, form of nose, form of lips, etc. If, on the other hand, we proceed by steps
find certain characteristics that
ing, for instance, the

we

from northern Europe to the Sudan, a great many intermediate and overlapping steps between these extreme forms will be found, so that only the extremes would really be entirely separate. While it may be that two races
are quite distinct with regard to certain features, there are always other
features with regard to

which the differences are so

slight that the assign-

ment

of any one individual to either one race or the other

would be beset

with doubt.
It has been customary to express the differences between racial types by the difference between the averages of each type or between the modes (the most frequent values) that are characteristic for each type. It is easily shown that such a description is misleading. If we wish to express the difference between two individuals, each of whom has constant characteristics, we may proceed in this manner. If one individual measures 1 70 cm. and another 165 cm., the difference between them is 5 cm. If, however, a certain population has an average stature of 170 cm., and another population an average stature of 165 cm., we cannot say that the difference between the two is 5 cm., because if there is a wide range of variability

number of individuals among the taller population who have exactly the same statures as individuals of the shorter population. To give arbitrarily selected figures, the one may range perhaps from
there will be a large
that measures

190 cm., the other from 145 to 185 cm. In this case an individual anywhere between 150 and 185 cm. might belong to either class. It must, therefore, be clear that if we speak of differences between two races we do not necessarily mean differences between individuals, and these two concepts must be kept clearly apart. The bulk of our modern literature concerning racial differences is open to misinterpretation owing 150
to

to a lack of a clear understanding of the significance of the term "dif-

ference" as applied on the one hand to individuals and on the other hand
to races.

The

generafization,

which
is

is

often

made

(to use our previous

is

instance), that the one population

interpreted as

5 cm. shorter than the other

often

meaning

that this implies a characteristic of all the indi-

viduals of a race, while actually a single selected individual of the shorter

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

race

S.

423
taller race.

may be much
is

taller

than a single selected individual of the

all

This

equally true of

those anatomical, physiological, and psychoIt is

logical characteristics

which exhibit overlapping of individuals.

also

true of those that

show no overlapping, because

the difference between

two selected representative individuals may vary within wide limits. If it is stated that the Whites have larger brains than the Negroes, this does not mean that every White person has a larger brain than any Negro, but merely that the average of the Negro brains is lower than the average of the brains of the Whites. With regard to many characteristics of this kind, we find that the difference between the averages of different races is insignificant as compared to the range of variability that occurs within each
race.

An

additional point should be considered in connection with this phecharacteristics of the

nomenon. Most of the anatomical

throughout adult
individual at
life,

body

are stable

until senile degeneration begins.

On

the other hand,

physiological and psychological functions are not the

all

times.

and particularly

same in the same They vary strongly with environmental conditions with different demands made upon the organism. The
and psychological responses
is

variability of physiological

therefore

much

greater than the variability of anatomical form, because the

two former
in various

combine the
comparing

variability

due to the difference in the functioning

individuals with the variations of response under varying conditions.

racial types

When

we must

therefore avoid expressing a difference

of types simply as a difference of averages.

Another point must be considered which may be

illustrated

by an ex-

ample. Let us assume that in one area the color of the hair varies from
black to dark brown with an average value on a certain definite shade,

and that

in another population the color of the hair varies

from dark blond

this

to very light blond with

an average on a certain shade of blond. In

all.

case the two distributions will not overlap at

On

the other hand, let

us assume that

we have two populations with

the

brown and

of blond as before, but in the one a variation

same average shades of which begins

with black and extends into blond shades, and in the other a pigmentation which begins with a very dark brown and extends into very light blond, so that the two overlap. Obviously the two differences will not impress us as the same, notwithstanding the fact that the two averages remain the same. It is therefore indispensable that in an investigation of this kind the significance of the difference between two populations should be clearly expressed, and that the impression should be avoided that the difference between racial types is identical with the difference between individuals. Still another point deserves attention. Many writers assume that an individual of a certain type represents the same biological type regardless of the racial group to which he belongs. To give an example: a round-headed person of the Tyrols is equated with a round-headed person of southern

424
Italy, at least in

FRANZ BOAS
so far as the form of the head
is

concerned.

Even

if

we

assume that the round-headedness of the two individuals is of the same kind, this inference is not tenable. It is true that by chance the two individuals may belong to the same lines of descent, but a study of a series of homologous individuals shows that genetically, and therefore physiologically, they are not the same notwithstanding the sameness of the particular trait that is

made

the subject of study.

When we

select, for instance,

individuals with the

same head index of 82

in a population that has the

average head index of 85, the children of the selected group wiU be found

have an average head index of 84; when we select individuals with the same head index of 82 in a population that has the average head index of about 79, the children of the selected group will be found to have an average head index of about 80, for the reason that there will be in each case reversions to the average type of the population to which the selected group belongs. In other words, the individuals which are selected from any population must always be considered as part of this population and cannot be studied as though they were an independent group.
to

EUGENICS

One
gations

of the reasons for the special stress that

is

is

laid

upon race

investi-

the fear of race degeneration. It

is

assumed that the intermixture

between

different racial types

and the rapid increase of the poorest part

of the population have a deteriorating effect

upon

the nation. In the intro-

ductory remarks

have

tried to

show

that there

is little

reason to believe

that racial intermixture of the kind occurring in the United States at the

present time should have a deteriorating effect. I do not believe that

it

has been adequately proved that there is a clearly marked tendency toward general degeneration among all civilized nations. In modern society the conditions of life have become more varied than those of former periods. While some groups live under most favorable conditions that require active use of body and mind, others live in abject poverty and their activities have more than ever before been degraded to those of machines. At the same time the variety of human activities is much greater

than

it

used to be.

It is therefore quite intelligible that

the functional actividifferentiation,

ties of

each nation must show an increased degree of

higher degree of variability.

Even

if

the general average of the mental and

physical types should remain the same, there must be a larger

number

now than

formerly

a larger number

who fall below a certain given low standard, and also who can exceed a given high standard. The number of

defectives can be counted

insanity, but there is

by statistics of poor relief, delinquency, and no way of determining the increase of those individuals who are raised above the norm of a higher standard, and they
It

escape our notice.

may

therefore very well be that the

number

of de-

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

S.

425

fectives increases without influencing the value of a population as a whole,

because

it is

merely an expression of an increased degree of variabihty.

Furthermore, arbitrarily selected absolute standards of value do not

retain their significance.

be made, the degree of

greater than

no change in the absolute standard should physical and mental energy required under modern
if

Even

minimum of achievement is due to the greater complexity of our life and to the increasing number of competing individuals. Greater capacity is required to attain a high degree of prominence than was needed in other periods of our history. The claim that we have to contend against national degeneracy must, therefore, be better substantiated than it is now. The problem is further complicated by the advance in public hygiene which has resulted in lowering infant mortahty and has thus brought about a change in the composition of the population, in so far as many who would have succumbed to deleterious conditions in early years enter into the adult population and must have an influence upon the general disconditions to keep oneself above a certain
it

used to be. This

is

tribution of vitality.

Notwithstanding the doubtful basis of

to degeneracy, the

many

of the assertions relating

problem of eugenics is clearly before the public, and the investigation of racial and social types cannot be separated from the practical aims involved in the eugenic movement. The fundamental thought underlying eugenic theory is that no environmental influences can modify those characteristics which are determined by hereditary nature. Nurture, it is said, cannot overcome nature. We should recaU here what has been said before regarding the difference between the characteristics of hereditary strains and those of races, and that whUe it is true that strains differ greatly in physical and mental
vigor and in specific characteristics,
it

is

not equally true of races as a

in all these characteris-

whole, because strains which are very

tics are

much aUke

found in every single race. Even if it is not possible to prove with absolute certainty the complete identity in mental traits of selected strains belonging to races as diverse as Europeans and Negroes, there is not the slightest doubt that such identity prevails among the various European types. Eugenics, therefore, cannot have any possible meaning with regard to whole races. It can have a meaning only with regard to strains. K the task of the eugenist were the selection of that third of humanity representing the best strains, he would find his material among all European and Asiatic types, and very probably among all races of man; and all would
contribute to the less valuable two-thirds.

sometimes claimed that closely allied animal types are so different in their physical make-up and mental characteristics that members of one race can be clearly differentiated from those of another race. It is, for instance, said that the race horse and the
objection to this point of view
it is

As an

heavy dray horse are so

different in character that

no matter what may be

426

FRANZ BOAS

done to the dray horse its descendants can never be transformed into race is undoubtedly true, but the paralleHsm between the races of dray horses and race horses on the one hand and human races on the other is incorrect. The races of horses are developed by careful selection, by means of which physical and mental characteristics are fixed in each separate strain, while in human races no such selection occurs. We have rather a racial panmixture, which brings it about that the racial characterhorses. This
istics

are distributed irregularly

fact,

among

all

the different famihes.

As

matter of not to

dray horses and race horses correspond to family strains,

races,

human

and the comparison

is

valid only in so far as race

horses and dray horses are compared to the characteristics of certain

family lines, not to

the

human

races as a whole. In Johannsen's terminology

human
this

races are to a

much

greater extent phenotypes than races of

domesticated animals.

For

reason the task of eugenics cannot be to devise means to sup-

press some races and to favor the development of others. It must rather be directed to the discovery of methods which favor the development of
the desirable strains in every race.

This problem can be attacked only after the solution of two questions.
First of
all,

secondly,

regard to

we have to decide what are the desirable characteristics; and we must determine what characteristics are hereditary. With the former question, we shall all agree that physical health is one

of the fundamental qualities to be desired; but there will always be funda-

mental disagreement as to what mental qualities are considered desirable

whether an

intense intellectuaUsm

and a repression of emotionalism or

preferable. Obviously,
fit

a healthy development of emotional

impossible to lay

life is

it is

quite

down

a standard that will

every person, every place,

and every time, and for this reason the application of eugenic measures should be restricted to the development of physical and mental health. Even if it were possible to control human mating in such a way that strains with certain mental characteristics could be developed, it would seem entirely unjustifiable for our generation to impose upon future times ideals that some of us may consider desirable. It might furthermore be questioned whether the interests of humanity will be better served by eliminating all abnormal strains which, as history shows, have produced a number of great men who have contributed to the best that mankind has done, or by carrying the burden of the unfit for the sake of the few valuable individuals that may spring from them. These, of course, are not scientific questions, but social and ethical problems. For the practical development of eugenics it is indispensable to determine what is hereditary and what is not. The ordinary method of determining heredity is to investigate the recurrence of the same phenomenon among a number of successive generations. If, for instance, it can be

shown

that color-blindness occurs in successive generations, or that cer-

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

tain malformations like polydactylism are

S.

427

found repeatedly in the same

family, or that multiple births are characteristic of certain strains,

we con-

clude that these are due to hereditary causes; and

these similarities also are due to heredity. It

if

parents and children

have the same head form or the same or similar statures, we decide that must be recognized that in
of these cases alternative explanations are conceivable.
If,

many

for in-

under certain economic conditions which are repeated among parents and children, and if these economic conditions have
stance, a family lives

a direct influence

upon the

size of the

body, the similarity of stature of

If

parents and children would be due to environment and not to heredity.

endemic in a certain locality and occurs among parents and children, this is not due to heredity but to the locality which they inhabit. In other words, wherever the environmental conditions have a marked influence upon bodily characteristics, and wherever these environmental conditions continue for a number of generations, they have an effect that
a disease
is

is

apparently identical with that of heredity. In

it is

many

cases the causes are

so obvious that

easy to exclude persistence of characteristics due to

is

environment. Under other conditions the determination of the causes not so easy.
It is stiU

features.

more difficult to For example, if a

differentiate

child before birth should

between heredity and congenital be infected by its

it is

mother, there might be the impression of a hereditary disease, which, however,

is

actuaUy only congenital in the sense that

not inherent in the

germ plasm. Although the distinction between environmental causes as previously defined and hereditary causes is generally fairly easy, the distinction between congenital causes and true hereditary causes
structure of the
is

exceedingly

difficult, in

many

cases impossible.

The long continued

dis-

cussions relating to hereditary transmission of disease are a case in point.

Most

of these questions cannot be solved

by

statistical inquiries,

but re-

quire the most careful biological investigation.

are such that

The

conditions, however,

we must demand

in every case a clear differentiation

among

these three causes.

There

is little

doubt that in the modern eugenic movement the assump-

tion of hereditary transmission as a cause of defects has been exaggerated.

Although certain mental defects that occur among weU-to-do families seem to be determined by heredity, the mental defects generally included
in eugenic studies are of such a character that

many

of

them may
situated

readily

be recognized as due to social conditions rather than as expressing specific

hereditary
tected
traits.

weakling

who

is

economically

weU

is

pro-

teristics

from many whose economic condition

of the dangers that beset an individual of similar characis

not so favorable, and

it

must be

admitted that criminality in famihes that

are at the same time struggling for the determined by social conditions as by heredity. Investigators of criminal

may be mentaUy weak and which barest subsistence is at least as much

428
families

FRANZ BOAS

have succeeded in showing frequencies of occurrence of criminality which are analogous to frequencies which may be due to heredity, but they have failed to show that these frequencies may not as well be explained either wholly or in part by environmental conditions. We should be willing to admit that among the poor undernourished population, which is at the same time badly housed and suffers from other unfavorable conditions of life, congenital weakness may develop which lowers the resistance of the individual against all forms of delinquency. Whether this weakness is hereditary or congenital is, however, an entirely different question. Experiments made with generations of underfed rats^^ suggest that a strain of rats which has deteriorated by underfeeding can be fed up by a careful amelioration of conditions of Ufe, and it may well be questioned whether delinquent strains in man may not be improved in a similar way. Certainly the history of the criminals deported to Australia and of their
is very much in favor of such a theory. In other words, it seems very Ukely that the condition of our subnormal population is not by any means solely determined by heredity, but that careful investigations are required to discriminate between environmental, congenital, and heredi-

descendants

tary causes.

FORMULATION OF PROBLEM

From
States.

the preceding discussion,

we may

formulate the principal prob-

lems that must be taken up in a study of the population of the United

We

have to investigate

first

the degree of homogeneity of the popu-

lation; second, the hereditary characteristics of the existing lines; third, the

influence of environment; fourth, the influences of selection.

of the data thus collected,
differences
results

On

the basis

we have between various types, and investigate the bearing that our may have upon pubHc policies.
to interpret the significance of the

The study
ment must
of the
also

of the adult population alone

would not give us adequate

data to enable us to clear

body

up

the causes which determine the final develop-

the events which take place during the period of growth

be taken into consideration.

is

Familiarity with the bodily forms of children

necessary also from a

morphological point of view.

is

On

the whole, the development of individuals

divergent, so that the

most

characteristic

forms of each type are found

in the adult male.

The

adult female forms are not quite so divergent, per-

haps in part for the reason that the period of development of the female is shorter than that of the male, although it must be remembered that secondary sexual characteristics are present in childhood. The younger the human form that we investigate, the less clearly are racial characteristics expressed. We may, therefore, say that the most generalized forms of a racial type will be found in the infant or, even stUl more clearly, in pre11

Helen Dean King, Studies on Inbreeding (Wistar

Institute,

1919).

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

natal stages, while the
in the

S.

429

male

adult.

most highly specialized local forms will be found knowledge of the specialized forms ought to include,
it is

therefore, a study of progressive differentiation. Particularly for the study

of the influences of environment

indispensable that the development

be studied while the influences are still work. We have to know the conditions which bring about retardation at or acceleration in the development of various parts of the body, and their ultimate effects upon the human form. We must study other minute changes
of the
in childhood should

body

that

may

may

perhaps not be related to retardation or acceleration, but that be due to a direct effect of environmental causes. In the adult these

changes have been completed and can no longer be subjected to analysis, while in the growing child, their gradual development and unfolding may

be observed.

The same
form,
it

is

true with regard to selection. If selection

is

related to bodily

wiU probably
It

act with particular intensity during the early years

of childhood.

might be revealed by a comparison of the surviving and

it

dying parts of the population of various ages.

These considerations make

quite necessary to include in the study

of the population, not only adults, but also children.

One method

of approach should consist, therefore, in the study of the

classified

growth and development of children,

geographical and social environment.

according to descent and were feasible to include records of the longevity of the individuals measured in childhood, the problem of selection could also be attacked. In the study of adults a careful classification according to descent and social position will be necessary. The phenomena of homogeneity and of heredity make it necessary that the investigation should not be confined to studies of individuals, but that the anatomical characteristics of famihes should be made the subject of
If it

inquiry.

For the study of the influence of environment the investigation of growis, if anything, more important than for the investigation of racial characteristics. After the adult stage has been reached environment wiU not exert any further influence. The earUer in life the investigation can begin, the more Mkely we are to obtain adequate results. In this investigation the generalizing method of comparing local types
ing children
is of little use, because in order to estaban influence of environmental causes, we must be certain that the hereditary composition of the populations which we study is the same. For instance, when we compare a rural and an urban community,

or types presented in social strata

lish definitely

there is nothing that wiU guarantee to us that both populations are derived from the same ancestry. On the contrary, we may assume that the urban population is drawn from a wider group than the rural population. In the same way, when we compare the inhabitants of a long secluded valley and find differences in bodily form between the people living in the lower part

430
and those
living in the

FRANZ BOAS
upper
is

would arise whether the same and whether the people in the upper regions have not been more isolated than those farther down. It is on the whole easier to exclude obvious environmental influences in an investigapart, the question

ancestry of the two groups

the

tion of racial types than to exclude differences of racial descent in studies

of the influence of environment.

plications
is

The only way

to escape

by confining the

studies strictly to a

from these comcomparison between

parents and children.

It

has been explained before that in a number of cases

traits

we may

find

parents and their

which may be deduced from and which nevertheless are primarily due to environmental causes. If we should find, for instance, a low stature among individuals who have been undernourished as children, and if the next generation will also be undernourished, we may have an apparent similarity in stature which is not due primarily to heredity, but rather to the fact that the same environmental causes act upon the parental group and upon the group of children. In most cases these elements cannot be eliminated unless we have the opportunity to study the same racial type in different forms of environment. It has been stated before that a modification of bodily form due to environment which is observed by comparing parents and their children does
apparent hereditary
the similarity of

own

children,

not contradict the

phenomena

of heredity. If

we

find, for instance, that the

is

stature of Jewish immigrants into the United States

their children, the hereditary stability of stature

lower than that of

wiU nevertheless manifest itself. The children of an exceptionally taU couple who exceed the average stature of the immigrant Jew by a certain amount may be expected to show an excess of stature which is correlated to the excess of stature of the parents, which, however, has to be added to the increased average stature of the children of immigrants. In short, a change in type due to environmental influences simply means that the correlated deviations in the group of parents and of children must be reckoned from the point which is typical
for the generation in question.

In some cases in which the environmental influences are very strong, a

generalizing
tion of

method may give adequate results. Bowditch, in Boston children, was able to show that Irish children

his investigadiffer in their

development according to the economic condition of the parents, and there is little reason to doubt the uniformity of the genetic composition of his various Irish groups. But whenever the differences involved are sF.ght, and

when

they

may be
.
.

equally well explained

on the

basis of difference in

genetic composition, the comparison between parents

and children

is

indis-

pensable.

At

the present time

it is

unknown

to

what extent the influences of en-

vironment

may

determine bodily form. Notwithstanding the numerous

claims of the fundamental effect of climate

upon

the

body of man, we have

Anthropometric Investigation of the Population of the U.

S.

431

no evidence whatever that will show that pigmentation undergoes fundamental changes under climatic conditions; that the White race would become darker in the tropics; or that the Negroes would become lighter in the north. Whatever statistics we have on this subject show rather a remarkable stability of pigmentation. We have not even any definite indication that the pigmentation of the hair undergoes changes

under different

climatic conditions, although in this case the change in color

from the
very well

period of childhood until middle

life is

so great that

we might

expect environmental influences to express themselves.

On

the other hand,

we know
fluences,

that the bulk of the

body

is

very susceptible to environmental in-

and

it is

but natural that retardation or acceleration during the

its effect upon those proportions of the body which depend upon bulk. Other changes which occur very early in life are not so easily explained. I think the evidence showing that the form of the head is susceptible to environmental influences is incontrovertible. I also believe that adequate proof has been given for modifications in the width of the face under changed conditions of hfe. The causes of these changes are stiU entirely obscure. It may well be, as suggested by Harvey

period of growth will also leave

Gushing, that chemical changes occur under

new environmental

conditions

and unequally influence growth in

different types of environment. If

different directions. This

would agree
do

with the changes in chemical constitution found in lower animals hving in

it

is

true that changes of this kind

occur and modify the form of body so fundamentally that according to

the ordinary schemes of classification a people might be

removed from one

group and placed in another one, then

of the instability of the

we

have to consider the investigation

one of

body under varying environmental conditions as the most fundamental subjects to be considered in an anthropo-

metric study of our population.

ALES HRDLICKA
(1869-1943)

Ales Hrdlicka was a physical anthropologist

ciated with the National
his efforts that the

who

liked bones.

He was

asso-

Museum from 1903

until his death. It

was through
which

Museum's

collections of physical anthropology,

are regarded as the most complete of their kind, were built up. This

was

only one of the varied activities of his long career devoted to building the science of physical anthropology in America.

Hrdlicka was born in Czechoslovakia (then Bohemia), received his ele-

mentary education
family to

in public schools of his native city, at the

and came with

his

age of thirteen. He was working in a tobacco factory when a physician who attended him in a serious illness persuaded

New York

and made it possible for him to do so. After gradufrom the Eclectic Medical College and the New York Homeopathic Medical College, he accepted a research position in a state hospital for the insane, where he began to accumulate anthropometric data. He accompanied Lumholz (an anthropologist working on problems of northern Mexican ethnology for the American Museum of Natural History) on his last trip to Mexico, an experience which decided the course of his life. He resigned from the hospital and thenceforth devoted himself to the problems

him

to study medicine

ating

of physical anthropology.

Hrdlicka

made a number

Museum

of Natural History,

antiquity of

man

in

of trips to the Southwest for the American and became interested in the problem of the America. His views, considered unorthodox at the time,
later discoveries.

were supported by

The problem
all

of the evolution of

man

attracted

him

next.

He examined

the existing skeletal remains of early

man and
titles.

published a compre-

an indefatigable worker; his He founded the American Association of Physical Anthropologists, and the American Journal of Physical Anthropology, which he edited for a quarter of a century. A
bibliography contains over three hundred
physical anthropologist of the old school, he deplored the application of

hensive monograph on the subject.

He was

modern

statistical

methods

to anthropological problems,

and therefore was

out of step with one important line of development. In other ways, too, he belonged to another age.
tipathy to

women

in science

He had a strong anand avoided any contact with them. He is

432

Origin of the American Aborigines

433
meeting in which the sexual be-

known

to

have walked out of a

scientific

havior of monkeys was being discussed. For all of his propagandizing for physical anthropology, he was probably happiest when he was studying
bones.

^R.L.B.

Origin of the American Aborigines

WHEN COLUMBUS
imagined, as
is

DISCOVERED THE

NEW WORLD HE AND

had reached

HIS

COMPANIONS

well known, that they

India,

and the people

met were
the

naturally taken for natives of India. Later, as the true nature of

better known, speculations concerning the newly discovered race took other directions, and some of the notions developed proved disastrous to the Indians. History tells us that many of the early

new land became

up to Las Casas' time, reached the conclusion that, as no menwas made concerning the American people in Hebrew traditions, they could not strictly be regarded as men, equivalent to those named in biblical accounts, and this view, which eventually had to be counteracted by a special papal bull, led directly or indirectly to wholesale enslavement and
Spaniards,
tion

destruction of the Americans.

was that thenceforth the origin of and the seeming necessity of harmonizing this origin with biblical knowledge led eventually to several curious opinions. One of these, held by Gomara, Lerius, and Lescarbot, was to the effect that the American aborigines were the descendants of the Canaanites who were expelled from their original abode by Joshua; another, held especially by Mcintosh,^ was that they were descended from Asiatics who themselves originated from Magog, the second son of Japhet; but the most widespread theory, and one with the remnants of which we meet to this day, was that the American Indians represented the so-called
of the effects of this papal edict

One

the Indians

was sought

in other parts of the world,

Lost Tribes of

Israel.^

During the course of the 19th century, with Leveque, Humboldt,^ McCuUogh,^ Morton,^ and especially Quatrefages,^ we begin to encounter

From
XIV, N.
1

Hrdlicka, "Origin of the American Aborigines," American Anthropologist,

S.,

(1912), pp. 5-12.

J., Origin of the North American Indians, New York, 1843. History of the North American Indians, London, 1775. 3 Humboldt, Political Essay, I, 115; Humboldt and Bonpland, Voyage, Vue des Cordilleras, Paris, 1810. 4 McCullogh, Researches, Philosophical and Antiquarian, Concerning the Aboriginal History of America, Baltimore, 1829. 5 Morton, S. G., Distinctive Characteristics of the Aboriginal Race of America, 2d ed., pp. 35-36, Philadelphia, 1844. (Also his Crania Americana, and Origin of the

Mcintosh,
J.,

2 Adair,

Human

Species.)

6 Quatrefages, Histoire generale

des races humaines, Paris, 1887.

434

ALES HRDLICKA
rational hypotheses concerning the Indians, although

by no means a Lord Kaimes, Morton, and Nott and Gliddon"^ professed the belief that the American natives originated in the New World and hence were truly autochthonous; Grotius believed that Yucatan had been peopled by early Christian Ethiopians; according to Mitchell the ancestors of the Indians came to this country partly from the Pacific ocean and partly from northeastern Asia; the erudite Dr. McCullough believed that the Indians originated from parts of different peoples who reached America over lost land from the west "when the surface of the earth allowed a free tran-

more

single opinion.

sit

for quadrupeds"; Quatrefages viewed the

Americans

as a conglomerate

people, resulting from the fossil race of

Lagoa

Santa, the race of Parana,

settlements of Polynesians;

which he believed there had been and according to Pickering the Indians originated partly from the Mongolian and partly from the Malay.
others, in addition to

and probably

The majority

of the authors of the last century, however, including

Humboldt, Brerewood, BeU, Swinton, Jefferson, Latham, Quatrefages, and Peschel,^ inclined to the belief that aU the American natives, excepting the Eskimo, were of one and the same race and that they were the descendants of immigrants from northeastern Asia, particularly from the "Tartars" or
Mongolians.
this

The most recent writers, with one marked exception, agree entirely that country was peopled through immigration and local multipUcation of

people; but the locality, nature, and time of the immigration are stiU

much

mooted

questions.

Some

authors incline to the exclusively northeastern

and Rivet, show a tendency to some parts of the native American population to the Polynesians; Brinton^ held that they came in ancient times over a land connection from Europe; and Kollmann,^" basing his belief on some small crania, believes that a dwarf race preceded the Indian
Asiatic origin; others, such as ten Kate

follow Quatrefages in attributing at least

in

America.

A
and

remarkable hypothesis concerning the origin of the American native

especially since the beginning of this century,

population, deserving a few words apart, has within the last thirty years,

been built up by AmegSouth American paleontologist. This hypothesis is, in brief, that man, not merely the American race, but mankind, originated in South
hino,^^ the

America; that

man became

differentiated in the southern continent into a

extinct; that from South America he migrated over ancient land connections to Africa, and from there

number

of species,

most of which are now

Nott and Gliddon, Types of Mankind, and Indigenous Races. (The latter includes statements by Leidy and Morton.) 8 Peschel, O., The Races of Man, p. 418, 1876. 8 Brinton, D. G., The American Race, New York, 1891. i** KoUmann, J., Die Pygmden (Verh. d. Naturforsch. Ges. Basel, xvi, Basel, 1902). 11 Ameghino, F., El Tetraprothomo Argentinus (Anal. Mus. Nac, xvi, Buenos Aires, 1907); also Le Diprothomo platensis (ibid., xix, 1909).
'^

Origin of the American Aborigines

435

all the Old World; that a strain from the remaining portion multiand spread over South America; and that eventually, somewhere in relatively recent times, a portion of that branch which peopled Africa and then Asia, migrated, by the northern route, into North America. In part this theory is also favored by Sergi. In addition there have been some suggestions that the Americans may have arrived from the "lost Atlantis"; and the theory has even been expressed that man, instead of migrating from northeastern Asia into America, may have moved in the opposite direction, and especially that, after peopling this continent, a part of the Americans reached Siberia. The Eskimo have been generally considered as apart from the Indian, some holding that they preceded and others that they followed him. They have been connected generally with the northeastern Asiatics, but there are also those who see a close original relation between the Eskimo and the Lapps, and even between the Eskimo and the paleolithic Europeans. These are, in brief, the various more or less speculative opinions that so far have been advanced in an effort to explain the ethnic identity and the place of origin of the American Indian; and it is only logical that the next word on these problems be given to physical anthropology, which deals with what are, on the whole, the least mutable parts of man, namely, his body and skeleton.

peopled
plied

THE BEARING OF PHYSICAL ANTHROPOLOGY ON THE PROBLEMS UNDER

CONSIDERATION

The somatology
at least

of the Indians, which barely

saw
the

its

beginnings in the

time of Humboldt and Morton, has

are possible.

now advanced

to such a degree that

some important generaUzations concerning

American aborigines
and skeletons

We

have

now

at

our disposal for comparison, in American

museums
from
all

alone,

upward

of twenty thousand Indian crania

parts of the continent, while several thousand similar specimens

collections.

are contained in
larly in

European North America, has

considerable advance, particuin studying the

also
less

been made

hving natives.

Unfortunately

we

are

much

advantageously situated in regard to comparticularly

parative skeletal material as well as with respect to data

from other parts of the world,

on the Uving from those parts where other

indications lead us to look for the origin of the Indian.

What can be stated in the light of present knowledge concerning the American native with a fair degree of positiveness is that, first, there is no acceptable evidence, or any probabiUty, that man originated on this continent; second, that man did not reach America until after attaining a
development superior to that of even the latest Pleistocene and after having undergone advanced and thorough stem and tribal differentiation; and third, that while man, since this continent was commenced, has developed numerous

man

in Europe, and even racial

the peopling of

secondary, sub-

436

ALES HRDLICKA
can not yet

racial, localized structural modifications, these modifications

be regarded as

fixed,

and

in

no important feature have they obliterated the

old type or types of the people.

We

are further in a position to state that, notwithstanding the various

to,

secondary physical modifications referred

the

American

natives, bar-

ring the most distantly related Eskimo, present throughout the Western Hemisphere numerous important features in common, which mark them plainly as parts of one stem of humanity. These features are:
1.

The

color of the skin.

The

color of the Indian differs, according to

solid chocolate, but the

locaUties,

from dusky yeUowish-white to that of prevailing color is brown.

2.

is black and straight; the beard on the sides of the face, and it is never long. There no hair on the body except in the axillae and on the pubis, and even there

The

hair of the Indian, as a rule,

is

scanty, especially

is
it

is

sparse.
3.

The Indian
is

is

generally free from characteristic odor. His heart-

beat

slow. His mental characteristics are

much

alike.

The

size of the

head and of the brain cavity is comparable throughout, averaging somewhat less than that of white men and women of similar stature. 4. The eyes as a rule are more or less dark brown in color, with dirty yellowish conjunctiva, and the eye-slits show a prevaihng tendency, more
or less noticeable in different tribes, to a slight upward slant, that
external canthi are frequently
5.
is,

the

more or

less higher
is

than the internal.

The

nasal bridge, at least in men,

throughout well developed, and

the nose in the living, as well as the nasal aperture in the skull (barring
individual

and a few localized exceptions), show medium or mesorhinic

relative proportions.

The malar

regions are as a rule rather large or promi-

nent.
6.

The mouth

is

generally fairly large, the lips average from

medium

to slightly fuller than in whites,

and the lower

facial region

shows through-

out a

medium

degree of prognathism, standing, like the relative proporwell developed.

tions of the nose, about

groes. The is compared with those of

chin

midway between those found in whites and neThe teeth are of medium size, when mankind in general, but perceptibly larger when
is,

contrasted with those of the white American; and the upper incisors are
characteristically shovel-shaped, that

deeply and peculiarly concave on

the buccal side.

7.

The

ears are large.

The neck,
are

thin; the chest

is

the

women

moderate length, and is never very somewhat deeper than in average whites; the breasts of of medium size and generally more or less conical in form.
as a rule, is of only

There is a complete absence of steatopygy; the lower limbs are less shapely and especially less full than in whites; the calf is small. 8. The hands and feet, as a rule, are of relatively moderate or even of

smaU dimensions, and what

is

among

the

most important of

all

the charac-

Origin of the American Aborigines

teristics,

ATil

the relative proportions of the forearms to arms and those of the

distal parts of the

lower limbs to the proximal (or, in the skeleton, the

radio-humeral and tibio-femoral indices), are in general, throughout the

two parts of the continent, of much the same average value, which differs from that of both the whites and the negroes, standing again in an intermediary position. This list of characteristics which are, generally speaking, shared by all American natives, could readily be extended, but the common features mentioned ought to be sufficient to make clear the fundamental unity of
the Indians.

The question

that necessarily follows

is,

"Which, among the

different

peoples of the globe, does the Indian, as here characterized, most re-

semble?" The answer, notwithstanding our imperfect knowledge, can be given conclusively. There is a great stem of humanity which embraces
people ranging from yellowish white to dark brown in color, with straight
black hair, scanty beard, hairless body, brown and often more or less
slanting eye, mesorhinic nose,
essential feature

medium prognathism, and

American
native;
nationalities

in every other

much hke

the

several races or types

and many

and and

this stem,
tribes,

embracing

occupies the

eastern half of the Asiatic continent and a large part of Polynesia.

From

the physical anthropologist's point of view everything indicates

that the origin of the American Indian is to be sought among the yeUowishbrown peoples mentioned. There are no two large branches of humanity on the globe that show closer fundamental physical relations. But difficulties arise when we endeavor to assign the origin of the Indian to some particular branch of the yellowish-brown population. We find that he stands quite as closely related to some of the Malaysian peoples as to the Tibetans, the Upper Yenisei natives, and some of the northeastern Asiatics. It is doubtless this fact that accounts for some of the hypotheses

concerning the origin of the Indian that attribute his derivation partly to
the "Tartars"

and

partly to the Polynesians.

AU
all

that

may be

said

on

this

occasion

is

that the circumstances point

strongly to a coming, not strictly a migration, over land, ice, water, or

by

these media combined, from northeastern Asia,

of relatively

smaU

parties,

and to comings repeated probably nearly to the beginning of the

historic period.

As

to Polynesian migrations within the Pacific, such were, so far as can

all

be determined,
doubtless
cultures. It

relatively recent,

having taken place when America

had already a
is,

large population

and had developed several native

if

however, probable that after spreading over the islands,

small parties of Polynesians

may have who

accidentally reached America;

so,

they

may have

modified in some respects the native culture, but physically,

received them (barring their probably

being radically like the people

438

ALES HRDLICKA
readily blend with the Indian

more recent negro mixture), they would

and
the
their

progeny could not be distinguished.

The conclusions, therefore, are that the American natives represent in main a single stem or strain of people, one homotype; that this stem is the same as that of the yellow-brown races of Asia and Polynesia; and that the main immigration of the Americans has taken place gradually by the northwestern route, in the Holocene period, and after man had reached
a relatively high stage of development and multiple racial differentiation.

The immigration,
flow, likely

in all probability, was a dribbling and prolonged overdue to pressure from behind and a search for better hunting and fishing grounds. This was followed by rapid multiplication, spread, and numerous minor differentiations of the people on the new, vast, and
It is

environmentally highly varied continent.

also probable that the western

was on more than one occasion reached by small parties of Polynesians, and that the eastern coast was similarly reached by small groups of whites; but these accretions
coast of America, within the last two thousand years,

have not modified

greatly,

if

at

all,

the

mass of the native population.

EDWARD

SAPIR

(1884-1939)

Of

the students

whom Boas
in

attracted,

none was more

brilliant
this

than

Edward

Sapir.

He was

born

Lauenberg, Germany, and came to

five years old.

country with

his parents

when he was

He grew up

as a poor boy on

New

York's Lower East Side, in the ghetto that produced so

many

distinguished

scholars. All doors opened to the brilliant child; private schools and Columbia University welcomed him. After a year of graduate work in Germanics and linguistics, he began the study of primitive languages and this held him. From his Indo-European studies he learned a method which was to serve him well later when he embarked seriously on comparative work. But at the beginning, it was the phenomenon of language itself that intrigued him the function of language in organizing thought, its perfection as a closed system, and the excitement of bringing logical order out of the chaos of sounds of unrecorded language. He worked by flashes of intuition, which he then worried like a dog with a bone until things

fell

into place.
little

Sapir had

taste for the

kind of ethnological research that was curdisliked field

rent in the pre-war years.

boring.

He

He was

dissatisfied with the

work and found monographs answers ethnologists found to their

problems; however insightful, they lacked the completeness and self-proving

perfection of

good

linguistic analysis.

He had

announced

to a

seminar in Chicago that he proposed

an impish humor; he once to conduct a seminar

especially irritated

in sloppy ethnology. This

was

at a time

when he was

with Boas for not accepting, without proof, his wildest suggestions of
linguistic relationships,

such as Athabascan with Thibetan.

deeply involved with problems of psy-

As he became more and more

ethnology with

chology and personality, he grew increasingly impatient with classical

its normative statements: "The Navaho do thus and so." two individuals have precisely the same life experience, how then can they share the same culture? He was fond of saying, "There are as many cultures as there are individuals." He proclaimed the study of the individual as the proper study of anthropologists. He welcomed to his circle the younger

No

students of

Boas as well as those

little;

whom

worried Boas not a

he

felt that his

he had trained in Chicago. This most promising students were

439

EDWARD SAPIR

440

being lured from the straight and narrow path of methodological purity. Sapir heralded a new kind of ethnology. But he himself never entered
into the new land he marked out for others. He remained caught in a dilemma: Where does individual behavior end and culture take over? His position was analogous to that of the generation of anthropologists who had
first

discovered the infinite variety of

human

ized, as did Bastian, the "appalling

manifestations.

R.L.B

cultures, and had not yet realmonotony" underlying the variety of

The Grammarian and His Language

THE NORMAL MAN OF INTELLIGENCE HAS SOMETHING OF A CONTEMPT FOR linguistic studies, convinced as he is that nothing can well be more useless. Such minor usefulness as he concedes to them is of a purely
instrumental nature. French
is worth studying because there are French books which are worth reading. Greek is worth studying if it is because a few plays and a few passages of verse, written in that curious and extinct vernacular, have still the power to disturb our hearts if

indeed they have. For the

rest,

there are excellent translations.

is

Now

it

is

a notorious fact that the Unguist

the

not necessarily deeply has

interested

in

abiding things

that

language

done for

us.

He

handles languages very

ogist

much

as the zoologist handles dogs.

The

zool-

examines the dog carefully, then he dissects him in order to examine him stiU more carefully, and finally, noting resemblances between him and his cousins, the wolf and the fox, and differences between him and his more distant relations like the cat and the bear, he assigns him his place in the evolutionary scheme of animated nature, and has done. Only as a polite visitor, not as a zoologist, is he even mildly interested in Towzer's sweet parlor tricks, however fully he may recognize the fact that these tricks could never have evolved unless the dog had evolved first. To return to the philologist and the layman by whom he is judged, it is a precisely parallel indifference to the beauty wrought by the instrument which nettles the judge. And yet the cases are not altogether parallel.

When Towzer

has performed his tricks and when Porto has saved the drowning man's life, they relapse, it is true, into the status of mere dog but even the zoologist's dog is of interest to all of us. But when AchiUes has bewailed the death of his beloved Patroclus and Clytaemnestra has done her worst, what are we to do with the Greek aorists that are left on our hands? There is a traditional mode of procedure which arranges them

From Sapir, pp. 150-159.

"The Grammarian and

his

Language," American Mercury (1924),

The Grammarian and His Language

441

into patterns. It is called grammar. The man who is in charge of grammar and is called a grammarian is regarded by all plain men as a frigid and dehumanized pedant.
It
is not difl&cult to understand the very paUid status of linguistics America. The purely instrumental usefulness of language study is
is

in

recognized, of course, but there

that daily concern with foreign

not and cannot be in this country

continent of

modes of expression so natural on the Europe, where a number of languages jostle each other in
In the absence of a strong practical motive for linguistic remoter,

everyday
pursuits

life.

the

more
it

theoretical,

motives

are

hardly given
to

the

opportunity to flower. But

would be a profound mistake

for
all

ascribe

our current indifference to philological matters entirely to the fact that

English
alone does well enough
itself,

practical

purposes.

There

is

something about language

that offends the

or rather about linguistic differences,

American

spirit.

That
if

spirit is rationalistic

to the very

marrow

of

its

bone. Consciously,

not unconsciously,

we

are inclined

to impatience with

give a four-square reckoning of itself in terms of reason

any object or idea or system of things which cannot and purpose.

pervading our whole
scientific

We

can see

this

spirit

outlook.

If

psyis

chology and sociology are popular sciences in America today, that

mainly due to the prevailing feeling that they are convertible into the
cash value of effective education, effective advertising, and social better-

ment. Even here, there

ful
If

is,

to

psychological truth which will

an American, something immoral about a not do pedagogical duty, something wastelanguage,

it is

about a sociological item which can be neither applied nor condemned.

we

apply the rationalistic

all,

test to

found singularly wantall

ing.

After

language
tells

is

merely a level to get thoughts "across." Our

business instinct

us that the multipHcation of levers,

it

busy on the
is

same
is

job, is

poor economy. Thus one way of "spitting

out"

as

good

as another. If other nationalities find themselves using other levers, that

their affair.

The

fact of language, in other words, is

an unavoidable

irrelevance, not a

problem to intrigue the inquiring mind.

There are two ways, it seems, to give Unguistics its requisite dignity may be treated as history or it may be studied descriptively and comparatively as form. Neither point of view augurs well for the arousing of American interest. History has always to be something else before it is taken seriously. Otherwise it is "mere" history.
as a science. It
If

we could show

that certain general linguistic changes are correlated

with stages of cultural evolution,

the

we would come

appreciably nearer

securing linguistics a hearing, but the slow modifications that eat into

substance and the form of speech and that gradually remold

it

any scheme of cultural evolution yet proposed. Since "biological" or evolutionary history is the only kind of history for which we have a genuine respect, the history of language
entirely

do not seem

to run parallel to

442
is left

EDWARD SAPIR
out in the cold as another one of those unnecessary sequences of

events which

German

erudition

is

in the habit of worrying about.

But before pinning our

form,

faith

to

Unguistics

as

an exploration into
is

we might

cast an appealing glance at the psychologist, for he

ally.

likely to

prove a useful

He

has himself looked into the subject of

yet not so
specialized

language, which he finds to be a kind of "behavior," a rather specialized type of functional adaptation,

but that

it

may be
further,

declared to be a series of laryngeal habits.

if

We may

we

select the right

its

kind of psychologist to help us,

go even and have

thought put in

place as a merely "subvocal laryngeating." If these

psychological contributions to the nature of speech do not altogether

explain the Greek aorists bequeathed to us by classical poets, they are
at any rate very flattering to philology. Unfortunately the philologist cannot linger long with the psychologist's rough and ready mechanisms.

These
it

may make

shift for

an introduction to his science, but his real

problems are such as few psychologists have clearly envisaged, though

is

not unlikely that psychology

it

may have much

to

say about them

when

has gained strength and delicacy. The psychological problem

interests the linguist
is

which most

the inner structure of language, in

terms of unconscious psychic processes,

ing,

not that of the individual's

It

adaptation to this traditionally conserved structure.

goes without say-

however, that the two problems are not independent of each other.
say in so

To

many words
it

that the noblest task of linguistics

is

to

understand languages as form rather than as function or as historical

process
is

not to say that

can be understood as form alone. The formal

is

configuration of speech at any particular time and place

the result of
is

a long and complex historical development, which, in turn,

gible without constant reference to functional factors.
liable

unintelli-

Form

is

even more

be stigmatized as "mere" than the historical process which For our characteristically pragmatic American attitude forms in themselves seem to have httle or no reality, and it is for this reason that we so often fail to divine them or to realize into what new patterns
to

shapes

it.

ideas

and
it is

institutions

are

balancing themselves or tending to

is

do

so.

Now

very probable that the poise which goes with culture

largely

intricacies of experience.

due to the habitual appreciation of the formal outlines and the formal Where life is tentative and experimental, where ideas and sentiments are constantly protruding gaunt elbows out of an
ing them to their

inherited stock of meagre, inflexible patterns instead of graciously bend-

own

uses,

form

is

necessarily felt as a
it

burden and a
it is

tyranny instead of the gentle embrace

should be. Perhaps

is

not too

much
the

to say that the lack of culture in

America

for the unpopularity of linguistic studies, for

some way responsible these demand at one and

in

same time an intense appreciation of a given form of expression and a

readiness to accept a great variety of possible forms.

The Grammarian and His Language

443
is
its

The outstanding
This
is

fact about

any language

formal completeness.
as of
cultures.

as true of a primitive language, like

Eskimo or Hottentot,

the carefully recorded

and standardized language of our great

I

By

"formal completeness"
is

mean

a profoundly significant peculiarity

well defined and exits

which
clusive

Each language has a phonetic system with which it carries on

easily overlooked.
all

work and, more

from which

than that,
potential,

of

its

expressions, from the most habitual to the merely

are fitted into a deft tracery of prepared forms

there

is

no escape. These forms

towards
all
is

establish a definite relational feehng or

attitude

all

possible contents of expression and, through them,

towards
perience

possible contents of experience, in so far, of course, as ex-

capable of expression in linguistic terms.

so constructed
that

To

put

this

matter

of the formal completeness of speech in somewhat different words,

we

may

say that a language

it

is

no matter what any

speaker of

may

desire to

communicate, no matter
is

how

original or

bizarre his idea or his fancy, the language

prepared to do his work.

He

will

never need to create

orientation

new formal

new forms

or to force
is

upon

his language a

unless,

poor man, he

and is one speech-system on the analogy of the other. The world of linguistic forms, held within the framework of a given language, is a complete system of reference, very much as a number system is a comfeeling of another language

haunted by the formsubtly driven to the unconscious dis-

tortion of the

plete system of quantitative reference or as a set of geometrical axes of

coordinates
space.

is

a complete system of reference to

is

all

points of a given
it

The mathematical analogy

by no means

as fanciful as
is

ap-

pears to be.

To

pass from one language to another

psychologically

parallel to passing

from one geometrical system of reference to another. is referred to is the same for either language; the world of points is the same in either frame of reference. But the formal method of approach to the expressed item of experience, as

The environing world which

to the given point of space,

is

so different that the resulting feeling of

in the two languages nor in the two frames of reference. Entirely distinct, or at least measurably distinct, formal adjustments have to be made and these differences have

orientation can be the

same neither

their psychological correlates.

Formal completeness has nothing

poverty of the vocabulary.
foreign
It
is

to

do with the richness or the

or,

sometimes convenient
their

for practical

reasons, necessary for the speakers of a language to

sources

as

the

range

of

borrow words from experience widens. They may

extend the meanings of words which they already possess, create

new

words out of native resources on the analogy of existing terms, or take over from another people terms to apply to the new conceptions which they are introducing. None of these processes affects the form of the language, any more than the enriching of a certain portion of space by

444
the introduction of

EDWARD
new
objects
affects

SAPIR
that

the

geometrical form

of

would be absurd to say that Kant's "Critique of Pure Reason" could be rendered forthwith into the unfamiliar accents of Eskimo or Hottentot, and yet it would be absurd in but a secondary degree. What is really meant is that the culture of these primitive folk has not advanced to the point where it is of interest to them to form abstract conceptions of a philosophical order. But it is not absurd to say that there is nothing in the formal pecuharities of Hottentot or of Eskimo which would obscure the indeed, it may be suspected clarity or hide the depth of Kant's thought that the highly synthetic and periodic structure of Eskimo would more easily bear the weight of Kant's terminology than his native German. Further, to move to a more positive vantage point, it is not absurd to say that both Hottentot and Eskimo possess all the formal apparatus
region as defined by an accepted
of reference. It

mode

that

is

required to serve as matrix for the expression of Kant's thought.

If these

languages have not the requisite Kantian vocabulary,

it

is

not

the languages that are to be

blamed but the Eskimo and the Hottentots

themselves.

The languages

as such are quite hospitable to the addition

of a philosophic load to their lexical stock-in-trade.

The unsophisticated

natives, having

no occasion
this

to speculate

on the

nature of causation, have probably no word that adequately translates

our philosophic term "causation," but

standpoint of linguistic form.
tion"
is

shortcoming
the

is

purely and

simply a matter of vocabulary and of no interest whatever from the

From

this

standpoint

term "causaillustrating

merely one out of an indefinite number of examples

a certain pattern of expression. Linguistically

form-feeling

"causation"

in other words, as regards

is

merely a particular way of expressing the

of such a

notion of "act of causing," the idea of a certain type of action conceived

of as a thing, an entity.
is

Now the form-feehng

Eskimo and
to
diflBculty in

word

as "causation"

perfectly familiar to

hundreds of other primitive lan-

guages.

They have no

expressing the idea of a certain activity,

say "laugh" or "speak" or "run," in terms of an entity, say "laughter" or

"speech" or "running."
not readily adapt
resolve
all

If the particular

language under consideration canit

itself to this

type of expression, what

can do

is

to

contexts in which such forms are used in other languages into pleasant to laugh," "one laughs with pleasure," and

other formal patterns that eventually do the same work. Hence, "laughter
is

pleasurable," "it

is

so on ad infinitum, are functionally equivalent expressions, but they canalize into entirely distinct form-feelings. All languages are set to

symbolic and expressive work that language

potentially.

is

The formal technique

of this

do all the good for, either actually or work is the secret of each

language.
It is

very important to get some notion of the nature of this form-

feeling,

which

is

implicit

in

all

language,

however bewilderingly

at


The Grammarian and His Language
variance

445

its actual manifestations may be in different types of speech. There are many knotty problems here and curiously elusive ones

that

it

will require the

combined resources of the

critical

linguist,

the logician,

the psychologist,

and the

philosopher to clear up for us. There

is one important matter that we must now dispose of. K the Eskimo and the Hottentot have no adequate notion of what we mean by causa-

tion,

does

it

follow that their languages are incapable of expressing the

causative relation? Certainly not. In English, in

we have

certain formal linguistic devices for passing

its

German, and in Greek from the primary

English to
fall,

act or state to

causative correspondent,

e.g.,

to

jell,

"to cause to fall"; wide, to widen;

German hangen,
to

"to hang, be sus-

pended"; h'dngen,
express
the

"to

hang,

cause

"to carry"; phoreo, "to cause to carry." causative

relation
is

Greek phero, feel and by no manner of means dependent

be
suspended";
this

Now

ability to

on an abiUty to conceive of causality as such. The latter ability is conscious and intellectual in character; it is laborious, like most conscious processes, and it is late in developing. The former abihty is unconscious and nonintellectual in character, exercises itself with great rapidity and with the utmost ease, and develops early in the Hfe of the race and of the individual. We have therefore no theoretical difficulty in finding that conceptions and relations which primitive folk are quite unable to master on the conscious plane are being unconsciously expressed in their languages

and, frequently, with the utmost nicety.

As a matter

of fact, the causative

relation,

which
is

is

expressed only fragmentarily in our modern European

primitive languages rendered with an absolutely

languages,

in

many

philosophic relentlessness. In Nootka, an Indian language of Vancouver

Island, there
is

no verb or verb form which has not

I

its

precise causative

counterpart.

Needless to say,
tance to

have chosen the concept of causality solely for the

sake of illustration, not because I attach an especial linguistic imporit.

Every language, we may conclude, possesses a complete and

is

psychologically satisfying formal orientation, but this orientation

felt in

the unconscious of

its

speakers

only

is

not actually, that

is,

consciously,

know by them. Our current psychology does

not seem altogether adequate to explain

usual to say that

the formation and transmission of such submerged formal systems as are

disclosed to us in the languages of the world. It
is

isolated linguistic responses are learned early in life

and

that,

as these

harden into fixed habits, formally analogous responses are made, when the need arises, in a purely mechanical manner, specific precedents pointing the way to new responses. We are sometimes told that these analogous responses are largely the result of reflection on the utihty
of the earlier ones, directly learned

methods of approach see nothing

in

from the social environment. Such the problem of linguistic form

446
beyond what
nail.
I
is

EDWARD SAPIR
involved in the more and more accurate control of a

certain set of muscles towards a desired end, say the

hammering

of a

can only believe that explanations of this type are seriously incomplete and that they fail to do justice to a certain innate striving for formal elaboration and expression and to an unconscious patterning
of sets of related elements of experience.

The kind
tuition" has

of mental processes that I

am now

referring to are, of course,

of that compelling

and

little

understood sort for which the

name

"in-

been suggested. Here is a field which psychology has barely touched but which it cannot ignore indefinitely. It is precisely because psychologists have not greatly ventured into these difl&cult reaches that they have so little of interest to offer in explanation of all those types of mental activity which lead to the problem of form, such as language, music, and mathematics. We have every reason to surmise that languages are the cultural deposits, as it were, of a vast and self-completing network of psychic processes which still remain to be clearly defined for us. Probably most linguists are convinced that the language-learning process,
particularly the acquisition of a feeling for the formal set of the language,
is

very largely unconscious and involves mechanisms that are quite distinct

in character

from

either sensation or reflection.

There

is

doubtless some-

thing deeper about our feeling for form than even the majority of art
theorists

have divined, and

study
will

it

is

not unreasonable to suppose that, as

refined,

psychological analysis becomes

linguistic

be

in the
this

psychology of intuition,
less

one of the greatest values of fight it may throw on the "intuition" being perhaps nothing more nor
unexpected

more

than the "feefing" for relations.

the

is no doubt that the critical study of language may also be of most curious and unexpected helpfulness to philosophy. Few philosophers have deigned to look into the morphologies of primitive languages nor have they given the structural peculiarities of their own speech more than a passing and perfunctory attention. When one has the riddle of the universe on his hands, such pursuits seem trivial

There

enough, yet when

of Latin
analysis

it

begins to be suspected that at least

some
of

solutions

of the great riddle are elaborately roundabout appHcations of the rules

or

German

or English grammar,

the

triviafity

linguistic

becomes

less certain.
is

To

a far greater extent than the philos-

opher has reafized, he

Ukely to become the dupe of his speech-forms,

which

is

equivalent to saying that the

mould

of his thought,

which

is

typically a linguistic

mould,

is

apt to be projected into his conception of

the world.

Thus innocent

Unguistic categories

may

take on the formi-

dable appearance of cosmic absolutes.

If only, therefore, to

save himself

from philosophic verbaUsm,

look
critically to the finguistic

it

would be well for the philosopher to foundations and limitations of his thought.

He would

then be spared the humiliating discovery that

many new

ideas.

The Grammarian and His Language

AAl
little

many

apparently brilliant philosophic conceptions, are

more than

rearrangements of familiar words in formally satisfying patterns. In their

recently published

work on "The Meaning

of

Meaning" Messrs. Ogden and

Richards have done philosophy a signal service in indicating

the formal slant of their habitual

how

readily

the most hardheaded thinkers have allowed themselves to be cajoled

by
all

mode

of expression. Perhaps the best

way

to get behind our thought processes

and to eliminate from them

is

the accidents or irrelevances due to their linguistic garb

to plunge into

the study of exotic

modes

of expression.

At any

rate, I

know

of

no

better

way

to kill spurious "entities."

This brings us to the nature of language as a symbolic system,

method

of referring to

all

possible types of experience.

The

natural or,

at any rate, the naive thing is to assume that when we wish to communicate a certain idea or impression, we make something like a rough and rapid inventory of the objective elements and relations involved in and that our it, that such an inventory or analysis is quite inevitable,
linguistic task consists

merely of the finding of the particular words and

object of the type that

groupings of words that correspond to the terms of the objective analysis.

Thus, when

we observe an

we caU

a "stone"

moving through space towards the earth, we involuntarily analyze the phenomenon into two concrete notions, that of a stone and that of an act of falling, and, relating these two notions to each other by certain formal methods proper to English, we declare that "the stone falls." We
assume, naively enough, that
properly be made.
this
is

about the only analysis that can

into the

And
to,

yet, if

we look

way

that other languages

take to express this very simple kind of impression,

we soon

realize

much may be added

In

subtracted from, or rearranged in our

how own form

of expression without materially altering our report of the physical fact.

German and

gender category

French we are compelled to assign "stone" to a ^perhaps the Freudians can teU us why this object is
in

one language, feminine in the other; in Chippewa we cannot express ourselves without bringing in the apparently irrelevant fact that a stone is an inanimate object. If we find gender beside the

mascuUne

in the

point, the Russians

may wonder why we

consider

it

necessary to specify

any other object for that matter, is conceived in a definite or an indefinite manner, why the difference between "the stone" and "a stone" matters. "Stone falls" is good enough for Lenin, as it was good enough for Cicero. And if we find barbarous
in every case whether a stone, or

the neglect of the distinction

of British

as

to

definiteness,

the Kwakiutl Indian

Columbia may sympathize with us but wonder why we do not go to a step further and indicate in some way whether the stone is visible or invisible to the speaker at the moment of speaking and whether it is nearest to the speaker, the person addressed, or some third party. "That would no doubt sound fine in Kwakiutl, but we are too

448
busy!"

EDWARD SAPIR

yet we insist on expressing the singularity of the falling where the Kwakiutl Indian, differing from the Chippewa, can generalize and make a statement which would apply equally well to one or several stones. Moreover, he need not specify the time of the fall. The Chinese get on with a minimum of explicit formal statement and content themselves with a frugal "stone fall." These differences of analysis, one may object, are merely formal; they do not invalidate the necessity of the fundamental concrete analysis of the situation into "stone" and what the stone does, which in this case is "fall." But this necessity, which we feel so strongly, is an illusion. In the Nootka language the combined impression of a stone falling is quite differently analyzed. The stone need not be specifically referred to, but a single word, a verb form, may be used which is in practice not essentially more ambiguous than our English sentence. This verb form consists of two main elements, the first indicating genobject,

And

movement or position of a stone or stonelike object, while the secrefers to downward direction. We can get some hint of the feeling of the Nootka word if we assume the existence of an intransitive verb "to stone," referring to the position or movement of a stonelike object. Then our sentence, "The stone falls," may be reassembled into someeral

ond

thing like "It stones down." In this type of expression the thing-quality
of the stone
is

implied in the generalized verbal element "to stone,"

is

while the specific kind of motion which

stone
falls
is

given us in experience

when a

conceived as separable into a generalized notion of the

more specific one of direction. In Nootka has no difficulty whatever in describing the fall of a stone, it has no verb that truly corresponds to our "fall." It would be possible to go on indefinitely with such examples of incommensurable analyses of experience in different languages. The upshot of it all would be to make very real to us a kind of relativity that is generally hidden from us by our naive acceptance of fixed habits of
of a class of objects and a

movement

other words, while

speech as guides to an objective understanding of the nature of experience. This

is

the relativity of concepts, or as

it

might be called, the

grasp as the

relativity of the

form of thought.

It is
is
it

not so
as

difl&cult to

physical relativity of Einstein nor

disturbing to our sense of

security as the psychological relativity of Jung,

which

is

barely beginning

to be understood, but
its

it is

perhaps more readily evaded than these. For

understanding the comparative data of linguistics are a sine qua non.

the appreciation of the relativity of the
linguistic study that is
fetters the

It is

form of thought which

is

results
it.

from

perhaps the most UberaUzing thing about

the spirit

What

mind and benumbs

ever the dogged acceptance

of absolutes.

To
and

a certain type of

mind

linguistics

has also that profoundly serene

in

satisfying quality

which inheres in mathematics and

music and

The Grammarian and His Language

449

which may be described as the creation out of simple elements of a selfcontained universe of forms. Linguistics has neither the sweep nor the instrumental power of mathematics, nor has it the universal aesthetic appeal of music. But under its crabbed, technical, appearance there lies hidden the same classical spirit, the same freedom in restraint, which animates mathematics and music at their purest. This spirit is antagonistic to the romanticism which is rampant in America today and which debauches so much of our science with its frenetic desire.

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
(1887-1949)

Leonard Bloomfield
istics of

is

credited by contemporary

linguists

with having

established the science of linguistics. His interest in the general character^

language rather than the specific features of particular languages

or groups of languages brought him closer to anthropologists than to the

specialists in linguistics of a generation ago. It is this interest, rather than

the fact that he devoted time to the study of a primitive language, Algonkian, that entitles

Bloomfield's

him to a place in a book on anthropology. an academic life. He was born life was uneventful

in

Chicago, and

there

is

a story that instruction in the Chicago school he

attended so bored him that he failed. Harvard, however, did not bore him,

and he was graduated in 1906, having majored in Germanic and Semitic languages. At the University of Wisconsin where he went as an assistant in the German department he met Eduard Prokosch who, he claimed, was
a major influence in turning his attention to problems of general linguistics. After receiving a Ph.D. from the University of Chicago he held a number
of teaching posts in Midwestern colleges.

He

joined the faculty at Yale

1940 and remained there until his death. While he was at Yale during World War II he became involved in the intensive language program of the United States Government. He had always been interested in the teaching of languages and early in his career had written a German grammar. Now he helped to set up the intensive
University in

language training courses which were to prove such a spectacular success,

and he contributed four manuals for use in the program. His book on Language which outlined his system of structural was published in 1933. R.L.B.

linguistics

450


The
Structure of

Language

451

The Structure of Language

PHONEMIC STRUCTURE
IN
universe; our habit of doing this

LANGUAGE WE ORDER AND CLASSIFY THE FLOWING PHENOMENA OF OUR is so pervasive that we cannot describe things as they may appear to an infant or a speechless animal. The price we pay is a sensible inadequacy of our speech, offset by the privilege of any degree of approximation such as may be seen in some microscopic investigation of science or in the work of the poet. It is the entire task of
is

the linguist to study the ordering and formalization which

language; he
distant

thus obtains the privilege of imagining

it

removed and catching a

language appears,
first

glimpse of the kind of universe which then remains.

The ordering and formalizing

in the fact that
its

effect of
all

of

all,

meaningful forms are

composed
this
flags,

of a small

number

of

meaningless elements.

We

should obtain, in

respect,

a parallel to

devised a code in which the exhibition of several flags (in the limiting case, of one flag) in a fixed position and arrangement would constitute a meaningful sign.
if,

language

with a dozen or so of different

we

The forms

of every language are

made up out

ranging perhaps between fifteen and seventy-five

of a small

number

of typical unit sounds

which have no meaning but, in certain fixed arrangements, make up the meaningful forms that are uttered. These signals are the phonemes of the language. The speakers have the habit of responding to the characteristic features of sound which in their language mark off the various phonemes and of ignoring aU other acoustic features of a speech. Thus, a German who has not been speciaUy trained will hear no difference between such English forms as 'bag' and 'back,' because the difference in his language is not phonemic; it is one of the acoustic differences which he has been
trained to ignore. In the
difference, until

same way, a speaker

and
differ as to

he

is

trained to do so, between

sound to him,

say, like 'man,'

of EngUsh will hear no two Chinese words which their scheme of pitch; we fail

to hear the difference because in our language such a difference is not connected with a difference of meaning and is consistently ignored when-

ever

it

chances to occur. The acoustic features which

other

set off a

phoneme

from

all

phonemes

in

its

language, and from "inarticulate" sound,

is

exhibit

some range

of variation. It

not required that

this

range be con-

tinuous: acoustically diverse features

speakers, in one phoneme.

may be

united,

by the habit of the

From Bloomfield, "The Structure of Language," International Encyclopedia of Unified Science, Vol. I, No. 4 (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1939), pp. 21-33.

452
The number
shall recognize

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
of

phonemes which

will

be stated as existing in any one

language depends in part upon the method of counting. For instance,

we

an English phoneme

[j]

which appears

initially in

forms

and another phoneme [e] in the vowel sound 'bet.' The longer vowel sound in words Uke 'aim,' 'say,' and 'bait' may then be counted as another phoneme, or else one may describe it as a combination of the phonemes [e] and [j]. This option would not exist if our language contained a succession of [e] plus [j] which differed in sound, and as to significant forms in which it occurred, from the vowel sound of 'aim,' 'say,' 'bait.' Thus, the English sound [c], which appears in words like 'chin,' 'rich,' 'church,' must be counted as a single phoneme and not as a combination of [t] as in 'ten' and [s] as in 'she,' because in forms Uke 'it shall' or 'courtship' we have a combination of [t] plus [s] which differs in sound and as to significant forms from [c] in 'itch Al' or 'core-chip.' The fact that these last two forms are unusual
like 'y^s,' 'year,' 'young,'

of

words

like 'egg,' 'ebb,'

or nonsensical does not affect the distinction.

The count

of

phonemes

in

Standard English will vary, according to economy, from forty-odd to around sixty.

For the most

part, the

phonemes appear

in utterance in a linear order.

is

Where
vict'

this is

not the case, the arrangement

so simple that

we can

easily put

our description into hnear order. For instance, the noun 'constarts

has a phoneme of stress (loudness) which

with the beginning

word and covers the first vowel phoneme; the verb 'convict' differs in that the same stress phoneme is similarly placed upon the beginning of the partial form '-vict.' K we wish to put our description of these forms into linear order, we need only agree upon a convention of ahgning a
of the

symbol for the

stress

phonemes,

e.g.,

'convict

and

con'vict.

Thus, every speech in a given dialect can be represented by a linear

arrangement of a few dozen symbols. The traditional system of writing

English, with
its

twenty-six letters and half-dozen marks of punctuation,

does

this

very imperfectly but sufficiently well for most practical needs.

This rigid simphcity of language contrasts with the continuous variability of non-hnguistic stimulation

and response. For this reason linguists employ the word 'jorm' for any meaningful segment of speech, in contrast with their use of 'meaning' for stimulus and response. The sound produced in a speech is to all ordinary purposes a continuum. To determine which features are phonemic, we must have some indication of meaning. A German observer, say, who, studying EngUsh as a totally unknown language, noticed in a few utterances the acoustic difference between 'bag' and 'back,' could decide that this is a phonemic difference only when he learned that it goes steadily hand in hand with a difference of meaning. Two utterances, say of the form 'Give me an apple,' no matter how much they may differ in non-phonemic features of sound, are said to

The Structure
consist of the

of

Language

453

different.

same speech-form; utterances which are not same are The decision of the speakers is practically always absolute and unanimous. This fact is of primary concern to us, since by virtue of it the
speakers are able to adhere to
strict

agreements about speech-forms and

to establish all
this realm.

manner

of correspondences, orderings, and operations in

To

take an everyday instance: anyone can look

up a word

in a

dictionary or a
It

name

in a directory.

would not do

to overlook the fact that the

phonemes of a language
this,

are identifiable
relatively small

only by differences of meaning. For

however, a

number

of gross differences will suffice

once the phonemes

form of the language is completely and rigidly definable (apart from its meaning) as a linear or quasi-hnear sequence of phonemes. We do not possess a workable classification of everything in the universe, and, apart from language, we cannot even envisage anything of the sort; the forms of language, on the other hand, thanks to their phonemic structure, can be classified and ordered in all manner of ways and can be subjected to strict agreements of correspondence and operation. For this reason, linguistics classifies speech-forms by form and not by meaning. When a speech-form has been identified, we state, as well as may be, its meaning: our success depends upon the perfection of sciences other than linguistics. The reverse of this would be impossible. For instance, we shall usually seek a given word in a thesaurus of synonyms by looking it up in the alphabetical index. We could not use a telephone directory which arranged the names of the subscribers not in their alphabetical
are established, any
order, but according to
height, or generosity,

some non-verbal

characteristic, such as weight,

GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE
Some
utterances are partly alike in

form and meaning; for instance:

Poor John ran away.

Our horses ran away.

Poor John got
tired.

Our horses

got tired.

This forces us to recognize meaningful constituent parts, such as 'poor

John,' 'our horses,' 'ran away,' 'got tired.'

form which can be uttered alone with meaning is a free form; all our examples so far are free forms. A form ('form' always means 'meaningful form') which cannot be uttered alone with meaning is a bound form. Examples of bound forms are the suffix '-ish' in 'boyish,' 'girUsh,' 'childish,'
or the suffix
'-s'

in 'hats,' 'caps,' 'books.'

form which does not consist entirely of lesser free forms is a word. Thus, 'boy,' which admits of no further analysis into meaningful parts, is a word; 'boyish,' although capable of such analysis, is a word,
free

454
because one of the constituents, the
words, such as

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
suffix '-ish,' is a

bound form; other

'receive,' 'perceive,' 'remit,'

'permit,' consists entirely of

bound forms.

free

form which

consists entirely of lesser free forms is a phrase;

examples are 'poor John' or 'poor John ran away.' Sets of words, such as 'perceive: receive: remit' or 'perceive: permit,
remit,' establish a parallelism

between the extremes,

'perceive'

and

'remit.'

The habit which is thus revealed is a morphologic construction. In the same way, sets of phrases, such as 'John ran: John fell: Bill fell' or 'John
ran'
fell,' establish a parallelism between the extremes 'John and 'Bill fell,' and illustrate a syntactic construction. The parts of a form which exhibits a construction are the constituents of the form: the form itself is a resultant form. In the study of an unknown language we proceed as above: partial similarities between forms reveal their complexity, and we progressively recognize constituents and determine, often with some difficulty, whether they are free or bound. In presenting the description of a language, however, we begin with the constituents and describe the constructions in which

ran: Bill ran: Bill

they appear.

construction, morphologic or syntactic, consists in the arrangement of

meaning of the constituents, the reform bears a constructional meaning, which is common to all forms that exhibit the same construction. Even more than other elements of meaning, constructional meanings are likely to present difficulties of definition, for they are often remote from simple non-Unguistic events. The features of arrangement differ in different languages. Modulation is the use of certain special phonemes, secondary phonemes, which mark certain forms in construction. In EngUsh, features of stress play a large part as secondary phonemes. We have seen this in the contrast between the verb 'convict' and the noun 'convict.' In syntax it appears in the absence of word-stress on certain forms. Thus, in a phrase like 'the house,' the word 'the' is unstressed; on the other hand, it may receive a sentence stress when it is an important feature of the utterance. Phonetic modification is the substitution of phonemes in a constituent. For instance, 'duke,' when combined with the suffix '-ess' or '-y' is replaced by 'duch-'; in syntax the words 'do not' are optionally replaced, with a slight difference of meaning, by 'don't.' Neither modulation nor phonetic modification plays any part in the specialized scientific uses of language; it is otherwise with the features of arrangement which we now have to
the constituents. In addition to the
sultant

consider.

The
'good,'

selection of the constituent forms plays a part apparently in

all

languages. If

we combine
if

the

word
it

'milk'

with words Uke

'fresh,'

'cold,'

we

get designations of special kinds of milk:

'fresh milk,' 'cold

'fetch,' 'use,'

milk,' 'good milk';

we combine

with words like 'drink,'

The Structure

of

Language
'drink milk,'
'fetch milk,'

455
'use milk.'

we

get designations of acts:

The

meaning goes hand in hand with the selection of the forms. We describe these habits by saying that the construction has two (or more) positions which are filled by the constituents. A junction of a form is its privilege of appearing in a certain position of a certain construction. The junction, collectively, of a form is the sum total of its functions. Forms which have a function in common constitute a
difference in constructional

jorm-class. Thus, the forms 'milk,' 'fresh milk,' 'cold water,' 'some fine
sand,' etc., are in a

common

form-class, since

all

of

them combine with

sift,'

forms of the form-class

'drink,' 'don't drink,'

'carefully

etc.,

in the

construction of action-on-object. In syntax, as these examples indicate,

words and phrases appear in

considered,
their

common

form-classes. If
are

words alone are

as

largest inclusive form-classes

known

parts oj

speech. In

many

languages, and very strikingly in English, the form-classes

of syntax overlap in so complex a fashion that various part-of-speech

classifications are possible, according to the functions

which one chooses

primarily to take into account.

The forms
class meaning.
difficulties

of a form-class contain a

common

feature of meaning, the

The

traditional

grammar

of our schools gets into hopeless

because

it

tries to define

form-classes by their class meaning and

not by the formal features which constitute their function.

The use
omy,
it

of order as a feature of arrangement

is

spread as the use of selection, but, on account of

English the order of the constituents
order. In

its

by no means as widesimplicity and econall

plays a great part in the scientific specializations of language. In

is

a feature of nearly

constructions;
this

thus, in 'fresh milk' or 'drink milk' the constituents

appear only in

some

instances, features of order alone distinguish the positions:

contrast, for example, 'John hit Bill' with 'BiU hit John.'

THE SENTENCE
In any one utterance a form which, in this utterance,
stituent of
is

not a con-

any free form and form can occur as a sentence. Various supplementary features no bound are used in different languages to mark the sentence, especially its end. In English, secondary phonemes of pitch are used in this way. In much the any larger form
is

a sentence.

By

definition,

same manner

as constructions, sentence types are distinguished

by features

of arrangement.

The meanings

of these types have to do largely with the

relation of speaker

and hearer ("pragmatic" features of meaning.) Thus,

pitch and, in part, selection and order determine in English such types as

statement

('at

four o'clock'), yes-or-no question ('at four o'clock?') and

('at

supplement question
In

what time?').
all,

many

languages, perhaps in

certain free forms are

marked

off as

especially suited to sentence use.

sentence which consists of such a form

456

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD

is a full sentence. In English the favorite sentence forms are phrases which exhibit certain constructions. The most important is the actor-action construction in which a nominative substantive expression is joined with a finite-verb expression: 'Poor John ran away.' 'John ran.' 'I'm coming at four o'clock.' 'Can you hear me?' A sentence which does not consist of a favorite sentence form is a minor sentence: 'Yes,' 'Fire!' 'At four o'clock.' 'If you can hear me.'

English and many other languages distinguish clearly a type whose type-meaning can perhaps be described by the term

of sentence
'report.'

In

English the report sentences are full-sentence statements exhibiting the

actor-action construction or a co-ordination of several actor-action phrases.

great deal of labor has been spent

upon attempts

at giving a precise
its

definition of this

type-meaning in disregard of the likelihood of

differing

and in oblivion of the danger that our sociology may not be far enough advanced to yield such a definition. For our purpose, at least a rough outline of this meaning will be needed. In the normal response to a report the hearer behaves henceforth as if his sense organs had been stimulated by the impingement of the reported situation upon
in different languages

the sense organs of the speaker. Since the meaningful speech-forms of the
report, however, constitute at

bottom a

discrete arrangement, the hearer's

responses can correspond to the speaker's situation to the extent only that
is

made

possible

by the approximative character of the

report. Thus,

when

a speaker has said, 'There are some apples in the pantry.' the hearer

behaves as though his sense organs had been stimulated by the impingement of the apples upon the speaker's sense organs as though the

speaker's adventure with the apples, to the extent that

the meanings of the speech-forms,

visually, but

represented by had been witnessed by the hearer, not

it is

through some sense organ capable of a certain discontinuous

range of stimulation.
Irony, jest, mendacity, and the like represent derived types of speech and response; they need not here concern us.

CONSTRUCTIONAL LEVEL AND SCOPE

Constructions are classified,
first

of

all,

by the form-class of the

resultant

form.
If

the resultant form differs, as to the big distinctions of form-class, from

is

the constituents, the construction

said to be exocentric.

For

instance,

actor-action phrases Uke 'John ran away' or 'He ran away' differ in formclass

from nominative substantive expressions

like 'John' or 'he'

and from

finite-verb expressions like 'ran away.' Similarly, the functions of preposi-

tional phrases, such as 'in the house' or 'with him,' differ

preposition

('in,'

'with')

from those of a and from those of an objective substantive ex-

pression ('the house,' 'him').

The

Structure of

Language
form agrees as to the major
instance, the phrase 'bread

457
distinctions of form-class
is

If the resultant

with one or more of the constituents, then the construction

endocentric.

said to be

For

and

butter' has

much

the

words 'bread,' 'butter.' If, as in this example, two or more of the constituents have the same function as the resultant form, the construction is coordinative and these constituents are the members of the coordination. If only one constituent
as the

same function

agrees in form-class with the resultant form,

ordinative; this constituent
is

the construction

is

sub-

head of the subordination, and any other constituent is an attribute of this head. Thus, in 'fresh milk,' the head is 'milk' and the attribute is 'fresh'; in 'this fresh milk,' the head is 'fresh milk' and the attribute 'this'; in 'very fresh' the head is 'fresh' and the attribute 'very'; in 'very fresh milk,' the head is 'milk' and the attribute is
the
'very fresh.'

The

difference of analysis in these

this

two cases

is

worth observing:

/ fresh milk very fresh / milk

Although we are unable

to give precise definitions of meaning, especially

of such ethnically created ranges as constructional meanings and class

meanings, yet the mere subsistence of hke and unUke sets determines

schemes of construction. Only in rare cases does the structure of a language leave us a choice between different orders of description. At each step of analysis we must discover the immediate constituents of the form; if we fail in this, our scheme will be contradicted by the constructional meanings of the language.
If a form contains repeated levels of endocentric construction there will be a word or co-ordinated set of words which serves as the center of the

entire phrase. Thus, in the phrase 'this very fresh milk,' the

word

'milk' is

the center.

The formal
order,

features

of construction

selection of

constituent forms,

and modulation by means of secondary phonemes differ greatly in various languages and sometimes lead to very complex structures of word or phrase, but they seem nowhere to permit of an unlimited box-within-box cumulation. Even simple formations may lead to ambiguity because the scope that is, the accompanying constituents on the proper level of a form may not be marked. For instance, 'an apple and a pear or a peach' may mean exactly two pieces of fruit: then the immediate constituents are 'an apple / and / a pear or a peach,' and the phrase 'a pear or a peach' and the phrase 'an apple' constitute the scope of the form 'and.' On the other hand, the phrase may mean either two pieces of fruit or one piece: then the immediate constituents are 'an apple and a pear / or / a peach,' and the scope of 'and' now consists, on its level, of the phrases 'an apple,' 'a pear.' Similarly,
phonetic modification,

458
'three times five less

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
two times two' may mean 26,
that they
18, 11, or 3.

These
it

uncertainties are not tolerable in the scientific use of language;

striking peculiarity of this use

is

notation
algebra.

are

removed only

in written

as especially
result
is

by the parentheses and brackets

that are used in

The

a system of writing which cannot be paralleled in

actual speech.

VARIETIES OF REFERENCE

thoroughgoing comparison of speech-forms, say in some one lanof

guage, with features

the

non-linguistic

world

is

impossible

at
its

the

present state of our knowledge.

results very largely

Our system

of responses, with
qualities,

neat
etc.,

discrimination of objects, classes, positions,

movements,

from our use of language.

We

cannot return to the

animal's or the infant's state of speechless response.

how much of our world is independent of any one we might try to compare the grammars and lexicons of different languages. At present we have reasonably complete data for a few languages only; at some future time, when this task can be undertaken, the results will be of great interest. The forms of any one language could scarcely serve as a frame of reference: we should need, instead, a nonIn order to find out
language,
linguistic scale
It is

by which

to measure.

the task of science to provide a system of responses which are

independent of the habits of any person or community. These responses

are twofold, in accordance with the universal

scheme of human behavior:

is

science provides relevant handling responses and clarified speech-forms.

In the nature of the case, however, the entire result

preserved in a verbal record.
If

transmitted and
task,

science

had completed

its

we could

accurately define the meanings of speech-forms.

Even

the most favorable type of

definition. Clusters of stimuli

meaning will show the difficulty of which produce roughly the same elementary
this,

responses in
tied

all

people and, in accordance with

are not necessarily

up with communal habits, have been successfully studied: this is the domain of so-called external phenomena, the domain of physical and biological science. Here some of the simpler lexical classifications of language correspond in the main to the classifications of science, as, for instance, in the names of familiar species of plants and animals. However, there is often some gross divergence, as when several species are called by the same name, or one species by several names, and there is a great species which somedeal of less manageable vagueness at the borders times are and sometimes are not included in a designation. Even in this simplest sphere, the meaning of many speech-forms involves ethnological features. Here, too, we encounter, on the simplest level, speech-forms which have no extra-linguistic validity, unless it be in the designation of

secondarily created artifacts: dragons,

griflBns,

unicorns, etc.

The Structure of Language

459
phenomena, such
as color,

Where

science reveals a continuous scale of

the segments included under linguistic terms vary greatly in different lan-

guages; they overlap and grow vague at the edges; and they are subject to

extraneous limitations ('bay,' 'roan').

meanings which are involved in the habit of comwe fall even farther short of accurate definition, since the branches of science which deal with these things are quite undeveloped. In practice we resort here to artistic, practical and ethical, or religious terminologies of definition, and these, however valuable for our
to

When we come

munities and individuals,

subsequent conduct,
In
all

fail to satisfy

the peculiar requirements of science.

spheres the structure of languages reveals elements of meaning

which are quite remote from the shape of any one situation and are
attached rather to constellations which include, often enough, personal

or ethnical features. Relatively simple instances are words like

'if,'

'con-

cerning,' 'because,' or the subtle difference, so important in English, be-

tween the types 'he ran'

running.'

'he

was running'

'he has run'

'he has

been

The

difficulty is

even greater in the case of bound forms, which

'-ish'

cannot be isolated in their language; consider, for instance, the depreciative

feature in

some

of the uses of

('mannish').

Constructional meanings and class meanings pervade a language, in part

as

universally

present
singular

categories;

they

generally

defy

our
in

powers of

definition.

The

and plural categories of nouns

EngHsh

are

relatively

manageable, but include some troublesome features, such as

'wheat' versus 'oats.' Gender-classes, as in

entirely ethnological in character.
training, is incapable of talking

French or German, are almost

speaker, without special

The normal

about these features; they are not reflected

in any habits beyond their mere presence in the structure of the language. The major form-classes are remote from any extra-Unguistic phenomena. If we assign to the English class of substantives some such meaning as

words like 'fire,' 'wind,' and 'stream' require an ethnologic commentary. The mechanics of a language often require that otherwise similar designations occur in more than one grammatical class. Thus, in EngUsh, as a center for the actor in the actor-action construction, we require a noun: hence we have forms like 'height' beside 'high' or 'movement' beside '(it) moves.' Duplications of this kind are not symptoms of any special level of culture but result merely from a rather common gram"object," then

matical condition.

SUBSTITUTION

AND DETERMINATION

Apparently, all languages save labor by providing substitute forms whose meaning rests wholly upon the situation of speaker and hearer, especially upon earlier speech. Since these occur more frequently than specific forms, they are easily uttered and understood; moreover, they are nearly always

460
short and, often enough,

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
bound forms. Thus T and 'you' replace names, naming of a thing which may be identified by
of substitution,
for

and

'this'

and

'that'

the

gesture.

The most important type

is

our subject,

is

anaphora: the substitute replaces repetition of a speech-form which has

replaces

soon to be uttered. Thus, the set 'he, she, it, they' and the set 'do, does, did' replaces finite-verb expressions (Til go by train if John does'). A form competent to fill one position of a construction may sufl&ce for anaphora of a phrase embodyjust

been uttered or

noun

expressions,

ing the whole construction: 'Mary dances better than Jane'; here 'Jane'
serves as the anaphoric substitute for 'Jane dances.'

Akin
is

to the substitute forms,

and very often

'this

identical with

determiners, which indicate a range within the class of

them phenomena

are
that

designated by an ordinary speech-form:

'all

apple,' 'the apple'

(ana-

be interested in determiners which leave the specimen entirely unrestricted: 'an apple,' 'some
phora), 'every apple,'
apples,'
etc.

We
is

shall

involved, anaphora is easily where several specimens are involved, Enghsh, like other languages, provides very poor means for distinguishing them. To provide for the identification of more than one variable, we must look to other phases of language which contain the germs of a more accurate system of speech.
apple,' 'any apple.' If only

one specimen

made

('it,'

'the

apple,'

'this

apple'); but,

FRANZ BOAS
(1858-1942)

Throughout his life Boas maintained a constant interest in linguistics. Wherever he went he collected hundreds of pages of native texts Kwakiutl, Bella Coola, Tsimshian, Dakota, Keres, to name but a few. He analyzed these masses of texts and copied them in his own hand for the printer. The introduction he wrote for the Handbook of American Indian Languages was a masterly discussion of the variety in human speech and
of the problem of linguistic relations in America.
the International Journal of

pleasure;

Boas always said that it was the work he turned to in times of great personal suffering after the death of his wife, or when he was ill. He made a game out

He founded and edited American Linguistics. linguistics was one thing he did for his own

of the course in linguistics which he taught at Columbia. After a few

introductory lectures on the nature of language he would announce that

he was a Kwakiutl or a Dakota and permit himself to be interviewed,

making

it

formance.

R.L.B.

clear that he spoke

no English.

He was

very proud of his per-

Introduction: International Journal

of American Linguistics
THE INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF AMERICAN LINGUISTICS WILL BE DEVOTED to the Study of American aboriginal languages. It seems fitting to state
briefly a
It is

few of the problems that confront us in

this field of research.

not necessary to set forth the fragmentary character of our knowl-

edge of the languages spoken by the American aborigines. This has been well done for North America by Dr. Pliny Earle Goddard, and it is not

From Boas, "Introduction" to the International Journal of American Linguistics, reprinted in Race, Language, and Culture (New York: The Macmillan Company,
1940), pp. 199, 201-210.

461

462
saying too

FRANZ BOAS

much

if

we claim

that for

most of the native languages of

is

Central and South America the field

practically terra incognita.

We

have vocabularies; but, excepting the old missionary grammars, there is very little systematic work. Even where we have grammars, we have no
bodies of aboriginal texts.

The methods

of collection have been considerably improved of late

years, but nevertheless

much remains
it

to

be done. While

until

about 1880

investigators confined themselves to the collection of vocabularies

brief grammatical notes,

and

has become more and more evident that large

masses of texts are needed in order to elucidate the structure of the

languages.

Notwithstanding the progress that during the last few decades has been made in the character of the material recorded, both as regards the accuracy of phonetic transcription and the character of the matter recorded, there is ample room for improvements of method. With the extent of our knowledge of native languages, the problems of our inquiry have also assumed wider and greater interest. It is quite natural that the first task of the investigator was the registering and the rough classification of languages. It appeared very soon that languages are more or less closely related, and that comparison of brief vocabuout the most striking relationships. The North American languages, that we owe to Major J. W. Powell, which wiU form the basis of all future work, was made by this method. Further progress on these lines is beset with great difficulties that are common to America and to those continents in which we cannot trace the development of languages by means of historical documents. The results of the historical and comparative studies of Indo-European languages show very clearly that languages that have sprung from the same source may become so distinct that, without documents illustralaries

was

sufficient to bring

classification of

ing their historical development, relationships so

are difficult to

discover;

much
in

so, that in

some

cases this task might even be impossible.

We

are therefore permitted to assume that similar divergences have devel-

oped

American languages, and

that quite a

number

of languages that

remote period have had a common origin. most difficult problems of research, and one in Here Hes one of the which the greatest critical caution is necessary, if we wish to avoid the
appear distinct
in a
pitfalls that are besetting the

may

path of

scientific inquiry.

The method

of

investigation has to take into account possibilities of linguistic

in regard to

growth,

which generalized data are not

differentiation.

available.

Modern languages
is

have developed by
other hand,

In so far as this

true,

the estab-

lishment of a genealogical series must be the aim of inquiry.

On

the

one another to such an extent that, beyond a certain point, the genealogical question has no meaning, because it would lead back to several sources and to an arbitrary seleclanguages
influence

may

Introduction: International Journal of American Linguistics

tion of

463

one or another as the

single ancestral type.

linguistic processes is

sufficiently

Our knowledge of wide to show that lexicographic bor-

rowing

may proceed

to such

may be

materially changed.

As

an extent that the substance of a language long, however, as the inner form remains

unchanged, our judgment

is

determined, not by the provenience of the

vocabulary, but by that of the form. In most Indian languages etymological processes are so transparent that

borrowing of whole words wiU be easily detected; and, on the whole, the diffusion of words over diverse groups does not present serious difficulties, provided the borrowed material does not undergo radical phonetic changes.

The matter is different when we ask ourselves in how far phonetics and morphological features may have been borrowed. In these cases
our experience does not permit us to give a
of sounds of a language
forces
is

definite answer.

The system
far

certainly

unstable; but in

how
is

inner

and

in

how

far foreign influence

mould

its

forms

a question

not always easy to answer. In America

that have

we can

discern various areas

common

phonetic characteristics; Uke the areas of prevalence

of superabundant

of nasalization of vowels, of glottaUzation,

develop-

ment of
of

laterals, of

absence of bi-labials or of labio-dental spirants, or

trills. These areas do not coincide with any morphological groupings, and are apparently geographically well defined. If we are dealing here

with phenomena of late assimilation, a disturbing element

that will

is

introduced

make it more difficult to assign a language to a definite genealogical line, much more so than is the case in the borrowing of words. The conditions favoring such phonetic influence must have been much more frequent in primitive America than they were in the later development of European languages. The number of individuals speaking any
given American dialect
in each tribe,
is

small.

Many women

of foreign parentage lived

and

their

speech influenced the pronunciation of the young;

so that phonetic changes

Still

may have come about

easily.

more

difficult
traits.

morphological
languages,

by the distribution of Even with our imperfect knowledge of American

is

the problem presented

it may be recognized that certain morphological types have a wide continuous distribution. This is true of morphological processes as

well as of particular psychological aspects of

the incorporation of the

American languages. Thus

of

nominal object, which in former times was

considered one of the most characteristic features

guages,
is

American

lan-

confined to certain areas, while

it

is

foreign to others.

The

tendency to qualify generalized verbal terms by means of elements which express instrumentality is characteristic of some areas. The occurrence
of various specific elements that define locality of an action, as affecting
objects like "hand," "house," "water," "fire," or other special nominal

concepts,

is

characteristic of other regions. Classification of actions or of

to the

nouns according

form of the actor or of the object also belong to

464
several groups of languages.

FRANZ BOAS
Nominal cases are present in some languages, way we find present in some regions, absent

absent in others. In a similar

modification of stems.

in others, processes like that of reduplication or of vocalic or consonantic

Attempts to

classify languages

from these

distinct points of

view do

not lead to very satisfactory results. Not only would the purely morphological classifications

be contradictory, but in
exists,
it

many

cases where a close

morphological agreement
ordinate vocabularies
logical ideas.

remains highly unsatisfactory to cosimilar

and the phonetic equivalent of

morphoshould be

On

the basis of Indo-European experience,

we

inclined to seek for a

common
of

origin for all those languages that

it

a far-reaching morphological similarity; but

that,

when phenomena
relation

the

results

classifications

have must be acknowledged based on different linguistic

conflict,

we must

recognize the possibihty of the occurrence

of morphological assimilation.

The problem is analogous to that of the between Finnish and Indo-European languages, which Sweet assumed as established, while the observed relations may also be due to

other causes.

Owing
tion

to the

of the
it

languages,

fundamental importance of these questions for the soluproblem of the historical relationship between American seems particularly important to attempt to carry through
is

these classifications without prejudging the question as to the genealogical

position of the various groups. It

quite inconceivable that similarities

such as exist between Quileute, Kwakiutl, and SaUsh, should be due to a

mere accident, or that the morphological similarities of California languages, which Kroeber and Dixon have pointed out, should not be due to a definite cause. The experience of Aryan studies might induce us to agree that these must be members of single linguistic stocks; but this assumption leaves fundamental differences unaccounted for, and neglects the possibihty of
morphological assimilation, so that at the present time the conclusion does
not seem convincing.

We

ought to inquire,

first

of

all,

into the possibihty

wiU be revealed, in part at least, by lack of correspondence between lexicographic, phonetic, and detailed morof mutual influences, which

phological classifications.

We
sized

do not mean
is

to say that the investigation

may

not satisfactorily

prove certain genealogical relationships; but what should be

that,

empha-

knowledge of primitive languages, it is not safe to disregard the possibihty of a complex origin of hnguistic groups, which would Umit the appUcabiUty of the term "hnguistic family" in the sense in which we are accustomed to use it. It is certainly desirable, and necessary, to investigate minutely and carefully all suggestive analogies. The proof of genetic relationship, however, can be considered as given, only when the number of unexplained distinct
in the present state of our

elements

is

not over-large, and

when

the

contradictory classifications,

Introduction: International Journal of

to

American Linguistics

465

which reference has been made before, have been satisfactorily accounted for. It is quite evident that, owing to the lack of knowledge of the historical development of American languages, convincing proof of genealogical relationship may be impossible to obtain, even where such relation exists; so that, from both a practical and a theoretical point of view,
the solution of the problems of genetic relationship presents a large

number

of attractive problems.

Considering the complexity of

entertain in regard to
quiry,
it

this question,

and the doubts that we

some

of the principles to be followed in our in-

out dialectic studies. Very

continent.

seems probable that a safer basis wiU be reached by following little work of this kind has been done on our

James

Owen Dorsey was

able to point out a few

phenomena

have been made in regard to the Salish languages and in a few other cases, but no penetrating systematic attempt has been made to clear up the processes of differentiation by which modern American dialects have
pertaining to the interrelation of Siouan dialects.
Similar points

developed.

It is

fortunate for the prosecution of this study that quite a

number

numerous more in the investigation of the relations between distinct languages, the more markedly they are differentiated. Siouan, Algonquian, Muskhogean, Salishan, Shoshonean, Wakashan, Caddoan, are languages of this type. They present examples of divergence of phonetic character, of differences in structure and vocabulary, that will bring us face to face with the problem of the origin of these divergent elements. The more detailed study of American languages promises rich returns in the fields of the mechanical processes of Unguistic development and of the psychological problems presented by languages of different types. In many American languages the etymological processes are so transparent that the mechanism of phonetic adaptation stands out with great clearness. Contact-phenomena, and types of sound-harmony that affect more remote parts of words, occur with great frequency. Phonetic shifts between related dialects are easily observed, so that we can accumulate a large mass of material which will help to solve the question in how far certain phonetic processes may be of more or less universal
of linguistic families in
into

America are broken up

strongly divergent dialects, the study of which will help us the

occurrence.

Remotely related to this problem is the question that was touched upon by Gatschet, in how far the frequent occurrence of similar sounds for expressing related ideas (Uke the personal pronouns) may be due to
obscure psychological causes rather than to genetic relationship. Undoubtedly,

many

hitherto unexpected types of processes will reveal them-

selves in the pursuit of these studies.

The

variety of

American languages

is

so great that they wiU be of

466
high value for the solution of

FRANZ BOAS

many fundamental
categories

psychological problems.
in

The unconsciously formed

into

found

human speech have

forced. Here, again,

not been sufficiently exploited for the investigation of the categories

which the whole range of human experience

is

the clearness of etymological processes in

many American

languages

is

a great help to our investigation.

whichever

The

isolation of formal elements

the case

may be
is

is

easily performed,

and of stems, or of co-ordinate stems and the meaning of

every part of an expression

determined

much more
to

readily than in the

innumerable fossilized forms of Indo-European languages.

Lexicographic
rate stems or
differentiation

corresponds

the

morphological

dif-

ferentiation of languages.

Where ideas are expressed by means by subordinate elements, generalized stems will be found that express a certain action regardless of the instrument with which it has been performed; while, in languages that are not provided with these formal elements, a number of separate words will take the place of the modified general stem. In languages that possess a full equipment of adverbial and locative formative elements, generalized words of motion may be qualified by their use; while, wherever these elements are absent, new stems must take their place. The same is true of grammatical elements that designate form or substance. Where these occur, the languages may lack words expressing predicative ideas relating to objects of different form and consisting of different substances (like our words
of sepa-

"to lie," "to

sit,"

"to stand," "to tear," "to break").

analysis
results,

A
No
in

lexicographic

based on these principles of

but requires a
is

classification

promises important

much more
most

accurate knowl-

edge of the meaning of stems than

available in

cases.

less interesting are the categories

of thought that find expression

grammatical form.

The

older

grammars,
strictly

although

many

of

them

contain excellent material, do not clearly present these points of difference,

because they are modelled

of plurality

on the Latin scheme, which

obscures the characteristic psychological categories of Indian languages.

Thus the idea

is

not often developed in the same sense as in

of collectivity.

Latin, but expresses rather the idea of distribution or

The category of gender is rare, and nominal cases are not common. In the pronoun we find often a much more rigid adherence to the series of three persons than the one that we apply, in so far as the distinction
is

carried through in the pronominal plural

Furthermore,

new

ideas

such

and

in the

demonstrative.

as visibility, or position in regard to the

speaker in the

back), or tense

six

principal

directions
to the

(up,

down,

right,

left,

front,

are

added

concept of the demonstrative pro-

nouns. In the numeral the varied bases of numeral systems find expression.

In the verb the category of tense

be exuberantly developed. Modes

may be almost suppressed or may may include many ideas that we ex-

Introduction: International Journal of

press

American Linguistics

467

by means of adverbs, or they may be absent. The distinction between verb and noun may be different from ours. In short, an enormous variety of forms illustrates the multifarious ways in which language seizes upon one or another feature as an essential of expression of
thought.

Besides the greater or lesser development of categories that are parallel

to our

own, many new ones appear. The groups of ideas selected for
in the characterization of

expression by formative elements are quite distinctive, and they belong

to the

most important features

each language.

In some cases they are poorly developed, but most American languages
possess an astonishing

number of formative elements of this type. number is so great that the very idea of subordination of one element of a word under another one loses its signifiIn

some

cases their

cance; and

we

are in doubt whether

we
shall

shall designate

one group as

subordinate elements, or whether

co-ordinate elements.

we

speak of the composition of

involves a prob-

While in some languages, as in Algonquian or

a matter of arbitrary definition,
it

Kutenai, this

may be

lem of great theoretical interest; namely, the question whether formative elements have developed from independent words, as has been proved to be the case with many formal sufiixes of European languages.

The
ysis

objectivating tendency of our

mind makes

the thought congenial,

anal-

that part of a

word

the significance of which

we can determine by

must also have objectively an independent existence; but there is certainly no a priori reason that compels us to make this assumption. It must be proved to be true by empirical evidence. Although the history of American languages is not known, and therefore cannot furnish any
direct evidence for or against this theory, the study of the etymological

processes wiU throw light

upon

this

problem, because in

many
it

cases the

very phonetic weakness of the constituent elements, their internal changes,

and the transparency of the method of composition, make

clear that

we
as

are performing here an analytical process that does not need to have
its

counterpart the synthesis of independent elements.

The same ques-

may also be raised in regard to phonetic modifications of the stem, which may be secondary, and due to the influence of changing accents in composition or to vanished component elements, while they may also
tion

be primary phenomena.
This problem
relation
is

in a

way

identical with the

whole question of the

between word and sentence.

Here

also

American languages

may

furnish us with

that the unit of

much important material that emphasizes the view human speech as we know it is the sentence, not the
treated in a linguistic journal

word.

The problems
literary

must include

also

the

forms of native production. Indian oratory has long been famous,

468
but the number of recorded speeches from which
oratorical devices
definite styUstic
is

FRANZ BOAS

we can

judge thek
that

exceedingly small. There

is

no doubt whatever

forms

exist that are utilized to impress the hearer;

but

we do not know what

The crudeness
of

they are.

As

yet,

analysis of the style of narrative art as

nobody has attempted a practiced by the various

careful
tribes.

most records presents a serious obstacle for this study, which, however, should be taken up seriously. We can study the general
structure of the narrative, the style of composition, of motives, their char-

acter

and sequence; but the formal

stylistic

devices for obtaining effects

are not so easily determined.

Notwithstanding the unsatisfactory character of the available material,

we do

find cases in

which we may
In

at least obtain a

glimpse of the
char-

intent

of the narrator.

many
Uttle

cases

metaphorical expressions occur

this

that indicate a vigorous imagination.

acter
is

Not much material of

available, but

what

we have demonstrates

that the type of

metaphor used in different parts of the continent shows characteristic differences. It would be interesting to know in how far these expressions have become purely formal without actual meaning, and in how far they reflect an active imagination. Evidence is not missing which shows that the sentence is built up with a view of stressing certain ideas or words by means of position, repetition, or other devices for securing emphasis. There are curious differences in the tendency to
fill

the discourse with brief allusions to current

ideas difl&cult to understand for anyone culture of the people,

Collectors of texts
artists

who is not versed in the whole and the enjoyment of diffuse, detailed description. are fully aware that in the art of narrative there are

At present

and bunglers in every primitive tribe, as well as among ourselves. there is hardly any material available that will allow us to
material for the study of certain aspects of artistic

characterize the tribal characteristics of the art of narrative.

The most promising

the tales of
all tribes.

expression are the formal elements that appear with great frequency in

Most

of these are stereotyped to such an extent

is

that Httle individual variation

found.

Even

in poorly recorded tales,

and obtained with the help of inadequate interpreters, the sameness of stereotyped formulas may sometimes be recognized. Conversation in animal tales and in other types of narrative, prayers and incantations, are probably the most important matewritten
in translation only,
rial of this character.

down

Attention should also be paid to the existing forms of literature. The

narrative
irregular
is

of universal occurrence, but other forms

distribution.
is

The

psychological basis

of the trivial of

show a much more American

meaningless

anecdote
syllables

not

easily

understood.

The connotation

that

occur in songs, the frequent use of distorted words in

poetry,

and the fondness for a secret language, including obsolete, sym-

Introduction: International Journal of

bolic, or arbitrary terms, deserve the

American Linguistics
most careful
attention.

469
Here belong

also the peculiar

modes

of speech of various personages, that are re-

corded in

and which Dr. Sapir has found so fully developed and Dr. Frachtenberg among the Quileute. The fixity of form of the recitative used by certain animals, to which Dr. Sapir has called attention in his studies of the Paiute, also suggests an
tales,

many

among

the

Nootka,

interesting line of inquiry.

Equally important

is

the absence of certain literary forms with which

The great dearth of proverbs, of popular snatches, and of riddles, among American aborigines, in contrast to their strong development in Africa and other parts of the Old World, requires attentive study. The general lack of epic poetry, the germs of which are
are familiar.

we

found in a very few regions only, is another feature that promises to clear up certain problems of the early development of literary art. We are able to observe lyric poetry in its simplest forms among all tribes. Indeed, we may say that, even where the slightest vestiges of epic poetry are missing, lyric poetry of one form or another is always present. It

may

consist of the musical use of meaningless syllables that sustain the

it

song; or

may
of

consist largely of such syllables, with a

it

few interspersed

words suggesting certain ideas and certain feeHngs; or

expression

may

rise to the

emotions

connected with warlike

deeds,

with religious

feeling, love, or even to the praise of the beauties of nature. The records which have been accumulated during the last few years, particularly by students of primitive music, contain a mass of material that can be utilized from this point of view.

Undoubtedly the problems of native poetry have to be taken up in

connection with the study of native music, because there
is

practically

no poetry

that

is

not at the same time song.

The

literary aspects of this

subject, however, faU entirely within the scope of a linguistic journal.

Let us hope that the new journal

to the solution of
all

may be

able to contribute

its

share

these problems!

EDWARD

SAPIR

(1884-1939)

Language and Literature

LANGUAGES ARE MORE TO US THAN SYSTEMS OF THOUGHT-TRANSFERENCE. They are invisible garments that drape themselves about our spirit and
give a predetermined

form to

all its

symbolic expression.
call
it

When
is

the expres-

sion

is

of unusual significance,

we

literature.^

Art

so personal an

expression that we do not like to feel that it is bound to predetermined form of any sort. The possibilities of individual expression are infinite, language in particular is the most fluid of mediums. Yet some Hmitation there

must be
is

to this freedom,

some

resistance of the

the illusion of absolute freedom.

The formal

medium. In great art there restraints imposed by the

and white, marble, piano tones, or whatever it may it is as though there were a limitless margin of elbow-room between the artist's fullest utilization of form and the most
material

be

paint, black

are not perceived;

that the material

is

innately capable of.

The

artist

has intuitively surits

rendered to the inescapable tyranny of the material,

fuse easily with his conception.^

made

brute nature

The

material "disappears" precisely be-

cause there

is

nothing in the
as a fish

artist's

conception to indicate that any other

material exists. For the time being, he, and

artistic

we

with him,

move

in the

medium

moves

in the water, oblivious of the existence

of an alien atmosphere.

No

sooner, however, does the artist transgress

From
1 1

Sapir,

Language:

An

Introduction to the Study of Speech (Harcourt, Brace,

1921), pp. 236-247.

to

can hardly stop to define just what kind of expression be called art or literature. Besides, I do not exactly know.

is

"significant"
shall

We

enough have to take

literature for granted. 2 This "intuitive surrender" has nothing to

tion.

More than one

revolt in

modem

art has

out of the material just what it is really color because paint can give him just these; "literature" in painting, the sentimental suggestion of a "story," is offensive to him because he does not want the virtue of his particular form to be dimmed by shadows from another medium. Similarly, the poet, as never before, insists that words mean just what they really mean.

do with subservience to artistic convenbeen dominated by the desire to get capable of. The impressionist wants light and

470

Language and Literature

the law of his

471
realize with a start that there is a

medium than we
is

medium

to

obey.

Language

the

medium

of literature as marble or bronze or clay

are the materials of the sculptor. Since every language has

peculiarities, the innate

formal limitations

and

possibilites

its

distinctive

of one liter-

ature are never quite the

same

as those of another.

The

Uterature fashioned

out of the form and substance of a language has the color and the texture
of
its

matrix.

The

literary artist

may

never be conscious of just

hindered or helped or otherwise guided by the matrix, but

question of translating his

how he is when it is a
cal-

work

into another language, the nature of the

effects

original matrix manifests itself at once. All his

have been

culated, or intuitively

felt,

with reference to the formal "genius" of his

own

language; they cannot be carried over without loss or modification. Croce^

is

therefore perfectly right in saying that a

work

of hterary art can never be

translated. Nevertheless literature does get itself translated,

sometimes with

up the question whether in the art of literature there are not intertwined two distinct kinds or levels of art generalized, non-linguistic art, which can be transferred without loss into an alien linguistic medium, and a specifically linguistic art that is not transastonishing adequacy. This brings

ferable.* I believe the distinction is entirely valid,

though we never get

the two levels pure in practice. Literature

moves

in language as a

but that

medium comprises two

our intuitive record of experience

given language
that draws
its

say a play of Shakespeare's,

character. If
it

example

is

a lyric of

conformation and our record sustenance mainlynever from lower without too a moves upper lower a than Swinburne's Both good
the particular
of a
the specific

layers, the latent content of

medium, language^

how
is

of

of experience. Literature
the
level,

entirely

translatable

great

loss

of

in the

rather
it

in the

level

fair

is

as

as untranslatable.

types of literary expression

may be

great or mediocre.

There is really no mystery in the distinction. It can be clarified a little by comparing Uterature with science. A scientific truth is impersonal, in its essence it is untinctured by the particular linguistic medium in which it finds expression. It can as readily deliver its message in Chinese^ as in
3 See Benedetto Croce, "Esthetic." *The question of the transferability of art productions seems to me to be of genuine theoretic interest. For all that we speak of the sacrosanct uniqueness of a given art work, we know very well, though we do not always admit it, that not all productions are equally intractable to transference. Chopin etude is inviolate; it moves altogether in the world of piano tone. Bach fugue is transferable into another set of musical timbres without serious loss of esthetic significance. Chopin plays with the language of the piano as though no other language existed (the medium "disappears"); Bach speaks the language of the piano as a handy means of giving outward expression to a conception wrought in the generalized language of

tone.
scientific
if

Provided, of course, Chinese is careful to provide itself with the necessary vocabulary. Like any other language it can do so without serious difficulty the need arises.
5


472
English. Nevertheless
it

EDWARD
must have some expression, and

SAPIR

that expression

must needs be a
truth
is

linguistic one.

itself
its

a linguistic process, for thought

Indeed the apprehension of the scientific is nothing but language

outward garb. The proper medium of scientific expression may be defined as a symbolic algebra of which all known languages are translations. One can adequately translate scientific literature because the original scientific expression is itself a translation. Literary expression is personal and concrete, but this

denuded of
is

therefore a generalized language that

does not

mean

that

its

significance

is

altogether

bound up with the

ac-

cidental quahties of the

deep symbolism, for instance, does not depend on the verbal associations of a particular language but
truly
rests securely

medium.

on an

intuitive basis that underlies all linguistic expression.

The

artist's "intuition," to

use Croce's term,

of a generalized

human

experience
is

thought
first

is

immediately fashioned out

and

feeling

of which his

own

individual experience
in
this

a highly personaUzed selection.

The thought

relations

deeper level have no specific linguistic vesture; the

instance,
to
spirit

rhythms are free, not bound, in the rhythms of the artist's language. Certain

the traditional

artists

whose

moves

largely

in the non-linguistic (better, in the generalized linguistic) layer

even find

a certain difficulty in getting themselves expressed in the rigidly set terms

of their accepted idiom.

One

feels that

they are unconsciously striving for a

is

generalized art language, a literary algebra, that

all all
is

related to the
is

sum

of

known

languages as a perfect mathematical symbolism

related to

the roundabout reports of mathematical relations that normal speech

capable of conveying. Their art expression

like a translation

is

frequently strained,

sounds at times
deed,
is

precisely

what

it

is.

from an unknown original ^which, inThese artists Whitmans and Brownings

it

impress us rather by the greatness of their

art.

spirit

than the

felicity of their

Their relative failure

is

of the greatest diagnostic value as an index of

the pervasive presence in literature of a larger,

more

intuitive linguistic

medium than any particular language. Nevertheless, human expression being what it is, the greatest or shall we say the most satisfying literary artists, the Shakespeares and Heines, are those who have known subconsciously to fit or trim the deeper in-

tuition to the provincial accents of their daily speech. In

effect of strain.

them there

is

no

Their personal "intuition" appears as a completed syn-

and the innate, specialized art of the medium. With Heine, for instance, one is under the illusion that the universe speaks German. The material "disappears." Every language is itself a collective art of expression. There is concealed in it a particular set of esthetic factors phonetic, rhythmic, symbohc, morphological which it does not completely share with any other language. These factors may either merge their potencies with those of that unknown, absolute language to which I have referredthis is the
thesis of the absolute art of intuition
linguistic

Language and Literature

473

method

and Heine or they may weave a private, techniown, the innate art of the language intensified or sublimated. The latter type, the more technically "literary" art of Swinburne and of hosts of delicate "minor" poets, is too fragile for endurance.
of Shakespeare
cal art fabric of their
It is built

out of spiritualized material, not out of

spirit.

The

successes of

the Swinburnes are as valuable for diagnostic purposes as the semi-failures

of the Brownings.

They show

to

collective art of the language itself.

what extent literary art may lean on the The more extreme technical practi-

tioners

may

so over-individualize this collective art as to

make
flesh

it

almost

unendurable.

One

is

not always thankful to have one's

and blood

frozen to ivory.

An
light.

artist

must
if

utilize the native esthetic

resources of his speech.

is

He may
is

be thankful

the given palette of colors

rich, if the

springboard

But he deserves no special credit for felicities that are the language's own. We must take for granted this language with aU its qualities of flexibility or rigidity and see the artist's work in relation to it. A cathedral on the lowlands is higher than a stick on Mont Blanc. In other words, we must not commit the foUy of admiring a French sonnet because the vowels are more sonorous than our own or of condemning Nietzsche's prose because it harbors in its texture combinations of consonants that would affright on English soil. To so judge hterature would be tantamount to loving "Tristan und Isolde" because one is fond of the timbre of horns. There are certain things that one language can do supremely weU which it would be almost vain for another to attempt. GeneraUy there are compensations. The vocalism of English is an inherently drabber thing than the vowel scale of French, yet English compensates for this drawback by
its

greater rhythmical alertness.

It is

even doubtful

if

the innate sonority

of a phonetic system counts for as much, as esthetic determinant, as the

relations
contrasts.

between the sounds, the

total

gamut of

their similarities

and

As long

as the artist has the wherewithal to lay out his sequences

little

and rhythms, it matters ments of his material.

features that give
its

what are the sensuous

of a language, however,

qualities of the ele-

The phonetic groundwork

are
its

literature a certain direction.

It

is only one of the Far more important

morphological peculiarities.
if

makes a

great deal of difference for

the development of style

the language can or cannot create

if

compound
its

words,

if

its

structure

is

synthetic or analytic,

the words of

sen-

tences have considerable freedom of position or are compelled to

fall into

a rigidly determined sequence.

far as style
is

The major

characteristics of style, in so

a technical matter of the building and placing of words, are

itself,
is

given by the language

acoustic effect of verse

quite as inescapably, indeed, as the general

given by the sounds and natural accents of the

felt

language. These necessary fundamentals of style are hardly

artist to

by the

constrain his individuality of expression.

They

rather point the

474

EDWARD
to those stylistic developments that
It is

SAPIR

way

most

suit the natural

bent of the

language.

not in the least likely that a truly great style can seriously
builds

form patterns of the language. It not only inon them. The merit of such a style as W. H. Hudson's or George Moore's^ is that it does with ease and economy what the language is always trying to do. Carlylese, though individual and vigorous, is yet not style; it is a Teutonic mannerism. Nor is the prose of Milton and his contemporaries strictly English; it is semi-Latin done into
itself

oppose

to the basic
it

corporates them,

magnificent English words.

It is

strange

how

long

it

has taken the European literatures to learn that

is to be imposed on the language from Greek or Latin models, but merely the language itself, running in its natural grooves, and with enough of an individual accent to allow the artist's personality to be felt as a presence, not as an acrobat. We understand more clearly now that what is effective and beautiful in one language is a vice in another. Latin and Eskimo, with their highly inflected forms, lend themselves to an elaborately periodic structure that would be boring in English. English allows, even demands, a looseness that would be insipid in Chinese. And Chinese, with its unmodified words and rigid sequences, has a compactness of phrase, a terse parallelism, and a silent suggestiveness that would be too tart, too mathematical, for the English genius. While we cannot assimilate the luxurious periods of Latin nor the pointilHste style of the Chinese classics, we can enter sympathetically into

style is

not an absolute, a something that

the spirit of these alien techniques.

I believe that

concision that a Chinese poetaster

any EngUsh poet of to-day would be thankful for the attains without effort. Here is an

example:^
Wu-river^ stream mouth evening sun sink, North look Liao-Tung, not see home.

Steam whistle several noise, sky-earth boundless. Float float one reed out Middle-Kingdom.

These twenty-eight syllables may be clumsily interpreted: "At the mouth of the Yangtsze River, as the sun is about to sink, I look north toward Liao-Tung but do not see my home. The steam-whistle shrills several times on the boundless expanse where meet sky and earth. The steamer, floating gently like a hollow reed, sails out of the Middle Kingdom."^" But we must not envy Chinese its terseness unduly. Our more sprawling
6

Aside from individual peculiarities of diction, the selection and evaluation of

particular
''

words as such.

great poem, merely a bit of occasional verse written by a young Chinese friend of mine when he left Shanghai for Canada.
8

Not by any means a

The old name of

China.

the country about the

mouth of

the Yangtsze.

A province of Manchuria.

10 1.e.,

Language and Literature

475
its

mode

of expression

is

capable of
its

own

beauties,

luxuriance of Latin style has

loveliness too.

and the more compact There are almost as many

natural ideals of literary style as there are languages.

Most

of these are

merely potential, awaiting the hand of

artists

who

will

never come.

And
many

yet in the recorded texts of primitive tradition and song there are

passages of unique vigor and beauty. The structure of the language often

an assemblage of concepts that impresses us as a stylistic discovery. words are like tiny imagist poems. We must be careful not to exaggerate a freshness of content that is at least half due to our freshness of approach, but the possibility is indicated none the less of utterly alien literary styles, each distinctive with its disclosure of the
forces

Single Algonkin

search of the

human

spirit for beautiful

form.

Probably nothing better

illustrates the

formal dependence of literature

poetry. Quantitative verse

on language than the prosodic aspect of

entirely natural to the Greeks, not

was

merely because poetry grew up in connection with the chant and the dance,^^ but because alternations of long

and short
language.

syllables

The

tonal accents,

were keenly Hve facts in the daily economy of the which were only secondarily stress phe-

nomena, helped to give the syllable its quantitative individuality. When the Greek meters were carried over into Latin verse, there was comparatively little strain, for Latin too was characterized by an acute awareness of quantitative distinctions. However, the Latin accent was more markedly
stressed than that of Greek. Probably, therefore, the purely quantitative

meters modeled after the Greek were

in the language of their origin.

felt as

a shade more

artificial

than

The attempt

to cast English verse into

Latin and Greek molds has never been successful. The dynamic basis of
English
is

not quantity,^^ but

stress, the alternation of

accented and un-

accented syllables. This fact gives English verse an entirely different slant

and has determined the development of

for the evolution of

its

poetic forms,

is still

responsible
is

new

forms. Neither stress nor syllabic weight

a very

keen psychologic factor in the dynamics of French. The syllable has great
inherent sonority and does not fluctuate significantly as to quantity and
stress.

Quantitative or accentual metrics would be as

as stress metrics in classical

trics in

artificial in French Greek or quantitative or purely syllabic metEnglish. French prosody was compelled to develop on the basis

of unit syllable-groups. Assonance, later rhyme, could not but prove a

welcome, an

all

but necessary, means of articulating or sectioning the

somewhat

spineless flow of sonorous syllables. English

was hospitable
it

to

the French suggestion of rhyme, but did not seriously need

in

its

rhyth-

11 Poetry everjrwhere is inseparable in its origins from the singing voice and the measure of the dance. Yet accentual and syllabic types of verse, rather than quantitative verse, seem to be the prevailing norms. 12 Quantitative distinctions exist as an objective fact. They have not the same inner, psychological value that they had in Greek.

476

EDWARD SAPIR

mic economy. Hence rhyme has always been strictly subordinated to stress as a somewhat decorative feature and has been frequently dispensed with. It is no psychologic accident that rhyme came later into English than in French and is leaving it sooner.^^ Chinese verse has developed along very much the same Unes as French verse. The syllable is an even more integral and sonorous unit than in French, while quantity and stress are too uncertain to form the basis of a metric system. Syllable-groups so and so many syllables per rhythmic unit and rhyme are therefore two of the

controlling factors in Chinese prosody.

The

third factor, the alternation

of syllables with level tone and syllables with inflected (rising or falling)
tone,
is

peculiar to Chinese.

To summarize,

Latin and Greek verse depends on the principle of con-

on the principle of contrasting stresses; French verse, on the principles of number and echo; Chinese verse, on the principles of number, echo, and contrasting pitches. Each of these rhythmic systems proceeds from the unconscious dynamic habit of the language, falling from the lips of the folk. Study carefully the phonetic system of a language, above all its dynamic features, and you can tell what kind of
trasting weights; English verse,

a verse

it

has developed

or, if history
it

has played pranks with

its

psywill.

chology, what kind of verse

should have developed and some day

Whatever be the sounds, accents, and forms of a language, however these lay hands on the shape of its literature, there is a subtle law of compensations that gives the artist space. If he is squeezed a bit here, he can swing a free arm there. And generally he has rope enough to hang himself with, if he must. It is not strange that this should be so. Language is itself the collective art of expression, a summary of thousands upon thousands of individual intuitions.

The

individual goes lost in the collective

creation, but his personal expression has left

some

trace in a certain give

and

flexibility that are

is

inherent in aU collective works of the

human

spirit.

The language
language
is is

ready, or can be quickly

made
it is

ready, to define the

artist's

individuaUty. If

no hterary

artist

appears,
it is

not essentially because the

too

weak an

instrument,

because the culture of the people

not favorable to the growth of such personality as seeks a truly indi-

vidual verbal expression.

13 Verhaeren was no slave to the Alexandrine, yet he remarked to Symons, d propos of the translation of Les Aubes, that while he approved of the use of rhymeless verse in the English version, he found it "meaningless" in French.

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

(1876-1960)

Of
he

all

the anthropologists

who came

to maturity in the early years of the

20th century, Kroeber ranged

is

farthest.

For

this reason,

if

for

no

other,

perhaps the best representative of the Golden Age. In the present age of dreary specialization, when the Sinologist cannot communicate with the Americanist, and when the study of the types of Middle Congo masks
is

considered a "field of study,"

it

is

especially pleasant to contemplate

Kroeber. Like Boas, he

made important

contributions in three of the

four fields of anthropology, although his work was not in the identical
fields.

Kroeber's accomplishments in archaeology are substantial;

it

is

quite possible that his studies in Peruvian prehistory will prove, in time,
to

be his most significant contribution to knowledge.

Anthropology
inviting.

is

a wide street with

many

houses, but other streets are

Kroeber

is

no respecter of

disciplinary labels.

He

borrows with

equal ease from history, geography, ecology, psychology, and he feels no

hesitation in dropping ideas or

methods

if

they prove unrewarding.

One

great continuity in Kroeber's scientific

fornia anthropology.

life

has been the building of Cali-

He

first

went

to California in

1901 and combined

cul-

teaching with research. Since then he and his students have been adding
regularly

and systematically

to our

knowledge of the languages and

tures of that area.

There are also certain recurrent themes in Kroeber's writings, ideas that
reappear over the years in fresh interpretations.
cept of the superorganic

One
is

of these

is

the con-

the idea that culture

a reality of a different

order from the particular habits of the individuals composing a society. Another is that culture areas are realities, not merely abstract classification devices

and where considered

in relation to geographical areas

can be
is

analyzed in terms of concepts borrowed from ecology. Another

the

idea of periodicity in cultural development, the small swings in fashion,

and on

the large swings in the rise

this

and

fall

of cultures.
in Paris in October, 1960,

As

book was going

to press,

Kroeber died

his

way home from an

international conference.

R.L.B.

477

478

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

The Nature of Culture

WHAT CULTURE
WHAT CULTURE
what forms
that
is
it

IS

IS

CAN BE BETTER UNDERSTOOD FROM KNOWLEDGE OF

takes and

how

it

works than by a
it is

definition. Culture is in

this respect like life or matter:

the total of their varied

phenomena

more

significant

than a concentrated phrase about them.

it is

And

again

as with life

and with matter,

true that

when we

are dealing with the

actual manifestations

we

are less often in doubt as to whether a phe-

nomenon

is

or

is

not cultural than

cludable in the concept of culture

Nevertheless,
it

will

we are in deciding on what is inwhen we reason abstractly about it. be worth while to consider some definitions briefly.
is

Tylor says that "culture or civilization

includes knowledge, belief,
bilities
art,

that

complex whole which

morals, law, customs, and any other capaas a

and habits acquired by

man

member
calls
it

of society." Linton equates

culture with "social heredity."

Lowie

"the whole of social tradisociety and culture, There can obviously be

tion." All three statements use the

term "social" or "society," but in an

attributive or qualifying sense.

social

We

can accept
as there

this:

and

cultural, are closely related concepts.

no

culture without a society

individuals.

The converse

much no

can be no society without

society without culture

it

holds

for

man:
and

no cultureless human society is known; But it does not hold on the subhuman

would even be hard

to imagine.

level.

As we have
among
is

seen, ants

bees do have genuine societies without culture, as well as without speech.

Less integrated and simpler associations are frequent

small and temporary one. Accordingly, so far as
ture always has society as a counterpart;
it

animals.

Even

a pair of nesting birds rearing their young constitute a society, though a

man

concerned, culis

rests on,

and

carried by,

Beyond the range Cultural phenomena thus

society.

of

man

there are societies, but

no

cultures.

characterize

man more

specifically

than his

social manifestations

characterize him, for these latter he

shares with

vertebrate and invertebrate animals.

Roughly, then, we can approximate what culture is by saying it is that which the human species has and other social species lack. This would include speech, knowledge, beliefs, customs, arts and technologies, ideals and rules. That, in short, is what we learn from other men, from our elders or the past, plus what we may add to it. That is why Tylor speaks of "capabilities and habits acquired by man," and what Lowie means when

From Kroeber, Anthropology: Race Language Culture Psychology Prehistory (New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company, 1948), pp. 252-256, 288-290.

The Nature of Culture

479

The

he says "the whole of social tradition," or Linton by "social heredity." last term is unfortunate because heredity now denotes in biology

precisely

what

is

received organically or genetically to the exclusion of

if

what
the

is

acquired socially or culturally. But

we

substitute for "heredity"

more noncommittal near-synonym "inheritance," the phrase then conveys much the same meaning as Lowie's "social tradition." The terms "social inheritance" or "tradition" put the emphasis on how culture is acquired rather than on what it consists of. Yet a naming of all the kinds of things that we receive by tradition speech, knowledges, activities, rules, and the rest runs into quite an enumeration. Things so diverse

is

as hoeing corn, singing the blues, wearing a shirt, speaking English,

and
it.

being a Baptist are involved. Perhaps a shorter

content of culture
the negative

way

of designating the

way

of telhng

what
all

is

excluded from

Put

this

way around,

culture might be defined as

the activities and non-

physiological products of
reflex or instinctive.

human

personalities that are not automatically

That in turn means, in biological and psychological

(plus

parlance, that culture consists of conditioned or learned activities

the manufactured results of these)
;

and the idea of learning brings us back again to what is socially transmitted, what is received from tradition, what "is acquired by man as a member of societies." So perhaps how it comes to be is really more distinctive of culture than what it is. It certainly is
easily expressed specifically.
is

more

In one sense culture

necessary to

both superindividual and superorganic. But

it is

know what

is

meant by these terms so

it

as not to misunderstand

their implications. "Superorganic" does not

organic influence and causation; nor does

mean nonorganic, or free of mean that culture is an entity

independent of organic
that there
is

life
is

in the sense that

a soul which

or can

"Superorganic" means simply that

ing with something that
thing
is

some theologians might assert become independent of the Uving body. when we consider culture we are dealbe fuUy
intelligible to us.

organic but which must also be viewed as someif it is

more than organic

to

In the same

way when we
try to place

say that plants and animals are "organic"

we do not thereby

them outside the laws of matter and energy in general. We only aflBrm that fuUy to understand organic beings and how they behave, we have to recognize certain kinds of phenomena or properties such as as added to those the powers of reproduction, assimilation, irritability which we encounter in inorganic substances. Just so, there are certain

properties of culture

such

as transmissibihty, high variability, cumulative-

ness, value standards, influence

on individuals

which

it

is

difiicult

to

explain, or to see

much

significance in, strictly in terms of the organic

composition of personalities or individuals. These properties or qualities

of culture evidently attach not to the organic individual to the actions
culture.

and the behavior products of

societies of

man as such, but men that is, to

480
In short, culture
quired; and
ture.
is

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

superorganic and superindividual in that, although

carried, participated in,

it is

and produced by organic

individuals,
is

it

is

ac-

acquired by learning.

What

is

learned

the existent cul-

The content of this is transmitted between individuals without becoming a part of their inherent endowment. The mass or body of culture, the institutions and practices and ideas constituting it, have a persistence and can be conceived as going on their slowly changing way "above" or outside the societies that support them. They are "above" them in that a particular culture, a particular set of institutions, can pass to other societies;
also in that the culture continuously influences or conditions the

of the underlying society or societies

members

indeed, largely determines the con-

tent of their hves. Further, particular manifestations of cultures find their

primary significance in other cultural manifestations, and can be most fully understood in terms of these manifestations; whereas they cannot

be

specifically explained

personaHty, even though cultural

frame of

this

from the generic organic endowment of the human phenomena must always conform to the endowment.

An
ligion,

illustration

say

may make this superorganic quality more vivid. A reRoman CathoUcism or Mohammedanism, is of course a piece
is,

of culture, and a typical piece or sample. Obviously Catholicism exists only

in so far as there are Catholics; that

individuals

who have

acquired the

faith.

when and where there are human Once established, however, the

Catholic hierarchy, beliefs, rituals, habits, and attitudes can also be viewed
as going on century after century. Popes, bishops, communicants succeed one another; the church persists. It certainly possesses a continuity and an influence of its own: it affects not only its adherents but the course of
history.

On

a smaller scale, or for shorter periods, the same thing holds

for smaller segments of culture

institutions, behefs, or

customs down to
first

short-lived triviahties of fashion

eral scale, the

and

etiquette.

On

a larger and more genculture since

it

same holds
Big or

for the totality of

little,

human

began

to develop.

then, culture affects

human

action. It is

the accident of what culture happens to be in Occidental countries toward

the middle of the twentieth century which determines that
in the

when

get

up

morning

put on a shirt and pants and not a chlamys or a toga or

just a breech-clout.

Can we

call this

contemporary Western culture the

cause of

my

shirt-wearing? In ordinary parlance,

we

might; the specific

custom can certainly not be derived from anything in human hereditary constitution. Dialectically, the cultural causation might be chaUenged; it
depends on logical
definitions.

But everyone

will agree at least that the

is

concrete cultural fact of habitual shirt-wearing

specifically related to

or conditioned by other cultural facts, such as antecedent dress styles,

manners, laws, or

religion.
is

Again, the EngUsh language

ing and understanding

a piece of culture.
is

The

faculty of speakit is

some or any language

organic:

a faculty of


The Nature of Culture
481

the human species. The sounds of words are of course made by individual men and women, and are understood and reacted to by individuals, not

by the species. But the total aggregation of words, forms, grammar, and meanings which constitute the English language are the cumulative and joint product of millions of individuals for many centuries past. No one of us creates or invents for himself the English he speaks. He talks it as it comes to him, ready-made, from his millions of predecessors and from his elders and age mates. EngHsh is obviously superindividual in the sense that it is something enormously bigger and more significant than the speech of any individual man, and in that it influences his speaking infinitely more than his speaking can hope to contribute to or influence the EngUsh language. And Enghsh is superorganic in that its words and meanings are not direct outflows or consequences of men's being human organisms else all men would spontaneously talk as much alike as they walk aUke. Instead, how they talk depends overwhelmingly on how the societies in which they were raised talked before.

A piece of culture such as the Enghsh language is therefore a historical phenomenon. This means that its specific features cannot be adequately explained by the organic features of our species nor of a race but are most inteUigible in the fight of the long, complex, and locally varied history of the institution we caU EngUsh speech. In short, a cultural fact is always a historical fact; and its most immediate understanding, and usually the fullest understanding of it to which we can attain, is a historical

one.

To

a large degree caUing culture superorganic or superindividual

it

means

that

yields

more

readily to historical interpretation than to or-

ganic or psychosomatic explanations.

may further help the realization of what culture is and works is that of a coral reef. Such a reef may be miles long and inhabited by biUions of tiny polyp animals. The firm, sofid part of the reef consists of calcium carbonate produced by the secretions of these animals over thousands of years a product at once cumulative and communal and therefore social. What is afive and organic in the reef is these innumerable Uttle animals on its ocean-fronting surface. Without their ancestors, there would have been no reef. But the reef now exists independently of the fiving polyps, and would long continue to endure even if every polyp were killed by, say, a change in ocean temperature or salinity. It would still break the surf, would now and then wreck ships, and would bar off quiet water behind. While a coral reef is the accumulated precipitate of dead polyps, it is also a phenomenon affording to miUions of living polyps a base and a foothold, and a place to thrive.
simile that

how

it

This parallel

is

incomplete.

It

breaks

down

in that a reef

is

actual physi-

and the manufactures of culture are material or physical, most of culture consisting of ideas and behaviors. Also, a reef determines that and where new polyps are to live, but not how
cal matter, whereas only the artifacts

482
they will
live,

ALFRED
not the specific way of

L.

KROEBER

many possible ways in which they which on the contrary is just what culture does largely determine for men. Yet the simile is valid and suggestive on one point: the minute role played by the individual polyp or human being in proportion, respectively, to the mass of reef or of culture. Each of us undoubtedly contributes something to the slowly but ever changing culture in which we live, as each coral contributes his gram or two of lime to the Great Barrier Reef. In the main, though, it is our culture that directs and outhnes the kind of life we can lead. There is left to our individual gifts and temperaments the relative success and happiness we attain in life; and to our own voUtion, the alternative choices provided by our culture the choice, perhaps, between being doctor, lawyer, or merchant chief; or
will function,

be water, beer, tea, or milk. Even this last set of choices would not be wholly free to the individual if he were a participant in strict Methodist or Mohammedan culture; and in old China the beer would not be available and the milk considered too nasty to want.
whether our next drink
shall

At any

rate, the

spective; with a consequence, perhaps, of

comparison may be of aid toward seeing things in persomewhat deepened personal

humility in the face of the larger world and

human

history.

MOLDING THE INDIVIDUAL

Through being born into a society, every individual is also bom into a molds him, and he participates in it. The degree to which every individual is molded by his culture is enormous. We do not ordinarily recognize the full strength of this shaping
culture. This culture

process, because

ing at least as often as

tive
like

happens to everyone, it happens gradually, it is satisfyit is painful, and usually there is no obvious alternaopen anyway. Hence the molding is taken for granted and is accepted, the culture itself perhaps not quite unconsciously, but uncritically.
it

The formal or dehberate

part of the process

we

call education:

education

through schools, in religion, and in manners and morals primarily at home. a larger fraction of the cultural tradition

These agencies convey the mores and some of the folkways. But perhaps is acquired by each individual at his own initiative. He is left to "pick it up," to grow into it. In this class are his speech, bodily postures and gestures, mental and social attitudes, which he imitates from his elders or from near-age mates, and a thousand and one activities, such as putting on shoes, spUtting firewood, or driving a car, which a child "learns," often without any formal instruction, because he has seen others do these things and wants to do them too. How much of all that a person knows how to do, and does do, comes to him from outside, from the cultural environment that surrounds him, and how much from within, from his independent personality? The former is surely much the larger mass. That he speaks, say, English and not

The Nature of Culture

483

Chinese is the result of "where he is bom" or raised; that is, of which language forms part of the culture in which he grows up. Similarly with his
being a Christian instead of a Buddhist, casting his vote in November,
observing Sunday, celebrating

New Year on

January

instead of in Feb-

ruary, eating with a fork and not with chopsticks, and bread and butter
in place of rice, tucking his shirt in

and not out

(in Kipling's

day

at least),

saying hello to his parents instead of using honorifics, steering a tractor

and not a

lightly

shod wooden plow, writing with

letters

instead of a

thousand logograms, and so on endlessly. In fact, the mass of what any person receives from his culture is so great as to make it look at first
glance as
if

he were nothing but an individual exemplar of his culture, a

it

reduction of
tain.

abbreviated to the scope of what one personahty can conis

All there remains of him that

not induced by his culture consists

of two sets of things. First are his innate general

human

capacities,

and

second, his individual pecuUarities.

The capacities merely ensure, just because they are generic, that our normal person has the faculty of learning to speak, to read, to operate
tools, to practice

a religion of some kind or other.

What

the kind of speech,

tools, religion is

depends absolutely on the culture, not on him. In other

words, his birth as a normal

birth in a culture determines
realized.

man gives him certain potentialities, but his how these potentialities wiU be expressed and

Individual peculiarities comprise such traits as speaking with a lisp or a drawl, having a bass or a tenor voice, worshiping piously or perfunctorily,

being naturally tidy or hasty or bright or the opposite. These are

individual variations

ment. They range

excitabihty
to

all

from the average intelligence, energy, or temperathe way from genius to imbeciUty, from superbut of course the
great

ultrasluggishness;

majority

of

from the mean in any one trait. These "individualisms" or idiosyncrasies do have a physiological and hereditary basis, in the main. Yet in part their qualities too can be culturally induced, as when a drawl is a Southerner's or a cowboy's, or the tidiness and phlegm
individuals depart only slightly

are those of Hollanders. In such instances

it is

the occasional Southerner

is

who
and
is

doesn't drawl, or drawls infernally, the

disorderly,

Dutchman who

precipitate

who

represents the individual variation from the

norm

that

characteristic of the culture or the subculture of his society.

This brings us to a second class of features in which individuals

roughly, those areas which are alternatives within one's culture. Shall

differ:
I

be a

farmer or a storekeeper or a
join the

Army

go in for tennis or baseball or golf, or the Navy, be a Methodist or a Presbyterian or a Quaker?

dentist,

Here the culture leaves several choices more or less open to the individual members, though it is well to remember that each culture has a different array of choices. In unwestemized China, for instance, there would be no choice of dentistry or baseball or Navy, and the religious denominations

484
available

ALFRED
would be
altered to
all

L.

KROEBER

Confucian, Buddhist, and Taoist. Even

possibility to a

among
shearer

ourselves, not

choices would be open to everyone everywhere:

golf might

be only a theoretical

farm laborer or a sheepto

on the Great

Plains. In fact in rigidly segregated India only a

few of aU occupations, worships, amusements, and foods known civilization would be open to the members of any one caste.
In summary, heredity gives us at birth certain generic

Hindu

human

faculties.

and therefore how we shall mainly live, the culture in which we are launched thereupon decides. But it leaves us, theoretically at least, certain choices between alternatives in its total scheme; and it leaves us also a degree of freedom of departure from its norms in personal mannerisms, innovations, and successes.
shall use these,

How we

This enormous influence of culture in molding the individual has a bearing on psychology. This science
is

set

up

to study particular individuals in

order to reach understanding of

might be called the abstracted

they actually occur in
full of culture,
life

human beings in general; that is, of what human person. But since all individuals as
by
culture,

are patterned
is

and

their behavior

is

the task of psychology

made

difl&cult.

This was not clear

at first.

But then psychologists began

to realize

how

great

was the

effect

on

individuals of their happening to be exposed to different influences, as

these exist within our civilization;

generally

how

the children of articulate parents

come

to be above-average in verbal facihty;

how

the children of

unhappy or broken marriages

"conditioning"

are

more

likely

than the average to be

emotionally unstable in their adjustments to other persons; and so on. So

came

to

be one of the slogans of modern psychology where

innateness of behavior had been assumed before. Then, as psychologists

gradually

came The

to be culture-conscious also, the variety of cultures

was

seen to increase enormously the range of the conditioning people are

subject to.
abstract

man, or what the psychologist

is

felt

properly say about him, shrank in proportion. This

great difl&culty, as

why

there

he could is such

we have

seen, in deciding

how

alike or different the

heredity equipment of races or descent groups

tests are

is. It is

not that psychological

vaUd enough, within limits, within the culture for which they were constructed. They show at any rate how much culture an individual has absorbed in comparison with other individuals. They are less good at showing, per se, whether greater absorption is due to greater exposure or to greater inborn capacity. And the tests break down, or become dubious, when they are applied interculturally. Hence it is that we do not yet know how different the races are in their endowment, while we do know that cultures differ enormously in content and orientation. And of course individuals differ both in their heredity and in what their
tests are

unsound. The

conditioning has

made them.

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

(1883-1957)

Lowie wrote

in his

autobiography that when Kroeber invited him to come

reluctant to give up

museum work for teaching. He would not be good at it. He was had no desire to teach and felt that he wrong on both counts. He liked teaching and he was a successful teacher. He brought to California his urbane scholarship, and he found the emerto California he

was

gence from the gathering dust of the Museum into the fresh fornia department both stimulating and mellowing.
child

air of the Cali-

Lowie was born in Vienna, although he came to the United States as a and had all of his higher education here. Yet he retained a certain cosmopolitanism in his habits of mind. This showed especially in the range of his reading and in his mastery of European sociological literature. He was hospitable to many points of view but skeptical and cautious in building theory. His spirit was not controversial and he derived neither pleasure nor profit from setting up straw men. He published many articles and reviews and several volumes on anthropological theory. His books were short, and he was economical with words. Even his monograph on the Crow Indians is not overloaded with repetitious details. He is best known for his sympathetic study of the Crow and his lucid discussions of kinship and social organization. The events of World War H brought many anthropologists out from their ivory tipis to apply their minds to the problems of contemporary culture. Lowie, who used German in preference to English, and kept a copy of Faust by his bed, lectured on German and Balkan cultures in specialized training programs for Army personnel. After the war he did his last stint this time in Germany, traveling around the country, pickof field work ing up hitch-hikers, talking to everyone. The results of this trip were embodied in his book. Toward Understanding Germany, published in 1954. It eschewed cliches and exhibited Lowie' s urbane and detached commitment to an understanding of culture. R.L.B.

485

486

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

Social Organization
EVERY HUMAN GROUP
IS

ORGANIZED; ITS INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS DO NOT

behave independently of one another but are hnked by bonds, the nature of which determines the types of social unit. Kinship, sex, age, coresidence, matrimonial status, community of religious or social interests, are among
the unifying agencies; and in stratified societies

members

of the

same

level

form a

definite class.
terri-

Maine, who introduced the valid distinction between kinship and

torial ties, incorrectly this position

denied the existence of the latter in ruder societies;

a deficiency partly

was popularized by Lewis H. Morgan. Both ignored phe-

nomena

anticipating the state of civilized countries,

supplied by Schurtz' theory of associations. Primitive communities do not

conform to the simple pattern conceived by earlier writers but are often segmented according to several coexisting principles. To determine the comparative influence of the several resulting loyalties is one of the most important problems of social organization.

The

societies of the ruder

hunting peoples, as exempHfied by the Bushthe

men

of South Africa, the

Andamanese or

Washo

of

Nevada and

Cali-

fornia,

lack centralized authority and hereditary class distinctions. This

does not preclude the dominance of powerful personalities or the control

of the

community by

leaders for a definite purpose, as

recognized competence superintends a rabbit hunt.

the
is

when a Washo of As a rule, however,

headman

of these tribes exercises

no

special authority, since authority

vested in the totality of adult males. In parts of Australia this situation

involves a gerontocracy, the fully initiated elders assuming the reins of government and even reserving to themselves the choicest food; thus age status determines government relations. Other hunting communities, such
as the northwest Californians, define influence in terms of wealth, a factor

likewise prominent

among

the pastoral

nomads
flocks

of the
is

Old World. Inas-

much, however,
in Polynesia

as the size of herds

and

subject to great vicissi-

Such castes evolved and Micronesia, where loftiness of rank depended theoretically on directness of descent from the gods. These differences in rank may or may not be coupled with distinctions as to political power; in Hawaii the supreme ruler was likewise the highest in rank, while in Tonga the tuitonga, although regarded as spiritually and socially superior, was overshadowed in the affairs of state by a secular chief.
tudes, these peoples rarely develop hereditary castes.

From Lowie, "Social Organization," Encyclopedia of the (New York: The Macmillan Company, 1934), pp. 141-148.

Social Sciences, Vol. 14

Social Organization

487
were miniature kingdoms even where, as in

The Polynesian

states

New

Zealand, geographical conditions did not hinder expansion.

On

the other

hand, enormous African Negro populations have repeatedly been united

under a single despot. Although this development was fostered by Mohammedanism, it long antedated Islam and occurred independently of its range, as in the case of Chaka, who made the Zulu, once a petty tribe, into the dominant people of south Africa. Among the Bakuba of the southwestern Congo the king became a slave to court etiquette and a puppet in
the hands of his ministers.

On

the west coast of Africa the ruler

may

either

encounter a check from an independent secret society or enhance his

prerogatives by gaining control of that organization. In some of the African kingdoms autocracy precludes aristocracy; the king was the only blue blood of Uganda and even the most powerful officials acted only by delegated authority. A different condition is found in Ruanda, where the subjugation of peasant tribes by cattle breeders has resulted in the dominance of a privileged pastoral aristocracy over the agricultural commoners, who in turn despise the roving pygmoid hunters of the area. On a higher level the Bedouins have subjugated the Arabian peasantry as their nomadic ancestors subjected the agricultural civilizations of the Near Orient. African kingdoms refute the view that primitive groups are built on the exclusive basis of kinship, that the territorial tie is an extremely recent peculiarity of Hterate societies. In Uganda the kinship grouping by clans remained, yet government rested on the supremacy of the king and the realm was divided into minor regional units. Wherever a gifted primitive despot ruled by divine right, whether in Polynesia or in Africa, in theory he approached closely the modern ideal of a totahtarian state. In the New World authentic instances of such processes are rare. At the time of the Spanish conquest the Incas of Peru, claiming descent from the sun god, had achieved a state socialism which regulated economic organization in aU its details.

Even in ruder societies the concept of a territorial unit is dimly foreshadowed. The Ifugao of Luzon have been described an anarchists who regulate all social relations in terms of kindred. Were this so, two bodies
would treat one another as do two autonomous civilized states; no such independence. Fellow residents recognize definite obligations not to embroil one another in feuds with outsiders; while the thief from another settlement is killed outright, larceny within the village is merely punished by a fixed fine. Among Plains Indians also a nascent clan feud was not a matter of indifference to the rest of the community. The neutrals realized that the result of such dissension would be the inevitable weakening of the tribe and made every effort to restrain the warring kindreds. There is here no lack of local ties but rather an absence of
of kinsmen

but there

is

coercive authority within the local unit; persuasion takes the place of
authority. In

Luzon a go-between

unofficially attempts to mediate. In case

488
of a Plains Indian

ROBERT
murder the police

H.

LOWIE on

society merely urged a peace pipe

the victim's kin and conveyed the indemnity offered by the culprit's
family.

Although local contiguity creates union among

tie

preliterate peoples, the

of kinship unquestionably echpses

it.

It

precipitates

two group forms,

the family and several types of unilateral segment. The family consists of a
father, a

mother and

their children, the latter not being always biological

offspring but sometimes merely reckoned as such

by

legal fiction. In such

a group the children's relations are bilateral; that

is,

they are linked to

both parents. This

is

not true in the series represented by the lineage, clan

and phratry, in which the children, for certain purposes, are related to only one parent, the rule of descent varying in different tribes and areas. Theoretically a clan (sib) embraces the descendants of a single ancestor or ancestress, the sense of common descent leading to the rule of exogamy.
Actually
it is

often impossible to prove

common
among

derivation; at times the

clans folk are demonstrably constituted of several distinct bodies of kin.

It is also certain, as

Parsons has shown

Iroquois
Indians,

the Pueblos and Goldenoffice,

weiser

among
blood

the

that

succession to

loosely

described by earUer writers as following clan lines, really follows in a

line of
relatives. It

has thus become necessary to distinguish with

is,

Gifford the lineage, that

blood, from the clan

the body of persons composed of two or more

unilaterally related lineages.

by
of

The Hopi

Arizona present the case of a tribe subdivided into roughly equivalent matrilineal units, some of which are mere lineages while others, not necessarily larger, comprise more than one lineage. In the Pueblo area groups of diminished membership attach themselves to those in a more flourishing
condition, thus furnishing historical instances of
unilateral groups

how

originally distinct

may

fuse.

Clans often become associated through

interests into

common

social or ceremonial

major

units, called phratries, or

brotherhoods of clans. The

is,

bond within

the phratry

may be

relatively loose; that

the association

may

not imply more than an informal feeling of preferential friendship.

On
is

the other hand, the phratry

may be charged

with the most important

moitie)

functions.

The phratry becomes a moiety (French

is,

when each
two

clan

recognized as part of one of two major units; but moieties also occur
the entire tribe

without any subdivision, that

may

consist of

clans.

The moiety, or dual organization, appears typically in Australia, Melanesia and North America and is strangely lacking in Africa. In its typical form the moiety is a clan of major extent, whence follows the rule of exogamy. The moieties are complementary halves charged with reciprocal duties and privileges, a phenomenon which is important in conjunction with kinship rules. Given two exogamous halves, an individual's father is
in

one and

his

rules regulating his behavior to maternal kin

mother in the other; hence he connects with one moiety the and with the complementary

Social Organization

489

moiety the conduct he owes to his paternal relatives. Since etymologicaUy moiety means merely a half, it may properly be used whenever a tribe is
correspondingly divided into groups other than clans. Thus the Pawnee and eastern Pueblos have ceremonial moieties not connected with exogamy; and the Todas of India have endogamous moieties. The looser form of phratry is clearly but a secondary combination of clans. But when the phratry or the exogamous moiety has definite functions, the problem arises whether it may not be the primary unit from which clans arose by segmentation. The alternative is to postulate a later association of clans into a few major units. Both processes have occurred at different times. In some parts of the world overgrown clans split into
seceding bodies; yet so long as a sense of kinship persists, the parent group

and

its

off-shoots continue to

form a larger functional

unit.

On

the other

hand, distinct clans have merged into a larger body, as in the fusion of two
or more lineages

among

the Hopi.

Lewis H. Morgan was so much impressed with the intrinsic oddity of a unilateral aUgnment of kin that he postulated a single origin for the idea ^in striking contravention of his general evolutionistic philosophy, which
social law.

favored the multiplication of similar phenomena in diverse regions through

Morgan's theory as to the clan, which he called The family, he believed, was a recent development from a primeval state of promiscuity progressively tempered by reformatory steps. One of the major reforms was the institution of the exogamous clan, which barred marriage of siblings and also of more remote kindred within the clan. Finally, Morgan accepted the popular belief in the biological harmfulness of consanguine marriages; he contended that a tribe which eUminated this possibility by a clan system ipso facto would have a better chance of survival than its rivals, and that the advantages accruing from it would lead to its rapid dissemination. He and his followers asgens, implied several ideas.

some immanent

sumed

the priority of the clan over the family, although they did not put

Among the arguments adduced were the kinship terminologies of various peoples, which were said to be explicable solely on the basis of the supposed sequence.
the clan at the beginning of social evolution.

The distribution of unilateral systems does not bear out these hypotheses. The clan is a widespread but far from universal phenomenon and is absent from some of the rudest marginal peoples, such as the Andamanese pygmies, the Ona and Yahgan of southernmost America, the unequivocally simple peoples of the Mackenzie area, of Washington, Oregon, Nevada
and Utah.
there
is

On

the other hand, the family

is

is

of virtually universal sig-

nificance: whether the father

the putative or actual progenitor, socially

tie

always a male provider for the household, a differential

between

this functional father, his

spouse or spouses, and her or their offspring.

possible exception

found in some Oceanian islands, where the hypertrophied practise of adoption sometimes leads to doubt as to whether a
is

490
child belongs socially to

ROBERT
one or the other
set of parents;

H.

LOWIE

whatever the

ultimate interpretation of these facts

may

be, they are extremely rare

and

appear in communities far too complex to be regarded as samples of

primeval mankind. In the large and culturally diversified area, such as America north of Mexico, the rudest peoples lack clans; unilateral systems are generally associated with farming tribes and exceptionally complex
societies of hunters,

such as the THngit of northern British Columbia. In

Chukchi and Koryak are and have kinship terminologies which in no way suggest a pristine unilateraUsm; but the Yakut and other Turkic peoples, the felt making,
Siberia equivalent findings appear; the simple
clanless

iron smelting pastoral

lineal clans

nomads

of the area, are organized into rigid patri-

and phratries. On both continents unilateral systems appear as later grafts on an earlier family organization. In AustraUa, where clans generally coexist with the family, the same conclusion emerges from another line of argument. All individuals are here ranged in classes whose social behavior toward one another is fixed. A man treats the entire group of his real and potential fathers-in-law according to the same pattern determined by the kinship term he applies to all of them indiscriminately. Apparently such classificatory usage militates against the family principle. But social conduct maintains distinctions ignored in nomenclature. A man owes duties of the same kind to all his fathers-in-law, but the husband of his wife's own mother may claim differential treatment; the man is potential mate to a bevy of mothers'
brothers' daughters, but
if

possible he espouses the daughter of his

is

own
is

mother's

own

brother.

distinction

thus systematically
related,

drawn between
unit in daily

the next of kin

and those more remotely

and the true family

segregated from the rest of the camp.

life is

The most important

composed of a woman, her husband and the offspring he has the primary economic group and is likewise the one with the strongest sentimental bonds (MaUnowski, RadcUffe-Brown, Warner). The question of how the clan came to supplement the earlier family system may be answered conjecturaUy from a survey of clanless tribes,
that

fathered:

it is

with attention directed toward potential germs of unilateral alignment.

Such factors may be detected

Tylor, and of inheritance.

in the rules of residence, as described

by

Newly married couples

reside either with the

husband's or with the wife's parents or wherever they please. Simple

clanless tribes like the

Yurok

of northwestern California practise local

exogamy from a sense

fore bring wives

that all fellow villagers are hkely ultimately to

is

be

blood kindred, and the residence

theoretically patrilocal.

The men

there-

from other

villages, thus creating the core of

what under

favorable conditions might blossom into a full fledged paternal lineage;

and two or more such unilateral groups would form a typical clan. The Yurok never attained that condition because of two contradictory features. Residence was not absolutely patrilocal; if a man failed to pay an adequate

Social Organization

491
to serve for his wife in her village

bride price, he
to his

had

own

potential lineage. Equally significant

and was thus lost was the lack of a unifying

an intrinsically loose unit, because as the children grow up they inevitably found new families; and although in the agricultural communities of the Old World there are extended families formed of blood brothers with their wives and descendants,
designation for the nascent lineage.
is

The family

the girls are inevitably lost to their family

clan,

on marriage. The lineage or

however, operates on the principle of once a

member always

mem-

by affixing to each member an unmistakable and permanent badge in the form of a name. Hence these unilateral groups never lose their constituents, ticketed as they are by their group name. Even in China persons with similar surnames do not marry, a phenomenon plausibly interpreted as a survival of clan exogamy. Matrilocal residence would correspondingly create a core of a maternal kin. Where, as among the Hopi, all women bring their husbands to the bride's mother's home, a woman is united with her sisters, her and their daughters and the off-spring of these daughters. If such coresidents affix
ber, usually

common

label to all the children

is at

bom

in such a household, irrespective of

sex, a

maternal lineage

once

set off

from the

rest of the

community.

Not merely coresidence but common property

in this connection.
its

interests

may be invoked
Even simple

As soon

as property of a certain type is highly valued,

transmission tends to

become regulated

in a definite way.

hunting populations recognize such exclusive claims; for example,

families

Washo

own clumps

of pine nut trees

and Veddas reserve

to themselves

special tracts of land.

Here the

auxiliary principle of the sexual division

of labor helps to segregate the core of a lineage. Since

sible for the garnering of wild vegetable food, a

women are woman claiming

who

respona patch

for exclusive use

wiU exploit

it

with her daughters,

automatically

become her
is

male core of a paternal lineage segregated by the phenomenon observed by Speck among the northeastern
heiresses. Correspondingly the
tract.

Algonquin, the prerogative of hunting in a delimited

A common

name

for the children,

male and female, who are associated with such a

territory

would

define a true lineage.

This question leads directly to the problem of the relationship between

matrihneal and patrilineal descent. Lowie and Schmidt,

who

derives the

maternal clans from the horicultural

activities of

women,

treat paternal

and
dif-

maternal clans as having a distinct origin. Kroeber and Olson, on the other hand, do not postulate any necessary sequence of the two but see no
ficulty in the

change from one form of descent to the other. To earlier anthropologists the priority of "mother right" was a foregone conclusion; in the irregular conditions imputed to early cultures paternity would be unknowable, while the bond between mother and child could never be
ignored. But primitives are often not at
begetter of a child.
all

interested in

knowing who

is

the

Thus

in south Africa the purchaser of a bride ipso

492
facto

ROBERT
becomes the
is

H.

LOWIE

social father of her future children,

whether these are

legal
act.
is,

conceived out of wedlock or not, and

paternity

among

the

Todas of India

determined by a purely conventional rituaUstic

maternal uncle,

Likewise among patrilineal peoples the avunculate, that

the assignexercise

ment of
vival

significant functions to the

is

who may

parental authority,

interpreted by the earher anthropologists as a sur-

from an earlier matrihneal condition. But such avuncular privileges can be interpreted in several ways involving no such assumption. The specific powers of a maternal uncle are often balanced by those of the paternal aunt; and when paternal kin are charged with special functions in a matrihneal people, as, for example, among the Crows or Hopi, an earlier patrihneal reckoning could just as plausibly be invoked to explain the facts. Moreover the avunculate may often be the effect not of maternal descent but of matrilocal residence which has never ripened into a full fledged
maternal clan organization.

The

clan,

although sometimes a wholly secular institution,

may be

strongly charged with religious values.

Thus according

to

Laufer the older

form of Chinese ancestor worship probably consisted in the adoration of the heroic founder of a clan, who was supposed to watch over his descendants. Primitive peoples frequently have totemic names for their clans, and while emotional associations with the plant or animal eponym may be tenuous, they often assume deeper significance; in AustraUa some of the most serious rituals are Mnked with the clan. The unilateral system rarely occurs on the lowest levels but makes its first appearance in somewhat more complex cultures, persisting in preColumbian Peru with a definite pohtical organization and in the backward portions of Europe, such as the Balkans, in the most recent period. Founded on kinship, Hke the family, but capable of marshaUng far greater forces, it made or enhanced cohesiveness until it came into opposition with
the potentially
still

wider principle of local contiguity.

Associations in a measure paved the

way

for recognition of the principle

of local contiguity. In simpler cultures individuals are not ranged solely

according to either kinship or local

ties; as

Schurtz

first

pointed out, they

unite in associations according to sex, age

ests.

and

religious

and

social inter-

An
he

AustraUan boy

is

not merely a

member

of his family

and totemic

clan;

joins, possibly at

about seven years of age, the group of bachelors,

camp and whose example exerts As he grows older he advances to higher status by a series of initiation rites, in some tribes automatically becoming with age a member of the gerontocracy. The importance most
dwell apart from the rest of the

who

henceforth a deep influence on his behavior.

primitive tribes attach to the notion of seniority appears in the widespread

distinction

drawn between

elder

and younger brother and

sister,

which

is

not a purely terminological difference but reflects differences in attitude

and conduct. Thus the

levirate is a

common

custom, but often

it is

only the

Social Organization

493

younger brother

Yakut

of Siberia a
all

who is allowed to wed his elder's widow. Among the woman is forbidden to show herself before her father-

in-law and

her husband's elder kinsmen. Relative age, in other words,

determines status and so does sex. In a Yakut hut definite spaces are
Islanders a double

apportioned to the male and to the female inmates. Among the form of segregation appears; married couples

Andaman
live apart

from the unmarried camp mates, who are divided into a bachelors' and a
spinsters'

group

at opposite

ends of the settlement.

The Masai

of east Africa demonstrate in the

most

striking fashion the

inadequacy of the older view that primitive communities are

solely of clans.

made up

At

least as

important as their clan system, even in the

regulation of sex
either

life, is associational alignment. Every male individual is an uncircumcised boy, an unmarried warrior or a married man, and equivalent grades divide the women. The bachelors occupy a separate

kraal with the single

girls.

What

is

more, the individuals jointly initiated

by circumcision form Hfelong groups with fixed mutual obligations and rights. North American tribes outside the Mackenzie, plateau and basin
areas exhibit an almost infinite variety of organization. There are societies
of rain

izations,

makers and doctors in the southwest; the Plains have military organwhich in some tribes are divided into age companies as well as all

sorts of ceremonial fraternities; in the northwest

common

hereditary guar-

dian

spirits

lead to a regrouping of individuals during the season of the

winter festival. Melanesia has ghost societies and men's clubs, and Africa,
especially
in

the

west,

is

honeycombed with age

classes,

women's

societies
all

and

secret fraternities dispensing justice

men's and and sometimes

controUing

public

life.

Among more

advanced peoples the Chinese are

conspicuous for the inordinate number of their organizations; there are

religious

and

political societies, trade unions,

life,

perfected the code of business

merchant guilds which have mutual benefit associations for poHcing

the crops of a village or from organizing a hare hunt.

Although associations, territorial aggregates, families and clans have been treated largely as separate entities, they are often intricately and
intimately interlocked.

Hopi

fraternities are in a sense religious

associa-

tions; yet the higher offices in

them descend

preferentially in a maternal

lineage,

which thus constitutes the core of the group. Similarly, although clubs barred no one on principle, men tended to affiliate themselves with a society previously joined by some kinsmen. The Masai blacksmiths form a spatially and socially segregated pariah caste into which no Masai of ordinary standing wiU marry; they thus represent an inferior occupational subdivision, but affiliation may not be escaped by the group is a hereditary class of outcasts over and giving up the trade above its association with a despised calling. Such occupational castes are relatively common in east Africa, blacksmiths and tanners usually ranking as the lowest. Considering the absolute dependence of the natives on their

Crow miUtary

494
metallurgists for tools

ROBERT
and weapons,

H.

LOWIE

this position of the smiths,

is

Siberia are treated with the utmost esteem,

puzzling. It

by the
fall

fact that useful arts are often practised

who in may be explained by peaceful folk who readily

level.

prey to more warlike tribes and are then degraded to a lower

For example, when the cattle breeding aristocracy of Ruanda, interested in no useful occupation except animal husbandry, looks with contempt on the older farming populations, which perform all the other necessary
labors,
it

links occupational classes with fixed hereditary differences in

rank.

Among

the

Masai the warriors form simultaneously a standing army

and a status There are

class.

infinitely varied

ways

in

which a society may combine units

is

of different types.

The coordination or subordination

achieved with
individual

varying degrees of elegance, which can be appraised, however, only by

the assumption of an arbitrary subjective standard.

An

who

belongs simultaneously to two units

loyalties.

may be

confronted with a conflict of

affiliation

In primitive matrilineal societies lineage and family

are likely to clash.

Trobriander or a Tsimshian

is

legally

bound

to

transmit his most valued possessions to a uterine nephew, yet attachment

to his

own

sons, in a social

if

not in a physiological sense, impels him to

favor them to the detriment of his matrilineal kinsmen.

As Malinowski

has shown, such conflicts between love and duty

may

precipitate tragedy

among

simpler peoples.

On

higher levels the possibilities for antagonism do

class,

not disappear. Attachment to a religious body, an economic

idealistic fraternity,

an
is

may even evoke

I.

revolt against the state

itself,

as

illustrated

by the

attitude of a patriotic

German

Catholic during Bismarck's

Kulturkampf, of the
objectors to

W. W.

in the United States

and of conscientious

war

in

any

militaristic country.

As Vinogradoff has pointed

absolute sovereignty within

out,

the claim of the

modern

state

to

its territorial

limits is comparatively recent in

Europe.

new Scandinavian king

traveled from province to province in

order to gain the support of local groups.

Iceland, passed laws but

The

Althing, the assembly of

was impotent

to enforce them.

On

the continent

compulsory

arbitration, self-help

and outlawry preceded coercive measures.

Under Charlemagne
favorite

the

cases. In recent times the absolute

crown executed its own decrees only in specific supremacy of the state has become a

stitutional rights of

dogma, but practise often fails to tally with ideology. Ther conNegroes do not become realities in Mississippi any
the Eighteenth

more than

Amendment

achieved automatic recognition

through the sovereign federal government. The contrast appeared more

glaringly in imperial China.

Heaven, hence the source of

The emperor was all power and the

in theory the vice regent of

rightful claimant to implicit

obedience. Actually the viceroys of provinces were virtually independent

monarchs; the emperor was hedged in by the codified law, and

his oflficial

The Family as a Social Unit

acts

495

new

were subject to criticism by a board of censors, so that imposition of taxes was likely to meet with determined opposition. There are many parallel forms of social structure but few instances of far reaching duphcation through stage after stage in diverse areas; there
evidence of complex laws of sequence. Economic conditions hmit
life of hunters, and modem individualism tends bonds of the clan or the family, but beyond this
.

is little

the charactet of developments; highly organized states, for example, are

hardly consistent with the

to destroy the traditional
it is

difficult to generalize.

lesser bodies

split up into and married elders seems a priori plausible, and abstract psychological arguments have been adduced to show how natural it is to form secret societies. Siberian tribes seem to have been predisposed to such developments. There women were generally rated as inferior, had disabilities as to property rights and were even spatially set off in the household; notwithstanding their lower legal status, however, they were not excluded from public and ceremonial festivities, like their Australian and Melanesian sisters, but took an active part in them. Among the Yakuts, for example, female shamans ranked higher than male shamans; and in the great kumiss festivals women participated freely. Siberia is preeminently the land of shamanism, which has elsewhere led to the formation of secret societies; yet no such developments occur throughout this vast area. The only safe inference is that social phenomena pursue no fixed sequences, or at least that their sequences are

That

societies

should dichotomize on the basis of sex or

of uninitiated and initiated bachelors

so intricate as to elude perception.

The Family as a Social Unit

A FAMILY
IS

"the GROUP OF PERSONS CONSISTING OF THE PARENTS AND

their children,

whether actually living together or not" (Murray's dictionary). The concept may be enlarged to embrace "those who are nearly connected by blood or affinity," but such expansion makes for greater vagueness. Adhering to the narrower definition, let us ask whether human
society
tive.
life,

must a priori be constituted of family units. The answer is negaThere are sexually reproducing species without a semblance of family

hence the segregation of husband, wife, and child into a distinct group remains to be empirically demonstrated. As a matter of fact, the existence of such a unit in early man has been categorically denied by

From Lowie, "The Family as a Social Unit," Papers of the Michigan Academy of Science, Arts and Letters, Vol. XVIII (Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1933), pp. 53-69.

496

ROBERT
writers.

H.

LOWIE

many
license

In the beginning,

we

are told,

was promiscuity
inhibitions

sexual

unchecked by any interbreeding of parent and

restraint.

The
;

earliest

prevented

child; they

the union of siblings (brother

and

sister)

were followed by interdicts against and so by a series of reformatory

the

movements humanity monogamy, at least in

Unfortunately,

finally

attained

giddy

heights

of

Victorian

theory.
directly about the sex life of man's and a comparison of primate behavior, though
offers

we can know nothing

immediate

precursor,

definitely ruling out certain assumptions,

minimum

of positive

fact for the reconstruction of ancestral habits.

A
is

zoologist,

MiUer,

Jr.,

has recently brought together what

Mr. Gerrit S. known. He has proved

all

that, contrary to

a widespread misconception, virtually

the primates

observed lack a rutting season. Accordingly, it is in the highest degree improbable that man's immediate forerunner mated seasonally. Like his
fellow-primates, he

was presumably ready

it

to indulge in

amours whenever

an occasion arose. Furthermore, have

their counterparts

seems that recent human aberrations

among
fairly

primates, and their potentiahty

may

thus

well be a heritage

from a

remote past.^

From

available information, however,

we can
gorillas,

gather nothing to test

the theory of early

human

promiscuity. Indeed, the field observations on

the nearest anthropoids, chimpanzees

and

are indecisive

and

at

times contradictory as to the

traits of the

same

species.

Reichenow, for

example, credits the gorilla with

tiously suggests the possibility of

monogamous

habits, while
is,"

Akeley cau-

polygamy. "The truth

he wisely adds,

"that people

know

little

about the habits of the gorilla."^

Yerkes, with exemplary restraint, makes the following statement: "Our

tentative inference
is

that both

monogamy and polygamy

all

exist in

one or

another or aU of the anthropoid types and that in

probability both

relationships are discoverable in each of the manlike apes.

With many

misgivings
relation:

we propose

as order of increasing probability of

gorilla,

monogamic

gibbon and siamang,

orang-outan, chimpanzee.

Much

more

systematic, thorough,
will

and

critical investigation

than has heretofore

been conducted
of contrast

be essential to discover the

truth. Indicated as points

among

the three types of great ape are temporary

or polygamous relations in the orang-outan, relatively permanent

monogamous monog-

amous and

possibly also polygamous relations in the chimpanzee, and in

1 Miller, G. S., Possible Influence

"Some Elements of Sexual Behavior in Primates and Their on the Beginnings of Human Social Development," Journal of Mammalogy, 9 (1928): 273-292; idem, "The Primate Basis of Human Sexual Behavior," The Quarterly Review of Biology, 6 (1931):379-410. After writing this paper, I find that Miller's inferences are challenged by Dr. S. Zuckerman in Social Life of Monkeys and Apes (New York, 1932). The matter is one for zoologists to
2

decide.

Akeley, Carl

R, In

Brightest Africa (Garden City, 1925), p. 247.

The Family as a

Social Unit

497

the gorilla a patriarchal family, with

species
If

polygamy presumably in the mountain and monogamy, possibly, in the lowland species."^ we know nothing more positive about existing species, any dogmatic

conclusion as to the behavior of a hypothetical, extinct ancestral type

seems rash indeed. On one point, however, we can be certain. Whatever may have been the mating habits of this or that precursor of Homo sapiens, no believer
in evolution can

deny a stage of promiscuity somewhere along the hne,

is

that

is,

of promiscuity in the technical sense of socially unrestrained lust.

Anthropologically, there
ing the

no "index

of promiscuity," calculated

number

of actual mates, regardless of kinship,

by dividby the number of

physically possible ones.

Is carnal desire

From

this angle,
its

it is

a question of "all or nothing."

checked in some of
it is,

manifestations by the disapproval

no promiscuity; otherwise, there is. Take the case of a male goriUa which Akeley found with three females. The point is not whether the male cohabited with aU three females. It is rather this Assuming two of them to be his daughters, would the attitude of other gorillas be one of indifference or not? The situation is not inconceivable even on the human level. A widespread tale of Great Basin and Western Plains Indians revolves about this very theme. The trickster by his wiles
of the group? If

there

is

gains access to his

own

daughters. In the story, however, such behavior

arouses intense moral condemnation.

Now,

I,

for one, fail to find evidence

for such a social consciousness in either Koehler's^ or other data

from the

infrahuman plane.
cuous.

If this interpretation holds, the

anthropoids are promis-

no known group of Homo sapiens is indifferent to the sex behavior of its constituent members. Wherever evidence is

On

the other hand,

adequate, matings are judged

outlawed,

reprobated, condoned, accepted,

or definitely sanctioned. The definitely sanctioned forms of mating

may
are

be termed "marriage," and from them evolves the family.

fornication and marriage

Nowhere

submerged in an undifferentiated category of

animal-like "copulation."

goriUa.

chasm thus yawns between Homo sapiens and the chimpanzee or At what stage of evolution, then, was the leap taken from unI

judged to judged sex behavior?

do not know.

venture a guess that

Neanderthal
probable to

man showed some me

that

discrimination. I so conjecture because he

it

demonstrably had a social tradition as to craftsmanship, and

thus seems

he had Mkewise evolved norms of

social conduct. I

refuse even to guess whether Heidelberg man, Eoanthropus, Peking man, and Pithecanthropus displayed equal fastidiousness. I am content to believe that, somewhere between the more remote anthropoid ancestor and the
^Yerkes, Robert M. and

Ada W., The Great

1929), p. 542
f.

Apes, a Study of Anthropoid Life

(New Haven and London,

*r/ie Mentality of Apes

(New York,

1925).

498

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

more immediate hominid ancestor whose descendants constitute geologically recent humanity, there was a stage of uncontrolled sexual license. I am not sure whether I agree or disagree with Mr. Miller as to the
distance of this stage.

He

offers the

are specialized survivors and that

many

argument that living samples of men races have become extinct. Hence,

he

infers, "the

search

among

these specialized existing peoples for a race

or tribe living under social conditions that represent anything closely

resembling an unmodified reflection of man's primitive mentahty can have

httle

terms "man," "closely," "primitive mentality."

chance of success."^ Here everything hinges on the meaning of the I not merely admit but
tell

contend that Andamanese, Fuegians, Australians, and Chukchi nothing definite about the mentality of Piltdown or Peking man.
phatically insist that

us

em-

no one primitive group represents the

if

first

hominid's

mentality in unmodified form. But

such highly specialized groups as

Andamanese, AustraHans, and

say, to

others, without exception exercise social

control of sex hfe, then such control does not date back to yesterday nor,

4000

B.C., but,

presumably, to a period embracing the

earliest

samples of

Homo

sapiens, even though

some

of the races of this species

removed from direct observation. Time does not permit detailed consideration of more than one recent human society. I shall select the Australians, whose anatomical inferiority and crudeness in the arts of life have made them a favorite starting point for speculative historians on the origins of the family, religion, and what
are irrecoverably
not. Moreover, they have been credited with a form of sex hfe that might be viewed as intermediate between promiscuity and obhgatory monogamy,
viz.,

"group marriage." This institution has been defined as the nongroup of men with a group of women. It would not represent promiscuity, inasmuch as AustraUans would never tolerate unions of brothers and sisters. But anyone who favors the theory of
preferential mating of a

promiscuity in Aurignacian or Mousterian times would naturally regard

that mixture of polyandry

and polygyny involved

in

group marriage as a

step toward increasing control of mating.

On

the other hand, so long as a

whole group of men mated indiscriminately with a group of women, the family would remain non-existent as a social unit.
In the interests of concreteness
I

shall base

my

statement on what
living west of the

Professor Radchffe-Brown describes as the clearest available account of

Australian conditions, Warner's report on the

Mumgin

Gulf of Carpentaria.^ This picture

I shall

eke out with supplementary data

on the Austrahans and shall then proceed to cull relevant data from the Uterature on other groups. The questions asked will include the following:
5 Miller, G. S., "The Primate Basis of Human Sexual Behavior," The Quarterly Review of Biology, 6 (1931):400. Warner, Wm. Lloyd, "Morphology and Functions of the Australian Murngin Type of Kinship," American Anthropologist, 32 (1930):207-256.

The Family as a Social Unit

Is there

499

a form of marriage as distinguished from cohabitation?

are the social relations of

child?

If so, what husband and wife? Of sibhngs? Of parent and

To

begin with the Australians, no

is

Mumgin

is

free to

mate with

whom

he pleases, and in marriage he

status

always expected to obtain the daughter

of his maternal uncle. Failing such a one, a substitute of equivalent kinship

would be sought, for example, the daughter of a mother's male

cousin. Potential spouses

wants the

may be betrothed maximum number of wives safely

prenatally.

To be

sure, a

man

procurable, but they are never

chosen
at
all,

at random. In order to make social intercourse possible for them AustraUans always range individuals into kinship classes. So, even when the Murngin raid a hostile camp the kidnaped women are allotted to

men

standing to them in the socially approved relationship. Similarly,

is

adultery

almost always with a cousin of the prescribed category.

By

natural extension of these ideas, which rest

on the

social equivalence of

sibhngs of the same sex, a brother inherits his elder brother's widow, and
often the several wives of a polygynous husband are sisters or quasi-sisters.

Unquestionably there are "wrong" marriages among the Murngin, as

among

ourselves.

Yet within certain degrees prohibitions are absolute and,

is

apparently, never flouted. In other cases strong disapproval

man who would

carry on an intrigue with his "sister's daughter"

perhaps his third cousin's daughter

would be compared

voiced: a
actually

to a dog,

and the

woman would
noted.

be

liable to a severe drubbing.

Moreover, within the range of licensed unions a distinct ideal may be A husband may have several wives, but he ought not to seek amours with other women; and a wife is normally expected to content

herself with a single mate, her husband.

The

social relations of spouses,

furthermore, assume definite rights and duties.

wife gathers wild fruits

and small game; the

mentally,

man

supphes

fish,

turtle,

porpoise, dugong. Senti-

common

devotion to the children constitutes a bond; and even

apart from that factor indications are not lacking of an attachment reminiscent of romantic love.

In

all this

there

is

not the faintest suggestion of either promiscuity or

is

group marriage. The parental relationship

extended so that a woman's

sister may help her suckle two maternal aunt for food and care. This, however, develops quite naturally from the practice of sororal polygyny. But, though the principle of sibUng

babies; and, in general, a child looks to a

equivalence holds, the immediate family group

childless

is

distinguished. Thus, a

husband observes food taboos, which are hfted with paternity, "but the chUd must be his own, not that of a brother." (The term "own"
be discussed
later.) It is the father

in this context will

who

determines the

type of initiation for his son, passes on the right to certain dances, and
teaches the ceremonial routine. In short, a
in "his" children.

man

takes a differential interest

500

ROBERT

H,

LOWIE

The Mumgin thus recognize a family

it is

our family pattern.

sister

contrast at

unit, but that does not mean that once appears with regard to siblings.

can never be on terms of easy familiarity. A brother never sleeps in the same camp with her, and neither may address the other. Associated with such taboos we find the attitude of mutual helpfulness that to us seems altogether intelligible. A brother wiU give presents to his sister for her son and husband. Two brothers cooperate in economic purBrother and
suits and have a sense of joint ownership of property. This naturally in a measure embraces wives, but with such quaMfications as to exclude unchecked communism even between true brothers. No younger brother

appropriates a sister-in-law without permission.

The

elder brother pre-

emptively claims his maternal uncle's daughters.

quired two wives, the younger
to waive his legal prerogative.

When
may

he has thus acurge the husband

man

has a strong moral claim on the

there

next oldest sister of the household, and her father

Even here

is

thus definite customary

law, not license.

society

But a brother's attitude cannot be the same as ours in a which makes him look to his older brother as the provider of a
picture

mate, either after or during his Ufetime.

The family
in-law.

Australia, forbidding

all

would be further modified by the taboo, universal in social intercourse between a man and his motherlavish use

Yet, notwithstanding the

of such kinship terms

as

embrace fairly remote kinsfolk, the immediate family group is clearly separated from the rest of the community. A prospective husband tries, first of all, to marry his "own" mother's "own" brother's "own" daughter; and the uncle provokes resentment if he marries off a daughter to a remote nephew. We have seen that a married man's social status depends on his having "own" children. This distinction between near and remote kin of the same category holds throughout. Remote "brothers" ambush and slay one another, or at least suspect one another as potential adulterers; but between true brothers there is implicit trust and unfailing devotion. So in periods of ceremonial license distant, not "own," brothers participate in the temporary exchange of wives. Thus, at every step we stumble on clear-cut evi"father," "brother," etc., to

dence for the aboriginal feeUng that relationship to the next of kin
thing sui generis.

is

The

resulting family

is

a bilateral unit since, from the

sides.

child's angle, relations are

maintained with both parental

is

The condition described by Warner

not unique, but tyipcal for the

island continent. Malinowski's synthetic review''^ of the earlier literature

and Radcliffe-Brown's more recent summary^ leave no doubt on that point. Throughout Australia the nearest equivalent of our polical unit, the state,
Malinowski, Bronislaw, The Family among the Australian Aborigines; a Socio(London, 1913). 8 Radcliffe-Brown, A. R., "The Social Organization of Australian Tribes" (Oceania Monographs, No. 1, 1931), esp. pp. 4, 6, 11 flf., 103, 107.
'''

logical Study

The Family as a
is

Social Unit

501

a localized "paternal lineage" or "horde" owning and exploiting in coma definite

territory.

mon

Such a group embraces

as a

permanent core a

number of brothers with their sons, sons' sons, and so forth. The
of the group normally

women
Of

come from another

similarly constituted horde.

the children the boys remain, acquiring from early childhood that intimate

survival.

economic knowledge of the hereditary land which is a prerequisite to The girls marry outside their horde, so that female children are only temporary constituents of the group into which they are born. Within
horde, however, the aborigines recognize a lesser social

this clearly defined

unit, to wit, the individual family of parents

and

children.
it

"The important
provides for the

function of the family," says Radcliffe-Brown, "is that

feeding and bringing

up

of the children.

It is

based on the cooperation of

man and

wife, the

former providing the

flesh

food and the

latter

the

vegetable food, so that quite apart from the question of children a

man

v^thout a wife
on. This

is

in

an unsatisfactory position since he has no one to

supply him regularly with vegetable food, to provide his firewood, and so
partly this that explains

economic aspect of the family is a most important one and it is Austrahan polygyny. I believe that in the minds of
i.e.

the natives themselves this aspect of marriage,

sistence,
is

its

relation to sub-

of greatly
.

more importance than the

.
.

fact that

are sexual partners.

sexual relations between a

do not
I

constitute marriage in Australia any

more than

man and wife man and a woman they do in our own

society."

conditions

beUeve that the picture our foremost authorities give of Australian may be generalized for recent races of man. Twelve years ago I

wrote: "The bilateral family

society."^

is ... an absolutely imiversal unit of human These are strong words, but I still regard them as essentially correct. In only one area of the world am I able to detect phenomena tending to qualify this view. In parts of Oceania, where adoption plays an

extraordinary role, children are reported to divide their time more or less

evenly between two homes, thus participating simultaneously in two family

groups. I have recently taken cognizance of such facts, writing: "In this extreme form the custom [of adoption] inevitably modifies the principle
of the universality of the individual family."^^ Let us note in passing that

the exceptions occur in highly sophisticated horticultural societies which

cannot possibly be regarded as

illustrating

primeval usage; and that the

is

exceptions rest on a custom which by definition

derivative.

The general prominence

does not permit.
I

of the family cannot, of course, be demonstrated

without passing in review one primitive society after another, which space

should

like,

however, to point out one rather significant

If

North American phenomenon.

we examine

the kinship systems of the

p. 78.

SLowie, R. H., Primitive Society (New York, 1920),

10
1

Lowie, R. H., "Adoption, Primitive," in Encyclopcedia of the Social Sciences, (1930):459-460.

502

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE
com-

rudest peoples in North America, the purely hunting tribes devoid of

plex political, social, and ceremonial organization,

we

find that almost

uniformly they distinguish in speech the immediate members of the family

from the more remote

kin.

That

is

to say, while the Australians recognize

the distinction in behavior, the simpler North

American aborigines go so
is

far as to express the sense of the difference in their vocabularies: a father

is

not only treated differently from an uncle, but

is

designated by a separate

term; similarly, a brother

not included in the same term as a cousin;

and so

forth.

The

fact that the majority of non-horticultural tribes

from the
relatives

Arctic to northern California and

Nevada
is

fail

to

merge these

strongly suggests that the family unit

clearly recognized precisely

It

on the

lowest cultural level north of Mexico.

appears as though the family

its

enjoyed undisputed ascendancy at a very early period,

tion.

significance being

subsequently modified, though never abrogated, by other forms of organiza-

Thus, in Australia the partial equivalence of siblings of the same sex

its

readily qualifies the character of the individual family, though

sistence
is

per-

now demonstrated beyond

cavil.

Terms

for social units, such as "family," have misleading suggestiveness;

therefore I shall try to indicate the empirical range of the data properly

coming under

this

head. Let

me
its

first

explain that the biological family

is

not necessarily identical with

recently credited

social equivalent.

clever writer has

me

with a belief in the social omnipresence of the

biological family. She contrasts with this the saner view of RadcHffe-Brown,

who, while taking the biological group as the chief point of reference in a
treatment of social organization, "gives due weight to more complex develcharacteristic of many primitive societies."^^ Actually, there is no what is particularly important, both Radcliffe-Brown and I emphatically warn against attaching too much weight to the biological aspect of the unit. "Bilateral" and "biological" are not synonymous terms. When an Australian speaks of his "own" father, he does not necessarily mean his begetter at all, but the adult male whom he preeminently associated from infancy with a certain emotional behavior, economic activities on behalf of the household, and so forth. Elsewhere I have pointed out, on Rivers' authority, that among the Toda of southern India polyandry often makes the determination of paternity very difl5cult. But the natives do not care at all about biological paternity: that husband who performs a certain rite during his wife's pregnancy becomes legal father of all children borne by the woman until another husband goes through the same ceremony. "Biological paternity is completely disregarded, for a man long dead is considered the father of a child provided no other man has perfomed the essential rite."^^ So, in some South African tribes a man claims as his own legal issue the offspring of a duly purchased wife, even if she has for years

opments
conflict;

11

Mead, Margaret, "Family, Primitive," ibid., 6 (1931):65-67. i^Lowie, R. H., Primitive Society, p. 48.

The Family as a Social Unit

been
then,
living in adulterous

503
is

union with a lover. What counts, then,

not the

biological but the legal kinship.

The omnipresence
is

of the bilateral family,

is

means

this: Virtually

everywhere a male,

who

not necessarily the

procreator, and a female,

who

not necessarily the bearer, maintain

preferential relations to a given child or

number

of children, thus forming

a distinct unit within any major social group.

The

fact that substitutions for biological parental relations are possible

relatively frequent is

revelations

precisely one of the most outstanding which ethnography has to offer to her sister science, psychology. For it sweeps away once and for all the assumption of a paternal instinct. In its place we must recognize a much vaguer tendency of adult males to form an attachment to infants of their species.

and even

to

Toda and Bantu indifference to the identity of the procreator suffices mark off their conception of the family from that traditional in Western

civilization.

To

these natives the insistence

on recognizing

as one's children

only those duly begotten by oneself must appear as ludicrously irrelevant

physiological pedantry. Appraisal of the children's status
different considerations.

may

rest

on quite

Northwest Californian Indians the equivalent of the Occidental bastard is the boy whose father failed to pay the customary bride-price, for with that blot on his escutcheon he is never
Socially,

Among

permitted to enter the men's club house.

however, the family pattern

as the
tie

is

only moderately altered by the

the paternal prin-

lack of interest in physiological bonds. For, in the examples cited, one

male simply supersedes another

ciple.

embodiment of

In other words, a social

of our

own

parent-child relationship
definitely

category remains. That category

may be more

affected

by a

maternal clan organization. Where such an institution occurs, the bond

with the father and his kin
is
still

recognized, but

all

children are, jor

specifically,

certain purposes, reckoned as of kin only with the

mother and,

way may be set up a series of sentiments, of legal rights and duties, that come to compete with the parental ties and even enter into open conflict with them. By so doing
bear the

name

of her clan, not their father's. In this

they also inevitably clash with the family as an autonomous social unit.

This appears most clearly where the avunculate holds sway. There the

maternal uncle usurps, according to our notions,

and, correlatively,
it

many

paternal functions,

nephews and nieces that often stand him in a relationship we regard as fihal. Thus, he, and not the father, to may dispose of a girl's hand; he, and not the father, will give certain kinds of instruction to boys; and, though in some patrilineal African tribes, a
is

his uterine

man's son mherits his father's wives, barring only his own mother, certain matrilineal American and Melanesian groups permit a nephew to marry
the

widow

of his mother's brother.

To

take a concrete case, a

Dobu

in

Melanesia cannot bequeath his name, land,

son; aU of

status, or fruit trees to his

sister's son.

them

are automatically inherited

by a

man may

504

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

indeed teach his son what he knows of magical formulae; but to his uterine nephew he must convey such knowledge. ^^ Nevertheless, the sociological father is not abolished by avuncular customs. In the very region from which my last example is taken Professor Malinowski has demonstrated the depth of attachment linking father and son. The lurid and tragic conflict between paternal sentiment and avuncular duty has never been more vividly set forth. ^*

Another condition modifying the pattern of family life may be generunder the head of "sex dichotomy," which manifests itself in many ways. Among the Australian Murngin we found the rather widespread custom of brother-sister avoidance, which at once precludes one of the most typical forms of family intimacy in our civilization. But we also saw that such usage does not snap the bond which Unks siblings together: brother and sister may not chat together, but they do aid each other, and the brother is keenly sensible of certain duties toward his sisters. Another
alized

type of dichotomy separates husband and wife. In

many communities,

an Yet the Banks Islanders of Melanesia go further. Among them virtually every adult male has bought his way into the men's club house, which is strictly tabooed to women, while the men not only lounge and work, but eat and sleep there, paying
example, in South America and Oceania, spouses never eat together

for

arrangement almost inconceivable to

us.

intermittent visits

to

their

wives.

Notwithstanding

this

institution,

the

family

still

holds together, so far as a husband exercises definite rights

is

over his wife and

Generally,
is

bound

to her

and the children by fixed

duties.^^

we may

say that the universal sex dichotomy as to occupation

precisely a factor that fosters the family unit, for such division of labor,
its

with

frequently correlated part-time separation as to companionship,

obviously accrues to the advantage of the

common

household.

One

other significant feature must be mentioned as modifying family

relations.

There

may be

segregation by age or status as well as by sex,

or both forms of cleavage

may be combined. Among

the

Masai of East

Africa the bachelors occupy a separate hut, where they are joined by the

young
This
is

girls of

the village with

whom

they consort apparently ad libitum.

scientific sense.

promiscuity in the popular but not in the

their prospective wives,

For with

meticulous care the Masai abstain from sex relations both with kinswomen

and with

i.e.

girls

betrothed to them in infancy.

And

this

once more accentuates the persistence of the family concept.

license of the celibates'
corral,
it

For notwithstanding the

is

definitely

13 Fortune, Reo, Sorcerers of Dobu; the Social Anthropology of the Dobu Islanders of the Western Pacific (Routledge, 1931), p. 15. 14 Malinowski, Bronislaw, Crime and Custom in Savage Society (London and New York, 1926). 15 Rivers, W. H. R., The History of Melanesian Society (Cambridge, 1914), 1:60-143; Codrington, R. H., The Melanesians: Studies in Their Anthropology and Folk-lore (Oxford, 1891), p. 101 f.

The Family as a

Social Unit
settle
is

505

expected that every youth and maiden

down

in marriage after they

have had
life.16

their fling. Premarital

freedom

followed by regular family

In other areas, for example, in parts of Australia, only the boys are
separated from the married couples. Usually this takes place after an
at the age of seven. Relatively young boys some extent Uberated from parental influence and subjected to the precept and example of somewhat older members of their own generation. In Samoa the unmarried are segregated from married folk in distinct male and female groups. The bachelors cultivate the soil, cook for the masters of the several households, and perform necessary communal tasks. The female counterpart embraces widows and wives of commoners as weU as spinsters, and seems to have grown out of the custom of having companions of the same age groups and older chaperons sleep with a chief's favorite daughter.^''^ Again, among the Banks Islanders the men's club was divided into degrees, membership into each being acquired by purchase. Thus, there was a separation not merely of spouses, but of fathers and sons: normally a man would eat neither with his wife nor with his children, and a mother would be dissociated from her sons as soon as they had entered the club house, an act which was rarely deferred

initiation

ceremony, sometimes

are thus to

until adolescence.

terns in recent

have thus not merely admitted but stressed the diversity of family pathuman societies. This differentiation, however, virtually never militates against the principle that husband, wife, and child constitute a definite social unit set off from other Hke and unlike units in their
I

community.
Lest the oddity of some savage arrangements
of perspective,
it is

make

us lose our sense

weU

to recall historic changes in the concept of the

"family" as held by civihzed peoples. Certainly the Chinese are not lacking in a family sense, but
duty, of polygyny,
it is

coupled with notions foreign to us of wifely

and of concubinage. Scriptural patriarchs, too, were polygynous and concupiscent, but no one challenges the prominence of the family in Biblical times. Much nonsense is lavished nowadays on the destruction of the family by industrial civilization. Yet the legal ties between parent and child, husband and wife, are clearly recognized. What has happened is an alteration of the family ideals among large portions of our population. For better or worse, the change from rural to urban residence, the stress of economic conditions, an individualistic ideology, the partial abandonment of traditional rehgious doctrines have jointly affected
the relationships involved in the family concept. In the latter half of the
1^ Merker, M., Die Semitenvolkes (Berlin, '^'^ Mead, Margaret, Museum of Polynesian

Masai. Ethnographische Monographic eines ostafrikanischen 1910), pp. 44, 84. "Social Organization of Manua," Bernice Pauahi Bishop Ethnology and Natural History, Memoirs, Bulletin 76 (1930):

14,

92

f.

506

ROBERT

H.

LOWIE

eighteenth century Dr. Samuel Johnson, that paragon of Christian piety,

laid
it

down

as a principle that "wise married

women

don't trouble them-

selves about infidelity in their husbands."

He

considered a
fit

woman who

should turn the tables on an erring husband as "very

for a brothel."

These

ideas, I beHeve, are

I

What

should like to point out

no longer universally held with equal fervor. is that between the upholders of a double
is

standard and the

difference

modem

sex egalitarians the difference

roughly like the

between either and the Mumgin or Banks Islanders, Only those iconoclasts would fall outside the common practice who should consign infants to communal baby farming and who would not tolerate any but quite temporary sexual attachments. Such societies have indeed been reported with
proof.

much

extravagance of vituperation, but with great frugality of

A
1

few conclusions of general

interest

may be summarized:
that
it

We know

nothing whatsoever about the sex behavior of the immedi-

ate forerunner of

modern hominids except

norm.

very probably conformed

to the generalized primate

Specifically,

if

Mr.

Miller's

summary

is

trustworthy, this implies the lack of a rutting season.

2.

Though we cannot
sure that there

picture the sexual

life

of the protohominid,

we

was a stage of promiscuity, i.e. of socially unchecked sex activity. For, by definition, social checks are a characteristic of culture; hence before there was a culture there was, in the scientific
sense, promiscuity.
3. All the unequivocally rude tribes of the world Andamanese, Bushmen, Australians, Fuegians, Paiute have a violent reaction against in-

may be

cest with the closest kindred. It

is,

therefore, extremely probable that this

sentiment
4.

is

of great antiquity.
I

Nevertheless,

stinctively objectionable to

legal authority that the criminal calendar of

am assured on good Western nations shows relatively many instances of paternal lust directed against daughters; and if only one tenth of psychoanalytic evidence is rated valid, the Oedipus complex remains as a factor to be reckoned with. As regards siblings, we have at least three historic cases in which the supposed instinct was deliberately set aside ancient Egypt, Peru, Hawaii. In each of these aristocratic societies no mate was considered more appropriate for a ruler than
the one hand, I

no longer man.

believe, as I

once

did, that incest is in-

On

his

own

sister,

the only one, evidently,

who fuUy

shared his illustrious

pedigree.

The

aversion to incest

is,

therefore, best regarded as a primeval cul-

which certain individuals potentially or actually override in aU societies and which certain sophisticated societies have expressly disregarded in the interests of an inflated sense of aristocratic lineage. 5. There is no parental instinct. No man can know instinctively that he is the begetter of an infant presented by his wife. Demonstrably, savage
tural adaptation

The Family as a Social Unit

507
and
deliberately ignore the

men

in

many and

diverse societies utterly

question of physiological relationship while emphasizing that of sociological kinship.

The maternal sentiment seems

stronger.

Actually, economic pressure or the desire to avoid the

mate birth
kills

may be

Among
it

on a firmer basis. shame of an illegitithe Murngin, "Sometimes a mother

to rest
it."

her newborn babe because

has followed too closely to her others

and she has not enough milk to feed

to the

Here, as well as in

many

other

savage communities, the superstitious objection to twins invariably leads

immediate
is

killing of at least

one of them.
is

What
seen,
is

of course universal in the interests of group survival

a generic
just

interest of adults in children. This sentiment,

however, as

we have

not manifested by

all

members

of the species uniformly, but

may

be ignored by the superior force of utiUtarian rationalism or ideological

irrationalism.

that socially approved

Every known society distinguishes between mere cohabitation and form of relatively permanent cohabitation known as marriage. It may not be superfluous to point out that, as there is social
6.
is

fatherhood without the notion of procreation, so there

frequently social
inherit a

wifehood without physiological

so old that she
is

relations.

A man

may

woman

from a sexual point of view; nevertheless, she would engage in the feminine occupations with the other women of the household and would be entitled to protection and care on
unfit or undesirable

the part of

Africa a

its master. To cite woman becomes the

a concrete case,

among

the

Manyika

of East

property of her elder

sister's eldest son.

"He

does not cohabit with her, but otherwise has complete control over her.

where she does the usual woman's work for is encouraged to have a lover or even several." The children from such unions, it is interesting to add, are in no way under the tutelage of their biological father, but are wards of the man who inherited their mother; he, and he alone, receives the girls' bride-price and provides the boys with the wherewithal for acquiring a
keep her
at his kraal,

He may

him. She has no recognized husband, but

wife.is
7.

tions, the family

Apart from minor modifications or rare and highly localized deviabased on marriage is a quite general phenomenon in
of

known samples

Homo

sapiens.

man

socially functioning as a father

and husband practically everywhere combines with a woman functioning as mother and wife to provide for their common household and the children begotten by them or by legal fiction reckoned as their offspring. Since
this pattern is
it is

common

precisely to the unequivocally rudest

known

tribes,

presumably one of great antiquity in Homo sapiens. How far back it goes in his history and to what extent it even antedates him, no one knows.
University of California
18 Bullock, Charles,

The Mashona; the Indigenous Natives of

S.

Rhodesia (Lon-

don, 1928),

p. 65.

ALEXANDER GOLDENWEISER
(1880-1940)

Goldenweiser was described by one of his contemporaries as "the most philosophical of American anthropologists." He was born in Kiev, Russia.

His father was a Jewish scholar, active

widely read in

in

promoting Jewish cultural move-

ments. His early education was European, and he was widely traveled and

The European flavor to his thought and He was distinctly uninterested in salvaging the remnants of Indian cultures; the inconveniences and restrictions of life in the field were not for him, the recording of texts bored him to distraction. The library, the lecture platform, the coffee house these were his milieux. There was something of the perpetual European student in him the student who would go without dinner to buy a book, and go
languages.
habits

many

was never completely

obliterated.

without sleep in order to

talk.

Goldenweiser was preoccupied with theory. To him it had no national limits; he knew and used French, German, Russian and Dutch theoretical
writings.

His papers are models of logical presentation. The argument

in illuminating footnotes that

proceeds in perfect progression, the evidence carefully marshaled at each

step

and documented

spread out before the

reader the world of international scholarship.

However,

his theoretical writing

was somewhat

arid;

it

opened no new

avenues of investigation. Boas, against whom the accusation of negativism has so frequently been leveled by a later generation, constantly opened doors

on new problems. Goldenweiser, on the other hand, was less interested in exploring new problems than in ordering systematically and coherently the vast body of ethnographic data.
In 1922, Goldenweiser wrote Early Civilization, the
first

real textbook

on anthropology. It began by introducing Man. The first part of the book is taken up with brief accounts of five contrasting cultures. This arrangement suggests the growing concern with culture wholes, a return to the basic problem of man's inner world, and the variety of ways in which he orders his life on this planet. Goldenweiser, unfortunately, was never able to order his own life satisfactorily, and his problems of living interfered with his productivity. He never reached the full development which his unquestioned brilliance and learning promised. ^R.L.B.

508

Principle of Limited Possibilities in the

Development of Culture

509

The Principle of Limited Possibilities in the Development of Culture

THE CONCEPT OF CONVERGENCE, LONG FAMILIAR TO BIOLOGISTS, HAS
recently been applied to ethnological

phenomena.

In the following pages

I shall designate as

"convergence" or "genuine

convergence" the independent development of psychologically similar cultural traits

from

dissimilar or less similar sources, in

two or more

cultural

complexes.

When

the similarities between the cultural traits are not psychological,

I shall

but merely objective or classificatory,

speak of "false convergence,"

"Dependent convergence," finally, will be used of those similarities that develop from different sources, but under the influence of a common cultural medium. No attempt will be made in what follows to deal with the problem of convergence in an exhaustive way, nor to assign even speculatively the limits of applicability of the principle of convergence; nor do I propose
to present historically verifiable instances of convergence.

The following remarks

desire to formulate

are strictly theoretical,

and were born of the

a theoretical justification of the principle of conthe wisdom, nay the propriety, of such a discussion,

vergence.

Some may doubt

this

in the absence of concrete demonstrations, of convergence.

But does not

will doubtless

lack of historical evidence rather suggest the need of a theoretical

vindication of convergence?
still

When

that

is

achieved,

many
its

refuse to accept the principle, unless demonstrated historically; but

there wiU

odological principle
diffusion.

no longer be any justification in rejecting on a par with the principles

use as a methparallelism

of

and

THE LIMITATION OF

POSSIBILITIES

AND CONVERGENCEi
group usually leads to
a maze
is

superficial acquaintance with the culture of a

the impression of

great

complexity.

One

confronted with

From Goldenweiser, "The Principle of Limited Possibilities in the Development of Culture," Journal of American Folk-lore, Vol. XXVI, 1913, pp. 259, 270-280.
1 The central thought of this section was first expounded in a paper read before The Pearson Circle of New York, in 1910. Since then, the "principle of limited possibilities" has been made a frequent subject for discussion with a number of friends, of whom I shall name Professor Boas, Dr. Robert H. Lowie, and Dr. Paul Radin. Although I am not able to discern any specific contribution to the subject made by these gentlemen, I here express my thanks to them for their assistance in the clarifica-

tion of

my own

ideas.


510
of heterogeneous
ities,

ALEXANDER GOLDENWEISER
facts,

beliefs,

customs,

ceremonies, industrial activbrief

peculiarities

of dress.

But a

relatively

familiarization
first

with

the

same

culture sufl&ces to radically modify that

traits,

impression.

The

chaos of cultural

so bewildering at

first,

easily yields to certain

obvious forms of classification; the multiplicity of customs and beliefs

fined; industrial

found to follow certain patterns, usually few in number and well deand artistic activities resolve themselves into a number of characteristic processes, deviations from which are found to be exis

ceedingly rare.

No

sooner are these

it,

traits of a culture
first,

discovered than the

feasible. It is

task of describing

apparently hopeless at

becomes

indeed obvious that, unless the fundamental

nigh impossible, for

traits

of a culture were well

defined and Umited in number, a description of the culture would be wellit

would have

to consist in

an endless enumeration of

happenings, customs, beliefs.^

2 This limitation of the objective, and, as will presently appear, of the psychic, manifestations of a culture, must not be regarded as without parallel in other groups of facts. Language is a case in point, with reference to two of its aspects, phonetics and grammar. The number of sounds that can be articulated is practically unlimited; but in a language, only a definite and relatively small number of sounds is used. Obviously, this is not an incidental but a necessary condition of language; for, if the sounds articulated by the members of a group tended to vary all the time, no associations between clusters of sound and definite meanings could be formed, and there would be no language. Language as a means of communication of thought requires an automatic co-ordination between "ideas" and "words," which cannot exist unless the sounds used are fixed, and limited in number. The same applies to grammar. Of the unlimited possibilities of classification of experience that find expression in grammatical categories, a fixed and limited set is utilized in a language; and, if this were not the case, there could be no grammar. (Compare Boas, in Handbook of American Indian Languages, part i. Introduction, pp. 15-16 and 24.) Now, the same limitation in fundamental classifications and in the number and character of cultural features was shown above to apply to a culture. To point out a situation is, of course, not to solve it, but merely to direct attention to a problem, a problem which in this case has scarcely been broached. I shall here merely refer to culture does not merely comprise two factors which furnish a partial explanation. certain of the outer activities and psychic states of a people: it also involves a coordination between the outward activities and accompanying inner states. This co-ordination is to a large extent automatic. Indeed, unless this were so, every individual of the group would find himself in the position of a globe-trotter who visits a totally strange country, or of an ethnologist who for the first time comes in contact with an aboriginal culture. In fact, his position would be more precarious than either that of the globe-trotter or that of the ethnologist. He could not comprehend the activities of his surroundings: the motives of action, the standards of judgment and of values applied by others, would to him appear as a maze of

tantalizing puzzles.

This consideration, however, cannot properly be regarded as an explanation of the culture. It merely tends to indicate that this character of culture is not incidental, but, as in the case of grammatical structure and phonetics, essential to the existence itself of culture. principle of greater explanatory value is the importance of precedent in determining the course of culture. When a special form of social organization, style of art or mythology, develops in an area, not only does it tend to perpetuate itself, but it also becomes operative in checking other developments in the same sphere of culture. While the bearing of this factor ought not to be overestimated, in view of the un-

automatism of

Principle of Limited Possibilities in the

Development of Culture

511
units

When

several cultures thus resolved into their

component
is

are

compared, comes traits which proved so helpful in the

a further fact
in

to hght.

The

classification

of cultural

first

instance

found to apply

other instances

also,

although not without certain variations.

One
All

discovers that any of the cultures under discussion can be

in a treatise containing sections with similar headings,

described
less.

more or

comprise a social and ceremonial organization,

mythology, an
art, etc.

a religious

system,

The

fact that a description of all

is

according to a uniform plan

foreseen before the
the fundamental

possible,

the fact

human cultures that we can have

ethnographic monographs the general table of contents of which can be

book

is

opened,

this fact

alone sufl&ces to establish

and far-reaching psychic unity of man.

Several further facts presently appear.

culture
first

noted, that each phase of the culture

few weU-defined traits, is Not only do we find in each instance a social organization, a ritualistic system, an art, a body of myths, but we also find that the social organization resolves itself into a set of social or local units with definite functions,

The observation made on the is characterized by a supported by the evidence from other cultures.

and standing to one another

or at most of a
sents a certain

in definite

relations;
all

that the

ceremonial

system consists of a number of rituals which

follow the same pattern,

number

of such sets of rituals with similar patterns; that

is,

the art has a definite style, that

consists of a certain technique, repre-

more or

less restricted class of objects, or,

without repre-

senting any objects, consists of certain motives, quite definite in character

and

definitely correlated;

and so on.^

doubted tendency toward the differentiation of culture, it remains of the highest importance as a partial explanatory principle of the fixity and numerical limitation of the characteristic forms belonging to the various aspects of a culture. I made use of this principle in the pattern theory of the origin of totemism (American Anthropologist, 1912, pp. 600-607); Lowie applied it in an interpretation of the development of societies among the Plains Indians ("Some Problems in the Ethnology of the Crow and Village Indians," American Anthropologist, vol. xiv [1912], pp. 68-71); Wissler expounded the principle in a chapter on the "Origins of Rituals" among the Blackfoot ("Ceremonial Bundles of the Blackfoot Indians," Anthropological Papers of the American Museum of Natural History, vol. vii, part 2 [1912], pp. 100-106). 3 A word of warning is due here. The representation of cultures as given above may easily produce an exaggerated impression of the simplicity of culture. WhUe it is doubtless true that in every culture the characteristic and essential framework of the culture consists of a set of well-defined and numerically limited features; while it is no less true that the vast majority of cultural re-actions proceed and must proceed unconsciously and automatically, it must nevertheless not be forgotten that culture

changes, and that certain at least of the cultural elements constantly tend to rise into consciousness. If a culture consisted only of a set of perfectly fixed features, and if, within that culture, all associations and responses were thoroughly automatic, there could, of course, be no change, no advancement. The fact that the reverse is true indicates the presence of a cultural fringe, which, like the perceptional fringe, is less clearly defined than the essential nucleus of the culture, but which, unlike the perceptional fringe, lies more within the domain of conscious deliberation than the cultural nucleus itself. The presence of such a fringe, moreover, need not be merely

512

ALEXANDER GOLDENWEISER

Thus the impression of uniformity derived from the fact that all cultures are resolvable into a number of factors or phases which are practically fixed, begins to waver. As soon as we go beyond the formal classification, the similarities between the cultures seem to cease: each phase of culture
in a group
nizable.

shows certain

definite characteristics

which are readily recogcultures.

is

The sum

of such characteristics constitutes the individuality of the

culture

which thus becomes distinguishable from other

analysis,

With fiuther

however,

this

observation also

found to repre-

sent but part of the truth; for, as culture after culture passes in review, one fails to discover that multiplicity of elementary styles and patterns

of social organization, myths, ceremonies,

if

etc.,

which one might expect

the elementary factors into which the phases of a culture are resolvable

differed for

each culture. Instead, one soon observes that certain fundaif

mental cultural forms occur again and again; and,

the

number

of cultures

under observation is large, one presently becomes aware that the recurrences of such fundamental forms are exceedingly frequent, that the forms
lend themselves to a classification into a fairly small

number
culture.

of types,

which constantly recur as one passes from culture to

Thus one

postulated

on theoretical grounds, for its presence is well attested by our experience. These remarks apply even to the most primitive cultures. In the case of higher and more complex cultures, the application of the argument propounded in the text becomes increasingly difficult. In a primitive group consisting, as it always does, of a relatively small number of individuals, every individual represents almost the whole of the culture of the group, and the best individuals represent the whole of it. But

with increasing complexity, with division of labor, specialization of classes, religious, ceremonial, industrial, etc., it becomes more and more difficult for an individual, or small set of individuals, to be thoroughly representative of the culture of the group. The man, even in most primitive conditions, cannot do all the woman does, and vice versa; nor does he know all she knows, and vice versa. The priest, the medicineman, the basket-maker, the potter, tend to monopolize certain phases of culture with their concomitant knowledge, ability, emotional associations, which, to that extent, cease to be common possessions of the group. What we find in these still relatively primitive stages is more emphatically true of the higher civilizations. The gulf between what is called the "culture of a group" and the amount of it carried by any individual, or set of individuals, has grown to enormous proportions. Each one of us is thoroughly saturated with, and automatically responds to, but a very small fraction of the totality of our culture. Certain ideas and emotions as, for instance, the moral ones are shared by a relatively large number of people; although even here the variations from class to class, from group to group, are often considerable, sometimes radical. As to knowledge, even the most "cultured" among us would have to confess to a total ignorance of many intellectual and material acquisitions of what they call "their" culture. culture, psychically considered, may thus be visualized as a large series of partly overlapping circles, which stand for the actual cultural participation of individuals and sets of individuals, and which, together with their objective correlates, constitute the totality of the culture. These reflections do not invalidate the argument in the text referring to the definiteness and fixity of a culture and the numerical limitation of its features; but, to use again the analogy of the psychology of perception, while we may well choose as the object of our study the image which lies in the main line of vision and in the focus of attention, it may be of importance to consider the perceptional fringe, and it is always dangerous to ignore it.

Principle of Limited Possibilities in the

Development of Culture
of social units

513

finds that a social organization consists

(in the limited

sense), or of families, or of local groups, or of various combinations of

these units; that an art consists of carving, or drawing, or painting, or of a

combination of these; that the form of

alized, or purely geometrical; that, if

it is it

reaUstic, or semi-convention-

is

geometrical, either curves or

predominate or are used one to the exclusion of the other; mythology comprises epics, or animal stories with explanatory features, or nature myths, or traditional accounts of historical happenings, or creation legends, or several of these types together; and so on,
straight Mnes

that a

through the entire series of cultural forms.*

Still

deeper study would not

fail to

reveal a

much

larger set of similarities,

similarities

more

detailed, but scarcely

more

significant,

than those dis-

cussed above.

I refer to

the countless, often most striking, similarities in

fill

custom,

ritual,

behef, myth, which

the scholarly volumes of a Tylor,

a Lang, a Hartland, a Frazer, a FarneU.

have now established the following facts that have a bearing on problem of convergence. The objective manifestations of a culture are limited in number, and are readily amenable to classification into a set of types. The different phases of a culture are characterized by certain definite features, the sum of which constitute the individuality of the culture. Practhe
tically the

We

same

classification of cultural traits applies to all cultures.

The

characteristic features

which distinguish the different phases of a culture are not specific in each culture, but show marked similarities, and can be classified into a number of fundamental cultural traits which are found again and again in different cultures. Of the above generalizations, the two of greatest importance for our immediate problem are, the one, that which refers to the Hmitation in number, and definiteness in type, of the concrete manifestations of a culture; the other, that which speaks of the similarities obtaining between
such concrete manifestations of different cultures.
If,

now, we leave the descriptive aspects of culture;

if

we

turn from a
experience,

consideration of cultural features as ascertainable by

modern

or by cross-sections of cultural developments by means of historical reconstructions of certain definite periods or stages,
4

and

fix

our attention upon

plausible objection to the

tions referred to in the text artificial?

argument must be met here. Are not the classificaAre they not altogether determined by the point

of view from which we analyze culture? Is not, therefore, the limitation of features in a culture, resulting from such classification, illusory, and the entire argument purely formal? These remarks are justified in so far as our classification of cultural features is certainly determined by a definite point of view. It is also true that other conceivable view-points would lead to different forms of classification. The argument in the text, however, is not invalidated by these considerations; for, whatever the point of view, whatever the resulting classification of cultural features, the culture would characterization of a culture as outlined above would hold true. always embrace a limited set of features definite in type. If so much is granted, we may safely pursue our argument.

514
the historical antecedents of culture,

ALEXANDER GOLDEN WEISER

nomena
fiable,

changes.

It

becomes

at

once apparent that the historical and

that are objectively veri-

psychological sources of cultural traits

some

the aspect of the observed phe-

and some that are merely probable or possible are much more multiple and multiform than the cultural features that face us in an individual culture. This multiplicity and multiformity of sources of develop-

ment

is,

of course, nothing but the cumulative result of the multiple

possibilities of origin

and development of any individual

cultural feature.

As this observation is of crucial importance for the subject at hand, we must dwell on it for some time. The oft-quoted instance of taboos may again serve as an example. The prohibition to eat or kill certain
animals, a cultural feature almost universal in
its

distribution,

may
is

develop
sacred,

from, for instance, the following sources:^ the animal, as such,

as, for instance,

snakes in India, and cats in Egypt; the animals are believed

to

African Bantu; the animal

in the

be incarnations of ancestors, as again in Egypt, or among the South is a totem, as in innumerable instances; the spirit, as commonly among North American Indians, animal is a guardian

Banks Islands, etc.; the animal is associated with evil spirits, as the Aranda in the case of some few animals that are not totems; certain animals must not be killed or eaten during a particular season, as among the Eskimo, where caribou must not be killed, eaten, handled, during the season when sea-animals are hunted, and vice versaf the animal is regarded as an ancestor, as in many totemic communities where the taboo applies to a clan or a family, as well as in some non-totemic groups where the idea of descent refers to the entire tribe; the animal is unclean, as the pig among the Jews; the animal is too closely akin to man, as in modern ethical vegetarianism the animal is too closely associated with man, as the dog or other pets; pregnant women, boys before initiation, women after first child-birth, etc., must not eat certain animals for various reasons; the animal is a sacred symbol, as the dove in Christianity; and

among

;'^

so on.

The
tribe
strife,

possible

origins

of a clan

system or of individual clans

may

furnish another illustration.

clan

may

arise

as

a subdivision of a
tribe,

through migration due to excess of numbers in the

or the quest of
clans
is

or internal

new

of

new

plentiful,

on

hunting-grounds,

etc.

Evidence of such origins

the Northwest coast,

among

the Iroquois

5 In the absence of data as to historical origins of animal taboos, the above examples are adduced to suggest the wide range of psychological settings of such taboos. It is highly probable, however, that most of the psychological connotations of taboos here given have at different times and places figured as the psychological

sources of taboos. The source of these taboos, as Professor Boas suggests, was probably separation of the two forms of activity, which became standardized, and form of a taboo. 7 This and similar instances do not, of course, have the character taboos; but the instances may be cited here as psychologically cognate

the habitual

assumed the
of absolute

phenomena.

Principle of Limited Possibilities in the

tribes,

Development of Culture

515

and elsewhere. Or a phratry organization, comprising two or more major subdivisions of a tribe, may already be in existence, and the clans may arise as subdivisions of the phratries. That such was the origin of
clans in

more than one

tribe in Australia seems, at least, highly probable.

Or

a clan

may be formed by

the fusion of fragments of depleted clans,

of which process, again, the Northwest coast people, the Iroquois, the

abundant evidence. Or a clan system may spring up group of villages, which, by assuming various social and ceremonial functions and becoming closely associated with one another, become socialized, and assume the role of clans in a clan system. That
Siouan
tribes, offer

on the

basis of a

such was the history of the clan systems of the Coast Salish and Bella

Coola can scarcely be doubted, unless, indeed, among the latter the formation of a clan system out of an original tribal association of villages antedated their migration to Bentinck Arm. The same type of development must be assumed also for the Lillooet, Shuswap, perhaps also the Athapascan Tahltan, among all of whom the first impetus and continued stimulation in the direction of such development were given by the suggestive influence of the coast culture.

An

alternative possibility of the develop-

ment

of a clan system out of a group of villages

must

also

be mentioned.

As

have referred to

this

process on another occasion, the passage

may be

reproduced here: "In the course of social evolution the transformation of such loose local groups into a clan system must have occurred innumerable
times.

With increasing
first

solidarity the local

groups would gradually assume

the character of at

vague social

units.

Through intercourse and

inter-

marriage between the groups, with or without exogamy, the individuals

would become distributed in the different localities. Thus a foundation would be laid for a clan system, which in time would become fixed and rigid."^ We need not repeat here the arguments for the multiple origin of
exogamy.^

The

field of art supplies plentiful illustrations of similar nature.

One

will sufl&ce.

realistic

design

may

originate as an attempt to represent

an animal in life-like form; or it may be part of a pictograph designed to convey the content of a myth or an occurrence; or it may result from a process of reading a realistic significance into a geometric design, which
process, in
its

turn, leads to a modification of the design in a realistic sense.

In groups, on the other hand, where realistic designs are already in vogue,
the execution of reaUstic figures in each generation
is

due to a reproduction

of the precedents of the preceding generation.^*^

^American Anthropologist, vol. xiv (1912), p. 605, footnote 1. Compare Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol. xxiii (1910), pp. 245-247. 10 It is, of course, apparent that very few of the "origins" here suggested are historically verifiable. The procedure adopted in the text may thus be objected to as altogether hypothetical. Now, it must at once be granted that, in individual instances, the possible or plausible development is no criterion of the historic event. This, however, does not apply when the possibilities of origin and development of ethnic
8

516
Examples
like the

ALEXANDER GOLDENWEISER
above could be multiplied ad infinitum, but
it

will

probably be admitted without further specification of the argument, that

the historical and psychological sources of cultural traits are

much more

multiform than the

realistic designs,

traits

themselves, objectively considered, in any one

culture, or in several cultures that are being

compared. Taboos, clans,

are found

among many
all

peoples; but the origins, both

historical

and psychological, of

these features, are multiform. It thus

appears that the cultural features, as they occur in concrete cultural complexes, constitute,

when compared
is

to the multiplicity of their sources,

is

limitation in the possibilities of development. In other words, there

con-

vergence,

for

convergence

the

development of cultural

similarities

which

arise

from

different sources. Considering the relatively small

ber of aspects that the different phases of culture assume, the

numnumber of
only

such convergences must be exceedingly great. But so

referred to

far,

we have

phenomena

of a generalized character, such as clans, taboos,

realistic designs. If,

existing cultures,

we

now, we turn to cultural features as actually found in observe that they are always more complex than the

generalized features referred to above.

The complexity

consists in the

elaboration of the feature

etc.,

itself

through various functions, specifications,

as well as in the co-ordination

between separate features. Now, a

survey of cultures shows notable similarities also between such complex

features

and combinations of

features.

The more complex a

feature, either

in itself or through association with other features, the greater the

number

and psychological sources; for every definite aspect, every function of a feature, may itself have multiple origins; and, similarly, the association of several features may proceed along quite different lines, different in origin, in mechanism, in the chronological sucof
its

possible historical

cession of individual events.

Any

attempt to correlate the similarities

between

different cultures in such

complex features imposes the principle

of convergence with even greater force than in the case of the

more simple

and general
It will

cultural traits.

be observed that so far the objective manifestations of cultures

from a more general standpoint. The study of
sociological

features are considered

have revealed, with varying degrees of clearness and certainty, a large number of tendencies and developments resulting in certain cultural features. With these fairly well understood processes as guidance, a much larger number of possible processes of development may be constructed. We must,

phenomena and

historic experience

theoretical grounds

of course, allow for the fact that some of the processes regarded as possible on may never have occurred; but, on the general theory of probability, a large majority of the processes suggested as possible or probable by theoretical study or concrete experience, must actually have occurred in the course of cultural development. Moreover, the origins and processes that have occurred must, in number and variety, vastly exceed our hypothetical reconstructions; for, whereas some of the latter may never have been realized, many developments must have taken place in the course of the historic process, which never occur to us as possible, on account of the limitation of our knowledge and experience. I trust that these considerations fully vindicate the methodology of the foregoing pages.

Principle of Limited Possibilities in the

Development of Culture

517

alone have been considered: in other words, the convergences invoked

may, after all, prove to be false convergences. have clans that have sprung from different sources and also remain different in their functions; one clan may regulate marriage and the election of chiefs, the other may be associated with ceremonial and
to account for the similarities

We may

religious or mythological ideas

and

practices.

The resemblance,

then,

would

be of that

superficial,
:

formal kind characteristic of false convergences.

Similarly with taboos

animal taboos of heterogeneous origin and development may also differ in their psychological connotations; the one may emanate at a given time from the conscious prescription of a chief, the other may be based on the totemic character of the animal. Again the convergence would be purely objective. But if, in these or similar instances,
the cultural features, while of different derivation, acquire a similar psychological content, or, in case of social divisions, similar functions, the case
is

one of genuine convergence. Another circumstance must here be invoked to show that convergences of this latter type, genuine convergences, are more likely to arise than

would

at first sight appear.

have so far spoken of the objective manifestations of cultures; that is, of cultural manifestations as viewed by the investigator who is satisfied to describe what he sees without following up the precise cultural
setting or psychological content of the

We

observed phenomenon. Now, when

these latter aspects of culture engage one's attention, he finds what

we
the

have already established for the objective cultural manifestations:

psychic settings of cultural
traits are also limited in

number

in each culture,

and

to a considerable extent similar in different cultures.

We

find that

social divisions (whether clans, phratries, families, villages) regulate

riage,

mar-

figure

as ceremonial, rehgious,

political units,

exercise reciprocal

functions at burial, games, feasts, contests, etc. These functions, either in

isolation or in different combinations,

occur everywhere in connection

with social divisions; and often in quite different cultures the same individual functions, or even combinations of functions, occur in connection

with the same kind of social divisions. These facts are too
require specification. But the
functions, ideas.
classes, are

weU known

to

same

also applies to other customs, activities,

The functions of religious and military societies, clubs, age hmited in number, and recur in different groups. The varieties of interpretations of designs, reahstic and geometrical, are strictly Umited in each cultural area, and similar interpretations occur in distinct areas. The forms and psychic contents
between
burial,

of initiation ceremonies, of

all

rites

de

passage, are no less similar within separate cultures, and, to a high degree,
cultures.

The ceremonial

cycles attending birth, marriage, death,

are quite as characteristic of cultural areas;

details,

and many of the and magical

ceremonial

with their concomitant interpretations, are facts of wide

barter, legal procedure

distribution.

Mechanisms of trade and

518

ALEXANDER GOLDENWEISER

rite, behave in no different manner. Thus the psychic aspects of culture, when compared to the multiplicity of their possible psychological and

historical origins, constitute a further limitation in the possibilites of devel-

opment.

The

set of facts just referred to,

when

correlated with the limitation of

forms in the objective manifestations of culture, constitute irrefutable evidence of genuine convergence. The evidence, in fact, points not merely toward the reality of genuine convergence, but toward its inevitableness

and frequency.^^ But the case of convergence does not

rest there.
I

Of

the

more involved manifestations of convergence,

propose to

deal briefly with one,

the totemic complex.

It

has been shown that the

as derived

separate features entering into the composition of a totemic organization

are cultural traits

which

in

no sense may be regarded

from

totemism. Clan exogamy, animal names of social groups, behefs in descent

from an animal, are features of complex historical and psychological derivation, which, under certain psychosociological conditions, enter into intimate association with one another, thus constituting a totemic complex.^2 Now, when totemic complexes in different cultural areas are compared, one finds certain rather marked similarities in the component
features of the complexes, as well as a
certain forms of socialization,

much more
of

striking similarity in

by means

which the totemic features

become consolidated
re-interpretation

into a morphologically integral system.^^

in totemic

But over

and above these resemblances there occurs

complexes a psychic

and assimilation of

cultural features

which transforms

11 In his "On the Principle of Convergence in Ethnology" (Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol. xxv, pp. 37-38), Dr. Lowie refers to the principle of limited possibilities, and illustrates it by a number of examples. An analysis of these examples will show that a physical or logical limitation of possibilities is involved in each instance. Descent can be either maternal or paternal; there must be either evolution or permanence of species; the number of ways in which a skin membrane can be fastened to a drum is limited; etc. The same idea is expressed by A. Haberlandt in his "Prahistorisch-ethnographische Parallelen" (Archiv fiir Anthropologic, vol. xii [1913] pp. 1-25), where he speaks, for example, of the limited possibilities in the development of arrow-points, most of which have been realized at some time or other {Ibid., p. 10), or of the conditions that must be satisfied by every sword-handle {Ibid., pp. 7-8). How wide an application can be made of this principle may be gathered from its use by Dilthey, who believes in a logical limitation of possible systems of philosophy (cf. also Boas, "Anthropology," Columbia University Press, 1908, p. 24). The principle of limited possibilities as formulated by these authors must, from the point of view of convergence, be regarded as a special instance of the principle expounded in the text. Wherever the sources of development are many, and the possibilities of the results are limited through the operation of logical, objective, or cultural factors, there must be convergence; and the greater the possible number of sources of development, and the smaller the possible number of results, the stronger is the case for convergence. 12 See "Totemism, an Analytical Study," Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol. xxiii (1910), pp. 264 et seq. i>^ See "The Origin of Totemism," American Anthropologist, vol. xiv (1912), p. 603; and "Andrew Lang on Method in the Study of Totemism," Ibid., p. 384.


Principle of Limited Possibilities in the

Development of Culture

519

these totemic organizations into strictly comparable cultural complexes

lying,

as

it

were, on the same psychic plane. This re-interpretation of

by the totemic medium, finds expression and felt as totemic features by the totemites. Whatever the derivation of British Columbia carvings, whatever the sources of their clan myths and ceremonies, these traits are for them expressions of their totemism. The magical ceremonies of the Central Australian are for him indissolubly fused in his totemic circle of participation. And so with other features and other totemic complexes. The real comparability of totemic organizations is thus seen to be based on these two facts on the one hand, the consolidation of totemic features through the merging with a definite form of social organization, the totemic association; on the other, the re-interpretation of the features in the spirit of the totemic medium, the totemic assimilation. Totemic complexes must, then, be conceived as products of convergent
features through their assimilation
in the fact that the features are conceived
:

developments in three

distinct respects:

the separate features in the dif-

ferent complexes involve convergence; the typical totemic social structures

with their features, which in different complexes develop in different ways,

involve convergence;^* the totemic atmosphere, finally, with
its

psychically

transformed features, involves convergence.

Similar psychic transformations, of a

and leading

to convergence, could

more or less temporary character, be studied in feudal systems, revolu.

tionary periods, wars, financial panics.

14

The

socio-psychological factor responsible for this association of the social sys-

tem with totemic features has been referred to before as the tendency for specific socialization ("Exogamy and Totemism defined: A Rejoinder," American Anthropologist, vol. xiii [1911], pp.

596-597). The tendency

itself,

then,

is

not the product

of convergence.

CLARK WISSLER
(1870-1947)

New World

Origins

THE ULTIMATE GOAL OF [ANTHROPOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION] ... IN THE NEW World is the discovery of the origin of the Indian and the causes and conditions leading to the development of his culture. Though thus simply
complex A great array of facts must be condraw upon the resources of zoology, geography, and geology, before the various parts of the problem can be formulated for critical consideration. As to the origin of the New World man himself, we have achieved one point: viz., that he migrated hither from Asia where his nearest relatives still reside. Yet, we are far from the truth as to the exact relationship between the Indian and the Asiatic, and have still much
stated, the

problem

is

truly

sidered and one must

to learn as to his

own
main

subdivisions.
facts before us

Now, with

the

and recognizing that the

differentia-

tion of cultures

is

a historical phenomenon,

we

should be able to project

the general outlines of man's career in the

New

World. Recalhng our con-

clusion that the Indian

came here from Asia

at a relatively recent period,

we

find ourselves confronted with the question as to

what elements of

culture

man

brought with him when he crossed over to America. Even the

it is

casual reader wiU be impressed by the close general parallelism between

the two halves of the world, and,
else, that

this

obvious fact more than anything

has stimulated speculative writings upon the subject. Repeated

efforts

New World

have been made to show that all the higher culture complexes of the were brought over from the Old, particularly from China or the Pacific Islands. Most of these writings are merely speculative and may be ignored, but some of the facts we have cited for correspondences to Pacific Island culture have not been satisfactorily explained. Dixon has carefully reviewed this subject, asserting in general that among such traits as blowguns, plank canoes, hammocks, betel chewing, head-hunting cults,

From
520

Wissler,

New World (New York

The American Indian, an Introduction to the Anthropology of the and London: Oxford University Press, 1938), pp. 378-388.

New World
and the

Origins

521

the men's house and certain

masked dances common

to the

New World

mass upon the Pacific side of the New World. This gives these traits a semblance of continuous distribution with the Island culture. Yet it should be noted that these traits, as enumerated above, have in reality a sporadic distribution in the New World and that there are exceptions. On the other hand, there is no great a priori improbability that some of these traits did reach the New World from the Pacific Islands. Satisfactory proof of such may yet be attained, but such discoveries would not account for New World culture as a whole. Then there are abundant data to show that the Polynesians are recent arrivals in the Pacific; in fact, Maya culture must have been in its prime when they were within striking distance of the American coast.
Pacific Islands, there appears the tendency to

In the preceding discussions,

the fundamentals of culture for

we found
all

evidences of a certain unity in

parts of the

New

World, and unless

we

among these some fundamentals that are Old World, we need look no farther than the New The Old World also has its fundamental traits,
find

also conspicuous m. the

for their place of origin.

particularly the ancient

cultures of Asia, but so far,

few close

parallels

between these and those

traits is

have come to Mght. Again, the originahty of many New World when our subject is viewed from the cultural horizon of the Old World. It has been very aptly said that the fundamentals of Old World culture are expressed by the terms "cereals, cattle, plough, and wheel." Yet, what have we found in the New World that can be set down as specifically similar to these? We are left, therefore, little choice but to recognize that the cultures of the New World peoples were developed
of the

New

apparent

independently of the ancient centers of higher culture in the Old.

The old argument

view
is

against such a conclusion

was

that the barbarous

Indian was incompetent to develop the cultures of Yucatan and Peru. This

now somewhat

antiquated, but

still

lingers as a kind of intellectual

reaction in the minds of

modern Europeans. Perhaps back of it is a habit of thought, since in Old World culture, in which we ourselves Uve and think, fundamental traits are often found to have a single origin. For
gunpowder, etc., seem to from which they were diffused. Yet, in contemplating New World culture we must not forget that the comparisons between the two hemispheres should be specific. It will not do, for instance, to say that because agriculture is found in both the Old and New Worlds one must have been derived from the other, for we are here dealing with a mere abstraction, like eating, writing, fishing, etc. The proper method is to examine the agricultural traits found in each hemisphere. Thus, one basic factor in agriculture is the development of specific food plants. Let us, therefore, compare the plants cultivated by the Indian with those grown in the Old World. De CandoUe has listed more than forty plants grown by the Indians
glass, printing,

example, the horse, ox, wheat,

have had each a

single place of origin

522

CLARK WISSLER
to the

whose wild ancestors were, without reasonable doubt, peculiar

New

World.

On

the other hand, the ancestors of the leading food plants

of the Old World have been found peculiar to it. Thus, we find that each hemisphere developed agriculture by drawing upon its own peculiar flora

and that in consequence

1492.
other

their seed lists

had nothing

in

common

before

Now, when we consider the rapidity with which maize, tobacco, and New World plants were taken up in the Old World after the com-

memorable voyage of Columbus, it is scarcely conceivable that the peoples of the two hemispheres could ever have been in contact without exchanging some of their seeds, and certainly impossible to assume that the agriculture of the New World was directly derived from the Old. But our case does not rest upon this one observation, for there are
others of almost equal weight.

The wheel

is

a fundamental concept in the

is

Old World and

clearly of great antiquity, but

its

singularly absent

from the

New

World, even

spinners and potters failing to grasp the principle.

later,

The use of iron is another, though perhaps World that remained peculiar to it. However,
for the peopling of the

invention of the Old

the facts of cultivated plants

and the wheel, which must be very ancient in origin, make a strong case New World either at a very remote period or by wild tribes only, such as might arise from contact between the historic tribes of Alaska and Siberia.

On

the other hand, the

New World
;

peoples did achieve some of the

making of bronze and castmethods of weaving and dyeing. It is sometimes objected that the knowledge of these traits could have been handed over or relayed from southern Asia to Mexico by the intervening wild tribes; but this seems fanciful, for while we do find certain traits spread over adjacent parts of the two continents, as the sinew-backed bow, the bow-drill, the magic flight myth, the opium type of smoking, all of which are considered as of Asiatic origin, their distribution is continuous from Alaska downward, and fades out before we reach the southern continent. Further, it has been assumed that the ideas underlying a trait could be carried along as part of a myth and so pass from one of the higher cultures of Asia to Mexico by way of Siberia and Alaska. There is no a priori improbability in this notion that specific ideas can be carried from
specific inventions of the Old; for instance, the

ing gold, silver, copper, etc.

again, in certain

tribe to tribe as constituent parts of mythical tales.

The

diflficulty is

that

notwithstanding our very complete knowledge of typical tribal mythologies,

we

are so far unable to find examples of such extensive transtraits.

missions of the process concepts underlying specific culture

As we

have noted under Mythology, myths do seem to have carried a few mythical conceptions from the Old World to the New, but these have re-

mained

as

mere parts of
is

tales

and do not function

in practical

life.

Hence, the general condition for any interpretation of Old and

New

World

relations

the full recognition that their great culture centers were

New World
well isolated

Origins

523

by a complex chain of wilder hunting peoples and that direct modem means of transportation. Only such traits could, therefore, filter through from one to the other as were assimilated by these more primitive tribes. When we consider their great number and the diversity of their speech, we realize that Mexico was completely isolated from China in agriculture, metal work, and similar arts, but not necessarily so in simpler traits like the sinewbacked bow. The proof of independent development thus rests largely in chronological and environmental relations. We must not overlook one difficulty in deahng with culture similarities between the New World and the Old; viz., the proof that these similarities are real. In 1915 certain well known elephant-like figures found in Maya sculptures were heralded as proof of direct connection between India and Mexico. Special students in this field doubt the reality of the similarity between these figures and southern Asiatic drawings of elephants, because
contact between the two was impossible without

who have studied the actual Maya sculptures instead of the sketches made by earUer observers, find proof that another creature was in the artist's mind. When we are dealing with the conventionalized drawings
those

from the New World and the Old, it can scarcely be expected that the mere objective similarity between a few of them is proof of their identity in origin. Other check data must be appealed to before even a useful working hypothesis can be formulated. Yet, if it should ultimately turn out that a stray vessel did drift ashore in Mexico and land a sculptor who created a new art motif, this would be a mere incident in the culture history of the

New
at

ought to show just

World. Further research into the chronology of archaeological remains how abruptly this fancied elephant motif appeared and
relative period.

what

The

basis for the real solution of the

. . .

problem

may be

expected in such chronological data.

We

not reaUy unique growths, but to possess

have found the highest centers of culture in Mexico and Peru to be many of the fundamental traits
to the wilder folk in the marginal areas of both continents.
is

common
World

New

broad as the two Americas and whose apex rests over Middle America. We have found no just ground for assuming that the culture of the Maya was projected into the New World from the Old, where it rested as an isolated repHca of cultures beyond the Pacific. That influences of various kinds did reach the New World from the Old is apparent, but each of these must, upon its own merits, particularly as to its chronology, be subjected to the most
culture

thus a kind of pyramid whose base

is

as

exacting investigation.

However, the discovery of New World origins is not merely a problem Language also is regarded as a reliable index to origin. Some similarities between Tibetan and Athapascan, Melanesian and Hokan, Australian and Fuegian, etc., have been suggested. Long ago Duponceau saw certain resemblances between the languages of east Siberia and
in culture.

524
American Indian languages
have been regarded as As we have seen, the
of languages that
it

CLARK WISSLER
in general.

So

far,

sufl&cient to indicate

none of these resemblances more than vague relationships.

New World itself presents such a mystifying array would seem reasonable to expect that when colonies were planted here by Old World cultures, such colonization would have introduced Old World tongues. Yet, so far, there is not a trace of direct intrusion. New research may clear up this confusion, but as the case now
stands, language data suggest a reasonable antiquity for the peopling of

North America.
Finally,

there

is

the question of blood.

Our review

of

New World

somatic characters revealed the essential unity of the Indian population.

It is also clear that there are afl&nities with the mongoloid peoples of Asia. Hence, we are justified in assuming a common ancestral group for the whole mongoloid-red stream of humanity. We have already outlined the reasons for assuming the pristine home of this group to be in Asia, but
it comes to locating the precise cradleland of this parent group, we must proceed with caution. This is, however, not of prime importance, for if we start with the known facts, the present distribution of the mongoloid-

when

red stem,
case

we

note that

it

concentrates in the colder northern halves of both

its

hemispheres, where the cultures of

its

units are primitive, but that in

each

southern outposts developed complex cultures.

The New World

branch can claim originality for its high center and while it is clear that the ancient Chinese center was stimulated by non-monogoloid centers, the pioneer students of Chinese origins have already presented a strong brief
for their priority in

many Old World

inventions. Thus, the future

may

lead

mongoloid stem was a germ of originality which blossomed forth wherever the environment permitted, and we may be able, by contrasting these two independent cultures the ancient Chinese and the Maya with those of southern Asia and Europe, to arrive at last at the knowledge of elements pecuUar to both. What these may be, we can but guess, but there seems to be a similarity between the Indians and the Asiatics in the weakness for loosely coordinated social groups, failure to develop nationalism, and relatively greater regard for tradition. Returning to our subject, we may note that the geographical position of these two centers of higher cultures on the frontiers of the extended swarming ground of the mongoloid-red stem, one of which could not have been borrowed from the other, necessitates the assumption of a northern cradleland and an expansion into more favorable environments. It also presupposes a main horde of the mongoloid-red peoples with a culture not materially different from that of the great mass of wilder North Asiatic and American tribes known to history. Like a great crescent this horde stretched from Cape Horn, through Alaska, across Asia and beyond to the shores of the Baltic and the Mediterranean. It appears, in the main, as a virile horde of hunting and fisher folk most at home in cold, elevated or semi-arid lands.
to the opinion that inherent in this

New World
Among

Origins
traits,

525

other

we

find the

main body characterized by

tailored skin

clothing, the sinew-backed bow, the snowshoe, the sled, etc. These are all fairly primitive characters; yet, wherever the outposts of this great horde

met with favorable uplands they developed

traits.
It

agriculture

seems, therefore, that the solution of our

in the heart of Asia as in
this

New World

and other complex problem

Mexico or Peru. But, reverting we may ask from what sources in its primitive cultures sprang the impulses that produced the two great cultures of ancient China and Yucatan? In the New World, the fundamentals of Maya culture are found among the wilder folk; in Asia there are also evidences that Chinese culture sprang from the primitive heritage of the original mongoloid group settUng in the valley of the Yellow River. And while it is true that the most fundamental traits in Old World culture can not be ascribed to these same early Chinese, they did, neverlies

as

much

once more to

great mongoloid-red horde,

theless, achieve great originality in the invention of

new

traits,

many

of

Hence, unless we return once more to the old theory of the fall of man, we must look upon these two great cultural achievements as the special contributions of the mongoloidred peoples to the culture of mankind.
culture.

which are now elements of modern

Now,
and

as a final conclusion to this

volume on the man of the

New World

his culture,

we beg

the reader's indulgence in the formulation of an

hypothetical statement.

mongoloid peoples at stone polishing. That this was contemporaneous with the appearance of stone polishing in Europe does not necessarily follow, for future research in Asia may show it to have been much earlier. The hunters who killed bison at Folsom and those who hurled spears at the mammoth floundering in a pit at Clovis may not have been the first immigrants from the northwest, but they belonged to the primitive nomadic stratum which seems to underhe the aboriginal cultures of the New World. Their mongoloid kin, remaining in Central Asia, received culture stimuH from the south and east, urging them to greater achievements, but in the New World these primitive hunters had only themselves. Yet, in the course of time, increase in numbers and the development of sub-social groups led to considerable varieties of culture. Some of the traits probably brought from the motherland, are the firedrill, stone chipping, twisting of string, the bow, throwing stick, the harpoon, simple basketry and nets, hunting complexes, cooking with stones in vessels of wood, bark, or skin, body painting, and perhaps tattooing, and the domestication of the dog. Not all of these came in at the
beginning, for there are archaeological evidences suggesting that the

The New World received a detachment of early a time when the main body had barely developed

bow

and the dog came

working of the
in

relatively late. Independently, the

New World

developed

agriculture, pottery, the higher types of basketry

softer metals,

and cloth weaving, the and the manufacture of bronze. The progress astronomical knowledge and the fine arts compares favorably with that

526
achieved by the early Asiatics. Yet, in which are alone sufficient evidence of
all,

CLARK WISSLER

we

see the

marks of

originality

their

independent origin.

The centers of civiUzation in the New World were the highlands of Mexico and western South America which, as they developed, reacted to the stimulus of their more backward brothers in other parts of the land in much the same fashion as did the different groups of mongoloid peoples
in Asia.

One

of the significant points in our discussion has been the iden-

tification of the

fundamental widely diffused complexes in the cultures

of the

New

World,

many

of which

seem

to center in the

Mexican and

Andean
culture

regions of higher civilization and from which their respective

radiations are often apparent.

The more

recent studies of ancient Chinese

show

that a

somewhat

parallel condition existed in Asia.

Apparently

then, in the

New

World, we did have an isolated people

who

did not travel

the road to higher cultures as rapidly as their relatives in Asia, the connec-

between whose centers of development has long been broken by and later almost completely blocked by hordes of primitive hunter and fisher folk. We can only speculate as to what a few more thousand years of this freedom would have done for the New World, for in the sixteenth century a calamity, which has no exact parallel in history, befell the New World. A mUitant foreign civilization, fired by a zeal not only to plunder the material treasures of mankind, but to seize the very souls of men in the name of its God, fell upon the two great centers of aboriginal culture like a thunderbolt from a clear sky. The blow was mortal. But the man of the New World went down fighting. Though his feeble survivors still continue the struggle in a few distant outposts, the first great onslaught that annihilated the Aztec and the Inca marks the end of our story. In this volume we have been concerned only with the history of a race and a culture of which the aboriginal city-states of Mexico and Peru were the culmination. As we look back upon the long and tortuous career of man in the New World, comprehend his crude equipment as he first set foot upon the land, and pass in review his later achievements, we cannot but regret that the end came so suddenly.
tion

climatic changes

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

(1876-1960)

Patterns

PATTERNS ARE THOSE ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS OF INTERNAL RELATIONship which give to any culture its coherence or plan, and keep it from being a mere accumulation of random bits. They are therefore of primary importance. However, the concepts embraced under the term "pattern" are still a bit fluid; the ideas involved have not yet crystallized into sharp meanings. It will therefore

be necessary to consider in order several kinds of

patterns.

We may

call these provisionally the universal, the systemic, the

societal or whole-culture,

and the

style

type of patterns.

THE UNIVERSAL PATTERN

The
fit all

universal pattern

was proposed by Wissler, with the

It is

alternative desig-

nation of "the culture scheme."

cultures. It
is

a general outline that will

more or

less

therefore fundamentally different

all

from the other kinds of

pattern, since these

cultures.

apply either to particular cultures or only to parts of

The

universal pattern consists of a series of nine heads under

which

all

the facts of any culture

may be comprehended. The

nine heads

Knowledge ("mythological" as well as "scientific"), Rehgion, Society, Property, Government, and War. These subdivide further, as desirable. Thus under Society, Wissler suggests marriage, kinship, inheritance, control, and games; under Material Traits, food, shelter, transport, dress, utensils, weapons, and industries; Government is divided into political forms and legal procedures. It is apparent at once that this universal pattern with its heads and subare: Speech, Material Traits, Art,

heads

is like

a table of contents in a book.

It

guides us around within the

it.

volume rather than giving us the essence or quality of

variations,

Except for minor

table of

the universal pattern

is

in fact identical with the

tory

From Kroeber, Anthropology: Race Language Culture Psychology Prehis(New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company, 1948), pp. 311-318, 331-336.
527

528
contents of most books descriptive of a culture,

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

such as a standard

ethnographic report on a
for those classes of facts

tribe.

The main heads

are conventional captions

which

common

sense and

common
of

experience

lead us to expect to be represented in every culture.

We know

without speech, food habits,

artifacts, property, rehgion, society,

no people and so on.

We

can say therefore that these captions represent a sort of

all cultures,

common
consists

denominators found in
in

and that the universal pattern

merely of the series of these

any culture how.

It is

common

denominators expectably represented

^represented perhaps very variably but represented

some-

evident that the greater the range of cultures considered, and the

more

diverse these are, the

more wiU the

universal elements or

common

denominators shrink or become vague. The proportion of universal or common traits in the total range becomes less and less as this total grows

more
traits.

diverse, while at the

captions have to be increasingly stretched to

same time the concepts corresponding to the accommodate the facts or

Thereby the most characteristic features of each culture get blurred the Kugao, have a highly intricate legal system, but a minimum of poHtical institutions in fact it might be argued whether they properly have any. This is certainly an interesting situation in that it differs so radically from our own culture, where not only both law and government are highly developed but law is made to depend on government or to derive from it. This characterizing distinction, which is obviout.

The Yurok, and again

ously significant for the understanding of

Yurok

or Ifugao culture, and

almost certainly significant also for understanding our

own

culture better

this

and similar

distinctions are lost in the degree that

one does one's

describing in terms of the

common

denominators of the universal pattern.

This universal pattern thus boils

down

to a

rough plan of convenience

for a preliminary ordering of facts awaiting description or interpretation.

No

or to have

one seems to have developed the idea since it was set forth in 1923, made serious use of it toward deeper understanding. We will therefore pass on to other kinds of patterns.

SYSTEMIC PATTERNS

second kind of pattern consists of a system or complex of cultural

its

material that has proved

utility
it is

as a system

and therefore tends to

such systemic pattern

cohere and persist as a unit;

only with diflBculty as to
is
its

modifiable superficially, but modifiable

underlying plan.

Any one

limited primarily to one aspect of culture, such as subsistence, religion,

or economics; but it is not limited areaUy, or to one particular culture; it can be diffused cross-culturally, from one people to another. Examples are plow agriculture, monotheism, the alphabet, and, on a smaller scale, the kula ring of economic exchange

among

the

Massim Melanesians. What

Patterns
distinguishes these systemic patterns of culture
as they might also

529

be called ^is a specific interrelation of their component nexus that holds them together strongly, and tends to preserve the parts, a basic plan. This is in distinction to the great "loose" mass of material in every culture that is not bound together by any strong tie but adheres and
again dissociates relatively freely.

or well-patterned systems,

As

a result of the persistence of these

systemic patterns, their significance becomes most evident on a historical

view.

As we

mentally

roam over

the world or
is

down

the centuries, what

is

im-

pressive about these systemic patterns

the point-for-point correspondence

of their parts, plus the fact that

all

variants of the pattern can be traced

back to a

single original form.

is

and variations are set forth by pointing out that the alphabet was invented only once, by a Semitic people in southwestern Asia previous to 1000 B.C.; that it operates on the principle of a letter symbol for each minimal acoustic element of speech; that the letters for most sounds in any form of alphabet, no matter how speciaUzed, always resemble the letters in some other alphabet, and through that, or still others, they resemble and are derived from the letters of the original alphabet; and that for the most part the order and often the names of the letters are the same, or where different, it is evident where and why they were altered. Thus Hebrew aleph, beth, gimel, daleth, correspond in sound, order, and name to Greek alpha, beta, gamma, delta, and to Roman and our A, B, C, D. The pattern of plow agriculture comprises the plow itself; animals to draw it; domestication of these beasts; grains of the barley or wheat type an example.
Its history

The alphabet

[later in this

work]. But

we may

anticipate here

sown by broadcast
seedhng, or plant;
fertilization

scattering, without attention to the individual seed,

fields

larger than gardens

and of some length; and

it,

with dung, primarily from the draft animals. This system

originated in the NeoUthic period, probably in western Asia or near

and by a.d. 1500 had spread from Morocco to North China since then to the Americas and AustraHa as well. There are two other and parallel systems, both without plows originally: the rice and maize types of agriculture. The former involves small fields flooded by nature or irrigation, hand planting of seedMngs and hand weeding; the associated animals, pigs and buffalo, were not formerly utilized in the rice-growing, though the buffalo is now put before the plow in some areas. This rice pattern began as a hoe-and-garden cultm-e and still largely is such. Native American agriculture, centering around maize, also did not attempt to use the available domestic animals Uamas in the Andes and therefore was also hoe farming, or even digging-stick farming. The planting was done in hillocks. Irrigation and fertihzing were practiced locally and seem to have been secondary additions. The plants grown in addition to maize were, with the

530

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

exception of cotton, wholly unrepresented in the plow or rice patterns.

histories of the three systems

The
their

have remained essentially as separate as

origins, except for some relatively recent transfers of draft animals and plows from the plow pattern into the two others where these began to be

drawn into modern international, metropolitan civilization. The exclusive-monotheistic pattern is Hebrew-Christian-Mohammedan. The three rehgions are outgrowths of one another and originated in a small area of southwestern Asia. The pattern comprises a single deity, of illimitable power, and exclusive of all others; so far as there are other spiritual beings, such as angels or saints, they are derivative from him; the deity is proclaimed by a particular human vessel inspired by the deity; and worship according to this revelation excludes and forbids any other worship. Cults and philosophies outside these three organized monotheisms
have repeatedly attained to monotheism, or to a pantheism or a henotheism that would be hard to distinguish logically from monotheism. And many rehgions, even of backward peoples, recognize a supreme deity. But all
these others regularly lack
theistic pattern,

some

of the features of the exclusive-mono-

and

their

resemblances are thus only partial convergences

of an analogical type. This merely analogical similarity of these "highgod" and miscellaneously monotheistic rehgions goes hand in hand with
their diversity of origin: they are not

connected with the exclusive mono-

theisms, nor for the most part with one another.

exclusive monotheisms are

and they
his ideas
is

homologous

By

contrast, the three

structurally or part-for-part similar

are connected in origin: Jesus

was a Jew, and

Mohammed

took

from Jews and Christians.

of pattern
is

The systemic type

accordingly not only partakes of the

It originates in

quality of a system, but

a specific growth.

one culture,
of structure
origin,

capable of spread and transplantation to others, and tends strongly to

persist

once

it

is

estabUshed.

It

recalls the basic patterns

common

to groups of related animals developed

all

from a common

with the original pattern persisting through

as they occur

superficial modifications

under evolution. For instance, the basic vertebrate pattern

includes a skull with lower jaw, vertebrate column, and, above the level of
the fishes, two pairs of limbs each ending in five digits. Within the range

of this pattern, there

is

endless variation.

snake has no

legs,

some

reptiles

and amphibians possess only one

pair. Birds

whales and have converted

the front pair into wings; seals, into flippers; and moles, into "shovels."

The

digits carry

claws in carnivores, hoofs in running mammals, nails in

five in

ourselves.

They number

man

as in the salamander,

never more than

four in birds and in pigs, three in the emu, two in the ostrich and the cow,

one only in the horse not counting nonfunctioning vestiges. Not one of the thousands of species of amphibians, reptiles, birds, or mammals ever possesses more than two pairs of hmbs or more than five digits; any sixfingered vertebrate
is

an individual malformation.

Patterns

531

By
four,

contrast there are the arthropods,

among whom

the higher crus-

taceans have five pairs of legs (modifiable to claws or paddles), the spiders

and the

insects three pairs of legs

and two

pairs of wings; but

none
five-

of the hundreds of thousands of species of arthropods ever

digited

show a

hmb. Such

are the basic arthropod plans,

modified according to order, family, and species.

which are endlessly Thus many butterflies

have only two pairs of legs; bees have two pairs of wings, but the related ants break theirs off after mating; flies have only one pair; beetles have two pairs but fly mainly with one, the other having become converted into a protective shell; worker ants, fleas, lice, and many others have long since become wingless. We might add that aU arthropods have definitely segmented bodies, a skeleton on the outside, antennae, and pale bluish blood containing copper-protein, haemocyanin, as compared with the nonsegmentation, inner skeleton, lack of antennae, and blood reddened by the iron-protein haemoglobin of all vertebrates. It is true that these fundamental plans of structure of the subkingdoms of life such as the arthropods and the vertebrates, or of their classes Hke insects and mammals, constitute something very much bigger than the system patterns of culture. They are hundreds of millions of years old, expressed in thousands to hundreds of thousands of species and in trillions upon
trillions of individuals.

The

culture patterns muster an age of only a few

thousand years. Once established, the great biological patterns predetermine, as

it

were, the main frames within which evolution wiU operate.

rise to

No

arthropod can give

a vertebrate, or vice versa; their patterns are

clefts.

separated by profound, unbridgeable

place in the domains between these chasms

their

Evolutionary change takes

stricly

speaking, between

subchasms.

By

contrast, cultural system patterns, such as exclusive

society,

monotheism, plow agriculture, the alphabet, pass from one race or

from one major culture, to another, and rather freely. Each year men who otherwise remain in their ancestral culture are for the first time learning to plow, to read
pattern to
letters, to fixate
is

on a

single

God. Such a transfer of

new

kinds of carriers

of course impossible in

subhuman
is

organisms, whose forms are dominated by irreversible heredity. But the

transfer
is

characteristic of the very nature of culture,

which

plastic,

reversible,

and capable of unlimited absorptions,

anastomosings,

and

fusions.

Hence the patterns within cultures impress us as shifting and often transient. They are so, in comparison with the grand patterns of organic
just as everything cultural, being
life, is

life,

an epiphenomenon, something super-

added to
patterns

relatively unstable, modifiable,

and adaptable. What the

present type of cultural pattern system shares with the fundamental organic
is

that they both

embody a

definable system, in the repeated

is

expressions of which, no matter

how

varied, there nevertheless

traceable

a part-for-part correspondence, which allows each form or expression to

532

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER
it

be recognized as related to the others and derived from the plan as

originally

took shape.
the peculiar interest of these systemic patterns
is that,

In

fact,

within the

endless kaleidoscope of

human

culture, they

aUow us

to recognize things

that are actually related in origin as against things that appear similar but

The patterns differentiate homologies from would say. Thus, the several examples of exclusive monotheism are both homologous and historically interconnected through derivation of one from the other. But the Chinese Heaven, the Indian Brahma, the Egyptian Aten, "god" in the abstract of the Greek philosophers, the supreme deities of many primitive religions, represent analogies or convergences. They are distinct, separate developments which led to results that seem similar. And so, Egyptian hieroglyphs, Mesopotamian cuneiform, Indus VaUey, Mayan, and other ancient ideographic or mixed systems of writing, and the surviving Chinese system are like alphabets in that they function as more or less effective methods of visible-speech communication. But they are like them only in that functioning. All alphabets are genetically one derived from a single source; the other methods of writing have separate sources, operate on different principles, are built on different plans. They resemble alphabets as a whale does a fish both communicate or swim but without genuine similarity of structure or meaningful relationship. But alphabet resembles alphabet as whale and porpoise and dolphin resemble one another. It is in the working-out of these real relationships, structural and genetic relationships as against mere functional similarities, that the recognition of culture patterns of the systemic type finds one of its chief uses.
are not connected in origin.
analogies, the biologist

TOTAL-CULTURE PATTERNS
Next, there are patterns that relate to whole cultures. There

a French, a British pattern or form of European

Iroquoian, Algonkin, and Siouan aspect or f acies

an Italian, There is an of North American Indian

is

civilization.

Woodland

culture. This

Woodland

culture in turn has

its

own

larger total
Pacific

pattern, which, together with the Southeastern, Southwestern,

North

Coast, Mexican, and other patterns

American

pattern. It

is

evident

make up the still larger native North that we are here deahng with culture wholes,
complexes or systems that form only

not, as in the last section, with specific

part of any one culture but can be grafted onto others.

East

is

different

East and West is West, Kipling said in vivid allusiveness to the physiognomies or qualities of Occidental and Asiatic civilizations.

When

he added that never the twain shall meet, he was technically overdo borrow and learn from each other, do which fact he was perfectly aware of when he assimilate or "acculturate" went on: "But there is neither East nor West, Border, nor Breed, nor Birth,
stating things, in that civilizations

Patterns

533
strong

when two

men

stand face to face." But the "never-meeting"

is

also

a poetical way of saying that civilizations are vast things like great ocean currents flowing past each other, and perhaps of implying that the sets or
trends of civilizations as wholes vary profoundly, quite apart from the
total of the items

sum

which make up
that.

their content. Civilizations differ in

"con-

figuration," in

modern

scientific jargon; "spirit"

would have been an earher

word, "genius" before

There

is

of course nothing

new

in the fact that civihzations are distinct.

cited, either of differential or of likeness.

Innumerable items can always be

To engage a button, we cut a slit in the cloth; the Chinese sew on a loop; and so on. But what do a hundred or a thousand or ten thousand such items mean? What do they add up to that is of wider import or deeper significance? If the items just scatter with equal randomness in two or more cultures, their effect will
detail.

be equivalent, in

spite of the endless variation of

Obviously, the specific items must concentrate in some pecuhar

way

in each civiHzation,

they are to

must gather or weight themselves along certain lines, if have a larger meaning. And therewith we have a pattern or

configuration.

There remains a difficulty, however. Items like buttonholes are definite and are readily ascertained or established, but their significance is hmited. The pattern or physiognomy or trend of a great civihzation is certainly an important thing to know, but it is difficult to formulate accurately and rehably. Such a pattern has in it breadth and complexity, depth and subtlety,

universal features but also uniqueness. In proportion as the expression

it

of such a large pattern tends to the abstract,

becomes

arid

and

Ufeless; in

proportion as

it

remains attached to concrete

facts, it lacks generalization.

Perhaps the most vivid and impressive characterizations have been made

by frank
skillful

intuition deployed
this

on a

rich

body of knowledge and put

is at

into

words. Yet

does not constitute proof and

best at the fringe

of the approved methods of science and scholarship. These difficulties wiU

the formulation of whole-culture patterns has not progressed though it is surely one of the most important problems that anthropology and related researches face.

explain

why

farther,

A
the

spirited depiction of the total pattern of

any culture possesses much

same appeal and interest as a portrait by a good painter. Some cultures, Hke some faces, are more interesting than others, but all can be given an interest and meaning by the hand of the skilled master. This gift of "seizing" character, with its suffusion by insight, admittedly partakes as much
of the faculties of the artist as of those of the scientist. Excellent delineations of culture patterns

have in

fact

by

historians

and

travelers.

More than

been presented by nonanthropologists, eighteen hundred years ago Tacitus

gave to posterity one of the masterpieces of this genre in his analysis of German custom and character. So keen was his penetration that many
qualities of his subjects are
still

recognizable in the

Germans of today.

534

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

Other notable examples are the mediaeval Persian Al-Biruni writing in Arabic on Indian civilization; and in the nineteenth century, Burckhardt's Renaissance, Doughty's Arabia Deserta, Codrington's Melanesians. The
first v^as

a historian, the second a crotchety Semitist, the third a missionary

the risk of making invidious distinctions, Mahnowski, Benedict, Mead, Evans-Pritchard, might be cited among recent avowed anthropologists. Through the medium of fiction, Pierre Loti, Freuchen's Eskimo, Maran's Batouala, and Mofolo's Chaka have done something similar with

bishop.

At

exceeding vividness.

requisite for the recognition of the whole-culture type of pattern, be-

sides of course insight

and

articulateness, is willingness to see a culture in structure, values,

terms of

itself,

of

its

own

interest in the culture for

its

own

sake.

and style. There must be an Without this, the depiction tends to

degenerate into a recital of oddments, or of those features in which the

culture's standards differ

from our own to its own worsening, of course. the biases and values of the describer's own culture should be complete, at least for the time being. Such preconceptions should never block his sympathies for the culture he is describing, where its quahties call for sympathy. Of course the account must not be a laudation, but an appraisal of what the culture's own standards and valuations are, and how far they are adhered to.

The disengagement from

This process

is

akin to recognition of style in

it

art; to
its

"appreciation" in

the stricter sense of that word, before

acquired

popular meaning of

mere

liking.

There too we do not judge Michelangelo by the standard of

is

Rodin, or Mozart by that of Shostakovich; nor, for that matter, Shostakovich by the values of Mozart, though unconsciously that
servatives

what conis

may

tend to do.

What

is

in question in

such endeavors

the
its

recognition of the art of a certain region and period as expressed by

best exponents, the evaluation of
definition of

how

far

it

achieved

its

aims, and the

define whole-culture patterns are of the

what these aims and values were. Attempts to recognize and same kind, but are larger in that

they try to grasp the totality of styles

lectual,

the nexus of social, ethical, intel-

and economic

as well as aesthetic styles or

manners which together

constitute the master pattern of a culture.

BASIC PATTERN
Dress obviously
first
is

AND STYLE VARIABILITY

The
to "pattern"
is

heavily involved in the matters under discussion.

association of

many women

Hkely to be the paper

model from which dresses are cut and shaped. Vulgarly, the word "style" refers to dress first of all; and it is certainly plain that dress in general is heavily conditioned by style. But beyond all this, dress excellently exemplifies even basic pattern and its influence. For instance, Occidental civilization, Ancient Mediterranean, and East

Patterns
Asiatic are each characterized
clothing. In

535
by a distinctive, long-term basic pattern of comparison with our fitted clothing, Greek and Roman clothing
this

was draped on the body. While

comparatively. Sleeves were
clothing

statement

is

not wholly exact,

it is

true

little

developed, trousers lacking, the waist of

was not

fitted in to

follow the body, the general effect accentuated

the fall of drapery and the flowing line.

The Roman toga was a wrapone adjusted

it

around blanket. One did not in proper folds.

After prevailing for

slip into

it

like a coat,

to

hang

crumble and become transformed toward the end of the

began to Empire, when the old Hellenic-Latin religion had yielded to Christianity and the total Mediterranean civilization was disintegrating and at the point of gradually being replaced by the beginnings of our Occidental one. Trousers, in spite of protests and counterlegislation, were adopted from the barbarians. Sleeves came into general use. During the Dark Ages, the transition was gradually accomplished. The fitted clothes might be pretty well concealed under a long coat or cloak, as in the sixth-century mosaics of the Eastern Emperor Justinian and the Empress Theodora; but they were there. By the Middle Ages, they were in the open; and their pattern is still the fundamental pattern of own own clothing. The characteristic of this, in
centuries, this basic pattern of dress

many

Roman

contrast with ancient clothing,

figure.

is

that

it is

cut and tailored, fitted to the

tailleur,

Our word

"tailored"

is

from French

one who

cuts, carves,

or trims; and

taille still

denotes both the figure as a whole and the waist.

men is that its parts foUow the limbs as For women, on the contrary, the legs are withdrawn from sight in a skirt that during most centuries has been ample. From the hips up, however, the pattern of Western women's wear makes up for the loose skirt and has a bodice or an equivalent that follows waist, bosom, shoulders, and arms fairly closely.
The plan
of Western clothing for

well as the figure.

How
all

thoroughly

this is

our basic type of dress even today, underneath

and fluctuations of period and fashion, is dress as a whole for the past thousand years with the East Asiatic in the same millennium. Chinese and Japanese dress is also cut and tailored, but it is not fitted. It is cut loose, with ample sleeves, or kimono style, to suggest a broad figure. Trousers are ample, so as to have almost a skirt effect. The use of clothing to model or suggest women's bust, waist, and hip contour is whoUy outside the Far Eastern pattern. Witness the Japanase obi sash and bow intended to conceal these features, while European women for four centuries or more have worn corsets and girdles to accentuate them. Of course dress is notoriously subject to fashion change. But it is remarkable how virtually aU changes of fashion, alike in Classical, Western, and East Asiatic costume, have consistently operated each within the basic dress pattern of its own civilization. Fashion creates a thousand bizarre
local or national variations

evident

when we compare Western


536

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

forms and extravagances; but it never has produced, among Occidentals, a man's type of dress based on toga instead of trousers, nor a woman's with a Japanese silhouette. The matter of fashion changes, which represent
a minor sort of restless and anonymous innovation or invention,
elsewhere, with emphasis
is

discussed
greater
is

on a concealed rhythm or

regularity
of.

much

than the participants in a fashion are ordinarily aware

other aspect of fashion change
alteration, its

what may be momentary degree

of variability
it.

But there

anits

called the intensity of

that both defines the basic

is

pattern and helps to explain variation from

Variability

high

when

the
it is

fashion of one year differs considerably from that of the year before;
stiU

more so when a

series of particular dresses, all of the

same

year, differ

considerably from one another.

Low

variability of course is

marked by
statis-

smaU

differences of this sort.

Such

variabilities are easily

expressed

tically. ^

The underlying fashion swings or

total silhouette of dress rather

trends change
its details.

what might be

called the

than

These minor features

may

come and go

quite rapidly,

and are what give the impression nearly every-

one has that dress fashions are highly unstable.

of proportion, such as a narrow skirt for

On

the contrary, the total

silhouette shifts rather steadily for perhaps fifty years

toward one extreme

for about fifty

women, and then

years toward the opposite, giving a wavelength of close to a century for the
periodicity,
after case.
It

which seems to be adhered to with

fair consistency in case

during the

might be thought that the basic pattern (for Occidental women's dress last hundred and fifty years) would He somewhere between these
it

proportion extremes. Occasionally

does.

But mostly the basic pattern

pattern.

proves to coincide with one of the extremes. The other extreme then represents a sort of opposition or aberration

from the

One might

de-

scribe these aberrant extremes as the proportions stiU just inside the pattern

but as far away as possible from

aberrant extreme
is

its

antithetical

almost

center of gravity.

Or one might

perversely antithetical

say the
to

the

ideal or saturation point of the pattern, though stiU barely remaining within its range. Thus, as the permanent Western pattern aims at amplitude from the hips down but slenderness above, the silhouette-extremes conformable to the pattern would be: full or wide skirt, long or low skirt, narrow waist, and therefore waistline just at the waist proper. The antithetical extremes would be: narrow skirt, short skirt, wide or full waist, and waistline moved from the anatomically narrowest part up toward the broader breast or down toward the broader hips. In this last proportion

position of the waisthne

pattern saturation evidently falls at the midpoint between extremes. In the three other proportions, pattern saturation coincides with one of the extremes.
1

By

the standard deviation or sigma, converted into a percentage of the

mean

as

the coefficient of variability.

Patterns

537

1859

1899

1769

1916

1813 Fig. 19. BASIC

1935

STYLE PATTERN IN WOMEN'S CLOTHES.

Transient fashions conforming to basic pattern in upper stagger contrast with intrinsic departures from pattern in the lower. Also, upper figures are accompanied by low variability of fashion, and date from the calm Victorian era; lower figures show high variability and date from Revolution, Napoleonic, and World War periods.

A glance at the
acteristic dress at

silhouettes in the

upper row of Figure 19, showing char-

twenty-year intervals during the latter and larger part

of the nineteenth century, reveals

stant stable features underneath

what characterizes the pattern

temporary
fluctuations.

its

con-

The lower row

two silhouettes from the period of the French Revolution and Napoleon, and two from the period of the World Wars two eras of sociopolitical restlessness enclosing the relative calm of Victorian times. Here skirts are in evidence that are narrow or high or both, and waists that are
gives

thick or ultrahigh or ultralow

the aberrant extremes.

538
VARIABILITY IN EUROPEAN

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

WOMEN'S DRESS SILHOUETTE DURING FOUR YEARS OF PATTERN CONFORMITY AND STABILITY COMPARED WITH FOUR YEARS OF PATTERN STRAIN AND INSTABILITY
Stable Pattern Years:
1839

Low

Variability*

Mean
1859
1879
1899

of

4 years

Skirt length Skirt width

27
61

55

21
61

Waist height
Waist width

53 170

22 40 107

73 53 43

53 138

54 50
115

Unstable Pattern Years: High Variability*

Mean
1789
1813

of

1916

1935

4 years

Skirt length Skirt width

164
61

Waist height Waist width

* Figures express

93 277
100(V
for

492 235 253

107

219
151

106 128

109 162 186

256

246 152 160 192

year)/(mean

for 150 years).

V=100o-/M
on the preceding

When we
same
page,
it is

look at the

statistical

expression of fashion variability in the

selected eight years as given in corresponding position

at once clear that the years and decades of pattern saturation or

concordance are marked by

definitely

low

variability, indicative of stability;

and the years and eras of pattern

ity

antithesis or stretch are

surprisingly great variability, indicative of instability. Stability

marked by a and instabil-

here refer to the dress style pattern and

instabiUty

its

behavior. Since the periods

of dress-pattern

were also periods of marked sociopoUtical instabiUty and churning, there is presumably a connection. The connection or relation seems functional rather than causal. There is nothing to indicate that the mere presence of wars and revolutions will

make

designers deliberately plan consecutive dresses as different as

is

pos-

mode, whereas in times of calm they design them as alike as they can make them and will keep them from being identical. What evidently happens is merely that in periods of general stress, when the foundations of society and civilization seem rocked, the pattern of dress is also infected and subject to strain. It expresses this strain by moving from stable saturation to aberration, antithesis, restlessness, and instability. This example may make more concrete the role of patterns both style patterns and total-culture patterns in cultural change and stability. Not that patterns are the beginning and end of everything about civihzation. But practically everything in culture occurs as part of one or more patterns.
sible within the

Cultural Intensity

and Climax

539

Hence whatever happens

sion, or persistence in

in the way of accompUshment, alteration, succesany culture is Ukely to happen through the mechanism of patterns. We do not yet know too much about them, because awareness of patterns is relatively recent in anthropology. But it is already clear that understanding of culture as something more than an endless series of haphazard items is going to be achieved largely through recogni-

tion of patterns

and our

ability to

analyze them.

Cultural Intensity

and Climax
is

THE EIGHTY-FOUR AREAS INTO WHICH NORTH AMERICA HAS BEEN DIVIDED
are cultural in the sense that, within each, culture
relatively imiform.

Many

them also approximate natural areas; that is, they often possess one or more features, such as drainage, elevation, land form, climate, or plant cover, which also are relatively uniform over the tract, or alter at its borders. They are, further, historical areas, in that their relations with one
of

another reflect currents or growths of culture, as soon as the areas are viewed not as equivalents but as differing in intensity or level. The ten or so larger culture areas hitherto customarily recognized differ from one another essentially in culture material or content; consideration of differences in level has usually been avoided as subjective or unscientific. The more numerous areas of native North America dealt with in the present work are in part based avowedly on culture intensity as well as content. In practice, these two aspects of intensity and content cannot be rigorously separated. A precise calendar system, a complex interrelation of
rituals or social units, invariably

embodies special culture material as well as intensity of its development and organization. Simple culture material cannot well be highly systematized; refined and specialized material seems
to

demand

organization

if it is

to survive.

What we

call intensity of culture

means both special content and special system. A more intensive as compared with a less intensive culture normally contains not only more material more elements or traits but also more material peculiar to itself, as well as more precisely and articulately established interrelations
therefore

between the materials.

An

accurate time reckoning, a religious hierarchy,

this.

a set of social classes, a detailed property law, are illustrations of

Granted
tive

this

interdependence of richness of content and richness of

it

systematization,

should be possible to determine an approximately objecintensity

measure of cultural

by measuring culture content

by count-

sity of California Press,

Kroeber, Cultural and Natural Areas of North America (Berkeley: Univer1939). Reprinted in The Nature of Culture (Chicago- University of Chicago Press, 1952), pp. 337, 339-343.

From

540
ing distinguishable elements, for instance. This
is

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER
is

a task which no one

it is

and it might be worth while. Wider historical conclusions can hardly be formulated without consideration of intensity factors. Permanent neglect of these will tend to limit investigations to narrowly circumscribed regions and
yet ready to perform for the continent; but theoretically
feasible;

periods, or to abstract consideration of processes as such.

Each
shows

of the six major areas here dealt with, except that of the Eskimo,

at least

one climax or focus of cultural intensity

.
.

even
.

the Inter-

mediate tract possesses a low-grade one in California.

In general, a culture climax or culmination

may be

regarded as the point

from which the greatest radiation of culture material has taken place in the area. But it is always necessary to remember that as a culture becomes richer, it also tends to become more highly organized, and in proportion as its organization grows, so does its capacity to assimilate and place new material, whether this be produced within or imported from without. In the long run, accordingly, high-intensity cultures are the most absorptive as well as the most productive. It is by the interaction of both processes that culture culminations seem to be built up. Consequently, an unusually successful degree of absorption tends to lead to further "inventive" produc-

tiveness

and outward influencing, and so on, until the process fails somewhere and a condition of stabihty is reached or a decline sets in; or a newer center begins to dominate the old.

On
not

the whole, accordingly,

it

can be assumed that culture climaxes are

their finest flowerings are evidently brief,

mushroom growths; though

and the introduction of a radically new subsistence mechanism, such as

agriculture or the horse,

may

occasionally cause a rapid growth.

Where
it

there

is

no evidence

of such fundamental

economic introduction,

may

be taken for granted with a reasonable degree of assurance that a climax

in the historic period
later prehistoric period,

was also a climax, or at least a subclimax, in the and probably at least of fairly high level of intensity
whole

before that. Maya, Aztec-Toltec, Southwestern archaeology

that of the continent as a

confirms

^in

general

this

assumption.

Maya from

Archaeology does indicate some minor shifts of climax area: of the the base to the tip of the Yucatan Penmsula, of the Pueblo center from San Juan to Little Colorado and upper Rio Grande drainage. Analogous to these is the hypothetical northward movement of the North-

west Coast culmination.

range.

On

the whole, however, these shifts are of small

The only region

of the continent in
is

large-scale culture recession

the

which there is evidence of a Ohio Valley. Even here the lowering of

great;

from the prehistoric to the historic period seems not very and the whole eastern major area of which the Ohio Valley forms part is the one whose historic climax is the least. Of all the greater currents in American prehistory, that which brought stimuli of Mexican origin to the region of the Mississippi and Ohio is the
culture intensity

Cultural Intensity

and Climax

541

most obscure, on account of the unusually low-level cultures intervening in Tamaulipas and Texas. The Southwest is more evenly linked to central Mexico by tribes like the Opata, Tarahumara and Cahita, Sinaloans and Cora. At any rate, agriculture is continuous from the Southwest to central Mexico; discontinuous from the Southeast. The Northwest Coast seems so free, relatively, of specific Mexican influences that its culture, beyond many general American elements, is readily construable as a re-working primarily of Asiatic and possibly Oceanic stimuli. It therefore presents quite different problems. The most satisfactory hypothesis to explain the more intensive eastern culture is that this was due to the same influences which introduced maize agriculture, presumably from Mexico; and that with the introduction of this fundamental subsistence factor all cultural values shifted, and there ensued a period of unsettlement and activity, during which now this and

now
tivity

that local center forged ahead. Gradually, however, cultural produc-

or "creativeness" diminished in these minor climaxes and became more evenly diffused, owing presumably to the fact that Mexican relations never became established as something direct and continuous. Since no region in the area thus had a first monopoly of culture import nor continued to have its intensity reinforced by maintenance of contacts with the high center, the result was a gradual leveling, along with sporadic retention

here and there of this or that introduced element.

still

Some
first

slight

precedence
it

remained, until early Caucasian times, in the region where

inherently most likely that the introduction of maize

occurred

about

seems

the lower Mississippi; but even this

was waning.
is,

The opinion

of the early French observers that the Natchez represented

then, perhaps not

but the remnant of something greater

whoUy un-

foimded. With reference to what has just been said about culture content

and organization, the Natchez make the impression of having possessed

a type of organization more developed than the simple content of their
culture as a whole caUed for.

customs, ritual elements

was

The material

of this culture

its

arts,

war

only barely distinguishable from that of

Muskogi

culture; the conscious emphasis put

It

on the system of

social values

appears to have been perceptibly greater.

has always seemed a problem

it

how
were,

such a system could develop from the inside, spontaneously as

to see
richer.
it

among a small ethnic group. It is much easier from a time when the content of the culture was also

as a survival

In a measure, the same type of situation appears to be true of the Pueblo

climax. Pueblo culture material of the historic and late prehistoric period,
to

be

sure,

remained

relatively rich as

compared with

earlier prehistoric

times
its

perhaps even continued to increase; but one has an impression that

still

organization was

more preponderant.

On

the Northwest Coast the reverse seems to hold.

The

patterns of the

culture are definite enough,

But no

single

and the impulses toward organization obvious. consistent scheme appears to have been evolved. Everything

542
is

ALFRED
is

L.

KROEBER

elaborated and rated, and yet there

no

real system. Active production

its

of culture material

was evidently going on, but the attempts toward

vigorous rather than successful.

organization were

still

Northwestern climax culture then was in the ascendant phase and nearthe ing its culmination; Southwestern and Southeastern were declining

former slowly, owing to long intrenchment of its system and perhaps partial maintenance of exposure to Mexico; the latter, never firmly established nor well connected with its fountainhead, already almost at the bottom of
the descent. Reference
of an area
is

to culminations: the general level of the culture

its

may

well rise while that of

climax sinks.

In Mexico, Aztec and

trasted in a parallel

Maya

civilizations in a.d.

1500 evidently con-

manner: the one probably

in the ascendant, the other

surely declining.
If it

ever proves possible to find

some

objective measure of culture inits

tensity other than indicators

chosen from among

contents as suggested

above, the relative strength of the two factors of cultural evolution and
devolution would be computable, and the history of nonhistoric peoples

and
is

cultures could be better projected than

now when

feeling or intuition

our chief guidance.

Parallels with historic civilizations suggest themselves.

Wherever one of

these attained a clearly recognizable culmination, this seems to have cor-

responded essentially with a period of successful organization of culture organization in part into a conscious system of ideas, but especontent

cially into

an integrated nexus of

styles, standards,

and

values. Before the

culmination, the absorption or development of culture material was apparently outstripping

to

500

B.C.

tent: the

its organization into new values, as in Greece from 800 At the culmination, organization overtook and mastered convalue-system of the culture was set. After the culmination, there

followed a period at

first

usually of continued production or assimilation

of material, but this soon slackened, while organization, though

more and

more

limited to revision or perpetuation of the value-system, continued

to be maintained: as in

Greece

after

200

B.C.

to show the same cycle in The specific developmental process must have been under way by 4000 B.C. The culmination was reached soon after 3000, perhaps around

Ancient Egypt

is

now

well enough

known

outline.

2600. After

greatest realm extension, wealth,

This brought its benefits, and the and perhaps population were not attained until 1 500. New culture material also continued to be taken in and assimilated: bronze, iron, the horse, and so on. But the standards and values had been essentially settled on by about 2600, and altered relatively little after that. Art, writing, architecture, religion, remained cast in the familiar molds. These molds largely survived the poUtical breakup after 1100, and the first foreign conquests. Even Greek domination did not more than partly obliterate the old patterns, and it required several additional centuries
that, consolidation prevailed.

Cultural Intensity
of strong

and Climax
Christian influence, in part even the

543

Roman and

Arab shock,

to

reduce the obsolescent survivals to extinction.

Flinders Petrie has gone so far with the concept of cultural cycle as to
try to determine the respective

moments
and

of culmination of the several

from these a recurrent Climax attainment in sculpture precedes that in painting, for instance; literature also comes early; science and wealth reach their peaks late in each cycle, he argues, specifying both achievements and dates for each civilization. He is at times so peremptorily immediate in his judgments, and so individualistic in his chronology, that his essay has won little
aspects of a
of civilizations,
to derive

number

pattern.

following.

Even

in those

who might be

interested in his idea, distrust has

facts. Nevertheless, art

probably been aroused by the drastic handling of

or literature or both do seem to culminate earlier than mechanical science,

wealth, and population in the Egyptian, classic Mediterranean,

dental civilizations, probably in

and OcciChinese, Indian, and Mesopotamian also,

that Petrie

example of a reversal of order. The indication thus is some hold on a general principle of culture growth. In native America both literature and science were relatively undeveloped and are imperfectly known. Art, however, attained to some high developments, and its recovered specimens have generally been sedulously preserved. It is possible, therefore, to take this part of Petrie's scheme that the culmination of art tends to come early in the history of a culture and to test it against the inferences on developmental phases reached on other grounds in the foregoing pages. In short, the hypothesis, based on precedent in the Old World, is that a culture with a flourishing art would stiU be in the ascendant phase; one with a decaying or dead art, at its peak or

and there

is

no

clear

may have

got

in the descendant.

The Maya
fine-art value
ing.
liefs

culture

fits

perfectly. All the

known
a.d.

great sculpture of highest

comes

in the

Old Period, before

900 by

the usual reckon-

The semigeometric

architectural decoration, the Toltec-influenced reillustrations of the

and frescoes of Chichen, and the codex

Late period
yet calen-

cannot begin to compare in quality with the Old

a thousand years longer.

Maya

art.

And

dar, script, religion, architecture, kept their essential

forms more than half

is earlier and There may have been successive and more or less discrete pulses of Toltecan and of Aztecan period. StiU, one would be inclined to doubt the essential separateness of these on the same spot: Old World precedent is too uniformly to the contrary. With the two periods reckoned as parts of one culture growth, we have left, in sculpture, a number of specimens that can be pretty positively assigned to

In the valley of Mexico and environs, decision upon what

later

among many

pieces of art

is

more

diflBcult.

each.

Among

these, precedence in aesthetic merit almost certainly goes to

the "Aztec" examples. This culture, then,

by hypothesis, would

still

have

been in or near the ascending phase

at its discovery.

544

ALFRED
lesser

L.

KROEBER
little

The

Mexican

cultures like the Zapotec

and Totonac are too

known, so

far as time

development

is

concerned, to

make

their discussion

in this connection profitable.

fit

To

pass to South America, however,

we have

in Peru a partial to theory. The Late or Inca culture was evidently the richest attained there, in totahty of content as expressed by number of

inventions or

known

devices. Quipu, balance, roads, suspension bridges,

be Early. Easily the best sculpture, however, is that of Tiahuanaco, the finer and still earlier sculpture of Chavin, and, if clay modeling be included, the pre-Tiahuanaco
bronze, for instance, are either Late only or not
to

known

Early
arts

Chimu

pottery. All these date long before the Incas. This

illustration,

is

not a

wholly comparable
pan-Peruvian.
ginning of a
that to a
its

because the Early cultures in which the

culminated were markedly local or provincial, Inca culture essentially

It is

conceivable that this Late civilization marked the bestill

new

era on a wider areal basis, and that this was

so

new

pure art had not begun to develop. This suggestion, however, leads
of counterconsiderations, which are too complicated to follow

number

up

here. It does

remain a fact that Inca sculpture

is

inferior to the best

Early Peruvian sculpture, and that where a local

pottery, can

art,

hke that of Chimu

be traced consecutively, the summit of aesthetic quality is Early (Mochica), whereas variety, elegance, and geographical spread culminate in Late Chimu times.
In the Southwest, plastic and pictorial art never reached even moderate
achievements, but the history of pottery
are generally considered to be the
is

well known.

The

finest types

Mimbres and the

Sikyatki wares, with

which some would rank certain of the San Juan black-on-white styles. These all fall in Pueblo period 3 or early 4. Post-Spanish wares are generally deteriorated,

except for very recent Caucasian-stimulated renaissances.

values. In quantitative richness of total
it:

This accords with the general recognition of period 3 as the Great Pueblo
period

great with reference to

its

culture content, periods 4 and 5 perhaps equal or surpass

for instance,

masks in the prehistoric periods; and it is hard to believe that any ancient town maintained rituals so elaborately organized as those of modern Zuiii. The content and system of the culture have been well maintained; its best art has been dead several centuries.
there are
positive indications of

no

Here, then,

is

another illustration of

fit

to hypothesis.

In eastern North America art was at a low level at the time of discovery.

The

finest

specimens aU seem prehistoric; pottery trophy heads in Arkan-

sas, incised shell gorgets

from about Tennessee, HopeweU culture ornaments of copper, mica, and bone in Ohio. None of these productions rises
to the level of a great art; but a
definite, rather

number evince both

skiU and feeling in a

unique

style.

This agrees with the interpretation, advanced

above, of Mississippi Valley culture as a growth that reached its modest peak some centuries before Caucasian advent, and had then spread and
shallowed, with fragmentary persistences like those

among

the Natchez.

Cultural Intensity and Climax

545

These, however, were essentially organizational and unaccompanied by

aesthetic productivity.

The somewhat

scattered and diverse art achieve-

ments point to provincial and transient flowerings. Northwest Coast art, on the other hand, was fairly flourishing when discovered, and was evidently stimulated to higher quality by its first Caucasian contacts. The archaeological remains in the area are cruder, and

none of them shows the fuU

style of the historic period.

To be

sure, they are

rather scant; but in view of the unanimously simple quality of such speci-

mens
then,

as there are, their fewness itself argues a lack of aesthetic vigor. Here,

an active and successful art exists in a culture which on other grounds has been construed as still in its growth phase.

The tantalizing and fundamental subject of cultural phase can hardly be pursued farther here, for a variety of reasons, among them the outstanding
one that the exactest determinations of period can obviously be made best on datable and therefore documentary materials. What I have tried to show is that both in art and in degree of systematization the more outstanding American cultures seem to conform to a general pattern of culture growth, the outUnes of which gleam through the known historic civilizations.
Further, the very concept of climax, or,
if

one

will, culture center,

involves

not only the focus of an area but also a culmination in time. Through the
climax, accordingly, geography and history are brought into relation; or,
at

any

related unless consideration

me

and temporal aspects of culture cannot be reaUy is accorded to climax. This view has guided in the present work which in turn, I trust, validates the view by its
rate,

the areal

concrete exemplifications.

ELSIE

CLEWS PARSONS
(1875-1941)

Externally, Elsie

Clews Parsons'

scientific life

seems

to fall into

two

distinct

phases which might be called pre-Boas and post-Boas. Actually, the distinction is

more apparent than

real.

Toward

the

end of her

life

she achieved

a synthesis of the two parts. Throughout her life she consistently sought an answer to the problem of the nature of social pressures on the individual.
It

was only

the techniques of her search that changed.

Elsie Parsons

was born

in

New

York, of a wealthy and socially promibril-

nent family. Furthermore she was beautiful and was predestined for a
liant career in fashionable society.

Her

rebellion against

it

set the pattern

of her

life.

on

to obtain a

She attended Barnard College, then newly organized, and went Ph.D. in sociology in 1899.
fifteen years

During the next

Fashioned

she wrote a number of books,

The Old-

(under the pseudonym of John Main), Fear and Conventionality, Social Rule, all dealing in one way or another with the prob-

Woman

lem that obsessed her: the pressure of society on the individual, especially it affected the role of woman. She saw that no answers were to be found by multiplying examples. It was at this point that she met Boas and realized
as
the possibilities in
social process.
tales.

the

study of anthropology for gaining insight into

in

Wherever she went

her wide travels, she collected folk

it

Her

interest in folklore, although

seems, in retrospect, a detour from the true path of her interest. work in the pueblos that brought her back to the main track.

absorbed a great deal of her time, It was her

Here was a culture which demanded even greater conformity than our own. She began collecting the material which eventually went into her book, Pueblo Indian Religion. Her short papers describing ceremonies or fragments of ceremonies seem to follow the pattern of Fewkes or Voth. But the real substance is in the footnotes where she recorded her observations and
impressions,
official versions,

comments on the participating personnel, deviations from and village gossip. Her two volumes on pueblo religion
is definitive.

are encyclopedic, her analysis of ceremonial patterns

her debt to anthropology.

Her next book,

Mitla,

Town

of Souls,

is

She paid her one

Jemez
546

complete study of a primitive community. (Her book on the pueblo of is fragmentary and much of it done of necessity away from the

Holding Back in Crisis Ceremonialism

village.)

547
in the pueblos,

Here she put

to use

what she learned

and has pre-

sented a study of the unformalized techniques of social control in another society, written from the woman's point of view.

No

discussion of Elsie Clews Parsons

is

complete without mention of

her support of anthropology. She gave generously to anthropological causes, but always somewhat awkwardly, because the role of Lady Bountiful embarrassed her.
the field
financial

No one knows the number of students whom she helped, work she made possible, the books she had published, or the R.L.B. difficulties which she smoothed over.

Holding Back
BY
CRISIS

in Crisis

Ceremonialism
SIGNALIZE OR

CEREMONIAL

MEAN CEREMONIAL TO
life

ALLOW OF
calls "rites

the passing from one stage of

to another,
telete,

what Van Gennep

rites,

de passage," what the Greeks called

putting on of the

new

adolescence
crisis

the putting off of the old, the

or initiation

marriage

rites,

funeral rites or mourning.

In the interpretation of

ceremonialism I

am

suggesting, there are

I

two main

features, related features, for

both refer to what

take to be the

characteristic attitude of primitive culture towards change, the attitude

up to a certain point and controlled withThrough ceremonialism change is ignored, i.e., it is not met as it occurs and it is controlled, i.e., it is made dependent on the ceremony, established and disposed of ceremonially. At any rate the particular feature of crisis ceremonial I wish to discuss, its features of reluctance, of holding back, may be taken as an outcome of the pull of habit, actual or conventionalized, an outcome too, which is
that change can be ignored
in a certain degree.
. . .

tolerated or encouraged because

it

increases through resistance natural or

simulated the group's sense of power.

What

display of resistance or of reluctance

is

there at initiation? I will

give a few instances

In Central Australia preparations for the initiation are

to the lad to

made unknown
upon him, decoyed away
boy

be

initiated. ^

Then

frightened

when hands

are laid

he struggles to get free. Similarly in Queensland a girl is from camp, ambushed and then operated upon despite all her shrieks and
entreaties.^

Indeed in every Blackfellow

tribe the initiate or adolescent,

or
1

girl, is

regularly taken

by surprise and subjected

to force. In the

New

London and New York,

Spencer, B. and Gillen, F. J. The Native Tribes of Central Australia, p. 219. 1899. 2 Roth, W. E. Ethnological Studies among the North-West Central Queensland Aborigines, p. 174. Brisbane and London, 1897.

From
gist,

Parsons, "Holding

N.S., Vol.

Back in Crisis Ceremonialism," American AnthropoloXVIII (1916), pp. 41-47, 49-51.

548
Britain ceremonial, a coil of shell-money
to placate

ELSIE

CLEWS PARSONS

him

it is

before the coil

is

is thrown over the initiate's head, he succeeds in breaking away from his captors thrown, he is allowed to escape. The next time he is

said. If

caught and breaks away

it is

etiquette for

him

to try to kill his pursuers.^.

On

the part of an initiate's kindred, particularly his kinswomen,* resistinitiates are seized

ance and reluctance are also displayed. Narrinyeri

at night

upon

by the men. The women resist or pretend to resist, pulling back the captives and throwing firebrands at the captors.^ In the Port Lincoln
district after the initiate is seized the

women

are forced out of their shelters

and lament as if in deep grief. Their fears, it is said, are ceremonial.^ In the Mita-Koodi tribe throughout the first night of the initiation the women are supposed to wail.^* When a Banks island initiate leaves his kinswomen they cry as if he were leaving them for a long time.'^ A Tikopia boy is incised when he is about twelve years old. During the operation his relatives weep, the men cutting themselves on the forehead, the women
to shout
. . .

tearing their cheeks with their nails.^

The
to

initiation of offspring

marks among several peoples the entrance

of parents into another age-class. Ceremonial expressions of reluctance

privileges of seniority in early culture are so great.

be promoted among the elders appear to be scant, perhaps because the To our formulas for the

occasion

"I hear your

boy

is
is

entering college.

What an

old fellow you

feel like

must

feel," or,

"My

daughter

coming

out,

it

makes me

woman,"

to such formulas of regret I find but

one analogue.

an old Masai may

not be circumcised and qualified for the warrier class until his father has

observed a ceremonial called "the passing of the fence." After four days of

he is addressed by an elder: "Go, become an old man." He repUes: "Ho, I shall not!" Four times the order is given and four times objected to. The fifth time, the father answers: "Ho! I have gone then."
isolation, as the father is passing the fence,

Journal Anthropological Institute, XVIII (1888-9), p. 286-7. women is no doubt grief over the more or less permanent separation of the boys. The lifelong separation of the sexes is begun at initiation and no doubt ceremonially accentuated. By one engaged in proving that women are more sentimental than men, more reluctant to face the facts of change, their attitude at initiations and in other crisis ceremonials merits attention. 5 Smyth, R. Brough. The Aborigines of Victoria, I, 166. Melbourne and London,
B., in 4 Part of the feelings of the

SDanks,

1878.
6 lb., I, 67.

Roth, p. 173. ^Rivers, I, 101. Confined in the salagoro in old days it not infrequently happened that they never did see him again. Dr. Rivers believes, however, that the wailing is part of the conception of initiation as a ceremonial death, {lb., I, 127). Belief thus explicit may be held, but it is not necessary, to explain the mourning. The wailing is quite adequately accounted for by the diffuse feeling that the boy is setting forth
in
life.

6a

Rivers, lb.,

I,

312.
p. 295.

HoUis, A. C. The Masai,

Oxford, 1905.

Holding Back

in Crisis

Ceremonialism

549

In marriage ceremonial the observation of resistance and reluctance has been closer and fuller. Much of it has been compiled too to illustrate or prove the existence of marriage by capture and its survival in the so-called rape symbols. It is not good proof for the most part for that historic specu-

lation just because

it

does

illustrate the

theory of marriage as
is

crisis cere-

monialism. The resistance or holding back

of the bride, often against her

generally an individual display

own

people, and

or hang back

it is

the

women

rather than the

men

when her kindred do resist of the family who are

most

Other circumstances also suggest that the "capture" is merely of the girl herself, and not of the girl away from her people. The capture may be connived at by her family or even planned for. After it she may be taken back to her home for the subsequent part of the ceremonial,
assertive.

widow marriage the "rape one might expect in the case of a rite to express reluctance against a novel relationship, but not to be expected if the loss of a woman to her family were the idea in mind.
or even to hve there for a period. Again in

symbol"

may be dropped

out

^just

as

Bridegroom as well as bride may show reluctance and in ways too that commentary on the much discussed theory of the "rape symbol." Among the Roro-speaking tribes of New Guinea when the bridegroom sees the bridal procession coming, he hides in the marea or clubhouse. The village youths drag him forth, and disregarding his protests, having painted and decorated him, bring him to his father's house. Here he is made to sit down near the bride. Neither pays any attention to the other.^" From his place among the bachelors the Andamanese bridegroom has also to be dragged away. When the chief or elder approaches him he at once assumes a modest demeanor and simulates the greatest reluctance to join his fiancee}'^ For five days a New Britain bride stays alone in the bridegroom's
are a droll

house, while he hides

away

in the forest or in

some place
night, to

in the high grass

known

only to the men.^^

Among

the Abschasses of the Caucasus the

his

bridegroom runs away and hides on by force the following day.^^

wedding

be brought back

The analogous behavior

ticularization.
I

But

to

of the bride is far too weU known to need parone of the methods in use to overcome her reluctance

would draw

attention, the

method of

bribery.

Almost

as misleading to

the ethnographer as the tag of "rape symbol" has been the tag of "brideprice."
10

Any

present on the occasion of a marriage he puts

down

as part of

Seligmann, C. G. The Melanesians of British

New

Guinea,

p. 269.

Cambridge,
137.

1910.

Man, E. H., in Journal Anthropological Institute, XII (1882-3), p. Banks, pp. 286-7. Cf. Parkinson, R., Dreissig Jahre in der SUdsee, pp. gart, 1907. After two or three days the bridegroom begins to pay a daily bride, she giving him a meal. Then he may go with her to her field work. weeks he builds a house and the first night the couple spends in it the considered to be finally contracted. See p. 51. isSeidlitz, N. V. "Die Abchasen." Globus, LXVI (1894), 40.
12

11

65-6, Stuttvisit to

the

After some marriage is

550
the purchase are

ELSIE

CLEWS PARSONS

sum

signalizing a marriage

by purchase. Whether the presents

celebration or afterwards, what-

made

before the wedding, during

its

ever their nature, from a lock of hair or a bunch of flowers to a pig or a

diamond

tiara,

whether they are made by the bridegroom or his family or

friends
it

friends or

by the bride or her family or

this welter of

makes no

difference, they

are aU likely to be accounted for as a bride-price or derivatives at least of

a bride-price. In

wedding-presents

may be

distinguished, I
bribe,

think, presents that appear to be, far

more than a compensation, a

a short-cut to overcome the reluctances, sometimes of the bride, sometimes

of kindred, to enter into or envisage the

new

relationship or the

new

stage

of

life.

Among

the Zambales Negritoes during the leput or ceremonial

homethe

coming of the bridegroom with his bride, the lady squats

down on

ground from time to time and refuses to budge until she receives a present.^* A bride's conduct in Uganda is similarly contrary. Carried by the bridegroom's retainers she is set down at his threshold. There she balks until the bridegroom comes out to give her cowries. Indoors she declines to sit down and make herself at home until she gets another present of cowries. Later still another present has to be forthcoming to induce her to eat.^^ In Fiji the presents the weeping^ bride receives from the bridegroom's party are actually called "drying-up-of-the-tears," vakamamaca.^'^ In the account George Sand^^ gives us of the wedding practices of Berry, a district in the heart of France, the French bride is quite as unmistakably bribed as the Fijian. Barred out, the bridegroom's party sing to her:
"Ouvrez
la porte, ouvrez,

Marie, ma mignonne, J'ous de beaux cadeaux a vous presenter Helas! ma mie, laissez-nous entrer."

And
her

ribbons

then the song goes on to specify

all

the charming things they have for^^

and

lace, a fine apron, a

hundred

pins, a cross of gold^"

visited

Among
14
15

the Bashkirs although a girl

may have been

by her be-

Reed, W. A. Negritoes of Zambales, pp. 59-60. Manila, 1904. Roscoe, J., in Journal Anthropological Institute. XXXII (1902), 37. 16 She weeps although her marriage has been the outcome of a mutual attachment, not, as in other types of Fijian marriages, of betrothal in infancy, or of purely
parental determination. 17 Williams, T. Fiji and the Fijians, I, 169. London, 1858. 18 La Mare au Diable. 19 None of them appears to materialize; but in the church the bridegroom gives the bride le treizain, thirteen pieces of silver. 20 It is this account which is cited by McLennan as evidence for the survival of a rape symbol in France. "Primitive Marriage," App. in Studies in Ancient History. But the bride's refrain, sung for her by the matrons, suggests an explanation other than that of the rape symbol for all that follows. "Mon pere est en chagrin, ma mere en grand' tristesse" a father angry and a mother sorrowing over the disturbance of their family life.

Holding Back

in Crisis

Ceremonialism

551

when on the final payment on the home, she refuses to embrace him until he gives Unmistakable bribes, all these, but even more her a piece of money.^^ dubious instances, even the morgen gab for example, and its many variatrothed most intimately for a long time
bride-price he takes her
. .
.

tions I prefer to think of as originally a prospective bribe rather than as

compensation money,

its orthodox explanation. Another ceremonial display of reluctance at marriage is the separation of bride and groom until the close of the ceremonial, sometimes very protracted, and even for some time afterwards. The avoidance practised in
.
.

the so-called Tobias nights is a taboo not limited to the early Christian Church. In Australia the Mukjarawaint bride sleeps the first night of her

marriage on the ground outside her bridegroom's camp.^^ The Euahlayi

bride
is

expected to sleep with a

fire

between herself and her bridegroom.^^

In Queensland, Frazer island, bride and bridegroom live alone for two

months
just as

in huts about six yards apart.^^

The Roro-speaking bridegroom

is

wedding night he goes back to his clubhouse leaving his bride to sleep alone in the house of his father. He is brought back to her the following day, but he does not spend the night. The third day the couple is supposed to be "reconciled," but the bridegroom continues to sleep at the clubhouse for several weeks. ^^ Among
"shy" after his wedding as before.
his

On

the

Andamanese

"it

often happens that a

young couple

will pass several

days after their nuptials without exchanging a single word, and to such an
extent do they carry their bashfulness that they even avoid looking at each
other."^^

That formality may enter into

.

this attitude

one may

at least sur-

mise.

Massim no trace of ceremonial deferment has been observed and yet a man at Mukana, a bridegroom of at least two months, volunteered to Dr. Seligmann the information that he had not yet had
. .

Among

the

connection with his wife for

if

a child were born within a year of marriage

people would sneer, saying, "What sort of children are these?"^^

the Roro-speaking tribes where deferment,

Among
was

we remember,
to

is

customary a

woman

in former times did not expect to bear a child until her garden
/.

bearing well,

e.,

until she

had been married one

two

years.^^ In the

New
Of

Britain islands children were not

bom

for a period

from two

to four

years after marriage.

"Women

did not like to speedily

become mothers."^^

the conventionalized expression of reluctance to meet change that

21 Van Gennep, A. Les Rites de Passage, p. 173. Paris, 1909. 22Howitt, A. W. The Native Tribes of South-East Australia, New York, 1904. 23 Parker, K. L., The Euahlayi Tribe, p. 58. London, 1905. 24 Smyth, I, 84 ft. 25 Seligmann, pp. 269-70. 26 Man, X, p. 138. 27 Seligmann, p. 745.

p. 245.

London and

28/6., pp. 269-70.

29

Banks,

p. 287.


552
ELSIE

CLEWS PARSONS

occurs in marriage and initiation ceremonial I have given illustrations,

some
larize

of the facts having been otherwise interpreted; but I need not particu-

with illustrations about the unwillingness to meet the change

I

made

by death.

have only to refer to various weU-known

beliefs or practices

the belief that the spirit of the deceased lingers for a period

dead to return or to be off; the provision for the wants of the lingering ghost, for both his material and his emotional wants; the preservation of his remains or reUcs
days or longer
his
set appeals to the

about

^hours or

home; the

or of his

memory

or influence; early theories of the

life

after death, the

continuation theory, the theory of reincarnation. ...

Nativity

Myth

at

Laguna and Zuni

DURING A VISIT TO LAGUNA IN FEBRUARY, 1918, I HAD NOTICED IN THE church a model in miniature of the Nativity group. Jesus, Mary and Joseph, the ox and the mule, were represented, and there was a large flock of sheep. Jose or Tsiwema or Tsipehus,^ the "sextana," was one of my Laguna informants, and, on asking him the meaning of the crib, he
narrated as foUows:

The baby Jose

Crito, god's child {hus^

ka

iach,

"god

his child")

was

brought from a far country by his father Jose and his mother Mari.^ They took the journey about the time he was going to be born. He was born
in a stable.

A big fire,
When

a big star,

came down from

the sky. There

was an ox

in the stable.

he was born, the ox came there.

He

blew* on the baby.

Uttle after a

there.

shepherd came. That is the reason the priest put the sheep That was the way he was born. He went from there to another town.

From Parsons, "Nativity Myth at Laguna and Zuni," Journal of American FolkLore, Vol. XXXI (1918), pp. 256-263.
1

for the
ate,

Meaning "God's Ear." Since Jose has been sexton, according to his own account, more than half a century, since he is also the shiwanna (thunder) cheani, one of

two surviving medicine-men of Laguna, the nickname appears singularly appropriand yet it was given him for quite another than the obvious reason. When he was courting the girl who was to be his second wife, his prospective mother-in-law, a Zuni, referred to him as a very rich man, boasting that he had come to the house wearing a silver belt and tsipe hus, here meaning "godlike ear-rings." ^ Hus (yus) is associated with the sun. "Osach [Sun] was sent by naishdya [father] yus. That is the reason all look up to him as one with authority [ityetsa]." In Keresan mythology the sun is a secondary creation. 3 From another informant I got the terms Maria Santichuma and Esu Christu. ^ Gisach (chishatsa). It is the same term as that used for blowing on the feathersticks

or other sacred objects.

it is

It

Zuni the breath

formant,

ordinarily expelled.
is

drawn

corresponds to the Zuni rite of yechu; although at in, whereas at Laguna, according to one in-

Nativity

Myth

at

Laguna and Zuni

553

mother and father and himself, on a horse. He grew up at the king's house. After he had grown up, the others, the Jews, were not satisfied with him. They were going to kill him. There were three brothers, three children of god; but this one born in the stable was the leader. They were hunting everywhere for him to kill him. One of the Jews asked the middle brother which was Jesus. The Jew said, "Which one is it?" He said, "I am not going to tell you." They said, "Yes, you
to the king's house, his

must

tell

us."

house.

They were all one was it. He was

So they bribed him. So another party of Jews came into his sitting at the table, and still they kept asking which sitting in the north direction. "That's he." So they
little,"

took him. "Wait a

of

of us." The one sitting at the you has been given east end of the table was the one that had been bribed. "You are the one, you have been paid some money. Now I am going away. I am going up to Konamats ['place of being thankful']."^ So they took him out of the room. They stood up a cross. He was a spirit. So it took some time for them to get ready. When god's child made everything ready, they nailed him to the cross through the middle of his hands. There was one who could not see. There was another who was lame, so his brother carried him on his back. They pierced him through the heart. "Now all is ready," said the Jews. They made the blind man and the lame man pierce his heart. When

some money?" "None

he

said.

"Wait a

little,

my

brothers!

Which one

they pierced him, the blood spurted everywhere. In this

way

(that

is

the

reason why) from the spattered blood

all

Uving beings came, horses and

mules and
the blind

all

creatures.

The man

that

was lame got up and walked, and

cross.

man

could see, because they had been spattered with the blood.

They dug the hole so deep, that the cross could never be taken up. They buried him in this deep hole; they threw dirt and rocks on him, some of the rocks so big that they could hardly lift them; still they threw them in. They buried him. The first day, the second day, he was still buried; the third day he was to leave his grave. He went up to Konamats, back to his father, God. The Jews kept shooting upwards. His father was glad he came back up, so they would live there together in Konamats. The season when he was treated so mean is coming back again. Tomorrow is the first day of mass. For seven weeks I have to ring the bell. On the sixth (seventh?) Sunday it will be kuitishi. On the seventh Sunday it is coming back to the same time he went up to heaven. On the Wednesday before kuitishi will be the covering.^ All the people come in to take a turn watching. It is covered Wednesday, Thursday,
So
at last they

dug a hole and stood up the

"thanks." Wenimats, a place said at Laguna to be west of Zuni (the it with St. John's), is the "heaven" of native theory. On being questioned, the sextana opined that konamats and wenimats were the same, meaning
5

Konama,

Hopi

identify

perhaps equivalents.
*

The

bell

and

all

the figures in the church are covered with cloth.


554
Friday.

ELSIE

CLEWS PARSONS
It will

On

Saturday

it is

uncovered.

He

goes back to his father.

be

kucheachsiJ That

is all.

At
but

Zufii I

until I

had frequently asked for a tale (telapnane) about the santu; asked Klippelanna,^ none was forthcoming.^ Klippelanna nar-

rated as follows:

In the West there Uved a Mexican girl who never went out. She staid aU the time in her own house. She would sit where the sun shone in. The sun impregnated her ("gave her a child"). At this time soldiers were guarding her.^ One of the soldiers saw her, and said to the others, "The one we are guarding is pregnant. If she does such things, what is the use of guarding her? Let us kUl her!" The next day in the morning she was to die. That evening the Sun by his [power] came into her room, and said, "To-morrow you are to die." "Well, if it is to be, I must die," she said. He said, "No, I won't let you die, I will get you out." The next morning early by his [power] he lifted her up out of the window.^^ "Now go to where you are to hve." So she went on tiU she came to a sipaloa planting. She said, "What are you planting?" He said, "Round stones." Because he did not answer right, she did something to the seed, and his com did

7 End or breaking of taboo. Were a masked dancer to break a restriction (e.g., were he to have sexual intercourse during the ceremonial), it would be cheachsi.

After a birth, continence

is required for twelve days. In case of cheachsi a medicinebe called in to give a purge; otherwise the woman will dry up {tsipanito) Compare E. C. Parsons, "Zuni Death Beliefs and Practices" (AA 18:246). 8 A very garrulous and unusually naive old man, who is sometimes reputed a witch. He is the fraternity director {tikya most) of the Little Fire fraternity {matke tsannakwe). 9 Sometimes the santu was admitted to be Mexican, sometimes it was stated that she had been with them "from the beginning," she came up with them. One of the paramount priests (ashiwanni) who asserted the latter origin added that the santu had never staid [sic] in the church except during her lying-in at the winter-solstice ceremony. !<> Men volunteer as soldiers {sontaluk) to guard the santu during her ceremonial. Analogously, among the Keresans the "war captains" guard the mother {iyebik,

man

will

uretseta).

our usually amenable interpreter refused to go on translating. He had heard the story otherwise; that Klippelanna was not telling it right; and that if I told the story wrong, he himself would be held responsible. Asked to particularize, he said that as Klippelanna was telling the story, the domestic animals came to Kohiwela. That was not right; there were no such animals in Kohiwela ("god town," where the gods [koko] live, and the dead). I argued that it was "ours not to reason why," that all he and I had to do was to take down the story as it was given to us; but I suggested and pleaded in vain. He refused to translate. "No, let us have another story!" he firmly concluded. The story was retold another time, and translated by Margaret Lewis, a non-Zuni. Leslie's refusal to translate seemed to me a striking illustration of Zuni tenacity to pattern; and it calls to mind an opinion of Dr. Kroeber, our most authoritative student of Zuiii, namely, that, although fifty per cent of Zuni culture may be borrowed from White culture, the Zuni have so cast what
11

At

this point

said that he

they have taken over into their may be called indigenous.

own

patterns, that ninety-nine per cent of their culture

Nativity

Myth

at

Laguna and Zuni

on a little ways, and she came him what he was planting. He said,
right,

555
to another

not

come

up. She went

one

planting. She asked

"I

am

planting

corn and wheat." Because he answered her

seed,

she did nothing to his

Then the soldiers found she was gone, and they came on after her. They asked the first man if he had seen a girl coming. He said, "Yes, she has just gone over the hill." They said, "Well, we must be nearly up with her, we will hurry on." So they went on over the hill, and they saw no one. They came to another little hill, and they could not see her. They came to a river, and it was very deep. They cut some poles, and they said, "We'll see how deep it is." They stuck the poles down, and they said, "It is too deep. There is no use in hunting any more for her." So they turned back. But the girl had crossed the river, and went on until she came to Kohiwela, and there she lay in. She had twins. The pigs and the dogs kissed her. That is why the pigs and the dogs have children. The mules would not kiss her. That is why the mules have no children. They came on to Itiwonna (middle, i.e., Zuni). At Kotuwela they all (the mother and twins) became another sort of person, they became stone.^^ when they had the dances (at Zuni), she did not care to see them. She did not like their dances. They had the hematatsi. She liked that dance. So she went on to Acoma, because hematatsi^^ was a dance of Acoma. She lives there to-day. The elder sister, i.e., of the twins, is here. The younger went south to where the other Zuni live. That is all.
and they
all

came

up.

The elder sister, I learned from one of the paramount rain priests, had been kept by Naiuchi, famous half a century ago as priest of the north, and bow-priests' director. From his house the santu had been taken to the house where she now lives, a house on the south side.^^ Naiuchi was
of the Eagle clan, and the present abode of the santu belongs to a child
i.e., the paternal clan was Eagle. (It is a house of the Frog For some time a certain Eagle clan family has been trying to get possession of the santu. It is assumed that she belongs to the Eagle clan. In other words, the santu has been put into the pattern of the Zuiii fetiches, which are clan property. Unlike them, she is not kept secreted; but, like them, she is a source of light in the sense of life. "All want life from her." And she is also a specific for rain. After a dry season, she will be carried around the fields, as she was two years ago, in the course of her ceremonial. "The santu is a rain-priest." The santu is likewise a direct agent of fertility or reproduction. Four

of the Eagle;

clan.)

12 Variant: The santu had been a real baby belonging to a Mexican lady; then the santu turned into stone. The santu was one of the raw people (kyapenahoi); i.e., supernaturals. 13 Said to be the upikaiupona. 14 In a house on the west side there is said to be another santu, one bought from Mexicans. It belongs to the Tansy-mustard clansman who figures in the molawia ceremonial.

556
days after the winter solstice she
her;
lies

ELSIE
in for four days;
etc.,

CLEWS PARSONS
and small clay

images of the domestic animals, of bracelets, rings,

are placed around

she is supposed to give increase during the year.^^ A been noted at Acoma.^^ At Laguna there is a practice of making small dough images of animals, but these representations are merely baked and eaten. The existence of any ceremonial point of view in connection with them was in generaP^ denied; and the practice of making

and

to

them

all

similar practice has

clay images in connection with the saint appears, according to

my Laguna
howAcoma, and

informants, not to occur.

The

saint is connected with reproduction,

ever, according to a Zuiii informant^^

who had grown up

in

had

visited

Laguna only

last year.

The

night before the santu childbirth^^

15 See E. C. Parsons, "Notes on Zuiii," pt. I (Memoir of the American Anthropological Association 4:170-171). 16 C. F. Lummis, The Land of Poco Tiempo (New York, 1897), 276. '^'^ According to one informant, ushumini were offered to "animals" before hunting. If the images disappeared, it meant that deer would be killed. 18 He also asserted that clay animals were placed around the saint, both at Acoma and Laguna. At both places, we may note, the saint is male. 19 Kuashe was referring to Christmas Eve, for he also used the Mexican term nochowena (nochebuena) From this the Zuni santu chalia would appear to be a Christmas rite, santu chalia being merely a translation of la navidad. It is at nochowena that the Zuni will visit Laguna. At Laguna as well as at Acoma (see E. C. Parsons, "Notes on Acoma and Laguna" [AA 20:162-186]) there is a prolonged Christmas celebration. Beginning Dec. 16, the church-bell is rung each morning about nine o'clock, and mass is said by the sextana. Every one counts the days. On Dec. 22, rehearsal of the dances (Kutanigwia, "trying") is held at night, held, it happens, in Jefferson's house, a large house, an osach (sun) clan house. Dec. 24, the ninth day, the "great day," after mass at 1 1 a. m., by the priest, there are Comanche, Eagle and {yakohanna or talawaie) dances (katsetia). Everybody is on hand, eager to see or take part. After midnight mass the dances continue in the church until 2 or 3 A. M. Dec. 25, Comanche, talawaie, etc., dances first in church about 11 a. m., and then in the plaza, the Christmas Eve dancers being called upon to dance till sunset. Dancers from outlying villages, as in 1918 the Eagle dancers, may quit earlier. Private presents of food are made, and there is an interchange of presents bread, chile, fruit, china, cloth between comadres; i.e., the godmother gives a present to her godchild, and the child's mother, a present to the godmother. Mexicans go singing from house to house, and receive presents of food. Talawaie {danawaiye) is danced in the plaza from Dec. 26 through Dec. 29. During these four days children may take part. The last day in particular is made much of. Jan. 1, king day (/ej shashte), election of governor and officers (tenientes). Jan. 6, dances, Comanche, Navaho, etc., at night in different houses in honor of newly-elected officers. Jan. 7, 8, 9, dances (mostly talawaie) in the plaza in all the villages for tenientes. (Jan. 9, 1918, was stormy, and in consequence the dance was in the church.) Jan. 10 great The dance-place in the church is below the altar, fiesta by Mexicans at Seboyeta. the different sets of dancers taking turns until towards the end all the sets dance at the same time. In 1917-18 there were about twenty dancers in the talawaie, men and women dancing in two lines, the sexes alternating. There were six men in the Comanche dance, and two men in the Eagle dance. The delight-makers (kachale) are said to appoint the Christmas-time dancers, and none may refuse. Unlike the katsena dances, for which new songs are composed, only old songs are sung in the Christmas-time dances. The Comanche and Eagle dancers have a choir. All the dances are without masks, but formerly in the talawaie the women wore squared wooden turkey-befeathered headpieces or tablets {uteduish, "on the top"). The older men wear white cotton trousers and shirts; the younger men, their ordinary American
.

Com

Nativity
said this

Myth

at

Laguna and Zuni

557

man, men were free "to plant seeds" in any woman they met. The was "to make more children." Resulting offspring were accounted the saint's children. "That is why the saint has so many children."^^ One more function of the Zuiii santu. She is a source of omen,^^ telling "what wiU happen." She does "tricks." If the ground looks "dry" around her house,22 as her bower in the satechia {santu ceremony) may be called, there will be a drought; if the ground is grassy, there will be rain. To a girl to whom something is going to happen the saint's clothes in the satechia would look ugly. One year, during the satechia, there appeared on her person spots of blood, and in the dance two men were shot. "Last year," narrated my informant, "the first day of the satechia when I looked at the santu, her eyes were aU right; but the second day they were rolling, like the dead. They told me it was an omen. That winter my cousin died of pneumonia, alone in a sheep-camp, and for three days the sheep were by
practice

themselves. "2^

Nothing corresponding to the story of Jesus as heard at Laguna have I been able to find at Zuni. Stevenson frequently refers to Poshaiyanki as the Zuni "culture-hero." The myth she gives appears somewhat reminiscent of the Christ myth,^^ and her statement that on the feather-sticks offered to Poshaiyanki a cross figures, appears significant. I learned but little about
Poshaiyanki feather-sticks except that
feather-sticks to
all fraternity members do plant him at the winter-solstice ceremonial. The very existence Poshaiyanki was unknown to my non-fraternity informants,^^ and denied

of

high buckskin leggings tied with the woman's hair belt. Comanche dancers wear a head-dress of eagle-feathers and ribbons. The eagle-feather headdress of the Eagle dancers reaches to the feet. The faces of the Eagle dancers are
clothes, plus

painted.

This practice was described to a company of Zuni, and the description amused just about as it would have amused a company of sophisticated whites. The practice was plainly not Zuni. Nevertheless at the "big dances" (i.e., the dances in which the people take part), formerly the scalp-dance and the owinahaiye, and to-day the saint's dance {satechia, it lasts two days or more, according to whether any one asks for a repetition), there is always a certain amount of license among the girls. Zuiii informant told me he had seen a bereaved Mexican woman praying to the Zuiii santu for a child that would live. 21 Compare E. C. Parsons, "Notes on Zuiii," pt. I (MAAA 4:189). 22 Similarly at Laguna the bower in the plaza {kakati) to which the santu is carried is called santu gama. In the anti-sunwise circuit from the church the padre leads, followed in order by the governor (tapup), the sextana, the santu carried by the

20

them

women, and all the people. 23 Compare beliefs about achiyelotopa (M. C. Stevenson, "The Zuni Indians," (Annual Report, Bureau of American Ethnology 23:462). 24 The Sia Poshaiyanne myth is in part indubitably Christian (M. C. Stevenson, "The Sia," RBAE 11:65-67). 25 A priest excepted, who stated that non-fraternity persons would not know about Poshaiyanki. This priest also stated that there was no cross on the feather-sticks to Poshaiyanki, and that the fraternity feather-stick on which a face is painted is that which is offered to Poshaiyanki. Note J. W. Fewkes, "Hopi Shrines near the East Mesa, Arizona" (AA 8:367, 368); also Fewkes, "Winter Solstice Ceremony at Walpi" (AA 11:75). Prayer-sticks in the form of a cross for the increase of domestic animals


558
by one
fraternity informant,

ELSIE

CLEWS PARSONS

who never

hesitated to

to conceal a fact.

On

the other hand, Klippetanna,

lie when he wished when questioned about

Poshaiyanki, narrated as follows:

Poshaiyanki was a "raw person" (a supernatural).

magic.

He was

man

of

AU

the fraternities belong to him.

all

Some time
all

in the beginning

he

came out with

towns, and he
all

the fraternities.
all

He went

over the country to different

do in their fraternities. He he got to Lea, Lea said to him, "Now you are a great man, you are powerful, a raw person, and do things nobody else can do. Now, to-morrow you and I will do tricks to each other." Lea was tall, and Poshaiyanki was short. "To-morrow, when the sun comes out, the sun will shine on one of us first; that is the one who will win." Lea said to him, "All right!" He had parrot tail-feathers. ^^ In the morning they both stood together, looking to where the sun would rise. When the sun came out, it did not shine on Lea. It shone first on Poshaiyanki. Then he won.^^ "Now, with all the animals we are going to do tricks," he said to him. "All right!" he said. So Lea asked him to be the first. He said he would not be the first. "You will be the first," he said to him, "because it was you who wanted to try it." So Lea began. And he

made

the things for

them

to

went

over the world.

He

got to Lea.^^

When

called all the animals that belonged to him,

sheep, horses, mules, pigs,

it.

chickens. So aU gathered together.

you

try it,"

He

told Poshaiyanki to try

"Now,
all

"All right! I

am

but an Indian,"^^ he said. So he called

all

the birds, eagles, hawks, wild turkeys,

kinds of birds, and

all

flew to

them.
last

He called deer, bear, cougar, wolf, and all the other animals. At aU the animals gathered together where they were, and Poshaiyanki
again.^"

had four time more than Lea. So Poshaiyanki beat him

From my

priest informant I learned that Poshaiyanki

of the fraternities,

and that he had Uved

at Shipap,

was the father which famous starting-

are mentioned, likewise (pp. 72, 75) to the same end the use of clay or wooden images of animals. 26 "King," Leslie translated, quite properly, but much to my surprise. Lea, usually pronounced lei, is from rei, and the word has become at Zuiii a proper name. Leslie had learned its generic meaning, I suspect, from non-Zuni sources.
27 Such as are worn by the dancers, more particularly the kokokshi, in their hair. There is a suggestion here of magical quality in the feathers. 28 Compare "The Sia" (RBAE 11:33-34). 29 Ho'ite. Hd'ite appears to be a generic term for any Indian. 30 Compare "The Sia" (RBAE 11:59-65); Father Dumarest, MS. on Cochiti in the Brooklyn Institute Museum. Poshaiyanki becomes Montezuma, and included in the myth is the following unmistakably Christian incident: "Montezuma made a house where none could find him, because he had enemies, and where he could deliberate on what he had to do. He had to reform the unmarried mothers. He made a serpent like a fish with wings. It would go into a house and throw itself upon the mother and child as if to devour them. It lived in a lake, where it became very large. Instead of merely frightening the mothers and children, it ended by devouring them.

Montezuma had

to confine the serpent to the lake forever."

Nativity

Myth

at

Laguna and Zuhi

559

point was on this occasion placed at Las Vegas, Poshaiyanki discovered

the fraternities.
cines.^^

Through him they had their animals and birds and medihe talked to the people, those in front heard more plainly than those sitting behind. That is why some fraternity members know more than others. After he had told them everything, he was lost. He did not die. He went through the earth.^^

When

31 On another occasion the same informant stated that Poshaiyanki also brought sheep, burro, and horses. Having first asserted that nothing at all had come to the Zuni through the Spaniards, he admitted that the sipaloa or kishdyan (an old word for "Mexican") had brought wheat and watermelons. Peach-trees were already there when the Zuiii came up, and they brought with them corn and squash. 32 recall that Kohjwela is underground.

We

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

(1881-1949)

It

is

a strange coincidence

//

it

is

a coincidence

that

Cooper turned

to anthropology, the place

he chose for
first

field

when Father work was the

life

area where, in the 17th century, the Jesuit missionaries had labored.

Anthropology was not Father Cooper's

choice as his

work.

He

young man. After graduating from college in Maryland, he went to Rome where he spent six years in advanced studies. He was ordained in Rome and appointed as priest to a Washington, D.C. parish. It was during his summer vacations in the North Woods that he first became interested in primitive people, arui decided to pursue
called to the priesthood as a
this

was

interest in
this

Washington, specifically in the Smithsonian Institution.

During

time he was teaching in the Department of Religious Education

at Catholic University. After

a while he added some courses in anthro-

pology to the curriculum. Eventually the long road to anthropology was completed; he was relieved of his parish duties in 1928 in order to establish

a new Department of Anthropology at Catholic University. Father Cooper's second specialization was South America, although he never had an opportunity to do field work on that continent. He used his
exhaustive

command

of the old

and new materials

to organize a coherent

picture of culture areas

and

culture sequences in South America.

R.L.B.

The Relations Between Religion and

Morality
in Primitive
THE PROBLEM
THE PRESENT PROBLEM, THAT OF THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN RELIGION and morality among primitive peoples, is one of the most difl&cult and elusive in the whole field of culture history. The question itself is complex, as there are so many angles to it. Our field evidence is none too abundant,
From Cooper,
pp. 33-48.

Culture

Primitive

Man,

Vol.

IV (Washington: Catholic

University, 1931),

560

Religion and Morality in Primitive Culture

561

and

is

often vague, inconclusive, and open to criticism.

The

interpreta-

tion of such evidence as

we

possess calls for the exercise of the utmost

caution and reserve.

In the present paper,

we

shall endeavor,

first,

to define oiur

problem

as

clearly as limited space permits;

secondly, to summarize the available

factual evidence; thirdly, to reconstruct,

from the anthropological evidence,

the probable early prehistorical relations of religion with moraUty.

We

shall

not deal with the ultimate origins of morahty or of religion.

we here mean a beUef in plus emotional and persuasive toward supernatural personal beings. Rehgion, so described, is distinguished from magic, that is, a belief in plus emotional and coercive
religion
attitudes attitudes

By

toward supernatural impersonal

here

forces.

By morahty we

mean codes

or types of behavior, viewed as pre-

scribed or obligatory, toward supernatural beings or, in matters of justice

or charity, toward fellow men. Morality, so described, is distinguished from purely non-obligatory customs, from rules of etiquette, and from
'non-moral' taboos.

draw some distinction between these three types of behavior. We may illustrate from the people best known personally to the writer, the Tete de Boule of Quebec province. A young woman who would stroll through camp with head uncovered would be acting contrary to a purely non-obhgatory custom. So likewise would a man who killed a moose and refused to share it freely with his friends and fellow-tribesmen. The Tete de Boule all agree that he has a perfect right to keep all of the meat for his own use, and no one would think of charging him with dishonesty if he refused to share it, but he would be regarded as stingy and niggardly. He would be breaking a customary, but non-obligatory, observance. If you should unwittingly ask a native the name of his deceased father, you would be guilty of a gross breach of etiquette. If one Indian should trap beaver on another Indian's hunting ground, or should steal food or raiment or ammunition from another's cache, he would be looked upon as guilty of infringement of strict right, as guilty of moral misconduct. If he wantonly slaughtered more food than he could use, and so deUberately wasted meat, he would subject himself to a religious sanction. For Our Grandfather, the benevolent being who was from the beginning of the world and who will live "so long as the earth is the earth," who sends the snow and the North wind, and who brings the Indian the hare and the ptarmigan as winter food, would be angry, and next year would not send the deep snow in which the large game flounder and become easy victims for the hunter. Nor would he send the North wind in the late winter to put a hard crust on the snow and so to make traveling and the pursuit of game less arduous. Not only the culprit, but the rest of the tribe would suffer. The lines that separate non-obUgatory custom, etiquette, and moral precept are not as sharply defined perhaps among primitive
Primitive
peoples,
as

a rule,

562
peoples as they are
blurred.
in

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

among
us,

although even

among us

the lines are often

But the difference is in the main recognized by them, even though concrete cases it may, as among us, be difficult to say definitely whether
is

custom, etiquette, or morality proper

Primitive peoples also have a

being offended.
of what

number

may be

called 'non-

moral' taboos.

The

act

is

avoided or prohibited, but there seems to be

neither social nor religious sanction attached to the taboo,

and

its

breach

does not infringe on the rights of neighbor. Thus, for example,

of the Ojibwa,
if

among some

you swallow the kneecap bone of a hare, you will have no you take an expiatory plunge in lake or river. In the evidence, at least as gathered by the present writer, there is no indication of offence taken by the rabbit-spirit or other

more luck

in hunting that animal, unless or until

supernatural being.
call the

Bad

luck just automatically follows.

The

sanction,

if

we

penalty such,

is

a non-religious, non-social, perhaps a 'magical'

one.

In the following pages

we

are excluding, as not

such observances as pure customs, rules

(magical or non-magical) taboos.
or prohibitions that
as described

of etiquette,

germane to our subject, and 'non-moral'

We

shall confine attention to precepts

come more

clearly within the circle of morality proper

on a preceding page.

THE FACTS AND THEIR DISTRIBUTION

The

'lawless'

savage given over to sheer impulse

is

a creature of fable.

Anthropology knows of no such animal. Not only are primitive peoples everywhere under numerous restrictions imposed by custom, etiquette, and
non-moral taboo, but everywhere are they bound by codes of morality
proper. In fact,
all

things considered, the uncivilized

man

lives his life

under probably as many non-moral and moral

civilized brother.

restrictions

as does his

He
is

does not consider himself bound by some of the

in

restrictions

which hem

our western

liberty.

are untrammeled, he
prohibitions,

cribbed, cabined

On the other hand, where we and confined by a host of precepts,

and taboos.
is

Furthermore, running through the myriad moral codes of the peoples

of the earth, there
first

a certain uniformity, a certain

common

pattern. One's

impression on reading through a collection of the moral precepts and

is

neither

one of bewilderment. These seems to be and contradiction appear to reign supreme. What one code commands, the next prohibits. What one people calls good, the other calls bad. Man's moral codes look at first glance like a chaotic pathless jungle. For a long time this impression widely prevailed, and one still finds it set down as fact in popular or other works. But in the last two or three decades we have been seeing more and more clearly that underlying this superficial confusion and contradiction are a certain fundamental order and uniformity.
codes of the primitive world

rhyme nor reason,

neither system nor order. Confusion

Religion and Morality in Primitive Culture

563
they differ as to details of

The peoples

of the world, however

much

morality, hold universally, or with practical universality, to at least the

following basic precepts. Respect the Supreme Being or the benevolent

being or beings

children. Malicious

"black" lying,

take his place. Do not 'blaspheme'. Care for your murder or maiming, stealing, deliberate slander or when committed against friend or unoffending fellow clans-

who

man

or tribesman, are reprehensible. Adultery proper is wrong, even though there be exceptional circumstances that permit or enjoin it and even though sexual relations among the unmarried may be viewed leniently.
Incest
is

a heinous offence. This universal moral code agrees rather closely

own Decalogue understood in a strictly literal sense. It inculcates worship of and reverence to the Supreme Being or to other superhuman
with our
beings. It protects the fundamental

human

rights

of

life,

limb, family,

property, and good name.^

broad generalizations, therefore, emerge from the vast multitude all peoples have a moral code. We know of no exception to this rule. Second, beneath the bewildering variety of local and tribal differences, there is a perceptible underlying uniformity in the moral codes of humanity the world over.
of facts at our disposal. First,

Two

But the further questions

this

arise:

What

sanctions enforce these codes or

code? Purely social or secular sanctions? Magical sanctions?

Or

religious sanctions as well? In other words, are these 'moral' codes in reality

and controlling force from purely social, natural, or secular motives and incentives? Or are they looked upon as emanating from, expressing the wiU of, and, through rewards or punishments here or hereafter, sanctioned by the Supreme Being or by inferior but superhuman personal beings? As our evidence stands today, no simple 'yes' or 'no' answer can be given to these questions. The facts we possess demand that we follow good scholastic precedent. We must distinguish. Before attempting to do so systematically, we may do well to present
'magical' or 'social' codes, deriving their driving
beliefs,

from magical

or,

from

society,

some concrete

illustrations of actual conditions existing

sufficient

among

peoples for

whom we

have

information on the point. These illustrations,

together with those given in the three preceding papers of the present

symposium,^ should give us a better basis for discussion.

We

are indebted to

Hose

for our

Kayans, an agricultural people of Borneo.

most thorough-going account of the He sums up their relations betheir

tween religion and morality as follows: "As regards the influence of

1 For details, see E. Westermarck, The origin and development of the moral ideas, 2 vols., 2d ed., London, 1912; L. T. Hobhouse, Morals in evolution, 2 vols., 2d ed., London, 1908, esp. i, 32. 2 See Primitive Man, Jan.-Apr., 1931, iv, nos. 1-2; an excellent detailed study by W. Matthews, of religio-moral relations among the Navaho may be found in Jour, of Amer. Folk-Lore, 1899, xii, 1-9; ditto for Winnebago morality in P. Radin, Primitive man as philosopher, New York, 1927, chs. vi-vii.

564
religious beliefs

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

on
the moral conduct of the Kayans,

we have seen

that

on main salutary and essenThe part which the major tial for the maintenance of social order. spirits or gods are supposed to play in bringing or fending off the major calamities remains extremely vague and incapable of definition; in the main, faithful observance of the omens, of rites, and of custom generally, seems to secure the favour of the gods, and in some way their protection; and thus the gods make for morality. Except in that part of conduct which is accurately prescribed by custom and tradition, their influence seems to be negligible, and the high standard of the Kayans in neighborliness, in mutal help and consideration, in honesty and forbearance, seems to be
the fear of the toh [minor spirits or powers] serves as a constant check

the breach of customs, which customs are in the

. . .

maintained without the direct support of their religious beliefs".^

Among

the Ifugao, one of the rice-planting hill tribes of the

Mountain

Province of Northern Luzon, in the Philippine Islands, irreverence to the

such as laughing at or insulting a man when he is would be punished by them. But, if a man be insulted when not so worshiping, the deities would not be concerned about the offence. It would be up to the man himself to punish the offender. It is forbidden to leave the village on an obligatory rest day, for then the deities would not protect the crops and the harvest would be bad. It is likewise forbidden to eat vegetables and shellfish when the rice is planted, for the bagol-dtiiiQs, would be angry and you would become iU or perhaps die. The Ifugao believe in a future life, but have a very vague idea of its nature, and as regards happiness or unhappiness therein there seems to be no difference between the fate of the good and of the wicked. In the moral education of the young, religious motives appear quite absent, and

Kabunyan, the

deities,

sacrificing to them,

purely secular motives are proposed. Parents or elders will say to a boy:

do not lie. If you lie, you wiU disgrace your family, nobody and you will lose your standing. Be honest, do not steal. By honesty you protect the good name of your family. If you steal, you will be found out and thus disgraced. When you go to war, fight to revenge the life of your relative, or to show your bravery. When the fight is over, come back home, and do not take your enemies' land from them, else they will have no rice." And so for the whole moral code, as regards the rela"Be
truthful, will believe you,

tions of

man

to man.*

The

nearest aproach

we

get to a relation
is

between religion and man-to-

man

morality

among

the Ifugao

in the ordeals. In

some of

these the

ancestral spirits of the litigants are invoked to see that the party
3
ii,

who

is

C. Hose and

W. McDougall, The pagan

tribes of

Borneo, 2

vols.,

London, 1912,

204-5.

4 Information obtained by present writer from Adriano Kimayong, an Ifugao and former student at Catholic University, and checked up and amplified by Rev. Francis Lambrecht, I.C.M., Kiangan, Mt. Prov., P. I., our ablest authority on Ifugao religion.

Religion and Morality in Primitive Culture

right wins, or the gods of

565

war and

justice intervene

on the

side of the

innocent.^

Melanesian ordeals, as recorded by Codrington, have a connection with

magic. But only in the following case does there seem to be any relation

with religion. "In Lepers' Island a

to be shot at with arrows;
if

man
hit

to prove his innocence will submit

is

he be

he

of course guilty;

if

he be inno-

cent, Tagaro [a superior being] will protect him, just as he protects in

fighting

any young

and

great.

he preserves that he may be prosperous The favour of Tagaro in either case is sought for with the appro-

man whom

priate

charm".

Codrington's Melanesians believe or believed in a place called Panoi to

which the dead go. Thither go those who have led good lives and there they live in harmony. Those of bad character, those who have killed without due cause, or have caused death by charms, or have stolen, or have lied, or have been guilty of adultery, are not allowed to enter. Instead they must live in the bad place where there is quarreling and misery, and where they eat excrement. These penalties are seemingly not imposed upon the wicked by Tagaro or other gods. The penalties, so far as they are inflicted at all by beings, are inflicted by the wronged ghosts who bar the way of the offender to the happy land of Panoi. Among the Tete de Boule, a Cree-speaking non-agricultural tribe of northwestern Quebec, small ghildren are trained not to wander off into the woods, where they might get lost or suffer harm. They are warned that if they should stray away, Kokodje'o, the cannibal giant, will catch them and

eat them.'^

Africa, are best

The Thonga, a group known

is

of

Bantu peoples of the eastern coast of South

partly theistic.

to us through the exceptionally able studies of

Junod. Their religion

spirits are jealous

partly ancestral,

The

ancestral

and avenge themselves when forgotten. They condemn certain serious ritual transgressions and kill a man who loses all restraint in sexual relations. To other sins they are quite indifferent. Ancestral worship among the Thonga has no connection, or at least very Uttle, with the moral conduct of the individual, and it neither promises reward nor
threatens punishment, for the future
life.

To

the Thongas' vaguely conceived

Supreme Being (or Heaven),

little

Tilo,

men's moral relations with one another are of

than they are to the ancestral
interest of his devotees
spirits.

or any greater concern

he

is

and exposes theft in the who have been the victims thereof and in so far a moralizing influence. But in general, theft, blows, insults, murder,
Tilo detects

and witchcraft are condemned and punished by the Thonga merely because
6R. F. Barton, Ifugao
XV, 96-99.

law,

U. of Cal. publ.

in

Amer.

arch,

and

ethn.,

1919,

6R. H. Codrington, The Melanesians, Oxford, 1891, 212-13, 273-75.

7

Field notes,

J.

M. Cooper.

566
these actions endanger society and
its

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

recognized modes of
life.

The moral
Rehgion supreme

law
is

is

not regarded as having been proclaimed by a personal transcendental

God.

No

direct relation

is

established between duty and divinity.

non-moral. The ancestor-gods themselves are non-moral.

No

legislator has

ordained Bantu morality.^

Among

at least

some of

the southeastern Australian aborigines, the

is

Supreme Being or

'All-Father'

conceived as emphatically the guardian

of the moral order.

initiation rites, instituted

Thus among the Kurnai, a coastal tribe of Gippsland, in the adolescent by the Supreme Being, Mungan-ngaua, the boys are instructed carefully in the ways of the tribe, including the duties of listening to and obeying the old men, sharing everything they have with their friends and living peaceably with them, not interfering with girls or married women, and obeying the food restrictions until released therefrom by the old men.^^

Among

the Euahlayi, an Australian tribe of northwestern

:

New

South
to the

Wales, there are three unpardonable sins

elders of the tribe,

unprovoked murder, lying

and

stealing a

woman

within the forbidden degrees.

Those

guilty of these sins

go

at

death to the lower world, where, but for

culprits

the big fires kept up, there

would be darkness, and where the

must

hold their right hands motionless at their sides while they themselves must

keep in perpetual movement. Kindliness toward the old and sick

is strictly

inculcated as the wiU and command of Byamee, the Supreme Being. AU breaches of his laws are reported to him by the all-seeing spirit at the man's death, and he is judged accordingly.^^
Illustrations

such as the several we have given could be easily multipHed,

belief

but these will probably suffice to exemplify the various types of associa-

between religion and For the sake of order, we may divide these types as follows, without however insisting too much on the division or upon the names by which we are here designating the
tion

and dissociation between

and

practice,

morality,

among

primitive peoples of

modern

times.

various types of association.

Relationship between Rehgion and Morality

I.

Indirect
a.

Impersonal
Personal
1.

b.

Permeative
Judicative

2.

8 H. A. Junod, The life of a South African tribe, 2 vols., 2d rev. and enl. ed., London, 1927, ii, 426-28, 442-44, 582-83. 9Cf. W. Schmidt, Der Ursprung der Gottesidee, 2nd ed., 1931, iii, 567-1114 passim; Westermarck, loc. cit., ii, 670-73. 10 A. W. Howitt, Native tribes of south-east Australia, London, 1904, 630, 632-33,

638-39.
11

K. L. Parker, The Euahlayi

tribe,

London, 1905, 78-79.

Religion and Morality in Primitive Culture

3.

567

Protective

4.
II.

Educative

Direct
a.

Duties to deity (deities) Duties to fellowman

if

b.

there is no one kind or another between religion and morality. We may run over each of the above headings rapidly before endeavoring to draw our very tentative conclusions as to the origin and early development of the relations between
It is

doubtful

there be any people living

among whom

trace whatsoever of either direct or indirect relationship of

religion
I.

and morality.
a.

Indirect Relationship,

Impersonal.

Among

a great

many

primitive

peoples, happiness, or unhappiness in the future

life

depends upon moral

is

conduct in

this life.^^ But,

while the belief in survival after death

seem-

ingly universal

among

the uncivilized peoples of the world, the concept

is

of future reward

and punishment for moral conduct

absent from many,

present, the reward
is

perhaps the majority of such peoples. Even where

it is

or punishment very commonly, perhaps again in the majority of cases,

conceived as following automatically upon earthly conduct, not as being

Whether such automatic future retribution should be called a rehgious sanction or not wiU depend upon our definition of religion. Under the definition we have adopted in this paper, the sanction would be a non-religious one, since no intervention upon the part of any supernatural personal being is involved. It is for this
bestowed or
inflicted

by Deity or

deities.

reason that
tionship at

we have
all,

called this relationship,

if it

can be called such a relaof peoples, perhaps

an 'impersonal' one.
Permeative.

b. Personal. 1.

Among

number

most

of them, the whole social order, including practical

ways of

life,

political

and social institutions, customs, rules of etiquette, taboos, ritual, morahty, and so forth, constitutes a unitary system looked upon more or less clearly or vaguely as instituted by or in conformity with the will of the supernatural world. The whole social order is thus permeated in greater or lesser measure with the supernatural. Gods and spirits may not be appealed to as guardians of morality, nor do explicitiy religious motives function in the moral training of the young or in the daily conduct of their elders. Yet a distant, diffused relationship may be said to exist between moral conduct and rehgious concepts. The Kayans' beliefs, cited above, exemplify this
permeative relationship.

how widespread this 'permeative' relationship between religion and morality may be, and exactly how deeply the moral behavior of peoples is influenced thereby, we cannot with confidence say. The facts
Exactly
12

A partial

list
ii,

marck,

loc. cit.,

of such peoples, from the older sources, 691.

may be found

in Wester-

568
are elusive,

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

and not
easily discovered, isolated,

and evaluated. But we

have some reason to believe that such a causal relationship is very common. This, however, is about all that can be said, in the present state of
our
field evidence.

between rehgion and morality on the part of the innocent or of their devotees in matters like oaths and ordeals. For the sake of brevity, we shall confine our attention chiefly to ordeals. In many,
2. Judicative.

By

judicative

relations

we

here

mean

the intervention of supernatural beings

perhaps the majority

of,

ordeals, automatic non-supernatural forces, or

magical but non-religious forces, or purely non-moral personal intervention

by supernatural beings are innocent or the triumph of

really

what bring about the exculpation of the

justice or truth.

Where

truth or justice or inno-

cence prevails through the working of automatic secular forces or of

magical non-religious forces,

relation to morality.

it would be Even where personal

incorrect to call this a religious

deities intervene, frequently they

do

so,

not as protectors of truth and

justice,

but as protectors of their

virtue,

favorities

morality,

they

and devotees. They do

themselves

so,

not because they are interested in

far

may be

from paragons of

^but

because they wish to defend their special votaries or to requite them for
sacrifices offered or for other services rendered.

In some cases, the deities intervene in ordeals on the side of right out
of a

more

disinterested concern for truth or justice as such.

deities, as

But even

in

such cases, the same

among

the Ifugao cited above,

may have
is

no moral concern

for or interest in morality. Outside this limited circle

of the ordeal (or oath), the deities are non-moral, the moral code

not

looked upon as their

will,

reward or punishment in
fife

this life

or in the next

does not come from them, religious considerations and motives do not
function in the individual
sonal morality.
universal.
as incentives

We may

further recall that ordeals

toward better social and perare far from being

instance, the

The custom is absent or else present only in traces among, for American Indians and the lower nomad hunting peoples. 3. Protective. In some cases, deities do indeed protect their devotees and favorites from thieves and murderers, just as they protect them from
sickness, famine,

and death. But, as noted in the two preceding paragraphs, same deities may show little or no concern for the moral order as such. The dominant or exclusive concept in such cases appears to be nonmoral protection or beneficence. The same devotee who asks and receives protection against thief and kiUer, may himself steal and kill, and yet feel himself in no way morally accountable to his supernatural patron or to any other supernatural being. We do not seem justified, therefore, in looking upon such intervention of the supernatural being as constituting a true relationship between religion and morality. Fear of such intervention may serve as a check upon thievery and murder. But this is about all. The
the
relationship, such as
it is, is

at best a

very indirect one.


Religion and Morality in Primitive Culture
4.

569
visits

Educative. Threatening young children with

from bugaboos or
is

with similar bogey-man punishments to train them in obedience and in

other desired behavior, as

among

the Tete de Boule cited above,

it still is

quite

common among

primitive peoples of aU levels of culture, as

among

custom certainly constitutes a relation of morality and moral training to supernatural or superhuman beings and makes for conformity to current moral codes. But whether it can be said to constitute a relationship with religion in the sense we are here using the term is another matter. It would not seem so. The bugaboos may or may not be conceived by elders as real beings. But in either case, these 'supernatural' beings are,
ourselves.^^ This

generally speaking, essentially non-moral, uninterested in the moral order

as such, and,

more

frequently, as

is

the case of the Tete de Boule Kokodje'o

or Wi'tago, malevolent, immoral, or totally unmoral beings. Outside the

very limited

field of training the

very young, they are not at

all

associated

in the native

mind with morality or with

a.

the maintenance of the social

order.
II.

Direct Relationship,
writes of his

Duties to Deity or
is

deities.

What Archbishop

Le Roy

main true of the primitive world in general, at least as regards the Supreme Deity or lesser benevolent deities and spirits, "Nowhere in Bantu Africa is God, properly speaking, blasphemed. At times they find fault with him, they think him indifferent or
in the

Bantu

severe, they call

him bad,

as

on the occasion of a drought, a misfortunte,

a public calamity, or a death. But they have no idea of addressing

with words of contempt or insult".^*

God

As

a rule our American Indians have

no expressions
profanity.

in their languages corresponding to our English 'theological'

writer his

Ojibwa medicine man, a pagan, recently expressed to the wonderment and bewilderment at the blasphemy he had so often heard from the lips of Christian whites. He could not understand how they
could speak so of the great
All or practically
all

An old

Good

Being.
it

peoples consider

a matter of obligation, or of

custom closely akin

through prayer, or
fear,

to obligation, to manifest in
sacrifice,

some form or another,

or ceremonial, or taboo,

their reverence,

regard, dependence, or other feeling or attitude to the Deity or

deities.

So far as morality

is

concerned with duties of worship and respect to

all levels

higher personal beings, a direct relation between morahty and religion

appears universal or well-nigh so on

of primitive culture.

The

more

controversial issue

is

that of the relation of religion to

morahty as

concerned with man's duties to his fellow men.

13 E. C. Parsons, Links between religion and morality in early culture, in Amer. anthropologist, 1915, n. s. xvii, 41-46; see good short treatment in W. D. Wallis, Introduction to anthropology. New York, 1926, 316-23. 14 A. Le Roy, The religion of the primitives, tr., New York, 1922, 122.

570
b.

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

Duties to fellow man.

We

primitive peoples that moral duties of

have evidence from a great number of man to man are looked upon as

the express will of the Deity or deities,

and that observance or neglect of

deities, either

such duties entails reward or punishment from the Deity or

in this
life,

or in the next, or both here and hereafter.^^

Among what
prevails,
it is

percentage of the primitive peoples of the world this belief

It is

not easy to say.

not exactly rare, but

It is

is

very far from

is

being widespread or even

in a

common.

not so

common

as

the beUef

Supreme Being.

Nor, so far as the present writer can see, does the conception of social and personal morality as the express will of the Deity or deities appear as proportionally more prevalent among the marginal or lower nomad hunting peoples than

among

the intramarginal or higher hunter, horticultural,

clearly defined

and pastoral peoples. The behef stands out sharply and

among some
Fuegians.^^

of the marginals, such as the Southeastern Austrahans

of the other marginals, such as the

and

Among some
is

Andamanese

pygmies, our evidence

contradictory, and the contradiction has not been

satisfactorily cleared up.^'

Among

still

other marginal tribes, our available

sources are silent or else affirm or imply the absence of the belief. Further
field investigation

may

bring to fight

eyes, but, as our evidence stands,

in
its

many things now hidden from our we can only say that the befief is found

fullness

at all

among

sharply

among a few of the marginals, with bare traces or no traces the others. At any rate, the fact that the befief is present, and clearly defined, among some at least of the lower nomad maris

ginal peoples

a point of capital importance, a point that cannot be

neglected in any attempt at reconstructing the early history of the relationship between refigion and morality.

To

this point

we shaU

return later on.

We may

summarize the

facts of distribution as foUows. It

all

easy to find a primitive people having

relationship between refigion

the forms of direct

would not be and indirect

But

it

would be equally

difficult to find

and morafity which have been enumerated. one with no trace whatsoever of any

type of either direct or indirect relationship.

duties to Deity or deities
is

probably universal or nearly

A direct relationship as regards so. A direct rela-

tionship as regards duties to fellow

of the intramarginal
15

man is found among at least a minority and marginal peoples but among the remainder is so

For partial list of such tribes, see Westermarck, loc. cit., ii, 669-85. For Fuegian data, see W. Schmidt, Der Ursprung der Gottesidee, 2d ed., Muenster i. W., 1929, ii, 905, 950-51, 978, 991. 17 Affirming relationship: E. H. Man, On the aboriginal inhabitants of the
16

Andaman

Islands, London [1883], 85-86, 89-90, 94; denying relationship: M. V. Portman, A history of our relations with the Andamanese, 2 vols., Calcutta, 1899, i, 44; A. R. Brown, The Andaman Islands, Cambridge, 1922, 152-60, 174; endeavoring

to clear

up contradiction: W. Schmidt, loc. cit., iii, 85-104, 140-44. For extensive review and discussion of evidence on relations between Supreme Being and morality among the various lower nomad hunting peoples, see Schmidt, loc. cit., 3 vols., 19261931, passim; cf. also files of Anthropos.

Religion and Morality in Primitive Culture

571
all,

tenuous or distant, where

it

may be

said to exist at

that

it is

for

all

practical purposes non-operative.

INTERPRETATION OF FACTS

Two

theories of origin

respective

and early development have or have had their champions and advocates. One, the classical theory, holds that

morality in the sense of duties to fellow

religion,

men

arose quite independently of

remained so dissociated for a long time, and only later came to be looked upon as the expression of the will of supernatural beings. The
other theory holds that in earlier times both duties to

God and

duties to

neighbor were looked upon as the will of

religion tend

God and

that only later did

certain peoples to drift apart from moraUty.^^ would be generally agreed that morality in so far as it imphes duties to God or gods goes back to very early times, probably to the very origin of religion itself. The facts we have outUned would certainly seem to point in this direction. Everywhere, and on all, even the lowest and most primitive, cultural levels, we find a recognition of certain

among
it

On

both sides

vaguely or clearly conceived duties to

God

or gods,

fidelity to

or neglect

of which duties entails divine pleasure or displeasure, present or future

reward or punishment.

As

regards the impersonal and personal indirect relationships between

religion

and morahty which we have enumerated and

all levels

illustrated, these too,

with perhaps the exception of the ordeal and oath, seem to occur peoples of
of culture,

among
have
well

and to occur rather

commonly.

We
may

therefore reasonable ground for inferring that such relationships

go back to very early prehistoric times.

But the

real crux of the problem, the real issue that

is

controverted,

is

the question of the early prehistoric association or dissociation of religion

and of man-to-man morahty. What

issue?

light

do our

facts

throw upon the

Actually,

among some

of the

man

to

man

are conceived as the will of a

most primitive nomad marginals, duties of Supreme Being or of superior

beings. There
influence.

is no vaUd ground for ascribing this conception to white The evidence points convincingly toward aboriginal origin of the conception. The highly significanct fact of the occurrence of this conception on such very primitive cultural levels, even though the conception cannot be shown to exist among all the marginal peoples, takes most, if not all, the wind out of the sails of the classical theory. Until the theory of

18 typical formulation of the classical theory may be found in E. B. Tylor, Primitive culture, 2 vols., London, 1871, i, 386, ii, 68-98, 326-27. The most outstanding living exponent of the theory of the early association of morality with the Supreme Being is Father W. Schmidt: see his Ursprung d. Gottesidee, previously cited, and his more popular work, The origin and growth of religion, tr., New York, 1931, esp. 271-72, 274-77.

572
the original dissociation of religion and
objective

JOHN MONTGOMERY COOPER

man-to-man morality
it

finds

some
an

way

of explaining

away

this solid fact,

hangs in the

air as

hypothesis based on surmise rather than on hard facts, and as an hypothesis

in

seeming contradiction with many of the facts we have.

On

the other hand,

we do

not, the present writer feels,

seem

to be

scientifically justified, as

our evidence stands today, in asserting confidently,

from the data of anthropology, that religion and man-to-man morality were in their origin and everywhere in earliest or earlier prehistoric times associated. If we actually found them so associated among all or most of the marginal nomads, the conclusion that, at least in earlier prehistoric times and probably in the very beginning, religion and man-to-man morality were associated would rest on a reasonably firm basis. But actually we do not find them so associated among all or most of the marginals. Such an
association
is

clearly demonstrated for

some only
field

of the marginal peoples.

Field investigations of the last decade or two suggest that

some imreveal in-

portant facts

may have escaped

us.

Future

research

may

stances of association which are

now hidden from

many

us. Facts of this

kind

are not easily dug out, even by sympathetic, interested, experienced and

trained investigators. Moreover, there are

indications in our source

between reUgion and and personal morality has not received at the hands of field workers, professional and other, the attention its importance deserves. But when
literature that this particular question of the relation

social

all is said, as

our evidence stands, while the classical theory of early

dis-

sociation has gotten a

body blow from which

has not definitely

it

has not yet begun to

recover,

its

rival theory

won

the belt.

References
have no thorough critical study of the whole problem of religious-moral One is badly needed. Even the problem itself has never been systematically defined, divided, and formulated in all its many ramifications and
intricacies.

We

relations.

firsthand sources in the following:

of the pertinent facts have been assembled from the E. Westermarck, The origin and development of the moral ideas, 2 vols., 2nd ed., London, 1912, especially ii, ch. 48-52; L. T. Hobhouse, Morals in evolution, 2 vols., 2nd ed., London, 1908, esp. ii, ch. 2; E. C. Parsons, Links between religion and morality in early cultures, in

considerable

number

American anthropologist, 1915,

n. s. xvii, 41-57. These three older studies, while useful, leave much to be desired on the score of completeness, or of interpretation, or of both. critical and pretty thorough combing of sources on the special question of the relations of the Supreme Being to the moral codes of the lower nomads has been made more recently by W. Schmidt, Der Ursprung der Gottesidee, 3 vols., 2d rev. and enl. ed., Muenster i. W., 1926-31; but most anthropologists would challenge his assumption of the validity of the Kulturkreis theory and would seriously question whether some of the peoples he selects are as primitive as he maintains. Any reader, who desires to consult for himself the best firsthand sources will find an excellent selected list thereof in R. H. Lowie, Primitive religion, New York, 1924, 331-41.

PART

VI

NEW HORIZONS

Introduction
by Ruth L. Bunzel
AROUND 1920 ANTHROPOLOGY BEGAN TO CHANGE. THERE WAS A COMPLEtion and a new beginning or perhaps several new beginnings, for a cross-

roads had been reached.

In the
first

place the ethnographic fever and sense of urgency that had

fifty

driven anthropologists for

years, the

need to "get

it

gone," had passed. Partly because by 1920 "it" was gone

culture of tipis

down

before

it's

"it"

being the

and potlatches, naively assumed to be the "pure" cultures of the Indians before they had been "contaminated" by white contact. Although in a few spots, such as the pueblos, distinctive Indian cultures lingered on, in most parts of the United States Indians were living in frame houses, wore store clothing, ate store bread, raised some miserable crops or worked in canning factories, and sometimes came together on July 4 for a "Sun Dance" a Sun Dance without ritual and without torture. They no longer had much appeal as subjects and
buffaloes,

salmon

fishing

of study.

But there was another side to the picture. Not only was "it" gone but had been gotten down on paper. The eager students of the early 20th century had done their work well; there was a sense of completion. The main culture areas of the United States and their characteristic cultures had been recorded. We knew the distribution of tipis and earth lodges and when one had replaced the other and how the Plains Indians had gotten their horses. There was nothing very new or startling to be learned about the formal aspects of aboriginal American Indian culture. Archaeologists continued to discover new and interesting facts, pushing back the date of man's first appearance on this continent. Those with a taste for the traditional "classic" style of ethnography had to look for new fields to conquer
"it"

Africa or Australia or the South Seas. Others thought that anthropology

had come to the end no more primitives to

of the road.
study.

We

had exhausted the

field;

there were

Moreover, the problems which had generated so much heat in the age of Boas no longer seemed very exciting. ParalleUsm vs. diffusion (even Boas, who rarely thought anything was finished, said "Diffusion is finished."), the priority of maternal or paternal descent, arguments against
theories of unihnear evolution, the limitations of theories of geographic

or economic determinism, aU seemed pretty dead issues by the 20's

574

New

Horizons
still

575
argue about the interpretation of some specific

although one might

sets of facts.

Had aU

the problems been solved

and could we now

all

go

home? Not

quite.

The same

20's

saw the emergence of a whole new

first

set of

problems. They were, in order of

Culture Change.
"traits" of culture

appearance:

Many studies had been made of diffusion, tracing around the world, the earUest ones being in folklore and mythology, or the spread of tobacco, but very little thought had been given to the process of change. Wissler's paper on the influence of the horse on Plains culture suggested that "borrowed" traits are not simply just there
as evidence of intertribal contact, but that
in their entrance,

some

sort of process

is

involved

and that this process and its consequences are matters worthy of study. A whole field of study culture change or "acculturaopened up. And as every new problem tion" as it came to be called involves new methods the methods of field work changed. The preferred place of study was no longer the tribe where no ethnologist had ever been before, but rather one which had been well studied and on which there already was good material. More and different use was made of documentary material. And observation, which went out of fashion when field work meant sitting down with an old man and recording what he remembered, came back as an important field technique. One went into houses to see whether native pottery or gasoline tins were used. One went to church socials and noted who came and who stayed away, and how people behaved. One noted who bought the first automobile and how many women from which families had their babies in a hospital. Another area that beckoned at this time was the study of the individual in culture. In what ways did individual behavior conform to the expressed norms? How did individuals view their own culture patterns, and their own behavior? To what extent is the individual so molded by his culture (the question was phrased thus in early culture-personaUty studies) that he must act in certain ways? What does it feel like to be a Zuni Indian or a Winnebago? Here, even more than in culture change studies, new problems required new methods. Now one had to know who Uved in every house and how they were related; no statement was complete unless one knew who said it to whom and when. One had to look as well as listen. The personality of the field worker and a clear understanding of his relations with his informants became important. One tool that became important in the new kind of field work was the life history. Paul Radin, who was trained by Boas in the traditional techniques of field work and recorded thousands of pages of texts and descriptions of rituals, collected what is probably the first full fife history of an American Indian, the Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian. It was written for him by a Winnebago, a reformed character who looked back on his former life with a mixture of disgust and pride. Radin


576
does not analyze his
the
life

RUTH
history,

L.

BUNZEL

he presents

it

as

ethnographic data,

another document, another piece of description not very different from

Crow

reminiscences of participation in war parties as reported by

life

Lowie. The use of the

history for extracting consistent patterns of

behavior and thought and analyzing systematic distortions and other manifestations of the unconscious

aU

this

came

later.

Psychoanalysis and Anthropology. Freud's Totem and Taboo was published in

1919 and was read by anthropologists, for the most part with
all

shocked nonacceptance. The evolutionary bias and above

of the primitive with the child and the neurotic
gists

the equating

ideas which anthropolo-

from popular thought were unacceptable. But more and more the influence of Freud was becomtrying for twenty years to eliminate

had been

ing evident in the apphcation of such concepts as the unconscious,

bivalence,

am-

and the
first

latent symbolic content of

myth and

ritual.

Sapir was

one of the

anthropologists to realize

how much both

anthropology and

psychiatry had to gain from a mutual exchange of ideas. Anthropologists

They spoke about "culsome kind of mechanical press into which most individuals were poured to be molded, and not the sum of patterned experience channeled by the universal tendency towards
seriously at learning theory.
if

had not yet looked

ture" molding the individual as

culture were

imitation.

Value as a subject of inquiry began to be taken seriously once again. this concern with value was a logical outgrowth of the interest in culture wholes and patterns. The problem of value and value systems had often occupied Kroeber. (He sometimes called them styles of culture.) In the postwar period which no longer provided ivory towers for scientists the question of value could not be evaded.
In one sense

When Boas
new
is

rewrote The
it

Mind
was

of Primitive

Man

in 1928, incorporating
Life, thus presaging

material, he called

Anthropology and Modern

the role that anthropology

to play in the years ahead. Primitive

man

no longer the center of our thoughts or the end of our endeavors; essential as is the study of all varieties of man, research among primitive cultures is still a means to an end. There are many golden ages; one can think of the golden age as that bright morning of the world when one could walk freely in the garden of deUghts with no responsibilities and no care for the morrow. In that sense the golden age of anthropology came to an end in 1930 when the shadows in the world began to lengthen. Anthropology in America had never been entirely free of its involvement with man's practical and ethical problems; today more than ever before anthropologists are so involved.

FRANZ BOAS
(1858-1942)

The Aims of Anthropological Research

beginnings.

THE SCIENCE OF ANTHROPOLOGY HAS GROWN UP FROM MANY DISTINCT At an early time men were interested in foreign countries and

Herodotus reported to the Greeks what he had seen in many lands. Caesar and Tacitus wrote on the customs of the Gauls and Germans. In the Middle Ages Marco Polo, the Venetian,
in the lives of their inhabitants.

and Ibn Batuta, the Arab,

told of the strange peoples of the

Far East and

of Africa. Later on, Cook's journeys excited the interest of the world.

From

these reports arose gradually a desire to find a general significance

in the multifarious

ways of hving of strange peoples. In the eighteenth

century Rousseau, Schiller and Herder tried to form, out of the reports
of travelers, a picture of the history of mankind.

made about
works of
ties

the middle of the nineteenth century,

written.

More soHd attempts were when the comprehensive

Klemm and Waitz were

Biologists directed their studies towards an understanding of the varie-

of

human

forms. Linnaeus, Blumenbach,

Camper

are a few of the

names

that stand out as early investigators of these problems,

which

re-

ceived an entirely

when Darwin's views of the instability of species were accepted by the scientific world. The problem of man's origin and his place in the animal kingdom became the prime subject of interest.
stimulus

new

Darwin, Huxley and Haeckel are outstanding names representing this period. Still more recently the intensive study of heredity and mutation

new aspect to inquiries into the origin and meaning of race. The development of psychology led to new problems presented by the diversity of the racial and social groups of mankind. The question of mental characteristics of races, which at an earlier period had become a
has given a

From Boas, "The Aims of Anthropological Research," Presidential address, American Association for the Advancement of Science, Science N.S., Vol. 76 (1932). Reprinted in Race, Language and Culture (New York: The Macmillan Company,
1940), pp. 243-259.

577

578
subject of discussion with entirely inadequate methods

FRANZ BOAS

by the

desire to justify slavery

was taken up

^largely

stimulated
refined
is

again with the

more
life

technique of experimental psychology, and particular attention

now
under

being paid to the mental status of primitive

pathological conditions.

man and

of mental

confined to

man

alone,

The methods of comparative psychology are not and much light may be thrown on human behavior
is

by the study of animals. The attempt

psychology.

being

made

to develop a genetic

Finally sociology, economics, political science, history and philosophy

have found
in order to

it

worth while to study conditions found among

light

alien peoples

throw
it

upon our modern

social processes.
all

With
are that

this

bewildering variety of approaches,

dealing with racial and

cultural forms,

we

try

seems necessary to formulate clearly what the objects to attain by the study of mankind.

We may
the steps
logically

perhaps best define our objective as the attempt to understand

by which man has come to be what he is, biologically, psychoand culturally. Thus it appears at once that our material must

necessarily be historical material, historical in the widest sense of the term.

must include the history of the development of the bodily form of man, mind and culture. We need a knowledge of the chronological succession of forms and an insight into the conditions under which changes occur. Without such data progress seems impossible and the fundamental question arises as to how such data can be obtained. Ever since Lamarck's and Darwin's time the biologist has been strugIt

his physiological functions,

gling with this problem. The complete paleontological record of the development of plant and animal forms is not available. Even in favorable cases gaps remain that cannot be filled on account of the lack of intermediate forms. For this reason indirect proofs must be resorted to: These are

based partly on
prenatal
life,

similarities revealed

by morphology and interpreted

traits

as

proof of genetic relationship, partly on morphological

observed in

which suggest relationship between forms that as adults

distinct.

appear quite

Caution in the use of morphological

similarities is required,

because
paral-

there are cases in which similar forms develop in genetically unrelated

groups, as in the marsupials of Australia, which

lelism with higher

show remarkable

mammal

forms, or in the white-haired forms of the

Arctic and of high altitudes, which occur independently in

many

genera

and

species, or in the blondness

and other abnormal hair forms of domestiregardless of their genetic relations.

is

cated

mammals which develop

As

long as the paleontological record

incomplete

we have no way

of

reconstructing the history of animals and plants except through morphology

and embryology.
This
is

equally true of man, and for this reason the eager search for early
is justified.

human and prehuman forms

The

finds of the remains of the

The Aims

of Anthropological Research

579

Pithecanthropus in Java, the Sinanthropus in China, of the Heidelberg jaw

and of the

later types of the glacial period are so

It

many

steps advancing

our knowledge.
study.
is

requires the labors of the enthusiastic explorer to furnish

us with the material that must be interpreted by careful morphological

The

material available at the present time

it is

is

sadly fragmentary.

It

which the interest in the paleontology of man has been keenest, so that we may hope that with the increase of interest in new fields the material on which to build the evolutionary history of man wiU be considerably increased. It is natural that with our more extended knowledge of the evolutionary
richest in all those countries in

encouraging to see that

history of the higher

mammals

certain points stand out that will direct

the labors of the explorer.

tribution
in the

Thus on the basis of our knowledge of the disof ape forms, nobody would search for the ancestors of humanity
World, although the question when the
earliest

New

migration of
is

man
in

America took place is stiU one researches on the paleontology of the The skeletal material of later periods
into
races, because

of the problems that

glacial period of
is

prominent

America.
Still it is diffi-

more abundant.

cult to estabhsh definitely the relation of early skeletal

remains and of

modern

most characteristic traits are found have not been preserved. Furthermore, the transitions from one race to another are so gradual that only extreme forms can be determined with any degree of definiteness.
of their
in the soft parts of the

many
body

that

On
races,

account of the absence of material elucidating the history of modern

it

is

not surprising that for

many

years anthropologists have en-

and that only too often the results of these classifications have been assumed as expressions of genetic relationship, while actually they have no more than a descriptive value, unless their genetic significance can be established. If the same metric proportions of the head recur in all races they cannot be a significant criterion of fundamental racial types, although they may be valuable indications of the development of local strains within a racial group. If, on the other hand, a particular hair form is a trait wellnigh universal in extensive groups of mankind, and one that does not recur in other groups, it will in all probabihty represent an ancient heredideavored to
classify races, basing their attempts

on a

variety of traits,

tary racial
area. It
traits
is

trait,

the

more

so, if

it

occurs in a geographically continuous

the task of the anthropologist to search out these outstanding

to

and

remember

that the exact

measurement of features which are

not exclusive racial characteristics will not answer the problems of the
evolution of fundamental types, but can be taken only as an indication
of independent, special modifications of late origin within the large racial

groups.

From this point of view the general question of the occurrence of parallel development in genetically unrelated lines assumes particular importance. We have sufiicient evidence to show that morphological form is subject to

580
environmental influences that in some cases will have similar
unrelated forms.

FRANZ BOAS
effects

upon

Even

the most skeptical would admit this for size of the

body.

Changes due to environment that occur under our eyes, such as minute size and proportion of the body, are probably not hereditary, but merely expressions of the reaction of the body to external conditions and subject to new adjustments under new conditions. However, one series of changes, brought about by external conditions, are undoubtedly hereditary. I mean those developing in domestication. No matter whether they are due to survival of aberrant forms or directly conditioned by domestication, they are found in similar ways in all domesticated animals, and because man possesses all these characteristics he proves to be a domesticated form. Eduard Hahn was probably the first to point out that man lives hke a domesticated animal; the morphological points were emphasized by Eugen Fischer, B. Klatt and myself. The solution of the problem of the origin of races must rest not only on classificatory studies and on those of the development of parallel forms, but also on the consideration of the distribution of races, of early migrations and consequent intermingling or isolation. On account of the occurrence of independent development of parallel forms it seems important to know the range of variant local forms that originate in each race, and it might seem plausible that races producing local variants of similar types are closely related. Thus Mongoloids and Europeans occasionally produce similar forms in regions so wide apart that it would be difl&cult to interpret them as effects of intermingling.
changes in

The

biological foundations of conclusions based

on

this

type of evidence

are, to a great extent, necessarily speculative. Scientific

proof would reoff

quire a knowledge of the earliest

movements of mankind, an intimate

as

acquaintance with the conditions under which racial types

variants

may throw and the character and extent of variations that may develop

mutants.

The

solution of these problems

must extend beyond morphological de-

scription of the race as a whole. Since

we

are dealing to a great extent

with forms determined by heredity,

seems indispensable to found the study of the race as a whole on that of the component genetic lines and of their variants, and on inquiries into the influence of environment and selection upon bodily form and function. The race must be studied not as a whole but in its genotypical lines as developing under varying condiit

tions.

In the study of racial forms

we

are too

much

inclined to consider the

importance of races according to the number of their representatives. This is obviously an error, for the important phenomenon is the occurrence of stable morphological types, not the number of individuals representing
each.

The numerical

strength of races has changed enormously in historic

The Aims of Anthropological Research

times,

581

and it would be quite erroneous to attribute an undue importance to the White race or to the East Asiatics, merely because they have outgrown in numbers all other racial types. Still, in descriptive classifications the local types of a large race are given undue prominence over the less striking subdivisions of lesser groups. As an example, I might mention Huxley's divisions of the White race as against his divisions of other races. We are interested not only in the bodily form of races but equally in the functioning of the body, physiologically as well as mentally. The problems presented by this class of phenomena present particular difficulties on account of the adjustability of function to external demands, so that it is an exceedingly precarious task to distinguish between what is determined by the biological make-up of the body and what depends upon external conditions. Observations made on masses of individuals in different localities may be explained equally well by the assumption of hereditary racial characteristics and by that of changes due to environmental influences. A mere description of these phenomena will never lead to a result. Different types, areas, social strata and cultures exhibit marked differences in physiological and mental function. A dogmatic assertion that racial type alone
is

responsible for these differences

is

a pseudo-science.

An

adequate treat-

ment requires a weighing

of the diverse factors.

Investigators are easily misled

by the

fact that the hereditary, biologically

is

determined endowment of an individual

intimately associated with the

functioning of his body. This appears most clearly in cases of bodily

deficiency or of unusually favorable bodily development.
ferent matter to extend this observation over
It is

quite a difracial

whole populations or
in

groups in which are represented a great variety of hereditary lines and

individuals, for the

many forms

of bodily

make-up found

each group

aUow a
nounced

great variety of functioning. Hereditary characteristics are proin genetic lines, but a population

phenotype
line to a
is

or to use the technical term, a

is

not a genetic Une and the great variety of genotypes within

in

a race forbids the application of results obtained from a single hereditary

whole population

which the

diversity of the constituent lines

bound

to equalize the distribution of diverse genetic types in the

lations considered. I

have spoken so often on

to other questions.

this subject that

popuyou will

permit

me

to pass

on

While paleontological evidence may give us a clue to the evolution of human forms, only the most superficial evidence can be obtained for the development of function. A little may be inferred from size and form of the brain cavity and that of the jaw, in so far as it indicates the possibility of
articulate speech.

We may

obtain

some information on the development

of erect posture, but the physiological processes that occurred in past

generations are not accessible to observation.

AU

the conclusions that

we

may

arrive at are
life

based on very indirect evidence.

of

The mental

man

also

can be studied experimentally only among

582
living races. It
is,

FRANZ BOAS
however, possible to infer some of
its

aspects

by what

past generations have done. Historical data permit us to study the culture
of past times, in a few localities, as in the eastern Mediterranean area,

back as a few thousand years and a limited amount on the mental life of man may be obtained from these data. We may even go farther back and extend our studies over the early remains of human activities. Objects of varied character, made by man and belonging to periods as early as the Quaternary, have been found in great quantities, and their study reveals at least certain aspects of what man has been able to do during these times. The data of prehistoric archeology reveal with progress of time a decided branching out of human activities. While from earliest periods nothing remains but a few simple stone implements, we see an increasing differentiation of form of implements used by man. During the Quaternary the use of fire had been discovered, artistic work of high esthetic value had been achieved, and painted records of human activities had been made. Soon after the beginning of the recent geological period the beginnings of agriculture appear and the products of human labor take on new forms at a rapidly accelerating rate. While in early Quaternary times we do not observe any change for thousands of years, so that the observer might imagine that the products of human hands were made according to
India,
as far

China

of information

an innate
period

instinct, like the cells of a beehive, the rapidity of

change beat

comes the greater the nearer we approach our time, and

an early

we

recognize that the arts of

man

cannot be instinctively determined,

but are the cumulative result of experience.

It

has often been claimed that the very primitiveness of

human

handiis

work
in a

of early times proves organic mental inferiority. This argument

certainly not tenable, for

we

find in

modern times

isolated tribes living

way

that

may

very well be paralleled with early conditions.

life

com-

parison of the psychic

their industrial

of these groups does not justify the belief that

is

backwardness
find

due to a difference
closely related races

in the types of or-

on the most diverse levels of cultural status. This is perhaps clearest in the Mongoloid race, where by the side of the civiHzed Chinese are found the most primitive Siberian tribes, or in the American group, where the highly developed Maya of Yucatan and the Aztecs of Mexico may be compared with the primitive tribes of our western plateaus. Evidently historic and prehistoric data give us little or no information on the biological development of the
ganism, for

we

numbers of

human mind.
little the biological, organic determinants of culture can be infrom the state of culture appears clearly if we try to realize how different the judgment of racial ability would have been at various periods of history. When Egypt flourished, northern Europe was in primitive conditions, comparable to those of American Indians or African Negroes, and

How

ferred

The Aims of Anthropological Research

yet northern

583

Europe of our day has

far outdistanced those people,

who

at

an

earlier time

were the leaders of mankind.

An

attempt to find biological

reasons for these changes would necessitate innumerable unprovable hypotheses regarding changes of the biological make-up of these peoples,

hypotheses that could be invented only for the purpose of sustaining an

unproved assumption.

would seem to lie which might enable us to determine the psychophysical and also some of the mental characteristics of various races. As in the case of biological inquiry it would be equally necessary in this study to examine genotypical lines rather than populasafer

mode

of approaching the problems at issue

in the application of experimental psychology

tions,

because so

many
is

different

Mnes are contained in the mass.

all

A
is

serious difficulty

presented by the dependence of the results of

tests

psychophysical or mental
culture in

upon the experiences of

the individual

who

by the which he lives. I am of the opinion that no method can be devised by which this all-important element is eliminated, but that we always obtain a result which is a mixed impression of culturally determined influences and of bodily build. For this reason I quite agree with those critical psychologists who acknowledge that for most mental phenomena we know only European psychology and no other. In the few cases in which the influence of culture upon mental reaction of populations has been investigated it can be shown that culture is a
the subject of the tests. His experiences are largely determined

much more important

individuals a
ily

determinant than bodily build. I repeat that in

close relation between mental reaction
is

and bodaU but absent in populations. Under these circumstances it is necessary to base the investigation of the mental life of man upon a study of the history of cultural forms and of the

somewhat

build

may be

found, which

interrelations

between individual mental

life

and

culture.
is

This

is

the subject-matter of cultural anthropology. It

safe to say

that the results of the extensive materials

years do not justify

ical types

amassed during the last fifty the assumption of any close relation between biologculture.

and form of
it is

As

in the realm of biology our inferences

must be based on
it

historical

data, so

in the investigation of cultures. Unless

culture of each group of

to

man came

to

be what

we know how the is, we cannot expect

reach any conclusions in regard to the conditions controlling the

general history of culture.

The material needed for the reconstruction of the biological history of mankind is insufficient on account of the paucity of remains and the disappearance of all soft, perishable parts. The material for the reconstruction of culture is ever so much more fragmentary because the largest and most important aspects of culture leave no trace in the soil; lan^in short, everything that is not maguage, social organization, religion

584
terial
is

FRANZ BOAS

vanishes

with the

life

of each generation. Historical information

available only for the

to

most recent phases of cultural life and is confined those peoples who had the art of writing and whose records we can

read.
find

Even this information is insufl&cient because many aspects of culture no expression in literature. Is it then necessary to resign ourselves and to consider the problem as insoluble?
In biology

we supplement

the fragmentary paleontological record with

data obtained from comparative anatomy and embryology. Perhaps an

analogous procedure
cultural history.

may

enable us to unravel some of the threads of

between biological and cultural the methods of the one science to the other. Animal forms develop in divergent directions, and an intermingling of species that have once become distinct is negligible in the whole developmental history. It is otherwise in the domain of culture. Human thoughts, institutions, activities may spread from one social unit to another. As soon as two groups come into close contact their cultural traits will be disseminated from the one to the other.
is

There

one fundamental
it

dijfference

data which makes

impossible

to

transfer

Undoubtedly there are

dynamic conditions that mould

in

similar

forms certain aspects of the morphology of social units. Still we may expect that these wiU be overlaid by extraneous elements that have no
organic relation to the dynamics of inner change.

This makes the reconstruction of cultural history easier than that of

biological history, but
it

puts the most serious obstacles in the

way

of

discovering the inner dynamic conditions of change. Before morphological

diffusion

comparison can be attempted the extraneous elements due to cultural must be eliminated.
certain traits are diffused over a limited area
it

and absent outside seems safe to assume that their distribution is due to diffusion. In some rare cases even the direction of diffusion may be determined. If Indian corn is derived from a Mexican wild form and is cultivated over the larger part of the two Americas we must conclude that its cultivation spread from Mexico north and south; if the ancestors
of
it,

When

of African cattle are not found in Africa, they must have been introduced into that continent. In the majority of cases it is impossible to determine with certainty the direction of diffusion. It would be an error to assume that a cultural trait had its original home in the area in which it is now most strongly developed. Christianity did not originate in Europe or America. The manufacture of iron did not originate in America or northern Europe. It was the same in early times. We may be certain that the use of milk did not originate in Africa, nor the cultivation of wheat in Europe. For these reasons it is well-nigh impossible to base a chronology of the development of specific cultures on the observed phenomena of dif-

The Aims

of Anthropological Research

585 from the worldwide

great
antiquity.
its

fusion. In a

few cases

it

seems

justifiable to infer

diffusion of a particular cultural

is

achievement

its

This

true

when we can prove by

archeological evidence

early occur-

rence. Thus, fire

was used by man

in early Quaternary times.

period

man was

already widely scattered over the world and

At that we may

infer that either the use of fire to

was carried along by him when he migrated

new

regions or that

it

spread rapidly from tribe to tribe and soon

became the property of mankind. This method cannot be generalized, for we know of other inventions and ideas that spread with incredible rapidity over vast areas. An example is the spread of tobacco over Africa, as soon as it was introduced on the coast.
In smaller areas attempts at chronological reconstruction are

much

more

uncertain.

developed,

From a elements may

cultural center in

which complex forms have

boring tribes,
differentiated

and impress themselves upon neighor the more complex forms may develop on an old, less basis. It is seldom possible to decide which one of these
radiate
all

alternatives offers the correct interpretation.

Notwithstanding
tribution
diffusion.

these

difficulties,

the

study of geographical dis-

of cultural

phenomena

offers

a means of determining their

The outstanding

result of these studies has

all

been the proof of

Africa,

the intricate interrelation of people of

parts

of the world.

Europe and the greater part of Asia appear to us as a cultural unit in which one area cannot be entirely separated from the rest. America appears as another unit, but even the New World and the Old are not entirely independent of each other, for lines of contact have been discovered that connect northeastern Asia and America.

As
so
it

in

biological investigations

the problem of parallel independent

development of homologous forms obscures that of genetic relationship,

is

in cultural inquiry.

If

it

is

possible that analogous anatomical

distinct

forms develop independently in genetically

Unes,

it

is

ever so

much more probable that ently. It may be admitted

data.

analogous cultural forms develop independthat

it

is

exceedingly

difficult

to give abso-

lutely indisputable proof of the

independent origin of analogous cultural

in

Nevertheless,

the distribution of isolated customs

regions

far

apart hardly admits of the argument that they were transmitted from
tribe to tribe

and

lost in intervening territory.

scientific

It is

well
to

known

that in

our civiUzation current

ideas

give

rise

independent
life

and
con-

synchronous inventions. In an analogous way primitive social

tains elements that lead to

world.

somewhat similar forms in many parts of the Thus the dependence of the infant upon the mother necessitates at least a temporary difference in the mode of life of the sexes and makes woman less movable than man. The long dependence of children on their elders leaves also an inevitable impress upon social form. Just

586
what these
ejffects

FRANZ BOAS
will be depends upon circumstances. Their fundabe the same in every case.

mental cause
ability of
stitute

will

The number of individuals in a social unit, the necessity or undesircommunal action for obtaining the necessary food supply conare

dynamic conditions that are active everywhere and that germs from which analogous cultural behavior may spring.
lands far apart that cannot be proved to be historically connected.
the spear, projected by a thong

Besides these, there are individual cases of inventions or ideas in

The

fork was used in Fiji and invented comparatively recently in Europe;

wound spirally about the shaft, was used on the Admiralty Islands and in ancient Rome. In some cases the difference in time makes the theory of a transfer all but unthinkable. This
is

the case, for instance, with the domestication of

mammals

in Peru,

the invention of bronze in Peru

and Yucatan and

if

that of the zero in

Yucatan.

Some

anthropologists assume that,

a number of cultural

phenomena

agree in regions far apart, these must be due to the presence of an

exceedingly ancient substratum that has been preserved notwithstanding

all

the cultural changes that have occurred. This view

is

not admis-

sible

without proof that the phenomena in question remain stable not

only for thousands of years, but even so far back that they have been
carried

by wandering hordes from Asia

to the

extreme southern end of

South America. Notwithstanding the great tenacity of cultural traits, there is no proof that such extreme conservatism ever existed. The apparent stabihty of primitive types of culture
torical
is

due to our lack of

his-

perspective.

civilization,

They change much more slowly than our modern but wherever archeological evidence is available we do find

changes in time and space.

features
that

A
as

careful investigation

shows that those

are

are

assumed

almost absolutely stable

constantly

undergoing changes. Some details

for a very long span of time.

may remain
see people

for a long time, but the

its

general complex of culture cannot be assumed to retain

character

We

who were
up,

agricultural be-

come

hunters, others change their

mode

of

life
it

in the opposite direction.

People

who had

totemic organization give

while others take

it

over from their neighbors.

It
is

not a safe method to assume that

all

analogous cultural phe-

nomena must be
evidence there
is

historically related. It is necessary to

case proof of historical relation, which should be the

of actual recent or early contact.

demand in every more rigid the less

In the attempt to reconstruct the history of modern races

trying to discover the earUer forms preceding

we

are

modern forms.

An

anal-

ogous attempt has been demanded of cultural history. To a limited extent it has succeeded. The history of inventions and the history of
science

show

to us in course of time constant additions to the range of

The Aims
inventions,
basis

of Anthropological Research

587

we might be

culture,

and a gradual increase of empirical knowledge. On this inclined to look for a single line of development of a thought that was pre-eminent in anthropological work of the

end of the past century. The fuller knowledge of to-day makes such a view untenable. Cultures differ like so many species, perhaps genera, of animals, and their common basis is lost forever. It seems impossible, if we disregard invention and knowledge, the two elements just referred to, to bring cultures into any kind of continuous series. Sometimes we find simple, sometimes

complex,

social

organizations

associated
in

with

crude
it

inventions

and knowledge. Moral behavior, except

order.
It is

so far as

is

increased understanding of social needs, does not seem to

fall

checked by into any

evident that certain social conditions are incompatible.

hunt-

ing people, in which every family requires an extended territory to insure the needed food supply, cannot form large communities, although
it

may have

intricate rules

governing marriage. Life that requires con-

moving about on foot is incompatible with the development of a large amount of personal property. Seasonal food supply requires a mode of life different from a regular, uninterrupted food supply. The interdependence of cultural phenomena must be one of the objects of anthropological inquiry, for which material may be obtained through
stant

the study of existing societies.

Here we are compelled

festations, while in the

to consider culture as a whole, in

aU

its

mani-

study of diffusion and of parallel development

the character and distribution of single traits are

objects of inquiry. Inventions,
gion, morals are
all interrelated.

more commonly the

art,

economic

life,

social structure,

reh-

We

ask in

how

far are they determined

by environment, by the biological character of the people, by psychological conditions, by historical events or by general laws of interrelation.
It is
is

obvious that

we

are dealing here with a different problem. This

most

clearly seen in our use of language.

Even

the fullest knowledge

of the history of language does not help us to understand

how we
It
is

use
the

language and what influence language has upon our thought.

same ment

in other phases of

life.

The dynamic
its

reactions to cultural environ-

are not determined

by

history,

although they are a result of

the psychological

historical development. Historical data

do give us certain clues that may

Still,

not be found in the experience of a single generation.

problem must be studied It would be an error

this

in living societies. to claim,

is

as

reason historical study

irrelevant.

some anthropologists do, that for The two sides of our problem

require equal attention, for

existing societies, but also
intelligent

we desire to know not only the dynamics of how they came to be what they are. For an

understanding of historical processes a knowledge of living

588
processes
is

FRANZ BOAS
as necessary as the
life

knowledge of
forms.

life

processes for the under-

standing of the evolution of

The dynamics
fields of

of existing societies are one of the most hotly contested

anthropological theory.

They may be looked

at

from two points

of view, the one, the interrelations between various aspects of cultural

form and between culture and natural environment; the other the interrelation between individual and society. Biologists are liable to insist on a relation between bodily build and culture. We have seen that evidence for such an interrelation has never been established by proofs that will stand serious criticism. It may not be amiss to dwell here again on the difference between races and individuals. The hereditary make-up of an individual has a certain influence upon his mental behavior. Pathological cases are the clearest proof
of
this.

On

the other hand, every race contains so

many

individuals of

between races freed of elements determined by history cannot readily be ascertained, but appear as insignificant. It is more than doubtful whether differences free of these historic elements can ever be established.
different hereditary

make-up

that the average differences

Geographers
be,

try to derive all

forms of

human

culture

from the geoAll

graphical environment in which

man

Uves. Important though this

we have no evidence know is that every culture

some elements
setting, while others

of a creative force of environment.

is

may we

strongly influenced

by

its

environment, that

of culture cannot develop in an unfavorable geographical

may be
us

advanced.

It is

sufficient to see the

funda-

mental differences of culture that thrive one after another in the same
environment, to
influences.

make

understand the Hmitations of environmental

same environment in which the White invaders Hve. The nature and location of Australia have remained the same during human history, but they have influenced different cultures. Environment can affect only an existing culture, and it is worth while to study its influence in detail. This has been clearly recognized by critical geographers, such as Hettner.
aborigines of Australia live in the

The

Economic determinism

Economists believe that economic conditions control cultural forms. is proposed as against geographic determinism. Undoubtedly the interrelation between economics and other aspects of culture is much more immediate than that between geographical environment and culture. Still it is not possible to explain every feature of cultural life as determined by economic status. We do not see how art
styles,

the

form of

ritual or the

special

form of

religious

belief

could

possibly be derived from economic forces.

On

the contrary,

we

see that

economics and the rest of culture interact as cause and effect, as effect and cause. Every attempt to deduce cultural forms from a single cause is doomed
to failure, for the various expressions of culture are closely interrelated

The Aims

of Anthropological Research
effect

589

and one cannot be altered without having an

Culture
is

upon

all

the others.
is

integrated. It

is

true that the degree of integration

not

al-

ways the same. There are cultures which we might describe by a

term, that of

single

modem

democracies as individualistic-mechanical; or that

of a Melanesian island as individualization by mutual distrust; or that of

may be

our Plains Indians as overvaluation of intertribal warfare. Such terms misleading, because they overemphasize certain features, still
Integration
is

they indicate certain dominating attitudes.

not often so complete that

rather find in the

all

contradictory elements

are eliminated.

We

same

culture curious breaks in the

attitudes of different individuals, and, in the case of varying situations,

even in the behavior of the same individual.

The lack

of necessary correlations between various aspects of culture

may be

illustrated

by the

cultural significance of a truly scientific study

of the heavenly bodies by the Babylonians,

Maya and by Europeans

during the Middle Ages. For us the necessary correlation of astronomical

observations

is

with physical and chemical phenomena; for them

the essential point

to the fate of

was

their astrological significance,

i.e.,

their relation

man, an

attitude

based on the general historically condisufficient to

tioned culture of their times.

These brief remarks

the

may be

indicate the complexity of

studying, and it seems justifiable to question whether any generaHzed conclusions may be expected that will be applicable everywhere and that wiU reduce the data of anthropology to a formula which may be applied to every case, explaining its past and
are
its

phenomena we

predicting

future.
it

I believe that

would be

idle to entertain

such hopes. The phenomena

of our science are so individualized, so exposed to outer accident that

no

set of

laws could explain them.

It is

as in

with the actual world surrounding us. For each individual case
arrive at

any other science dealing we can

an understanding of
explain
its

its

determination by inner and outer forces,

but

we cannot

individuality in the

omer reduces
location.

the

movement

of stars to laws, but unless given

form of laws. The astronan unex-

plainable original arrangement in space, he cannot account for their present

The

biologist

may know aU
less

the laws of ontogenesis, but he can-

not explain by their means the accidental forms they have taken in an
individual species,

much

those found in an individual.

differ

Physical and biological laws

in character

on account of the

complexity of the objects of their study. Biological laws can refer only
to biological forms, as geological laws

can refer only to the forms of

the

geological formations.

The more complex

phenomena, the more

special

will be the laws expressed by them. Cultural phenomena are of such complexity that it seems to me doubtful whether valid cultural laws can be found. The causal condi-

590
tions of cultural happenings lie always in the interaction

FRANZ BOAS
between
call

indi-

vidual and society, and

no

classificatory study of societies will solve this

problem. The morphological classification of societies

attention

may

to our
it

many

problems.

It

will

not solve them.

In every case

is

reducible to the

same source, namely, the

interaction

between individual

and
It

society.
is

between general aspects of between density and size of the popfound, such as ulation constituting a community and industrial occupations; or soUdarity and isolation of a small population and their conservatism. These
true that
valid interrelations
cultural
life

some

may be

are interesting as
esses also
their

static

descriptions

of

cultural

facts.

Dynamic proc-

may be

recognized, such as the tendency of customs to change

significance

according to changes in culture. Their meaning can

be understood only by a penetrating analysis of the

that enter into each case.

human

elements

is such that it needs must be a one of the sciences the interest of which centers in the attempt to understand the individual phenomena rather than in the estabhshment of general laws which, on account of the complexity of the material, will be necessarily vague and, we might almost say, so

In short, the material of anthropology

historical science,

self-evident that they are of

Little

help to a real understanding.

often to formulate a genetic problem
civilization,

The attempt has been made too

as defined

by a term taken from our own

either

analogy with forms

are famiUar.
regulations,

known

to us or contrasted to those with

based on which we

Thus concepts, Uke war, the idea of immortality, marriage have been considered as units and general conclusions have been derived from their forms and distributions. It should be recognized that the subordination of all such forms, under a category with which we are famiUar on account of our own cultural experience, does not prove the historical or sociological unity of the phenomenon. The ideas
of immortality differ so fundamentally in content

and

significance that

they can hardly be treated as a unit and vaMd conclusions based on their

occurrence cannot be drawn without detailed analysis.

critical investigation rather shows that forms of thought and acwhich we are inclined to consider as based on human nature are not generally valid, but characteristic of our specific culture. If this were not so, we could not understand why certain aspects of mental life that are characteristic of the Old World should be entirely or almost entirely absent in aboriginal America. An example is the contrast between the fundamental idea of judicial procedure in Africa and America; the emphasis on oath and ordeal as parts of judicial procedure in the Old World, their absence in the New World. The problems of the relation of the individual to his culture, to the society in which he lives have received too little attention. The stand-

tion

The Aims
ardized
give

of Anthropological Research

591
us
of

anthropological

data

that

inform

customary behavior,

no

clue to the reaction of the individual to his culture, nor to an

it.

here he the sources of a seems a vain effort to search for sociological laws disregarding what should be called social psychology, namely, the reaction of the individual to culture. They can be no
Still,

understanding of his influence upon

true interpretation of

human

behavior.

It

more than empty formulas

Society embraces

that can be

imbued with
settings.

life

only by taking

account of individual behavior in cultural

many

individuals varying in mental character, partly

on account of

their biological

make-up, partly due to the special social

grown up. Nevertheless, many of them and there are numerous cases in which we can find a definite impress of culture upon the behavior of the great mass of individuals, expressed by the same mentality. Deviations from such a type result in abnormal social behavior and, although throwing hght upon the
conditions under which they have
react in similar ways,

iron hold of culture

upon

the average individual, are rather subject-matter

for the study of individual psychology than of social psychology.

If

we once
also

grasp the meaning of foreign cultures in this manner,

we

be able to see how many of our lines of behavior that we believe to be founded deep in human nature are actually expressions of our culture and subject to modification with changing culture. Not all
shall

are categorically determined by our quahty as human may change with changing circumstances. It is our task to discover among all the varieties of human behavior those that are common to all humanity. By a study of the universality and variety of cultures anthropology may help us to shape the future course of mankind.

our standards
beings, but

CLARK WISSLER
(1870-1947)

The Conflict and Survival of Cultures

GROUP DOMINANCE AND LEADERSHIP

THE RIVALRY OF CULTURE GROUPS CAN BE STUDIED BY THE USE OF anthropological data. The culture areas to which we referred at the outset are best explained as the fringes to centers of culture influence. The situation here is, however, not essentially different from that of a modern nation
leading economically, intellectually, or artistically, as the case
all

may

be;

the surrounding nations

do

their best to follow.

In this case the

effort

may be largely

socially directed

and

in so far a conscious process.

On

the other hand, the efforts of primitive tribes to acquire the culture of the dominant tribe
is

often conscious.

We

have the example of the Nez

Perce Indians sending a committee to the frontier settlements along the

Mississippi to invite a white missionary and teacher to give

them

the

elements of the superior culture. Other instances of such initiative are

on record, and the traditions of primitive folk recount how one or more of their number went abroad to learn new traits of culture. Looking at groups in general, we see that they not only recognize differences between themselves and other groups but are conscious of their

own
if

position. If they are the

not, they recognize the superiority of their neighbor

dominant group, they are aware of that; and attempt to

emulate him. In other words, they are conscious of their relative position whether they admit
it

or not.

CONFLICT OF CULTURES

When two contrasting cultures come into contact, single traits may compete with each other. Examples of this are seen in the displacement of the bow by the gun, the fire-driU by the match, the earthen pot by the
.

From Wissler, "The Conflict and Survival of Cultures," The Foundations of Experimental Psychology, edited by Carl Murchison (Worcester: Clark University Press, 1929), pp. 798-807.
592

The

Conflict

and Survival of Cultures

is

593

iron kettle, etc. There

directly the displacement

It is

easy to
fires

minimum of resistance in such cases, but inmay jar the whole tribal system of procedure. throw down the bow and take up the gun and to learn to
a

kindle

with matches; but this

within the tribe, as heretofore.

The

new equipment cannot be produced tribe is now dependent upon the

goods must be
furs.

trader. Further, in order to secure these objects, other

produced in

suflBcient quantity,

perhaps

This seems simple enough,

but standards of individual property are involved, social obligations must

be adjusted to the trapping calender, etc. Success in trapping becomes more important, so the magical beliefs of the tribe must be adjusted.
Nevertheless, such conflicts as arise are rarely serious unless

some strong
off,

taboo

is

violated.

Thus

it is

said that

some Hindu troops once mutinied

because the paper cartridges, whose ends they were required to bite

was a taboo. But the obvious ease of adjustment in this case may be taken as typical and indicating that, on the whole, no serious conflict need be anticipated from
were greased with an animal
fat,

against which there

the introduction of single

traits.
it

Before leaving
troduced
traits

this subject,

is

well to be reminded that not

trade.

all in-

Thus the horse was introduced to the American Indian, who propagated and equipped the horse by their own labor; the tribe was thus in no wise dependent upon a foreign source of supply. Economically, the tribe was enriched, but no important adjustments to other culture traits were necessary. That there was a psychological reaction is probable, since this new mode of
are dependent

upon foreign

transportation gave a feeling of power, increased geographical knowledge,

and gave more

feel superior to

leisure.

The

tribe receiving horses

might be expected to

neighboring tribes and the reverse. Finally,

new informanew
tale or
all

tion

may be

acquired as to distant lands, as to the properties of natural

resources, etc., thus increasing the store of knowledge.

myth may be

acquired, a

new song
traits.

learned, a

new game

adopted,

without disturbing existing

enrich a culture with a

useful domestic animal, a plant,

So in general the introduction of a a new industrial art, or a new fact wiU

minimum

of conflict.

On

the other hand, trait complexes displacing other complexes

seem

to

present serious situations. Yet these seem to vary according to the relative
values attached to the complexes involved.
this

An

example of

conflicts of
thrift.

kind are those which arise respecting individual property and

primitive peoples feel that every individual
is is

Most

entitled to

food and

other necessities, whether he

a producer or not. They do possess the

idea of individual property, but entertain an ideal of hospitaUty which requires frequent sacrifice to others. Lewis
significance
1

H. Morgan^

first

sensed the
it

of this

aspect of primitive

cultures,

designating

as

the

Morgan, L. H., Ancient Society (Chicago: Kerr).

594
law of
hospitality.

CLARK WISSLER

When

nations are subject to European control, this

tendency conflicts with the system of individual economic independence.

For example, the younger members of the tribe may be educated and induced to undertake farming, but when the crop is harvested, the old law of hospitality requires that the producer give it away. To refuse to do so would be grossly immoral from the point of view of his tribe. Such a conflict of culture complexes may be very distressing but of a less emotional character than some others. Among all primitive peoples the distinctions between the work of men and women are sharply drawn. To disregard these distinctions is to stigmatize oneself. Among some tribes all preparation of food is not only the work of women but they also own the food; under such circumstances, for a man to claim ownership in food would be disgraceful. In most languages, the strongest terms of contempt are those describing the individual in characterization of the opposite sex. Yet while there are everywhere distinctions between the work of men and women in the tribe,
these distinctions

may

vary as to the kind of work.

it

Among

certain

hunting tribes of Indians,

place
to

was woman's place

of white
culture,

to tend the fields,

man's

hunt.

The customs

more dependent upon

agriculture, reversed the distinction.

came
sible,
flict

in contact, the Indian resisted

So when Indian and white culture assuming responsibility for work in

the fields as shameful

and humiliating.

When

hunting was no more pos-

the white

man

insisted that the Indian turn to agriculture; the con-

resulting

and

its

emotional intensity are obvious. Humiliation and

degradation were the price the Indian must pay.

Still other examples may be cited. Among many tribes, the place in which a person dies is taboo; thus, if a person dies in a house, the place will be deserted, to fall into ruins. With the simple shelter of primitive peoples, this custom was easily maintained, but when the European custom of more substantial and expensive buildings is brought in, the difliculties increase. Fear of spirits, bad luck, the whole background of behefs concerning the dead, all combined to make life in such a house unbearable. Their feelings would be about the same as those of a European asked to live in a cemetery. But on some of our Indian reservations there is stiU

further

conflict.

To

provide the Indians with adequate medical care,

built; the difficulties in their

hospitals have

been

use by the Indians are

is

obvious. person.
if

Once a patient dies in the hospital, it The violation of the taboo, the emotional

effect

no place for a sick upon the patient,

forcibly taken to the hospital, all tend to unite the tribe in opposition.

Suspicion

may

follow as to the motives of the white race in inducing them

crystallize into a belief that the whites desire
kill

to use the hospital,

their lands

and this and so seek to

them

off.

In general, fear and dread of

the possible consequences are bred in conflicts of culture complexes; the

trait

complexes favoring such responses

may be whoUy

objective,

but

The

Conflict

and Survival of Cultures

beliefs

595
and customs associated with the

conflicts
traits to

arise because of the be displaced.

is

The missionary
conflicts.

usually charged with being the arch-instigator of

his teachings need not make great disturbances. Such general concepts as theft, lying, murder, slander, adultery, etc., will be taken by the natives as a matter of course; the differences will he in the appMcation of these concepts. Thus, adultery may be defined differently by the tribe and the missionary; but usuaUy the missionary comes to teach a new belief, to recount a revelation which exacts new taboos, violates old ones, and so sets up a conflict of beliefs. We usually think of these conflicts as between pagan and Christian, but they occur in respect to any kind of religious propaganda. In our earlier discussion of cults we noted how they might spread from one tribe to another and how they needed a leader and a number of devotees to maintain themselves. Their introduction into a tribal culture will produce more or less conflict according to circumstances. We cite this merely to caU attention to the obvious: i.e., Christian missionaries are no different from other missionaries, a gathering host whose origin is as old as culture itself. The economic school frequently asserts that many conflicts arise from economic situations. What is meant is that the storm centers lie in the traits having to do with food and comfort. It is not for us to evaluate this theory, but to consider economic change resulting from culture contact as provocative of conflict. In 1893 there culminated a religious,

Yet many of

mihtant movement
in Mterature as the

among

the Indian tribes west of the Mississippi

known

Ghost Dance religion. A few years before, the herds of bison, upon which these Indians depended for food, were swept from the plains by white hunters. At the same time the tribes were gathered into reservations and refused permission to leave them. Privation was the common experience, and starvation a possibility, though scanty rations were issued by government orders; from the Indian point of view the situation was desperate. At this psychological moment a new religion was launched, a belief in an Indian Messiah, who was to return, sweep away the white race and its culture, and restore former economic conditions. The new belief spread rapidly and revived the hopes of the Indians. By a prompt and energetic concentration of troops, the mihtant aspect of the movement was repressed, but as a cult or a reHgion this new trait complex functioned for a long time. The religious movement, the attempt to revolt, may be said to represent a response to a specific economic change. In this case the economic change affected all members of the tribe so that a group conflict was initiated.

THE SUBJECT GROUP

When

the group

is

made

subject

by conquest, there may be for a time

If,

the smart of defeat, but an adjustment will evolve.

however, the

596

CLARK WISSLER

culture differences between the groups are extreme, the dominating group

may seem
This
is

so superior that a feeling of helplessness and despair

may

prevail.

perhaps due to a failure to understand the culture to which adjustvisited

ment must be made. One such group, once

it

by the

writer,

found

incomprehensible

why

the white official dispensing justice dealt harshly

with the native

who

beat his wife, but turned a deaf ear

when a husband

complained that
sistent in

his wife beat him.

The

natives could see nothing con-

such procedure; they were, of course, wholly ignorant of the

to

historic

background

white culture, with

its

idealization

of

women.

How

could the natives understand such a situation, unless famiUar with

a large sector of white belief?

On

the other hand, the white practice of

demanding

virginity of the

woman and

a lower standard for the male was

whoUy

intelligible to this primitive

group, because they followed similar

practices.

Economic adjustments are also often beyond the comprehension For example, an American Indian community was advised that one way to earn some money would be to make hay of the
of such a primitive group.

grasses growing in their locahty; accordingly they labored successfully dur-

ing the season, harvesting a large crop. Yet,

market, they failed. White men, they observed, did

when it came to finding a make a living by pro-

ducing hay, but not being able to do

inferior,

it,

they regarded themselves as

entirely unable to live

is this is

according to the standards of the

new

culture. It

feeling of helplessness in the face of a crisis in culture

adjustment that

a significant factor in the conflict problem.

from a conquered group to a dependent one is easy and perhaps natural. When confronted with a crisis for which there is no ready solution, the individual appeals to his fellows; this is true of all, whether civihzed or savage. In an analogous manner, a group feehng itself helpless will hope for succor from a stronger group. But under primitive conditions, each small tribe is a law unto itself, must stand upon its own feet; hence, in the face of a culture crisis, they have no group to which to turn for support. Their status is in striking contrast to that of a white colony among primitive tribes, for such a settlement can tap
transition

The

the reserves of a nation in case of need.

The
in

natives easily recognize the

confidence and security of the white man, and therefore spontaneously lean

toward him.
studies of the

Moreover,

natives

hving

harsh

environments

cannot

escape uneasiness as to the future, as instanced by Rasmussen^ in his

Eskimo.

wise old Eskimo, after pointing out the hungry

families in

camp

waiting for the return of the hunter, the sick and the

aged, asked,

"Why

should

this

be so?"

He

said further,

"We

fear!

We
huts.

fear the elements with

which we have to
sea.
is

fight in their fury

to

wrest

our food from land and

We

fear cold

and famine in our snow

us.

We

fear the sickness that

daily to

be seen amongst

Not

death,

2Rasmussen,

K., Across Arctic

America (New York: Putnam's, 1927).

The

Conflict

and Survival of Cultures

597

but the suffering.

alike.

We

fear the souls of the dead, of

human and animal

aU our angakoqs
little

We

fear the spirits of earth

and

air

And
know

for

and

their

knowledge of hidden

things,

we

yet

so

that

we

fear

everything else."

In his natural
for aid. In

state, primitive

man

usually looks to the supernatural

more technical terms, he resorts to magic. He feels that somewhere must reside a power able to cope with the danger that confronts him, and that, if he knew how to adjust himself to this power, his problem would be solved. The superior group would be one having such knowledge and skiU as would enable it to cope with its environment.

To

such a group a native tends to turn, as

we have

stated,
is

but fear

inhibit the impulse.

The

superiority of the white

man

taken to

may mean

superiority in magic as weU, a

power

for evil as well as good. Further,

the white
native,

man

has no understanding or sympathy with the magic of the

ridicule deepens the inferiority feeUng of the native.

and by

The

difficulty, of course, lies in

a conflict of culture
is

traits,

not in differences

in

human

nature.

The

native

thus in a conflict of responses on his

hesitates because

part, his inclination being to seek the protection

more powerful white man, but he

as hostile,

and leadership of the he fears the white man intending to destroy rather than protect. Such states may be
of the

attributed to culture conflicts; they are the response complexes

most cases of white vs. native, the conflict is wholly onesided; the culture of the white group is not disturbed by the presence of
native group. In
the native culture.
It

may be

profitable to

examine a few more examples of

confliict.

The

culture patterns for primitive groups

seem

less individuahstic

than
in-

our own. Their groups are small, but possess great

dividual
is

solidarity.
if

The
is

accustomed to act in unison with

etc.

his feUows;

food

to

be gathered, they proceed in a party,

gested procedures marks
all

Spontaneous response to sugof the conflict with

activities.

One phase

white culture arises in these differences respecting such a group and individual activities.

ment

to

The outstanding examples of successful native adjusteconomic conditions are cases of adapting the native pattern of
to
individualistic

group procedure

conditions.

In

New

Zealand,

for

example, a few native groups have become self-supporting and prosperous

by operating as communities in production and marketing. The point seems to be that whereas a culture may be a conglomeration of traits,
it is

carried

on by a

closely knit series of response patterns. It

is

these

patterns that conflict in case of culture contact.

the natives to take plots of land

The white man expects

is

and

scatter in the population as indivi-

duals, finding their place in the culture at large. This

asking too much;

the social habits of the native

as a

foUow another

pattern; so he tries to operate

community

in phases of culture

where the white

man

operates as


598
an individual.

CLARK WISSLER

quotation from Pitt-Rivers^

is

appropriate here. "In

all

his activity the primitive savage

or, rather, projects

them on to his social group, either his clan or his an inseparable part of that group, and identifies his passions with those of the other members of the group. There is no sense of sacrificing himself for the good of the whole group. There is merely a spontaneous and unrationahzed feeling of identity with the group;
tribe.

merges

his self-regarding sentiments in

He

feels himself

just as

he regards any member of a social unit outside his

another conflict factor

own

as identified

with that outside group."

Finally,

may be

here

commented upon

the

tendency of cultures to change. In particular,

cultures.

this is characteristic of

white

The adjustment

of the native to white cultures

is

must be slow;

but the disconcerting aspect of the case

this

that as the white culture changes,

difficult

may have made inadequate. It is enough to bridge the gap between two contrasting cultures, but to see the gap widening as fast as he can build is wholly depressing. In conclusion, then, we see how, on every hand, culture contact between a primitive group and a white presents a maze of conflict that cross-sections
renders such adjustments as he
the
life

of the former, resulting in a variety of responses.

REACTION ON THE INDIVIDUAL

It is

a prevaihng opinion that

when a

primitive people

come
is

into contact

with white culture, they rapidly die

off.

On

the whole, observation does

seem

to

show

that during the conflict period the death rate

abnormally

been assigned for this, for one, the introduction of new diseases against which the native lacks resistance or the necessary knowledge to mitigate. This argument has some validity, but on the other

high. Various causes have

hand white settlements

white settlers

in a

new country

suffer also.

The

survival of the

is, however, insured by the reserve populations of the home community. The native is further handicapped by the depression resulting from the situations we have just discussed. Usually, the first step in the subjugation of a native group is to remove it to a strange habitat. This habitat may not vary greatly from the former home, but it is strange, and

nostalgia results.

The suggestion

is

that anything that seriously disturbs

the peace in a native group tends to increase the death rate.

Thus

in

1838

a large part of the Cherokee Indian nation was forcibly

moved from
The Pawnee
settled

Georgia to Oklahoma; contemporary accounts

of the cavalcade died

tell

us that about one-half

on the way and

shortly after arrival.

in

were moved from

in their present

their traditional

home in many young men are reported

3 Pitt-Rivers,

home in Nebraska Oklahoma; many died the

1874 and

first

year. Further,

to have committed suicide, because there were no bison to hunt and wars were forbidden; the future offered nothing

G. H. L.

F.,

The Clash of Cultures and

the contact of races (London:

Routledge, 1927).

The
to

Conflict

and Survival of Cultures

to
till

599

them but

the

soil, to

take up women's work.

New

diseases

and

malnutrition are certainly to be set

rate observed, but there
is

down

as causes for the high death

good reason

to believe that emotional factors

were also operative.

Pawnee example of suicide, we see another aspect of The new situation created by culture contact leaves the individual no outlet for his aspirations. Where the pattern of individual expression placed social value upon deeds of war and the zest of the hunt, walking behind the plow of the farmer to be rewarded by a few coins made no appeal. The white social values of industry, achievement, and economic
Yet, in the
conflict.

independence belonged to a conflicting pattern.

recent study^ of the

Maori in New Zealand shows how the suppression of inter-tribal wars and the elimination of personal combat left the native no outlet for self-expression. His only course was to eke out an existence and live in the mental imagery of the past. However, the New Zealand native

new
and

seems to have been quite above the average in ability to understand the culture and to adapt himself. His conflicts were grievous and are
still,

but on the whole he seems to be conserving

at the

much

of his old group

life

same time adjusting

it

to

new economic

condition.

In general, then,
individual.
It

appears that culture conflict bears hard upon the

produces a condition bordering upon the psychopathic,

analogous to institutional cases in contemporary society. Emotional disturbances are evident. Not only does the group break
tioning,

down

in

its

funcis

but individuals

fail.

It

appears that the severity of conflict

somewhat proportioned
involved.

to the degree of contrast

between the cultures

INTER-GROUP CONFLICTS
dealt with cultures as wholes; that is, we have sought what takes place when two cultures come into collision. On the other hand, we find that the adaptation of one culture to another is often attended by conflicts within the group. The ethical values of white culture are perhaps best presented in the culture complex which we

So

far

we have

to observe

call Christianity.

One

of the great organized drives against a primitive

group

is

seen in the process of Christianization. This proceeds by seeking

individual

converts. One prominent characteristic of new converts to any cause is their hostility to the behefs they have thrown over, and as soon as a reasonable minority of the native group takes up the new teaching, they form a bloc in opposition. Such a conflict may become a serious menace, particularly if the minority has the backing of the white group. We meet with this in the United States, when the Christian Indians on

a reservation seek the aid of the government in suppressing social gather^Keesing, F. M., The Changing Maori Ethnological Research, 1928).

(New Plymouth, New

Zealand: Board of

600
ings

CLARK WISSLER
and ceremonies among the opposition. In objective terms, the phenostated as

menon may be
more

an

inter-tribal
is

conflict of social values.

One

observed result in such situations

resist suggestions

for the conservative

wing to draw

into isolation, to reduce contact with outsiders to the

from without,

in short to induce a state of mental

minimum, to and

social stagnation. ...

SURVIVAL

To
if

complete

this

review of the subject,

culture

it

may be

well to consider the

factors that

make

for the survival of cultures.

its

anything threatens to take

The group feels uneasy away. The emotional and other

we have noted in specific cases of culture conflict are most intense when the culture breaks down. So the normal functioning of the community depends largely upon the smooth operation of its culture,
responses

and the survival of mankind indicates the presence of protective responses. In sociology, comment is made upon tradition and resistance to change as a detriment in so far as progress may be inhibited, but as an advantage in
stabihzing culture or in controlhng innovations.

The

reactionary response,

when viewed

one of the protective factors in guaranteeing the survival of cultures. We have noted that cultures change spontaneously without jarring the group and so without invoking any of the protective responses. On the other hand, an abrupt change, an innovation,
philosophically,
is

will

invoke these responses.

aspect of culture not adequately explained by social science
is

One

the balance that seems to exist

among

the

many

traits

composing

it.

It

appears as a finely balanced whole; if the economic basis drops out, the whole structure threatens to go down. Yet, in much the same way, the breaking-down of a taboo system may topple over the whole structure.

The

destruction of established values, as head-hunting, scalp-taking, etc.,

first

has also been observed to disarrange the whole culture. At

this

may seem
large part

inconsistent with our previous discussion in which cases were

cited of the taking-over of

new

traits

successfully, but cultures

grow

in

by reacting to each other

in this way. It is only

is

under certain

conditions that the balance holding cultures in function

disrupted. Since

such disruption follows white domination,

behooves us to learn to avoid the conditions that favor such upsets. One set of problems in economics and politics deals with the maintenance of balances between cultures. Pitt-Rivers^ has attempted to explain decHning birth rate and vitality
it

as
is

due to emotional

states resulting

from culture

conflict.

He

thinks there

a delicate balance between the biological functioning of the organism

and culture; that, if there is a real conflict, the resulting emotions act upon sex and nutritive functions to such a degree as to disturb organic hfe. The inference from this is that there is a fine adjustment between
s Pitt-Rivers, op. cit.

The

Conflict

and Survival of Cultures

601

and the human organism. If this is true, we may expect culture be accompanied by emotional disturbances. The question is often discussed as to whether isolation favors the survival of cultures over long periods with little change. We have noted that culture contact under normal conditions favors progressive change, but have not considered the behavior of the group in isolation. It is usually assumed that the cause for the backward state of such peoples as the Tasmanians, Andamans, and Fuegians was their lack of contact with other cultures, but we can best approach the question through examples
culture
conflict to

of adjustment in partial isolation. In the course of immigration into the

United
lished,

States,

numerous communities of foreign

folk have been estab-

some

of which have survived over long periods.

study of a few

such shows that they have survived by making the

adjustment, but otherwise avoiding
all

minimum economic
The
is

the culture contacts possible.

core of organization

is

religious

and

social.

The

peculiarity,

however,

that in such communities

were in the home land

the

many aspects when the group

of the culture are about what they

emigrated, so reveaUng themselves

cases, the

more conservative of the two. In these

isolation to resist

community sought

by

change and so approach a stabilized level. Such survival may be said to be largely self-determined, in contrast to the primitive groups cited above. Parallel cases can be found in subject

peoples, as among some village Indians in southwestern United States. These Indians were agricultural when discovered and have continued selfsupporting to this day; thus their economic adjustment is satisfactory. On the other hand, they have drawn aloof from white contact; fearing ridicule, they have carried on in secret, putting forth every effort to conserve things as they were centuries ago. In this they have succeeded to a large degree. However, these examples of survival by withdrawing from culture contact rather strengthen the case for the growth of culture through

the interaction of culture groups.

In conclusion,

we have reviewed

a phase of psychological inquiry in the

. . .

making. No great leads to research in this field have been discovered, but while humanitarian ideals may make direct experiment impossible, govern-

ments are

setting experiments for us.

The statements made

in the preceding

pages are based upon observation on the behavior of groups under specific
conditions.

being

can be carried out systematically, are in fact now some group experiments are possible, among children, communities, etc., and may be expected when the observation studies of selected culture groups have progressed far enough to make

Such

studies

initiated.

On

the other hand,

the formulation of test experiments desirable.

PAUL RADIN
(1883-1959)

The Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian

THOSE DAYS THERE WERE NOT MANY WHITE PEOPLE LIVING NEAR US AS My father went out hunting continually. The lodge in which we lived was covered with rush mattings, with reed mattings spread over the floor. After hunting for some time in one place we would move to another. My father, mother, older sisters, and older brothers, all carried the packs. Thus we would spend our time until the spring of the year and then in the spring we would again move in order to live near some stream where father could hunt muskrats, mink, otter, and beaver. In the fall of the year we would pick cranberries. When the hunting season was open, I would begin to fast again. This was my life for a number of years. After a while we bought a pony on which we used to pack all our belongings whenever we moved our camp. In addition three of us would ride on top of the pack. Sometimes my mother and sometimes my father
IN
to-day.
. .

drove the pony.

had grown a little older and taller all of us brothers would fast father would indeed repeatedly urge us to fast. "Do not be afraid of the burnt remains of the lodge center-pole," he would say to us.^ "Whatever are the true possessions of men, the apparel of men and the gift of doctoring all these things that are spread out before you do try and obtain one of them."- Thus he would speak to us. I would then take a piece of charcoal, crush it and blacken my face and he would be very grateful to me.
After
I

together.

My

From

York: Appleton

Radin, Crashing Thunder: the Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian & Co., 1926), pp. 56-59, 26-29, 148-151.

(New

1 Symbolical manner of describing the crushed charcoal with which fasters must blacken their faces. 2 By "possessions of men" he means mainly that knowledge which will make a man honored and respected in his community; and by "apparel of men," he means power

and
602

ability.

Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian

I

603
I

would

at first

break
the

my

fast at

fast all night.

fall

From
eat.

fall

of the year until spring I

I trained

noon but then gradually would fast

began to

until night-

and then

After a while

myself to pass the night without

was able to go two nights and days without taking any food. Then my mother went to the woods at some distance from the village and there she built me a small lodge in which I and my elder brother were to remain whenever we had to fast through the whole night. At this fasting-place we used to play and before we were really able to
eating and after that I

spend a night

at this particular place

we moved away.

After a time I passed from this stage of childhood to another. I

now

began to use a bow and arrow and

arrows.
It

I spent

my

day

at play,

shooting

was

at

about

this

time also that I found out that

my

mother had been

told just before I

was about to give birth to a child who would not be an ordinary being, and from then on I felt that I must be an was
that she

bom

uncommon

person.

up the old habit of teaching us the customs of Winnebago. He would wake us up early in the morning and, seated around the fireplace, speak to us. The girls would be taught separately. Now this is what my father told me: My son, when you grow up, see to it that you are of some benefit to your fellowmen. There is only one way in which you can aid them and that is by fasting. Our grandfather, the Fire, he who stands at all times in the center of our dwelling, sends forth all kinds of blessings. Be sure that you make an attempt to obtain his.
father used to keep
the

My

do you remember to have our grandfathers, the war chiefs,^ it that they have compassion upon you. Then some day as you travel along the road of life, you will know what to do and encounter no obstacles. Without any effort wiU you then be able to gain the prize you desire. The honor will be yours to glory in, yours without exerson,
bless you. See to
tion.

My

AU

the disposable war-blessings belong to our grandfathers, the war-

you fast and thirst yourself to death, then upon you. Yet if you do not wear out your feet in frequent journeyings to and fro, if you do not blacken your face with charcoal, it will be all for naught that you inflict this suffering upon yourself. Not without constant effort are these blessings procurable. Try to have one of the spirits created by Earthmaker take pity on you. Whatever he says will come about. If you do not possess one of the spirits from whom to obtain strength and power, you wiU be of no consequence socially and those around you will show you little respect. Indeed they will jeer at you. My son, it is not good to die in the village; in your homes. Above all, do not let women journey to the spirit land ahead of you. It is not done.
controllers,
if

and

reverently

these will be bestowed

3 Symbolical powers.

name

for all those spirits

who were supposed

to be in control of

war

604

PAUL RADIN

we speak to our sons and encourage you will find yourself traveling along a road filled with obstacles and then you will wish you had fasted. When such an event confronts you, that you may not find it necessary to reproach yourself, I counsel you to fast. It you have not obtained any knowledge from the spirits, why it may happen that some day, in later life, warriors will be returning from the warpath and as they distribute the war prizes to their sisters,* your own sisters will stand there empty-handed envying the rest. But if you obtain blessings from the war-controllers, your sisters will be happy. How proud they will be to receive the prizes, to wear them, and to dance the victory dance! Your sisters too will be strengthened thereby and you will be content and happy. My son, if you cast off your dress for many people, that is, if you give to the needy, your people will be benefited by your deeds. It is good thus to be honored by many people. And even more will they honor you if you return victorious from the warpath with one of the four hmbs, that is, one of the four war honors. But if you obtain two, or three, or perhaps even four hmbs, then all the greater wiU be the honor. Then whenever a war feast is given you will receive part of the deer that is boiled, either part of its body or part of the head.^ When on some other occasion, such as the Four Nights' Wake, you are called upon to recount your war exploits in behalf of the departed souls, be careful, however, not to claim more than you actually accomplished. If you do, you will cause the soul of the man in whose behalf you are telling it, to stumble^ in his journey to spirit land. If you tell a falsehood then and exaggerate, you will die before your time,
To
prevent this from happening do
to fast.

them

Some day

in

life

for the spirits, the war-controllers, will hear you. It

is

indeed a sacred

duty to teU the truth on such an occasion.

old

TeU
If

less

than you did. The

men
will

say

it is

wiser.
to die

My
you

son,

it is

good

on the warpath.

you

die

on the warpath,
If

not lose consciousness at death.

it

You

will

be able to do what you

please with your soul and

will always

remain in a happy condition.

as

afterwards you wish to

become reincarnated

human

being,

you may

do

so,

or you

may

take the form of those-who-walk-upon-the-light, the

4 Among the Winnebago a man's sisters, especially his elder sisters, were very highly respected and all war prizes, such as wampum-belts, wampum necklaces, etc., were always given to them whenever a man returned from a successful war-party in which he had secured some honor. These war honors were of various kinds. The greatest was considered to be the feat of having struck the body of a dead enemy
first.

5 The meat of a deer at such a feast regarded as the choicest piece. 6

is

given only to great warriors.

The head

is

According to Winnebago belief the soul of a deceased individual in his journey must cross a very slippery, swinging bridge and it is thought that if, during the wake following the man's burial, any of the invited warriors exaggerate their achievements the unfortunate soul will not be able to cross this bridge and will stumble and fall into the abyss of fire over which it is thrown.
to spirit land

Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian

birds, or the
will

605
short. All these benefits

form of any animal you please, in you obtain if you die on the warpath.
. . .

At

this stage of

hfe I secretly got the desire to

make

myself pleasing

to the opposite sex.

The Indians then

lived in their old-fashioned lodges.

Women, however,

whenever they had their menses, were placed in special huts. There the young men would go to court them at night when their parents were asleep. I used to go along with the men on such occasions, for even although I did not enter any lodges but merely accompanied the older men,
I

enjoyed

it.

My

parents were greatly in fear of

my

coming

into

contact
secretly.

with

menstruating
menstruating

women

so therefore I went with these

men

My

parents were even afraid of having

me

cross the path

over which a

time, because I

They worried so much about it at that autumn came. They did not wish me to be near menstruating women, for were I to grow up in their midst I would assuredly be weak and of httle account. Such was their reason.
passed.

woman had
was

to fast as soon as

Before long

I started to fast
It

again together with an older brother of

fall

mine, both day and night.

was during the

it

moving, and several

that

lodges of people were living near us. There

was

my

elder brother

whose wood. Whenever these girls went out to get wood my older brother and I would play around with them a great deal. We did this even although we were fasting at the time. Of course we had to do it in secret. Whenever our parents found out we got a scolding and so did the girls. At home we were warned to keep away from menstruating women,
and
I fasted.
it

Among

the people of the other lodges were four girls

duty

was

to carry

but

we

ourselves always sought them.

After a while some of the people Uving in the lodges

we were

left

alone.

They moved

far

ahead of

us.

We

ourselves were to

moved away and move

we had
I

only a short distance at a time.

of meat.

My

father

and

my

brother-in-law went
plenty

out hunting and killed seventy deer between them, so that

When
they had

the girls with

whom
I

used to play moved away

I

became very

lonesome. In the evenings

used to cry.

longed for them greatly and

moved

far away!

Soon we got fairly well started on our way back. We moved to a place where all the leaders used to give their feasts. Near the place where we lived there were three lakes and a black-hawk's nest. Right near the tree where the nest was located, they built a lodge and our war-bundle was placed in it. There my elder brother and myself were to pass the night. It was said that if any one fasted at such a place for four nights, he would be blessed with victory and the power to cure the sick. AU the spirits would bless him.
. .

606

PAUL RADIN

So there I fasted at the black-hawk's nest where a lodge had been built for me. The first night I stayed there I wondered when something would happen. But nothing took place. The second night, rather late in the night, my father came and opened the war-bundle and then taking out a gourd, began to sing. I stood beside him without any clothing except my breech-clout and, holding tobacco in each hand, I uttered my cry to the
spirits

"O

spirits,

here humble in heart I stand beseeching you."

My

father sang war-bundle songs

uttered
stories;

my

cry to the

spirits.

When

and wept as he sang. he was finished he told

I uttered

I also

wept

as I

me some

sacred

he told

me

about

my

ancestor Weshgishega.

In the morning, just before sunrise,

my

cry to the spirits:

"O
the

spirits,

here humble in heart

stand beseeching you."

The fourth night found me still there. Again my father came and we did same thing, but in spite of it all I experienced nothing unusual. Soon another day dawned upon us. That morning I told my elder brother that I had been blessed by the spirits and that I was going home to eat. I was not speaking the truth. I was hungry and I also knew that on the following
and that we would have to utter So I went home. When I got there I told my people the story I had told my brother; that I had been blessed and that the spirits had told me to eat. I was not speaking the truth, yet I was given the food that is carefully prepared for those who have been blessed. Just then my older brother came home and they objected to his return for he had not been blessed. However, he took some food and ate it. My brother J., however, obtained a blessing. When he reached the age of puberty my father called him aside and told him to fast. He told him that it was his fervent wish that he should begin to fast in order to become holy, to become invincible and invulnerable in war. He wished him to become like one of those Winnebago of whom stories are told. He assured him that if he fasted he would really be holy and that nothing that exists on this earth would be able to molest him; that he would live a very long life and that he would be able to cure the sick. He told him that if he were blessed no one would dare to make fun of him and that they would be
night

we were

going to have a

feast,

our cry to the

spirits again. I

dreaded

that.

very careful

how

they addressed him;

first,

because they really respected

him and secondly, because they were afraid of getting him angry. He was to fast until spring and then he was to stop, for there are many bad spirits
about in the spring

who

are likely to deceive a faster.

Near our village there was a hill called Place-where-they-keep-weapons. This hill was very high, steep and rocky. It was a very holy place. There it was that my father wished my brother to fast for it was the place where he himself had fasted. Within this hill lived the spirits whom we call Thosewho-cry-like-babies. These spirits are supposed to possess arrows and bows.

Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian

607

Twenty of them were supposed to be in this hill. My father had control of them and when he wished to bless a man he would take his bow and arrows and, holding them in his hands, lead the man around the hill and into the lodge (i.e., into the hill) There he would look for a stone pillar, and upon it, at about arm's length, he drew the pictures of a number of different animals. My father possessed only one arrow, but that one was a holy one. Then dancing around the stone pillar and singing some songs, he finished by breathing upon the pillar. Finally he walked around and shot at it and when he looked at the stone, it had turned into a deer with large horns which fell dead at his feet. He repeated this a number of times. The little spirits living in the hill breathed with him and said, "Winnebago, whenever you wish to kill a deer with one horn, do as you have done, and offer us tobacco and you will be able to obtain whatever you wish." This was the power my father wished my brother to obtain. My father was a very famous hunter and my brother wished to be Uke him.
.

Now
was

of

all

these things

my

brother dreamed; with

all

these powers he

blessed.

He

also

had a

vision of visiting the village of the ghosts.

There he was able to

steal a costly

shawl and escape with

it.

He dreamed

that all the inhabitants of the ghost village chased

him but

that they were

unable to overtake him and were compelled to return back when

my

brother

reached the earth.

feast. There, howwas supposedly given in our honor, we were placed on one side of the main participants. After the kettles containing the food had been put on twice, it became daylight and the feast was over. The following spring we moved to the Mississippi in order to trap. I was still fasting and ate only at night. My brothers used to flatter me, telling me that I was the cleverest of them all and, in consequence, I used to continue fasting although I was often very hungry. In spite of my desire to fast, however, I could not resist the temptation of being around the girls. I wanted always to be near them. They were generally in their men-

The

night after

we had stopped
fall,

fasting

we gave our

ever, our pride received a

for although the feast

strual lodges^

when

looked for them.

I

My

parents did not wish

me

to

go

near the

girls

then but

went nevertheless.
spirits.

women would

who had no connection with Throughout this time my sole wish was to appear great in the sight of the people. To be praised by my fellowmen was all I desired. And I certainly received what I sought. I stood high in their estimation. That the women might like me was another of the reasons why I wanted to fast. But as to being blessed, I learned nothing
parents told
that only those boys

My

me

be blessed by the

7 Any contact with menstruating women, or even with objects in any way connected with them, will, it is the firm belief of the Winnebago, destroy the power of sacred objects or individuals temporarily sacred. Fasting youths were regarded as such.

608
about
it,

PAUL RADIN
although I went around with the

air of one who had received and talked as such a one would talk. I never married any woman permanently. I would live with one for awhile, and then with another. Sometimes upon my return after an absence I would find my temporary wife living with another man. This is the way in which I acted. At that time I had a comrade, and one day he said to me, "We have been thinking of something, have we not, friend? We ought to try and obtain some external emblem of our bravery. Do we not always try to wear feathers at a Warrior Dance? Well, then, let us try to obtain war honors, so that we can wear head ornaments." So did we both speak to each other. We both hked the idea, and so we decided to go in search of war honors. We decided to kill a man of another tribe; we meant to perform an act of bravery. We started out finally. There were four of us, and we went to a place where other tribesmen congregated. We took the train and carried some baggage with us. We took ropes along, for we intended to steal some horses, and if we found the opportunity, kill a man. Horse steaHng was regarded as a praiseworthy feat, and I had always admired the people who recounted the number of times they had stolen horses, at one of the Warrior Dances. That was why I wished to do these things. We proceeded to a place where horses of other tribes used to pasture. Just as we got there we saw the owner of some of these horses and killed him. My friend killed him. Then we went home, and secretly I told my father all about it. I said to him, "Father, you said it was good to be a warrior and you encouraged me to fast and I did so. You encouraged me to give feasts and I did so. Now we have just returned from a trip. We were looking for war honors and the young people who were accompanying me decided that I should lead them. I told them that it was a difficult thing to lead warriors, my father had always told me, and that I had always been given to understand that a person could lead a war-party only in consequence of a specific blessing received from the spirits. I was not conscious of having received any such, I told him. Thus I spoke. However, they made me an offering of tobacco as they asked me, and I accepted the tobacco saying that I would at least

many

blessings

make an

Thunderbirds and asked them for rain, that

Then I offered tobacco to the we might walk in the protecrain. This offering we made in the morning and it tion and power of rained all that day. Then we went to the place where we knew that we could find horses. When we got there we met the owner of the horses and spoke to him. We accompanied him to a carpenter shop nearby, and
offering of tobacco for them.

first, and announced name, as I gave a war-whoop. I shouted 'Big-Winnebago has counted coup on his man.' Then the others counted coup also. We searched his pockets and found medicine and money in them. The money we divided

there killed him. I struck his dead body, counted coup

my new

Autobiography of a Winnebago Indian

609

among

ourselves. After that

we

cut out his heart, for

is

we had heard

that

hearts were used for medicine. That

why we

cut out his heart.

He had

gun and that we took away from him and hid." Then my father said to me, "My son, it is good. Your life is no longer an effeminate one. This is the manner in which our ancestors encouraged us to live. It is the will of the spirits in control of war that has led you to do this. Of your own initiative you could not possibly have done it. However, we had better not have a Victory Dance as yet. We have the honor anyhow. We must be careful about the Whites. In the old days we were at liberty to live in our own way, and when such a deed as yours became known, your sisters would rejoice and dance, we are told. Now, however, the law of the Whites is to be feared. In due time you will get a chance to announce your feat and then you can wear a head ornament for you have earned that right for yourself."

EDWARD

SAPIR

(1884-1939)

The Contributions of Psychiatry

Understanding of Behavior
IT IS
in a general

to

an

in

Society

WITH GREAT PLEASURE THAT I ACCEDE TO THE REQUEST TO COMMENT way on the present symposium on psychiatry and the social sciences. The relation between the two suggests many interesting and
complicated problems, both of definition and interpretation.
It is

a bold

man who would

tities

venture to speak with assurance about such abstruse en-

as "individual"

and "society," but where

I

it is difficult

for

any

intelli-

gent person to withhold a theory or an opinion, I

may be pardoned

for

not doing so either.

interest.

Unless

am

have read the seven psychiatric papers with great greatly mistaken, the language used in these con-

tributions as a

whole is measurably nearer the terminology used by social scientists than was formerly the case in psychiatric literature. I doubt if this is entirely due to the fact that the psychiatrists have felt under a com-

pulsion to be courteous to the sociologists responsible for the journal to

which they now find themselves a

the reality, of the things connoted

collective contributor. I find

no "pussy-

footing" here; rather a sincere recognition of the importance, perhaps even

Even
to

if

these words

still

by the words "society" and "culture." remain largely unanalyzed in terms that ought
it is

be completely satisfying to a psychiatrist,

a great gain to have

them

given a hearing.
dently passing.

The extreme individualism of earlier psychiatry is eviEven the pages of Freud, with their haunting imagery of
and of culture as a beautiful extortion from the
it

society as censor

sinister

depths of desire, are beginning to take on a certain character of quaintness; in other words,

looks as though psychiatry and the sciences de-

voted to

man

as constitutive of society

about the same events

were actually beginning to talk

to wit, the facts of

human

experience.

In the social sciences, too, there has been a complementary

movement

toward the concerns of the

psychiatrist.

At long

last the

actual

human

being, always set in a significant situation, never a

tration or a long-suffering carrier of cultural items,

mere biological illushas been caught prowlIt is true that

ing about the premises of society, of culture, of history.

long and anonymous confinements within the narrow columns of

statistics

From
610

Sapir,

in Society,"

"The Contributions of Psychiatry to an Understanding of Behavior The American Journal of Sociology, Vol. 42 (1937), pp. 862-870.

The Contributions of Psychiatry

611

have made him a timid subject for inquiry. He seems always to be slinking off into anxiety-driven flesh and bone or else, at the oddest moments,
unexpectedly swelling himself up into an institution. But
that the firm
it is

easy to see
in

hand

of the psychiatric sociologist will

some day nab him

one of

his less rapid

moments
it is

of transition.
chiefly Dr. Sulhvan's

and Dr. Alexander's to be camped somewhere about the crossroads leading to pure psychiatry and pure sociology and I confess that I find the uncertainty of their location very agreeable indeed. In an atmosphere of mollified contrasts one may hope to escape the policemen of rival conceptual headquarters. Not being bothered by too strict a loyalty to aristocratic conventions, one may hope to learn something new. I am particularly fond of Dr. Sullivan's pet phrase of
these seven papers,
that give

Of

me

the most comfortable housing.

They seem

"interpersonal relations."

The phrase

is

not as innocent as

it

seems, for,

while such entities as societies, individuals, cultural patterns, and institutions logically imply interpersonal relations, they

do

little

to isolate

and

define them.

Too

great agihty has been gained over the years in jumping

collectivity

from the individual to the

and from the

collectivity via ro-

mantic anthropological paths back again to the culture-saturated individual.

Reflection suggests that the lone individual was never alone, that he never

marched

in line with a collectivity, except

that he never signed to bother him; there

up

for a culture.

on literal state occasions, and There was always someone around

were always a great many people whom his friends he never met; and there was always much that some people did that he never heard about. He was never formed out of the interaction of individual and society but started out being as comfortable as he could in a world in which other people existed, and contalked about and

whom

tinued this

way

as long as physical conditions allowed. It

scientists

is

out of his

manifold experiences that different kinds of

for the invention of

derived their tips

two or three realms of being. For a long time psychiatry operated with a conception of the individual that was merely biological in nature. This is easy to understand if we remember that psychiatry was not, to begin with, a study of human nature
in actual situations,

ture of personality, but simply

nor even a theoretical exploration into the strucand solely an attempt to interpret "dis-

eased" modes of behavior in terms familiar to a tradition that was operating with the concepts of normal and abnormal physiological functioning.
It is

the great
strictly

and

lasting merit of

Freud

that he freed psychiatry

from

its

too

medical presuppositions and introduced an interpretative psyall its

chology which, in spite of

figurative

conceptual weaknesses,
its

its

disturbingly

modes

of expression,

and

blindness to numerous and im-

portant aspects of the field of behavior as a whole, remains a substantial

contribution to psychology in general and, by implication, to social psy-

chology in particular. His use of social data was neither more nor

less


612
inadequate than the use

EDWARD
made
of

SAPIR
is

them by psychology
is still

as a whole. It

hardly fair to accuse Freud of a naivete which

vast majority of professional psychologists. It

the rule

among

the

is

not surprising that his

view of social phenomena betrays

at

many

points a readiness to confuse

various specific patterns of behavior, which the culturalists can

show to

be derivative of specific historical backgrounds, with those more fundamental and necessary patterns of behavior which proceed from the nature
of

man and

of his slowly maturing organism.

Nor

is it

surprising that he

shared, not only with the majority of psychologists but even with the very

founders of anthropological science, an interest in primitive

did not address
itself

man

that

to a realistic understanding of

human

relations in

the less sophisticated societies but rather to the schematic task of finding

by the anthropologist such confirmahe could of his theories of individually "archaic" attitudes and mechanisms. If the contemporary anthropologist is scandalized by the violence with which Freud and his followers have torn many of the facts
in the patterns of behavior reported

tion as

of primitive behavior out of their natural cultural setting, he should recall

was the hallmark of the most approved kinds of When all is said and done, and in spite of the enormous documentation of the cultures of primitive groups, how easy is it to get even an inkling, in strictly psychological
that just such violence

thinking about ethnological data not so long ago.

terms, of the tempo, the relative flexibility, the individual variability, the
relative
tic

openness or hiddenness of individual expression, the characterisqualities,

penetrating cultural analyses that

It

which are implied or "carried" by even the most we possess of primitive communities? seems unexpectedly difl&cult to conjure up the image of live people in
emotional

intelligibly live relationships located within areas defined as primitive.

The

personalities

that

inhabit

our

ethnological

monographs

seem

almost

schizoid in their unemotional acceptance of the heavy colors, tapestries,

and furniture of

their ethnological stage. Is

it

any wonder that actors so

vaguely conceived, so absent-mindedly typical of something or other, can

be bludgeoned by a more persistent intelligence than theirs into sawing wood for still remoter stages, say that dread drama of the slain father and the birth of totemism?

At
richer

the present time the advance guard of psychiatric thinking

is

rapidly

discovering the fruitfubiess of the concepts of society and culture for a

and a more

realistic analysis of

personaUty.

The

close relation of

personal habit systems to the general patterning of culture

insight

that very

which has for so long been the special pride of anthropology comes to psychiatry as something essentially new. Supposedly universal feehngs and attitudes, sentiments about parents and children and sex mates, are found to be almost as relative to a culture's set patterns of behavior as fashions in clothes or types of artifacts. At any rate, this formula of the relativity of custom has long been a commonplace in an-

The Contributions of Psychiatry

thropology on purely descriptive grounds and
is

613
invading psychiatry as a

new

basis for the philosophy of behavior.

An

age-old blindness tends to be corrected by opened eyes that are

too confident and undiscriminating, and one wonders whether the special

viewpoint of psychiatry

is

not tending to yield too readily to the enlight-

ened prejudices of anthropology and sociology. The presumptive or "as if" psychological character of a culture is highly determinative, no doubt, of much in the externalized system of attitudes and habits which forms the
visible

"personality" of a given individual, and, until his special social

is

frame of reference
behavior,

clearly established,

analyzed,

and applied to
in a

his

we

are necessarily at a loss to assign

him a place

more

general scheme of
strictly social

human

behavior.

It

does not follow, however, that

determinants, tending, as they do, to give visible form and

meaning, in a cultural sense, to each of the thousands of modalities of

experience which

sum up

the personahty, can define the fundamental struc-

ture of such a personality.

all

K culture and its presumptive psychology were needed to explain what we dimly reach out for and call "individual personahty," we should be put in the position of a man who claimed, for instance, that the feeHng called love could not have started
that
is

its

history until the vocabulary of a specific language suggested reaUties,

values,

and problems hitherto unknown. All of which would be true

in

a sense which matters more to the culturalist than to the closer student

A culture which is constantly being invoked to explain the and the intimacies of individual relations is like an ex post facto legaHzation of damage done. The biological and implied psychological needs of individuals are continuous and primary. If we think, not of culture in the abstract nor of society as a hypothetically integrating concept
of behavior.
necessities

in

human
is

relations, but rather of the actual day-to-day relations of specific

individuals in a network of highly personahzed needs,

culture

we must

see that
it

the inevitable coin of the realm of behavior but that

is

far

from synonymous with those actual systems of meaning, conscious and unconscious, which we caU personaMties, and that the presumptive psychology of a culture as a whole is not equatable with any actual personahzed psychology. Cultural analysis is hardly more than a preliminary

bow
them.

to the

human

scene, giving us to
it

know

that here are people, pre-

sumably
It is

real,

and that

is

here rather than there that

we must observe
and

the privilege of psychiatry to be always looking at individuals

to think of society as merely a convenient term to cover the manifold possibihties of actual

human

relationships. It

is

these actual relationships

and intuitively necessary viewpoint of the psychiatrist is shared, of course, by the man in the street. He cannot be dislodged from it by any amount of social scientific sophistication. It is to be hoped that no psychiatrist will ever surrender this naive and
that matter, not society. This simple

614

EDWARD SAPIR
from an

powerful view of the reality of personality to a system of secondary concepts about people and their relations to each other which flow
analysis of social forms.
social formulations

The danger

of a too ready acquiescence in the

of the anthropologist and the sociologist is by no means an imaginary one. Certain recent attempts, in part brilliant and stimulating, to impose upon the actual psychologies of actual people, in continuous and tangible relations to each other, a generalized psychology based on the real or supposed psychological implications of cultural forms, show clearly what confusions in our thinking are likely to result when
social science turns psychiatric without, in the process, allowing its
historically

own

determined concepts to dissolve into those larger ones which

have meaning for psychology and psychiatry.

terizations,

We

then discover that whole

cultures or societies are paranoid or hysterical or obsessive!

Such characliterary sug-

however

brilliantly presented,

have the value of

gestiveness, not of close personality analysis.

At

best they help us to see

new

facet of the

the individual, in

problem of personality.^ If they do not help us to see however exotic a society, with that quiet sharpness of

gaze which makes the true student of personaUty something other than a
discourser
essentially

on

"interesting" facts about people, the psychiatrist will have

to learn

little

from them beyond the

fact,

which he might, of

course, have suspected all along, that

itself in far

human

motivation has expressed

of transformation than he

ethnic

more varied forms and through far more complex channels had believed possible on the basis of his limited experiences. This in itself is a far from unimportant insight, but it

does not constitute the true basis of a science of psychology, or of a science

of psychiatry, which

may be

defined as that science of

man which

under-

takes to grasp the fundamental, and relatively invariable, structure of the

individual personality with as great a conceptual

economy

as our

still

inadequate psychologies allow.

It is

the obvious duty of psychiatry, once

it

has enriched

its

interpreta-

tive techniques

with the help of the social sciences, to be always returning

to

its

original task of the close scrutiny of the individual personahty.

Not

what the culture

will

consists of or

what are the values

it

seems to point to

be the psychiatrist's concern, but rather how this culture lends itself need of the individual personahty for symbols of expression and communication which can be inteUigently read by one's feUowmen on the social plane, but whose relative depth or shallowness of meanto the ceaseless

ing in the individual's total

economy

of symbols need never be adequately

divined either by himself or by his neighbor.

psychiatrist to uncover just such
satisfied

It should be the aim of the meanings as these. He must be too httle with a purely social view of behavior to accept such statements
is

as that A's reason for joining the orchestra

1

the

same

as B's, or that the

in a given

The

necessity of disentangling

it

from problems of personality value

society.

The Contributions of Psychiatry

motive of either can ever be
pleasure which socialized
strictly

615
defined in terms of a generalized

human

beings derive from listening to music

it.

or participating in the production of

are useful in that they enable people to join hands

Such blanket explanations as these and give each other

an

effective hearing.

illustration of

To the culturalist joining an orchestra is a valuable an important social pattern. To the psychiatrist it is as
Avenue and Forty-second

irrelevant as the interesting biographical fact that this "lover of music"

first

met

his future wife at the corner of Fifth

Street.

What

the psychiatrist can get out of the orchestra-joining pattern

depends altogether on what symbolic work he can discover this behavior to accomplish in the integrated personality systems of A and B. To the
culturist

A's joining the orchestra

is

"like" B's joining the orchestra.

To

the psychiatrist the chances of these

are quite small.
his earher

two events being

in the least similar

is

He

will rather find that

A's joining the orchestra

"like"

tendency to waste an enormous amount of time on trashy novels,

is

while B's apparently similar behavior

more nearly

"like" his slavish

adherence to needlessly exacting table manners. The psychiatrist cares

little

about descriptive

similarities

things, all

manner

of flotsam

and differences, for, in his view of and jetsam of behavior rush into an indi-

vidual vortex of few and necessary meanings.

He

does well to leave the

study of the scheme of society to those

prints
I

who

care for unallocated blue-

of behavior.

have, perhaps, overstressed the fundamental divergence of spirit bestrictly cultural

tween the psychiatric and the

done so because

it

is

highly important that

modes of observation. I have we do not delude ourselves

is

into believing that a lovingly complete analysis of a given culture

ipso

facto a contribution to the science of

human

behavior.

It is,

of course, an

invaluable guide to the potentialities of choice and rejection in the lives

of individuals, and such knowledge should
pectancies.

arm one

against foolish exis

No

psychiatrist can afford to think that love

in all the corners of the globe, yet

made

in exactly

he would be too docile a convert to anthropology if he allowed himself to be persuaded that that fact made any special difference for the primary differentiation of perthe
sonality.

same way

With every individual of

whom

the psychiatrist essays an under-

standing he must of necessity reanalyze the supposedly objective culture

in

which

this individual is said to

play his part.

is

When

he does

this

he

invariably finds that cultural agreement

cal,

hardly more than terminologieffective

and

that, if culture is to

be saddled with psychological meanings that

shall

are

more than

superficial,

we

have to recognize as many

cultures as there are individuals to be "adjusted" to the one culture

is

said to exist "out there"

and

to

which which we are supposed to be able to

direct the telescope of

It

our

intelligent observation.

would appear from all this that the psychiatrist who has become sufficiently aware of social patterning to be granted a hearing by the social

616
scientist

EDWARD SAPIR
has at least as

much

to give as to receive. It

is

true that he cannot

be given the privilege of making a psychological analysis of society and

culture as such.

He

cannot

tell

us what any cultural pattern

is

"all

about"

in psychological terms, for

we cannot

allow

him

to indulge in the time-

honored pursuit of identifying society with a personality, or culture with He can, of course, make these identifications in a metaphorical sense, and it would be harmful to his freedom of expression if he were denied the use of metaphor. In his particular case, however, metaphor is more than normally dangerous. An economist or historian can
actual behavior.
talk of the soul of a people or the structure of a society with very
little

danger of turning anybody's head.

generally too great to

It

is

generally understood that such

phraseology means something but that the speed of verbal communication

is

make
its

it

seem worth while

to try to convert the

convenient metaphor into

chiatrist deals

realistically

relevant terms.

But the psy-

with actual people, not with illustrations of culture or with

It is

the functioning of society.

our duty, therefore, to hold him to the

If he, too, is

very

strictest

account in his use of social terms.

the victim

of slipshod metaphor,

We

we have no protection cannot be blamed if we tend to read out

necessities of verbal

against our

own

creduUty.

of the society

and culture

which the
tion.

reality of their

communication have conjured into a ghostly own an impersonal mandate to behavior and its interpretahis

So far the psychiatrist has had too many superstitions of

into that intricate

own

to

help us materially with the task of translating social and cultural terms
conceivable stuff of

network of personalistic meanings which is the only human experience. In the future, however, we must be constantly turning to him for reminders of what is the true nature of

the social process.

The conceptual

reconciliation of the

life

of society with
in

the hfe of the individual can never

It will

come from an indulgence

metaphor.

come from
They

the ultimate implications of Dr. SuUivan's "interpersonal

relations." Interpersonal relations are not finger exercises in the art of

society.

are real things, deserving of the

most careful and anxious

If

study.

We know

very httle about them as yet.

we could
and

only get a

reasonably clear conception of

clearly than

how

the Uves of

intertwine into
see far

a mutually interpretable complex of experiences,

is

we should

more
irre-

at present the case the

extreme importance and the

vocable necessity of the concept of personality.

We

should also be moving

forward to a

realistic instead of a metaphorical definition of what is meant by culture and society. One suspects that the symbolic role of words has an importance for the solution of our problems that is far greater than we

might be willing to admit. After

all,

if

calls

a "liar," he creates a

reverberating cosmos of potential action and judgment.

And

if

the fatal
is

word can be passed on

complete.

to C, the triangulation of society

and culture

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

(1876-1960)

Values as a Subject of

Natural Science Inquiry {1949)

THIS ESSAY MAINTAINS

part of nature. This

THE PROPOSITION THAT THE STUDY OF VALUES

IS

proper and necessary part of the study of culture, viewed as an existing

is

said not merely as proposal or program, but as a

descriptive fact holding for

much

of actually existing practice in anthro-

pology and the study of culture.

Whenever a

cultural fact has significance or historical reference,

contains a value. Significance must be distinguished from cause

from that which made a cultural phenomenon happen or come to be. Significance must also be distinguished from the end or purpose served; and from organic needs, which in their turn can be resolved either into causes or into ends of culture phenomena. That needs also called drives, press, imperatives, and such exist, and

it

also

that they underlie

and precondition
to

culture,

is

indubitable. It

is

also obvi-

ous that culture cannot be explained or derived from needs except very
partially.

Hunger has

be

satisfied;

but

how

it is

satisfied

by human beings
specific bodily

can never be derived from

their being hungry,

nor from their

construction. Overwhelmingly the

how can be understood

only with refer-

fied

to, present and past; modisomewhat or preconditioned by interaction with the opportunities afforded by natural environment. Moreover, large segments of culture

ence to the remainder of the culture adhered

begin to operate, to
satisfied,

come

into being, only after the primal needs

have had

their tensions

reduced or

alleviated.

have been Such are art, reall

ligion,

science.

Hence

these segments cannot be explained at

from

physiological needs.

From Kroeber, The Nature of Culture (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1952), pp. 136-138, 402-408.
617

618

ALFRED
essential characteristic things about a culture are
its

L.

KROEBER

The

forms and

patterns, the interrelations of these into

an organization, and the way these parts, and the whole, work or function as a group of human beings lives under them. A culture is a way of habitual acting, feeling, and thinking channeled by a society out of an infinite number and variety of potential

ways of living. The particular channeling adopted is heavily preconditioned by antecedent ways and organizations or systems of culture; though it is not predetermined thereby except within certain hmits. Every such system of channehng is accompanied by or contains a system of affects, which vary from place to place of their appearance, and from time to time, but some of which are usually powerful and persistent. Interconnected with these affects is a system of ideas and ideals, explicit and implicit. The combined affect-idea system of a culture at once reflects the habitual ways of action of members of the society, validates these ways to themselves, and to an extent controls and modifies the ways. It is in this affect-laden
idea system that, in a certain sense, the core of a culture
sidered to reside: in
it

is

usually con-

lodge

its

values, norms,

and standards
trait

its

ethos

and

its

eidos.

When we
plex of

speak of the significance of a cultural

or item or com-

traits,

what

is

meant

is

the degree to which the trait

affectively as well as structurally

is meshed, and functionally, into the remainder of

the total system or organization that constitutes the culture.

of integration normally indicates that the trait has relatively

Low

degree

cance for the culture as a functional unit

siderable
cultures.
It

though

it

low signifimay still have con-

significance

as

an index of

historical

relationship with other

foUows that

if

we

refuse to deal with values,

we

are refusing to deal

with what has most meaning in particular cultures as well as in

culture seen as a whole.

human

What we have
traits

left

on elimination of values

is

an arid roster of cultural

or cultural events which

we

are constantly tempted to animate

by

reintroducing the values

we have banned, or else by backhandedly introducing values from our own culture. Or it is possible to attempt to explain the value-rid phenomena of the culture and their changes in terms of some

causality

or possibly by a teleology.
fact, it is

and long has been prevailing practice in the by anthropologists, or of civilizational phases by historians, to formulate the values of these cultures. Thereby the description becomes a physiognomic characterization of the culture. Such a characterization has internal import as regards both its own coherence and consistency, and its external import through implicit or explicit comparia matter of
description of cultures

As

son with other characterized cultures. This type of presentation, with clearcut value designations, comprises
all

the

most successful characterizations

or resynthesized analyses of cultures, both by anthropologists such as

Values as a Subject of Natural Science Inquiry

619

Malinowski, Firth, Evans-Pritchard, and by nonprofessionals like Codrington

langes's Ancient City, Albiruni

on the Melanesians, Doughty in Arabia Deserta, Fustel de Couon India a thousand years ago, and as far back as the Germania of Tacitus.
Reference in
this

matter

is

to values as they exist in

human

societies at

given times and places; to values as they

make

their

appearance in the

history of our species; in short, to values as natural

in nature

much

phenomena occurring
and
abilities

like the characteristic forms, qualities,

is

of

animals as defined in comparative zoology. There

or worse

no reference to any

absolute standard or scale of values, nor to judgments of values as better

which would imply such a

is

standard.
it

An

absolute standard involves two qualities. First,

must be extrasecond, ethno-

natural, or supernatural, to
centricity
solute.

be an a priori absolute.

And

implied in the elevation of any one actual standard as abcontrary,

By

standards or value-systems conceived as parts of

nature are necessarily temporal and spatial, phenomenal, relative,

and
is

comparative. That the

first

condition to the scientific study of culture

the barring of ethnocentrism has been a basic

canon of anthropology for

three-quarters of a century.

The forms
might say
that culture.

only
it

of any culture

must be described
in
its

can be

appraised, one

in terms of their relation to the total pattern-system of

The pattern-system
is

turn needs portrayal in terms of

is

its

total functioning

praisable,

and products. And so far as the pattern-system in terms of comparison with the functions and

ap-

results

achieved by other total cultures with their respective master-patterns. This

the comparison of the total functioning and capacities of, say, an earthworm with the functioning and capacities of other organisms. In a sense, recognition of the functioning and capacities of an organic
is like

species
species.

is

a sort of formulation of the values genetically inherent in that

rate, it can be that, even if biologists usually are not aware and might resent the imputation of any concern with values. Further, the comparison of such values, in order to ascertain their com-

At any

of the fact

mon

elements, their particularities, their apparent total range of variability,

their effectivenesses

biological values

and long-range permanences such a comparison of would still be within the scope of examination of natural
this

phenomena by
It is as

natural science methods.

something analogous to

kind of biology or potential biology

that the study of cultural forms, structures,

and values must be conceived.

Or

rather,

we should

say that such study has actually been made, time and

again, often without explicit awareness of values being involved, and perhaps as often without awareness that the study had natural scientific
significance.
It is

true that values can also be viewed extra-scientifically or super-

naturally.

Mostly they have been so construed, with ascription to

deity.


620
soul, Spirituality, or a self-sufl&cient

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

lying outside the

domain of science over

system of eternal, unmodifiable values nature. But the present paper

it

has no concern with such a view. Contrarily,

all

claims values, along with

other manifestations of culture, as being part of nature and therefore

in the field of science.

few specifications seem desirable. There is always a gap between values and behavior, between ideals and
is,

performance. Even though values always influence the behavior of cultural organisms, that

of men, they never control

it

exclusively.

Hence

the student of culture needs to distinguish, but also to compare, ideal values and achieved behavior, as complementary to each other. The one

alone

falls

short in substantiality, the other in significant motivation and

organization of the data.

Next, values being sociocultural, they inevitably also possess psychological aspects.

of culture

But

as a specific quality of culture

as,

indeed, a product

their reduction to explanations in psychological terms,

and of

these to physiological and biochemical explanations, necessarily loses or

destroys the essential specific properties of the values. These are retainable in full only as long as the

phenomena

of value continue to be inspected

on the

cultural level.

Finally,

since cultural

phenomena

are determined in several

ways

inorganically

by environment,

well as by existent culture

organically, psychologically,

and

socially, as

it is

evident that the causality of cultural phe-

be unusually complex. Moreover, they lend themselves with very great difliculty to the isolation and simplification of experiment. Within culture itself, these considerations seem to apply with even more
is

nomena

likely to

strength to values than to, say, artifact production or subsistence economy.

Other things being equal, a descriptive or

cordingly seem

historical

approach would ac-

more

readily fruitful, in scientific inquiry into values, than

to

any searching for causes even immediate causes. This statement is not be construed as a methodological ban against the study of causality in values, but as an intimation that the causal approach is inherently difficult and that vahd, nonspeculative results bid fair to be thin and slow.

While a formal approach is thus indicated as more fruitful, this need by no means be Hmited to enumerative description, nor to enumeration of sequences. Beyond these, the comparison of organization, functioning, and interrelations of cultural values, and value-systems invite methodical scientific

research.

Is

Western Civilization Disintegrating or Reconstituting?

621

Is

Western Civilization Disintegrating

or Reconstituting? {1951)

IT IS POSSIBLE

TO CONCEIVE CIVILIZATIONS AS BEING EACH CONSTITUTED

to a considerable extent of an assemblage of styles and as being specifically

characterized as to their particularities by these styles.

style, in turn, is
is

self -consistent

way

of behaving or of doing things. It

selected out
selective with
it

from among

alternatively possible
is,

ways of doing.

And

it is

reference to values; that

the things the style does

as intrinsically valuable

them are

felt

by the doers

they

and the way

does

are good, right,

beautiful, pleasing, or desirable in themselves.

This most characteristic part of civilizations, which

culture, is not their only
reality culture,

we may

call

value

component. There

and sometimes mastering and

the useful arts,

concerned with finding out,

what may be called mastering, and directing nature

is

also

directing fellow-men as well. Technology,

ways of successful practical Hving, are the avenues by which reahty culture is expressed. There is a third component, social structure and relations, which in principle might be thought to be independent
of the rest of civihzation or culture, because
it

also occurs well developed

insects.

among

cultureless,

nonsymbolizing animals, especially the social

But since human

tural

societies

always operate with symbols and thus possess

culture, their social structure

and relations are channeled into variable culforms instead of being constant, autonomous, and mainly hereditary. Social culture is therefore, in man, always interwoven with value culture and reality culture. Anthropologists generally see it as such. Sociologists
tend to see the same set of phenomena, namely, social culture, as "society," something abstracted from culture and underlying it as divorced from the remainder of culture, most anthropologists would say.

Within any one civilization, the various styles constituting its value component not only coexist in the same society, region, and period; they also tend toward a certain consistency among themselves. If they were not
interconsistent at first as might well be the case, owing to some of them having been introduced from outside in the frequent hybridizing to which

cultures are subject

the styles

would nevertheless tend

to

become more

consistent as they remained associated. This assumption seems validated

by the simple consideration that consistent and coherent civilizations would on the average work out better and get farther, and presumably survive better, than inconsistent ones dragging on under malfunction and
strain.

622
It is in their reality

ALFRED
ingredients that civilizations chiefly

L.

KROEBER
quality

show the

of accumulativeness which has been noted as one of the properties that

distinguish
tion.

human

cultural

development from subhuman organic evoluwhile not unmitigatedly accumulative, are

Technological

activities,

more accumulative, on
a value
activity,

the whole, than other parts of culture.

By

contrast,

such as a

fine art, a philosophy, or a science, contains a

creative ingredient.
tiousness. It tends

generate and die.

spin

on a

pivot.

it is prevented from repetiand progress, even though it later deAn art or a philosophy moves on; it cannot continue to Those more trivial styles which we call fashions, as in

As long

as

it

retains this,

first

to develop

dress,

change with particular rapidity. Not expressing or achieving

styles;

much

of intrinsic value significance, they lack the full rise

tent

growth curve, of greater

and fall, the consisbut they are even more restless in the

profile of their

movement.

The more

creative activities of civiUzations thus are

imbued with change

any given manners and quaUties all its own. The style successively forms, develops, matures, decays, and either dissolves or atrophies into a dead petrification unless it has previously budded into a new style. The one thing a style does not do is to stand still. Styles are the very incarnation of the dynamic forms taken by the history of civilization. They are the most sensitive expression extant of cultural change ^its most deUcate galvanometer.
activity there corresponds, at

in their very nature.

To each such

time, a style, a bundle of

As
Uttle

to the causes of styles,

we know very
to

little.

Obviously, the causes

of quaUties

At best, we can do more than describe the circumstances amid which a style forms.
and values are going
be
difiicult to find.

From

there on, however, the story of the career of a style has unity. Its

liistory usually possesses

an internal self-consistency proportional to the

itself.

discriminateness of the style

ners,
its

style definite in its

themes,

its

manfull

affects,

can be expected to run a

definite course. Its successive

stages

we

tend to describe in terms like groping, growth of control,

power, slackening, dissolution;

tic,

or, again, as formative, developing, climac-

overripe, decadent.

When we
men

possess enough examples of an

its

art,

and adequate information

can normally be dated

within the style

as to the time sequence of

individual products, a newly discovered speci-

say,

an anonymous or hitherto unassigned example

basis of

within a half-century, and often within a decade

or two. This

is

possible

on the

two

things. First, the specific quafity

of the piece in question, and second, the recognized flow of successive

quaUties within the style. This abiUty of experts to agree in assigning

its

place in the style to any object holds for Mediaeval sculpture, for Renais-

sance and modern painting, for five or six centuries of European music, for Greek vases and poetry, for Chinese painting. Such dating is in a sense
prediction:

we

predict

what the date

will turn

out to be

when

all

the

Is

Western Civilization Disintegrating or Reconstituting?

623

facts are in.

The whole procedure

certainly implies that a style has a one-

way

course.

Equally convincing, as to the compulsive strength of style viewed as a

course,
is

the long-recognized clustering of great

men

in time-limited con-

stellations within

each

civilization or national subcivilization. This clustering

certainly
ness.

is

as conspicuously true for intellectual as for aesthetic creativeindefinitely in a circle. Is

it

Looking for cause, one can here argue

the greatness of geniuses that causes a style to

come

into being, such as

the geniuses need to express themselves? Or does the growth of the evoke successively greater geniuses until the culmination is reached

style

after

which there
tracking
ing,

is

increasingly less left for talented individuals to

do within
of clusterit is

the confines of the style?

Yet as soon

as

we

leave off the vain effort of

down

the original or ultimate cause of the

its

phenomenon

and concentrate on

recurrent generaUzed form or pattern,

an

indubitable fact that genius occurs preponderantly in conjunction with the

developmental courses of outstanding styles within successful civiUzations.

As

for one-wayness, a true style does not travel so

its

and so far and then

direction.

retrace

steps;
is

nor does

it

suddenly go
its

off in a

random new

The tendency
its

very strong for

direction not only to persevere

up

to a

culmination, but to be irreversible.

potentialities to their utmost.
is

At

its

culmination, a style

is

utiUzing

bit of reflection

of irreversibility
is,

really impHcit in

shows that this quality most of our formulations of what style

it

provided only that

flow.

we

let

ourselves conceive

as flowing in time, as

it

normaUy does
It is

because of

this
if it

one-wayness of growth that we often speak of the

history of a style as
plification

were a

life-history. It is also

why

a concrete exem-

is meant by terms like "archaic severity" or "primitive stiffness," or by "increasing freedom of control" or "fuU liberation" why such an illustration often sufi&ces for us to recognize a corresponding stage of development in a whoUy different art. Qualities such as flamboyant, overornate, Churrigueresque. Rococo, which were first defined as characteristic of particular developmental phases of Gothic and Renaissance architecture, can at

taken from one

style,

such as Greek sculpture, of what

times be applied with aptness to analogous phases in literatures, or in

decorative and applied arts, or in music. Again and again

we

find in

diverse arts a similar course beginning with restraint, attaining balanced

mastery, and ending in luxuriance, conscious emotionaUty, extremity, and

disintegration.

Let us

now proceed

to

irreversibihty attaches also to civilizations,

sisting at least partly of

examine how far the special stylistic quality of which we are construing as conless

more or

coherent associations of

styles.

Or

again, conceivably,

whole civihzations, being so much larger phenomena

than

styles,

may

possess special properties leaving

room

if

not for outright

reversibility, at least for divertibility into

new

directions.

624

ALFRED
of "direction"
is

L.

KROEBER

The idea
examining
in time.

fundamental in

this inquiry

because

we

are

civilizations not as static objects

but as limited processes of flow

Greek civihzation probably tends

tion

to serve as our archetype

think generically about civilizations and their direction.

when we The Greek civilizacivilization cul-

was sharply characterized, high

degree, almost
all

in creative power, brief in duration.

To an unusual
three centuries.

the activities of

Greek

minated nearly simultaneously, and

at least overlappingly, within a

is

mere

The course

of this civilization

therefore particularly like

that of a style. It unrolls like the consistent plot of a drama. Consequently

it

suggests strongly the quaUty of irreversibility.

And

irreversibility,

whether

of entropy in physics or of

human

destiny, carries implications of fate

and
^his

doom.
It
is

evident that Spengler's system of declines and extinctions

literally

Untergang means

a "sinking" or "setting"^

was derived

basically

from a contrastive comparison of Greek civihzation with European or Western civilization. And as this latter is still a going concern, his idea of the pessimistic fate and extinction awaiting it was evidently taken over from what had happened to Graeco-Roman civihzation. Spengler assumes as something that does not need to be argued and so does Toynbee that Greek culture and Roman culture were only the two halves of a larger Graeco-Roman civihzation. Spengler calls this larger unit "Classical Antiquity"; and Toynbee calls it simply "Hellenic civihzation." Historians also often group the two together as "Ancient History," as against Mediaeval-Modern History which deals largely with other peoples in another part of Europe in a subsequent period.

next step brings us to the period often called the Dark Ages, the in-

between Ancient and Mediaeval times. This is the period of Goths, Lombards, Saxons, and Franks; of decay of government, arts, letters, and wealth a time when our Western civihzation had not yet begun to crystalhze out but the Imperial Roman days and ways were irretrievably over. It was a time definitely of cultural retreat, of sag and decay, both quantitative and quahtative; not a distinctive civihzation as such, but a chaotic, amorphous interregnum between civiUzations. It was a time of disintegration of the patterns of one civihzation that had ceased functioning a very decomposition of its substance and form. And at the same time there must have been dim sturrings, bhnd gropings, the germinating seeds from which Western civihzation would begin to grow within a few centuries. In short, our Dark Ages are not really a reversal, a retracing, of a current of flow. They mark the cessation of flow of one civihzation, a consequent slack water and hesitation of confused fluctuating drift; and then new the gradual and slowly increasing flow of a new Western civihzation
terval

precisely because the set of

its

current

is

in a
is

new

direction.

Our slump,

the

Dark Ages, accordingly

the falling-apart

and the

Is

Western Civilization Disintegrating or Reconstituting?

625

dissolution of

new

most of an old civilization, because of which dissolution a was able to rise and move in a new direction. With the Graeco-Roman civilization essentially dead in the West around
civilization

A.D. 500, its

still

surviving patterns disintegrated

still

more
still

for

some cen-

turies thereafter. Christianity,

though established, was

too raw, too

and undisciphned, to have evolved many new patterns of its own immediate functioning, in contrast with the way it did evolve them later. The Dark Ages following 500 were dark not only because of ignorance but because people had lost the old patterns and had not yet evolved new ones of any definiteness or moment. This absence of specific Dark Age patterns, due to previous ones having dissolved away and new ones having not yet formed, is the symptom that most marks oflE Ancient from Western civilization. The nexus of patterns and values in Europe after the Dark Age interregnum was, all in all, more different from the nexus existing before, during Graeco-Roman Antiquity, than it was similar. We have here, incidentally, a tentative, empirical definition of what a particular civilization is, what sets one off from another: it is an
nearly
illiterate

creativity outside

excess of distinctive patterns, values, or directions over shared ones.

Some time

after

Charlemagne, around 900 or 950, the new Western

emerged. Compared with the vague
it

civilization at last

stirrings

of ger-

mination in the preceding dark centuries,

several patterns that were to continue in
all,

now emerged

with definite
It

form, however rude and in need of further development.

its

manifested

structure thereafter. First of

the new civilization was unmitigatedly committed to being Christian. There was no room in it for anything else religious; and its Christianity was still unified. Second, the European nationalities had pretty definitely crystallized out by 950, much as they were to endure for a thousand years. There were now Frenchmen, Germans, Italians, Englishmen, Danes, Poles,
instead of tribal agglomerations or the loose Frankish empire of Charle-

magne. These

nationalities

archies. Fortified castles

walls, towns grew up Romanesque-Gothic building got under way, and then the associated still sculpture and glass-staining. A revival of learning had commenced very modest but to bear fruit within a century in the first pulse of Scholastic philosophy. Much in the same way, the writing of vernacular tongues French instead of Latin also emerged in the nine hundreds, proceeded to poetical compositions in the ten hundreds, and culminated in the vernacular Mediaeval literatures French, Provengal, Castilian, and German in the eleven and twelve hundreds. This civilization here arising was Western civilization; but it was Western civilization in its High Mediaeval phase or stage. It came to a conspicuous peak its Christianity and church, its monarchies, its Christian in the mid-thirteenth architecture and sculpture, its Christian philosophy

found political expression in feudalistic monwere rising, and in their lee, or within their own still puny but a beginning toward urban life.


626

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER
of

century: let us say in the decades around 1250. In fact, the

St.

Summa

1265 may be construed as the literal summation, formal and inward, of the High Middle Ages. This High Mediaeval civilization did not wither away. Instead, its patterns loosened and partly dissolved, during the two centuries or so following 1300. But as they broke down they were also reconstituting themselves, and on an ampler scope. This went on until, at some time between 1500 and 1600, the filhng-in of these newly enlarged patterns, the actualization of their new and greater potential, had got under way: and therewith "Modem History" began the history of the second or Modern phase of Western civilization.

Thomas Aquinas

in

What had confronted western Europeans around 1300 or 1325, though

they could not of course see
it

in the perspective of

subsequent history,

was an alternative. They might either adhere to their cherished patterns of High Mediaeval civilization as they had first begun to rough them out four centuries before, and had since filled them in and realized them so successfully. In that case, the saturation of the patterns having been essentially achieved, life under the continuing culture would have become increasingly repetitive, creativity would have been checked, atrophy ensued, and an irrevocable withering of the Mediaeval civilization would have got under way. The other choice was for the Europeans of 1300 to stretch their cultural patterns to accommodate a civilization of larger scope: to stretch them if necessary until some of them burst; to stretch them by stuffing into them a content of far greater knowledge of fact, more experimentation and curiosity, new undertakings, wider horizons, greater wealth,
a higher standard of
living.

Unconsciously, they took the risk of this second course.

stretch their patterns of Hving a civilized
life,

They did
of them,

they ruptured

many

two to three centuries, the set of patterns, the over-all design for living, had been reconstituted, and a new stage of Western civilization, the Modem stage, was
in their place; until, after

they developed more

new ones

entered upon.

High Mediaeval
but narrow base.
it

civilization

was

like its cathedrals of high-reared arches

What

it

lacked seems almost incredible today; at least

seems incredible that Mediaeval

have been complacent about it. As against the contented parochialism of High Mediaevalism, the thirteen, fourteen, and fifteen hundreds brought first a wider knowledge of Asia,
of our civilization of today

could
A

men

our

ancestors and the founders

next of the African peripheries, then of America. Trade followed, industry grew,

wealth expanded.

true civilian architecture

arose in Italy;

Church that Church from which so many of the High Mediaeval pattems had ramified this hold was loosened or broken. The papacy was dragged to Avignon, then split in the Great Schism; Councils were held to heal the breach and
painting blossomed beside sculpture.
of the

The hold

Is

Western Civilization Disintegrating or Reconstituting?

627

unsuccessfully

to

combat the worldliness and profligacy of churchmen,

a worldliness that in turn was building up sentiments of anticlericalism,

and the dissidency of Wycliffe and Hus. Not long afterward, the Reformaaway from the hitherto unified Church nearly half of Europe. All this was certainly a process of disintegration of what had been firmly fitted around the Church in the true Middle Ages, In philosophy, the Scholastic system was similarly disrupted by the skeptical negativism of Occam or dissolved into mysticism by the Germans after which its field lay fallow. Science, after a thousand years' sleep, was slow in reconstructing itself. It finally got into motion toward the end of our period of readjustment with Copernicus' 1543 revolution of astronomy, and with contemporary Italian discoveries in mathematics and medicine. Printing was invented to meet the demands for more knowledge and ideas on the part of a greatly enlarged civilian and urban cHentele of sharpening curiosity. In many ways this era of Reconstitution and Rebirth between the Mediaeval and Modern periods of Western civilization must have felt to the people of Europe much as the twentieth century feels to us. It was a period of strains and unsettlement. The timorous must often have wondered if the world were not coming wholly out of joint. True, such sentiment must also have been felt in some degree in the Dark Ages. The difference is that the Dark Ages were an actual recession: more civilization was abandoned than was originated in them. By contrast, there was more knowledge in 1400 and 1500 than in the High Middle Ages, increased understanding and cultivation, and more urbane hving and wealth and graciousness. Growth, not recession, continued through the interval, even while the reconstruction of set and structure was taking place. That, incidentally, is why no one has yet proposed separating the Middle Ages off from the Modern period as being two wholly distinct civilizations. Their respective sets or directions, though altered and enlarged in the period of Reconstitution, were not wholly torn apart, nor was there loss or destruction of most of what existed in Western Civilization I the Middle Ages during the Reconstitution into Western Civilization II Modern Europe.
tion tore

Our Western period

A.D.

of Reconstitution evidently corresponds fairly to

which was also a time of unsettlement and reorientation, after which Chinese civilization resumed its course on a reorganized and broadened base. Therefore the prevalent usage seems justified of recognizing the two phases as China I and II, or as Ancient China and Mediaeval-Modern China, rather than as two disparate civilizations separated even by their names, Sinic and Far Eastern, as Toynbee proin China,

200-600

poses.

There
quired a

is

new organized

one interesting difference from Europe, however: China acreUgion, Buddhism, in its era of Reconstitution;
Christianity

Europe loosened the hold of

on

its

non-reUgious

activities.

628

ALFRED

L.

KROEBER

the present condition of our civilization comparatwo analogues, it seems that the correspondence is greater with the previous European stage of Reconstitution than with the Graeco-Roman final stage of Dissolution. This is because now, as in 1300-1550, population, wealth, curiosity, knowledge, enterprise, and invention are definitely still in an expanding phase. It appears somewhat likely, accordingly, or at any rate possible, that we are now in the throes
tively against these

When now we match

of a second stage of Reconstitution of our civilization. In that case, Period

II of
it

Western Civihzation would already be mainly

shall

past,

whether we in
lie

so recognize or not; and Period III of Western Civilization would

ahead of us whenever we

have finished reorganizing our former cul-

tural style patterns into a resultant

new

over-all pattern or set.

Civilizations are like life-histories in that they are normally

marked by

a developmental flow, and by the fact that they are not reversible into a
series

of beats

and back-and-forth swings. But

cultural processes
it

organic processes are so distinct in their factors that

and would be unwise

to expect their manifestations to run parallel, except in occasional features.

trace

There does seem to be this difference, that, while a civilization cannot reits past course rearward any more than can an organism, a civilizadirection, with

and start off in an altered or partially expanded and reconstituted value patterns. After all, the organic parallel or analogy must not be pressed too hard. Birth, maturation, senility, and death characterize the individual organisms whose repetitions constitute a species; and what civilizations in their size and comtion can regather or regroup itself

new

positeness evidently

organisms

is

species

and

more nearly resemble than they resemble

properties and qualities.
to

individual

especially the groupings of species into families

or orders of

common

a somewhat new kind

It

The foregoing has turned out

leans
little

be an endeavor in applied anthropology

of applied anthropology, of a long-range variety.

on economics or sociology or psychology or personality on history. Only it asks that history be viewed now and then with maximum of elbow room and freedom of perspective; with emphasis, for the time being, not on the mere events of history, which are as unending as the waves of the sea, but on the qualities of its secular trends; and that these trends be construed, so far as possible, in terms of the style-like patterns which so largely characterize civilization, and in terms of the developmental flow, interactions, and integration of these
study, but a great deal
patterns.

Suggestions for Further Reading

Further selections from the authors of

The Golden Age of American Anthropology:

Franz Boas: Primitive Art, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1927 (available in reprint); Anthropology and Modern Life, New York, Norton, 1928; Race, Language, and Culture (selected papers), New York, Macmillan, 1949.

About Boas: A. L. Kroeber, Ruth Benedict and others: Franz Boas, Memoir of the American Anthropological Association, 1943; Melville J.
Herskovits: Franz Boas; the science of man in the making. New York, Scribner, 1943; Walter Goldschmidt (Ed.), The anthropology of Franz Boas, American Anthropologist, N.S. Vol. 61, No. 4, Part 2. 1959.

Alfred L. Kroeber: The Nature of Culture, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1952; Configuration of Culture Growth, Berkeley, University of California Press, 1944.

Robert H. Lowie: Are We Civilized? New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929; Toward Understanding Germany, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1954; Robert Lowie, Ethnologist, Berkeley, University of California Press, 1959.
Elsie

Press, 1936;

Clews Parsons: Mitla, Town of the Souls, Chicago, University of Chicago Pueblo Indian Religion, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, Clews Parsons (Ed.)

1939.
Elsie
:

American Indian
as Philosopher,

Life,

New

York, Huebsch, 1922.

Paul Radin: Primitive

Man

Dover (paperback), 1957.

Culture

Edward

Sapir:

Selected

Writings

in

Language,

and

Personality,

Berkeley, University of California Press, 1949.

Clark Wissler:

Man and

Culture,

New

York, Crowell, 1923.

Selected reading in anthropology since 1920:

General:

Clyde Kluckhohn, Mirror for Man,

Ralph Linton, The Study of Man,

Robert Redfield, The
Press, 1955.
Little

New York, Whittlesey House, New York, Appleton-Century,

1949.
1936.

Community, Chicago, University of Chicagj)

American Indians

in the twentieth century:

Clyde Kluckhohn and Dorothea Leighton:

The Navaho, Cambridge,

629

Harvard University

Press, 1946.

630

SUGGESTIONS FOR FURTHER READING

Ralph Linton (Ed.): Acculturation
Oliver
in

Seven American Indian Tribes.

Indian,

La Farge (Ed.): The Changing Oklahoma Press, 1942.

Press,

Norman, University of

Ruth Underhill: Red Man's America, Chicago, University of Chicago

1953.

American archaeology:
Paul Martin: Indians before Columbus, Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1947.

Eric

J.

Thompson: Mexico before

Cortez,

New

York, Scribners, 1937.

City,

George C. Vaillant: The Aztecs of Mexico, Garden

Doubleday,

Doran

& Company,

1941.

Culture and personality:

Ruth Benedict: Patterns of Culture, Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934; The Chrysanthemum and the Sword, Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1946.
A.
I.

Hallowell: Culture and Experience, Philadelphia, University of Penn-

sylvania Press, 1955.

Abram Kardiner: The Individual and His Society, University Press, 1939.

New

York, Columbia

Margaret Mead: Coming of Age in Samoa, New York, Morrow, 1928 (available in reprint); Male and Female, New York, Morrow, 1949.

Some modern

ethnographies:

Ruth Bunzel: Chichicastenango, a Guatemalan Village. Publication of the American Ethnological Society, J. J. Augustin, 1952.

Cora

Du

Bois:

The People of Alor, Minneapolis, University of Minnesota

Civilization, Harper, 1958.

Press, 1944.

W. Lloyd Warner: A Black

Anthropologists study American culture:

Robert

S.

and Helen Merrell Lynd: Middletown,

Plainville, U.S.A.,

New

York, Harcourt,

Brace, 1929.

James West,

New

York, Columbia University Press.

series. Vols. 1-5,

W. Lloyd Warner and

others:

Yankee City

New

Haven,

Yale University Press, 1941-47.

^pue^^^eturned_ ^^.^^ :\
*^;;*5f''ff.JlpiS

>^

.SOCIAL SCIENCES ROOM

Date Due^'* *

"

The golden age

of

American ant main

572.97M479qC.2

lELE 032aa Sltl

V.

***'.M.'**